JP2020018592A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: Based on the fact that a determination result by determination means is a specific determination result, a privilege game advantageous to a player is executed by privilege game execution means. Based on the fact that a predetermined setting condition is satisfied, one game state is set by game state setting means out of a plurality of game states including at least a first probability state in which a degree of advantage for the player is a first degree of advantage. Based on the fact that the result is a failure determination result in which the determination result by the determination means is different from the specific determination result in the first game state, setting is made to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage by degree of advantage setting means while the first game state is maintained, until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. Thereby, interest of the player in the game can be increased.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 298

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball in a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the interest by making different game values obtainable.

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player when the lottery is lost because the lottery results cannot be enjoyed unless the lottery result is won. was there.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 performs a game based on a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discrimination condition and a discrimination result of the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, and one of a plurality of game modes including at least a first game state in which a player's advantage becomes a first advantage based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting a game state of the game, and a predetermined specific condition based on a determination result of the determination means being different from the specific determination result in the first game state. Until the establishment of the first gaming state, the degree of advantage can be set to a second advantage degree higher than the first advantage degree while maintaining the first game state.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, wherein the advantage degree setting means comprises: The advantage is set to the second advantage while the identification information for indicating the deviation determination result is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the determining means performs a determination based on satisfaction of a first determining condition, and the first determining means. And a second determination means for performing a determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the condition, wherein the determination by the second determination means is determined by the first determination means. It is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the player.

  In the gaming machine according to a fourth aspect, in the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the advantage degree setting means is configured to determine the second advantage based on the result of the departure discrimination determined by the first determination means. The degree is set.

  A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, further comprising dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means, wherein the advantage degree setting means includes: The length of the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination unit is configured to be variable, and the advantage level setting unit is configured to In one game state, a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means is set in advance until the determination result of the first determination means becomes the deviation determination result. The length of the identification information is set to be equal to or less than the first period, and based on the result of the departure determination by the determination of the first determination means, the dynamic of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means Dynamic display period on display It is configured to be able to be set to a second period longer than the first period, and the dynamic display means indicates a determination result of the second determination means at least in the first game state. Is configured to dynamically display the identification information in a dynamic display period having a length equal to or less than the first period.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the discriminating means for executing the discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and a privilege advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result. A privilege game executing means for executing a game, and setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which a player's advantage becomes a first advantage based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting unit that determines whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied based on that a determination result of the determination unit in the first game state is a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result. And an advantage level setting means capable of setting the advantage level to a second advantage level higher than the first advantage level while maintaining the first game state.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the gaming machine further comprises dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means. The degree setting means sets the degree of advantage while the identification information for indicating the departure determination result is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means to the second degree of advantage.

  Accordingly, it is possible to realize a very novel game property that is advantageous while the identification information for indicating the separation determination result is dynamically displayed, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. This has the effect.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the determining means performs a determination based on the satisfaction of a first determination condition. A second determination unit that performs a determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The determination by the second determination unit is It is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the determination by the first determination means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the determination by the second determination means will be executed.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the third aspect, the advantage degree setting means is configured to perform the determination based on the result of the disengagement determination by the first determination means. Since the second degree of advantage is set, it is possible to realize an extremely novel gameplay in which the degree of advantage is increased when an unfavorable determination result is obtained by the first determining means having a low degree of advantage. effective.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, the gaming machine further comprises dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means. The degree setting means is configured to be capable of changing the length of a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the first determination means, and In the first game state, the setting means is configured to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means until the determination result of the first determination means becomes the deviation determination result. A display period is set to a length equal to or shorter than a predetermined first period, and based on the result of the departure determination by the first determination unit, the determination result of the first determination unit is indicated. Dynamic display of the identification information The dynamic display period can be set to a second period longer than the first period, and the dynamic display means can perform the second determination at least in the first game state. As the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the means, the identification information is dynamically displayed in a dynamic display period shorter than the first period.

  Thus, when a result of the discrimination is determined by the first discriminating unit, the dynamic display period of the second period can be set, and only the discrimination of the second discriminating unit is performed during the second period. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the general winning a prize apparatus. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and it is the schematic diagram which showed the flow which the ball | ball which won in the general winning a prize apparatus flows into an out port. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and it is the schematic diagram which showed the flow which the ball | ball which won in the general winning a prize apparatus flows into a special power operation port. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the V winning device. It is a partial enlarged view of a game board in a 1st embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow in a V winning device when a storage valve is in a storage state in a game per accessory. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and shows a ball flow in a case where a storage valve shifts from a storage state to a release state and a first movable valve is located at a guidance position in a game per accessory. FIG. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and shows a ball flow in a case where a storage valve shifts from a storage state to a release state and a first movable valve is located at a passing position in a game per accessory. FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and (b) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode according to the embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of the big hit ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the first embodiment. FIG. 12C is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of the V rush displayed on 81, and FIG. 12C shows the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12A is displayed. FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram showing a holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12B is displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case of a normal symbol hit in a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case of hitting an accessory during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 13 (c) shows the display screen shown in FIG. 13 (a). FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol in a case where the display screen shown in FIG. 13B is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a V prize per V rush medium character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first embodiment. FIG. 15C is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a loss per V rush medium character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the embodiment, and FIG. 14C shows the display screen shown in FIG. FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol in the case where it is performed, and FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 14B is displayed. . (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case of the big hit ending in the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the first embodiment. 15C is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of adding a timer during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 15C illustrates each of the display modes when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 15A is displayed. FIG. 15D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of symbols, and FIG. 15D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the end of V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display in the first embodiment. FIG. 17C is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the V lash is extended displayed on the device 81, and FIG. 16C shows the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16A is displayed. FIG. 16D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16B is displayed. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the special screen at the time of the big hit ending displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 1st Embodiment, (b) is 3rd in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 17C is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode in the heaven mode displayed on the symbol display device 81. FIG. 17C illustrates holding of each symbol when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 17A is displayed. FIG. 17D is a schematic diagram showing the situation, and FIG. 17D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 17B is displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a chance-per-principle effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the third embodiment in the first embodiment. FIG. 19C is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode in the case of a normal symbol stop during the V rush displayed on the symbol display device 81, and FIG. 18C illustrates a case where the display screen illustrated in FIG. FIG. 18D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol, and FIG. 18D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 18B is displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case of a special figure stop during V rush displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a 1st embodiment. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a lucky time effect during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 19C shows a case where the display screen shown in FIG. FIG. 19D is a schematic diagram showing the hold status of each symbol in FIG. 19D, and FIG. 19D is a schematic diagram showing the hold status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19B is displayed. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of a main control device 110. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a first random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second random number table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure big hit type selection table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various operation scenario tables in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the per-accessory operation scenario table in the first embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first movable valve operation scenario table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a per-drawing operation scenario table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a scenario per ordinary ordinary drawing in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time-saving general-purpose per-scenario scenario in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (A)-(i) is a timing chart showing the flow of a game when a per-figure-per-game is executed in the normal state in the first embodiment. (A)-(i) is a timing chart showing a flow of a game when a per-figure-per-game is executed in the time saving state in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface BD. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation execution process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special power start opening winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a V entrance passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a V-pass process performed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows control processing per accessory performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a winning command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a status command receiving process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating stop-related processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a general-purpose-related process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed a hit related process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit ending processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory hit related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the effect update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a notification command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing an error command process to be performed. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 2nd Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the general winning a prize apparatus. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in a 2nd embodiment, and is the mimetic diagram showing the state where the ball which won the general winning a prize device can flow down to the 2nd special electricity operation port. (A) is a state in which the regular figure long hitting game and the accessory hitting game are repeatedly executed during the time saving state (V rush) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment. FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of FIG. 14B. FIG. 14B is a diagram illustrating a general figure long fluctuation during a time saving state (V rush) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment, and a game per accessory. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a state in which the symbols are executed in an overlapping manner. FIG. 90 (c) shows the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 90 (a) is displayed. FIG. 90D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 90B is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment is shorter than a predetermined period; (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment is longer than a predetermined period, ) Is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (a) is displayed, and (d) shows the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (b). FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol in a case where the symbol is held. (A), (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the case where the end condition of the per-accessory game executed during the regular long hit in the second embodiment is changed. (A), (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the end condition of the per-accessory game executed during the normal figure long fluctuation in the second embodiment is changed. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the general figure hit type selection table in the second embodiment. FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a general-purpose variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various operation scenario tables in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second per-principal operation scenario table in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a per-figure-period operation scenario table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of two scenarios per time-saving general-purpose figure in the second embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of three scenarios per time-saving time drawing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special power start opening winning process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general map related process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general figure fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the per-principal-item related process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start processing per accessory performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production update processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure residual fluctuation suggestion process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general figure related time update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A), (c) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of entering the danger time during V rush displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 3rd Embodiment, (b), (b) FIG. 11D is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a big hit is discarded at the danger time during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a big hit is interrupted at the danger time during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time selection table in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special power starting opening winning process 3 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production update processing 3 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the danger time setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the counter etc. provided in RAM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the small hit random number table in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change execution processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation | change process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change in-execution processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 departure stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st prefetching processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd prefetch processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in a modification, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the general winning a prize apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change stop processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed special figure change start processing 5 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed stop related processing 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of a jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. 145 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an end condition selection screen displayed at 81, and (c) shows a hold status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (a) is displayed. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode after the end condition selection displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 6th Embodiment, (b) is 3rd symbol display in 6th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the V rush start screen displayed on the apparatus 81, (c) shows the holding | maintenance situation of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 146 (b) is displayed. FIG. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption process 6 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special power start opening winning process 6 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the switching process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the end condition setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed end condition related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second modification. It is the front view which showed typically the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in 7th Embodiment. (A), (b) is the fragmentary perspective view which showed typically the structure of the right electric accessory in 7th Embodiment. It is the top view which showed typically the opening / closing lid of the right electric accessory in 7th Embodiment. (A), (b) is the elements on larger scale which showed a part of right area in 7th Embodiment typically. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a probable change state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of shifting from a probability change state displayed on 81 to a latent state. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time when the second special symbol change is not started in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second special symbol change is started in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a RUSH game performed during a latent state displayed on third symbol display device 81 in a seventh embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case where the special figure holding ball is changed during the RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is It is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a special figure reservation ball reaches a specific number during a RUSH game displayed on a third symbol display device 81 in a seventh embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a super RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode suggesting the end of the super RUSH game displayed on device 81. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode which shows the end of the super RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in a 7th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the first random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the small random number 7 table in 7th Embodiment, (d) is 2nd random number 7 in 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the table typically. It is the model which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection table which the ROM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment has. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 7 tables for normal which the ROM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment has. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a seven-step variable table included in a ROM of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the ROM of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the seven tables for latents which have. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hitting type selection 7 table held in the ROM of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a general-purpose variation pattern selection table included in a ROM. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing 7 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 7 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed stop related processing 7 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the preparation state setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure discard setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed variable display setting processing 7 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ceiling effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 7 for special figure 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process during the probable change performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process 7 during RUSH performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the front view which showed typically the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the V winning device in a modification of the seventh embodiment. (A)-(c) is a partial sectional view of a V winning device in a modification of the seventh embodiment. (A), (b) is a partial sectional view of the V winning device in a modification of the seventh embodiment. (A), (b) is a partial sectional view of the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the second modified example of the seventh embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in the modification of a 7th embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. FIGS. 21A and 21B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode in a latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a modification of the seventh embodiment. It is the front view which showed typically the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in 8th Embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically the composition of ROM of the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically contents of small hit random number table 202ga performed by main control device 110 in an 8th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 8 table which ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment has. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 8 tables for probable change which ROM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment has. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 8 tables for latents which ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment has. It is the model which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection 8 table which ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment has. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically the composition of RAM of the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing 8 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 deviation change processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 departure stop processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 9th Embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 9th Embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a latent state displayed on 3rd symbol display device 81 in a 9th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 9 table which ROM of the main control apparatus in 9th Embodiment has. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection 9 table held in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main control device in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal figure variation pattern selection 9 table included in a ROM. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of an icon display number selection table included in a ROM of the audio lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is an audio lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a continuous effect selection table included in a ROM of FIG. It is a flow chart which showed winning a prize command processing 9 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed big hit end processing 9 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the preparation state setting process 9 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the RUSH production effect setting processing 9 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed big hit related processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a modification of a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 10th Embodiment, (b) is 10th Embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when reach is established at the normal time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the fourth embodiment in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a normal symbol fluctuation displayed on a three-symbol display device 81; (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode which is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the 10th embodiment at the time of a normal time, and (b) is a figure which shows the 10th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a case where a chance zone in which a second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed at a normal time displayed on the three symbol display device 81 is set. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a third symbol is restarted during a special fluctuation effect displayed on a third symbol display device 81 in a tenth embodiment. The figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of restarting the 3rd symbol in the special fluctuation effect performed in the state which has not acquired the special figure 2 hold | maintenance displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 10th Embodiment. It is. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when the first special symbol change is executed in a state where the probable change state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the tenth embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second special symbol change is executed in a state where the probable change state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the tenth embodiment. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram in the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display mode displayed in the first half period in the ending period of a probability change big hit game, and (c) is the latter half in the ending period of a normal big hit game in 10th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display mode displayed in a period, and (d) shows an example of the display mode displayed in a latter half period among the ending periods of a probability change big hit game in 10th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is a timing chart showing a game flow in the case of a non-reach variation pattern in the tenth embodiment, and (b) shows a game flow in the case of a reach variation pattern in the tenth embodiment. It is a timing chart. (A)-(c) is the timing chart which showed the flow of the effect performed during the ending period of the big hit game in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol jackpot random number 10 table included in the ROM of the main control device according to the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main control device according to the tenth embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the random number 10 table which ROM has. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a jackpot type selection ten table in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure one big hit ten table in the tenth embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 big hit 10 table in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection ten table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal ten table in the tenth embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram, and (c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically contents of 10 tables for probability change and time saving in a 10th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table which ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment has. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the effect change selection table during the probability change which ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment has. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows update processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the through gate passage processing 10 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot end processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 10 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed winning a prize command processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed general map related processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed big hit related processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed ending processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed variable display setting processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed special figure 1 production mode setting processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed special figure 2 production mode setting processing 10 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment. (A) to (d) are schematic diagrams schematically showing a procedure for performing setting change in the eleventh embodiment, and (e) to (g) perform setting confirmation in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a procedure for performing the above. It is a timing chart which showed transition of the production mode in the case where the setting change state was ended and the normal game was enabled in the eleventh embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number 11 table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small random number 11 table in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 11 table in 11th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the eleventh latent use table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM clearing table in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in 11th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in an 11th embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the setting suggestion effect selection table in 11th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 11 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change start processing 11 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judgment processing 11 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 deviation change processing 11 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing 11 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows game state update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 11 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 departure stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing 11 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing 11 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 deviation change processing 11 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change pattern selection processing 11 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing 11 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing 11 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows set value control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 11 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 11 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the status command receiving process 11 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 11 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production mode setting processing 11 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in an eleventh embodiment. (A) In the twelfth embodiment, a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a continuous departure effect displayed on the third symbol display device when a lottery of a first special symbol is lost during a latent state. (B) is displayed on the third symbol display device in the twelfth embodiment when a continuous departure effect is executed and the departure cannot be continued until a chance zone is set. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode. In the twelfth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where the lottery of the first special symbol is lost three consecutive times during the latent state. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number 12 table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small random number 12 table in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 12 table in 12th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of 12 tables for latents in 12th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 departure stop process 12 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production mode setting processing 12 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a twelfth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 production setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 12th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an out-of-stage effect setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a twelfth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 13th Embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 13th Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the internal structure of the lottery apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where a plurality of game balls enter the inside of the lottery device in a state where both the ball discharge door and the ball stopper are closed in the thirteenth embodiment. Yes, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the ball discharge door is opened in a state where the game ball is parked inside the lottery device in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a top view of the distribution rotation body in a 13th embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the time-dependent change of the state of each part at the time of the small win in 13th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of a temporal change in the arrangement (rotation position) of the distribution rotator immediately after the end of the chance zone in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a timing zone in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a timing chart showing transition of the game after the end. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a charge time effect displayed on a third symbol display device when a lottery of a second special symbol is lost in a time-saving state in the thirteenth embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where a game ball enters the second entrance and the number of reserved balls increases in the thirteenth embodiment during the execution of the charge time effect. . (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small random number 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 21C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the big hit type selection 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the direct hit table in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for V hitting in 13th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 13 tables for time saving in 13th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 13 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 13 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting start process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 13 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 13 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 13 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage detection processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 13 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production mode setting processing 13 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 13th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 14th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a 14th embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit in a 14th embodiment. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where an upright part moved to a projection position in a 14th embodiment. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where the tilting role object moved to the overhang position in the fourteenth embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 during execution of a winning rate suggestion effect in 14th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a winning rate at which the setting 6 is determined in the winning rate suggestion effect in the fourteenth embodiment is notified, and (b) is a diagram in the fourteenth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the fluctuation | variation type of a high setting confirmation super reach is performed. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number 14 table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the big hit type selection 14 table in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special hit table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special hit table in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection 14 table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the left-handed state table in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the distribution of the winning random number in 14th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for the right-handed state in 14th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving provision table in 14th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in a 14th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a winning rate suggestion effect lottery table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a special symbol low probability state and a probable change state in the fourteenth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the jackpot probability and the winning rate within 100 games for every set value. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the effect type selection table in 14th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a power return operation table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the accessory operation setting table in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 14 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 14 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows set value control processing 14 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 14 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 14 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing 14 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing 14 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows origin return processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 14 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory control process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows initial operation processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing 14 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows status command receiving processing 14 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal state setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit related processing 14 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 14 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production mode setting processing 14 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 15th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number 15 table in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a random number range setting table in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows start winning processing 15 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 15th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows set value control processing 15 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 15th embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device when a reach symbol selection effect is executed in a modification of the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the fourteenth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device when the reach symbol prefetch effect is performed in the modification of FIG.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. FIGS. 6 to 9 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of a general winning award device 640 provided in a lower area, and FIGS. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the pachinko machine 65, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably mounted from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. Note that the inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 21) that fires a ball on the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a. A firing rail (not shown) or the like that guides the user is provided. The contents of the many entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to incline downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 21) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general insert. The ball entrance 63, the special figure entrances 64, 640, the variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and the peripheral portion thereof is formed inside. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general ball entrance 63, the special figure entrance 64, the general winning device 640, the V winning device 65, the variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  The first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is disposed so as to be covered on the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) of the game board 13 formed of a transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured such that the shot ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

  The first symbol display device 37 includes a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when a ball enters the special figure entrance 64 (wins). That is, the first symbol display device 37 is a display means for displaying a lottery result of a lottery (special figure lottery) executed when a ball enters the special figure entrance 64. In the present embodiment, since the type of the special symbol is one type of the pachinko machine 10, the result of one type of special symbol lottery is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 having two types (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), the first symbol display device 37 may be provided with a display area corresponding to the type of each special symbol.

  In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses an LED to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a gaming state (for example, a normal state, a time reduction state, or the like) by a lighting state, or a special symbol (first symbol) fluctuates. (A dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols for indicating a lottery result) is indicated by a lighting state, or the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a jackpot which is advantageous to the player or a disadvantaged symbol. A lighting state indicates whether the symbol corresponds to a jackpot or a missing symbol, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds during a jackpot and an error are displayed on a seven-segment display device. In addition, it is configured to be able to indicate the state in which the change of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted) by the lighting state. The plurality of LEDs are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated by a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emission colors. In the present embodiment, the various game states are notified by the combination of the emission colors of the light emitting means (seven-segment display device). However, any configuration may be used as long as the player can identify the various game states. For example, various game states may be notified by changing the length (blinking mode) of a period during which the light emitting unit is turned on and a period during which the light emitting unit is turned off.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery of a special symbol) is performed when a ball is entered (winning) into the special figure entrance 64. Then, in the lottery of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery). Here, based on the determination that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game that is in a privilege gaming state advantageous to the player is executed.

  When the jackpot game is executed, the special winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 is in an open state in which a ball can be easily won, and a large number of winning balls are short-lived by causing the specific winning opening 650a to win a ball. The game which can be acquired by is executed. This jackpot game is executed (in a case) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and an opening period (specific winning port of the variable winning device 650) for a predetermined time (for example, one second). (A period during which a closed state in which a ball is difficult to enter the ball 650a), a round game period during which an open state is set, and a predetermined period from the end of one round game period to the start of the next round game. A period (for example, 0.5 seconds), an interval period in which the closed state is set, and an ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. A big jackpot game period is set.

  In this way, after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the opening period is set, so that the ball can be played at the timing when the specific winning opening 650a is opened during the jackpot game. Can be prepared for firing in any direction, so that the jackpot game can be smoothly performed. In addition, since the opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  Also, by setting the ending period as the last period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a new special symbol lottery immediately after the end of the last round game, Since preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction for the game to be executed, the switching of the game can be performed smoothly.

  The length of each jackpot game (opening period, round period, ending period) executed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery is determined by the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning and the type of jackpot won. May be set in accordance with, for example, as a game content executed after the end of the jackpot game, if the game content that is different from the game content at the time of the jackpot winning is won, a big hit The ending period of the big hit game (for example, 10 seconds) is set to be longer than the ending period of another big hit game (for example, 2 seconds), and the big hit game is ended for the player during the ending period. It is preferable that an effect for guiding in advance the game content to be executed later is executable. Thereby, an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  On the other hand, when the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content executed after the end of the jackpot game are won, the ending period (for example, 1 second) of the jackpot is changed to the other jackpot game. It is preferable to set so as to be shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds). This allows the player to play the game efficiently.

  In addition, without using a configuration to actually determine the game content at the time of the jackpot winning and the game content executed after the jackpot game, for example, based on the type of the jackpot won and the game state at the time of the jackpot winning Then, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game may be defined in advance, and the ending period of each jackpot game may be set in advance in accordance with the specified contents.

  Although a specific description will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game to be executed by a player when the gaming state is a normal state (a special symbol low probability state, a normal symbol low probability state) In the time reduction state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), the game to be executed by the player is configured to be different from that in the time reduction state, compared to the game to be executed in the normal state. Is configured to be more advantageous to the player (the jackpot game is more easily executed).

  In other words, the jackpot game is won in the state where the normal state is set and the ending period of the jackpot game in which the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning is already set to the time-saving state. The jackpot game is defined in such a manner that it is longer than the ending period of the jackpot game in which the time-saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the state where the jackpot game is won. You should leave it. Thus, the ending period suitable for the player can be set only by executing the jackpot game in accordance with the predetermined content.

  It should be noted that the period other than the ending period may be defined in advance in accordance with the type of the winning jackpot or the game state at the time of the winning, and the opening period and the interval period may be different. Further, even if the type of the winning jackpot is the same, the length of each period during the jackpot game may be made different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. This allows the player to be interested not only in the jackpot type in which the jackpot was won (special symbol lottery result), but also in the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

  Further, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the type of the jackpot is also determined. As will be described in detail later, as the jackpot type to be determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is four, and a time reduction state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is given after the end of the jackpot game. As a 4R time-saving jackpot, a jackpot type in which the duration of the time-saving state is varied (after the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed four times without winning the jackpot) There are provided a number of times (4 times) and a time-saving big hit (15 times of time saving) in which the time-saving state continues until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 15 times without winning the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, if a special symbol lottery is not won in a jackpot, it is determined to be out of place, and a bonus is not given to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In some of the cases where it is determined that the hit is not a jackpot as a result of the lottery, the privilege given to the player is smaller than the jackpot described above (for example, the privilege of opening the V winning device 65 only for one round) is small. The winning game may be configured to be executed. The first symbol display device 37 not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot (whether or not it is a small jackpot) as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type if the jackpot is a jackpot. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, one of the “normal state” and the “time reduction state” is set as the gaming state. The normal state is a gaming state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a low probability (1/100) and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a low probability (1/1000) (hereinafter, a special symbol low probability state, In the time saving state, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is set to a low probability (1/100) and the hit probability of a normal symbol is set to a high probability (300/1000). It is a gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as a special symbol low probability state, a normal symbol high probability state).

  Here, “4R jackpot (4 time savings)” refers to a jackpot game with a maximum round number of 4 rounds (a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 4 rounds), followed by a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol). , A normal symbol high probability state), and a time saving state in which the number of time savings is four after the jackpot game is set.

  The “4R jackpot (15 time savings)” means a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 4 (a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 4 rounds), followed by a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, ordinary symbol) (High-probability state), a time-saving state in which the number of time savings is 15 after the jackpot game is completed is set.

  In this embodiment, when a predetermined end condition (time reduction end condition) is satisfied after the time reduction state is set, the gaming state is changed from the time reduction state to the normal state. The number of times indicates a time saving end condition. In other words, the time saving frequency of four times means that the special symbol lottery is executed four times (the fourth special symbol change is stopped and displayed) without winning the jackpot after the time saving state is set. Holds, and the time reduction number of times is 15 times when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 15 times (the 15th special symbol change is stopped and displayed) without winning the jackpot after the time reduction state is set. It is stipulated that the termination condition is satisfied.

  In other words, "4R jackpot (4 time reductions)" is a type of jackpot in which the time saving end condition that is more easily established is defined than "4R jackpot (4 time reductions)" than "4R jackpot (15 time reductions)". )), The "4R jackpot (15 time savings)" is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is easy to continue, and a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, a condition relating to the number of times of the special symbol lottery in the time reduction state (the number of times reduction) is defined as the time reduction termination condition for terminating the time reduction state. For example, a time-saving termination condition that is satisfied when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the big hit and the number of times of the specific lottery result (specific loss) reaches a predetermined number (for example, three times). Also, a time saving end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined time period (for example, 100 seconds) has elapsed since the time saving state was set, or a specific ball entry port (for example, a general entry port) during the time saving state An end condition that is satisfied when the number of balls entered in 63a) reaches a predetermined number (for example, five) may be set.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. At the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a plurality of left general entrances 63a are provided in which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a liquid crystal display that performs a variable display of a third symbol while synchronizing with a variable display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 (start winning). (Hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”), and the normal symbol (the second symbol) is variably displayed with the passage of the ball to the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display having a size of 15 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 21). One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols). These third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (dynamically). Mark). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21) is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67. The variable display for alternately lighting for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the general winning award device 640 is operated for a predetermined time. It is configured such that a hit game (game for a normal drawing) that is only activated (open state) is executed.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is configured to be always constant (3 seconds) irrespective of the result of the general symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol probability state (low probability state, high probability state). . With such a configuration, for example, in order to make it difficult to execute a game per ordinary symbol during the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (during the ordinary state), the time required for the variation display of the ordinary symbol (the ordinary symbol variation time) is reduced. In the pachinko machine 10 configured to be longer in the normal state than in the time-saving state, the normal game (low-probability state of the normal symbol) is changed from the normal state (low-probability state of the normal symbol) in which the hit game of the normal symbol is hardly executed. When the gaming state shifts to a time-saving state in which a winning game is easily executed (a normal symbol high probability state), a long-term ordinary symbol change executed during the normal state (a disadvantage to the player compared to the time-saving state). The transition to the time-saving state during the execution of the game (the usual game per game), and the period during which the normal symbol lottery is not executed during the time-saving state is set for a long time even though the time-saving state is set Curb Door can be.

  In the present embodiment, the game content (opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a) of the game to be executed per ordinary figure is varied between the normal state and the time reduction state without changing the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol. ing. More specifically, the game per day drawing performed during the time reduction state is more advantageous for the player than the game per day drawing performed during the normal state, that is, the ball is activated by the special power. The mouth 643 is configured to be easily won. Specifically, when the normal state is set, after the opening period of 4.1 seconds (the closing period of the electric accessory 640a), the opening game period of 0.1 second is set, and the per-figure game ( In the case where the time saving state is set, a three-second opening period is set after the opening period of 0.1 second (the closing period of the electric accessory 640a). A winning game (short-time general-purpose per-game) is executed.

  As described above, by executing the per-figure game in which the period during which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state is changed in accordance with the probability state of the ordinary symbol, the time is shorter than in the ordinary state (the ordinary symbol low-probability state). In the state (normal symbol high probability state), it is possible to make it easier for a ball to be won in the general electric winning device 640 during a game per ordinary figure.

  Further, although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 during the game per ordinary drawing in the normal state and the time saving state during the normal game and the time saving state enters the special power operating port 643. It is configured to be different. Specifically, a ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 during the game per hour shortened general figure is better than a ball that has won the general prize winning device 640 during the normal normal figure winning game executed during the normal state, It is configured to make it easy to enter the special power operation port 643. With this configuration, when the normal state is set, it is difficult for the ball to win the general winning award device 640, and even if the ball wins the general winning award device 640, the special power operating port 643 When the time saving state is set, it is easy to make the ball win the general winning award device 640, and when the ball wins the general winning award device 640, the ball is moved to the special power operation port 643. This makes it easy to enter the ball.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of processes until the fired ball enters the special power operating port 643, a state in which the ball is allowed to enter the special power operating port 643 and a state in which the ball is restricted are set. Since it is variable according to the game state to be played, the ease of entry of the ball into the special power operation port 643 can be reliably changed according to the set game state.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, the gaming method that is advantageous to the player is the same in both the gaming state in which the normal state is set and the gaming state in which the time saving state is set ( (Left-handed game). In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, even in the normal state, a normal symbol lottery opportunity is established (a ball passes to the through gate 67), and the normal symbol lottery is executed. Then, as a result of the ordinary symbol lottery, if a win is won, since the electric accessory 640a provided in the game area in which the ball fired by the left-handed game can be reached is controlled to be opened, Also, there is a risk that the ball may win the general-purpose winning device 640 during the execution of the normal per-figure game in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the general-purpose winning device 640.

  In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows the winning prize ball to pass through the special power operation port 643 even if the ball wins the general prize winning device 640 during the game per game performed during the normal state. It is configured to make it difficult to enter the ball. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which a game is executed by the same game method in the normal state (the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) and the time reduction state (the high probability state of the ordinary symbol), Even if a ball enters the general winning award device 640 during the normal state, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the special power operation port 643.

  In this embodiment, the same variation time (3 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol in the normal state (low probability state of the ordinary symbol) and the time reduction state (high probability state of the ordinary symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game state is a normal symbol in a low probability state (normal state) and a normal symbol is in a high probability state (time saving state). May be configured such that the fluctuation time of the symbol is generally shorter in the high probability state (time saving state). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (in the ordinary figure high probability), other methods such as increasing the opening probability and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit are used to increase the winning probability of the ordinary symbol. When the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set to a state in which the ball easily enters the general winning award device 640 than the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set regardless of the gaming state. It may be constant. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter than the normal state during the normal figure high accuracy, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left area (left area) of the variable display unit 80, and flows down the left area of the game board 13 among the balls fired on the game board. Most of the spheres (about 100%) pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second symbol, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a winning, a symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery is displayed. If the result is out of order, a symbol “x” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is retained up to a total of one time, and the number of retained balls is displayed on the second symbol retaining lamp 84 described above. The second symbol holding lamp 84 is provided for one of the maximum number of holdings, and is arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display 37a, 37b and the third symbol. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be set to two or more (for example, eight). Further, the number of the normal symbol start-up ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the position where the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled is not limited to the left side of the variable display unit 80, but may be the right side of the variable display unit 80, for example. In the present embodiment, most of the balls flowing down the left area of the game board 13 by the left-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and only some balls It may be configured to pass through the through gate 67.

  Next, a description will be given of a configuration of the general winning award device 640 which is opened when a normal symbol lottery is won. As shown in FIG. 2, the general winning award device 640 is provided below the variable display device unit 80, and has an open state in which a ball can be awarded therein and a closed state that is harder to win than the open state. An electric accessory 640a that can be changed to a state is electrically operated at a position where a ball flowing down a left area (an area on the left side in front view of the variable display device unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13 reaches. An accessory 640a is provided. In the present embodiment, the ball fired by the left-handed game reaches the general winning prize device 640 at a ratio of one ball of about three balls (to the general winning prize device 640 if the electric accessory 640a is in the open state). (A winning position is reached).

  The electric accessory 640a is normally maintained in a closed state, and when the winning is won in a normal symbol lottery, the electric accessory 640a is variably operated to open for a predetermined period in a predetermined variable pattern. The game per day is executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, a state in which a ball is easily won in the general winning prize device 640 can be provided to the player by executing a normal symbol winning game by winning a normal symbol lottery.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by continuously executing the left-handed game, it is possible to establish a lottery opportunity of a normal symbol (allow a ball to pass to the through gate 67) and to execute a normal symbol. Is configured to be able to win a ball in the general winning award device 640 which is opened when a win is made in the lottery. Furthermore, it is configured such that a special symbol lottery opportunity can be established by the left-handed game. In addition, a variable prize device 650 that is variably operated by a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery is also provided at a position where a ball fired by a left hit game can win.

  With this configuration, the player can always play the same game method (left-handed game) irrespective of the game state. The game can be smoothly performed without giving.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 3 to FIG. 5, the configuration of the general winning a prize device 640 and the flow of the sphere winning in the general winning prize device 640 will be described in detail. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal configuration of the general winning a prize device 640, and FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a flow in which a ball that has won inside the general prize winning device 640 flows into the out port 644. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing a flow in which a ball that has won the general winning award device 640 enters the special power operation port 643.

  In the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol lottery is executed in response to the ball passing through the through gate 67, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the electric accessory 640a is opened in a predetermined variable pattern. A game per day is executed. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the open state in the game per ordinary drawing, the ball is brought into a state in which the ball can enter the ordinary electric winning device 640.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a second movable valve 642 is provided in the general winning award device 640. The second movable valve 642 is a second flow path that connects the ball that has flowed into the general winning award device 640 and has flowed down the first flow path 641a to the special power operation port 643 upon execution of the game per game. It is configured to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern between a first state that can be guided to the 641 b and a second state that can be guided to the third flow path 641 c communicating with the out port 644. The ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 is detected by the ball detection sensor 640 s, and the number of prize winning balls to the general prize winning device 640 in one game per general figure can be measured. Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the number of balls that have won the general winning a prize device 640 in one game per general figure reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the time is determined. Is configured to end the game per day. In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a prize ball (four) is paid out when a ball enters the special power operation port 643, and a prize ball is not paid out when the ball enters the out port 644. ing.

  In this general winning a prize device 640, a cover body is formed of an acrylic resin having transparency so that a player can visually recognize the ball flow in the general prize winning device 640, and the cover body is attached to the game board 13. ing. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the flow of the ball in the general winning a prize device 640, so that the player can enjoy the behavior of the ball that has won the general prize winning device 640.

  The electric accessory 640a provided in the general winning award device 640 is provided with the upper end side of the second partition 640k2 serving as a base for rotation, and a closed state in which a ball is unlikely to win the general winning award device 640 (FIG. 3) and an open state (see FIG. 4) in which the ball is more likely to win the general winning award device 640 than in the closed state (see FIG. 4). As shown in FIG. 3, the electric accessory 640 a in the closed state is configured to be stored in the general winning award device 640, and more specifically, on the left side of the vertical line of the second partition 640 k 2 ( The distal end of the first partition 640k1 is configured to protrude to the left (from the viewpoint of FIG. 3), and the closed motorized accessory 640a is positioned below the distal end of the first partition 640k1. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to make it hard for the closed electric powered object 640a to come into contact with the ball fired by the left-handed game. it can.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the ball won in the general winning award device 640 wins in the special power operating port 643 according to the game state set at the time of executing the game per ordinary figure. The probability of winning (ease of winning) is configured to be different. Specifically, the period from when the per-figure-per-game is executed to when the electric accessory 640a is controlled to be opened in a predetermined release pattern (opening period per per-figure) is varied, so that the execution is performed during the normal state. The ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 in the game of the per-figure per game is placed in the special power operation port 643 more than the ball that has won in the general-prize prize-winning apparatus 640 in the per-figure per game performed during the time saving state. It is configured to make it difficult to win.

  With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in which the game is played in the same game method (left-handed game) in both the normal state and the time saving state, the ball is moved to the special power operation port 643 during the normal state. Winning can be suppressed. Further, in the present embodiment, the per-figure per game executed during the normal state is more difficult for the ball to enter into the per-prize winning apparatus 640 than the per-figure perforation game executed during the time saving state. Is configured to be executed. Also according to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from winning in the special power operation port 643 during the normal state. In other words, in the present embodiment, in addition to measures to make it harder for a ball to enter the general winning award device 640 during the normal state than during the time saving state, when a ball wins within the ordinary power winning device 640 during the normal state. Has a countermeasure to make it harder for a ball to enter the special power operating port 643 than when a ball is entered in the general winning award device 640 during the time saving state. As described above, by providing the configuration for suppressing the winning of the ball into the special power operation port 643 in the normal state in a plurality of stages, the configuration can be more reliably suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a description will be given of a ball flow when a ball wins in the general electric winning device 640 in a general game per game executed when the normal state is set. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 in a general game per game in a normal state. In the present embodiment, in order to avoid giving the player the trouble of changing the game method, the game is configured to be always executable in the left-handed game. Therefore, even during the normal state, which is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, a lottery opportunity of the ordinary symbol is established (the ball passes to the through gate 67), and when the game per ordinary symbol is executed, the general winning a prize device. There was a risk that the ball would win within 640.

  That is, in the normal state (the low probability state of the ordinary symbol), a ball is awarded in the general electricity winning device 640 as compared with the time reduction state in which the ball can easily be awarded in the ordinary winning device (the high probability state of the ordinary symbol). Although the game state is difficult to play, in the present embodiment, since the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state and the time saving state, although the probability is low, the general electric winning device 640 during the normal state. There was a possibility that the ball would win.

  As described above, the special power prize operation port 643 which is a trigger for executing a game (game per character) for opening the V prize apparatus 65 is provided in the general winning award apparatus 640, and the ball is in a normal state. If the player hits the special power operation port 643 and the game per hit is executed, there is a problem that an excessively advantageous game is provided to a player who is playing a game in a normal state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the ball that has won the general power winning device 640 during the normal state to the special power operation port 643 and the ball that has won the general power winning device 640 during the time saving state are the special It is configured such that the ratio of entering the working port 643 is different from that of the ball. Specifically, when the per-figure per game is executed in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is opened after the per-figure per game is started, as compared with the case where the per-figure per game is executed in the time-saving state. (The first open state) is set long, and the second movable valve 642 that moves based on the start of the per-figure game causes the ball that has won the second state (the normal-prize winning device 640) to move out. The configuration is such that the ball can enter the general winning award device 640 only at the timing of maintaining the state in which the ball can be guided to the mouth 644).

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 4, when the ball wins the general winning award device 640 during the general game executed during the normal state, the first ball with the ball flowing down period of about 0.5 seconds is designed. The sphere flows down the flow path 641a, is guided to the third flow path 641c by the second movable valve 642 located in the second state, and enters the out port 644 (to reach the second movable valve 642). (The period from when the ball reaches the out port 644 is designed to be about 0.3 seconds.) With such a configuration, even if a ball wins in the normal electric winning device 640 during the normal state, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the special power operating port 643, so that the game in the normal state Can be suppressed from providing an excessively advantageous game to the player playing the game.

  In addition, in order to prevent the ball from entering the special power operation port 643 during the normal state, the ball is prevented from winning in the general electricity prize device 640 by the per-figure game executed during the normal state. Since there is no need to use a special configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 can be increased.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in the game-per-game executed during the normal state, the timing of changing the second movable valve 642 to the second state (at the start of the game-per-game) is determined by the electric accessory. The timing at which the 640a is in the open state (4.1 seconds after the start of the per-chart game), for example, the per-chart game is started in a state where the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state. However, the configuration is such that the sphere does not reach the second movable valve 642 while the second movable valve 642 is variably operating. With such a configuration, the second movable valve 642 during the variable operation comes into contact with the ball that has won the general winning prize device 640, and the ball may be clogged in the general winning prize device 640. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the second movable valve 642 breaks down.

  In the present embodiment, when a ball enters the special power operation port 643 provided in the general winning award device 640, four balls are paid out as prize balls and the ball enters the out port 644. The configuration is such that when a ball is hit, a prize ball is not paid out. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A larger number of prize balls (for example, 10) may be paid out than in the case where the prize balls are paid out. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the privilege given to the player based on the lottery of the ordinary symbols according to the gaming state. Specifically, in the state where the normal state is set, more prize balls are given as a privilege to the player than in the time reduction state, and in the state where the time reduction state is set, to the player, In addition to the prize balls that are less than in the normal state, it is possible to provide a bonus game that is not (or hardly) given in the normal state as a bonus. Therefore, regardless of which game state is set, the player can be interested in the result of the normal symbol lottery.

  Further, the same number of prize balls (four) may be paid out when a ball enters the special power operation port 643 and when a ball enters the out port 644. In this case, It is preferable to make it difficult to recognize whether the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 has entered the special power operation port 643 or the out port 644. This makes it impossible for the player to know which ball entry port (special power operation port 643, out port 644) the ball has entered based on the number of paid out prize balls. After causing the device 640 to win a ball, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it seem as if it is determined by a lottery whether or not a winning game (game per role) to open the V winning device 65 is performed. It is possible to enhance the production effect. Further, in this case, when the ball detection sensor 640s detects a ball, it is preferable to pay out a prize ball (four), whereby the player wins the ball to the general winning award device 640. , The prize ball given to the player can be paid out quickly.

  As shown in FIG. 4, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the distal end side of the first partition 640k1 and the electric accessory 640a are substantially parallel, and a spherical flow path is formed therebetween. Therefore, when the electric accessory 640a located in the open state receives the ball, it is possible to suppress the ball from bouncing out of the ordinary winning award device 640 due to the impact.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a description will be given of a ball flow when a ball wins in the general-purpose winning device 640 in a general per-game game executed when the time saving state is set. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a ball which has won the general winning a prize device 640 in a general game per game during a time saving state. As shown in FIG. 5, when the per-figure-period game is executed during the time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is started after the per-figure-period game is started, rather than the per-figure-period game executed during the normal state. Since the period until the opening state (opening state first) is set to be short, the second movable valve 642 can guide the ball winning the first state (general winning prize device 640) to the special power operation port 643. State) is maintained, the electric accessory 640a is opened.

  Therefore, when the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 flows down the first flow path 641a and reaches the second movable valve 642 (0.5 seconds after the ball wins the general winning award device 640). Since the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state, the second movable valve 642 flows down the second flow path 641b communicating with the first flow path 641a (the flow-down period is designed to be about 0.2 seconds). The ball enters the working port 643. Then, based on a detection means (proximity sensor) (not shown) detecting the entry of a ball into the special power operation port 643, a bonus game in which the V winning device 65 is opened is started.

  As shown in FIG. 5, when the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state, a sphere flowing down the first flow path 641a (flowing vertically downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 5) is a second movable valve 642. The second movable valve 642 is configured to be variable up to a position where contact with the second movable valve 642 becomes difficult. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the ball from frequently contacting the second movable valve 642 and causing the second movable valve 642 to break down. As will be described in detail later, when the game per game is executed during the time reduction state, the electric accessory 640a is opened 0.1 seconds after the game per game is started, and The ball can enter the winning prize device 640. Therefore, the shortest period from the time when the game per game is executed to the time when the ball reaches the position of the second movable valve 642 is 0.6 seconds (when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state after the game per game is started). (The sum of 0.1 seconds until the ball reaches the universal winning device 640 and 0.5 seconds until the ball winning the second movable valve 642).

  The second movable 642 performs a variable operation at the same time as the start of the per-game game, and a variable operation period thereof (a period required for changing from the first state to the second state (the second state to the first state)). Is set to 0.1 second. Further, since the second movable valve 642 is configured to be variably operated one second after the electric accessory 640a is closed in the per-game game, the electric accessory 640a is changed to the closed state. The second movable valve 642 is changed when a period (1 second) that is twice as long as the period (1 second) until the ball that has won the prize winning device 640 immediately before reaching the second movable valve 642 has elapsed. It is configured to work. Therefore, even in the normal game per game executed during the time saving state, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to contact the second movable valve 642 during the variable operation.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A V winning device 65 is provided to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (to the left in the viewpoint of FIG. 2) so that a ball that is fired by a left-handed game and flows down the left area can win. Here, with reference to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, a specific configuration of the V winning device 65 and a flow of a ball winning in the V winning device 65 will be described. In the present embodiment, when a ball enters the special power operation port 643 provided in the general winning prize device 640, a game per accessory for opening the V prize device 65 is executed. ing. Then, the configuration is such that a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed when a ball wins in a V winning port 165 provided in the V winning device 65.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in addition to the execution timing of the jackpot game (special figure jackpot game) which is established when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery, when the ball wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening 165). There is an opportunity to execute the jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is established. Thus, by providing a plurality of occasions for executing the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get tired.

  First, the configuration of the V winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. The V winning device 65 is provided with an opening / closing door 65a that can be changed between an open state in which a ball easily wins in the V winning device 65 and a closed state in which the ball is less likely to win than in the open state. The opening / closing door 65a is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the left area of the game board 13 can reach (see FIG. 2), and is changed to an open state when a game per accessory is executed.

  In the V winning device 65, a first flow path 65b through which a ball passing through the open / close door 65a in the open state flows is formed in a space between the first partition 65k1 and the second partition 65k2. A storage valve 66a is provided at a position where the ball (downflow period 0.5 seconds) flowing down the path 65b reaches. A storage portion capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 66a, so that the ball that first wins the V prize device 65 during the game per accessory is temporarily stored in the storage portion. Make up. A storage sensor 65s is provided above the storage valve 66a, and is configured to be able to detect that a ball is stored in the storage unit. Further, a ball detection sensor 65s2 for detecting a ball that has won the V prize device 65 is provided on the upstream side of the first flow path 65b, and based on the fact that the ball detection sensor 65s2 has detected a ball, an accessory During the winning game, the number of balls that have won the V winning device 65 is counted, and prize ball payout control for the winning ball is executed. As described above, by providing the ball detection sensor 65s2 at a position where the ball that has won the V winning device 65 immediately flows down, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a specified number or more balls win the V winning device 65. In addition to this, it is possible to immediately give the player a prize ball being played per role.

  A second flow path 65c is formed so as to communicate with the first flow path 65b, and a first out port 163a is provided downstream of the second flow path 65c. As shown in FIG. 6, the second flow path 65 c does not directly flow the sphere flowing down the first flow path 65 b, but stores the first flow in a state where the sphere is stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66 a. The following sphere flowing down the path 65b is configured to contact the sphere stored in the storage part of the storage valve 66a and to be guided to the second flow path 65c. The first out port 163a provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 65c is a ball entry port for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and flows down the second flow path 65c ( After a falling period of 0.1 second), the ball that has entered the first out port 163a flows down a ball discharging path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  As will be described in detail later, the storage valve 66a is configured to store a ball in accordance with the progress of the per-accompaniment game (corresponding to an operation scenario in which the per-accompaniment game is executed), and a storage state in which the ball can be stored. It is configured to be variably operated between a release state in which the ball is less likely to be stored than the state. When the storage valve 66a is in the release state, the first flow path 65b and the third flow path 65d communicate with each other and are stored in the sphere flowing down the first flow path 65b or in the storage section of the storage valve 66a. The moving ball flows down the third flow path 65d. The third flow path 65d is a flow path formed in a space between the lower end of the first partition 65k1 and the third partition 65k3 and having a width of about 15 mm and formed linearly in the vertical direction.

  A first movable valve 66b is provided at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 65d. The first movable valve 66b has a guide position (projection position) capable of receiving a ball flowing down the third flow path 65d in a predetermined movable pattern when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, It is configured to be movable between a passage position (burial position) at which a ball flowing down the third flow path 65d cannot be received. Specifically, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 and is driven and controlled by the main controller 110 so as to be movable in accordance with the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d. When the valve solenoid 209d is set to ON (when energized), the first movable valve 66b is moved to a passage position (a position buried in the game board 13) where the first movable valve 66b is retracted from the V winning device 65, and the first movable valve 66b is moved to the first position. When the movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off (when electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 66b moves to a guiding position (a position projecting from the game board 13) projecting into the V winning device 65. It is configured as follows.

  The first movable valve 66b located at the guidance position (projection position) is configured such that a ball can flow down the upper surface thereof, and as shown in FIG. It is configured to incline downward toward the road 65e. Therefore, the sphere (downflow period of 0.2 second) flowing down the third flow path 65d in a state where the first movable valve 66b is located at the guiding position (projection position) moves the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b to the fourth flow path. It will flow down to 65e. A second out port 163b is provided on the downstream side of the fourth flow path 65e, and the ball flowing down the fourth flow path 65e (flowing period of 0.2 seconds) enters the second out port 163b. The second out port 163b is a ball entry port for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 similarly to the first out port 163a described above. The dropped ball flows down a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the other hand, in a state where the first movable valve 66b is located at the passage position, the third flow path 65d and the fifth flow path 65f communicate with each other, and the sphere flowing down the third flow path 65d (flowing period 0.2 Second) flows into the fifth flow path 65f (flow-down period of 0.1 second). A V winning opening 165 is provided downstream of the fifth flow path 65f. The V winning opening 165 is a winning opening that can be a trigger for executing the jackpot game. When a ball wins the V winning opening 165 in a state where the jackpot game is not executed, the jackpot game is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the V winning device 65 is provided with a first out port 163a and a second out port 163b. With this configuration, a ball that has won the V prize device 65 when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state can pass through the flow path (third flow) through which the ball can pass when the storage valve 66a is released. The flow into the path 65d, the fourth flow path 65e, and the fifth flow path 65f) can be reliably prevented. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, the first out port 163a is eliminated, the second flow path 65c is communicated with the fourth flow path 65e, and the storage valve 66a is in the storage state. Alternatively, the sphere flowing down the second flow path 65c may be configured to enter the second out port 163b. In this case, the third partition 65k3, which is linearly provided in the vertical direction in FIG. 6, is inclined downward and to the right from the viewpoint of FIG. 6 from the upper end to the lower end, that is, the lower end of the partition 65k3. It is preferable to provide the fourth partition wall 65k4 on the right side (the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 6) on the extension line toward the direction. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the sphere flowing down the second flow path 65c flows into the fifth flow path 65f.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, there are two occasions for executing the jackpot game, that is, the case where the jackpot game is executed when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery, and the case where the ball is V There is a case where a jackpot game is executed when a winning is made to the winning opening 165. Hereinafter, when explaining the jackpot game by classifying the execution trigger, the jackpot game executed when the player wins the V winning port 165 is also referred to as a V jackpot game.

  As described above, the V winning device 65 of the present embodiment is in an open state in which balls can be won by executing a game per accessory, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 66a is in the third flow path. 65d, and the ball wins the V winning opening 165 according to the operating state of the first movable valve 66b when the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b. Or not.

  As will be described in detail later, the first movable valve 66b is located at the passing position (the time during which the ball cannot enter the V winning opening 165) at the guiding position (time during which the ball cannot enter the V winning opening 165). Since the ball is constantly moving in a movable pattern in which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165) is 0.5 seconds, the ratio of the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d to the V winning opening 165 is , About 1/11.

  In addition, even if a plurality of balls are won in the V winning device 65 in one game per role, the operation of the storage valve 66a is controlled so that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 65d is one. Therefore, the configuration is such that, when the game per accessory is executed 11 times, the rate at which one big hit game is executed is obtained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7 to FIG. 9, a description will be given of the content of the ball flow that has won the V-prize device 65 during the execution of the per-bonus game. First, with reference to FIG. 7, a description will be given of the ball flow in the first half period of the game per accessory (the period in which the storage valve 66a is in the storage state). FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow in the V winning device 65 when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state in the game per bonus. Although a detailed description will be given later, the storage valve 66a is configured to be operated and controlled so as to be in the storage state from the time when the bonus game is executed to the time when the V winning device 65 is closed. ing. When a plurality of balls win the V-prize device 65 while the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, the first winning ball P1 is stored in the storage portion formed in the storage valve 66a, and the next run is won. The ball P2 comes into contact with the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 66a, flows down the second flow path 65c, and enters the out port 163a.

  In this way, when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, all winning balls (for example, the ball P2) other than the ball P1 stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a enter the out port 163a. Therefore, a plurality of balls do not stay in the V winning device 65. Further, since the storage valve 66a is released from the storage state after the V opening / closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 is closed (after executing the operation control for closing the V state), one time operation is performed. It is possible to reliably reduce the number of spheres flowing down the third flow path 65d to one in the game per accessory.

  With such a configuration, the ease with which a ball can be awarded to the V winning opening 165 can be changed according to the timing at which the ball is awarded to the V winning device 65 during the per game play and the number of winnings. Since there is no game, a fair game can be provided to all players.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, a description will be given of the contents of the ball flow (the latter half period of the game per accessory) when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the game per accessory. As shown in FIG. 8, after the V opening / closing door 65a is in the closed state and a new ball cannot enter the V winning device 65, the storage valve 66a is released (indicated by a dotted line in the figure). Upon shifting, the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d. In the state shown in FIG. 8, since the first movable valve 66b is located at the guiding position, the ball P1 rolls on the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b, and the fourth flow path 65e is closed. The ball flows down and enters the second out port 163b.

  On the other hand, when the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d and reaches the first movable valve 66b, the first movable valve 66b is moved to the passing position. Will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram illustrating a ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the game per accessory. As shown in FIG. 9, at the timing when the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b, if the first movable valve 66b is located at the passage position, the fifth flow path 66f is switched to the fifth flow path 66f. It flows down and wins the V winning opening 165.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A special figure entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display device unit 80. When a ball enters the special figure entrance 64, a special figure entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the special figure entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 21), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a. When a ball enters the special figure entrance 64, four prize balls are paid out as a privilege. In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which, out of the balls fired by the left-handed game, one out of every 15 balls can enter the special figure entrance 64.

  As shown in FIG. 10, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, and the second symbol hold lamp. In addition, when the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening solenoid 209a for driving the opening / closing door for changing the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 between the open state and the closed state, and the V winning device 65 A V winning opening solenoid 209b for opening and closing the opening / closing door, a storage solenoid 209c for variably driving a storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65, and a first movable provided in the V winning device 65 as well. The first movable valve solenoid 209d for variably driving the valve 66b, the second movable valve solenoid 209e for variably driving the second movable valve 641 provided in the ordinary winning device 640, and other various devices are driven. MPU 201 is connected through an input / output port 205. Et to send various commands and control signals.

  In addition, the input / output port 205 includes various switches (not shown) such as a switch for detecting that a ball has entered each entrance and a switch for detecting that the ball is located at a specific position. The switch 208 and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115 are connected, and the MPU 201 performs various operations based on a signal output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253. Execute the process.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating a drive for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive an unillustrated production accessory, and the operation corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is performed. A voice output command for outputting a voice to the voice output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. May be configured.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of upper, middle, and lower ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 11B). The third symbol (special symbol) that is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variable display of the third symbol (special symbol). Each of the ten types of main symbols.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of display modes according to identification information that imitates numbers. In this way, by using the display mode corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the result of the lottery of the special symbol, so that the player can play the game easily. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the game is over. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the result of the lottery of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 for left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled up and down with a periodicity to perform variable display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11A, the main display area Dm has one effective line L1 formed in the left-right direction, and in a state where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, If all three symbols are stopped on the activated line L1 in a combination of big hit symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), a big hit video is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, each symbol The number of symbols in a row can be changed as appropriate. The symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those described above. For example, a symbol that combines an image of a figure or a character with a numeral may be configured as the third symbol. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed is variable. For example, when a specific effect is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol is displayed. Or by moving the variable display area to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the third symbol is fluctuating. You may make it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be changed again.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the third symbol corresponding to the change of the special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to be changed (dynamically displayed). In this case, the player determines whether the variation display of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the variation of the special symbol or the variation of the normal symbol. It is also possible to configure so that it is difficult to understand. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to understand what kind of privilege is given to the player according to the result of the variable display of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to execute both the variable display corresponding to the change of the special symbol (lottery) and the variable display corresponding to the change of the normal symbol (lottery), the game content to be executed ( The target of the third symbol may be switched in accordance with the (game state), for example, during the normal state, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the special symbol is executed, and the time saving state is executed. In the middle, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the ordinary symbol may be executed. In this case, the third symbol may be variably displayed in correspondence with the symbol type in which a lottery (a lottery on which the player more closely looks at the lottery result) that is advantageous to the player is executed. On the other hand, the display mode and the display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the symbol that is changing. Thereby, an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), the player can determine whether the combination is the third symbol corresponding to the big hit (the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit). Overlooking whether or not there is). Also, if the combination of the big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of the main symbols) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the big hit is determined, the big hit game is started, and the big hit video (opening effect) ) Is displayed.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure and there is a reserved ball, after a stop display (confirmation display) for one second, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the reserved ball. Is started. When there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for one second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. . This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new game ball enters the special figure entrance 64. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. In spite of the fact that the player has continuously fired the game ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), it is rare that there is no ball entering the special figure entrance 64, and the third symbol is stopped. In many cases, the displayed state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game and the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new game ball enters the special figure entrance 64 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the fluctuation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is displayed. Be executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the game balls entered into the special figure entrance 64 and the through gate 67. And the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 11B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the big hit is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or a different character. A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, if the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Further, when the ball enters the through gate 67, the number of times of ball entry is held up to a maximum of one time, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. . In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. The left half of the small area Ds1 displays a reserved ball count design indicating the number of retained balls based on the entry into the special figure entrance 64, and the right half of the small area Ds1 has a through ball. The configuration is such that a reserved ball count symbol indicating the number of reserved balls based on the entry into the gate 67 is displayed. In the example of FIG. 11 (b), while four reserved ball count symbols are displayed in the left half of the small area Ds1, no reserved ball count symbol is displayed in the right half. This shows a state in which there are four reserved balls, but there are normally no reserved balls.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the special figure entrance 64 is held up to four times, and the ball entering the through gate 67 is held up to one time. Although configured, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Further, in the display screen shown with reference to FIG. 11, the sub-display area Ds is formed above the main display area Dm. However, the display area may be formed in other forms. The sub-display area Ds may be formed below the area Dm. In this case, the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be variably formed according to the set game state. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the game state has shifted to a different game state only by looking at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, a state in which the player is gazing at the display mode of the main display area Dm, such as a state in which a variable display of a third symbol indicating that the degree of expectation that the special symbol lottery result has been won is high is being executed. In such a case, the display area of the sub display area Ds may be reduced, or the sub display area Ds may be hidden.

<About the effect contents on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 12 to FIG. 19, a description will be given of the content of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery), a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game. This time saving state is continued until the number of special symbol lotteries reaches the specified number of times (until a predetermined condition for terminating the time saving state is satisfied). Is established, and the normal state is set.

  The time saving state is a state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, and an open state in which a ball can enter the general electric prize winning device 640 by a game per general figure compared to a case where the gaming state is a normal state. It is configured to be easily set.

  Then, when the ball is won in the case of a normal symbol and the ball enters the special power operation port 643 in the general winning award device 640, a game per hit is executed, and the ball enters the V winning port 165 provided in the V winning device 65. Is executed for winning the prize.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a game ball fired aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is configured to pass through the through gate 67 with a probability of 100%. And, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed by the passing of the game ball through the through gate 67, when the time saving state is set, it is designed to win with a probability of 3/10, and the ordinary symbol is designed. In the case of winning in the lottery of, the general-purpose winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state is executed.

  In the time per game, which is executed during the time-saving state, most of the time (about 100%) can be achieved by continuously executing the left-handed game so that the ball can be awarded to the general electric winning device 640 (3 seconds). ) An ordinary winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened is executed.

  Further, in the general game per game executed during the time saving state, most of the balls that have won the general electric winning device 640 are configured to enter the special power operating port 643, and the balls enter the special power operating port 643. A game per accessory is executed when the ball is hit. Then, when the game per role is executed, the V winning device 65 is opened, and the ball that has won the V winning device 65 wins the V winning opening 165 at a rate of about 1/11, and the V winning opening 165. The big hit game (V big hit game) is configured to be executed upon the winning of the ball.

  In other words, during the time-saving state, a game (special electric game) aiming at a big hit by causing a game ball to be won (V winning) at the V winning opening 165 rather than executing a game (special figure game) aiming at a big hit by a special symbol lottery. Since the (game) can easily execute the big hit game, the player executes the game while requesting the V winning (V big hit game) by the special hit game in the special electric game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the left side area of the game board 13 is used as a special electric game in order to allow the general winning award device 640 to win a ball (to pass the ball through the through gate 67 which is usually a trigger for executing a symbol lottery). It is necessary to fire a ball aiming at. Further, in the present embodiment, when a game (left-handed game) is executed aiming at the left area of the game board 13, the ball also enters the special figure entrance 64, so that the special figure Both a figure game (a game in which a special symbol is drawn) and a special electric game (a game in which a normal symbol is drawn) are executed.

  The time-saving state in which the special electric game is more advantageous to the player than the special figure game is the time required for the special symbol lottery executed by the special figure game to reach the specified number of times (that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol for the specified number of times). Time) elapses, so when the gaming state shifts to the time reduction state, the special symbol fluctuation time that triggers the time reduction state to end and shift to the normal state elapses Executing a game while expecting a V prize by a special electric game is a basic game method during the time saving state in the present embodiment.

  Various effects are executed on the third symbol display device 81 in order to easily inform the player of the state of the time-saving game. As will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, the jackpot game is executed, and at the end of the jackpot, a V rush mode for indicating that the gaming state is a time saving state which is an advantageous state for the player. To notify that the time saving state has been set. Then, various effects during the V rush will be described. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the time reduction state is referred to as “V rush”.

  First, with reference to FIG. 12A, the jackpot ending screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 12A shows an example of an ending screen of a big hit (game). When the last round of the jackpot game is over, as shown in FIG. 12 (a), in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the character "V rush starts after the jackpot is finished!" Is displayed. This indicates to the player that the game shifts to the V rush mode, which indicates that the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game. Then, in the main display area Dm, the comment “V rush period 40 seconds get” of “40 seconds” is displayed in the remaining time reduction period mode 801 for indicating the period in which the time reduction state set after the end of the jackpot game is continued. Is done.

  Here, the display content of the remaining short time period mode 801 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, an end condition that is satisfied when the number of special symbol lotteries reaches a specified number (for example, four) is set as the end condition for the time saving state. Therefore, the time-saving state is continued until the time required for the special symbol lottery to reach the specified number of times (that is, the time obtained by adding the fluctuation times of the special symbols for the specified number of times) has elapsed. In the remaining time reduction mode 801, a display mode indicating a total time obtained by adding the fluctuation times of the special symbols until the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied is displayed.

  Next, the holding status of each symbol in the state shown in FIG. 12A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram showing the hold status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12A is displayed. In the present embodiment, up to four special symbols can be stored and up to one normal symbol can be stored. In FIG. 12 (c), the running special figure th0 for explaining the state of the running special symbol fluctuation, and the special figure first holding th1 to special for explaining the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored. FIG. 4th hold th4, a running general symbol fh0 for explaining the situation of the running normal symbol fluctuation, a general figure first hold fh1 for explaining the winning information of the normal symbol stored and stored, Is used to explain the situation of each symbol.

  FIG. 12C shows a state in which four special symbols with a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds are stored in the special figure first hold th1 to the special figure fourth hold th4. In other words, in this period of the time saving state, 40 seconds which is a value obtained by adding the fluctuation times of four special symbol lotteries is set. Therefore, the character "40 seconds" is displayed in the remaining short time display mode 801 for indicating the duration of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to easily inform the user how long the V rush period will continue. it can.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the duration of the V rush that is advantageous to the player is displayed in a specific number of seconds as shown in the remaining short time display mode 801. The remaining period may be known, and the player may be notified using an indicator or the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game with a more exciting feeling to the player.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12A, the remaining short time period mode 801 is displayed in a display mode showing all of “40 seconds” calculated as the duration of the V rush. Not limited to this, at the time of notifying that the vehicle will enter the V rush, only a part (for example, 30 seconds) of the value (for example, 40 seconds) calculated as the duration of the V rush is notified. Alternatively, a value corresponding to an unreported minute (for example, 10 seconds) may be additionally reported during the execution of the V rush.

  In this case, for example, when the number of times saved is set to four, the fluctuation times of the special symbols corresponding to three special symbol holdings among the four special symbol holdings already acquired (special symbol holdings) are added. In the case of FIG. 12 (c), the value “30 seconds” which is the sum of the special figure first hold th1 to the special figure third hold th3 may be displayed when the V rush enters. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing for notifying only a part of the value calculated as the duration of the V rush.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, in the present embodiment, the duration of the V rush is displayed by adding the fluctuation times of a plurality of special symbol lotteries executed until the time saving state ends. ing. Further, in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current number of special figure reservations, a display mode for indicating the number of special figure reservations is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many values of the remaining short time period mode 801 displayed as the duration of the V rush are the total value of the variable time corresponding to the suspension of the special figure. Further, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variation time of each special symbol lottery.

  Therefore, for example, even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time is set differently depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or not, according to the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801, It is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance the lottery result in the special figure reservation (whether or not winning information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the special figure reservation).

  In addition, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 50 seconds is configured to be selected, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds, 20 seconds. A pachinko machine 10 configured to select any one of the fluctuation patterns of second and thirty seconds, the special figure first reservation th1 is “10 seconds”, the special figure second reservation th2 is “30 seconds”, and the special figure second reservation th2 is “30 seconds”. If the third hold th3 in FIG. 3 is “20 seconds” and the fourth hold th4 in the special figure is “10 seconds”, “50 seconds” is set as the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801 indicating the duration of the V rush. It is preferable to configure the display. With this configuration, the period is shorter than “90 seconds” (the sum of the fluctuation times for four special figure reservations), which is the duration of the V rush, and is executed during the time reduction state. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special symbol lottery is a big hit (the first special time lottery is a big hit, and the fluctuation time is set to 50 seconds).

  That is, when displaying only a part of the period, not the entire period in which the V rush continues, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (50 seconds) set when the big hit is won as described above is displayed. In addition to the configuration described above, for example, a display mode of “60 seconds” that makes the player think that the first time saving time is a deviation fluctuation (fluctuation time of 10 seconds) and the second time reduction is a big hit fluctuation (fluctuation time of 50 seconds). The remaining short time period mode 801 may be displayed. In other words, a value that is smaller than the value indicating the duration of the actual V rush and that is calculated when a variation time that can be selected at least for the jackpot variation and a variation time that can be selected for the outlier variation is displayed. Just do it.

  In the present embodiment, the acquired special figure reservation number is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The mode may be displayed. Even in this case, the display mode for indicating the number of special figure reservations is displayed in a display mode that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the contents, so that the number of special figure reservations currently acquired for the player can be determined. Can be difficult.

  Next, the V-rush start screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the jackpot ending period ends and the V rush starts. FIG. 12D shows the display screen shown in FIG. It is a figure showing each symbol situation at the time of being displayed. That is, FIG. 12B shows a display screen at the time when the special figure reservation indicated by the special figure first reservation th1 at the time of the jackpot ending starts to fluctuate. The special figure reservation that was the first reservation th1 is shifted to the running special figure th0, the special figure second reservation th2 is the special figure first reservation th1, and the special figure third reservation th3 is the special figure second reservation In the figure th2, the special figure fourth reservation th4 is a display screen in a state shifted to the special figure third reservation th3, respectively. In addition, there is no new ball in the special figure entrance port 64 since the start of the V rush, and the special figure fourth reserve th4 is empty. Then, as shown in the ordinary figure fh0 during execution, the lottery of the ordinary symbol has also started to change, and the state is in a state where the reserve is accumulated in the first figure first reserve fh1 (see FIG. 12D).

  When the V rush is started, the character "V rushing" is displayed in the main display area Dm as a game status notification mode indicating that the current time is the V rush period. A character 810 imitating a rabbit is dynamically displayed on the side of the main display area Dm as if the character 810 is trying to take something out of the bag 810a. This indicates that the symbol is usually changing.

  Then, in the center of the main display area Dm, a timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the V rush period which is advantageous to the player is displayed. The timer 812 displays a value obtained by adding the fluctuation times of the specified number of special symbols up to the end of the time saving state. In FIG. 12B, the number of lotteries of the special symbol during the time saving state is defined as four times, and the fluctuation time of the running special figure th0 is 10 seconds, and the special figure first hold th1 is changed to the special figure third. “40.0 seconds” which is the sum of the fluctuation times up to the hold th3 is indicated in the timer 812. This timer 812 is displayed so that the value is subtracted each time the fluctuation time of the running special figure th0 is subtracted, so that the player can easily understand that the V rush period is in progress. it can.

  Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "V rush end when the timer reaches 0!" Are displayed, and when the value of the subtracted timer 812 becomes 0, the V rush ends. This is notified to the player. As described above, during the V rush period, the game is executed for the purpose of causing the ball to enter the V winning opening 165. Therefore, the player can easily understand the period (remaining period) until the advantageous period ends by visually recognizing the displacement state of the value displayed on the timer 812.

  Then, in the upper left display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, the characters of "first series" are shown, and the jackpot is won from the normal state (so-called first hit), and the game state is changed after the V rush is started. It shows how many V rush periods it is without shifting to the normal state. Further, “0pt” is displayed in the display area HR2 shown below the display area HR1, and the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot won during the V rush period is displayed. In this way, by displaying the number of times that the V rush continues in the display area HR1 and the number of award balls obtained in the jackpot during the V rush in the display area HR2, the player can use The game history can be confirmed, and the convenience of the game can be improved.

  In the main display area Dm, a V rush fluctuation area 811 is displayed, and in the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c of the V rush fluctuation area 811, a symbol fluctuates (dynamic display). The display mode is displayed. In this V rush fluctuation area 811, information for suggesting a game situation during the V rush to the player is displayed. FIG. 12B shows that the special figure and the ordinary figure are currently fluctuating, and the V rush fluctuation area 811 indicates that the V rush period has elapsed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13A, a display screen in the case where a win is made per ordinary figure during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a case where a winning is made per ordinary figure during a V rush, and FIG. 13C shows the display screen shown in FIG. 13A. It is a figure showing each symbol situation in the case of. In the present embodiment, as described above, when a normal symbol lottery is won, the electric accessory 640a attached to the general winning award device 640 is opened so that a game ball can enter.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (c), during the execution, the ordinary drawing hold fh0 is indicated by “○” indicating that the winning has been achieved by the ordinary symbol lottery. At the top right of the main display area Dm, at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12 (b)), the character 810 searching for something from the bag 810a has won the lottery of the ordinary symbol and obtained the privilege. An animation for taking out the ticket 810b on which the character "lucky" is written, which is a notification mode for indicating, is displayed. Then, in the display area HR3 at the lower right of the main display area Dm, an image schematically showing the general winning award device 640 is displayed, a normal symbol lottery is won, and the electric accessory 640a is open. Is displayed in. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a character "V CHANCE CHANGE!" Is displayed. These display contents allow the player to understand that the player plays the game while aiming at the electric chew, so that the player can be guided to the correct game method. That is, the above-described display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds are guidance notification modes for guiding the player to the contents of the game to be executed.

  The timer 812 displayed in the center of the main display area Dm displays 30.9 seconds as its value. In the game situation of FIG. 13A, the remaining variation time of the running special figure change shown in the running special figure th0 is 0.9 seconds, and the special figure first hold th1 to the special figure third hold th3. The special drawing lottery until is the period of V rush. Therefore, the total value of 30.9 seconds is displayed on the timer 812. In FIG. 13A, the special figure fourth reservation th4 that has not been stored at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12B) is reserved. Since the special figure lottery is executed after the elapse of the period, the fluctuation time of the special figure fourth hold th4 is not added. Therefore, "-" is indicated in the special figure fourth reservation th4 (see FIG. 13C).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13B, a display screen when a character hits during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when a bonus game is executed during the V rush, and FIG. 13D illustrates a display screen illustrated in FIG. It is a figure showing each symbol situation at the time of being displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, when a game ball wins in the special power operation port 643 in the general winning award device 640, the V opening / closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened. The game is executed.

  FIG. 13B is a display screen when a game ball wins in the special power operation port 643 in the general winning a prize device 640 according to the general figure shown in FIG. 13A. In FIG. 13A, the reserved ball that has been reserved in the first special figure th1 is shifted to the active special figure th0 in FIG. 13B. Then, "?" Indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is 9.9 seconds and the fluctuation is temporarily stopped is shown (see FIG. 13D). In the present embodiment, when a bonus hit game or a big hit game is executed, the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (temporarily stopped) until each hit game ends. are doing.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, the subtraction display of the value of the timer 812, which has been decreasing with the fluctuation time of the special figure, is displayed until the change of the special figure (subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation) until FIG. Is interrupted and displayed at the interrupted time (that is, the time when the special power operation port 643 is won). Further, the characters "STOP !!" are displayed to indicate that the subtraction display of timer 812 is suspended. From these display contents, the player can grasp that the elapse of the V rush period is interrupted. Then, in the display area HR3, the V winning device 65 in a state where the V opening / closing door 65a is opened is schematically displayed, and is displayed together with the characters “Aim!”.

  Thereby, the player can understand that the V opening / closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 is open (the execution of the game per accessory) by visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81. it can. That is, the display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds in FIG. 13B include the function of the game status notification mode for notifying the player of the game status during the V rush, and the accessory. And a function of guiding information for guiding a player to a game to be executed during a winning game.

  In the V rush fluctuation region 811, the character “V” is stopped and displayed in the left region 811a and the right region 811c, and is displayed in a so-called reach display mode. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Big hit if you enter V!" Are displayed, and by these display contents, the player can make the V winning hole 165 almost win the game ball. The game can be executed with the expectation that the game can be performed.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 11B, a general game in the pachinko machine 10, that is, a lottery of a special symbol is executed, and a game (special game) executed while expecting that the lottery result is a jackpot win. In the game game), a plurality of identification information (each symbol (third symbol) dynamically displayed on the third symbol display device 81) for indicating a lottery result is displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of columns (for example, three columns). Reach display mode (for example, a combination of the same identification information) in which a plurality of symbol columns excluding one of the symbol columns are a combination of identification information for indicating a jackpot winning. ) Is configured to execute a reach effect that increases the expectation of the jackpot winning when the stop display is performed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game (special electric game) executed during the time saving state (V rush) is not a special symbol lottery, but is finally a V prize through various processes based on a normal symbol lottery. Since a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed by causing a ball to enter the mouth 165, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand the specific game contents of the special electric game. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left area 811a of the V rush fluctuation area 811 and the middle area in accordance with the progress of the special electric game having the above-mentioned complicated gaming properties (various processes until the jackpot game is executed). In the area 811b and the right area 811c, the variable display mode of symbols (characters) that are displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display) is changed so that the effect mode is executed as if a special figure game is being executed. Make up. With such a configuration, the player can grasp each display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without grasping the specific game contents in the special electric game. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14A, a description will be given of a V prize screen during a game per hit during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. FIG. 14 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a case where a gaming ball wins in the V winning opening 165 during a bonus hit game during a V rush and a big hit is given, and FIG. 14) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the V rush, the game per bonus is executed, and when a ball is won in the V winning opening 165 during the game per bonus (when a V is won), the big hit ( V jackpot game) is given.

  FIG. 14A is a display screen when a ball wins in the V winning opening 165 during the bonus game shown in FIG. 13B. As described above, the special symbol th0 is temporarily stopped while the fluctuation time is left for 9.9 seconds because the fluctuation of the special symbol is interrupted during the per-accessory game. The special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 are held within a specified number of times of the current V rush, and the variation time is set to 10 seconds. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush period is “29.9 seconds” without changing from the time point shown in FIG. 13B (see FIG. 14C).

  Then, when it is determined that the ball wins V and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, the V rush period is not subtracted for a predetermined period (jackpot game period). The display mode of “29.9 seconds” displayed by the timer 812 shown in FIG. 13B is displayed in the display area HR4 that is less noticeable than the timer 812. "Time stock 29.9 seconds" is displayed in the display area HR4.

  In the present embodiment, if a V prize (V jackpot game) occurs during temporary stop of a special figure, a special symbol lottery executed after the temporary stop of the temporarily stopped special figure change is executed this time. The time saving state is configured to continue until the number of time savings set in accordance with the jackpot type of the jackpot game is executed. That is, the information (the number of times of saving time) for establishing the time saving end condition is not updated (subtracted) by the interrupted special symbol change (resume special figure change) executed after the end of the big hit game.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 14 (c), if four time savings are set after the end of the jackpot game, the special figure hold 4 is set in the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change (9.9 seconds). The sum of the individual figure fluctuation times is the duration of the next V rush. With this configuration, the special jackpot game is performed in the normal state, and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is performed during the V rush against the time-saving state (at the time of the first rush of the V rush) set by winning the jackpot. Since the time reduction state (when the V rush is continued) that is executed and set again after the end of the big hit game can set the V rush continuation period longer by the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time) of the restart special figure fluctuation, It is easier to provide a V rush advantageous to the player when the V rush is continued than when the V rush enters for the first time. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while further expecting the V rush to continue.

  It should be noted that another method may be used to set a time saving state in which the V rush continuation is more advantageous to the player than the V rush first entry, for example, the execution condition of the jackpot game is satisfied during the normal state. (Special drawing lottery win), the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game, and the execution condition of the jackpot game is satisfied in the time-saving state (V winning in special electric game), and after the jackpot game ends When the state is set, a different variation pattern may be selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, the execution condition of the jackpot game is established during the normal state (special figure lottery). The jackpot is won at the end of the jackpot game, and the execution condition of the jackpot game is established in the time reduction state (V prize in the special electric game), and the end of the jackpot game is smaller than when the time reduction state is set after the end of the jackpot game After it may be configured to more is easily selected movement pattern of long fluctuation time when time reduction state is set. With such a configuration, the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state can be easily made longer during the V rush continuation than at the time of the first rush V rush entry, and as a result, the V rush Can be extended. Therefore, an added value can be given to the player who has continued the V rush, so that the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  On the other hand, as a technical idea opposite to that of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the information (the number of times of saving) for establishing the time saving ending condition may be updated (subtracted) by executing the restart special figure change. It may be configured such that the special symbol change with a longer change time is more easily performed at the time of the first rush of the V rush than at the time of the continuation of the V rush. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the V rush from continuing excessively and to execute the V rush without executing the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in the special electric game executed during the V rush. Is ended and the willingness to play is reduced.

  In the case of using a configuration in which the interruption timing of the special figure fluctuation during execution greatly affects the duration of the V rush after the end of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) as in the present embodiment, In a state where it is possible to interrupt the special figure change (for example, in a state where the normal winning game has been won), the information to indicate the remaining change time of the special figure change being executed is notified to the player. Alternatively, the player may be configured to select whether or not to suspend the special figure change. In other words, if the remaining change time of the special figure change being executed is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game for interrupting the special figure change (the special power operation port 643 during the regular figure per game) (A game in which a ball is won to execute a game per role), a game aiming for a V-prize is selected, and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation during execution is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). In some cases, it may be possible to select a game that does not interrupt the special figure change.

  When a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is awarded by winning a V, the fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special symbol and the special symbol within the specified number of V rushes held at that point in time are displayed. The variation time is configured to be displayed as a preset period of the next V rush. The time is displayed in the H display area HR4 of the main display area Dm. Therefore, the player can confirm the period of stocking in the next V rush by confirming the display area HR4.

  Then, in the V rush fluctuation area 811 for indicating the gaming state during the V rush in the main display area Dm, “V” is stopped and displayed in the middle area 811b that has changed in FIG. 13B. When the hitting of the left area 811a and the right area 811c is performed, the character “V” is stopped and displayed. Therefore, “VVV” Is displayed, indicating that the jackpot has been won. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the character "Congratulations !!" is displayed. With these display contents, a game ball is won in the V winning opening 165 during the hitting of the bonus, and the player is clearly shown that the big hit has been given.

  In the present embodiment, the V rush fluctuation area 811 stops and displays the left area 811a and the right area 811c when the hitting of the accessory is performed, and the middle area 811b when the V prize is hit during the hitting of the accessory. Although the stop display is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left area 811a is displayed when a hit is performed per ordinary figure, the right area 811c is displayed when a bonus hit is executed, and the middle area is displayed when a V prize is won. 811b may be configured to be stopped and displayed. In this way, by establishing a staged effect triggered by the establishment of the game condition or the like, when the player visually recognizes the V fluctuation region 811, it is possible to instantaneously determine which stage the game stage is. it can. Therefore, more information can be provided to the player. Further, the character to be stopped may be any one that indicates that a big hit is given and the player can obtain the privilege, and may be displayed as “hit” or “V prize”. By configuring such that a plurality of characters indicating the jackpot is displayed, it is possible to provide a more varied effect to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14B, a description will be given of a screen that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the present embodiment and is in the middle of hitting an accessory during a V rush. FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a game ball does not win in the V winning opening 165 while hitting a bonus during a V rush. In the present embodiment, when executed for each accessory, the variation of the special symbol that has been executed is temporarily stopped. However, when the V prize cannot be won during the accessory, the temporary stop is performed. The change of the special symbol that was being played is resumed.

  FIG. 14B is a display screen in a case where a gaming ball does not win in the V winning opening 165 from the case where the hitting of an accessory is executed in FIG. 13B. In the V fluctuation area 811 of the main display area Dm that indicates a gaming situation during a V rush, a character “x” indicating that no V prize was won is displayed in the middle area 811b. Therefore, the V rush fluctuation area 811 displays the outlying display mode of “V × V”. Thereby, the player can understand that the game ball could not be won in the V winning opening 165 during the hit of the present role.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, the character “Resume !!” is displayed to indicate that the change of the temporarily stopped special figure is resumed. Then, the display mode for indicating the remaining period of the V rush indicated by the timer 812 starts to decrease again with the resumption of the change of the special figure shown in the executing special figure th0 (see FIG. 14D). Thus, the player can easily understand that the player must execute the game with the aim of winning the V within the time indicated by the timer 812.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15A, the big hit ending screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 15A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of a jackpot ending during a V rush, and FIG. 15C is a diagram illustrating each symbol when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 15A is displayed. It is a figure showing a situation. In the present embodiment, during a V rush period, when a jackpot is won or a V prize is won, the V rush period (time saving state) is set again.

  FIG. 15 (a) is a diagram showing a big hit ending screen provided from the V winning shown in FIG. 14 (a). As described above, when the jackpot is awarded during the V rush, the fluctuation time from the temporarily stopped running special figure th0 to the special figure second hold th2, which is the specified number of times of the previous V rush period, is given. Are displayed as a time stock in the display area HR4, and the character of "time stock 29.9 seconds" is displayed. Then, in the special figure reservation corresponding to the special figure third reservation th3 in FIG. 15C, that is, during the V rush before the jackpot game is executed, the special figure not added as the V rush period (time saving period). The figure fluctuating time is calculated.

  As described above, when the big hit is given during the V rush, the V rush is set again at the end of the big hit game. In the V rush period, a value is set which is the sum of the remaining time of the change of the special figure temporarily stopped during the big hit and the change time of the number of lotteries of the special figure given by the big hit type. In FIG. 15A, as shown in the display area HR4, the time stock is 29.9 seconds, that is, the remaining period of the suspended special figure change (9.9 seconds) and the time during the previous V rush. The total number of seconds (total 20 seconds) of the special figure hold corresponding to the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 which have already been added and displayed on the timer 812 is already displayed as the time stock. At the end of the jackpot game, this time-stocked seconds is a value that can be newly added to the V-rush period, and the special-figure hold fluctuation time corresponding to the special-figure third hold th3 (15 seconds) Is added.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15A, the ending screen of the jackpot game in which four time savings are given after the end of the jackpot game is shown. Up to the hold th2 (two special figure reservations), the fluctuation time of the remaining two special figure reservations can be added and displayed on the timer 812 as the current V rush period, but in FIG. Since there is only one special figure reservation that can be added and displayed on the timer 812 (because no special figure reservation is stored in the fourth special figure reservation th4), the fluctuation of the special figure reservation corresponding to the third special figure reservation th3 Only the time is added and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, if a jackpot is given during the V rush and the number of special figure reservations that are time-stocked at that time is less than the prescribed number of time savings (V rushes) to be given this time (the number of time savings), An effect of adding the fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure reservation stored and stored until after the end of the big hit game to the value of the time stock is executed. In FIG. 15 (a), the special figure third reservation is performed. The character “+15 seconds GET” is displayed in the additional period display mode 802 in correspondence with the special figure suspension in which the 15-second deviation fluctuation pattern shown in th3 is executed. As a result, the player can enjoy the joy that the period advantageous to the player has been further extended. Further, in the present embodiment, since the effect of adding the V rush period is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, the feeling of expectation that the advantageous period may be extended at the time of the ending of the jackpot game. Since the game can be executed while holding the game, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the production during the jackpot.

  In addition, the character of "second series" indicating that the V rush has been continued twice is displayed in the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, and the display area HR2 has been obtained with a jackpot during the V rush. "670P" which is the number of award balls is displayed. As described above, the game result is displayed at a position where the player can easily view the game, and the value is increased each time the jackpot is executed and the privilege is obtained, so that the player can be more satisfied. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the character “Continue Vlash” indicating that the Vlash has been set again is displayed. Thereby, the player can easily understand that the V rush which is advantageous to the player is continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15B, a description will be given of the timer addition screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. FIG. 15B is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the timer addition screen during the V rush. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure holding newly won at the time of the jackpot ending executed during the V rush or the special symbol fluctuating time outside the specified number of times of the V rush before the jackpot is obtained. Perform additional production. If the number of reserved balls for the specified number of V rushes is not reserved at the end of the jackpot, the number of balls newly increased during the V rush period until the special figure reservation for the specified number of V rushes is accumulated. Perform additional production for the number of pending balls.

  FIG. 15 (b) is a diagram showing a display screen when a game progresses from the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 15 (a) and a new game ball wins the special figure entrance 64. FIG. 15D is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. In the main display area Dm, a variation display mode indicating that the V rush variation area has passed the V rush period is displayed. 15B, as shown in FIG. 15D, the running special figure th0 resumes the fluctuation, the remaining fluctuation time becomes 3.2 seconds, and the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation In th2, a hold in which 10 seconds are set as the fluctuation time is stored. Then, the special figure third hold th3 is a state in which a hold ball having a change time of 15 seconds is stored. Therefore, the timer 812 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays "38.2" seconds in which these values are added.

  The state of FIG. 15A is a state in which the fluctuation time for two new special figure reservations can be added as a V rush period as described above, but only one new special figure reservation is acquired. This is the state (only the special figure third reservation th3). In this case, as shown in FIG. 15B, when a new special figure reservation is acquired next, the acquired fluctuation time of the special figure reservation is added and displayed.

  Specifically, it is shown that the special drawing fourth hold th4 has an additional prize, and a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is set in this new special figure hold. Therefore, an effect in which 20 seconds are added to the current V rush period is performed. Then, the character 810 displayed in the main display area Dm adds a V rush period, and throws a ticket 810b for indicating an extension of the advantageous period to the player to the timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the V rush. Is displayed. After this effect is executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure which has been additionally won this time is added to the remaining period of the V rush to the remaining period displayed on the timer 812, and the value “58.2 seconds” is added to the timer 812. Is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a character of “add a timer !!” is displayed to inform the user that the V rush period has been extended (added) in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, a V-rush end screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen indicating the end of the V rush, and FIG. 16C is a diagram illustrating the state of each symbol when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 16A is displayed. FIG. In the present embodiment, during the V rush period, when a game ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 165, or when a jackpot is not won by lottery of a special symbol, the V rush period ends, The gaming state shifts to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (c), the display of "x" indicating that the running special figure th0f, which is the final fluctuation of the current V rush, has come off and stopped. The reserved balls are stored from the first special figure reserved th1 to the third special figure reserved th3, but these reserved balls are those that are out of the specified number of times of the V rush. During the execution, the general figure fh0 is in a fluctuating state, and the general figure first reservation fh1 general figure holding ball is accumulated.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, a character “VGET × 2” indicating how many times the V rush has been continued this time is displayed, and further, “PGET × 1500”, a big hit in the current V rush, and a prize ball ( Characters are displayed to show how much you gained. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the current V-rush game in an easily understandable manner. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a character "V rush end" for notifying that the advantageous period has ended is displayed. According to these display modes, the fact that the V rush period has ended can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, the V rush extension screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16B is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen indicating that the V rush period has been extended, and FIG. 16D illustrates a case where the display screen illustrated in FIG. 16B is displayed. It is a figure showing each symbol situation in.

  In this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, a V rush effect is performed. Then, the time saving state is configured to end when the special symbol change of a predetermined number of times ends. Specifically, when the number of times of saving time is set to four times, when the special symbol change for the fourth time is stopped and displayed (determined display) after the time saving state is set, the time saving state is ended and returns to the normal state. And it is configured to shift. Here, since the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) and the normal symbol lottery (fluctuation) are executed independently, immediately before the end of the V rush period (the final fluctuation of the special symbol in the time-saving state is stopped). In the case where the game per day is executed immediately before the display (just before the display), after the time-saving state ends (after the state is shifted to the normal state), the game per accessory may be executed in some cases.

  In this case, if the V rush effect ends at the timing when the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, a situation in which the per-accessory game starts even though the V rush effect ends. This may be confusing to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the per-figure-per-game is executed at the end timing of the V-rush period (the final fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol in the time-saving state), until the per-figure-per-game ends, Alternatively, the V rush effect is configured to be extended until the per-bonus game executed in response to the ordinary per-game is completed. Thereby, the V rush effect can be executed in correspondence with the special electric game period aiming at the V jackpot game, so that an effect that can be easily understood by the player can be executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16 (d), a state in which a character "O" indicating that the player has won the game during the execution of the general figure tf0 is indicated, that is, the final fluctuation of the time reduction state during the game per the general figure When the special symbol change is stopped (the stop display is performed with "x" indicating that the running special figure th0 is off and stopped), the third symbol display is performed as shown in FIG. In the main display area Dm of the device 81, the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c of the V rush fluctuation area 811 for indicating the game situation during the V rush are displayed in a state of being changed. That is, this indicates to the player that the V rush is continuing.

  Then, the timer 812 displays “00.0 seconds” indicating that all the changes in the special figure for the specified number of times in the time saving state have ended. However, above the main display area, the character "V lash is being extended" is displayed. By being displayed in this manner, the player can know that the V rush that has been finished has been extended, and can get unexpected joy. Then, the character "Last Chance !!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The player can easily understand that the V rush has ended.

  In the state shown in FIG. 16 (b), that is, when the ball enters the special power operation port 643 during the extended display of the V rush, the game per accessory is performed in the same manner as during the normal V rush period. Is executed. In this case, the display screen during the game-per-game shown in FIG. 13B is displayed, and the character “Last Chance !!” is continuously displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the V rush period will end if no ball wins in the V winning opening 165 in the current per-game game. Then, when the ball wins in the V winning opening 165 in the bonus game with "Last Chance !!" displayed, the same V jackpot game as during the normal V rush period is executed. On the other hand, when the ball has not won the V winning opening 165, the V rush end screen shown in FIG.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b), in the present embodiment, not a transition state of a gaming state, but a series of times during which a special electric game can be executed as a V rush period. It is configured to execute a V rush effect. With this configuration, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. The display timing of the end screen indicating the end of the V rush period shown in FIG. 16A is not limited to after the final change of the special symbol of the V rush period is stopped and displayed, for example, the final change of the special symbol. Is started when the remaining period becomes a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the final change of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display of the end screen is ended at the timing when the next special figure change is started. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the V rush period displayed on the timer 812 may be calculated as a period until the end screen of the V rush is displayed.

  With this configuration, since the end screen can be displayed using a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the value of the timer 812 becomes 0, the game result during the V rush period is displayed to the player. Can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. When such a configuration is used, for example, at the time of displaying the end screen of the V rush, the lottery status of the ordinary symbols is preliminarily determined, and the general pattern is displayed within a period in which the end screen of the V rush can be displayed. If it is determined in advance that the winning game is to be executed, the extended screen shown in FIG. 16B may be displayed at the timing of displaying the V rush end screen, or may be temporarily ended. After the screen is displayed, the end screen may be switched to the extension screen when the game per day is executed. By using the configuration in which the end screen is switched to the extension screen in this way, it is possible to leave the possibility of aiming for the V jackpot game even after the end screen is displayed. The game can be performed with a feeling. In the present embodiment, the normal state is set as the gaming state when the extended screen shown in FIG. 16B is displayed. When such a configuration is used, for example, a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal state than when the V jackpot game is executed during the time reduction state is executed. It is good to be configured so that. Thus, the period during which the extension screen is displayed is a period indicating that the V rush period is about to end, and indicates a period in which an advantageous jackpot game can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to cause a player who is playing a game during the V rush period to play a game having a sense of expectation until the end. In addition, in this case, the state in which the normal state is set as the gaming state is divided into a special normal state in which the V rush period is extended and a normal normal state so that the state can be managed and the special normal state is set. Is set only when is set, the jackpot game advantageous to the player is provided, and when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal state, almost a prize ball can be obtained as a penalty. Instead, it is preferable that the disadvantageous jackpot game in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game is executed. Also, without being limited to this, for example, if the display condition of the extension screen is satisfied at the time when the final change of the special symbol in the V rush period is stopped and displayed, the time saving state is not ended and the extension screen display is performed. May be configured to end the time saving state when the end condition is satisfied. Thus, the timing at which the time reduction state ends is variable, so that it is difficult for the player to understand at which timing the time reduction state ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17A, a special screen at the end of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 17A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a special screen at the time of the ending of the jackpot game, and FIG. 17C shows a case where the display screen shown in FIG. 17A is displayed. It is a figure showing each symbol situation. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the jackpot game is executed during the V rush, the V rush period is set again based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game. However, if there is a pending ball in which the variation time of 200 seconds is executed in the retaining ball at the end of the jackpot game, a heaven mode effect is executed which indicates that the jackpot is always won after a predetermined period has elapsed. .

  FIG. 17A is a display screen in a case where a hit change of 200 seconds is suspended at the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the holding status of each symbol at the time of the ending of the big hit game shown in FIG. Not. Further, “↓” indicating that the running figure fh0 is fluctuating is shown, and it is shown that the figure first holding fh1 is stored. It is shown that the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 each store a hold ball in which a variation pattern of 10 seconds is executed.

  And, in the special figure third holding th3, a holding ball on which the hit variation pattern of 200 seconds is executed is shown. In the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, as a special symbol fluctuation pattern during a time reduction game (during a V rush), if the result of the hit determination is a hit, the fluctuation time is 200 seconds per hit long fluctuation (hereinafter, special May be executed. Furthermore, in the jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) to be won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, until the fluctuation of the special hit stops (in the heaven mode), even if it is not possible to win the V winning opening 165 in the special electric game, the big hit game won by the special hit always makes the big hit. Since the V rush period is set again after the game is over, the special electric game can be executed with confidence. As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the special figure fourth reservation th4 indicates that there is a reserved ball, but since the big hit game is executed in the special figure third reserved th3, the special figure third reserved Since the time period is set as the V rush period set after the end of the jackpot game executed by the holding ball of th3, the fluctuation time is indicated by "-".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), when there is a special hit in the hold at the time of the ending of the big hit game, it is determined that there is a special hit in the hold in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The character "entering heaven mode" is displayed. Also, a first lucky character 820a and a second lucky character 820b, which are not displayed when the gaming state is the normal state or during the V rush where there is no special hit in the hold, are displayed. In addition, the character “Ultra lucky !!” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. As described above, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b, which are not displayed during the normal state or during the V rush with no special hit in the hold, are displayed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the game may be performed, and to continue the game while being excited. That is, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b are in a special game situation suggestion mode for suggesting that the current game situation is a special game situation for the player.

  In the center of the main display area Dm, a special period display mode 803 written as “220 seconds” is displayed. The value displayed in the special period display mode 803 is the time until the fluctuation of winning a special win in the special symbol lottery is stopped, that is, the value set as the period of the heaven mode. In other words, a special game period notification mode for indicating a special game period to be executed is provided. Therefore, the value displayed in the special period display mode 803 is a value obtained by adding the fluctuation time of 200 seconds, which is the fluctuation time per special hit, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the number of reserved balls until winning the special hit. In FIG. 17 (c), the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 each have a variable time of 10 seconds. Further, since the fluctuation time per special shown in the special figure third hold th3 is 200 seconds, "220 seconds" which is the sum of the fluctuation times from the special figure first hold th1 to the special figure third hold th3 is calculated. , The heaven mode is set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period of the time saving state (V rush) is configured to inform the player on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of the ending of the big hit game, but the special symbol fluctuation time in the time saving gaming state. Is configured to execute a fluctuation pattern in which at most 50 seconds is set as the longest fluctuation time except for 200 seconds which is a special hit fluctuation (see FIG. 25 (c)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17A, when an extremely long time exceeding 200 seconds is displayed in the special period display mode 803, the player must understand that the time saving state is always set again. It is possible to execute a special electric game with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of the ending of the jackpot game, it is determined whether there is a special hit change in the holding ball, and if there is a special hit, it is configured to notify the player at the time of the ending of the jackpot game. However, the notification mode is not limited to this. For example, if there is a special hit in the hold, at the time of the ending of the big hit, the time until the special hit change is executed is configured to be notified. The player may be notified that the period has been extended. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the unexpected joy that the period of the V rush that seems to have ended is suddenly extended for a long period.

  Next, the screen in the heaven mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17B is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the heaven mode, and FIG. 17D shows the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 17B is displayed. FIG. In the present embodiment, when there is a special hit in the holding ball at the end of the big hit, the time until the change of the special hit stops is referred to as a heaven mode, and the player can execute the special electric game with peace of mind. The period is set to be as long as possible. FIG. 17B is an example of a display screen in a case where the game progresses after shifting to the heaven mode shown in FIG. 17A.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm indicates that the gaming state is the tenth V rush period after the transition from the normal state to the time saving state (V rush). The character "10th station" is displayed. Then, in a display area HR2 provided below the display area HR1, characters of "6000 pt" indicating the number of prize balls acquired by the jackpot game executed after shifting to the V rush are displayed. Above the main display area Dm, the characters “during heaven mode” are displayed to indicate that the player can instantly judge the current game state. In the same manner as during the V rush, a V rush fluctuation area 811 is displayed, and in each of the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c, a lottery of a normal symbol is executed, and the special electric game progresses. Is displayed. Further, as in the V rush, an animation in which the character 810 is searching for something from the bag 810a is displayed at the upper right of the main display area Dm. This indicates that a lottery of a normal symbol is being executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 17D, in the running special figure th0, the fluctuation of the special symbol with the remaining fluctuation time of 30 seconds is executed. In the running special figure th0, in the game situation shown in FIG. 17C, the reserved ball in which the special hit shown in the special figure third reserved th3 is started to change. Therefore, the remaining period of the heaven mode executed in FIG. 17B is 30 seconds, which is the remaining fluctuation time of this executing special figure th0. In addition, although the reserved ball exists in the special figure first hold th1 to the special figure third hold th3, it is a special figure lottery executed outside the heaven mode being executed. , And the fluctuation time is indicated by "-". In addition, “↓” indicating that the general drawing lottery is being executed is shown in the general drawing fh0 during execution, and the reserved ball is also stored in the general drawing first reservation fh1.

  The timer 812 in the main display area Dm is displayed so as to be decremented in accordance with the remaining period of the fluctuation of the running special figure th0. As shown in FIG. 17D, since the remaining fluctuation time of the running special figure th0 is th0, the character “30.0 seconds” is displayed on the timer 812 (see FIG. 17B). . In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a character “Timer 0 may be good” is displayed. Suggests. That is, in the sub-display area Ds, a suggested effect notification mode for suggesting a future game situation to the player is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a part of the display mode in the heaven mode, which is a period until a special symbol is won and the symbol is stopped, is configured to be the same as the V rush mode. With such a configuration, it is a basic game method that is advantageous to the player to execute the special electric game and make the game prize in the V winning opening 165 during the heaven mode as in the V rush. It is possible to guide the player to something. Therefore, an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  Note that the display mode is not limited to this, and an effect dedicated to the heaven mode may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a variety of effect types, and it is possible to further enhance the effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18A, a chance effect screen in which a third character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a chance effect during the hitting of an accessory, and FIG. 18 (c) is a diagram showing each display when the display screen shown in FIG. 18 (a) is displayed. It is a figure showing a symbol situation. In the present embodiment, as described above, when a normal symbol is won and a game ball is awarded in the special power operation port 643, a bonus hit is executed. When a game ball wins in the mouth 165, a big hit is given. In FIG. 18 (a), a timing at which a game ball is likely to be awarded in the V winning opening 165 while a character is being hit is notified to a player as a chance effect from the gaming situation shown in FIG. 13 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 18 (c), the pending status of each symbol in FIG. 18 (a) indicates that the running special figure th0 is hitting a character, so that the change is temporarily stopped. It is shown. Each of the reserved balls from the first special figure holding th1 to the second special figure second holding th2 shows a change of 10 seconds. In addition, the special figure third hold th3 is a special figure change executed outside the period of the currently executed V rush, and thus the change time indicates “−”. Furthermore, the special figure fourth reservation th4 indicates that the reservation is not reserved. In addition, “普” indicating that a winning has been achieved in the general drawing lottery is shown in the running general drawing fh0.

  FIG. 18A is a notification screen for notifying a player that a game ball is likely to win in the V winning opening 165 during the hitting of the role illustrated in FIG. 13B. In the present embodiment, as described above, the gaming balls that have won the V prize device 65 during the hitting of the accessory are stored in the storage valve 66a. The storage valve 66a is configured to be open such that the game ball flows down the third flow path 65d (see FIG. 7) for 1.5 seconds out of the 3 second period. The first movable valve 66b disposed above the V winning opening 165 causes the gaming ball to flow to the V winning opening 165 for 0.5 second within 5.5 seconds regardless of the playing state. It is configured to be in an open state where it can flow down the road (see FIG. 27A).

  In other words, in order for the game ball to win in the V winning opening 165, the game ball flowing down the third flow path 65d after the storage valve 66a is opened while the first movable valve 66b is set to the open state. It is necessary to make the ball enter the V winning hole 165. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the first movable valve 66b is in the open state within 2 seconds after the storage valve 66a is set to the open state, and the first movable valve 66b is determined to be in the open state within 2 seconds. If it is determined that the V rush change is made, as shown in FIG. 18A, the emphasis mode 811z is displayed around the V rush fluctuation area 811 displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a character "V prize great chance!" Is displayed. In other words, the emphasis mode 811z is a timing notification mode for notifying the player of a timing at which the player easily transitions to an advantageous game state. With such a configuration, the player can understand the timing at which the V winning is easy, and the game is easily executed.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the V winning is easy is notified by the highlighting mode 811z and the comment in the sub-display area Ds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the V winning is difficult is also notified. You may. With this configuration, a more kind game can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18B, a general-purpose stop screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18B is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when the lottery of the ordinary symbols is stopped during the V rush, and FIG. 18D is a view illustrating the display screen illustrated in FIG. It is a figure showing each symbol situation when is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the V rush (time saving state), it is possible to perform a special electric game in which a normal symbol lottery is won, a game ball is awarded in the special electric operation port 643, and a V prize is aimed. This is the most advantageous game method for the player. Therefore, during the V rush, when the lottery of the ordinary symbols is not executed, the special symbol game cannot be executed, and the effect of prompting the firing of the game ball is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 18D, the holding status of each symbol during the V rush in FIG. 18A indicates that the running special figure th0 is changing, and the remaining change time is 2 seconds. ing. In addition, the reserved ball for which the deviation is executed for 10 seconds is stored in each of the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation th2. And the special figure third reservation th3 and the special figure fourth reservation th4 are in a state where the reserved ball is not stored. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush shown in FIG. 18B is 22.2 seconds, which is the sum of the remaining fluctuation time of the running special figure th0 and the fluctuation time of the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation th2. It is. In addition, "-" indicating that the general drawing lottery is not executed is shown in the running general drawing fh0. Further, normally, the reserved ball is not stored in the first reserved fh1.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (d), when the normal symbol lottery is not executed during the V rush and the game is stopped, the electric accessory 640a attached to the normal winning device 640 is not set to the open state. It is impossible to allow a game ball to enter the special power operation port 643. In other words, it is not possible to execute the special electric game, which is the basic game method during the V rush, and the special figure lottery is executed. Ends. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in order to allow the special figure entrance 64 or the normal winning device 640 to enter a game ball, a left-hit game in which the game ball is fired at the left area of the game board 13 is executed. It is necessary that when the left-handed game is executed, 100% of the game balls pass through the through gate 67, which is a trigger of the normal symbol lottery. That is, the game situation in which the special figure lottery shown in FIG. 18B is being executed but the general figure lottery is not being executed is a situation in which the game ball is not fired. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, an effect for prompting the player to fire the game ball is executed.

  In the main display area Dm, the characters "V rushing" are displayed, and further, the timer 812 displays "22.2 seconds" indicating the remaining period of the V rush as if it had been subtracted over time. are doing. From these display contents, the player can easily understand that the V rush game is being executed and the remaining period is decreasing. In addition, in the V fluctuation region 811 in which the fluctuation display has been performed when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed, “strike” is performed in the left region 811a, “tsu” is displayed in the middle region 811b, and “V” is displayed in the right region. The character "hit" along with "te" is indicated to the player by the animation guided by the character 810. That is, the V fluctuation area 811 is a warning display mode for indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbols is not executed, and for indicating to the player that the V rush is finished.

  In addition, characters "Please start a game" are displayed in the sub display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to inform the player that the normal symbol lottery is not executed and the special electric game cannot be executed, and since the special figure lottery is executed, It is possible to warn that the V rush period, which is an advantageous period, will end. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the advantageous period from ending unexpectedly for the player.

  In addition, the effect which prompts the launch of the game ball described above is not limited to this display mode. In other words, any character that indicates that the normal symbol lottery has not been executed may be transmitted to the player, and characters indicating danger, such as “WARNING”, may be displayed on the entire third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to further warn the player that there is a risk of loss.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19A, a special figure stop screen during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 19A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a special symbol lottery is not executed during the V rush, and FIG. 19C is a view showing the display screen shown in FIG. 19A. It is a figure showing each symbol situation when is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the time reduction state (V rush) is continued until the lottery of the special symbol is executed for the specified number of times, and the value obtained by adding the variation time for the specified number of times is defined as the V rush. The period is configured to notify the player. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is not executed, the specified period is not determined, and an effect is executed to make the player expect the V rush to last.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (c), in the holding status of each holding symbol in the gaming status shown in FIG. 19 (a), the running special figure th0 is indicated by "-" indicating that the special symbol lottery is not being executed. It is shown. In addition, the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure fourth reservation th4 indicate that the reserved ball is not stored. On the other hand, “普” indicating that the general drawing lottery is being executed is shown in the general drawing fh0 during execution, and the general drawing first hold fh1 is also stored.

  In this way, when the special figure lottery is not executed during the V rush, the special electric game can be executed until the special symbol lottery for the specified number of times is executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, the characters “??? second” indicating that the special symbol lottery has not been executed and the specified period has not been reached are displayed on the timer 812. In the V fluctuation area 811, a fluctuation display of “↓↓↓” indicating that a lottery of a normal symbol is being executed is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a notification mode for indicating that the specified period of the V rush has not been reached, that is, “How long do you keep going?” Is displayed. With these display contents, the player can execute the special electric game because the lottery of the special symbol is not executed and the remaining period of the V rush is not reduced because the lottery of the special symbol is executed. I can understand that With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to execute the game while being excited about how long the game situation advantageous to the player, in which the special electric game can be executed without the elapse of the V rush, continues. That is, the display content shown in FIG. 19A is a suggestion notification content for indicating to the player that the player is in an advantageous state.

  In addition, as described above, when there is no longer a reserved ball with a special symbol during the V rush period, it is notified that the period of the V rush has ended once, and then the game ball is inputted to the special figure entrance 64. , When the ball has entered, a resurrection effect may be executed such that the V rush period is resurrected. With such a configuration, the player can think that the V rush period, which seems to have ended, is restored, and can get unexpected joy.

  Next, a lucky time screen during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19B is a diagram illustrating an example of a lucky time screen during the V rush, and FIG. 19D is a diagram illustrating each symbol situation when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 19B is displayed. FIG. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the V jackpot game is executed during the time reduction state (V rush), the remaining time of the special symbol change during suspension and the number of time savings set after the end of the V jackpot game (4 The special symbol fluctuation time for the number of times) is set as a time reduction period (V rush period) after the end of the V jackpot game.

  Therefore, the longer the remaining period of the special symbol change suspended at the time when the V jackpot game is executed, the longer the next V rush period can be. However, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the V rush period is displayed using the display mode of the timer 812 (subtraction display), but the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is not displayed. Each time the special symbol change is interrupted, the player needs to play the game while expecting the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed to be long.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed satisfies a predetermined condition, an effect for notifying the player to that effect is executed. Specifically, when the remaining period of the special symbol change is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is longer than the changing time of the next special symbol change. Is long, the lucky time effect can be executed. With this configuration, when the game per V is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player can actively play the game. Can be.

  When the lucky time effect is executed, the characters "Lucky time rush" are displayed in the main display area Dm, and "10 seconds" is displayed as the period display mode 851. On the display screen shown in FIG. 19B, a lucky time effect indicating that the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is longer than the change time of the next special symbol change is executed. As shown in FIG. 19D, when the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is 20 seconds and the change time of the next special symbol change is 10 seconds, the difference is 10 Seconds are displayed in the period display mode 851. The number of seconds displayed in the period display mode 851 is subtracted and displayed in accordance with the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, and when 0 second is displayed, the lucky time effect ends.

  Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of “a chance of hitting an accessory during a lucky time” is displayed as a guide display mode for guiding a bonus during a lucky time to a player. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game during the lucky time. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds), an effect that can notify the player to that effect. It is configured to be able to perform unlucky effects. In other words, when the V jackpot game is executed while the unlucky effect is being executed, the player can be made aware that the next set V rush period is likely to be short. .

  By executing the unlucky effect in this way, the player can actively perform the special electric game during the unlucky effect in order to execute the V jackpot game during the V rush period. Will be subtracted, but the special electric game will not be performed until the end of the unlucky production, and it will be possible to select whether to aim for a longer V rush period after the end of the V jackpot game. Can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described lucky time effect or unlucky effect is configured to be executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol satisfies a predetermined condition. In this case, it may be configured to determine whether or not to perform the effect by lottery, or to determine whether or not to perform the effect based on the operation result on the operation means (frame button 22) operable by the player. May be configured. Furthermore, the execution frequency of the effect may be varied according to the length of the period that can be displayed as a lucky time effect or an unlucky effect. You may comprise so that a lucky time effect may be performed with a probability.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19B, during a period in which the lucky time effect is being executed, a period that is advantageous to the player is notified to the player using the period display mode 851. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the display mode indicating the lucky time may be displayed without displaying the period display mode 851. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the degree of advantage, so that it is possible to provide a pleasure of predicting the length of the V rush period set after the end of the V jackpot game.

  Further, as the execution condition of the lucky time effect and the unlucky effect, the remaining period of the V rush period, that is, the total period of the special symbol change until the time saving state ends, is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It may be provided as an execution condition, or the lucky time effect or the unlucky effect may not be executed during the final change of the special symbol in the V rush period.

<Transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, transition contents of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 20 is a transition diagram showing a flow of a game state set by the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a time reduction state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol), and 2 It is configured to be able to set three game states, regardless of the game state, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the time saving end condition (for example, the special symbol lottery is won The normal state is set when a predetermined number of times (four times) are satisfied and a condition that is satisfied) is satisfied.

  First, a case where the normal state is set as the gaming state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which the processing when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is operated in the initial state (start-up processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54)) is executed. In), the normal state is set as the game state. The normal state is a low-probability state of a normal symbol, and is a game state in which it is difficult to win a ball in the general-density winning device 640 (it is more difficult to win than a high-probability state of a normal symbol). A left-handed game for causing a ball to enter the mouth 64 is executed.

  In the normal state, if a special pattern (special figure) lottery (special figure lottery) is won, the jackpot type is set to either jackpot A or jackpot B, and the jackpot game is executed. You. Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 24, in the present embodiment, at the rate of 99% of the case where the jackpot is won by the special figure lottery, the jackpot type is “jackpot A (4R (round), time saving 4 times) )) Is set, and "big hit B (4R (round), 15 time savings)" is set as the big hit type at a rate of 1%.

  In other words, when a jackpot is won during the normal state, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the end conditions of the time saving state are different depending on the set jackpot type. ing. Specifically, it is configured such that the jackpot type (jackpot A) that is easy to be set is set to be shorter than the jackpot type (jackpot B) that is hard to be set. With such a configuration, in addition to the game aiming to win the jackpot by special drawing lottery, the jackpot type to be set is a jackpot type (jackpot B ) Can be made to play while expecting to be.

  Although detailed description is omitted, a dynamic display (effect display) for indicating the lottery result of the special figure lottery is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 while the normal state is set. Then, by grasping the dynamic display mode (effect mode) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the player can predict the result of the special figure lottery being executed. . Also, as described above, during the normal state, since the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is difficult for the ball to win in the ordinary winning prize device 640 by the ordinary symbol lottery (the ordinary symbol lottery). On the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the effect display for suggesting the result of the general figure lottery to the player is not executed, or the dynamic display mode for suggesting the result of the special figure lottery, It is configured to execute in an inconspicuous display mode.

  With this configuration, during the period in which the normal state is set, the effect performed based on the result of the special figure lottery is given to the player, rather than the effect performed based on the result of the general figure lottery. Since it is possible to gaze, during the normal state, it is possible to visually recognize that a game (special figure game) mainly performing a special figure lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Then, when the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the general electricity winning device 640 is easily opened based on the general figure lottery, and A game (special electric game) aiming at a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in the per-character game executed by letting a ball into the special power operation port 643 based on the lottery is a big hit game based on the special figure lottery. It is configured to be a game more advantageous to the player than a game (special figure game) aimed at (special figure jackpot game).

  In this way, by changing the execution timing of the jackpot to be aimed at by the player according to the set game state, it is possible to cause the player to execute a different game according to the set game state. Can be prevented from getting tired of the game early. In this embodiment, during the normal state, the special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the special figure game aiming at the general figure lottery. By configuring the game to be more advantageous to the player than the special figure game aiming for the special figure lottery, the content of the game to be executed by the player differs according to the game state, but it is not limited to this In addition, a plurality of special symbol types are provided (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the type of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed by the player is made different according to the set game state. For example, when the normal state is set, the first special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the first special symbol is the second special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the second special symbol To be more advantageous to the player than the normal state (for example, When the short state is set, the second special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the first special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the first special symbol. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the game board is configured to execute the same game method (left-handed game) both when executing the special figure game and when executing the special electric game. By configuring 13, the player is not inconvenienced to change the game method every time the game state changes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game is performed according to the set game state. The method may be made different. For example, during a normal state, a left-handed game (a game aiming at a game area (left area) formed on the left side of the variable display device unit 80) is executed. May be configured to execute a right-handed game (game aimed at a game area (right area) formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). In this case, a special figure entrance 64 is provided as a configuration for executing a special figure game in the left area, and a through gate 67, a general winning award device 640, V The winning device 65 may be provided, and a variable winning device 650 that is opened as a jackpot game may be provided in a game region (a lower region) in which a ball flowing down the left region or the right region can reach.

  With this configuration, the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) can be made different depending on the game content (special figure game, special electric game) mainly executed by the player. Thus, it is possible to provide a pleasure of changing a game method.

  In this way, when the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is made different according to the game content (special figure game, special electric game) mainly executed by the player, the game is executed for the player. It is configured to execute guidance information (for example, a display mode of “right-handed” displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) for guiding a game method to be performed (left-handed game, right-handed game). Good.

  Furthermore, when the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is made different according to the game content (special figure game, special electric game) mainly performed by the player, the ball flowing down the left area or the right area reaches By providing the variable winning device 650 that is opened as a jackpot game in a possible game area (lower area), even when the jackpot game is executed based on the special figure game, the jackpot game is executed based on the special electric game. Also in this case, it is not necessary to change the game method when the big hit game is executed, and the game can be smoothly performed.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied based on the number of times of the change of the special symbol (the number of times of the special figure lottery). In addition, the lottery of ordinary symbols (general figure lottery) is configured to be independently executable without being involved in the lottery of special symbols (special figure lottery). In other words, the execution timing of the regular figure lottery is established regardless of the situation of the special figure lottery.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when a ball wins in the special power operation port 643 provided in the special symbol change (special figure change) general electric prize winning device 640 and a game per accessory is executed, the special executed is executed. The design change is interrupted, and the special symbol change that has been interrupted is restarted when the bonus game has ended. In addition, when the ball wins the V winning opening 165 during the bonus game and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, the interrupted special symbol change is restarted when the jackpot game ends. It is configured to be.

  In the present embodiment configured as described above, when the time-saving state is set, until the time-saving state end condition (time-saving end condition) that can be satisfied based on the special figure lottery is satisfied, Until the special figure lottery (for example, four times) is executed, a special electric game aiming at a large number of V jackpot games is executed. As a specific example, when four special figure lotteries are set as the time saving end condition, a period until the fourth special figure lottery ends, that is, for each of the four special figure lotteries, If the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set, the time saving state set this time will continue until 40 seconds later (the timing when the fourth special drawing lottery ends).

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 12A, if there are four special figure reservations at the end of the jackpot game, “40 seconds” is set as the period until the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends. Is displayed.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the fluctuation time of the running special figure fluctuation is not subtracted during the execution of the bonus hit game or the jackpot game (V jackpot game) during the time reduction state. Therefore, the period in which the time saving state is actually set is the sum of the special figure fluctuation time until the time reduction end condition is satisfied and the suspension time in which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is suspended. Become. As described above, the interruption time during which the subtraction of the special figure change is interrupted corresponds to the period in which the winning game (game per item, big hit game) is executed, and the execution period of the winning game is the game period of the player. Since the length of the period varies depending on the content, the interruption time cannot be accurately notified to the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining time (the special figure fluctuation time) until the time saving state ends is displayed (see FIG. 13A), and when the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted, the subtraction is performed. Until the time is resumed, a display mode (see FIG. 13B) is displayed to indicate that the subtraction display of the remaining time (special figure fluctuation time) until the time saving state ends is interrupted. are doing.

  With this configuration, the display contents of the display mode (remaining short time display mode 801 in FIG. 12A) indicating the period until the time saving state displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 ends. And the period until the time saving state is actually ended can be provided without any difference, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  The normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) executed during the time-saving state (normal symbol high probability state) is configured so that the winning probability is about 33%, and the normal symbol lottery (low symbol probability of the normal symbol) is performed. It is configured such that it is easier to win per regular figure than the winning probability (1%) of ordinary symbol lottery (regular figure lottery) executed during (state). Further, in the present embodiment, a variation time of 3 seconds is set as a variation pattern of a normal symbol regardless of the set game state. Therefore, by continuously executing the left-handed game during the time-saving state, the game is executed once every 10 seconds and the general winning award device 640 is opened.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 3 to FIG. 5, when a game per a general figure is executed during the time saving state, the ball that has won the general electric winning device 640 easily enters the special power operating port 643 ( It is configured so that it is easier to enter the ball than the per-figure-period game executed during the normal state), and the per-proxy-peripheral game can be executed approximately the same number of times as the per-figure-period game execution number. . Then, as described above with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, the probability that the ball wins the V winning opening 165 and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed in one time is about 1/11, in one role game. It is configured to be.

  That is, in the first embodiment, during the time-saving state, a game per accessory which is a chance to make the ball win the V winning opening 165 is executed at a rate of about once every 10 seconds. . If the game result of the bonus per game is that the ball can be won in the V winning opening 165 (in the case of V winning), after the bonus per game, the jackpot game (the jackpot type of the jackpot C is the jackpot game (10R ( Round) and four times) are executed, and the time saving state is set again after the end of the big hit game. That is, if a V jackpot game (a jackpot game executed by causing a ball to enter the V winning opening 165) is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot game. are doing. Therefore, once the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state does not end as long as the jackpot game is continuously executed in the special electric game, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and execute the special electric game. it can.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, if a jackpot game is executed by a special jackpot game, the suspended special figure change will be resumed after the jackpot game ends. The number of special figure lotteries (special figure fluctuations) for establishing the time saving end condition is not updated by the figure fluctuation. In other words, the configuration is such that the time saving state is continued until the special figure change is executed four times after the special figure change after the restart is completed.

  That is, when the remaining time of the special figure change is a long time (for example, 30 seconds), the game per accessory is executed, and when the V jackpot game is executed by the per game, the setting is performed after the jackpot game. When the remaining time period of the special figure change is a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) while the period of the reduced time saving state is “30 seconds + four times the special figure change”, the game per accessory is performed. Is executed, and the V jackpot game is executed by the accessory hit game, the period of the time saving state set after the jackpot game is “0.5 seconds + four special figure fluctuations”.

  With such a configuration, in the case of executing a special electric game aiming at a V jackpot game during a time-saving state in which the termination condition is satisfied based on the elapsed time, it is advantageous to the player that the V jackpot game is executed earlier. Rather, it is possible for the player to be more advantageous if the V jackpot game is executed in a state where the remaining period of the running special figure change is long. Therefore, even if the V jackpot game is not executed after a predetermined period has elapsed since the time saving state was set, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing while giving a sense of expectation. It becomes possible.

  In the present embodiment, the number of time savings (the number of times of the special figure fluctuation updated to satisfy the time saving end condition) is not updated (subtracted) based on the special figure fluctuation restarted after the end of the big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of time savings (the number of changes in the special figure updated to satisfy the time saving ending condition) may be updated based on the special figure fluctuation restarted after the end of the big hit. . Even in the case of such a configuration, the longer the special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after resumption, the more advantageous the player can be, so that a predetermined period has elapsed since the time reduction state was set. Even when the V jackpot game is not executed in this state, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing the game while having a sense of expectation.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. In the case where the game result of the per-accessory game executed during the time reduction state does not allow the ball to enter the V winning opening 165 (in the case of the non-V winning), the special electric game is repeated until the time reduction state ends. Is executed.

  In addition, when the special symbol change (special figure change) ends in the time saving state, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, that is, whether the special figure change for the number of times set as the time save end condition has ended. When the time saving end condition is satisfied, the game state shifts to the normal state, and the special figure game is executed. On the other hand, when the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the next special figure change is executed. Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 25 (c), in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure lottery is a win (1/100) as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure lottery executed during the time saving state. In the case of, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 50 seconds or 200 seconds is set is selected, and in the case where the result of the special figure lottery is out (99/100), the fluctuation time of 10 seconds to 50 seconds is set. It is configured such that a variation pattern to be performed is selected. In other words, the special figure lottery executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied (or four special figure lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game if four time savings are set as the time saving end condition). In this case, it is possible to make it easier to continue the time-saving state for a longer period. Furthermore, when a special jackpot is won during the time reduction state, the time reduction state is set again after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an added value in the case of winning a jackpot by a special figure lottery within a limited period in which the time saving state is set, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol acquired at the end of the big hit game has the big hit information in which the fluctuation time of 200 seconds is set in the hold storage, a special notification for notifying the fact is provided. An effect is configured to be performed (see FIG. 17A).

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the end conditions of the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, a time-saving end condition that is easy to be satisfied (four times) and a time-saving end condition that is difficult to be satisfied (15 times) can be set. It is composed. Here, if 15 time savings are set, the time saving state will continue until the fifteenth special figure lottery executed during the time saving state is completed, and accordingly, the increase in the number of times of the special figure change will occur. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot during the time reduction state can be increased, and the time reduction period can be further extended by the long-term fluctuation pattern set at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment causes the same game method (left-handed game) to be played all in the normal state, in the time saving state, and in the big hit game. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the special figure lottery is not executed during the time saving state. In the present embodiment, the change pattern of the special figure change is configured to be selected regardless of the number of special symbol reservations (special figure reservation number). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is set, it is preferable to configure so that the fluctuation pattern in which the longer fluctuation time is set becomes easier to select as the number of reserved special figures increases.

  With this configuration, at the stage before the time saving state is set (for example, during a jackpot game), it is possible to enthusiastically play a game to reach the upper limit (four) of the special figure reservation. . Further, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a state in which the special figure change is not executed during the time reduction state (a state in which the time reduction termination condition is not satisfied).

  Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the time saving state is set, that is, during the period until the predetermined number of special symbol changes (special symbol changes) is completed, the normal symbols are not changed. The lottery is executed, and a special electric game in which a ball is won in the V winning port 165 in the V winning device 65 is finally executed. The V prize device 65 is configured so that a ball can easily be won during a game per role, and is configured such that a fluctuation time of a special figure change is not subtracted (interrupted) during a game per role. Furthermore, the game per accessory has a plurality of termination conditions, and more specifically, is established when the number of balls that have won the V prize device 65 during the game per accessory reaches a predetermined number (three). A first ending condition (ball prize ending condition), and a second ending condition (time lapse ending condition) that is satisfied when an elapsed period from the execution of the bonus per game reaches a predetermined period (3 seconds). , And when one of the first end condition or the second end condition is satisfied, the game per accessory is ended. Also, during the fluctuation period of the ordinary symbol and during the execution period of the game per ordinary symbol, a lottery of a new ordinary symbol (nominal drawing lottery) is not executed, but the ball is moved to the special power operation port 643 during the game per ordinary symbol. During the period in which the game has been won and the bonus-per-game is being executed, a new general-purpose drawing can be executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, by executing the per-accessory game during the time saving state, the special electric game is executed with the aim of executing more per-accessory games while interrupting the special figure change. Done. However, a period during which a normal symbol fluctuates until the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, or a period during which a ball cannot be awarded to the general electric winning device 640 during the execution period of the game per ordinary symbol (the electric accessory 640a The period in which the per-accessory game cannot be executed, such as a period in which the player is in the closed state, is a period in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the time-saving state is wastefully subtracted. It will be a disadvantageous short working period.

  Therefore, for example, as a variation pattern of the ordinary symbol set during the time saving state, a general figure short variation pattern (variation time of 3 seconds) and a general figure length variation pattern (variation time of 15 seconds) having a long variation time In the case where is configured to be selectable, a game is played while expecting that the normal figure short fluctuation pattern is selected so that the above-mentioned disadvantageous short time period is shortened. Further, in the case of using a configuration in which the special figure change is interrupted during the execution period of the per-accessory game (the process of subtracting the change time of the special figure change) is used, as in the present embodiment, the disadvantageous time reduction By increasing the period in which the period and the suspension period of the special figure change overlap, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the special symbol from being subtracted during the disadvantageous short time period.

  Therefore, in order to shorten the disadvantageous shortened time period during the time reduction state, when the game per accessory is executed during the time reduction state, the remaining time of the ordinary figure change during execution is determined, and the remaining time is determined by a predetermined time (for example, If the time is longer than (10 seconds), it may be configured to execute an effect that promotes that it is better not to end the game per character by the ball prize but to elapse after a lapse of time. With such a configuration, it is possible to lengthen the execution period of the game per accessory, and thereby shorten the disadvantageous short time period.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select an outage stop type in a special symbol, and a second type used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1. One initial value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

  A random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 55). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in the storage area 203a in accordance with the timing of entering the special figure entrance 64. Each is stored.

  When the special symbol starting condition (fluctuation condition) is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the various stored values are shifted. A special symbol change based on the value is started.

  In the present embodiment, one type of special symbol is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of special symbols may be provided. In this case, for example, in order to establish a lottery condition of one special symbol type (for example, the first special symbol) based on the ball entry into the special symbol entrance 64 (first entrance), The above-described values are stored in the 1 special symbol holding ball storage area, and the ball enters a ball entrance (for example, the second ball entrance) different from the special figure entrance 64 (first entrance). In order to establish the lottery condition of another special symbol type (for example, the second special symbol) based on the above, the above-described values are stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area different from the first special symbol holding ball storage area. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may store.

  When the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the reserved first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type. May be shifted to the special symbol execution area, and a special symbol change based on the various values stored may be started. With this configuration, even with the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, it is possible to smoothly execute each of the special symbol changes.

  Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area, second special symbol holding ball storage area) may have a special symbol execution area. good. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be only a big hit and a miss, but is not limited to this, for example, in a case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, A configuration may be made such that a smaller number of benefits than those at the time of winning the jackpot (an advantage different from that at the time of winning the jackpot) can be won for the small hit that can be given to the player. With such a configuration, even if the jackpot has not been won, it is possible to provide an opportunity to grant a privilege to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, when the small hit type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the acquired small hit type counter value is configured to be stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area, and when the special symbol lottery is executed. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may refer.

  In addition, if the special symbol lottery is configured to be able to win a small hit, for example, it is configured so that the content of the transition of the gaming state based on the big win and the content of the transition of the gaming state based on the small hit are different. For example, if a big hit is won, the game state is shifted to the normal state at the start of the big hit game, and further, based on the set big hit type, a new game state can be set after the big hit game ends. When the small hitting is won, the small hitting game may be executed while maintaining the gaming state at the time of the small hitting winning, and the gaming state may not be shifted after the small hitting game is finished.

  With this configuration, the presence / absence of the transition of the gaming state and the content of the transition can be made different according to the winning type (big hit, small hit) which has been won, so that a variety of games can be provided. it can.

  Further, the RAM 203 according to the present embodiment is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to a ball entering (passing through) the through gate 67 formed of one holding area (holding first area). The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b stores the values of the second random number counter C4 and the general figure variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67.

  When the start condition (variation condition) of the ordinary symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b are shifted to the ordinary symbol execution area, and the various stored values are shifted. Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 55).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is reserved at the timing when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number table 202a. This first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (judgment values) determined to be a big hit in a special symbol lottery are defined.

  Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, a determination value for determining a jackpot is defined within a predetermined range, and a determination value for a predetermined range is defined. As shown in FIG. 23 (b), among the values of the first random number counter C1, “0 to 3” is defined as the jackpot determination value, and other values (“4 to 399”) are determined to be out. Specified as a value.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot is configured to be the same regardless of the game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot probability is configured to be different depending on the game state. May be. Also, in that case, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be two types, that is, a high probability state and a low probability state, or three or more types. In this case, for example, the special symbol state and the ordinary symbol state may be configured so as to make the special symbol jackpot probability different for each of up to four types of gaming states set by combining the special symbol states, Simply, three or more types of special symbol states such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state may be set, and a different big hit probability may be set for each state.

  In the case where the special symbol lottery result is set so that "small hit" can be won, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to "small hit" is defined in the first random number table 202a. What is necessary is just to configure. With such a configuration, the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery of the special symbol can be executed by the same process, so that the main control lottery and the small hit lottery are executed in different processes. The processing load on the device 110 can be reduced. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of a large hit and a small hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special value of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, using the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202c is referred to to determine the big hit type when a big hit is won. Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 24A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first hit type selection table 202c. As shown in FIG. 24 (a), the first hit type selection table 202c includes a special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 which is referred to when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, and a V winning opening 165. And a V jackpot type selection table 202c2 which is referred to when the ball wins (V win).

  First, the contents of the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24B is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1. As described above, this special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 is a data table for selecting a jackpot type set when a jackpot is won by lottery of a special symbol, and includes a value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. Different jackpot types are defined accordingly.

  Specifically, "big hit A" is defined in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from "0 to 98", and "big hit B" is defined in the value of "99". I have.

  Here, the content of the jackpot game executed corresponding to each jackpot type and the content of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. In the present embodiment, the operation content of the jackpot game executed in accordance with each jackpot type (round game content), that is, the operation content (opening timing, An opening operation scenario in which the number of times of opening is defined in a time series is stored in advance in various operation scenario tables 202e of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Then, the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read from the various operation scenario table 202e and stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Is done. When the opening operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the content of the scenario is updated every time the main process (see FIG. 55) of main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) for executing control during a jackpot game, the current scenario content is determined, and a process based on the determination result is executed.

  With this configuration, for example, when a plurality of movable members are moved by one opening operation control, by using an opening operation scenario in which the operation content of each movable member is defined in a time series, a plurality of movable members Can be centrally managed. Therefore, the operation timing of each movable member can be set appropriately, and the other movable members can be set when one movable member fails. The operation processing for the member can be smoothly performed.

  The "big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four rounds as the big hit game, and the big hit game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for four rounds is executed. The round game is a game in which 10 balls are awarded to the variable winning device 650 or the first attacker 650 is continuously opened until the opening period elapses 30 seconds. In other words, in the “big hit A” in which the four round games are executed, a big hit game in which a maximum of 40 balls can be won in the variable winning device 650.

  Further, the "big hit A" is defined so that a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the end of the big hit game. Times ", that is, the time-saving period until the special symbol lottery is executed four times during the time-saving state without winning a jackpot (until the fourth special symbol lottery result is stopped (confirmed)). Have been.

  The "big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four rounds as the big hit game, and the big hit game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for four rounds is executed. Then, it is defined that a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and "15 time reductions", that is, In the state, a time-saving period is defined until the lottery is executed 15 times without winning a special jackpot in the special symbol lottery (until the 15th special symbol lottery result is stopped (confirmed display)).

  That is, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a lottery of a special symbol, a jackpot game of four rounds is always executed, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed. When the set jackpot type is “big hit A” (99% of the big hit), when the number of times of saving “4 times” is “big hit B” (1% of the big hit) It is configured such that the number of time savings “15” is set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the time reduction state, a special hit game (a game in which a ball is thrown into the special figure entrance 64 and the aim is to win a jackpot by a special symbol lottery) during the normal state is a big hit. It is configured such that a special electric game (a game aiming for a big hit by causing a ball to be won (V winning) in the V winning opening 165 based on a lottery of a normal symbol as a starting point) is easily executed, and is configured to be executed more easily than in the normal state. The time saving state is configured to be a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the "big hit B" in which the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is difficult to end (the condition for ending the time saving state is hard to be satisfied) is a big hit type more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A". .

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the jackpot game of the same number of rounds is executed in all jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this. A different number of round games may be executed according to the jackpot type. Further, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed in all jackpots, and the number of time savings (time saving termination condition) is set according to the jackpot type. It is configured to be different, but without being limited to this, a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set at the end of the jackpot game according to the selected jackpot type and a jackpot type in which the normal state is set are provided. May be.

  Next, the contents of the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2. The V jackpot type selection table 202c2 is a data table in which game contents of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) executed when the ball has won the V winning port 165 (V jackpot) are defined. Specifically, "big hit C" is defined in the entire range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 99".

  The “big hit C” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 10 rounds as the big hit game and the big hit game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 10 rounds is executed. . Then, it is defined that a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game. During the state, a time-short period is defined until the special symbol lottery is executed four times without winning a jackpot (until the fourth special symbol lottery result is stopped (confirmed)).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game executed based on the V winning (the jackpot executed in the special electric game) is more than the jackpot game executed based on the special figure lottery (the jackpot game executed in the special figure game). (Game) is configured to execute a jackpot game with a larger number of rounds. In other words, in terms of the bonus amount (the number of prize balls) given during the jackpot game, the gaming state is more advantageous for the player in the time reduction state than in the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured to be acquired based on the fact that a ball has been won in the special power operation port 643, and the process is executed based on the fact that a V-win has been achieved during the per-accessory game. The jackpot game (V jackpot game) is a V jackpot type selection based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of winning the ball in the special power operation port 643 which triggered the execution of the V-winning bonus game. It is configured to be executed based on the jackpot type selected with reference to the table 202c2.

  In the present embodiment, since there is only one jackpot type (small jackpot C) defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2, the same content is obtained even when a V prize has been won for any of the per-game hits. Although the big hit game is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of big hit types may be defined in the V big hit type selection table 202c2 according to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2. Further, a plurality of special power operation ports may be provided in the general power winning device 640, and the jackpot type may be set in correspondence with the special power operation port where the ball has won among the plurality of special power operation ports. Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired based on the fact that the ball has won the V winning opening 165 during the execution of the bonus hit game, and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is obtained. You may be comprised so that a big hit type may be selected based on it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is selected regardless of the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot or at the time of the ball winning the V winning opening 165. However, without being limited to this, the game state set after the jackpot game is variable according to the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot or at the time of the ball winning the V winning port 165. In this case, for example, immediately before the end of the time-saving state (immediately before the stop of the final change of the special symbol in the time-saving state), a game per ordinary drawing is executed, and after the time-saving state ends, After the big hit game is completed only when the player wins the V-prize during the bonus game executed in the state where the state is set, that is, only when the player wins the V in the special state game during the normal state. Short termination condition is satisfied difficult time reduction state (e.g., the time-shortening number 20 times time reduction state) may be configured to be set.

  In the present embodiment, three types of jackpot types are used. However, the number of types is not limited thereto, and two or less types may be provided, or four or more types may be provided. In addition, the same jackpot type may be set in a case where a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and in a case where a V prize is won in a special electric game. Furthermore, the selection ratio and the type of the jackpot type selected this time may be made different based on the information on the jackpot type selected in the past (for example, the content of the jackpot game or the transition of the game state). . With this configuration, the player can be interested in past game histories (big hit histories). In this case, it is preferable to execute a suggestion effect that can indicate to the player a jackpot type that is likely to be set at the next jackpot based on the past jackpot history. This makes it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The rough display mode (variable time) such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, super reach, or the like is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 55) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) that stores a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Have been.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 25A, the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 used when the normal state is set as the gaming state and a time table used when the time reduction state is set. Table 202d2. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the data table used to select the variation pattern according to the game state is different, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is different. be able to.

  Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 25B and 25C. FIG. 25B is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents defined in the normal table 202d1. The normal table 202d1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and has a longer fluctuation time when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit than when the special symbol lottery result is lost. Is defined so that the variation pattern of the pattern can be easily selected.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25B, the lottery result of the special symbol (special figure) is “big hit”, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”. Various types of normal reach with a variation time of 20 seconds are defined in association with each other, and a super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds to 120 seconds is defined in the range of "51 to 198". In FIG. 25 (b), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is shown as "60 seconds to 120 seconds" in the range of "51 to 198" in order to simplify the description of the variation pattern of the hit super reach. Actually, predetermined fluctuation times (for example, fluctuation time of 60 seconds, fluctuation time of 100 seconds, and fluctuation time of 120 seconds) are respectively defined in the corresponding range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit” and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “51 to 198”, “60 seconds to” corresponding to the obtained value is obtained. A variation pattern in which any variation time of “120 seconds” is set.

  When the lottery result is “out of range”, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in a range of “0 to 179” in association with a short range of 8 seconds in the fluctuation time, and in the range of “180 to 194”. A fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified in association with a normal reach, and a range of "195 to 198" is defined in association with a super reach of fluctuation time of 60 to 120 seconds. Note that the content of the lottery result being “out of place” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 being in the range of “195 to 198” has the same purpose as the above-described case where the lottery result is “big hit (hit)”. Yes, the explanation is simplified.

  That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the types of the variable time that can be selected are made the same, and only the rate at which each variable time is selected is made different. ing. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (hit), the ratio of selecting a longer fluctuation time is higher than in the case of a loss. Therefore, the longer the special symbol change during execution becomes, the higher the expectation of the jackpot win can be raised. Therefore, when a special symbol change with a long change time is executed, the player is required to change the special symbol change before the change time elapses. Can be prevented from getting tired of the game.

  In the present embodiment, that is, in this embodiment, as the fluctuation time set for the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the longer the fluctuation time is set as the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is smaller. It is configured to be. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed frequently occurs. When the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, a short fluctuation time is set, so that the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls reaching the upper limit. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball is thrown.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the length of the set variable time is set by configuring the type of the variable time that can be selected to be the same regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. By grasping, it is configured so that the lottery result of the special symbol can be prevented from being exposed to the player in advance, but without being limited to this, the lottery result of the special symbol is The variation time selected only in the case or the variation time selected only in the case of the departure may be partially settable.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (b), in the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected based on a special symbol lottery result (win / fail determination result) and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a variation pattern may be selected based on a jackpot type set when a jackpot is won.

  Next, the contents of the time saving table 202d2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 25C, the symbol type, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with the variation pattern in the time reduction table 202d2.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), when the result of the determination of the success or failure (lottery result) is "hit (big hit)", the value of the variation type counter CS1 varies within the range of "0 to 99". A “hit short” with a time of 50 seconds is defined, and a “hit long” with a variation time of 200 seconds is defined in the range of “100 to 198”. In the case of "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", "short out A" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined, and in the range of "150 to 169", "Short off B" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined, "Short off C" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in the range of "170 to 189", and the fluctuation time is set in the range of "190 to 196". Is defined as "long out A" of 30 seconds, and "197, 198" is defined as "long out B" with a variation time of 50 seconds.

  As described above, during the time reduction state, unlike the normal state, the type of the fluctuating time that can be selected is different depending on whether the special symbol lottery result is winning or not. , The fluctuation time that can be selected when a jackpot is won is longer than the fluctuation time that can be selected in the case of a loss.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the period in which the time reduction state is set is a gaming state advantageous to the player, and in that time reduction period, the special electric game is executed based on the lottery of the ordinary symbols. In addition, as an end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition), an end condition (the number of time savings) based on the number of times of changing the special symbol (the number of lotteries) is set.

  Therefore, when the special fluctuation is executed during the time reduction state, the longer fluctuation time is selected, the longer the period during which the time reduction state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set. Then, in the special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state, for example, when four time reductions are set, the special symbol lottery executed four times after the time reduction state is set is a jackpot winning (1 / 100), a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected as the added value. With such a configuration, when a special symbol jackpot is won within a limited period of time reduction, a more advantageous game can be provided to the player. Can be performed.

  In addition, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the fluctuation time selected as "10 seconds to 50 seconds" is provided with a maximum of five times the difference, so that the deviation fluctuation with a longer fluctuation time is selected. The player can play the game while expecting the player to perform the game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12A, the remaining time reduction period mode 801 for indicating the length of the time reduction state period (V rush period) is displayed on the big hit game end screen. The remaining time reduction period mode 801 is within the range until the time reduction end condition is satisfied, and is determined in advance based on the winning information included in the special symbol hold already acquired. Is configured to be displayed.

  With such a configuration, whether the number of seconds displayed as the remaining short time period mode 801 is a display mode obtained by adding the fluctuation times of a plurality of out-of-place fluctuations, or a display corresponding to the fluctuation time of one single jackpot fluctuation It is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to predict whether the mode is an aspect.

  Returning to FIG. 22, the description will be continued. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 999, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the ordinary symbol is set by the second random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the second random number table 202b. Is determined to be a normal symbol (second symbol) when the value matches the random number value which is set as a hit. Further, the second random number table 202b is divided into two types, one for low probability of a normal symbol and the other for high probability of having a higher probability of hitting a symbol than the low probability. The number of jackpot random numbers is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  The contents specified in the second random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 23 (c), in the case of the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the acquired second random number counter C4 is set to the value of “0”, the ordinary symbol is determined, and in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. In some cases, the obtained per-random number is set in the range of the acquired second random number counter C4 of “0 to 299”.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability (1/1000) of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the low probability. Thereby, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the time reduction state, which is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, in the normal state, Since it is possible to make it harder to win per ordinary figure, it is possible to prevent a situation where a game per ordinary figure is executed during a normal state and a ball wins in the ordinary electric winning device 640. On the other hand, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability (300/1000) of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the regular symbol winning game based on the winning of the ordinary symbol during the time reduction state.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the game per game performed during the normal state, the ball is less likely to win the general game winning device 640 than the game per game performed during the time saving state. In addition, even if a ball wins in the normal electricity prize winning device 640 during the normal state, the winning ball is unlikely to enter the special power operation port 643. In other words, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to win a per-figure during the normal state, and even if the game is won per peri-figure, the ball will be awarded to the per-prize winning device 640 during the per-figure game It is configured such that even if the ball wins the general electricity prize winning device 640, the winning ball does not easily win the special power operation port 643.

  As described above, in a plurality of processes (three processes) from the execution of the normal symbol lottery to the winning of the ball to the special power operation port 643, it is more difficult to progress the game in the normal state than in the time reduction state. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent a ball from winning in the special power operation port 643 upon a lottery of a normal symbol executed during the normal state and a game per accessory being executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the above-described three processes, instead of controlling the winning of the ball to the special power operation port 643 based on the execution of the normal symbol lottery during the normal state, the normal state is not set. Even in the middle, a short variation time (3 seconds as in the time reduction state) is set as the variation time of the normal symbol. In other words, even if it is configured such that the lottery of ordinary symbols is easily executed in a short period of time, the ball is restricted from winning in the special power operation port 643 by the regulation in the above three processes. As a result, the ball wins in the special power operation port 643 when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed, and the execution of the game per accessory can be surely prevented.

  In this way, by setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal state to be short, at the timing when the gaming state is switched, for example, at the timing when the time reduction state is set after the end of the big hit game, the normal state (the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) ) The normal symbol fluctuation of the long fluctuation time executed during is executed across the transition timing of the gaming state, and the special symbol fluctuation during the time reduction state is started, but the normal symbol fluctuation during the time reduction state is started. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where a lottery cannot be executed. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the time saving state is managed for a period, it is possible to provide a game (special electric game) that effectively uses the limited time saving period to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described three processes (probability of hitting the normal symbol, winning rate of the ball to the general winning award device 640 in the game of the ordinary winning time, and the ball winning the general award winning device 640 are the special power operating ports 643. (A prize rate of winning a prize), it is configured to restrict the prize of a ball to the special power operation port 643 during the normal state, but is not limited to this, and is configured to regulate in two or less processes. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, when the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 does not win in the special power operation port 643, the ball enters the out port 644 so that a privilege (for example, a prize ball) is not given to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a ball enters the out port 644, more prize balls are paid out than when a ball enters the special power operation port 643. You may.

  With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a ball from winning in the special power operation port 643 during the normal state, and to provide a different privilege (principle for executing a game per role) when the general winning device 640 is won. Can be provided to the player, so that a surprising game can be provided to the player. In addition, in a state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is possible to provide the player with an added value in the case of winning per ordinary symbol.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 999), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 55).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  The ordinary figure variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined by the value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, it is configured such that the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is determined using the acquired value of the ordinary symbol fluctuation type counter CS2.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined corresponding to the various counters shown in FIG. Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a first random number table 202a, a second random number table 202b, a big hit type selection table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d and at least various operation scenario tables 202e. The first random number table 202a, the second random number table 202b, the jackpot type selection table 202c, and the variation pattern selection table 202d have been described when describing the various counters illustrated in FIG. .

  The various operation scenario table 202e is a data table having an operation scenario in which the operation contents of various movable members for which the main control device 110 manages operation control are specified in a time series in advance. Are read when the operation of the movable member is controlled. In the present embodiment, when controlling the operation of the movable member, an operation scenario that matches the current operation control condition is read from the various operation scenario tables 202e, and the read operation scenario is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 203. Remember. Then, in the main processing (see FIG. 55) executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the storage area are periodically updated (in units of 4 milliseconds) and correspond to the updated values. When there is an operation scenario for variably operating the movable member in the area, an operation control based on the operation scenario is executed. Further, each operation scenario table is not provided for each movable member, but is set in units of one event (big hit game, general per-game, per-accessible game) for controlling the operation of the movable member. Therefore, in the operation scenario table corresponding to an event (for example, a game per ordinary drawing) in which the operation of a plurality of movable members needs to be controlled within one event, the operation control contents to be executed for the plurality of movable members are defined. Have been.

  Here, the contents of the various operation scenario tables 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the various operation scenario tables 202e. As shown in FIG. 26A, the various operation scenario tables 202e include a jackpot operation scenario table 202e1, an accessory operation scenario table 202e2, a public figure operation scenario table 202e3, and a first movable valve scenario table 202e4. ing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26B, the contents of the per-principal operation scenario table 202e2 will be described. FIG. 26B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various contents defined in the per-prize action scenario table 202e2. The per-government operation scenario table 202e2 is a data table in which the per-government scenario in which the operation content during the per-government game is set is defined. From the start until the V winning device 65 is opened (until the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON)), the round period (the maximum period during which the V winning device 65 is opened), the ending period (the V winning device 65). (The grace period from when the storage solenoid 209c is turned off) is set, and is set when a per-accessory game is started, and is periodically (main processing of the main control device 110). The operation control corresponding to the value of a scenario counter (not shown) to which the value is incremented by 1 each time (a) is executed.

  Specifically, when the bonus game is started, the value of the scenario counter is set to “1”. In the scenario counter “1”, an operation scenario for setting the storage solenoid 209c to ON is defined as a corresponding operation scenario, so that the storage solenoid 209c is set to ON at the same time as the start of the per-bonus game, and the storage valve is set. The storage valve 66a is moved to a state where the ball can be stored in the storage portion formed on the upper surface of the 66a. Then, the value of the scenario counter is added every 4 milliseconds, and the scenario counter “25”, that is, the opening period ends 0.1 seconds after the start of the per-game game, At the timing when the value becomes "26", the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON, and the V opening / closing door 65a (V attacker) is opened. That is, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 66a is configured to be changed to the storage state using a period from the start of the game per accessory to the opening of the V winning device 65. With this configuration, even if the ball vigorously wins the V prize device 65 immediately after the V prize device 65 is opened, the storage valve 66a is already set at the timing when the V prize device 65 is opened. Is changed to the storage state, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from passing through the storage valve 66a and winning in the V winning opening 165.

  Next, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is “375”, that is, at the timing when 1.6 seconds have elapsed since the start of the per-prize game, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned off, and the V opening / closing door 65a (V (Attacker) is closed. Then, after the closing control of the V opening / closing door 65a (V attacker) is executed, that is, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is “376”, the ending period of the per-accessory game is set, and the storage solenoid 209c is set to off. It is stipulated that Then, until the value of the scenario counter reaches “750”, the closed state (ending period) of the game per accessory is set.

  That is, in the per-accessory game executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the V winning device 65 is configured to be opened after the storage valve 66a is shifted to the storage state. The scenario is defined so that the storage solenoid 209c is set to be turned off after the timing of closing the V winning device 65 (scenario counter “375”). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an unexpected situation from occurring at the time of starting or ending the game per accessory, and suppressing the execution of the game per accessory at an unintended timing.

  Next, the content of the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents of the scenario defined in the first movable valve scenario 202e4. The first movable valve 66b of the present embodiment is controlled so as to move in a predetermined operation pattern while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The operation of the first movable valve 66b is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110 executed in the case where it is performed (see S1715 in FIG. 54). The configuration is such that the value of the scenario counter is updated (1 added) by a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55).

  As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the first movable valve 66b in the present embodiment is in a V winning possible state in which a ball can be awarded to the V winning opening 165, and a ball can be awarded in the V winning opening 165. It is configured to be located in any of the V winning difficult state where it is difficult to make the winning. In the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on (the ball moves to the V winning opening 165 in the first movable valve 66b) when the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1” to “1500”. An operation scenario in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off (a state in which the ball cannot easily enter the V winning opening 165 with the first movable valve 66b) is defined.

  Specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1250", that is, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off until 5 seconds elapse after the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set. When the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1251” to “1500”, that is, for 5 seconds to 5.5 seconds after the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on. An operation scenario is defined to be set. Then, when the value of the scenario counter reaches the upper limit value “1500”, the value of the scenario counter is switched from “1500” to “1” when the next main process (see FIG. 55) is executed. Thereafter, the operation control based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is repeatedly executed until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first movable valve 66b, which is a variable member for permitting or prohibiting the winning of the ball into the V winning opening 165, is set for 0.5 second for 5.5 seconds. It is configured to perform a variable operation so as to switch to a state in which a ball can be won in the V winning opening 165. Thus, when a ball arrives at the first movable valve 66b at random timing, the probability that the ball passes through the first movable valve 66b and wins the V winning opening 165 is 1/11. Make up. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which bonus game to win the ball at the V winning opening 165, and it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in all the bonus games.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if a plurality of balls wins in the V winning device 65 during one game per accessory, the number of balls that can reach the first movable valve 66b is not increased. It is configured to be one. As a result, the jackpot probability (probability that the ball wins the V winning opening 165) in the per-principal game becomes approximately 1/11, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with the jackpot game excessively. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the operation content of the first movable valve 66b is configured such that the same operation content is always set during the period when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, but is not limited thereto. The first operation pattern may be a predetermined operation pattern, for example, a first operation pattern defined as an off period (5.5 seconds) and an on period (0.5) seconds of the first movable valve solenoid 209d; An operation scenario in which an off period (3 seconds), an on period (0.2 seconds), an off period (2 seconds), and a second operation pattern defined as an on period (0.3 seconds) is set in order is set. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the same operation scenario is repeatedly set after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the power of the pachinko machine 10 may be turned on. It is also possible to provide a measuring means for measuring the elapsed time from the time, and to switch to a different operation scenario based on the measurement result by the measuring means. In this case, only when the measurement result of the measuring means is a specific measurement result (for example, within one hour after power-on, or 3 hours to 3 hours and 10 minutes after power-on), the first operation scenario is compared with the normal operation scenario. It is preferable that the ratio of the period in which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to ON be higher than the ratio of the period in which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF. With such a configuration, the jackpot game (V jackpot game) can be easily executed during the time-saving game only for a specific period, and the player can play the game for the period. Operation can be improved.

  Further, the control content of the operation scenario may be made different depending on the game situation. For example, the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set to an initial state (scenario counter) at a timing when a specific jackpot game is executed and when it ends. From the value “1” of the pachinko machine, or the result of the special symbol lottery continuously deviates for a predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times which is the reciprocal of the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10). In this case, a special operation scenario in which the ratio of the period in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on is higher than the ratio of the period in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off is set as compared with the normal operation scenario. May be configured. Then, once the special operation scenario is set, it is preferable that the time-saving state is set thereafter, and the time-saving state is set continuously until the time-saving state ends. Thereby, the special operation scenario is set, so that the player can continuously play the game. In this case, it is preferable to provide a notifying unit for notifying the player that the special operation scenario has been set. With this configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player that the special action scenario is set.

  Next, the contents of the per-figure-per-operation scenario table 202e3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27B is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the per-figure-per-operation scenario table 202e3. The per-figure-period operation scenario table 202e3 is a data table in which a per-figure per-figure game operation pattern that is executed when a win is made in the ordinary symbol lottery is stored. An operation scenario corresponding to the set game state is set.

  Specifically, the per-figure per-figure operation scenario table 202e3 includes a per-figure per-figure per-figure scenario 202e31 in which a per-figure per-figure game operation scenario to be executed during the normal state is executed, and is executed during the time-saving state. A time-saving general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e32 in which an operation scenario of a general-purpose per-game is defined.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 27 (c), the contents of the normal general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e31 will be described. FIG. 27C is a schematic diagram showing the scenario contents defined in the normal general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e31. In the normal symbol winning scenario 202e31, in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), it is determined that the gaming state at the time when the winning winning ordinary symbol variation is stopped (confirmed) is the normal state ( This is an operation scenario to be set (S1118 in FIG. 48: No).

  The normal per-drawing scenario 202e31 includes a general-purpose solenoid for controlling the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the general-purpose winning award device 640 and a general-purpose winning award device for a scenario counter value in a range of “1” to “1050”. An operation scenario for turning on and off the second movable valve solenoid 209e that controls the operation of the second movable valve 642 that distributes the flow destination of the winning ball to 640 is defined.

  Specifically, after the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1” to “1025”, that is, after the normal general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e31 is set (after the general-purpose per-figure game in the normal state is executed), 4 Until one second elapses, the general-purpose solenoid is off (the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state), the second movable valve solenoid 209e is off (the ball is allowed to flow down to the out port 644), and thereafter, When the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1026” to “1050”, that is, for 0.1 second between 4.1 and 4.2 seconds after the execution of the scenario 202e31 per normal general-purpose figure, the general-purpose solenoid is turned on. The operation scenario is defined such that the ON state (the electric accessory 640a is open) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is ON (the ball flows down to the special power operation port 643).

  In other words, when the game is executed in the normal state, the game in the closed state (4.1 seconds) and the open state (0.1 seconds) are executed. Further, even if the ball wins the general winning award device 640 during the open state for 0.1 second, at that time the second movable valve 643 causes the winning ball to flow down to the out port 644 (see FIG. 4). , It is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning into the special power operation port 643.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the content of the time-saving general-purpose figure per-day scenario 202e32 will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the scenario contents defined in the time-saving general-purpose per-scenario 202e32. In this time saving general symbol winning scenario 202e32, when the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) determines that the gaming state at the time when the winning normal symbol variation stops (confirms) is the normal state ( This is an operation scenario to be set (S1118 in FIG. 48: Yes).

  For the time saving general-purpose scenario 202e32 and the value of the scenario counter in the range of “1” to “1025”, a general-purpose solenoid that controls the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the general-purpose winning device 640, and a general-purpose winning device 640 An operation scenario for turning on and off the second movable valve solenoid 209e for controlling the operation of the second movable valve 642 for distributing the flow destination of the winning ball is defined.

  More specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1” to “25”, that is, 0 after the normal general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e31 is set (after the per-normal-period game in the normal state is executed). Until one second elapses, the state in which the general-purpose solenoid is set to off (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to be on (state in which the ball flows down to the special electric operation port 643). After that, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “26” to “775”, that is, three seconds between 0.1 seconds and 3.1 seconds after the scenario 202e32 per time saving general figure is set, The general-purpose solenoid is set to ON (the electric accessory 640a is open), the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON continuously, and the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “776” to “1024”, that is, Until 3.1 seconds to 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the setting of the time saving per-day scenario 202e32, the general-purpose solenoid is turned off (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on. (A state in which the ball is caused to flow down to the special power operation port 643), and when the value of the scenario counter becomes “1025”, that is, the upper limit value specified in the scenario 202e32 per time saving general drawing, the second movable state An operation scenario is defined such that the valve solenoid 209e is turned off (a state in which the ball flows down to the out port 644).

  In other words, when the per-figure-period game is executed in the time-saving state, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the per-figure-period game is immediately executed for 3 seconds through a short-time closed state (0.1 second). Is done. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the general winning award device 640 than in the normal game per game in the normal state.

  Furthermore, in the time-saving general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e32, during the period in which the ball can enter the general-purpose winning device 640, the position where the second movable valve 643 can allow the ball to enter the special power operation port 643 (FIG. 5). ) Can be set, so that a ball can be easily won to the special power operation port 643 during a game per ordinary drawing.

  In addition, the above-described normal scenario per figure 202e31 and the time-saving general figure per scenario 202e32 specify that the operation scenario for the second movable valve solenoid 209d is the same. The operation control contents can be unified, and the process of controlling the variable members can be simplified.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, the game per game drawing includes a time ending condition that is established based on the passage of time (a condition that the scenario per game drawing is updated to the upper limit value) and a game winning device. A winning ending condition that is established when the winning number of balls to 640 reaches the upper limit (for example, five) is set. When a normal game is being played, the winning ending condition is set so that the time ending condition is satisfied first. Thereby, for example, in a per-figure game, it is possible to suppress an act of illegally winning a large number of balls into the general-purpose winning device 640.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 22, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 55), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 54). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When NMI is input to the NMI, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 53) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, a winning number counter 203e, and an operation. Counter group 203f, gaming state storage area 203g, time saving counter 203h, big hit flag 203i, time saving end flag 203j, bonus per hit flag 203k, special figure temporary stop flag 203m, special figure fluctuation time counter 203n, V flag 203p, other memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a stores various counter values obtained based on the fact that a ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). This is a storage area for storing.

  The special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the special symbol, and when the special symbol stops changing, the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a storage area in which, when various counter values are stored in the memory, the various counter values are shifted and stored.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) include a first random number counter C1 obtained from a counter buffer (see FIG. 22) upon detection of a winning start, and a first hit type. The values of the counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 from the counter buffer. Is obtained and stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the special symbol change (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a jackpot lottery or setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to one starting winning is stored in the special symbol holding ball. Shift to the execution area. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b includes a second random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) in accordance with the detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (start winning), and a general figure variation type counter CS2. This is a storage area in which values are stored. When detecting that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 reads the value of the second random number counter C4 from the counter buffer. , The value of the ordinary symbol change type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one holding area so that data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to one time. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the data of the holding balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning), from the holding area where the data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. .

  In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the winning start, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol hitting lottery is performed. And a memory for storing data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of a display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data (the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the ordinary figure variation type counter CS2) corresponding to each starting prize stored in the ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to one starting prize is set to the normal Shift to the symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Based on the winning in the special figure entrance 64 detected in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds, It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display effect performed by the one symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81). The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero as an initial value by an initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed for display is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one every time the variable display effect is executed.

  Also, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the fact that a ball has entered the special special figure entrance 64 (start winning). When the counter value is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is incremented by one.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in a special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 stores the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). In the special symbol change start processing (see S205 in FIG. 41), the data stored in the special symbol change processing is referred to, a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. I do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a special figure variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  In the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the ball passes through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). ) Is a counter for counting the number of balls to be held (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to one time. The ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is a counter that stores the total number of retaining balls stored based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. In the initialization process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54), zero is set as an initial value. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, 1 is added to the maximum value (see S1204 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the ordinary symbol change display is executed (see S1105 in FIG. 48).

  The winning number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the V winning device 65 or the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 during the round game in the bonus game. Specifically, based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection port (not shown) provided in the V winning device 65, it is updated by being added one by one. On the other hand, when one round is completed, a detecting means capable of detecting the number of winnings in the V winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203e) and the number of discharged (the number of passing balls provided in each winning opening). Is determined, the number is reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203e is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter group 203k is a counter for measuring (updating) the progress of various operation scenarios that have been set, and includes a scenario counter corresponding to each of the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e. When any one of the operation scenarios in the various operation scenario tables 202e is set, a counter value update process is executed as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). Is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e may be executed in duplicate. For example, a scenario relating to a per-figure game and a scenario relating to a per-accessory game are configured to be simultaneously executable. Therefore, the scenario counters are provided corresponding to the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the scenario counters for the upper limit number of scenarios that can be executed simultaneously may be provided. In this case, when the scenario counter is provided with a type and a new operation scenario is set, an unused scenario counter type is determined, and a scenario counter is set based on the determination result. The use information for indicating which operation scenario is used may be set, and the use information set in the storage unit of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 may be set. Further, the storage unit in which the usage information is set may be provided with a backup function capable of holding the stored information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, similarly to various configurations of the RAM 203. . With this configuration, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the operation control based on the operation scenario, the operation control after the power is restored is continued from the state before the power failure. Becomes possible.

  The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and is a game state corresponding to the game state (set state of the time reduction counter 203h) set after the end of the big hit game. Is stored. Specifically, when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0, the normal state is stored, and when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a value larger than 0, the time reduction state is stored.

  Furthermore, in the state where the big hit game and the per-item game are being executed, a hit game state (a big-hit state and a per-item game state) indicating that each hit game is being executed is executed. Type information indicating a jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game is also stored. In addition, the game-per-figure-per-game information indicating that the game per game-per-figure is being executed is also stored.

  Then, a status command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the game status storage area 203g, and the status command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output status command and temporarily stores it in the slave status setting area 223g.

  The information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g is configured to be able to hold the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the startup process (see FIG. 54) performed, a state command corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g is set.

  Thus, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the audio lamp control device 113 can determine the current game state.

  The time reduction counter 203j is a counter for indicating a state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and a value corresponding to the case where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set is set. After the big hit game ends, a value corresponding to the won big hit type is set in the time-saving counter 203j (S1914 and 1915 in FIG. 56). And when the big hit game is won, it is cleared to 0. Thereby, since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player during the jackpot game.

  In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is set, and the value of the time reduction counter 203j is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (fluctuation). When the value of becomes zero, the time saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, until the next big hit game is executed, You may be comprised so that the high probability state of a symbol may continue. In this case, the value of the time reduction counter 203j may be set to "10000".

  In the present embodiment, only the condition for terminating the time-saving state and the condition for subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203j are the conditions for subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203j based on the number of special symbol lotteries (changes). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an end condition that can be satisfied by the content of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is subtracted. May be. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special out-of-order lottery), or Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning for a special public figure), the value of the time saving counter 203j may be subtracted, or when the ball wins the special power operation port 643. Alternatively, the value of the time reduction counter 203j may be subtracted.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is configured to be decremented by one. However, a plurality of values of the time reduction counter 203j are grouped (for example, 2) according to the type of the end condition that is satisfied. The subtraction may be performed, or the subtraction may be performed such that the value of the time reduction counter 203j becomes “0” regardless of the current value of the time reduction counter 203j. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time reduction state continues, and to interest the player in the game during the time reduction state.

  Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the time-saving state may be changed depending on the content of the condition (small jackpot type) for setting the time-saving state. Thereby, not only can the player execute the jackpot game, but also the player can be interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  The jackpot flag 203i is set to ON when the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is determined to be a jackpot at the start of the fluctuation based on the fact that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64. Is a flag to be executed. In addition, when the big hit game ends, it is set to off.

  The time saving end flag 203h is a flag for indicating that the time saving ending condition is satisfied, and is set to ON when the time saving ending condition is satisfied. The time-saving end flag 203h indicates that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 in the special symbol variation starting process (see S205 in FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, that is, the current special figure variation is in the time-saving state. Is set to ON when it is determined that this is the final fluctuation (see S311 in FIG. 41). Then, it is referred to in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) (see S802 in FIG. 45), and when it is determined that the switch is ON, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is reset to “0” and the time reduction state is set. A process for terminating the process is executed (see S803 in FIG. 45) and set to off (see S804 in FIG. 45).

  In addition, during a special symbol change executed during a state in which the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON (during a final change in the time reduction state), when a ball wins in the V winning opening 165 and a V jackpot game is executed. Is also set to off (see S1508 in FIG. 52).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter 203h is performed at the start timing of the change of the special symbol, and the end process for determining the end of the time reduction is performed at the stop timing of the change of the special symbol. I have. Then, when the special symbol change is interrupted by the special hit game during the change of the special symbol, and the big hit game (V big hit game) is executed in response to the special hit game, the time reduction end flag 203h is turned off. It is configured to be set.

  Therefore, for example, even if the V jackpot game is executed in a state where the time reduction end flag 203h is set to ON and the special symbol change interrupted after the end of the jackpot game is resumed, the restarted special symbol change is not performed. It is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending at the fluctuation stop timing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter 203h is executed at the start of the change of the special symbol, so that the subtraction process of the time-saving end flag 203h may be executed at the restart of the special symbol change. There is no. Therefore, when the time reduction state is set after the end of the big hit game, a process of subtracting the value of the time reduction counter 203j from the time when the next special symbol change after the restart of the special symbol change is started is executed. .

  With this configuration, the player can play the game for a longer time in the set time saving state, and the player's willingness to play can be increased. In the present embodiment, the process of updating the time-saving state only for the final fluctuation of the time-saving state is performed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the value of the time-saving counter 203j may be a predetermined value (for example, 2 Also in the case of ()), the process for updating the time saving state may be performed at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol.

  The accessory hit flag 203k is a flag for indicating that the accessory hit game is executed, and is set to ON when the accessory hit game is executed. The bonus per hit flag 203k is turned on when a ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 during the general per hit game wins the special power operating port 643 and the per hit special game is not executed at that time. (See S1307 in FIG. 50). Then, in various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is referred to when determining whether or not a game per accessory is performed, and is set to off when the game per accessory is finished. In this embodiment, when the accessory hit flag 203k is set to ON, the special symbol change is interrupted.

  The special figure temporary stop flag 203m is a flag indicating a period in which the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure is stopped, and when set to ON, stops the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time and turns ON. When the setting is turned off from the set state, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

  The special figure temporary stop flag 203m is for indicating that the special symbol change is temporarily stopped (interrupted), and is set to ON when the special symbol change is temporarily stopped (interrupted). Things. In the present embodiment, when a ball is won in the special power operation port 643, a game per role is configured to be executable, and when the game per role is executed, the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed is stopped. It is configured to be.

  The special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S307 of S6 in FIG. 43). Is set (see SS509 in FIG. 43). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the special symbol change execution process (see S206 in FIG. 44) is executed. In the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether the value is 0 (see S204 in FIG. 40). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure variation time counter 203a is 0 (S204: No in FIG. 40), a special symbol variation stop process for stopping the special symbol that is changing (see S287 in FIG. 45). ) Is executed.

  Further, when a special hit game or a big hit game is executed, the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is configured to interrupt the processing for subtracting the value. Therefore, the value of the special figure variation time counter 203n is not subtracted during the bonus hit game or the big hit game.

  The V flag 203p is a flag for indicating that the ball has won the V winning opening during the per game play, and is set to ON when the ball has won the V winning opening during the per game play. Is what is done. The setting status of this V flag 203p is referred to in the accessory hit control process (see S1805 in FIG. 58) (see S2008 in FIG. 58), and when it is set to ON, the start of the big hit game (V big hit game) is started. This is set (see S2010 in FIG. 58). Thereafter, it is set to off (see S2011 in FIG. 58).

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of the open / close plate 650b of the specific winning opening 650a. A special winning opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing forward and closing, a V winning opening solenoid 209b for opening and closing the opening and closing door 65a of the V winning device 65, and a storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65 are provided. The storage solenoid 209c for driving, the first movable valve solenoid 209d for driving the first movable valve 66b, and the second movable valve solenoid 209e for driving the second movable valve 643 in the general winning award device 640. Also, a solenoid 209 including a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected. MPU201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the output port 205.

  In addition, the input / output port 205 includes a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) (for example, a storage sensor 65 s for detecting a ball stored in a storage unit formed in a storage valve 66 a in the V winning device 65) and the like. The various switches 208 and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115 are connected. The MPU 201 outputs a signal output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the above.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 53) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 30A, the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and an operation scenario table 222b.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation pattern of each variation pattern type (outside, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set in a variation value selection counter value (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed change pattern based on the change pattern type indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various kinds of change modes while strictly observing rough information such as the change time and the type of the change pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, a variation effect in which the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the special symbol variation to be executed is executed. . In this fluctuation effect, the detailed fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type, the result of the determination of success / failure indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the acquired counter value for selection. By visually recognizing the fluctuating effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, a game (special figure game) can be performed while predicting whether or not the current special symbol fluctuation has won a big hit.

  On the other hand, when the time reduction state is set, the special effect that the variable effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is not executed on the third symbol display device 81 and the regular symbol lottery is aimed at the V-hit game. The effect (V rush effect) for guiding the game content is executed. Therefore, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, various fluctuation patterns are defined as the fluctuation patterns that are referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and the fluctuation patterns that are referred to when the gaming state is the time saving state. Absent. In the case where the third symbol is displayed small on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the time reduction state in accordance with the special symbol variation, the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 What is necessary is just to comprise so that only the fluctuation | variation display mode corresponding to (variation time) may be prescribed | regulated.

  The operation scenario table 222b is a data table for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the status of operation control for various devices executed on the main control device 110 side. It is formed from the same data table as the operation scenario table 202e. When the operation scenario table 222b receives a command indicating the start of operation control (for example, a command indicating the start of a hit game) from the main control device 110, the operation scenario table 222b is used to set an operation scenario corresponding to the received command. Referenced. The operation scenario set here is controlled to be updated so as to synchronize with the update operation on the main control device 110 side.

  With this configuration, only the command indicating the start of operation control is output from the main control device 110, and the operation status of various devices and future operation development can be easily grasped on the sound lamp control device 113 side. It becomes possible. In the present embodiment, the operation scenario table 222b is provided on the sound lamp control device 113 for the purpose of reducing the processing load on the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The progress status of various operation scenarios included in the various operation scenario table 202e may be set as a command and output to the audio lamp control device 113 side.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 30 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol holding ball counter 223c, a special figure change start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag. 223e, effect counter 223f, slave state setting area 223g, look-ahead counter 223h, time saving period counter 223i, unreported period storage area 223j, unreported pending number storage area 223k, interruption flag 223m, special hit flag 223n, extension flag 223p, V At least a rush flag 223q, a fluctuation time counter 223r, a notification pending number storage area 223s, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the command is executed. To be more specific, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols, and each of these areas stores winning information. You. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the result of the lottery of the reserved ball before the start of the change.

  The special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. A counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by entering the special figure entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223c. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control unit 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c of the voice lamp control unit 113, is displayed. Is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 11B). As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The special figure variation start flag 223d is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when a special figure variation pattern command for notifying a variation pattern of a special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. . On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  The special figure stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON when a stop type command for notifying the special symbol change stop type output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 98. Each time the main process is executed, it is incremented by one and updated.

  In the slave state setting area 223g, data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set. Based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223g, the current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main controller 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the sound lamp controller 113.

  The look-ahead counter 223h is a counter for measuring the number of special figure reservations in which the fluctuation time is read ahead of the number of time savings set as the time saving state, and the number of time savings set when the time saving state is set. Is set, and the value is decremented in accordance with the number of special figure reservations in which the pre-reading of the variable time is executed. Then, it is referred to when the value of the time-saving period counter 223i described later becomes 0, and when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is not 0, it becomes a state in which the special symbol change is executed despite the time saving state. , A special effect (see FIG. 19A) is displayed.

  The time reduction period counter 223i is a counter that indicates the time of the special symbol fluctuation (the special figure fluctuation time) until the time reduction state ends, and a plurality of times until the special symbol fluctuation that satisfies the condition for ending the time reduction state ends. A value obtained by accumulating the special figure fluctuation time is set. The value of the time reduction counter 223i is referred to and subtracted from the effect update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio ramp control process 113 (see FIG. 60). 72 (S5303, S5304).

  The value indicated by the time reduction period counter 223i is used when setting the display mode of the timer 812 to indicate the remaining time of the V rush in the V rush effect performed during the time reduction state (see FIG. 12C)). . In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the game is performed by the same game method (left-handed game) as during the normal state, during the jackpot game, and during the time saving state, and is set after the jackpot game ends. The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is configured to easily reach the upper limit (4) at the timing when the time saving state is started.

  Therefore, on the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the number of time savings is set to four (see FIG. 12A), the special symbol holding information (the special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b) acquired at that time is displayed. Based on the prize information, the fluctuation time until the end of the time saving state (the cumulative value of the fluctuation times for four special figure fluctuations) is displayed.

  In addition, even if the number of time savings is a value larger than the upper limit (4) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, or if the number of time savings is set to four, the special symbol holding number at the end of the big hit game ( If the number of special figure reservations does not reach four, the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is set according to the special symbol reservation information acquired at that time, and the time reduction period is calculated from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h. The number of special symbol reservations added to the counter 223i is subtracted. Then, when new special symbol hold information is obtained, the special symbol change time is added to the time reduction counter 223i based on the obtained special symbol hold information, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted.

  The unreported period storage area 223j is in a state where the fluctuation time can be added to the time reduction period counter 223i, that is, when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more, despite the reception of the winning command, When the value of the special figure fluctuation time according to the included special symbol holding information cannot be added to the time reduction period counter 223i (for example, during a jackpot game or a bonus game), the special symbol holding information included in the received winning command is received. This area is used to temporarily store the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to.

  The value (special figure fluctuating time) stored in the unreported period storage area 223j is read out when the time saving period can be added, and is referred to when adding to the time saving period counter 223i. With this configuration, regardless of whether the time saving period can be added or not, when a winning command is received, it is only necessary to execute a process of reading the special figure variation time included in the winning command, The processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  The unreported number-of-reservations storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the number of winning commands in which the special figure fluctuation time is stored in the above-described unreported period storage area 223j, that is, the number of special symbol reserved balls. Thus, when the time saving period can be added, it is read out, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is decremented in accordance with the read value.

  The interruption flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the value of the time reduction period counter 223h is not subtracted, and is a state in which the value of the time reduction period counter 223h is not subtracted, that is, the game per bonus item and the big hit game are executed. It is set to ON when it is turned on.

  The special hit flag 223n is a flag that is set to ON when winning information indicating a special hit ("big hit B") is included in the special symbol stored and stored. The special hit flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined in the big hit end processing (see S4914 of FIG. 69) that the winning storage indicating the special hit is included in the hold storage (see S5013 of FIG. 69). ).

  In the present embodiment, when a special win is present in the special figure hold obtained at the end of the big hit game, only the period until the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the special win is reduced during the V rush. It is configured to be displayed as a period, and further configured to execute an effect (heaven mode) for notifying a player that a special hit exists in the special map reservation (FIG. 17 (a)).

  With such a configuration, after a predetermined period of time (after a short period of time displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81), a jackpot game (a jackpot won by the special figure lottery) is given to the player. Since the execution of the game can be notified in advance, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special winning ends is notified as a shortened period, so that the big hit is achieved. The remaining period of time and short-term at the time of the game (special hit) can be set to 0 seconds. Therefore, since it is possible to easily inform the player how many seconds the jackpot game will be executed, the V jackpot during the time-saving period of the heaven mode (during the time until the jackpot game of the special jackpot is executed). The game can be performed while the player can enjoy how many times the game can be executed.

  Further, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the change time of the special symbol change corresponding to the special hit is finished is notified as a shortened time period. The special figure fluctuating time corresponding to the special figure hold acquired after the figure hold can be prevented from being determined in advance by the player. Thereby, for example, when the jackpot game corresponding to the special hit is executed in a stage where the time saving period is 10 seconds remaining, the fluctuation time of the next special symbol change to be executed is 10 seconds in advance. It is possible to suppress that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

  The extension flag 223p is a flag that indicates that the time-saving state game is being executed at the timing when the time-saving state end condition is satisfied, and is executed at the time when the time-saving state end condition is satisfied. It is set to on when it is set. In the present embodiment, as the operation scenario of the per-figure game, the per-figure per-scenario 202e31 corresponding to the per-figure game in the normal state, and the And a scenario 202e32, and is configured to variably set the game content of the per-figure game based on the game state set at the per-figure-per-game execution timing.

  Therefore, for example, when the game per game is executed just before the end of the time reduction state, the game per game in the time reduction state may be executed even after the game state is shifted to the normal state. When such a state occurs, an effect is produced in which the end timing of the V rush effect indicating the game mode during the time reduction state is extended to the end timing of the game per ordinary figure (FIG. 16). (C)). This makes it possible to inform the player of the period in which a V prize is to be aimed (V rush period) in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The V rush flag 223q is a flag for indicating that it is a V rush period, and is set to ON when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery (special figure lottery) in a normal state, and a condition for terminating a time-saving state. Is set to off when the condition is satisfied. The V rush flag 223q is configured to be continuously set to ON even when a jackpot game is executed during a time reduction period (during V rush). This makes it possible to easily set a period in which various types of accumulated information (information for indicating the number of acquired V jackpot games and the number of acquired balls during the V rush period) in the V rush period are calculated.

  The fluctuation time counter 223r is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol. When a fluctuation pattern command of the special symbol is received, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is set, and the voice lamp control is performed. In the effect update processing (S4111 in FIG. 72) executed every 1 millisecond in the main processing of the processing 113 (see FIG. 60), reference and subtraction are performed (see S5303 and S5304 in FIG. 72). The value of the fluctuation time counter 223h is referred to when determining the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation being executed at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation can be interrupted, and is used to set a different effect mode according to the remaining period. Can be

  The notified pending number storage area 223s is an area for storing the number of special figure reservations corresponding to the fluctuation time already added to the value of the time reduction counter 223i, and the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is updated. In this case, the updated value is stored, and the value is subtracted when the special symbol change is completed. Then, at the end of the jackpot game in which the new number of time savings is set, a new time saving state is set by subtracting the value stored in the notified pending number storage area 223s from the value set in the look-ahead counter 223h. In this case, the number of special symbol reserved balls already notified as the remaining period of the time reduction state is subtracted, and the number of special symbol reserved balls that can newly add and display the time reduction period corresponds to the value of the look-ahead counter 223h. Used for

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the present embodiment, the effect that suggests the fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure hold acquired in the normal state to the player is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may be comprised so that the production | presentation aspect may be changed according to the special figure reservation content.

  For example, the special symbol stop type (combination of the third symbols indicating the jackpot) may be variably set based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the acquired special figure hold, and the total of the special figure hold fluctuation times is If a big hit is won in a state where the time exceeds 100 seconds, a combination of the third symbols in which odd numbers are stopped and displayed at the same time may be displayed.

  In addition, the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal state is configured to be variably set based on the length of the fluctuation time in addition to the presence or absence of the jackpot winning by the special figure lottery. You may.

  In the present embodiment, when the vehicle enters the V-rush, all the variable times based on the acquired special figure reservation are notified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The player may be notified of only a part of the fluctuating time based on the hold, or the player may operate the operating means, so that the duration of the V rush (a period until the time-saving state ends). May be configured to be selectable for a game in which the change time of the special symbol for indicating is not notified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the fluctuation times corresponding to a plurality of special figure fluctuations executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied are added and reported, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured so that the technician can identify the fluctuating time corresponding to the special figure reservation. In this case, for example, a special figure suspension display mode corresponding to a special figure change executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied is displayed in a display mode imitating a character, and the display mode is imitated according to the type of the displayed character. The configuration may be such that the player can roughly grasp the length of the change time of the special figure change corresponding to the special figure reservation.

  In this embodiment, since the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is always set after the big hit game is executed, the V rush flag is set when the big hit game is executed. However, for example, if the time reduction state and the normal state are set at a specific ratio after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot game is executed. Even so, there is a possibility that the time saving state is not set after the end of the big hit game. In this case, after the big hit game ends (during the ending period of the big hit game), it is determined whether or not the time saving state is set after the big hit game ends based on the set big hit type, and the time saving state is set. , It can be changed after the suspension of the special figure acquired at that time.

  Next, the contents of the game executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment triggered by the ordinary symbol lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the per-chart game is executed in the normal state, and FIG. 32 is the timing chart of the game when the per-chart game is executed in the time-saving state. 6 is a timing chart showing a flow.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 31, the flow of the game in the case where the game per ordinary figure is executed in the normal state will be described. In the present embodiment, a game (special electric game) that can proceed in the order of a general game per game, a game per character, and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) can be executed in response to a win in a normal symbol lottery. Make up. That is, the big hit game can be executed without performing the special symbol lottery.

  First, in the normal state, when a win is made by the ordinary symbol lottery, a general per-game game based on the normal general-purpose per-game scenario 202e31 (see FIG. 27C) is executed, and the general-electric winning device 640 controls the opening. Is done. As shown in FIG. 27C, in the per-figure-period game executed during the normal state, it takes 4 seconds (t1) from the start of the per-figure-period game to the opening of the electric accessory 640a. Then, after the opening state for 0.1 second (t2) and the closing state for 1 second (t3), the game per ordinary drawing ends. Then, during the four seconds (t4) from the start timing of the game per day, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to the ON state so that the ball can enter the special power operating port 643 with the second movable valve 643. Then, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned off so that the ball is guided to the out port 644.

  Therefore, in the per-figure game executed during the normal state, it is difficult for the ball to enter the general-electric winning device 640, and even if the ball is won, the winning ball is guided to the out port 644. Will be. Thereby, it can be reliably suppressed that the ball wins to the special power operation port 643 during the normal state and the game per hit is executed. With such a configuration, during the normal state where the special figure game aiming at the execution of the big hit game by the lottery of the special symbol is executed, and during the special time game where the special electric game aiming to execute the big hit game by the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. Even if it is configured to execute the same game method in the middle and the middle, it is possible to suppress the execution of the jackpot game by the special electric game during the normal state, and to provide the player with the jackpot game excessively. Can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (four times or fifteen times) during the time reduction state, so that the special symbol lottery is completed. Must be prevented from being executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the normal state, the jackpot game state, and the time reduction state are configured to execute the same game method. This can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the operation content of the per-figure game is set so as to prohibit the execution of the special electric game during the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The same operation scenario as the per-figure game executed during the time reduction state may be selected in a part of the per-figure per-game. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to play a surprising game.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. As described above, in the case where the game is performed per normal map during the normal state, the ball that has won the general power prize device 640 does not win the special power operation port 643. There is no execution of the per-proxy game triggered by the prize, and the per-proxy game in which the V-prize device 65 is opened and the jackpot game in which the variable prize device 650 is opened are not executed. Then, a new normal symbol variation (normal symbol variation) is executed based on the end of the game per ordinary symbol. The first movable valve 66b (FIG. 31 (h)) is set to an operation scenario in which the pachinko machine 10 is constantly driven while the power is turned on. , Are driven in an operation pattern based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 (see FIG. 27A).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the flow of the game in the case where the big hit game (V big hit game) is executed among the flow of the game in the case where the normal time per game is executed in the time reduction state will be described. .

  First, in the time reduction state, when a winning is achieved by the ordinary symbol lottery, a game-per-game game based on the time-saving general-drawing scenario 202e32 (see FIG. 28) is executed, and the general-purpose winning device 640 is controlled to be opened. As shown in FIG. 28, in the per-figure-period game executed during the time-saving state, it takes 0.1 second (t1) from the start of the per-figure-period game to the opening of the electric accessory 640a, After that, the game goes through the open state for 3 seconds (t2) and then goes through the closed state for 1 second (t3), and the game ends in the ordinary drawing. Then, during the four seconds (t4) from the start timing of the game per day, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to the ON state so that the ball can enter the special power operating port 643 with the second movable valve 643. Then, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned off so that the ball is guided to the out port 644.

  Therefore, in the game per day drawing performed during the time reduction state, the ball is more likely to win into the general winning award device 640 (it is easier to win than the game per day drawing in the normal state), and the winning ball is activated by special power. The mouth 643 is configured such that it is easy to win a prize (it is easier to win a prize than a normal game per game in a normal state). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the special power operation port 643 in the ordinary game per game executed during the time saving state, thereby facilitating the execution of the game per accessory.

  The passing of the ball (winning) is detected by the special power operating port winning switch (FIG. 32E) (not shown) and the ball that has won the special power operating port 643, and the detection result triggers the opening operation of the V winning device 65. A hit game is executed. When the game per role is started, after a standby period of 0.1 seconds (t5) has elapsed, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON for 1.5 seconds (t6) to open the V opening / closing door 65a. After that, during the 1.4 seconds (t7), a bonus game with the V winning opening solenoid 209b set to OFF is executed. At the same time as the start of the bonus-per-game, the storage solenoid 209c is set to ON for 1.6 seconds (t8) to position the storage valve 66a in the storage state. In other words, during the period in which the ball can enter the V-prize device 65 by the per game play, the storage valve 66a is maintained in the stored state (see FIG. 7), so during one game per play, It is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from reaching the V winning opening 165.

  When the storage solenoid 209c is turned off after the elapse of the period t8, one ball stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a flows down to the first movable valve 66b. The first movable valve 66b is driven based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 so as to alternately switch between a closed state of 5 seconds (t10) and an opened state of 0.5 seconds (t9), and stores the stored state. When the ball stored at the valve 66a reaches the first movable valve 66a, if the first movable valve 66b is in the closed state, the ball flows down toward the second out port 163b, and the first movable valve 66b Is open, the ball flows down to the V winning opening 165. When a ball wins in the V winning opening 165, the passage of the ball is detected by a V winning switch (not shown) (FIG. 32 (i)), and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is started based on the detection result.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where the game per game is executed during the time saving state, it is easy to make the general electric winning device 640 win a ball (than the game per game in the normal state). In the case where the winning ball executes a game per ordinary figure which is easy for the winning ball to enter the special power operation port 643, and the game per ordinary figure is executed during the normal state, the general electric winning device 640 is used. Even if the ball is hard to win (it is harder to win than the game played during the time-saving state), and the ball wins the general-purpose winning device 640, the winning ball is transferred to the special power operation port 643. It is configured to execute a game that is difficult to win.

  With this configuration, in order to continuously execute the special symbol change during the time saving state, a game method aiming at the special entrance 64 serving as a special symbol lottery trigger, and a through pattern serving as a normal symbol lottery trigger. Even if the game method for aiming at the gate 67 is the same as the game method, the probability that the game per accessory will be executed can be greatly different depending on the game state. In addition, in the normal game per game in the normal state, an act of illegally winning a ball to the general winning award device 640 (for example, a ball is stopped by a magnet near the electric accessory 640a, and the ball is released in accordance with the opening timing). Is performed, the winning ball can be prevented from winning in the special power operating port 643, so that a fair game can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only a game for establishing a special symbol lottery trigger or a normal symbol lottery trigger, but also a general hit per game, a special hit per game, a big hit game is executed in a left-handed game. Therefore, the game can be smoothly performed without causing the player to feel troublesome to change the game method.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a notice effect. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 53).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Apparatus in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply unit 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page including data corresponding to the specified address (for example, 2 kilobytes). Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in a range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” has been designated on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR-type ROM 234d. , Read the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d are included in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 38) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after turning on the power. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 shows a power-on state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on and while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110, which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 switches to the state illustrated in FIG. As shown in FIG. 34, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “○” is provided at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 34 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped. The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the special figure entrance 64, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display it. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. If a ball is detected in the special figure entrance 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding fluctuation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. 35B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage” and the back surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, “river stage”, and “sky stage”, respectively. . FIG. 28 illustrates the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 35, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A to D, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed with a proper connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “sky stage”, the MPU 231 First, a position between the position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image is set as an initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, the back image on the back E is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. Specifically, the back E is a third pattern in which the image of the mountain towering on the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed in the displayed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of an image of the sky spreading over a mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, an orange sky indicating dawn is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. Then, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, a black sky indicating night is displayed. Thereafter, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image which repeatedly returns to the back image showing the dawn is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the rear surfaces of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “town stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the “city stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all resident in the back image area 235c, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the “forest stage”, the back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and the back surface D corresponding to the “sky stage” are, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The image data corresponding to the back surface E corresponding to the island stage is stored and resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the startup processing after power is turned on.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in a range from position a to position a ′, and the position is shifted from position a including the initial position to position a ′. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b and b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the fluctuation starts. When the stage change is determined by the lottery at the time, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial positions of the back BD are immediately displayed in the third symbol. The display 81 can be displayed on the display 81 while scrolling or changing the color tone over time. Rukoto can. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the partial range of the images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surfaces BD use the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to move the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data of the remaining image is displayed. The range of the image data is set so that the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 can be completed. This allows the image data corresponding to the remaining images to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. After that, the remaining images can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  On the rear sides B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 33) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  In the backsides B to D, the image data stored in the backside image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Image data to be duplicated is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow in the leftward direction.

  Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, the third symbol display device is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 after the ball entry to the special figure entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 occurs, even though the variable effect has been started. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers "0" to "9", a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box and a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, and the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses By reading out image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and includes at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image of one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a fluctuation effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, a stop symbol indicating the departure is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be performed. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in the present embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged scale than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size from the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or a plurality of pieces of information on effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. The back type corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display any of them or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. In the case of specifying that a back image different from the back A to E is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  When it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies a back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the backs A to E as a drawing target, Further, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back A to E is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 37) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 33) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  Note that if all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 37). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 37 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 37, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 33) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 37, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 75B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 75 (b) of S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 33) described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for the. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 38) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while defining the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 38) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 75 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 38), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite based on the transfer data table is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 38, the back image used for the image of one frame and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 75 (b) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite for which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter, referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The process is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is turned off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). Thereby, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the back image notified by the command is set to on in the back image determination flag 233x (see FIG. 81 (a) ) Of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With the back image determination flag 233x, the back type currently set can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demonstration display data table is displayed. If any other display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is turned off (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, and S6805 in FIG. 78B). 79 of FIG. 79). With the demonstration display flag 233y, it can be easily determined whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect is an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. When the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and when it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and the other than the confirmed display data table is set. It is turned off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 86 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b), FIG. 79, S6905). With the final display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the final display effect is currently being produced.

<Control Process Executed by Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). More specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, 399, 99, respectively). 999), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning) in the special figure entrance 64 and the ball entry (start winning) in the general electric winning device 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the special power starting opening winning process is executed (S108), and then the V entrance passing process (S109) and the V passing process (S110) are executed. The details of the special power starting port winning process, the V entrance passing process, and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the V-pass process is executed, a launch control process is executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104) performs various determinations (acceptance / non-permission determination) and determinations on the special symbol based on each of the acquired counter values, and performs a predetermined display in the variation display mode determined by the predetermined control. The first symbol display device 37 is controlled to enable variable display, the third symbol display device 81 is used to set various commands for executing the third symbol and fourth symbol variable display effects, and the determination result (whether or not the result is determined). The control for stopping the display in the display mode indicating (determination result) is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol change process (FIG. 40, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol change process (FIG. 40, S104), first, it is determined whether a big hit game is being played (during a big hit) or a bonus game is being played (a big hit is being played) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the current game is a big hit game (during a big hit) or a game being played per an accessory (during a hit).

  In the process of S201, when it is determined that the big hit or the bonus is hit (S201: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S202). Is determined (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (S203), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S202, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON (S202: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Here, the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON when the game per bonus is executed. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display (special figure fluctuation display) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted) during the execution of the bonus per game. During the period, a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the special symbol change display is temporarily stopped on the first symbol display device 83 is displayed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the change display of the special symbol that has been being executed along with the start of the bonus-per-game is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from having a distrust of the special symbol change having disappeared. In addition, as a display mode for indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that the normal variable display is being performed (for example, lighting at intervals of 0.2 seconds, The display mode may be the same as the display mode that repeats turning off, or may be a display mode in which the flashing interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that variable display is being performed (for example, switching on and off at 0.5 second intervals) Blinking display mode). Further, when the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be able to display a plurality of colors as a display mode, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only when the vehicle is temporarily stopped is used. Is also good.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the present is not a big hit or a hit, (S201: No), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0, that is, a special symbol. Is determined to be in a variable display (S204). If it is determined that the special symbol change is being displayed (the value of the special figure change time counter 203n is larger than 0) (S204: Yes), the special symbol change execution process is executed (S206).

  In the special symbol change execution process (S206), a process for changing (updating) the change display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period when the special symbol is changing is executed. Is done. This special symbol change execution process (S206) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  After finishing the process of S206, it is next determined whether or not the value of the special figure variation time counter 203n updated in the special symbol variation execution process (S206) is 0 (S207). If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is 0 (S207: Yes), the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S208), and then this processing is ended.

  In the special symbol change stop process (S208), when the change time specified for the special symbol during the change display has elapsed, a process of stopping the change display with the symbol indicating the special symbol lottery result is executed. Details of the special symbol change stop processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S207 that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not 0 (S207: No), the present processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S204 that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S204: No), that is, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation is not present, Next, a special symbol change start process is executed (S205). In the special symbol change start process (S205), a process for executing a new lottery (fluctuation) of a special symbol is performed, and it is determined whether or not a new lottery (fluctuation) can be executed. If it is in a state where a new lottery (fluctuation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (fluctuation) is executed. This special symbol change start process (S205) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. After executing the special symbol change start process (S205), the present process ends.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 40, in this embodiment, in a configuration in which a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) can be executed, a variation process related to a special symbol in one special symbol variation process (S204 to S208). Is configured to be executed. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for a special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

  Next, the special symbol change start process (S205), which is one of the special symbol change processes (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S205).

  In the special symbol change start process (S205 in FIG. 41), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S301), and the acquired value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to 0. It is determined whether it is greater than (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S302: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S303).

  Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls after the subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially transmitted to the execution area side. A shift process is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3.

  Next, a special symbol big hit determination process is executed (S306). The details of the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but using the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). The big hit determination is performed based on the set gaming state.

  Next, a special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which will be described in detail later, is performed based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is a process for selecting based on each counter value.

  After executing the processing of S307, it is next determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S308). When it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S308: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S308: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 (S309). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not 1 (S309: No), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S310), and thereafter, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S309: Yes), the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311), and thereafter, the present process is ended.

  That is, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction state, a process for updating the number of time savings at the start timing of the change of the special symbol is executed, and if the current special symbol change is the final fluctuation in the time saving state, the time Is configured to execute a process of setting the time-saving end flag 203j to ON without updating. Although the details will be described later, the setting status of the time-saving end flag 203j is referred to when the special symbol change is stopped, and when the special symbol is stopped, the setting of the time-saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0 to end the time saving state. When the special symbol game is executed while the special symbol is fluctuating, the special hit game is executed, and when the V big hit game is started, the processing for setting the time reduction end flag 203j to off is executed.

  With such a configuration, for example, when the special symbol change is interrupted based on the fact that the special jackpot game is executed during the final change of the special symbol in the time saving state, the interrupt is performed after the jackpot game ends. The special symbol change corresponding to the remaining period of the special symbol change that has been performed is restarted, but when the special symbol change after the restart is stopped and displayed, the time reduction end flag 203j is set to off, The time-saving state never ends. Further, when the special symbol change is restarted, the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, so that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not subtracted.

  Thereby, when the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time saving state, the special symbol change interrupted in the number of time savings (four times) corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot C) corresponding to the jackpot game Is set as the time reduction period in which the time reduction state is set. Therefore, the special figure game is executed during the normal state, and the special electric game is executed during the time saving state, and the ball is transferred to the V winning opening 165, rather than the duration of the time saving state set when the special symbol lottery is won. When the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed with the prize, it is easy to increase the duration of the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player because the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change is added. Can be.

  That is, when the time-saving state is set again based on the game during the time-saving state, the duration of the set time-saving state is made longer than when the time-saving state is set based on the game during the normal state. Since the game can be easily performed, the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting a more advantageous game state to be set.

  Further, when the special symbol change is restarted at the special symbol change timing, a process for updating the number of time savings and a process for ending the time saving state are used. Since the start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not subtracted, but since the gaming state during the last special symbol fluctuation period in the time saving state becomes the normal state, There has been a problem that it is not possible to provide the game during the time reduction state to the player to the maximum.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the processing for updating the number of times saved and the processing for ending the time saving state can be executed at different timings. Specifically, it is configured to execute a process for updating the number of time savings at a special symbol change start timing and to execute a process for ending the time saving state at a special symbol change stop timing. . With this configuration, the time saving number is not updated when the special symbol change is restarted, and the time saving state can be set as the gaming state during the last special symbol change fluctuation period in the time saving state. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with the maximum number of games during the reduced working hours.

  In the present embodiment, the processing for terminating the time saving state is performed at the special symbol change stop timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is established and the process of S305 is executed in the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) until the next special symbol change lottery is executed, and the process of S306 is executed. The processing for terminating the time saving state may be executed at a timing before the processing is performed.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to manage the number of remaining working hours during the time saving state. That is, based on the reception of the information indicating the game state (information indicating that the time saving state is set, information indicating the number of time savings) included in the state command set at the end of the big hit game, By storing the state information and updating the remaining time reduction number based on the reception of the special figure variation pattern command indicating that the special symbol variation is started, the game of the time reduction state is performed on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is configured to manage the situation.

  With such a configuration, in the control processing of main controller 110, a command for indicating the number of remaining working hours or a command for indicating the final change of the working hours state (setting that working hours end flag 203j is set to ON). Without setting, the sound lamp control device 113 can manage the game situation in the time saving state and set the effect mode corresponding to the current game situation. Therefore, control processing in main controller 110 can be simplified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the special symbol change start process (S205 of FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

  In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S401). Then, based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23B), it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 matches the big hit determination value, and the lottery is performed. A result (determination result) is obtained (S402).

  After finishing the process of S402, it is next determined whether or not the current lottery result is a jackpot (S403). If it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S403: Yes), the jackpot is shown to indicate the special symbol jackpot winning. The flag 203i is set to ON (S404). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot winning.

  Then, the special symbol lottery result is set to a big hit (S405), and based on the obtained value of the hit type counter C2, a special symbol big hit symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S406). The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S403 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S403: No), a special symbol departure symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S407), and the process is terminated.

  Next, a special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307).

  In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 43), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), it is set whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the special symbol jackpot is set. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not a big hit is made based on whether or not the big hit flag 203i is turned on for the special symbol. This big hit flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S404 in the above-mentioned special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 42).

  In the process of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol big hit is set (S501: Yes), the big hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 24) and the acquired first hit type counter C2 are set. The jackpot type is determined based on the value (S502). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is obtained (S503), and the current gaming state (normal state, latent state, probable change) corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g. The variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to (state) is read (S504).

  Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S504 (S505), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505. Then, a special figure variation pattern command is set (S506). The special figure variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and the variation time of the special symbol. The external output processing (FIG. 55) of the main processing of the main controller 110 (FIG. 55). In step S1801 in FIG. 55), the sound is output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S507), the first symbol display device 37 sets a special symbol change start (S508), and indicates the change time of the selected change pattern. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n (S509), and this processing ends. The special figure stop type command set in the process of S507 includes the type of the stop symbol indicating the result of the current special symbol change, that is, information indicating a rough type such as out of reach or out of reach. Then, it is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is out of place (that is, the jackpot flag 203i for the special symbol is off) (S501: No), the processing of S502 is skipped and S503 is skipped. Move to the processing of.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the special symbol variation executing process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change execution process (S206). In the special symbol variation executing process (S206), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is executed.

  In the special symbol change execution process (S206), first, it is determined whether the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S701).

  In the process of S701, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S701: Yes), a special figure change restart command is set (S702), and the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is turned off. It is set (S703), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S704), the display of the special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 40) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds, the special symbol change execution process (see FIG. 44) (See S206) is executed, and the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is updated (subtracted by 1) in the special symbol fluctuation execution processing (see S205 of FIG. 44). I have. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol, “15000” is set as the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n, and the value is decremented by 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured as follows.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON (S701: No), the processing of S702 and S703 is skipped and the processing shifts to the processing of S704.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a special symbol change stop process (S208), which is one of the special symbol change processes (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change stop processing (S208). This special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208) is executed when the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n is determined to be "0", that is, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol (special symbol) has elapsed. This is the process to be performed.

  When the special symbol change stop processing (S208 in FIG. 45) is executed, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S801). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), then a big hit scenario won by the special symbol change this time is set (S806), and the big hit flag 202i and the time reduction counter 203h are set. The value is reset (S807), information indicating that the current gaming state is a big hit (big hit game) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203g (S808), and the process proceeds to S809. The gaming state storage area 203g is configured to be able to store a gaming state (normal state, time-saving state) relating to a lottery game and a gaming state relating to a winning game. At this time, the game state (normal state, time saving state) related to the lottery game and the game state indicating that the big hit is in progress are stored.

  With this configuration, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming state set at the timing of winning the jackpot can be determined.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to off, that is, when the result of the current special symbol lottery is out of order (S801: No), the time reduction end flag It is determined whether or not 203j is set to ON (S802). If it is determined that the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON (S802: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol variation that has been stopped this time is the final variation in the time reduction state, the time reduction counter 203h Is reset to 0 (S803), the time saving end flag 203j is set to off (S804), and information indicating that the current gaming state is the normal state is stored in the gaming state storage area 203g (S805). The process moves to S809. In the processing of S802, when it is determined that the time-saving end flag 203j is set to OFF (S802: No), the processing of S803 to S805 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S809.

  In the processing of S809, a special figure determination command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to finalize and stop the special symbol is set (S809), and the special symbol which is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. Is executed (S810), and the present process is terminated.

  As described above, in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208), the processing (S809, S810) of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the result of the special symbol lottery (lottery game) is executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the ball wins in the special power operation port 643 and the game per bonus is executed, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, based on the result of the predetermined determination performed when the ball wins in the special power operating port 643, the special symbol change being executed may be discarded instead of being interrupted. With this configuration, the case where the special symbol change indicating the duration of the time reduction state is interrupted and the case where it is discarded can be made to appear, so the duration of the time reduction state is suddenly subtracted ( (End), and an effect with a sense of tension can be executed for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the start winning process (S105), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning). This is a process of storing each acquired counter value up to a maximum of four in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a.

  When each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, Processing (so-called pre-reading processing) for predicting the result of the determination of the success or failure, the selected fluctuation pattern, and the like is performed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be described.

  In the start winning processing (S105 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 which is the starting port (start winning) (S901). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special figure entrance 64 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S902). It is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S903).

  That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserves for the special figure entrance 64 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether the number of reserves is not stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is incremented by 1 (904). In step S905, a reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved number of start ports (the number of reserved special lottery rights) is set.

  Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, fluctuation type counter CS1) is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and corresponding to the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203. Each of them is held (stored) in the storage area of the number of held balls (S906).

  Next, a pre-read process is performed (S907), and thereafter, the present process ends. The pre-reading process (S907) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. However, based on each counter value newly stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a hit / no-go determination result, a fluctuation pattern to be determined, a stop type, and the like. Is determined. In the present embodiment, it is configured to execute the process of determining the result of determination as to whether or not to perform the determination, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, and the like based on each of the newly stored counter values. For example, when there is a new start winning, for example, the result of the determination of the rejection, the determined fluctuation pattern, and the type of stop for all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. May be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, that is, when a special symbol lottery right is newly acquired, the special symbol lottery right (winning information) is obtained. ) Is determined in advance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, or according to the result of lottery of a normal symbol, a lottery right for a special symbol (prize information). May be determined in advance.

  Also, if it is determined in the processing of S901 that the ball has not entered the special figure entrance 64 (S901: No), or in the processing of S903, the number of reserves for the special figure entrance 64 at present is the upper limit. If it is determined that the value is the value (S903: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is skipped, and the present process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is added, the prefetching process (S907) based on the added information on winning (winning information) is executed. The configuration is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is the upper limit number (4) in the process of S903 (S903: No), The prefetching process (S907) may be configured to execute a pre-reading process (S907) when a ball is inserted into the special figure entrance 64 with the number of reserved special symbols reaching the upper limit. Thereby, even in the state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing the game in order to execute the pre-reading process. Further, when a ball is inserted into the special figure entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, an added value can be given, so the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is limited to the upper limit. Can be suppressed from decreasing the willingness to play when a ball enters the special figure entrance 64 in the state where the ball has reached.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the prefetching process (S907), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S907).

  In the pre-reading process (S907 in FIG. 47), first, a random number counter per first C1, a counter per first type C2, and a variation type counter which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the special symbol holding storage area 203a. Each value of CS1 is read (S1001). Then, the read data is stored in an area having the smallest winning order among the empty storage areas of the prefetch pending storage area (S1002).

  Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the pre-reading suspension storage area, the result of the rejection determination is determined. In this case, both the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the low-probability state and the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the high-probability state are determined. This is because the jackpot determination is executed based on the timing at which a new hold is generated (the timing at which a new hold (winning information) is stored in the special symbol holding storage area 203a) and the winning information newly held this time. Since a time lag occurs at the timing of the game, it is difficult to predict the gaming state (probability state of the special symbol) set at the timing when the jackpot determination based on the winning information newly held this time is executed. It is.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a jackpot (S1003). If it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S1003: Yes), a winning command indicating a jackpot winning condition (game state set at the time of lottery) and a jackpot type when the jackpot is won is set (S1004). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the determination in the processing of S1003 is not a big hit (S1003: No), a winning command indicating a loss is set (S1005), and then this processing is terminated.

  Here, the winning command set in the processing of S1004 or S1005 includes, in addition to the information for indicating the above-described determination result of the above-mentioned result (information giving a different meaning based on the determination result of the success or failure), as well as common information of S1001 The information is also set to include information for indicating the values of the various counter values read by the processing. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55).

  When receiving the winning command, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the display mode of the holding ball based on various information included in the winning command (for example, changing the color of the holding ball to a color different from the normal color). An effect (pre-reading effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a notice symbol or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of the determination to the player can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, since there is only one special symbol probability state (special symbol low probability state), information (win / fail judgment result) set in the winning command can be set regardless of the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of special symbol probability states (a special symbol high probability state and a special symbol low probability state), a winning / failing determination result in the case of a special symbol high probability state and a special symbol low probability It may be configured to determine the winning / failing determination result in the case of the state, and to set the winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in the high probability state, it is in the low probability state. Also, a determination value (a value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a jackpot may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol jackpot may be set only when the determination value is read.

  With such a configuration, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the sound lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that the jackpot is a specific jackpot. It is possible to give a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot to the fluctuation.

  Further, the game state at the time of performing the special symbol lottery based on the hold storage (winning information) stored (stored) in the special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and the hit / fail determination is performed based on the game state. May be executed. In this case, the selection of the variation pattern is not made variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a fixed variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. When performing the pre-reading, the game state at the start of the change can be determined by determining the order of the change until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored and stored.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the special symbol holding storage area 203a, a prefetching process based on the winning information is executed, and in the prefetching process, a pass / fail judgment is made. Although the configuration for predicting the determination is used in advance, the present invention is not limited to this. In the pre-reading process of the main controller 110, the winning information (holding storage) newly stored (stored) in the special symbol holding storage area 203a is stored. Information indicating the content (each counter value) may be set as a winning command, and the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning is determined based on information included in the winning command received by the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured.

  With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, and when it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is determined. It is preferable to configure so as to analyze (predict the result of determination of success or failure). As a result, when the pre-reading effect is not performed, a specific pre-reading process (prediction of the result of determination of success / failure) is not performed, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of useless control in the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the result of the prefetching process executed untitled is illegally obtained by the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a description will be given of the ordinary symbol variation process (S106), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol). (S1101). As for the hit during the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83 (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Up to the middle (until the winning game ends) is included. When it is determined that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1101: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1101: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S1102). When it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, that is, when it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed (S1102: No), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is next activated. The value (M) is obtained (S1103), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S1104).

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S1104: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S1104: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S1105). That is, if it is determined in the process of S1104 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol change (the winning information for use in the normal symbol change is stored on hold) is satisfied, the hold is stored. In order to execute the ordinary symbol change using the winning information, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one.

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1106). In the process of S1106, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the ordinary symbol hold 1 to the ordinary symbol hold 4 in the ordinary symbol hold ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted, such as the normal symbol hold 1 → the execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1107).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter 203h is turned on, that is, whether or not the current time is in a high probability state of a normal symbol (S1108), and it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is set to on. (S1108: Yes), the winning / non-judgment result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hit judgment value of the second hit random number table 202b for high probability (see FIG. 23C), and the process shifts to S1111. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is off (S1108: No), the hit determination result is based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202b for low probability time (see FIG. 23C). Are acquired (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111.

  In the process of S1111, it is determined whether or not the current symbol change (lottery) is a hit (S1111). If it is determined that the hit is a hit (S1111: Yes), the display mode of the hitting time “○” is determined. The display mode is set (S1112), and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined based on the ordinary pattern variation pattern using the value of the ordinary figure variation type counter (S1114). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1111 that the current ordinary symbol change (lottery) is not a hit (is a loss) (S1111: No), the display mode of "X" which is a display mode at the time of the loss is set. Then (S1113), the flow shifts to the process of S1114 described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation time is always set to 3 seconds regardless of the set game state. With this configuration, at the timing at which the gaming state is switched, specifically, from the normal state in which generally a long fluctuation time is likely to be set (the low probability state of a normal symbol), the time reduction in which a short fluctuation time is likely to be set At the end of the jackpot game in which the gaming state switches to the state (high probability state of the ordinary symbol), the ordinary symbol fluctuation for a long fluctuation time is executed, and the time reduction state is set even though the time reduction state is set. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a special electric game (V rush) aiming at a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed in response to an ordinary symbol lottery during the time reduction state. ) Is configured such that an effect based on a normal symbol lottery is also displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, when performing an effect based on the ordinary symbol lottery (change), the amount of effect data can be reduced by unifying the change time.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if the game is performed in the normal state and the ball is won in the general winning award device 640, the special power operation port 643 which is a trigger for the execution of the game per accessory is provided. The ball is configured to be difficult to win. Therefore, even if only the same fluctuating time (3 seconds) is set, it is possible to eliminate the advantage of performing the game by measuring the execution timing of the game per ordinary figure.

  In addition, the setting method of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is varied according to the game state, the fluctuation time is varied according to the number of balls reserved for the general symbol, The variation time may be varied according to the acquired predetermined value. For example, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation is changed to the set ordinary symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state ) And the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved ordinary symbols) may be variably set. Furthermore, the ease with which a ball can enter the general winning award device 640 may be configured to vary depending on the set fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol.

  In this way, by changing the degree of the ball entering the general winning award device 640 in accordance with the length of the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol that is set, the ball can enter the general winning award device 640. Since the ease of entering a ball can be easily changed according to the game state, various game properties can be created.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1102, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is not in the variable display mode (S1102: No), the variation time of the ordinary symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 elapses. It is determined whether or not the processing has been performed (S1115). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1115: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1115 that the fluctuating time has elapsed (S1115: Yes), stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1116). In the process of S1116, when the current lottery of the ordinary symbol is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the symbol “○” is stopped (lit). On the other hand, when the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order, the “X” symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the processing of S1112 or S1113 is performed.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S1116, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is changed to the second symbol in the display mode set in the process of S1112 or the process of S1113. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S1117). When it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S1117: Yes), a process for setting an opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol of crying is not a hit (is out of range) (S1117: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, an opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a according to the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the ordinary symbol set at the timing of determining the acceptability of the ordinary symbol (timing of performing the processing of S1108 to S1111). The probability of the ordinary symbol set at the timing (period at which it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S1115) for determining whether the ordinary symbol is correct or not and setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a. The opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the state (high-probability state, low-probability state).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation process (lottery process) relating to the ordinary symbol and the fluctuation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol are configured to be executed independently. The probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the ordinary symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process. Therefore, depending on the result of the variation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol, which is performed in parallel during the period in which the variation process (lottery process) relating to the ordinary symbol is being executed, the timing at which the determination of whether or not the ordinary symbol is successful is made at the timing of the ordinary symbol Is set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set, a case where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set may occur.

  In such a situation, for example, based on the ordinary symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) set at the timing of determining whether or not the ordinary symbol is accepted, the opening control mode (opening) of the electric accessory 640a is set. When the pattern is set, the opening pattern executed when the electric accessory 640a is long opened (when the normal pattern is in the high probability state) while the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. ).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high-probability state, low-probability state) of the ordinary symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and the electric combination is determined based on the determination result. The opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a is set. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

  In the processing of S1117, if it is determined that the current lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a win (S1117: Yes), then the current ordinary symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) is determined. Next, it is determined whether or not the hour-saving counter 203h is on (S1118), and if it is determined that the hour-saving counter 203h is not on (is off), that is, it is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (S1118: No), a scenario operation per ordinary drawing is set (S1119).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1118 that the hour-saving counter 203h is set to ON (S1118: Yes), a time-saving general-purpose per-scenario operation is set (S1120).

  Next, based on the scenario set in the processing of S1119 or S1120, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set to start (S1121), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, the open / disabled mode of the electric accessory 640a that is executed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the normal symbol win / fail determination and that is moved in the normal symbol hit game. The configuration is such that the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the probability state of the ordinary symbol at the timing of setting the (opening pattern). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set at the timing, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the hit game of the ordinary symbol. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to be long opened only when the symbol is in the normal state, or the timing of determining whether the symbol is correct or not may be determined. Based on the game state is set, it may be configured to set the opening pattern of the electric won game 640a.

  Although detailed description is omitted, various kinds of information (the result of the ordinary symbol lottery, the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation, the scenario per ordinary symbol, etc.) determined in the ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) are described below. Commands indicating the contents of various types of information are set, and are output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

  Next, referring to FIG. 49, a through gate passage process (S107) executed in the first embodiment is executed. This processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

  In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1201). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1201: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is obtained (S1202), and then Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the acquired ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 1 (whether the reserved symbol number of the ordinary symbol has not reached the upper limit value) (S1203).

  In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 1 (is the upper limit value of 1) (S1203: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not larger than 1 (it is 0) (S1203: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is set to 1 Is added (S1204), a normal figure reserved ball number command (a command for indicating the value (M) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) is set (S1205), and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the ordinary pattern. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b (S1206), and the process ends.

  Next, the special power starting port winning process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special power starting port winning process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a special power operation port 643 in the general power prize apparatus 640, and makes the V prize apparatus 65 by winning a ball in the special power operation port 643. A predetermined variable pattern is configured to execute a game per accessory to be released. In this special power starting port winning process (S108), various processes when a ball wins in the special power operating port 643 are executed.

  When the special power starting port winning process (S108) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the special power operating port 643 (S1301). In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not a detection signal indicating that a ball has been detected has been output from a detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting the ball that has won the special power operating port 643. In the processing of S1301, if it is determined that the gaming ball has not won the special power operating port 643 (S1301: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball has won the special power operating port 643 (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current game is a regular symbol hit game (S1302). If it is determined that the current game is not a normal symbol hit game (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1309) because a ball cannot be won in the special power operation port 643 (S1309). To end. By performing the processing of S1309, a state in which the game ball has won the special power operating port 643 outside the per-game time period, that is, when a game in which the game ball is illegally won in the special power operating port 643 is performed, or It is possible to promptly notify the outside when a malfunction of a member (for example, the electric accessory 640a, the second movable valve 642) attached to the special power operating port 643 has occurred.

  In the process of S1302, if it is determined that the current game is a normal symbol hit game (S1302: Yes), then it is determined whether the current is a special electric power operation (game of a special character game) (S1303). If it is determined that the special power operation is currently being performed (the game is being played per role) (S1303: Yes), the process is terminated as it is not possible to execute a new game per role. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special electric power is not currently being operated (the game is being played per accessory) (S1303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently changing (S1304). If it is determined that the special symbol is currently changing (S1304: Yes), the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S1305), a special figure temporary stop command is set (S1306), and The hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  That is, if it is determined in the process of S1304 that the special symbol is currently fluctuating, the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed in order to interrupt the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the running special symbol. As a result, the special symbol change that is being executed is interrupted when the accessory-based game is executed. Further, the temporary stop command set in the process of S1307 is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1304 that the special symbol is not currently fluctuating (S1304: No), the process of S1305 and S1306 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1307. In the process of S1308, a special power operation command is set (S1308), and then, the process ends.

  As described above, the special power starting port winning process (S108) is based on the determination processing means for determining whether or not the winning is a normal one when the ball wins in the special power operating port 643 and the winning. Processing for determining whether or not a new special symbol change can be executed, and processing for a special symbol change (processing for interrupting the special symbol change being executed, no new special symbol change is executed during the special hit game) And a means for executing a per-bonus game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the V entrance passage processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S109) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

  In the V entrance passage process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not the storage sensor 65s (see FIG. 6) is on (S1401). If the storage sensor 65s is not on (storage sensor 65s01: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage sensor 65s is on (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the V winning opening is in the open period, that is, whether the game is in the per-accessory game (S1402). In the processing of S1402, if it is determined that it is during the V winning opening opening period (during a per-game play) (S1402: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S1403), and this processing ends. If it is not during the V winning opening opening period (S1402: No), an error command is set (S1404) because a game ball has entered the V winning device 65 despite the fact that the game is not being played per character. ), End this processing.

  The V entrance passage command set in the processing of S1403 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the V-entrance passage command, the sound ramp control device 113 counts the game balls that have passed through the V-entrance and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V-entrance passage to the display control device 114. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect during the game per hit based on the entry of the ball into the V winning device 65.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the V passing process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the V-pass process (S110) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

  When the V passing process (S110) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is a V passing, that is, whether a game ball has won the V winning opening 165 (S1501), and the game ball has won the V winning opening 165. If it is determined that there is no data (S1501: No), the process ends. If it is determined that a game ball has won the V winning opening 165 (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current V period is in effect (S1502). In the processing of S1502, it is determined that the period in which the operation scenario relating to the per-prize game is set is during the V-valid period, and otherwise, it is determined that it is not during the V-valid period.

  In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the V validity period is in progress (S1502: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the game is currently being played per character (S1503). (S1503: Yes), the big hit type value at the time of V passage corresponding to the current per hit game is acquired (S1504), the V flag corresponding to the big hit type is set to ON (S1505), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0 (S1506), and the process proceeds to S1507.

  In other words, in the processes of S1504 to S1506, a process for executing the big hit game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the V winning opening 165 during the hit game. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1503 that the game is not being performed as a bonus hit (S1503: No), there is no need to perform a new jackpot game, and the processing of S1504 to S1506 is skipped. Then, the process shifts to S1507.

  In the processing of S1507, a V-pass command is set (S1507), and this processing ends. The V-pass command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control processing of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V passing command, for example, when receiving the V passing command during the per-game game, the effect during the V rush executed during the per-game game is successful, Following the hit game, an effect for indicating that the big hit game is executed is executed. When a V-pass command is received during the big hit game, the same effect as when a V-pass command is received during the bonus hit game is executed.

  On the other hand, if the V passing command is not received at the predetermined timing during the per hit play, a disappointing effect to indicate that the V challenge has failed is executed, and the V passing command is transmitted at the predetermined timing during the big hit game. If not received, a resurrection effect from a disappointing effect is executed, and the player is notified that the jackpot game will be continuously executed.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a configuration is shown in which only a command (V passing command) for indicating that a game ball has won the V winning opening 165 has been set, but no gaming ball has won the V winning opening 165. A command (for example, a V non-passing command) for indicating the fact may be set. In this case, for example, in the present embodiment, the game balls that can enter the V winning opening 165 are only the game balls (for example, one) retained by the storage valve 66a, and thus are stored in the storage valve 66a. Number discriminating means for discriminating presence / absence (number) of game balls present, and detecting means for detecting passage of game balls to the hemorrhoid 2 out height 163b are provided, and the number of game balls determined by the number discriminating means is provided. May be configured to set the above-mentioned V non-passing command when is detected by the detecting means. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that a game ball is clogged in the V winning device 65.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1502 that the current time is not within the V validity period (S1502: No), an error command is set (S1508), and this processing ends. By performing the processing of S1508, a state in which the game ball has won the V winning opening 165 outside the V validity period, that is, a game in which the game ball is illegally won in the V winning opening 165, or the V winning is achieved. It is possible to promptly notify the outside when a problem has occurred in a member attached to the port 165 (for example, the V opening / closing door 65a, the storage valve 66a, and the first movable valve 66b).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), the operation scenario is defined such that the timing at which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165 in the per-accessory game is the ending period of the per-accessory game. Therefore, the processing of S1506 to S1508 is performed in the V passing processing (S110), that is, the processing is executed at the timing when the ball wins the V winning opening 165. Without limitation, for example, if the operation scenario of the game per role is defined so that the ball can always win in the V winning opening 165 during the game per role, the V passing process (S110) , S1505 only are executed, and the processing of S1506 to S1508 is performed when the V flag is set to ON in the accessory hit control processing (see S1805 in FIG. 58). It may be configured to run as a process to be rows. Thus, even if the ball wins in the V winning opening 165 immediately after the execution of the bonus game, the time-saving state can be continued until the jackpot game is started, which gives a sense of incongruity to the player. The game can be performed without any trouble.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S1601). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, referring to FIG. 54, a description will be given of a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 when power is applied to main control device 110. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 54), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S1704). If it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if not, it is not stored (S1705: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S1712 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1712 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed.

  Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1713, S1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1714). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process shifts to the process of S1710.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1705: Yes), S1707: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1708). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power cutoff is transmitted (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710). Thereafter, the interruption is permitted (S1711), and the operation based on the first movable valve operation scenario is set (S1715). Then, the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main processing, roughly, a counter updating processing and a power-off processing are executed.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 55), first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 is controlled by each sub-side control. An external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1801). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 is given a prize corresponding to the number of obtained balls. Send a ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the reserved ball number set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 40) and the start winning process (see FIG. 46) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output process (S1801 in FIG. 55), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted. This is information for setting an effect (a fluctuating effect, a decorative effect, etc.). Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 56) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803). A command for executing a jackpot effect is set, and a jackpot control process for opening a specific winning port (large opening port) 650a of the variable winning device 650 is executed (S1804).

  The details of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 57. In the jackpot control process (S1804), the specific winning port 650a (hereinafter, winning port) is set for each round of the jackpot state. It is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 650a) has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won the winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 650a). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning opening and the like (specific winning opening 650a) are closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening and the like (specific winning opening 650a) are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an accessory hit control process related to an accessory hit game which is executed when the ball has won the special power operating port 643 (S1805). In this accessory hit control process (S1805), the scenario in which the V opening / closing door 65a is opened and closed for the V winning device 65 that is opened during the hit-game is determined in advance. A process for setting based on (per-principal operation scenario) is executed. In addition. The details of the accessory hit control process (S1805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric auditors accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric auditors accessory 640a attached to the ordinary winning prize device 640 is executed (S1806). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1121 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S1119 and the processing of S1120 in the normal symbol variation processing ends.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1807). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), the variation display according to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. . In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started. Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute the process when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41) ends. The variation display is ended, and the stopped symbol is displayed in the first symbol display in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43) in the display mode set in S507 by the special symbol variation stopping process (see S208 in FIG. 45). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the devices 37A and 37B.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (big hit symbol) indicating a big hit, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (missing symbol) indicating a slip. The stop display for that purpose is also executed.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1808). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1114 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. In the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1116 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the process is executed in the second symbol display device. The changed symbol display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S1112 or the process of S1113 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1810). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and the processes from S1801 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1810: No), the first time, ie, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached, is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1811 (S1812). In the process of S1812, similarly to the value of the variation type counter CS1, the value of the general-purpose variation type counter CS2 is also updated.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1801 to S1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the determination value regarding the lottery of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and that the illegal game aimed at the timing at which the determination value corresponding to the hit is obtained is executed. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the process of S1809, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 53 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1813 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1813), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1814). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The processing in S1809 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1801 to S1808, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1801. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1701). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1801. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1804) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1804). The jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and information (command) for executing various effects according to the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol. ) And opening or closing a winning port or the like (specific winning port (large opening port) 650a).

  In the big hit control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether it is time to start the big hit of the special symbol (S1901). Specifically, the process of S806 of the special symbol change stop process (refer to S208 of FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the special symbol big hit is set, or the accessory hit control process (S1805 of FIG. 58). If the start of the jackpot is set, the operation counter is set corresponding to the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 of the various operation scenario tables 202e. Then, when the value of the operation counter matches the jackpot start timing specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1, it is determined that the jackpot is started. If it is determined in the processing of S1901 that it is the timing to start the special symbol big hit (S1901: Yes), an opening command is set (S1902), and this processing ends.

  Note that the opening command may be configured to be transmitted with a delay (variable) according to the gaming state or the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when a special symbol jackpot or accessory hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpots A and B, and 2500 for jackpot C). 5000), an opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, in the case of a left-handed game and a jackpot in a special figure lottery, the time until the start of the jackpot (the specific winning opening 650a is opened) is shortened, and the left-handed In the case of a game, in the case of a jackpot per game as a result of the special electric game, the time until the start of the jackpot (specific winning opening 650a is opened) can be lengthened. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period in which the player who has watched the ball flow state during the game per accessory is prepared for the big hit game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1901 that it is not the big hit start timing (S1901: No), it is next determined whether or not the present is a big hit (S1903). In the process of S1903, the game information related to the hit game stored in the game state storage area 203g is read and the discrimination is performed.

  During the big hit, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol big hit (including a special symbol big hit game), and a predetermined time after the big hit game is over. Including mid-hour. This also includes the case where a display indicating that the ball has won is displayed in the V winning port 165. If it is determined in the process of S1903 that the game is not in a big hit (S1903: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a big hit is occurring (S1903: Yes), it is next determined whether it is a start timing of a new round (S1904).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1904 that it is the start timing of a new round, that is, if it is determined that the obtained value of the operation counter is the start timing of the round game specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 (S1904) : Yes), the specific winning opening solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1905), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1906), and thereafter, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1904 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1904: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S1907). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the round, that is, if it is determined that the acquired value of the operation counter is the end timing of the round game specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 (S1907: Yes), The special winning opening solenoid 209a is turned off (S1908), and the value of the winning number counter 203e is cleared to 0 (S1909). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1907 that it is not the timing to end the round (S1907: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1910). The start timing of the ending effect is the standby time (the present embodiment) in which the final round (the fourth round in the case of the jackpot A) in the jackpot game ends, the specific winning opening 650a is closed, and the ball is played. When 3 seconds have elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1910: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1911), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1910 that it is not the ending effect start timing (S1910: No), it is next determined whether or not it is the jackpot end timing (S1912). Note that the jackpot end timing is specifically the end timing of the jackpot game in which the value of the acquired operation counter is defined in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1. In the process of S1912, if it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (ending timing of the ending effect) (S1912: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot type is the jackpot B (S1913). If it is determined that it is the jackpot B (S1913: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 15 (S1914), and the process shifts to S1916. In the process of S1913, when it is determined that the type of the jackpot is not the jackpot B (the jackpot A or the jackpot C) (S1913: No), the process shifts to the process of S1915.

  In the processing of S1915, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 4 (S1915), and then a state command corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit is set (S1916), and the big hit end for setting the big hit end is set. This is set (S1917), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1912, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (S1912: No), the winning process is executed (S1918), and thereafter, the present process is ended. Here, the winning process (S1918) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process (S1918).

  In the winning process (S1918 in FIG. 57), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S2001). The round valid period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period in which the specific winning opening 650a is open. If it is determined that the current time is outside the round validity period (S2001: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round validity period (S2001: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed the specific winning opening 650a (S2002). If it is determined that the ball has passed the specific winning opening 650a (S2002: Yes), the value of the winning number counter is updated by adding 1 (S2003), and a command indicating the number of winning balls after the addition is set (S2003). S2004). On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the specific winning opening 650a (S2002: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  After executing the processing of S2004, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter is 10 (S2005). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 10 (S2005: Yes), the value of the operation counter is updated to one immediately before the value indicating the end of the current round (S2006), and thereafter, the present process is ended. I do. In the process of S2005, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is not 10 (S2005: No), the process of S2006 is skipped, and the process ends.

  With this configuration, as the end condition of the round game, an end condition that is established when time elapses (30 seconds have elapsed) and an end condition that is established when a ball is won (10 wins) are obtained. In the case of providing, regardless of which end condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute the operation control of the big hit game based on the same operation scenario. Therefore, the control process of main controller 110 can be simplified.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58, the control processing per accessory performed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 (S1805) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the accessory hit control process (S1805). This accessory hit control process (S1805) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and the special hit flag 203k is turned on in the special power starting opening winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50). Various control processes are executed based on the update status (acquired value of the operation counter) of the operation scenario (the operation scenario defined in the per-principal operation scenario table 202e2) which is set in response to the setting.

  In the accessory hit control process (S1805), first, it is determined whether it is time to start a hit with an accessory (S2101). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the action counter corresponding to the accessory-based action scenario table 202e (see FIG. 26B) is 1. If it is determined that it is the start timing for the accessory (S2101: Yes), the opening command for the accessory is set (S2102), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that it is not the timing of starting the hit of an accessory (S2101: No), next, it is determined whether or not the present is a hit of an accessory (S2103). If it is determined that the character is not hit (S2103: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the character is hitting (S2103: Yes), it is next determined whether it is the timing of the opening operation (S2104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter corresponding to the accessory-based operation scenario table 202e is 26. If it is determined that it is the timing of the opening operation (S2104: Yes), the opening solenoid (V winning opening solenoid 209b) is set to ON (S2105), and thereafter, the present process is terminated. Although not shown in the drawings, the opening solenoid (V winning opening solenoid 209b) is closed (set to off) in accordance with the value of the operation counter corresponding to the per-principal operation scenario table 202e of the V winning device 65 or Then, a process of turning on the storage solenoid 209c is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2104 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2104: No), it is next determined whether or not it is the timing of ending the hit of an accessory (S2106). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter corresponding to the per-principal operation scenario table 202e is 750. If it is determined that it is the timing of ending the hit for the accessory (S2106: Yes), the hit flag 203k is set to off (S2107), and then it is determined whether or not the V flag 203p is on. (S2108). If it is determined that the V flag 203p is off (S2108: No), the process ends. If it is determined that the V flag 203p is on (S2108: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S2110), the V flag 203p is set off (S2111), and then the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2106, if it is determined that the timing is not the timing of ending the accessory (S2106: No), the V-pass detection process is executed (S2112), and then the process ends.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 59, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S4117 (see FIG. 60). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, upon receiving the power-off occurrence information from main controller 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 60), audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S4117. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4117 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), this startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S4117 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process moves to S4008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the flow shifts to S4008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S4117 (see S4116 in FIG. 60). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S4008 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after, for example, the power is completely shut off, and thus the process of step S4008 is performed via steps S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process skips S4009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S4010, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

  The reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is that when the process from S4004 to S4006 is performed via the process in S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If the above has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. The process in S4102 to S4111 is a process related to display (staging), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4112 and the variable display setting processing in S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. , The setting relating to the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101, (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114. An output process is performed (S4102). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and then execute the power-on notification processing (S4104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display updating process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 114.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / production process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Upon completion of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing, a lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then a sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110), and then an effect update process is executed (S4111). Details of the effect update processing (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the process of S4111, the process shifts to the process of S4112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process in S4111, a command determination process (S4112) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the flow shifts to a process in S4113. Details of the command determination processing (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4113, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmitting to the user, is executed. Details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Upon completion of the process in S4113, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off process is executed (S4117). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process-in-progress flag is turned off (S4118). In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4112). This command determination processing (S4112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Hereinafter, the details of the command determination processing (S4112) will be described.

  In the command determination process (S4112), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223. It is determined whether a movable valve operation command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has been received (S4201: Yes), an operation scenario update is set based on the received first movable valve operation command (S4202). finish.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in order to update the operation scenario without delay when a command (first movable valve operation command) related to the operation control of the first movable valve 66b executed when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is received. In addition, a process for determining reception of the first movable valve command is provided in the highest priority determination order of the command determination process. With this configuration, it is possible to easily synchronize the operation control content on the main control device 110 side and the situation grasp content on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

  In the present embodiment, the operation scenario (the first movable valve 66b) is performed only when a command (first movable valve operation command) relating to the operation control of the first movable valve 66b executed when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is received. (Operation scenario for grasping the operation state of the main controller 110 on the side of the sound lamp controller 113), but is not limited to this, and for example, the main controller 110 may be set at predetermined intervals (every hour). It may be configured to output a command indicating the operation control content of the first movable valve 66b from the side or to output a command indicating the operation control content of the first movable valve 66b every time a jackpot game is executed. good. Then, a process of comparing the content of the received command with the content of the updated operation scenario and correcting the updated content of the operation scenario may be executed. This makes it possible to further enhance the accuracy with which the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the operation control content of the main control device 110. Further, the operation scenario updating process on the voice lamp control device 113 may be executed in consideration of a time lag required until a command output from the main control device 110 is received.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not a special figure variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4203). Here, the special figure variation pattern command is a command for notifying a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. In the process of S4203, if it is determined that the special figure change pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special figure change start processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. Details of the special figure change start processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure variation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether a special figure stop type command has been received (S4205). If it is determined that the special figure stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S4206), and the stop type is extracted from the received special figure stop type command (S4207). After that, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4205 that the special figure stop type command has not been received (S4205: No), it is next determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4208). Here, when it is determined that the command of the number of reserved balls has been received (S4208: Yes), the symbol type (special symbol, ordinary symbol) of the received number of retained balls command is analyzed and stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The value of the provided counter is updated (S4209). Specifically, when the special ball number command is received, the value of the special symbol number counter 203c of the main controller 110 included in the special ball number command (that is, the special symbol fluctuation display is held) The number of balls is extracted, and the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value.

  When the command for retaining the number of ordinary symbols is received, the value of the ordinary symbol retained number of balls counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the retained number of balls command (that is, the number of retained balls for the variable display of the ordinary symbol) is included. Is extracted, and the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter provided in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is issued when the ball enters the various entrances (special figure entrance 64, through gate 67) (start winning) and the value of the various retained ball number counter is added, or Since the main control device 110 transmits the value when the value of the number of retained balls counter is decremented at the time of executing the various variation start processing, the process of S4209 is performed every time a winning start or a variation display is set. By the processing, the values of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c and the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the values of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c and the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Can be matched.

  Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the various retaining ball number counters 203c and 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of the start winning, when the variable display is set, that is, when the number of retained balls command is notified based on the change of the number of retained balls, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is corrected. The number of various reserved ball counters of the main controller 110 can be adjusted to the values of the various reserved ball counters 203c and 203d.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4208 that the command for holding balls has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not a winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4210). In the processing of S4210, when it is determined that the winning command has been received (S4210: Yes), the winning command processing is executed (S4211), and this processing ends. This winning command processing (S4211) analyzes the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command, and stores the storage area (of the sound lamp control device 113) corresponding to the analysis result. It performs processing for storing (storing) in the prize information storage area 223b) in the RAM 223 and processing for executing an effect (prefetch effect) based on the received prize information. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4210 that no winning command has been received (S4210: No), it is next determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4212). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4212: Yes), a status command receiving process is executed (S4213), and this process ends. The details of the status command reception processing (S4213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64. However, based on the status command output from main controller 110, the gaming state of pachinko machine 10 (normal state, time reduction state) and the like. Then, a process of setting the winning game state (during a big hit or during a hit) in the slave state setting area 223g is executed.

  Next, in the process of S4212, when it is determined that a status command has not been received (S4212: No), it is determined whether a stop-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4214). If it is determined in the processing of S4214 that a stop-related command has been received (S4214: Yes), stop-related processing is executed (S4215), and this processing ends. A detailed description of this stop-related processing (S4215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, but a third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on various stop commands output from the main controller 110. And a process for setting the display mode of the variable effect using the fourth symbol are executed.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when executing the special symbol variation as a period during which the special symbol variation display is performed. While the special symbol change is being executed based on the special symbol change, a process of forcibly stopping the special symbol change may be executed according to the result of another special symbol change. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the stop-related process (S4215), and stops the variation display (fluctuation effect) of the third symbol and the fourth symbol corresponding to the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped. It is configured to be able to. This makes it possible to synchronize the fluctuation state of the special symbol with the fluctuation effect state displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and to provide a display mode that is easy for the player to understand.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4214 that the stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), it is determined whether a general-purpose related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4216). Is received (S4216: Yes), general-purpose-related processing is executed (S4217), and this processing ends. Details of the general figure-related processing (S4217) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4216, when it is determined that the general-purpose related command has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether or not a hit-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4218), and the hit-related command has been received. If it is determined that the processing has been performed (S4218: Yes), the hit-related processing is executed (S4219), and this processing ends. The details of the hit-related processing (S4219) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. However, as a result of the special symbol lottery, an effect corresponding to a big hit game or a small hit game executed when a big hit or a small hit is won. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

  In the process of S4218, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4218: No), a process according to another command is executed (S4220), and this process ends. In the process of S4220, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, a processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  The command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. In the command determination process (S4112), the order of determining whether or not various commands are received is described. An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used.For example, the process of determining whether or not a status command has been received may be performed more than the process of determining whether or not a special figure variation pattern command has been received. The determination order may be defined so as to be executed first.

  With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, in the special symbol fluctuation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the main controller 110, Even if the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43) is executed, a special symbol variation pattern command is set, and then a status command indicating that the gaming state has been changed is set, the voice lamp control is performed. The game state currently set on the device 113 side can be determined before the special figure change pattern command.

  Next, the special figure change start process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the special figure change start processing (S4204). The special figure change start processing (S4204) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and is performed according to the set game state. Then, a process of setting the display mode (variation pattern for main variation, variation pattern for sub-variation) corresponding to the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  Then, the display control device 114 performs the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure change start processing (S4204) will be described.

  First, when the special figure change start processing is set. The special figure change start flag 223d is set to ON (S4301), a change pattern is extracted from the received special figure change pattern command (S4302), and a detailed display mode is selected using the change pattern selection table 222a (S4303). .

  Next, information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223g is read, and it is determined whether the current game state is the time reduction state (S4304). In the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current time is not the time reduction state (normal state) (S4304: No), a display command during the normal state is set (S4305), and the present process ends. When a display command is set in the process of S4305, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed as shown in FIG. In the main display area Dm as shown in b), an effect mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S4304: Yes), a command for displaying the time saving state is set (S4306), and the value of the notified suspended number storage area 223s is set. Is subtracted by 1 (S4307), a value (fluctuation time) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern received this time is set in the fluctuation time counter 223r (S4308), and this processing ends.

  Next, the winning command processing (S4211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the winning command processing (S4211). The winning command processing (S4211) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a type of the received winning command (special symbol, ordinary symbol). A process for setting an effect to be executed when a winning command is received (a so-called pre-reading effect) is executed according to the symbol and the current game state.

  When the winning command processing (S4211) is executed, first, it is analyzed which symbol type corresponds to which symbol type based on the information included in the received winning command, and is set (stored) in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b. (S4401). Then, it is determined whether or not the V rush flag 223q is set to ON (S4402). If it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is not set to ON (S4402: No), the process proceeds to S4412, and thereafter, the process ends. I do. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4402: Yes), the variable time information included in the received winning command is extracted (S4403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404). If it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is smaller than 1 (it is 0) (S4404: No), the variation time (variation time of the special symbol) included in the winning information received this time is set as the remaining period of the V rush. Since it is in a state where additional notification cannot be made, the extracted fluctuation time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4410), the value of the unreported reserved number storage area 223k is incremented by 1 (S4411), and the processing of S4412 is performed. Move to.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4404 that the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404: Yes), the fluctuation time (the fluctuation time of the special symbol) included in the winning command received this time is changed to the V rush time. Since it is in a state where additional notification can be made as the remaining period, it is determined whether or not the interruption flag 223m is ON (S4405). In the process of S44405, it is determined whether or not the present time is the timing at which the additional notification can be executed. In the present embodiment, during the V rush, during the bonus per game period and during the jackpot game period, the remaining period of the V rush is not added to inform. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to concentrate on various hit games and play the game.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4405 that the interruption flag 223m is off (S4404: No), it is next determined whether or not the special hit flag 223n is on (S4406). If it is determined that the special hit flag 223n is off (S4406: No), since the additional notification can be executed at present, the value of the time reduction counter 223i corresponds to the fluctuation time extracted in the process of S4403. (S4407), add 1 to the value of the notified suspended number storage area 223s, and shift to the process of S4409.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the fluctuation time is added in the process of S4407, a display command corresponding to the added value is set, and an additional notification effect is provided on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. a) is executed. In the present embodiment, as the additional notification effect, all values added in the process of S4407 are configured to be notified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be divided into a plurality of times with the added value as an upper limit. May be configured to execute an additional notification effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggers the addition of the remaining period of V rush (short time remaining), so that the player does not get bored early. Can be performed.

  In addition, the value added in the process of S4407 is reported until the value added in the process of S4407 reaches a predetermined value or the value of the counter 223i for time reduction is reduced to the predetermined value. It is also possible to configure so as not to notify the user by summing the fluctuation times (variation times of special symbols) included in a plurality of winning commands. As a result, it is possible to make the length of the remaining short period added in one additional information notification effect surprising. Further, in this case, for example, when the time is added to the time reduction period counter 223i for the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation time (for example, 50 seconds) of the length set at the time of winning the special symbol jackpot, the additional notification effect is provided. It is preferable that an additional notification effect be performed for 50 seconds. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the special symbol jackpot has been won, and it is possible to enhance the staging effect.

  On the other hand, when the interruption flag 223m is determined to be ON in the processing of S4405 (S4405: Yes), and when the special hit flag 223n is determined to be ON in the processing of S4406 (S4406: Yes), the extraction is performed. The obtained fluctuation time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4410), and the flow shifts to the process of S4411 described above.

  When the process of S4411 is completed, the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is decremented by 1 (S4409), and then other processes are executed (S4412), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  Next, the state command receiving process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the status command receiving process (S4212). This state command reception processing (S4212) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and is performed according to the set game state. This is to execute processing for setting different display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Hereinafter, the details of the status command receiving process (S4213) will be described.

  When the state command receiving process (S4213) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed (S4501). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223g is different from the gaming state indicated by the currently received state command. In the processing of S4501, if it is determined that there is no change in the gaming state (S4501: No), the processing of S4502 to S4508 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S4509. If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S4501: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4502).

  In the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (when the status command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: Yes), then, the current symbol is the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not a hit is made (S4503). If it is determined that the normal symbol is not hit (S4503: No), a display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4504), and the information indicated by the status command received this time is stored (set) in the slave status setting area 223g. ) (S4509), and terminates this process.

  Here, when the command set in the process of S4504 is notified to the display control device 114, the variable effect display during the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the type of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the status command output from the main control device 110 ( Mode and background), and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

  With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each of the game states set on the audio lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114. Only on the basis of the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common command, display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received fluctuation pattern is displayed. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the case where the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, The display controller 114 is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the display data after setting from the display controller 114 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp controller 113 is appropriate. A determination means is provided for determining whether or not there is, and when it is determined that the determination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the content of the display data that has already been set is set. It is preferable to rewrite the display data into simple display data.

  With such a configuration, when appropriate display data is not set for various commands received from the main control device 110 by the audio lamp control device 113, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. , And a variable effect display based on the simple display data can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the variable effect display having the content different from the actual game result (the lottery result of the special symbol) is executed and the player's willingness to play is reduced. The simple display data described above includes, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, and display data for executing a variable display of the fourth symbol. For example, display data having a smaller data amount than display data used in normal fluctuation effect display may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the audio lamp control device 113 sets a display variation pattern command based on the current game state and the received variation pattern. May be configured.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. In the process of S4502, if it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (if the status command received this time is not the command indicating the normal state) (S4502: No), then the changed gaming state is changed to the normal state. It is determined whether the game is in the time reduction state (S4507), and when it is determined that the gaming state is the time reduction state (the currently received state command is a command indicating the time reduction state) (S4507: Yes), the V rush mode is indicated. A display command is set (S4508), and the flow shifts to the process of S4509 described above. If it is determined that the gaming state is not the time reduction state (S4507: No), the process of S4508 is skipped, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4503, when it is determined that the present is a normal symbol (S4503: Yes), a display command indicating the extension mode is set (S4505), and the extension flag 223p is set to ON (S4503). S4506), and proceeds to the process of S4509 described above. When the display command is set in the process of S4505, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed as shown in FIG. The display mode indicating the extension screen shown in b) is set.

  Next, a stop-related process (S4215), which is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop-related processing (S4215). The stop-related processing (S4215) sets a display mode when a stop-related command (a command set when stopped and displayed based on the result of another special symbol lottery) from the main control device 110 is set. Is executed.

  When the stop-related processing (S4215) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the stop-related command received this time is a special figure determination command (S4601). If it is determined that the command is a special figure fixing command (S4601: Yes), a display command for fluctuation stop is set (S4602), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4603. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure determination command has not been received (S4601: No), the process of S4602 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4603.

  In the processing of S4603, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is a special figure temporary stop command (S4603). If it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command has been received (S4603: Yes), the suspension flag 223m is set to ON (S4604), and a display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special symbol is set (S4605). Move on to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command has not been received (S4603: No), the processing of S4604 and S4605 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S4606.

  When the display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special symbol is set in the processing of S4605, the display mode (character of “STOP”) indicating that the temporary stop is being performed is displayed as shown in FIG. At the same time, the subtraction display of the timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the special symbol change is interrupted.

  In the process of S4606, it is determined whether or not the stop-related command received this time is a special figure change restart command (S4606). This special figure change restart command is a command which is set when the change of the special symbol is restarted in the special symbol change execution process (see S206 in FIG. 44) of the main controller 110 (see S702 in FIG. 44). . When it is determined that the special figure change restart command has been received (S4606: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to off (S4607), and a display command indicating the change restart of the special symbol is set (S4608).

  Then, it is determined whether the unreported information has been updated during the period in which the suspension flag 223m is set to ON (S4609). In this process, it is determined whether or not information indicating a new variable time has been stored in the unreported period storage area 223j and the unreported reserved number storage area 223k. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that there is no update (S4609: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an update (S4609: Yes), the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is added in accordance with the update content (S4610), and the unreported period storage area 223j, unreported pending number storage area 223k, The information in the notified suspended count storage area 223s is updated, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure change restart command has not been received (S4606: No), the present process ends.

  The value added by the processing of S4610 is the value of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the interruption flag 223 is set to OFF, that is, when the special figure change is restarted. Are added and notified at the timing of starting the subtraction. With such a configuration, in the state where the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is stopped, various pay games are watched, and after the completion of the various play games, a collective addition notification effect is executed. Even after the end of the game, the player can be expected to add a large amount of the remaining period of the V rush.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the general-purpose-related processing (S4217) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the general map related processing (S4217). This general figure related processing (S4217) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the ordinary figure-related processing (S4217) will be described.

  When the general figure related processing (S4217) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the general figure related command received this time is a general figure change pattern command (S4701). If it is determined that the received command is a normal figure variation pattern command (S4701: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and then the present process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the received command is not the general-figure variation pattern command (S4701: No), then it is determined whether or not the general-figure-related command received this time is a general-figure start command. (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is a general-drawing start command (S4703: Yes), a small win winning command for display is set (S4704), and then the present process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S4703 that the received command is not the per-figure-period start command (S4703: No), then it is determined whether or not the currently-received per-figure-related command is a special power operation command (S4705). ). If it is determined that the received command is a special power operation command (S4705: Yes), a winning command per display V is set (S4706), and then it is determined whether the extension flag 223p is set to ON (S4707). ), When it is determined that the game is set to ON, that is, in the game per bonus game executed by the ball winning to the special power operation port 643 in the general game per game being executed at the end timing of the time saving state. If it is determined that there is any data (S4707: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to off (S4708), and then the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the extension flag 223p is not turned on in the process of S4707 (S4707: No), the process of S4708 is skipped and the present process ends.

  In the process of S4705, if it is determined that the received command is not a special power operation command (S4705: No), it is then determined whether or not the current received general-purpose related command is a general-purpose end command (S4709). ). If it is determined that the received command is not the end command per ordinary figure (S4709: No), the process ends as it is. If it is determined that the received command is the end command per ordinary figure (S4709: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the extension flag 223p is on (S4710). If it is determined that the extension flag 223p is on (S4710: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to off (S4711), a display command indicating the end of the V rush is set (S4712), and the V rush flag 223q is set. It is set to off (S4713), and thereafter, the present process is terminated.

  In the processing of S4710, if it is determined that the extension flag 223p is off (S4710: No), a display command indicating the end of the ordinary drawing is set (S4714), and then this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where the per-figure-per-game is executed in a state where the final change of the special symbol in the time saving state is stopped, the extension flag 223p is set to extend the V rush effect. Set to on. Then, the end timing of the V-rush effect is made different depending on the progress of the special electric game executed based on the normal per-game. Specifically, when the ball does not win in the special power operation port 643 in the per-figure game, the V rush effect is terminated at the end timing of the per-figure game, and the ball is moved to the special power operation port 643. When a prize is won and a per-game per-game is executed, the V-rush effect is terminated at the end timing of the per-game per-game. In addition, when a ball wins to the V winning opening 165 in the per-prize game, the effect based on the big hit game (V big hit game) is executed with priority.

  With such a configuration, a period in which the player can aim for the V jackpot game can be notified to the player regardless of the game state, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the hit-related process (S4219) which is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the content of the hit-related processing (S4219). In the hit-related processing (S4219), the effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the special hit per game which is executed when the special hit is won or the hit per bonus as a result of the lottery of the special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81. The main control device 110 executes a process corresponding to various commands transmitted when a jackpot or an accessory is won.

  In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a hit game (big hit game, game per role) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated, A process of setting a display prize ball number command based on the accumulation result is executed.

  In the hit-related processing (S4219), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) is a big-hit-related command (S4801). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4801: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S4802), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 68, the jackpot-related process (S4802), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related processing (S4802). In the jackpot-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won is performed. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot-related process (S4802), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received in the hit-related process (S4801 in FIG. 67) is a jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined that the command is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4902). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the V rush flag 223q is on (S4903). If it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is ON (S4903: Yes), it is determined whether the current big hit is a special hit (big hit B) (S4911), and it is determined that it is a special hit (big hit B). In this case (S4911: Yes), the special hit flag 223n is set to off (S4912), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4911 that the current big hit is not a special hit (big hit B) (S4911: No), the process of S4912 is skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S4903, when it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is off (S4903: No), the number of time savings given in the big hit executed this time is extracted (S4904) and stored in the winning information storage area 223b. The special figure prize information is read out (S4905), an object is selected up to the number of time savings extracted from the read special figure prize information (S4906), and the number of the selected special figure prize information is stored in an unreported reserved number storage area 223k. (S4907), calculate the fluctuation time included in the selected special figure winning information (S4908), store the calculated fluctuation time in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4909), and turn on the V rush flag 223q. This is set (S4910), and then the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4901 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S4913). If the round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4914), and the process ends. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number of rounds command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, when the main control device 110 is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started as a round update command, the audio ramp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the RAM 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the sound lamp control device 113 side determines the current round based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. Calculate the number and configure the display round number command Good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4913 that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S4915). If it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S4915: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S4915: Yes), the jackpot end process is executed (S4916), and this process ends.

  Here, the jackpot termination process (S4919), which is one of the jackpot-related processes (S4802 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot ending process (S4919).

  In the jackpot ending process (S4919), the number of time savings given in the jackpot executed this time is set in the look-ahead counter 223h (S5001), and the value of the notified suspended number storage area 223s is subtracted from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h ( Then, the value stored in the unreported pending number storage area 223k is read (S5003). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the unreported reserved number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004). If it is determined that the value of the unreported reserved number storage area 223k is smaller than 1 (it is 0) (S5004: No), an additional notification effect is executed on the ending screen of the jackpot game (see FIG. 15A). Since it is in a state where it is not possible to do so (because there is no change time information to be added), a display no-addition command is set (S5014), and then this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5004, when it is determined that the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004: Yes), that is, information indicating a variable time in which additional notification is possible (used for additional notification). If there is no special symbol fluctuation time information), the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted in accordance with the read value (S5005), and among the values stored in the unreported pending number storage area 223k, the value of S5005 The value corresponding to the value subtracted in the processing is cleared (S5006), and the fluctuation time stored in the unreported period storage area 223j is read (S5007).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the winning information (special figure reservation information) included in the winning information storage area 223b includes the winning information indicating the winning of the special hit (big hit B) (S5008). If it is determined that there is no change (S5008: No), an additional command for display corresponding to the read fluctuation time is set (S5009), and among the fluctuation times stored in the unreported period storage area 223j, The period corresponding to the fluctuation time used for the additional effect is cleared (S5010), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5008, when it is determined that the winning information indicating the winning of the special winning (big hit B) is included in the winning information storage area 223b (S5008: Yes), the change until the special winning change is completed. A display command corresponding to the fluctuation time is set (S5011). In other words, when the special symbol change executed one after another is the special symbol change corresponding to the special winning, the state in which the change time for four special symbol holdings can be added and notified as an additional notification effect is provided. Even if it is, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation (special winning fluctuation) corresponding to the special winning win only Is used for additional information production.

  Further, a display command indicating the special mode (heaven mode) is set (S5012), the special hit flag 223n is set to ON (S5013), and the process shifts to the above-described process of S5010.

  With this, if the winning information indicating the winning of the special hit (big hit B) exists in the special symbol holding at the end of the big hit game, the special mode (heaven mode) is entered as shown in FIG. And a change time “220 seconds” until the special hit change ends is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the period until the special hit game (the big hit game in which the big hit B is set) is executed. Further, after the end of the special winning game, the time saving state is set again, so that the player can play the game in the heaven mode with peace of mind. Furthermore, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol held and stored after the special hit change is not notified to the player, the period of the time saving state (V rush) set after the big hit game is ended until the big hit game ends. It can be difficult for the player to understand.

  Referring back to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4801 that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S4801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a accessory-related command (S4803). If it is determined that the received command is an accessory-related command (S4803: Yes), an accessory-related process (S4804) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the accessory hit-related process (S4804), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the content of the accessory hit-related process (S4804). In the accessory hitting related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a bonus hit game executed when the hit hit is executed is performed. Is executed, processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the hit-related process (S4804), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received in the hit-related process (S4219 in FIG. 67) is a hit-start command (S5101).

  In the processing of S5101, if it is determined that the start command per accessory has been received (S5101: Yes), the start command per accessory is set for display (S5102), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the received command is not the accessory hit start command (S5101: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a V entrance passage command (S5103). .

  In the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S5103: Yes), a winning command per display accessory is set (S5104), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5103 that the received command is not the V-entry passing command (S5103: No), it is next determined whether the received command is the V-passing command (S5105).

  In the process of S5105, if it is determined that the V-pass command has been received (S5105: Yes), the display V-hit command is set (S5106), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5105 that the received command is not a V-pass command (S5105: No), it is next determined whether the received command is an ending command (S5107). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S5107: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S5107: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S5108), and the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. In the process of S4803, when it is determined that the received command is not the accessory hit related command (S4803: No), it is determined whether a prize ball command has been received (S4805). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4805: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4805: Yes), a value corresponding to the received command is added to a value of a prize ball counter (not shown) (S4806). The display prize ball number command corresponding to the value of the prize ball counter after the addition is set (S4807), and this processing ends.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the period in which the V rush flag 223q is set to ON (advantageous continuation period). Is accumulated by the award ball number counter. Then, during a win game (big hit game, role hit game) or during a V rush effect, information indicating the number of prize balls according to the accumulated value of the prize ball counter is displayed (FIG. 12). (Refer to the display area HR2 of (c)).

  With this configuration, the total number of balls acquired during the period from the time saving state (V rush) to the end of the V rush (advantageous continuation period) is notified to the player in an easily understandable manner. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, the accumulated value of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is configured to be displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but the number of award balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be notified to the player. For example, during the advantageous continuation period, the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game and the number of prize balls obtained in the game per accessory may be displayed separately. . In this case, the winning game state (during the big hit or hitting the accessory) at the time of receiving the prize ball command is determined based on the information set in the dependent state setting area 223g, and the number of prize balls is accumulated for each determination result. It is preferable to provide a means for performing this. As a result, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily classified.

  Further, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period (a period in which the jackpot game period and the latent state period until the next jackpot game is executed) within the advantageous continuation period is accumulated and displayed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is preferable to provide a storage unit for storing the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage unit in history.

  In the present embodiment, the number of times of the V jackpot game executed based on the special electric game during the V rush period is configured to be cumulatively displayed (see the display area HR1 in FIG. 12C). In the case of using a configuration in which the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is cumulatively displayed as described above, the number of times the special symbol lottery result becomes a lottery result (big hit) that is advantageous to the player, as described above. May be displayed, or the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a lottery result (big hit) advantageous to the player may be displayed.

  With this configuration, it is possible for the player to analyze the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period. Can be performed.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S4113). The variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) performs the special symbol display based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. A process for setting a display variation pattern command and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit C), a process of setting a display special figure stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the variation display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5201). If it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is off (S5201: No), the special figure change pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, and the process proceeds to S5205. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is on (S5201: Yes), the special figure change start flag 223d is set to off (S5202).

  Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure variation start process (see S4204 of FIG. 62) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 of FIG. 61), the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. A variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol is set based on the variation pattern related to (S5203), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205.

  The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5203 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113. You. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating a gaming state.

  In the process of S5205, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S5205). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not set to ON (S5205: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type is set to ON (S5205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S5206), the extracted stop type is set as it is (S5207), and the display special figure stop is performed. The type command is set (S5208), and the process ends.

  Next, the effect update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the effect update processing (S4111). This effect update process (S4111) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and updates the values of various counters set during the V rush period. , To execute a process for setting the effect mode based on the updated counter value.

  In the effect update processing (S4111), first, it is determined whether or not the suspension flag 223m is set to ON (S5300). If the suspension flag 223m is set to ON (S5300: Yes), the process proceeds to S5309. Then, the present process ends. On the other hand, when the interruption flag 223m is not set to ON, that is, when the special symbol change is not interrupted (S5300: No), it is next determined whether or not the value of the change time counter 223r is larger than 0. (S5301). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S5301: No), the process proceeds to S5309. If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter is greater than 0 (S5301: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter is updated (S5302), and then it is determined whether the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is greater than 0. (S5303). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is 0 (S5303: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5303, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is updated (S5304), and then the updated time reduction period counter 223i. It is determined whether or not the value of is equal to 0 (S5305). When it is determined that the value of the updated time reduction counter 223i is not 0 (S5305: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the time reduction counter 223i is set (S5306). The display command set here is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, like the other display commands. Is output. Then, image data is created by the display control device 114 and displayed as a display mode of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the V rush (see FIG. 13A).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter is a value indicating the remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307). In the process of S5307, if the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r is determined to be a value indicating the remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is small is set (S5308). The flow shifts to S5309. When the display command is set in the process of S5308, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is transmitted to the player. On the other hand, an effect mode (for example, an unlucky effect) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol change during execution is small is set. Thereby, the player can play the game while selecting whether or not to execute the special electric game for executing the V jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed becomes 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining change time is short is set. However, without being limited to this, for example, before executing the process of S5308, a lottery process for determining whether to set a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is short is executed, and the lottery process is performed. The display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is short may be set only when it is determined that the result of (1) sets the display command. With this configuration, an effect mode (for example, unlucky effect) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol change during execution is short is not set (unlucky effect on the third symbol display device 81). Is not executed), it is difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is long or short.

  Further, in the processing of S5307, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r indicates the remaining period of 5 seconds and is not a value (S5307: No), the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation is calculated from the winning information storage area 223b (the next fluctuation time). Is read (S5313), and the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol fluctuation being executed) is the value obtained in the processing of S5313. It is determined whether it is longer (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the read next fluctuation (S5314).

  In the process of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) indicates the variation time of the next variation read in the process of S5313. If it is determined that it is longer (longer) than the number of seconds (S5314: Yes), the current situation is advantageous to the player, that is, if the V jackpot game is executed, the V set after the end of the V jackpot game A display command indicating a lucky time for notifying the player that the rush period is likely to be long is set (S5315), and the flow shifts to the process of S5309. On the other hand, in the process of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is the variation time of the next variation read in the process of S5313. If it is determined that the time is not longer (shorter) than the number of seconds indicating (S5314: No), the process skips S5315 and shifts to the process of S5309.

  When the display command is set in the process of S5315, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 in FIG. The display mode of the lucky time effect shown in b) is set. With such a configuration, the player can grasp a period that is more advantageous to the player in the V rush period, so that the game during the V rush period can be prevented from becoming monotonous. In the present embodiment, the case where the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the next special symbol variation by 10 seconds or more is set as the execution opportunity of the lucky time effect. Without limitation, it is only necessary to be able to notify the player of the period during which the remaining fluctuation time is longer when the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted by the lucky time effect, for example, regardless of the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, The determination that the remaining period of the special symbol change is equal to or longer than a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 50 seconds) may be used as an opportunity to execute the lucky time effect.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is read out in the process of S5313. Although the processing of S5315 is always executed when the time is longer (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation, the invention is not limited to this. For example, before executing the processing of S5315, A lottery process is performed to determine whether to set a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is long, and the remaining fluctuation time is long only when the result of the lottery process determines to set the display command. May be configured to set a display command that indicates that. With this configuration, the effect mode (for example, lucky time effect) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol change during execution is long is not set (the lucky time effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81). Is not executed), it is difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is long or short.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5305, when it is determined that the value of the updated time-saving period counter 223i is 0 (S5305: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is greater than 0 (S5310). When it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is larger than 0 (S5310: Yes), the special symbol change is not executed even though the end condition of the time saving state is not satisfied. A display command indicating continuation “???” is set (S5311), and the flow shifts to the step S5309. The display command set in the process of S5311 is the same as the other display commands in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113. 114. Then, image data is created by the display control device 114, and a display mode (see FIG. 19A) indicating that the time saving end condition is not updated during the V rush is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5310, if it is determined that the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 0 (S5310: No), a display command indicating the end of the V rush is set (S5312), and the V rush flag 223q is set to off. Then, the flow shifts to the processing of S5309. In the processing of S5309, other effect update processing is executed (S5309), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame worth of processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to the hardware configuration. , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 of the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 performs various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102 and S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a ends based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85A) described later, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)), a simple image at power-on (a main image at power-on and a fluctuation image at power-on) (not shown) is drawn. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning prize) in the special figure entrance 64, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued by the main controller 110 by the sound lamp control. If the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, if the display change pattern command is received, the power-on change image can be displayed immediately during the change effect period, and a simple change effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and its transfer takes a long time, so that after power-on, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), it is first determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display the image on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. 38 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A, big hit B, reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, reach out) is indicated by the display stop type command. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the flow shifts to the process of S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). The fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of step S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, when it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is performed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command process (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, out of reach, or completely out of reach) indicated by the stop type command for display. (S6601), and compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to ON (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the main control device 110 always determines the start of the change at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the opening command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 78A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S6805), the round number command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S6905), the ending command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6412 that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation stop command for display among unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is a variation stop command for use (S6414: Yes), a variation stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command process executes a process corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The display variation stop command is the end timing of the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 73) of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, the special symbol of the special symbol in the main control device 110. At the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern (timing at which the main control device 110 sets the stop command), the display stop command (output from the sound lamp control device 113) 7 shows the normal stop command) and various display commands set in the fluctuating stop process (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol independently (in parallel). When one special symbol is stopped (confirmed) and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a jackpot), the other special symbol being changed is changed to the end of a predetermined variation pattern (variation time). Regardless of the presence or absence, the stop display is forcibly performed with a symbol indicating the detachment.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when forcibly stopping the change of the special symbol from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the change stop process (see S4217 in FIG. 70). A display command (variable display) for variably displaying the display mode of the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol change (variable display so as to correspond to the display mode of the special symbol forcibly stopped and displayed). Stop command).

  In the present embodiment, even if the above-described normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display based on the forced stop command received later is configured to be executed. That is, the forced stop command is processed prior to the normal stop command. Thus, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the control content of the main control device 110.

  In addition, the display fluctuation stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display command indicating the temporary stop. When (temporary stop command for display) is received, the data table in which the display data in which the pattern to be stopped and displayed slightly fluctuates is determined as the fluctuation stop display data is configured.

  In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

  Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then, it is determined whether there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification is performed. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), display notification command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command process executes a process corresponding to the (display) notification command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

  In the notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer is read. 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

  Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the notification command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the sound lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other related commands such as a light emitting command other than a display command, a voice output command, and a command for driving an accessory are temporarily received, and the processing of the display control device 114 is performed. A configuration may be such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device in a state in which information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in step (1) is added.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each of the rear image types (back A and B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after change is determined from the rear image determination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

  Also, in the task processing, if it is specified to display either the back A or B according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002 is used. The type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the type of the RAM storing the image data corresponding to the range of the back image ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the effects of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the rear image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420). If it is (S6420: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S7102 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no error command (S6420: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6422 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extraction and execution of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command, are performed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7201: No) ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, And various parameters required for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, a pointer update process is performed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( In step S7406, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the process of S7206 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like. , Various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S7209: No), the finalized display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the finalized display effect. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), a stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, and a certain time has elapsed since the end of the fixed display effect. Thereafter, processing for displaying the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7222), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), and the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table defining that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, details of the above-described transfer setting processing (S6305), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is read from the character ROM 234 from the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7602 (S7602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). If there is an untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update processing (S7205) of the previously executed display setting processing (S6303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined from the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting a transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7706 (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the processing in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7705: No), the processing shifts to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow proceeds to the processing of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710) and provided for each back image type. Among the rear image determination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the flow shifts to the process of S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When the indicated stop type information is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information A drawing list (FIG. 38) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the type of the storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in order of the sprites after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as detailed drawing information (detailed information). If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 75B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, a part of the configuration of the game board 13, a part of the configuration of the main control device 110, and a part of the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment. are doing.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a special power operation port 643 and an out port 644 are provided as ball entrances into which a ball that has won the general winning award device 640 can enter. I was Then, when the ball wins in the special power operating port 643, the game per accessory is executed. However, in the above-described first embodiment, there is only one operating port for executing the game per accessory, and it is not possible to give a variation to the game per accessory, so that the game is monotonous. In addition to getting tired of the game at an early stage, since the game per bonus is executed with the same operation pattern every time, the bonus game is executed at a timing that allows the ball to easily win the V winning opening 165 (Tokuden) There is a problem that a game is easily executed (a ball is won in the operating port 643).

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a second special power activating port 1643 is newly provided in the general power prize winning device 640, and a ball winning the general power prize winning device 640 is provided by the special power operating port 643 and the second special power operating port. 1643 or the out opening 644.

  Furthermore, it is configured so that the game per hit with an open pattern different when the ball has won the special power operating port 643 and when the ball has won the second special power operating port 1643 is executed. The game per bonus executed when a ball wins in the second special power operation port 1643 is more effective than the game per bonus executed when the ball wins, and the ball wins during the game per bonus. 165 (see FIG. 6).

  With such a configuration, the player can be more interested in the flow-down state of the ball that has won the prize winning device 640 during the per-game game. In addition, when the ball wins in the special power operating port 643 and when the ball wins in the second special power operating port 1643, a game with a different action pattern is executed, so that the ball wins in the V winning port 165. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to execute the accessory game with easy timing (to make the special power operation port 643 win a ball).

  Further, in the second embodiment, the various fluctuations performed in the first embodiment described above are compared with the remaining fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol being executed in the case where the game per bonus is executed during the time saving state. A first game method suggestion effect that is executed based on the remaining time of a special symbol change (special figure change) that is interrupted when a game per role is executed during a time-saving state. 2 is different from the game method suggestion effect in that it is configured to be newly executable.

  In the first embodiment described above, as described above with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, as an effect for indicating the game content of the game (special electric game) during the time reduction state, the remaining duration of the time reduction state, The effect for notifying the lottery result, the execution status of the game per ordinary figure, the execution status of the game per accessory, is configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It was an easy-to-understand notification to the player.

  However, in the effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, it is possible to inform the player of the game situation during the time-saving state (during the V rush), but it is possible to inform the player of the situation. , It was not possible for the player to select a game method in order to allow the player to execute a better game. In other words, if the per-character game that interrupts the subtraction of the remaining change time of the special symbol change, which is the remaining period of the V rush (the period until the special symbol change that satisfies the time saving end condition is completed), is executed, However, by causing the V winning device 65 to win a plurality of balls, it is better to end the game per role as soon as possible with the aim of winning the ball to the V winning opening 165. It was not possible to give (notify) to the player whether it was better to give up the ball and continue the game per role as long as possible.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the first game method suggestion effect and the second game method suggestion effect described above are configured to be executable, various suggestions executed for the player are provided. It is possible to select a game method of a game per role based on the effect contents of the effect. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed by the game method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the game method. On the other hand, the player can be interested. Further, since the degree of advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the result of the selection by the player, the player can actively participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  First, the configuration of the general winning award device 640 used in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the general winning award device 640 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram of the general winning award in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the state which the ball which won the apparatus 640 can flow down to the 2nd special electric power operation port 1643. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the above-described pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration in the general winning award device 640 is different. Are identical. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the universal winning award device 640 of the second embodiment is different from the universal winning award device 640 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 3) in the lower end side of the second partition 640k2 (see FIG. 88). A notch is provided below the position divided by the movable valve 642), and a second partition 640k2 is formed in order to form a fourth flow path 641d into which a ball can flow through an opening formed by the notch. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a fourth partition 640k4 connected to the lower end of the second partition is provided.

  The second flow path 641b and the fourth flow path 641b are used to cause the second flow path 641b to flow down to the special power operation port 643 without causing the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641a to flow into the fourth flow path 641d. The normal position (see FIG. 88) for blocking the path 641d and the flow path in which the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641a flows down the second flow path 641b and enters the special power operation port 643 are closed. The difference is that a third movable valve 1643 that can be changed is provided at an operating position (see FIG. 89) for guiding to the flow path 641d.

  Although described in detail later, the third movable valve 1643 is configured to be variably operated by driving a third movable valve solenoid 209f connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. When the operation control of the per-figure game by the control device 110 is started, the normal operation and the operation position are variably operated in a predetermined variable pattern. The third movable valve 1643 is located at the operating position when the third movable valve solenoid 209 is set to ON (when energized), and when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF (when not energized). ) Is configured to be located at the normal position. Therefore, in the state where the game per day drawing is not executed, it is located at the normal position. In the second embodiment, when the ball is won in the special power operation port 643 and when the ball is won in the second special power operation port 1643, the game content (operation) The pattern is made different so that the ball is more easily awarded to the V winning opening 165 during the game per accessory than when the ball is awarded to the second special power operating port 1643. Therefore, when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to the off position, the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at the normal position where the ball cannot enter the second special power operation port 1643 to thereby illegally move the ball. It is possible to suppress the act of winning the second special power operation port 1643.

  Further, the movable range of the third movable valve 1643 is located in the second state (the state where the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641a is guided to the third flow path 641c (see FIG. 88)). It is designed to be in a range that does not come into contact with the movable valve 642. With this configuration, the third movable valve 1642 can be moved without considering the movable state of the second movable valve 642.

  When the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state and the third movable valve 1642 is located in the operating position, as shown in FIG. 89, the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 becomes the third movable valve. It is received on the upper surface of the valve 1642 and guided to the second special power operation port 1643. As will be described in detail later, the third movable valve 1642 is variably operated in a predetermined variable pattern when the game per game is started, and the operation position (see FIG. 89) is changed. A variable operation of maintaining 0.2 seconds and maintaining the normal position (see FIG. 88) for 1.5 seconds is repeatedly executed. In other words, about 85% of the balls passing through the second movable valve 642 located in the first state win the prize in the special power operation port 643, and about 15% prize in the second special power operation port 1643. are doing. Therefore, during the regular game per game, the special power operation port 643 is an operation port in which a ball is more likely to win than the second special power operation port 1643.

  Further, when the ball wins in the second special power operating port 1643, the ball can easily win in the V winning opening 165 in the executed per-proxy game, when the ball wins in the special power operating port 643 than when the ball wins. It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the second embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, in the special electric game aiming at the V jackpot game triggered by the ordinary symbol lottery, the game result during the regular game per game (the ball is in any operating port) The victory of the ball in the V winning opening 165 during the game per role is different depending on whether the player wins the game or not. It will be closely watched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the per-figure game executed during the time saving state, whether the operation port where the ball wins is the special power operation port 643 or the second special power operation port 1643 is determined by the third movable state. Since it is determined by the variable operation of the valve 1642, the operating port where the ball is easy to win does not change due to the game per game executed, and it is expected that the ball always wins to the second special power operating port 1643. While it is possible for the player to enthusiastically execute the game per ordinary drawing, the present invention is not limited to this. About 85% of the balls that have passed through the second movable valve 642 located in the state enter the special power operating port 643, and about 15% win the second special power operating port 1643. Be communicated It is now possible to set a per-figure per-figure type and a per-figure per-figure per-type in which a per-figure per-figure game in which the ratio of a ball winning to the second special power operation port 1643 is higher than the normal per-figure per-game is performed. You may comprise.

  By configuring in this way, for a player who aims for a V jackpot game by a special electric game, a lottery result of a normal symbol (set per type of general figure), a game per general figure, and a game per role item, The player can be watched closely, and the special electric game can be more eagerly played.

<Production contents executed in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, characteristic contents of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 (a) shows a state in which the remaining time period of the regular game long hit game is predetermined in the state in which the regular game long hit game and the special character hit game are executed in an overlapping manner during the time saving state (V rush). FIG. 90B is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display content displayed when the time is less than a period (less than 15 seconds), and FIG. 90B illustrates a general figure long hitting game and a role in a time-saving state (V rush). A schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the remaining time of a general long game is longer than a predetermined period (15 seconds or more) in a state in which a game with a hit is repeatedly executed. It is. Note that the same display modes as the display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. I do.

  In this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the time-saving state is configured to continue until the special symbol change that satisfies the condition for ending the time-saving state is completed. When the game per bonus is executed (middle), the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (the process of subtracting the change time of the special symbol change is interrupted). In other words, during the execution of the per-principal game, there is a period in which the remaining period of the time reduction state is not subtracted. Therefore, the game can be performed without worrying about the remaining period of the time saving state from the time when the game per accessory is executed to the time when the ball is awarded in the V winning opening 165 (V winning).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to execute many jackpot games (V jackpot games) during the time reduction state (during the V rush), a long variation time is required as a special symbol variation executed during the time reduction state. By setting, the method of lengthening the period of the time reduction state (the period until the time reduction end condition is satisfied) and the method of executing the game per character are shortened so that the remaining period of the time reduction state is reduced as much as possible. There are ways to interrupt. The former method is based on the result of the special symbol lottery and is set regardless of the skill of the player. Therefore, when a short fluctuation time is set as the special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state, the game of the player is performed. There was a risk that the willingness would decrease.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the length of the period in which the remaining period of the time saving state is subtracted can be changed depending on the skill of the player, It is possible to play the game eagerly.

  Here, a description will be given of a method of shortening the interval at which the per-accompaniment game is executed so that the subtraction of the remaining period of the time-saving state is interrupted as much as possible. The game in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment during the time reduction state is the same as that of the first embodiment described above. First, the lottery of the ordinary symbols is executed, and the game per the ordinary figure is executed based on the winning per the ordinary figure. . Then, during the per-game per game, the ball is made to win in the special power operation port 643 and the second special power operation port 1643 in the general power prize winning device 640, and the per game is executed, and the V prize device is executed during the per game. A game (special electric game) in which a ball is won (V win) in the V winning opening 165 in 65 and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is aimed at.

  Then, the lottery of the ordinary symbol, which is a trigger for starting the special electric game, is configured such that the lottery of the ordinary symbol has already been executed or that the lottery of the ordinary symbol is not newly executed during the per-game game. In other words, it is configured such that the per-accessory game and the normal symbol lottery can be executed in an overlapping manner. Further, a plurality of termination conditions are set in the per game play, and when a predetermined number (three) of balls are won in the V winning device 65 during the per game play, or for a predetermined period (per play The configuration is such that the per-accessory game is terminated by the elapse of a period in which the operation scenario of the game is updated up to the end timing of the per-accessory game.

  Therefore, by increasing the lottery period (fluctuation period) of the ordinary symbols, that is, the execution period of the per-actor game that is executed in an overlapped manner with the period in which the per-fix game is not executed, the per-fix game is executed. It is possible to shorten the execution period of the special symbol change in the period in which no special symbol is changed. This makes it possible to prevent the execution interval of the per-accompaniment game from being lengthened by performing the special symbol change during the normal symbol lottery period (during the change period).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of opening operation patterns are configured to be executable as a per-figure game, and an open state in which a ball can be awarded to the per-prize winning device 640 during the per-figure game (an electric accessory) (The state in which 640a is opened) is configured to be able to execute the advantageous per-figure per game in which the open state is set shorter than the advantageous per-figure per game. I have. Furthermore, in the disadvantageous game per game, after an open state in which a ball can be made to enter the universal winning device 640 is set, a closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the universal winning device 640 is set for a long time ( (15 seconds).

  Even in the long-term closed state in this disadvantageous per-game, it is substantially impossible to execute a new per-game as in the above-described period of fluctuation of the ordinary symbol. In the case where the game and the disadvantageous per-game are executed in an overlapping manner, by executing the per-accessory-period game for a longer period, the special symbol change is performed during a period in which a new per-accessory game is not executed. The period can be shortened. This makes it possible to prevent the execution interval of the game per accessory from being lengthened by executing the special symbol change during the closed period during the game per ordinary figure.

  As described above, during the V rush, a disadvantageous period in which a new per-accompaniment game is not executed (it is difficult to perform) is determined, and the disadvantageous period and the special figure fluctuation are determined. If the game period per role where the subtraction is interrupted overlaps, the execution period of the special symbol change during the disadvantageous period can be shortened by lengthening the execution period of the game per role currently being executed. In the present embodiment, when the disadvantageous period overlaps with the per-accessory game, the player can be notified of that fact.

  In other words, by the effect contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the player can visually recognize the game status of the per-figure per game during the per-bonus game. And it is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect may be changed according to the game situation of the per-figure per game in the per-proxy play. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), while the per-accompaniment-per-game is being executed (the special-figure change is interrupted), the long-time (15-second) If the closed period is in progress, the display area HR10 indicates “10 seconds until the end of the per-figure figure” as information indicating the remaining period until the end of the disadvantageous game per game (remaining period until the close period ends). Is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "continue STOP with no winning per item" is displayed as a notification mode for notifying the player of the advantage of extending the playing period of the game per item. Other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13B of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In this way, by allowing the player to grasp the display mode of the display area HR10 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds, the player can move the ball to the V winning device 65 for the per-principal game being executed. A game aiming for a V prize by making a prize, that is, a condition for ending a game per role based on a ball prize is likely to be satisfied, and a game period per role is easily shortened. The first game that can be aimed at is executed or the execution of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) based on the V prize is abandoned, and the condition for terminating the game per accessory based on the lapse of time is established to extend the game period per item. It is possible to select whether to execute two games (games in which a ball is not fired).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), even in the case where the game per accessory and the long-term fluctuation of the ordinary symbol overlap, the player is provided with a game method ( Information for selecting the first game and the second game) is displayed. Specifically, when the per-accompaniment game is being executed (the special figure change is suspended), and the remaining period of the ordinary symbol change being executed is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (15 seconds), In the display area HR11, a comment of "15 seconds until the end of the ordinary symbol change" is displayed as information indicating the remaining period of the ordinary symbol change. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "continue STOP with no winning per item" is displayed as a notification mode for notifying the player of the advantage of extending the playing period of the game per item. Other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13B of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With this configuration, it is possible to vary the length of the period in which the special symbol change is interrupted depending on the skill (the content of the game to be executed) of the player. (During the state) can be actively executed. In addition, regardless of which game is selected by the player, a game result that can be advantageous to the player at different points can be generated. The game results can be greatly different, and the game method can be more positively selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the operation pattern of the per-figure-period game executed during the time-saving state, at least the advantageous per-figure per-game and the disadvantageous per-figure per game are configured to be executable, and are executed during the time-saving state. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol can be set to a long time fluctuation or a short time fluctuation. Then, in the case where the game per role is executed during the game per advantageous figure, and in the case where the game per role is executed during a short-time fluctuation of the ordinary symbol, the ball is won during the game per role. The configuration is such that a player who wins a game (first game) that wins the device 65 is more advantageous.

  As described above, the timing (the presence or absence of a disadvantageous period) that is a disadvantageous period (a period during which a new per-accessory game cannot be executed) during the time reduction state (during the V rush) is made variable in accordance with the result of the normal symbol lottery. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game during the time reduction game (during the V rush) from becoming monotonous.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a per-accessory game, a ball pertaining to the V-prize device 65 is more likely to win a prize (V-prize) into the V-prize port 165 than the ball per V-prize device 165. The game per disadvantageous disadvantage is configured to be executable, and when the game per advantage is executed, it is possible to make the ball V-prize at a rate of approximately 100% of the game per the privilege. It is possible that the probability of winning a V-prize is about 1/11 when the game per disadvantageous object is executed.

  Therefore, in the case where the per-bonus game executed overlapping with the above-mentioned disadvantageous period is the per-advantage bonus game, the effects shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and (b) are not executed. ing. With such a configuration, a game (second game) that does not aim at the execution of the V jackpot game is executed despite the situation in which the player can easily acquire the V jackpot game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from executing an excessively disadvantageous game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b), a description will be given of an effect performed based on the length of the remaining period (remaining variation time) of the special symbol variation interrupted in the per-bonus game. I do. FIG. 91A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). FIG. 91 (b) schematically shows the display contents of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the suspended special symbol fluctuation remaining period is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time saving state (during the V rush), the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game Is configured such that the period obtained by adding the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation during suspension to the number of time savings (for example, four time savings) set in accordance with the jackpot type of the jackpot game to be executed is set as the period of are doing. That is, after the end of the special symbol change restarted after the end of the jackpot game (special symbol change interrupted at the time of executing the jackpot game), the reduction of the number of working hours is started.

  Therefore, even if a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in which the same jackpot type is set is executed, after the jackpot game ends, according to the remaining period of the special symbol change during the jackpot game (V jackpot game) The period of the new time saving state to be set will be different. Like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game different from the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state has a playability aiming for a big hit, and an element for terminating the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state. In the pachinko machine 10 used as (an element for setting the duration of the time saving state), it is desirable to execute the big hit game (V big hit game) in a state where the remaining period of the special symbol change is long. However, as in the first embodiment described above, the remaining short time period mode 801 indicating the duration of the time reduction state (see FIG. 12A) does not indicate the remaining time period of each special symbol change, and the time reduction state of the time reduction state is not indicated. Information corresponding to the total time until the end of the special symbol change in which the end condition is satisfied is displayed, and the timer 812 (see FIG. 12 (b)) indicates until the end of the special symbol change in which the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. Is configured to be displayed as a countdown.

  In other words, in the effect mode described in the first embodiment, the player cannot grasp the remaining period of the special symbol change that is interrupted by the execution of the per-accessory game for the player. Was something. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the effect mode of the above-described first embodiment, an effect corresponding to the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change can be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change during the per-game play is 0.1 second (see FIG. 91 (c)), In the display area Ds, a comment of “It is better to make a VGET for the next role” is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 91B, the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change during the game for the role is reduced. In the case of 20.1 seconds (see FIG. 91 (d)), a comment of “Large chance if VGET is performed per present character” is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining period of the special symbol change during suspension is determined, and if the determination result is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the game is executed in the current per-accessory game. When a ball is won in the V winning port 165 and a V jackpot game is executed, an effect indicating that the period of the time reduction state (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to be shortened. If the remaining period of the executed special symbol change is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the ball is won in the V winning opening 165 in the current per-game game, and the V jackpot game is executed. When executed, it is configured to execute an effect indicating that the period of the time saving state (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to be long. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to make a selection (selecting whether or not to win the ball in the V winning opening 165) based on the contents of the effect of executing the game method during the V jackpot game, and It is possible to greatly differ the game results during the V rush period based on the game method arbitrarily selected.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in order to execute the effect shown in FIG. 91 (a), other effect execution conditions are also provided. The first condition that is satisfied when the winning information that has been won is included in the winning information of the finished ordinary symbol), and the special symbol change (where the suspended special symbol change establishes the time saving end condition). The second condition that is satisfied in the case of not being a time-saving final change). By setting the performance execution conditions in this way, the time saving state is immediately terminated after selecting a game that does not allow the ball to win a V during the game per active character, according to the comment displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that occurs.

  It should be noted that the execution conditions of the effects shown in FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b) may be the execution conditions used in the present embodiment. For example, the remaining period of the special symbol change during suspension and the next execution A comparison means is provided for comparing the fluctuation time of the special symbol change to be performed, and when the comparison result determines that the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol change is longer, the V during the current per-accessory game. An effect for prompting a prize (see FIG. 91 (b)) is executed, and if it is determined that the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change is shorter, an effect for suppressing the V prize during the current per-accessory game ( Fig. 91 (see (a)) may be configured to execute the special symbol fluctuation period (the next special symbol fluctuation period to be executed) during interruption. Since it is possible to relatively determine the remaining period of the special symbol change, Can perform highly accurate presentation (set) to person, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation state of the ordinary symbol, the gaming state of the per-regular game, and the per-proxy game during the V rush (during the suspension of the special symbol fluctuation) And, based on the remaining period of the change of the special symbol that has been interrupted, by performing an effect that suggests a game method that can be advantageous to the player, the player is allowed to select a game method. It is configured to be able to provide fun, but without being limited to this, for example, the fluctuation state of the ordinary symbol during the game per role, the game state of the game per general figure, and the interruption An effect that suggests each of the remaining periods of the special symbol change may be executed, that is, only a situation suggestion effect that suggests various situations during the V rush period may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player who has grasped the situation suggestion effect to analyze the game situation during the V rush period, to provide a pleasure of predicting the most advantageous game method by himself and selecting the game method. Can be.

<About the flow of the game during the time saving state in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, a description will be given of a flow of a game during a time saving state in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, as a per-figure game to be executed when a win is made in the ordinary symbol lottery during the time reduction state, the per-figure per game, in which the per-figure per game period is short, and the per-figure per game period It is configured to be able to execute a long regular game per game. In addition, the game with the long game period per figure is opened more than the game with the game figure with the short game time per day, and the general winning award device 640 for the length of the whole game time per game is opened. It is configured such that the ratio of the length of the period to be in the state becomes low. In other words, in a game with a short time per game, a ball can be won to the general electricity winning device 640 during the game with a normal time, and the game can be played in a short time (about 3.5 seconds). The per-figure-per-game, which ends the per-figure-per-game, and the per-figure-per-game is longer in the per-figure-per-game, the ball can be won to the p-prize winning device 640 during the per-figure per game. The period until the end of the per-drawing game is long (about 17.5 seconds).

  Furthermore, although the detailed description will be described later, the above-mentioned disadvantageous per-winning game is the same as the advantageous per-winning game, after the general-purpose winning award device 640 is opened and the general-purpose winning award device 640 is closed. Is a game per ordinary symbol set for 15 seconds, and the 15 seconds is a disadvantageous period in which the remaining period of the special symbol change is wastefully subtracted.

  Therefore, the timing at which the above-mentioned disadvantageous period is set and the game content of the bonus per game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the disadvantageous game per game (per game B) is executed. When the normal symbol lottery is won and the unfavorable winning game is executed, the general winning device 640 is opened for 1 second, closed for 0.5 seconds, opened for 1 second, closed for 15 seconds, and opened for 0.1 seconds. The game per figure is executed. Then, when the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 during the first one-second opening period wins in the special power operation port 643, the winning is triggered to execute a game per accessory.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 (b), as shown in FIG. 92 (a), the ball does not win the V winning device 65 during the special power operation (game per role). If the game is ended after a lapse of time, the game per item is terminated 8.1 seconds after the game per item is started, so that the special figure variation (special symbol variation) is maintained for 8.1 seconds. Variation time subtraction is interrupted. Therefore, a part of the disadvantageous period set when the disadvantageous per-game (per-period B) is executed can be overlapped with a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is not subtracted. The variation time of the special symbol variation to be subtracted can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), during the special power operation (game per role), a predetermined number (three) of balls are awarded to the V winning device 65, and the game per role is terminated based on the ball winning. In this case, the period of the game per accessory (the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol change is interrupted) is compared to the case where the game per accessory is ended after the time shown in FIG. Period), the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation subtracted during the disadvantageous period increases.

  In such a situation, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), a period until the end of the game per ordinary figure is displayed in the display area HR10, and the special symbol variation is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Since the game method for continuously interrupting the subtraction of the fluctuation time is displayed, the player can easily select the game method in which the game is being played per bonus. In addition, when the ball wins in the V winning opening 165 during the bonus game and the V jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game period and the unfavorable game per game (B per game drawing) are executed. In this case, the disadvantageous period set in the case of the overlap is duplicated, so that setting the disadvantageous period does not disadvantage the player.

  Therefore, the player is required to select a game method to prevent the execution of the special-period change of the special symbol fluctuation from being performed by ending the game per the currently-executed game with the lapse of time, or It is possible to provide a pleasure of allowing a ball to be won in the V winning opening 165 by a hit game (prize winning probability is about 1/11) and selecting a game method aiming at the V jackpot game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a description will be given of the flow of the game when a long-term variation (15 seconds) disadvantageous to the player is selected as the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation executed during the time saving state. I do. FIG. 93 is a timing chart schematically showing a flow of a game when a long-term variation (15 seconds) disadvantageous to the player is selected as the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation executed during the time saving state. is there.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a short variation of 1 second and a long variation of 15 seconds are selected as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state. . Here, during the fluctuation period of the normal symbol in the time saving state, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is performed, and the game is not performed per the general symbol, so it is disadvantageous for the player. . Therefore, similar to the closed state period during the per-regular game described with reference to FIG. 92, the per-accessory per game period, that is, the period during which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted, and If the variation period of the symbol variation is overlapped so that the variation time of the special symbol variation is not subtracted unnecessarily during the disadvantageous period, the game during the time saving state can be efficiently executed.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 (b), as shown in FIG. 93 (a), a specified number (three) balls are won to the V winning device 65 during the special power operation (game per character). In this case, when the game per role is terminated based on the ball winning, the period of the game per role (compared to the case where the game per role is terminated after the time shown in FIG. Since the period during which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted becomes shorter, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation subtracted during the disadvantageous period becomes longer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), when the ball is ended after a lapse of time without causing the V prize device 65 to win during the special power operation (game per role), the game per role Is started 8.1 seconds after the start of the game, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) is suspended for 8.1 seconds. Therefore, the fluctuation period of the long normal symbol fluctuation (15 seconds) can be overlapped with the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is not subtracted, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation subtracted during the disadvantageous period is reduced. be able to.

  In such a situation, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), a period until the fluctuation per ordinary figure ends is displayed in the display area HR11, and further, the special symbol fluctuation is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Since the game method for continuously interrupting the subtraction of the fluctuation time is displayed, the player can easily select the game method in which the game is being played per bonus. In addition, when the ball wins in the V winning opening 165 during the bonus per game and the V jackpot game is executed, the big jackpot game period and the fluctuation period of the long normal symbol fluctuation (15 seconds) are set. Are not disadvantageous to the player due to the setting of the disadvantage period.

  Therefore, the player is required to select a game method to prevent the execution of the special-period change of the special symbol fluctuation from being performed by ending the game per the currently-executed game with the lapse of time, or It is possible to provide a pleasure of allowing a ball to be won in the V winning opening 165 by a hit game (prize winning probability is about 1/11) and selecting a game method aiming at the V jackpot game.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and a part of the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and the RAM of the audio lamp controller 113 are different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 21). Is different from that of the first embodiment in that a new solenoid is added to the solenoid 209 connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the other configuration is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the second embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the third movable valve 1642 is provided in the general winning award device 640, and the third movable valve 1642 for driving the third movable valve 1642 is provided. The difference is that a three-movable valve solenoid 209f is added. As will be described in detail later, the third movable valve solenoid 209f is controlled to be switched between an on state and an off state at predetermined intervals at the time of execution of a per-drawing game. As a result, the third movable valve 1642 is changed between the normal position (see FIG. 88) and the operating position (see FIG. 89) during the normal hitting game. Therefore, when the second movable valve 642 is operated during the per game drawing, and the ball that has won the general electric winning device 640 flows down toward the special power operating port 643, the state of the third movable valve 1642 depends on the situation. , The ball switches to the special power operation port 643 or the second special power operation port 1643. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the flowing state of the ball that has been won in the general electric winning device 640.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, various operation scenario 2 tables 202aa are provided in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 23) in the first embodiment described above in place of the various operation scenario tables 202e, and a new general-purpose type selection table 202ab is newly provided. , A normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ac is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the ordinary figure hit type selection table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the per-figure type selection table 202ab. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that a plurality of types of per-figure per-game executed during the time saving state are provided, and a per-figure per-game with a different operation pattern can be executed. ing. Although a specific description is omitted, in the ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), when the ordinary symbol variation winning per ordinary symbol stops (S1117: Yes), the ball passes through the through gate 67. On the basis of the value of the second hit type counter C9 (0 to 99) acquired at this time and the set gaming state, the hit type selection table 202ab is referred to, and the hit type is selected. It is configured as follows.

  The contents defined in the ordinary symbol type selection table 202ab will be specifically described. The set gaming state is a time reduction state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol), and is acquired. In the range where the value of the second hit type counter C9 is “0 to 89”, “Ultra figure hit A” is defined as the general figure hit type, and in the range of “90 to 99”, “Ultra figure hit type” "B per ordinary figure" is defined. Although the specific operation contents of the per-figure game will be described later, when “per-figure per A” is selected (selection rate 90%), a plurality of times (two times) are performed over the entire per-figure game period. ), The electric accessory 640a is in an open state, and a per-figure-period game in which the ball is relatively easy to win a prize in the general-purpose winning device 640 is executed. On the other hand, when “per-figure-per-B” is selected (selection rate 10%), after the same per-figure-per-game as “per-figure-per-A” is executed (in the latter half of the per-figure-per-game period), A per-drawing game in which the period during which the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state is set for a long time (15 seconds) is executed.

  As described above, since the per-figure game is executed without interruption of the special symbol change, the "per-figure A" is a special electric operation port 643 or It is possible to execute a game aiming at a game per an accessory by making a prize to the second special power operation port 1643, but the “Purple per game B” is to make a ball to the prize winning device 640 in the latter half of the per game game. Is set for a long period of time, the remaining period of the special symbol change is unnecessarily subtracted, resulting in a disadvantageous game per disadvantageous figure which is disadvantageous for the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where such a per-figure game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, if the player is executing the per-accessory game, the per-attribute game is continued for a long time. And an effect that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol that is subtracted during the execution period of the disadvantageous game (see FIG. 90 (a)). I have. This makes it possible to vary the period during which the time-saving state continues based on the skill of the player, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play.

  Next, the contents of the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202ac will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202ac. The ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table 202ac is a data table for selecting an ordinary symbol variation pattern that is executed when a ball passes through the through gate 67, and includes an ordinary symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48). ) Is usually referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of the symbol.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, since the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is unified to 3 seconds, the process of selecting the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol (see S1114 in FIG. 48) takes 3 seconds. Only the change time (change pattern) is set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a different variation pattern can be selected based on the set gaming state and the value of the variation type counter CS2 referred to when selecting the variation type of the ordinary symbol. It is composed.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal fluctuation of the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected for the entire range (0 to 198) of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS2. . That is, in the normal state, the normal symbol fluctuation for the same three seconds as in the first embodiment is executed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the time saving state, the short fluctuation is defined as a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 1 second in the range of the fluctuation type counter CS2 in the range of “0 to 179”. The long variation is defined as a variation pattern in which the variation time is 15 seconds in the range of “180 to 197”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the length of the period during which the ordinary symbol fluctuates greatly differs depending on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected during the time saving state. During the normal symbol fluctuation period during the time reduction state, it is a period in which the game per ordinary symbol is not executed, and furthermore, the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is a period in which the subtraction process is performed. , Resulting in a normal figure fluctuation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where the ordinary symbol fluctuation is executed in such a disadvantageous ordinary figure fluctuation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player, if the player is executing the per-attribute game, the per-attribute game is executed. An effect (see FIG. 90 (c)) that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol that is subtracted during the execution period of the unfavorable figure fluctuation by performing the operation for a long time (see FIG. 90 (c)). It is composed. This makes it possible to vary the period during which the time-saving state continues based on the skill of the player, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96 (a), the contents of each operation scenario table 202e that are different from those of the above-described first embodiment will be described. FIG. 96A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of each operation scenario table 202e in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, a part of the per-figure per-operation scenario table 202e3 is changed from each of the operation scenario tables 202e (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above, The difference is that a scenario table 202e5 is added. Otherwise, they are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 96 (b), the contents of the second accessory-per-operation scenario table 202e5 will be described. FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second accessory-per-operation scenario table 202e5. The second per-accessory operation scenario table 202e5 is a data table in which a per-accessory per-game operation scenario to be executed when a ball wins in the second special power operation port 1643 in the per-drawing per-game game is defined. .

  Specifically, the timing when the value of the scenario counter is “1”, that is, immediately after execution of the bonus game, the storage solenoid 209c is set to off, and the storage solenoid 209c is in the off state. Is stipulated to continue until the end. Then, the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, the opening period (the period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is in the closed state) continues until 0.1 seconds after the start of the game per role, and thereafter, the value of the scenario counter is changed. An operation scenario is defined in which the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON (a round period is set) for a range of values from "26" to "400", that is, for 1.5 seconds. When the V winning port solenoid 209b is set to ON, the V opening / closing door 65a is opened, and the ball can enter the V winning device 65. The ball that has won the V prize device 65 during this round passes through the storage valve 66a that is moving to the ball non-storage state (retreat state), and reaches the first movable valve 66b. Therefore, a plurality of balls can be caused to flow into the first movable valve 66b during a single game per role, so that the V winning probability during the game per role can be increased.

  Then, when the value of the scenario counter reaches “400”, the V winning opening solenoid 209 b is turned off, and the state in which the V opening / closing door 65 a is in the closed state until the value of the scenario counter reaches “1650”, that is, The operation scenario is defined to last for 5 seconds. Thereafter, when the value of the scenario counter reaches “1650”, the value of the scenario counter becomes “2025” until “1675”, that is, for 0.1 second, after the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON. During this time, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a defined in the above-described per-cascade operation scenario table 202e2 and the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a defined in the second per-cascade operation scenario table 202e5 are described. Although the operation content of the storage valve 66a is different, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the per-accessory game to be executed, the operation content of the storage valve 66a is unified, and the V winning opening during the per-accessory game. 165 may be different in the winning ratio of the ball.

  Specifically, the operation scenario of the storage solenoid 209c is set such that the storage solenoid 209c is turned off for 3 seconds after the start of the per-game play, the storage solenoid 209c is turned on for 2 seconds, and then the storage is performed again. The solenoid 209c is set to be turned off, and when a ball wins in the second special power operation port 1643, the opening period (the period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is in the closed state) is 0.1 second, and the round period (V opening / closing). An operation scenario is defined so that a game per accessory is executed in which the door 65a is open for 1.5 seconds and the ending period (V opening and closing door 65a is closed) is 1.5 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the ball wins in the special power operation port 643, the opening period (the period in which the V-opening door 65a is closed) is 3.1 seconds, and the round period (the period in which the V-opening door 65a is open) is 1.5 seconds. In this case, the operation scenario may be defined so that a game per accessory is executed for an ending period (a period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is closed) of 1.5 seconds. With such a configuration, in the per-principal game executed based on the ball winning in the second special power operating port 1643, the storage valve is set in a period in which the ball can be won in the V winning device 65. Since the ball 66a is in a retreat state in which the ball cannot be stored (ball non-reserved state), a plurality of balls that have won the V prize device 65 flow into the first movable valve 66b, and the prize enters the V winning port 165. Can be increased.

  Also, in a per-principal game executed based on a ball winning in the special power operating port 643, the storage valve 66a is a protrusion capable of storing the ball in a period in which the ball can be awarded to the V winning device 65. Since the ball is in the state (ball storage state), only the ball stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows into the first movable valve 66b among the balls that have won the V winning device 65, and the V winning is achieved. The probability of winning to the mouth 165 can be reduced.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the ease of winning of a ball (V winning rate) to the V winning opening 165 during the per game play according to the type of the per game play to be executed. Of the opening pattern of the V-opening / closing door 65a and the operation pattern of the storage valve 66a, the V winning ratio can be varied only by changing the length of the period (opening period) until the V-opening / closing door 65a is first opened. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the operation control in the game per accessory. In other words, an operation scenario is set for each type of game per role only during the period from the start of the game per role to the end of the opening period, and thereafter, the operation control of various devices is performed based on the common operation scenario. Can be executed, so that the operation control can be simplified.

  In addition, according to the above-described example, a per-accessory game that is advantageous to the player (a per-accessible game that is executed when a ball wins in the second special power operation port 1643) is disadvantageous to the player. Making the V prize device 65 win the ball earlier than the game per role (starting from the game when the ball wins in the special power operation port 643). It is configured to be able to. This allows the player to efficiently execute a favorable game. In addition, as an operation content of the storage valve 66a, an operation that is advantageous to the player (operation of turning off the storage solenoid 209c) is performed, and a ball is won to the V prize device 65 by a per-accessory game that is disadvantageous to the player. Since it is set before the timing at which it is possible, the ball that has won the V prize device 65 during the per-accessible game disadvantageous to the player is clogged in the V prize device 65, or Even if the ball is intentionally stayed, since an operation advantageous to the player (an operation of turning off the storage solenoid 209c) is not executed thereafter, it is possible to suppress an act of illegally winning a ball to the V winning opening 165. Can be.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the operation scenario defined in the per-property operation scenario table 202e2 is different from that of the first embodiment described above. As in the case of the second-per-accessory action scenario table 202e5 described with reference to FIG. 96 (b), a 15-second closing period and a 0.1-second opening period are defined in the latter half period of the per-accessory game. They differ in that they do.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the game per role is executed, the game per role is terminated based on the ball winning and the case where the game per role is terminated based on the passage of time. It is configured so that the game period of the hit game can be greatly different. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the game result in the time-saving state greatly different according to the result of the selection of the game method in the per-game play, and it is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97 (a), differences between the per-figure per-figure operation scenario table 202e3 of the second embodiment and the above-described first embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the per-figure-per-figure operation scenario table 202e3 of the second embodiment. The second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the operation content of the per-figure-per-game executed during the time-saving state is different, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the second embodiment, the operation scenario of the game-per-game performed during the time reduction state is different from that of the first embodiment described above. It has a scenario 202e33 and three scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general-purpose map.

  First, with reference to FIG. 97 (b), the contents of two scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general-purpose map will be described. FIG. 97 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the two scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general-purpose map. In this time-saving two-time-per-figure-period scenario 202e33, the operation scenario of the per-figure-per-game executed when the "per-figure-per-A" is selected as the per-figure-per-type is defined. The operation scenario defined in a three-time-period-for-time-saving-time-scenario 202e34, which will be described later, is a ratio of a period in which the electric accessory 640a is in an open state to the entire game period per 3.6-hour period in the entire game period per time-of-day drawing. A higher game per day is executed.

  Specifically, an operation scenario in which the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON is defined for a scenario counter value of "1", and an operation scenario in which the third movable valve solenoid 209f is set to ON is defined. Stipulated. The ON state of the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set until the game per game ends (the value of the scenario counter becomes “900”). That is, in the per-figure game executed in response to “per-figure A”, the ball that has won the electric accessory 640 a must always be awarded to the special power operation port 643 or the second special power operation port 1643. Make up.

  Further, the third movable valve solenoid 209f has an ON period of 0.2 seconds (a period during which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at an operating position where a ball can enter the second special power operating port 1643) and 1.5 seconds. (A period in which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at a normal position where a ball can enter the special power operation port 643) is repeatedly set. That is, the ratio of the ball passing through the second movable valve 642 to the second special power operating port 1643 is about 11%, and the ratio of the ball passing through the second movable valve 642 to the special power operating port 643 is about 11%. It is configured to be 89%.

  Then, the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, the opening period (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state) continues until 0.1 seconds after the start of the per-figure game. The value is in the range from "26" to "274", that is, for one second, the full-power solenoid is set to ON (the electric accessory 640a is in the open state), and the range is from "275" to "400". That is, for 0.5 seconds, the general-purpose solenoid is set to off (the electric accessory 640a is closed). Then, the general-purpose solenoid is turned on again for a range from "401" to "649", that is, for one second, and thereafter, a general-purpose solenoid is set for a range from "650" to "900", that is, for one second. An operation scenario in which the electric solenoid is set to off is defined. In other words, when the game per game based on the operation scenario defined in the two scenarios 202e33 for time-saving time reduction is executed, the opening operation of opening the electric accessory 640a for one second is performed twice. The game is executed, and a total of two seconds of the open state period of the electric accessory 640a in which the ball can enter the general winning award device 640 for the period of the entire game per ordinary figure (3.6 seconds). For this reason, approximately 40% of the game period per day is advantageous to the player (the special electric game can be advanced (the special electric operation port 643 or the second special electric operation port 1643 can receive a ball) ) Period).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of the three scenarios 202e34 per time-saving general-purpose map will be described. FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in three scenarios 202e34 per time-saving general-purpose figure. In this case, the time-saving three-time per-figure scenario 202e34 defines an operation scenario of a per-figure-per-game to be executed when “per-figure-per-B” is selected. The contents specified in the three scenarios 202e34 per time-saving general-purpose map are the same as the two scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general-purpose figure described above until the value of the scenario counter reaches “650”. Detailed description is omitted.

  The value of the scenario counter is in the range of “650” to “3500”, that is, the normal power solenoid is set to OFF for 15 seconds, and then the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “3501” to “3524”, that is, During 0.1 seconds, the general-purpose solenoid is set to ON, and thereafter, when the value of the scenario counter becomes “3525”, the general-purpose solenoid is set to OFF.

  In other words, the game per day map defined by the three scenarios per day map for time saving 202e34 has a length of the whole game period per day of 17.7 seconds, and the ball is played during the game per day map. The total period in which the device 640 can be awarded is 2.1 seconds. Therefore, the total of the open state period of the electric accessory 640a in which the ball can enter the general winning award device 640 is 2.1 seconds for the period of the entire game per regular figure (17.7 seconds). Approximately 12% of the game period per day is advantageous to the player (a special electric game can be advanced (a ball can be awarded to the special electric operation port 643 or the second special electric operation port 1643). Period). Further, when the second electric accessory 640a opening operation is completed, the electric accessory 640a is closed for 15 seconds thereafter.

  Therefore, when the three scenarios 202e34 per time saving time drawing are set during the time saving state, the period during which the ball cannot enter the general power winning device 640 is set to be long, so that it is disadvantageous for the player. Become a game. Further, in the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) (the fourth special symbol change ends). In this case, the time saving state is terminated, and the remaining period of the special symbol change is subtracted during the normal per-game game. In other words, even during the closed state for 15 seconds, the remaining period of the special symbol change is subtracted, so that the game per ordinary figure becomes more disadvantageous for the player.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 99, in the second embodiment, a general-purpose variation time counter 223aa, a general-purpose time counter 223ab, and a prohibition of firing are stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment. The difference is that the suggestion flag 223ac and the effect setting completed flag 223ad are added. Other elements are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The general figure fluctuation time counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, and when a general figure fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received command is set, and the voice lamp control device is used. In the main processing 113 (see FIG. 60), the counter value set in the effect update processing executed periodically (every millisecond) is decremented. It is configured such that various effects are executed based on the counter value, which are referred to when a per-government game is executed.

  The per-figure-period time counter 223ab is a counter for measuring a game period in which the per-figure-per-game is executed, and when a per-figure-period start command is received, the per-figure-per-game time corresponding to the received command. Is set, and the value of the counter set in the effect update process executed periodically (every millisecond) in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113 is subtracted. are doing.

  The firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON when performing a punctuation suggestion effect for puncturing a game per role (terminating the game per role over time), and in a state where the flag is set to ON, It is set to off when the hit game ends. When the per game play ends, the display mode of the ending screen of the per game play is changed based on the setting status of the flag and the end conditions of the established per game play (winning end, time lapse end). Will be referred to.

  The effect setting completed flag 223ad is a punk suggestion effect indicating that the game per role is ended based on the passage of time, or an effect suggesting that a ball is to be awarded to the V winning device 65 during the game per role. This is for indicating that the setting has been made, and is set to ON when a dedicated effect is set during the per-accessory game.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
The second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the game per bonus item is different depending on the operating port (special power operating port 643, second special power operating port 1643) in which the ball wins during the general figure game. Is greatly different in that it is configured to be executable. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the ordinary symbol lottery, the ordinary symbol variation time is determined based on the gaming state and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS2, based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table 202ac (FIG. 95 (c)). Reference), and is different in that it is configured to be able to execute a per-figure game with a different operation content as the per-figure game executed during the time saving state. The control processing executed by main controller 110 is the same except for the contents described above, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the contents of the special power starting opening winning process 2 (S108) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special power starting opening winning process 2 (S108). This special power starting port winning process 2 (S108) is different from the special power starting port winning process of the first embodiment (see S108 in FIG. 50) in that the operation port (special power operating port 643, second The difference is that the hit type corresponding to the special power operation port 1643) can be set, and the other configurations are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same control contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 101 to FIG. 107, regarding the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the control executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the above-described first embodiment will be described. The description will focus on differences from the processing. The control process executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the second embodiment is different from the control process executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment in that a command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) is performed. (See S4217 in FIG. 66) instead of the general figure-related processing (see S4217 in FIG. 66) executed in the hit-related processing (S4219 in FIG. 67). The hit object related process 2 (see S4851 in FIG. 103) is replaced with the hit hit related process (S4804 in FIG. 70), and the effect update process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 105) is replaced with the effect update process (see S4111 in FIG. 72). ) Is executed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents of the general figure related processing 2 (S4217) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the contents of the general figure related processing 2 (S4217). This general figure related processing 2 (S4217) is different from the general figure related processing of the first embodiment (see S4217 of FIG. 66) in that the general figure related processing is executed when a general figure variation pattern command is received. It differs from the processing executed when a per-figure start command is received in that the processing is changed, and is otherwise the same.

  When the general-figure-related processing 2 (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether a general-figure fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4701). If it is determined that the command has been received (S4701: Yes), the general-figure fluctuation start processing is performed. Is executed (S4751), and then the present process is terminated. The details of the ordinary figure change start processing (S4751) executed in the processing of S4751 will be described later with reference to FIG. 102, but processing for measuring the change time of the ordinary symbol change is executed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation times can be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (see FIG. 95 (c)), and the advantage of the game executed during the time-saving state according to the selected fluctuation pattern is provided. The degree is variable.

  In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the general figure change pattern command has not been received (S4701: No), it is determined whether a general figure start command has been received (S4703). S4703: Yes), based on the received command, sets the time per ordinary figure (END time of the corresponding game operation scenario per ordinary figure) in the ordinary time per time counter (S4752), and sets the display ordinary time per start command. This is set (S4704), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4703 that the start command for the general figure has not been received (S4703: No), the process of S4705 to S4714, which is the same as the general figure related process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 66), is performed. The process is executed, and the process ends.

  Next, the contents of the ordinary figure change start process (S4751) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary figure change start processing (S4751). When the normal figure change start process (S4751) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time is during the time reduction (in the time reduction state) (S4771), and if it is determined that the current time is not during the time reduction (S4771: No), The display general-purpose change command is set (S 4771), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S 4771 that it is not during the working hours reduction (S 4771: Yes), the general figure fluctuation time is extracted from the received general figure fluctuation pattern command (S 4772), and the extracted value is used as the general figure fluctuation time counter 223aa. (S 4773), execute the above-described process of S 4774, and terminate the present process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the content of the accessory-related processing 2 (S4851) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory hit related process 2 (S4851). This per-accessory-related process 2 (S4851) is different from the above-described per-accessory-related process (S4804) in that the content of the process executed when a per-accessory start command is received and when an ending command is received is received. The difference is in the changed points, and the other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the accessory hit related processing 2 (S4851) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a hit hit command is received (S5101). If it is determined that the hit command is received (S5101: Yes), the hit hit is started. The processing is executed (S5151), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that no ending command has been received (S5101: No), the same processing of S5103 to S5107 as in the above-described accessory hit related processing (S4804) is executed, and the ending command is executed in the processing of S5107. If it is determined that it has been received (S5107: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the firing prohibition flag 223ac is set to ON (S5152).

  In other words, in the process of S5152, it is determined whether or not a state in which an effect is being performed to suggest that it is advantageous to prohibit the player from firing the ball is in an advantageous state. If it is determined in the processing of S5152 that the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is not on (S5152: No), the same processing as S5108 to S5109 as the above-described accessory hitting related processing (S4804) is executed, and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5152 that it is set to on (S5152: Yes), the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to off (S5153), and the end condition of the current per-figure-per-game is time-lapsed. It is determined whether there is (S5154).

  If it is determined that the game based on the passage of time is ended (S5154: Yes), a display command indicating “success” is set (S5155), and the game based on the passage of time is not ended. In other words, when it is determined that the game for the ordinary figure based on the ball winning has ended (S5154: No), a display command indicating "sorry" is set (S5156). As described above, it is predicted whether it is more advantageous or disadvantageous to fire the ball based on the content of the game per day map during the time reduction state, and the player is provided with a game based on the prediction result. When an effect that suggests a method is executed, it is determined whether or not the per-figure-per-game is completed based on the suggestion content, and the display mode of the per-figure-per-game end screen is changed based on the determination result. With this configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player whether or not the current game method has been correctly selected.

  Unlike the present embodiment, for example, it is predicted whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to launch the ball to the player based on the game content of the game per game during the time saving state, and the prediction result In the case of performing an effect that suggests a game method to a player based on the effect, in order to predict and select a game method that is really advantageous for the player, an effect that suggests a game method different from the actual prediction result (so-called, If the game is configured to be able to execute (Gase production), it is determined in the process of S5154 whether or not the game (time lapse, ball prize) corresponding to the actual predicted result has ended the game per ordinary drawing, and the determination result The display mode of the end screen may be configured to be variable based on this. This makes it possible to execute a surprising effect for the player.

  In this case, in addition to the above-described effect that suggests a game method to the player, a situation notification effect (for example, an effect that suggests a type of game per ordinary map) for causing the player to predict an actual game situation is executed. Good. Thus, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to predict whether or not the effect suggesting the game method is a gaseous effect. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the per-figure-per-game and the per-accessible-peripheral game are executed in an overlapping manner, the effect that suggests the game method to the player is executed, but is not limited thereto. Alternatively, if the player can select a game method, an effect suggesting the game method to the player may be executed by the same method.

  Next, the contents of the accessory hit start process (S5151) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory hit start process (S5151). In the bonus hit start process (S5151), various processes for varying the effect mode to be executed are executed according to the game situation at the start timing of the hit bonus game.

  When the accessory hit start process (S5151) is executed, first, the type of the winning special power operation port is extracted based on the received command (S5301). Then, it is determined whether or not the current game per hit is a special hit game executed when a ball wins in the special power operating port 643 (special power operating port 1) (S5302). If it is determined that it is not based on a winning (S5302: No), a display command for indicating a winning hit is set (S5303), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the result is based on the winning of the special power operation port 1 (S5301: Yes), then the value of the ordinary figure fluctuation time counter is read (S5304), and the read value is It is determined whether the value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305). If it is determined that the value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305: Yes), a display command for suggesting the end of time per accessory is set (S5306), and the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set on. (S5307), and proceeds to the process of S5310. Based on the display command set in the process of S5306, a display mode (corresponding to a comment in the sub display area Ds) for suppressing (prohibiting) the launch of a sphere, as shown in the display screen of FIG. ) Is displayed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5305 that the value does not indicate 10 seconds or more (S5305: No), then it is determined whether the value read in the processing of S5304 is a value indicating 5 seconds or less ( (S5308) When it is determined that the time is 5 seconds or less (S5308: Yes), the game per bonus item is terminated early, and the game per bonus item can be executed again by the next game per regular figure. In this state, a display command for indicating the end of winning per bonus is set (S5309), and the flow shifts to the process of S5310. Here, based on the display command set by the processing of S5309, a display mode that prompts the launch of a sphere (for example, “Break the ball early, When the game is finished, a chance is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S5308 that the value does not indicate 5 seconds or less, that is, the value indicates 5 to 10 seconds, the display for indicating the hit of the accessory is performed without setting a dedicated display command. The command is set (S5310), the effect setting completed flag 223ad is set to ON (S5311), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, since the first game method suggestion effect and the second game method suggestion effect are configured to be executable, the second embodiment is executed for the player. It is possible to select a game method of a game per role based on the effect contents of various suggestive effects. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed by the game method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the game method. On the other hand, the player can be interested. Further, since the degree of advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the result of the selection by the player, the player can actively participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the player can select the game method of the per-government game in accordance with the ordinary symbol fluctuation and the situation of the per-regular game executed during the per-gap game. Although it is configured to execute the suggestion effect, it may be configured to execute the same suggestion effect in a case where a plurality of games are executed in addition to the above, for example, the jackpot game end In the case where the time saving state is set later, the end effect of the jackpot game is configured to execute a suggestive effect that allows the player to select the end timing based on the length of the remaining period of the ordinary symbol change being executed. You may. With this configuration, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the normal state (the normal symbol low-probability state) is executed for a long time. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the period during which the normal symbol change is not executed becomes longer and the willingness to play decreases.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first and second embodiments, based on the fact that a ball has won a special power operating port (special power operating port 643 or second special power operating port 1643), a game per accessory is executed, It was configured to suspend the subtraction of the special symbol change during execution. In other words, the more the player per-game is executed, the more advantageous the player is. Therefore, the game method during the time reduction state (during the V rush) becomes monotonous, and the player may be bored with the game.

  On the other hand, the third embodiment differs from the first embodiment and the second embodiment in that the processing content for the special symbol change during execution in the case where the bonus game is executed is different. Specifically, in accordance with the game type per role to be executed (set), the process of interrupting the special symbol variation being executed, and discarding (discarding the remaining variation time, Either a process of forcibly stopping due to a lottery regardless of the lottery result), or a process of terminating the time saving state in addition to discarding, is executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to greatly change the game situation during the time saving state based on the execution of the game per accessory, and thus it is possible to provide the player with a tireless game.

  Furthermore, based on the effect performed during the time-saving state (V rush), an effect is provided that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the game per accessory. By this, for example, when a game per role that ends the time-saving state is executed, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the time-saving state is suddenly ended and distrust is given to the player. it can. In addition, the player himself / herself can select whether or not to execute the game per role based on the content of the effect to be performed, so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game and improve the interest of the game. Can be done.

<Production contents in the third embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, among the effects performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment, the contents of the characteristic effects will be described. The effect performed in the present embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that the duration of the time reduction state (the duration of the V rush) is displayed in addition to the timely subtraction display of the value displayed on the timer 812. A reduction display in which the value displayed on the timer 812 is greatly reduced when the special symbol change being executed is discarded by the execution of the hit game, It is greatly different in that the disappearance display for ending the state is configured to be executable.

  Furthermore, in the case where the special symbol change being executed has won a jackpot (during the jackpot change), a suggestion effect that suggests that the executed jackpot change will be discarded by executing the per-accessory game. It is greatly different in that it is configured to execute. Other display contents are the same, except that the size and position of the display area are changed in order to display the above-mentioned differences. The same reference numerals are given to the same display contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 108 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents executed when the remaining period of the special symbol big hit fluctuation reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds). FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), when the remaining period of the jackpot fluctuation reaches 10 seconds, a display mode of “danger time entry” is displayed, and until the danger time ends (the jackpot fluctuation is stopped and displayed). “10 seconds” is displayed as the period display mode 851 indicating the period. In the same manner as the value displayed on the timer 812, the period display mode 851 is periodically reduced (countdown display) by the effect update processing of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the V rush fluctuation region 811, in addition to the symbol simulating “V” corresponding to the success of the game during the V rush (execution of the V jackpot game), the “skull” indicating the game result disadvantageous to the player Is variably displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the character “The hits during the danger time is large pinch” is displayed.

  In other words, when entering the danger time, it is suggested to the player that the jackpot fluctuation may stop (execution of the jackpot game based on the special figure lottery) after a predetermined time (after 10 seconds). On the other hand, although the details will be described later, the danger time is configured to be executed even in a case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order.

  Therefore, when the player enters the danger time, the player does not execute the special electric game aiming at a per-accessory game until the end of the danger time (does not fire the ball) or executes the special electric game even during the danger time. Then, the player willingly chooses whether to go for the game per V.

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the remaining period of the special change during the execution of the danger time entry condition reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The entry condition of the danger time may be different depending on whether the lottery result is a big hit or not, and during the change of the big hit, the remaining period is “27 seconds”, “17 seconds”, “10 seconds”, The configuration may be such that the danger time can be entered when "7 seconds", and the danger time can be entered only when the remaining period is "10 seconds" during the deviation. This allows the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol change being executed based on the display of the remaining period of the danger time displayed when the danger time enters.

  Also, in the above-described example, an example was given in which a special danger time entry condition was set during a jackpot change. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to be able to enter the danger time when the remaining period of “14 seconds” becomes “14 seconds”. As a result, it is possible for a player who understands that the player is in the departure change to play a game without firing a ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108 (b), the display contents when the bonus hit game is executed during the danger time and the big hit change is discarded will be described. FIG. 108 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display content when a bonus hit game is executed during the danger time and the big hit change is discarded. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the accessory hit is executed during the danger time, the character “End” is displayed in the period display mode 851 to notify that the danger time has ended. Then, a symbol imitating a “skull” is stopped and displayed in the V-rush variation area 811 in order to indicate that the jackpot variation being executed has been discarded. Further, a comment "Sorry ... retreat" is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  On the other hand, since the per-prize game is being executed, a display mode for aiming at the V prize in the role game is displayed.

  Further, since the special symbol change being executed is discarded, only “10 seconds” which is the change time of the next change is displayed in the display area HR4 indicating the remaining period of the time saving state (V rush). By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to inform the player of the fact that the jackpot fluctuation has been discarded in a manner that is easy to understand.

  In addition, in the case where the per-proxy game in which the jackpot fluctuation is interrupted is executed during the danger time, as shown in FIG. 109, the danger time is continued, and the fact that the V-jackpot game is executed is notified. An effect is performed.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired when a ball wins in the special power operation port 643, and the acquired first hit value is obtained. Based on the value of the type counter C2, the type (big hit type) of the big hit game (V big hit game) executed when the player wins the V winning opening 165 can be selected. Is partially different from that of the first embodiment. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), three jackpot types are defined in the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3, and the game content of the V jackpot game to be executed, V The game state (number of times reduced) set after the end of the big hit game and the influence on the special symbol being executed at the time of executing the bonus hit game are configured to be different.

  Specifically, the jackpot C is defined in the range of the acquired first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 79”, the jackpot D is defined in the range of “80 to 94”, and “95 to 99”. Is defined as a jackpot E.

  The "big hit C" (selection rate 80%) has the same content as the V big hit game executed in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a 10 round (R) big hit game, four times reduction in time, a special symbol being executed. Has been set to suspend. The "big hit D" (selection rate 15%) is set to a content of discarding the special symbol change during the 10-round (R) big hit game, four time saving times, and the running special symbol. "Big hit E" (selection rate 5%) is set so as to discard 15 rounds (R) of big hit games, 15 times of time saving, special symbol fluctuations being executed, and end the time saving state.

  As described above, when the “big hit E”, which is the most disadvantageous to the player during the special symbol change during execution, is set, if the player wins a V during the per-game game, the player is most advantageous to the player. Since the jackpot game and the game state (number of times saved) after the end of the jackpot game are set, the last chance can be given to the player. Also, for example, if the final fluctuation of the time-saving state is out of range and immediately before the end of the fluctuation, that is, if the time-saving state ends in a few seconds after doing nothing, the “big hit” "E" may be the jackpot type most advantageous to the player.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110B, this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a danger time selection table 222ca is added. The other parts are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The danger time selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred when determining whether to actually execute a danger time effect when the danger time entry condition is satisfied, and includes a lottery result of a special symbol change being executed. It is configured to make the execution probabilities different based on the execution probability.

  Here, the contents of the danger time selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 110 (c), the configuration is such that the danger time effect is more easily executed when the special symbol change being executed is a jackpot change than when it is a loss change. Thereby, when the danger time effect is executed, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the big hit is changing.

  Specifically, when the special symbol lottery result (special figure determination result) is a big hit, the execution of danger time is selected regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, and the special symbol lottery result (special figure determination) is selected. If the determination result is out of order, it is selected not to execute the danger time effect when the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 89”, and to execute the danger time effect in the range of “90 to 99”. Is configured to be selected.

  With this configuration, even if the result of the special figure lottery being executed is out of order, the danger time effect can be executed. Since it can be held, the interest of the game can be improved.

<Regarding the contents of control processing in the third embodiment>
Next, control processing contents according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The present embodiment is different in that the content of the control process executed by main controller 110 and the content of the control process executed by voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 111, the special power starting port winning process 3 (S158) executed by the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special power starting opening winning process 3 (S158). This special power starting port winning process 3 (S158) is different from the special power starting winning process of the first embodiment (see S108 in FIG. 50) in that a different jackpot type is selected when a ball wins in the special power operating port 643. The difference is that the configuration is made possible and the process corresponding to the selected jackpot type is executed, and the rest is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special power starting winning process 3 (S158) is executed, the same processes as S1301 to S1303, S1305 to S1309, which are the same as the special power starting winning process described above (see S108 in FIG. 50), are executed. Then, in the process of S1303, it is determined that the special power is being operated (playing a special hit), and if it is determined that the special power is being operated, the jackpot type selected this time is “big hit E”. Is determined (S1371), and when it is determined to be "big hit E" (S1371: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 (S1373), and a special symbol change stop process is executed (S1374). , To S1375. Note that the content of the special symbol change stop processing (S1374) is the same as the content of the special symbol change stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) of the above-described first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1371, if it is determined that the hit is not "big hit E" (S1371; No), then it is determined whether it is "big hit D" (S1372), and if it is determined to be "big hit D". (S1372: Yes), executes the process of S1374, and shifts to the process of S1375. If it is determined in the process of S1372 that it is not “big hit D”, that is, it is “big hit C” (S1372: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed, and the process shifts to the process of S1375.

  In the process of S1375, the accessory hit flag is set to ON (S1375), a command corresponding to the current hit type ("big hit C" to "big hit E") is set (S1376), and a special power operation command is set. (S1308), this process ends.

  Next, the effect update process 3 (S4171) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect update processing 3 (S4171). The effect update process 3 (S4171) is different from the effect update process 2 of the second embodiment (see S4151 in FIG. 105) in that the danger time setting process (S5371) related to the setting of the danger time effect is performed in the process of S5306. And the other is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the danger time setting processing (S5371) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time setting process (S5371). In the danger time setting process (S5371), when the execution condition of the danger time effect is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the danger time is to be actually executed, and the process for setting the danger time effect is performed based on the determination result. Is done.

  When the danger time setting process (S 5371) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223 r is a value indicating the remaining period of 10 seconds (S 5601), and it is determined that the value is not a value indicating the remaining period of 10 seconds. If it has been done (S5601: No), it means that the execution condition of the danger time has not been satisfied, and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  In the processing of S5601, when it is determined that the value indicates the remaining period of 10 seconds (S5601: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed (the special figure lottery result) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f are determined. And whether to execute the danger time effect is selected with reference to the danger time selection table 222ca based on the information (S5602).

  In the processing of S5603, it is determined whether to execute the danger time effect based on the processing result (selection result) of S5602 (S5603). If it is determined that the effect is to be executed (S5603: Yes), a display indicating the danger time effect is performed. The command is set (S5604), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5603, if it is determined that the danger time effect is not to be performed (S5603: No), the process ends.

  According to the display command set in the process of S5604, the danger time effect shown in FIG. 90A is executed.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 and the configuration of the main control device 110 are different from those of the first embodiment.

  In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, in the normal game state, the special figure game in which the player enters the special figure entrance 64 is executed. Is easy to open, so that a special ball game is aimed at letting a game ball enter the special power operation port 643 in the general winning award device 640 and allowing a game ball to enter the V winning port 165 in the V winning device 65. It is configured to be a game method that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, instead of the special power operation port 643, an entrance (second entrance 1645) serving as a chance for a lottery of the second special symbol is provided (see FIG. 114). The V opening / closing door 65a is configured to be opened when a specific lottery result (small win) is obtained in the second special symbol lottery. That is, in the fourth embodiment, the opening timing of the V-opening / closing door 65a associated with the V-winning device 65 is not a hit by a ball entering the special power operation port 643 but a ball entering the second ball entry port 1645. This is a case where a small win is won by a lottery of the second special symbol, which is executed with the opportunity. The small hit is a kind of miss, and is a lottery result that allows a predetermined winning device (V winning device 65) to be operated without changing the game state.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are simultaneously executed (so-called simultaneous fluctuation). Then, during the time saving state, the lottery of the second special symbol is set to have a shorter fluctuation time than the lottery of the first special symbol, so that the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. I have.

  In addition, when the total number of lottery times of the first special symbol (number of fluctuations) and the number of lottery times of the second special symbol (number of fluctuations) is 100 as the time-saving ending condition for ending the time-saving state. , And the special figure 1 time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of lotteries (the number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol reaches four, is set, and the cumulative time saving end condition or special figure 1 is set. It is configured that the time saving state ends when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

  In the fourth embodiment having the above-described configuration, the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the time reduction state is the variation of the special symbol set during the time reduction state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. It is configured to have the same content as the pattern, and the playability during the time saving state (during the V rush) is different from that of the above-described first embodiment in that a ball is inserted into the special power starting port 643, Instead of a game in which a game (a winning game for opening the V winning device 65) is executed, a ball is thrown into the second entrance 1645, and a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery to win a small hit game (V Before the point of using the game for executing the game for opening the winning device 65) and the number of times of variation (number of lotteries) of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), the cumulative time saving end condition is satisfied. Time savings There a point using the game to end, in different.

  That is, in the fourth embodiment, a period for indicating a lottery result of the second special symbol (a fluctuation period of the second special symbol) can be variably set as compared with the first embodiment described above. For example, as a fluctuation period of the second special symbol, a short fluctuation period (for example, a fluctuation time of 0.1 second) and a long fluctuation period (for example, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds) can be set. In addition, the interval of the small hitting game executed during the time saving state can be made to vary greatly depending on the fluctuation period of the set second special symbol. Therefore, the variation of the game during the time reduction state can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, since the cumulative time-saving ending condition can be satisfied based on the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to set an upper limit on the number of small hit games executed during the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the privilege (V jackpot game) from being excessively given to the player during the time saving state. Furthermore, by configuring a short variation period (for example, 0.1 second) to be hardly set as the variation period of the second special symbol set during the time reduction state, the small hit game is frequently executed during the time reduction state. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bonus (prize ball) from being excessively given to the player in a short time.

  Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration and playability of the fourth embodiment will be mainly described. First, the update timing of the number of times saved in the fourth embodiment and the determination processing timing for terminating the time saving state will be described. As in the fourth embodiment, in the simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, the fluctuation of the special symbol executed during the time saving state In order to prevent the number of times from exceeding a specified number of times (for example, 100 times), an update process of the number of time savings and a determination process for ending the time saving state are executed at the start timing of the change of each special symbol. I was Thus, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the specified number of special symbol changes is executed, so that the 101st special symbol change exceeding the specified number of times (for example, 100 times) is reliably performed in the normal state. It can be executed, and it has been suppressed that a privilege (special symbol change in a time-saving state) is excessively given to the player. However, before the final change of the time reduction state (the 100th special symbol change) is stopped and displayed, specifically, immediately after the 100th special symbol change is started, the time reduction state ends. There is a problem that depending on the special symbol determination (fluctuation) timing, the period in which the time saving state is set is shortened, and the player is discomforted.

  More specifically, for example, immediately after the 100th rotation (the last time of the number of time savings) as the determination (fluctuation) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is determined (fluctuation), that is, When the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the 100th special figure change is executed (immediately before the special figure change at the 101st rotation). In the case where the special figure change of the 101st rotation is not executed in a state where the special figure change of the 100th rotation (the last time of the number of time savings) is performed, for example, the 100th rotation If the special figure change at the 101st rotation is started after the special figure change at the 100th rotation is completed, the time saving state ends at the timing when the special figure change at the 100th rotation is executed. The state of the ordinary symbol during the change of the special figure There is a problem that uncomfortable feeling to the player for.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when the number of times of the special figure change (for example, 100) is set as the time saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the time saving end condition is satisfied. Timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 100th rotation) and the start timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation) executed after the time saving end condition is satisfied. Is determined, and the time saving state is ended based on the timing executed earlier among the timings.

  With such a configuration, the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is maintained until the timing at which the special symbol change of the specified number of times is stopped or displayed, or the timing of execution of the special symbol change of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times. It can be set, and the maximum time period and the time reduction state can be provided to the player, and the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the timing at which the condition for enabling the execution of the special figure change at the 101st rotation can be determined as the timing at which the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed. The time saving state is configured to end before the special symbol is determined. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably prevent the time reduction state from being set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of time reductions and executing the lottery of the special symbol in the time reduction state.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, among the end timing of the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the timing in which the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, the condition is satisfied first. The time saving state is configured to end based on the timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time saving time may be reduced based on only the timing at which the special figure change is executed after the special figure change that satisfies the time saving end condition. The state may be terminated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol (the process of subtracting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) is temporarily stopped (interrupted). Make up. Then, when a V prize (a prize of a ball into the V prize opening 165) occurs during the small hit game and a big hit is given, the temporarily stopped special symbol change is restarted after the big hit game is finished. It is configured so that: Then, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of the reduction of the number of time savings is configured to be subtracted when the change of the special symbol whose change has been started during the time saving game is stopped.

  With such a configuration, the temporarily stopped special symbol change is a change started before the jackpot game, so if the temporarily stopped special symbol change restarts and stops, Time savings are not subtracted. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is awarded due to the V winning, in addition to the number of time savings provided by the jackpot, the period until the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbol is also reduced. Set as a gaming state. With this configuration, the time saving state that is most advantageous for the player can be set as long as possible.

  Here, the fourth embodiment is a big hit due to the playability of the pachinko machine 10 (the special symbol lottery and the winning of the ball to the special power operation port 643) described in the first embodiment to the third embodiment. It is shown as an example for realizing (gaming ability aiming for a game) by another method, and the respective technical ideas described in the above-described first to third embodiments, the effect contents to be executed, and the like are appropriately determined. It may be diverted. It should be noted that detailed descriptions of the respective technical ideas and effect contents used in the same manner as in the above-described first to third embodiments will be omitted.

<About the game board configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that a second ball entry unit 1640 is provided in place of the ordinary winning device 640. The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a second entrance 1645 is provided instead of the special power operation port 643.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, by executing the left-handed game, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64, and the through-game is performed. By passing through the gate 67, a lottery of a normal symbol is executed, and when the winning is won, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be in an open state in which the game ball can enter the general winning award device 640. Then, when a game ball enters the special power operating port 643, a hitting of a bonus is executed, and the V opening / closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is configured to be opened.

  On the other hand, the fourth embodiment is greatly different in that a second entrance 1645 serving as a chance for a lottery of a second special symbol is provided instead of the above-described special power operation port 643. Therefore, in this embodiment, the small opening is won by the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entry opening 1645, not the winning in the special power operation port 643, but the opening timing of the V opening / closing door 65a. This triggers the opening of the V opening / closing door 65a.

  When the game state is the normal state, the player fires a game ball toward the left area of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment described above, and makes the ball enter the special figure entrance 64, The game is executed while desiring to win a big hit in the first special symbol lottery. Then, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state (the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) at a rate of 100%.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, if a game is executed while aiming at the left area of the game board 13, the game ball can pass through the through gate 67 at a rate of 100%. In the case where the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 67 is won, the second electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entry unit 1640 is in the open state (the game ball is A state in which the ball can enter the second ball entry unit 1640) is set.

  In the second ball entry unit 1640, a second ball entry port 1645 is provided, and when a game ball enters, a lottery of the second special symbol is executed. And in this embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. When the small winning is won, the V opening / closing door 65a in the V winning device 65 is set to the open state, and when the game ball wins the V winning opening 165, the big winning is given.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, it is defined that the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is 396/400 (about 9/10). The time-saving state in which the game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 1645 is a state in which the V winning is likely to occur, and is the most advantageous state for the player.

<Electrical Configuration of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, the special symbol lottery method is different from that of the first embodiment described above, and if the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 have a partially different configuration corresponding to the difference described above. I'm making it.

  First, a counter provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select an outage stop type in a special symbol, and a small type used to select a small hit type of a special symbol. A hit type counter C5, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS1 used for selecting a change pattern are used.

  A random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 55). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da corresponding to a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and four holding areas (holding). And a second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203db corresponding to the entry into the second entrance 1645 comprising the first to fourth areas), and is provided in the first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203da. Stores the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of entering the special figure entrance 64. .

  Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. The special symbol change based on the stored various values is started.

  Similarly, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the like in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 1645. Each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the change type counter CS1 is stored.

  Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. The special symbol change based on the stored various values is started.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery simultaneously (in parallel), each special symbol is selected. The reserved ball storage areas (the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db) each have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

  In the present embodiment, since only the second special symbol has a small win as a result of the lottery, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. However, for example, it is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result of the first special symbol, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. You may comprise.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the small hits also occur in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) having no small hit as a lottery result. The configuration may be such that the value of the type counter C5 is stored. In this way, regardless of the specification of the special symbol lottery (whether or not there is a small hit), the ball enters the starting port (special figure entrance 64, second entrance 1645) which is a special symbol lottery trigger. Is configured to store all the obtained counter values, and when a special symbol starting condition (variation condition) is satisfied, a special symbol lottery is performed by using only necessary values among the obtained counter values. , The same configuration can be used for a plurality of gaming machines having different special symbol lottery specifications (presence or absence of small hits), so that parts and technology can be shared. And cost can be reduced.

  Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, similar to the special symbol described above, a normal symbol holding corresponding to a ball entering (passing through a ball) into the through gate 67 including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). A ball storage area 203dc is provided, and the values of the second random number counter C4 and the ordinary figure variation type counter CS2 are stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67. Each is stored.

  When the starting condition (variation condition) of the ordinary symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203dc are shifted to the ordinary symbol execution area, and the various stored values are shifted. Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

  In this embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the second entrance 1645 is stored and stored, and each counter value acquired based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is provided. It has a configuration in which the values are held and stored, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a function (holding storage function) for storing each counter value acquired for each symbol (special symbol, ordinary symbol) is not provided. It may be configured as follows.

  With this configuration, in order to execute an advantageous lottery in a gaming machine in which a lottery that is advantageous to a player and a disadvantageous lottery are switched as a lottery of one special symbol type according to a set gaming state. In the state where a lot of reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a different game state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed in one special symbol.

  Next, a configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment described above, in place of the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 24A). The difference is that the big hit type selection 4 table 202db is replaced with a change pattern selection table 202e and a change pattern selection 4 table 202dc is provided, and a new small hit random number table da is provided. Since the other components are the same, the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, a small random number table 202da provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number table 202da. The small hit random number table 202da is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) determined to be small hits in the second special symbol lottery are defined.

  Specifically, in the small hit random number table 202da, a judgment value to be judged as a small hit is defined for each special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the state of the special symbol (low Regardless of the probability state or the high probability state), a determination value in a predetermined range is defined. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is not defined, and the small symbol is selected by lottery of the first special symbol. It is stipulated that there will be no winning.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is defined in the range of “4 to 399”. That is, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 0 (no winning), and the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 396/400 (about 9/10). ).

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the value of the first random number counter C1 that wins the big hit is configured to be different from the value of the first random number counter C1 that wins the small hit, and the special symbol lottery is performed. Is performed (process of determining the presence or absence of a hit) in a single process (a process of determining the presence or absence of a hit), and the determination of the success or failure of a large hit is continuously (simultaneously) performed.

  With this configuration, a lottery or a small lottery can be executed on one acquired counter value (first random number counter C1 value) with a predetermined probability.

  In this embodiment, when a small win is won, the V opening / closing door 65a attached to the V prize device 65 is opened for a certain period (a state in which game balls can enter the V prize device 65). It is configured so that: During the period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is open, the game ball is made to enter the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65, thereby giving a big hit. Therefore, the player executes the game while desiring to win many small hits.

  In the present embodiment, the V opening / closing door 65a is configured to be opened for a predetermined period when a small hit is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is opened may be made different based on the hit type. In such a configuration, a small hit type table may be provided, and the small hit type may be determined with reference to the table. With such a configuration, the player can be interested in not only winning the small hit but also the type of the small hit to be won, and the small hit in which the V opening / closing door 65a is opened for a longer period. The game is executed while the player wants to win. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is defined differently in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. With such a configuration, the privilege given to the player can be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to execute more advantageous special symbol lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, unless a specific game state (time saving state) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is configured not to be executed frequently. On the other hand, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game so that a specific game state is set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a table (first random number table 202a) referred to when executing the big hit lottery and a table (small random number table 202da) referred to when executing the small hit lottery are described. Although they are configured separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and one table may be used to execute a jackpot lottery and a small jackpot lottery. In this case, for example, the first hit random number table 202a may be configured so that the range of the counter value for winning a small hit is specified for each type of special symbol. With this configuration, the number of data tables in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot is determined in accordance with the determination value that is predetermined according to the acquired value of the first random number counter C1, the type of the special symbol, and the state of the special symbol. Although it is configured to execute the determination of the winning or the small hit winning, without being limited to this, for example, according to the number of big hits and the number of small hits in a specific period until a predetermined condition is satisfied, The value of the first random number counter C1 defined as a big hit or a small hit may be configured to be variable, or a big lottery, a small hit executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is satisfied. A data table in which the judgment value corresponding to the big hit or the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not specified as the data table for the abnormal time referred to in the lottery It may be provided.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), and to execute both special symbols. However, there is a limit so that the jackpot cannot be won at the same time (in parallel) (so that the jackpot game is not executed). In the pachinko machine 10 having such a restriction, for example, during a period until a jackpot is won by a lottery of one special symbol and a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is executed, a lottery of the other special symbol is performed. In order not to win the jackpot, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is not specified, and the lottery of the special symbol is executed by referring to the dedicated data table that defines only the judgment value corresponding to the small hit You may comprise.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the above-described first embodiment in that a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, and a normal symbol Reserved ball storage area 203dc, first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cf, small hit flag 203dg, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh, special figure 1 The difference is that a fluctuation time counter 203di, a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj, a special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, a special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and a time saving end standby flag 203dm are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da has various counter values acquired based on the fact that a ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). Is a storage area for storing. In addition, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db is obtained based on the number of game balls having entered the second entrance 1645 (starting prize) up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area for storing the various counter values obtained.

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the first special symbol are stored. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, this is a storage area in which the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, the first special symbol holding ball execution area ( (Not shown).

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are started. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) with the detection of the winning are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the MPU 201 reads the counters C1 to C2, C5 from the counter buffer. , CS1 are acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second entrance 1645 (start winning), similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, each of the counters C1 to C2, C5 and CS1 is read from the counter buffer. The values are obtained and stored similarly in each corresponding area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the special symbol change (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a jackpot lottery or setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. One of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db described above. Is shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc includes a second random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) in accordance with the detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (start winning), and a general figure variation type counter CS2. This is a storage area in which values are stored. When detecting that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 reads the value of the second random number counter C4 from the counter buffer. , The value of the ordinary symbol change type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203dc. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc has four holding areas so that data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one starting winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc, the data of the holding balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning) from the holding area where the data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. .

  In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the winning start, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol hitting lottery is performed. And a memory for storing data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of a display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data (the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the ordinary figure variation type counter CS2) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the ball storage area 203dc, the data corresponding to one starting winning is set to the normal Shift to the symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203de are each a special figure input detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of pending balls (variable display effects performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the winning in the ball opening 64 or the second entrance 1645 (the number of standby times) ) Is a counter for counting up to four times each. The first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203de are set to zero as initial values by an initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed for display is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are decremented by one each time a variable display effect is executed.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that a ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball. When the counter value is stored in the area 203da, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd is incremented by one. It is.

  The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that a ball has entered the second entrance 1645 (start winning) and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage. When the counter value is stored in the area 203db, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203de is incremented by one. It is.

  The MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), the first special symbol change start processing is performed. (See S255 in FIG. 123) or in the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a variation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. I do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and the stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed during the change display of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol is changed during the change display of the second special symbol. This is set to ON when a symbol jackpot is executed. This special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON in S852 of the first special symbol change stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the process of S952 of the second special symbol change start process (see S260 of FIG. 126), it is set to OFF.

  This prevents the second special symbol, which has been forcibly removed and stopped and displayed in the symbol, from being re-executed in the lottery when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. be able to.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, after executing the process for the first special symbol in one special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), the main controller 110 for the second special symbol is executed. By configuring so as to execute the processing, the fluctuation processing for each special symbol is executed without delay.

  Then, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), if any of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, the big process is controlled by the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55). The processing (S1804 in FIG. 56) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) is a variation process for each special symbol (S254 in FIG. 119) when the current state is the big hit state or the small hit status (S251: Yes in FIG. 151). To S263) are skipped.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, a new special symbol change (lottery) is not executed while the big hit game or the small hit game is executed based on the special symbol lottery result. In the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation process for the first special symbol executed earlier. In this case, a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119).

  In the present embodiment configured as described above, by using the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, It is possible to suppress the execution of a new variation process for the second special symbol in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S154 in FIG. 119).

  The small hit flag 203dg is a flag indicating that the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is set to ON when the small hit is won. The small hit flag 203dg is set to ON when the result of the determination of the second special symbol is a small hit (see S1151 in FIG. 128), and when the special symbol change in which the winning result is the small hit is stopped and displayed. Is set to off (see S1655 in FIG. 128).

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is a flag indicating a period in which the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is stopped, and stops the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time when it is set to ON. When the state is set from on to off, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

  This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in which the lottery result is a small hit (S1652 in FIG. 133), and the special symbol fluctuation processing 4 ( 119 (refer to FIG. 119) (S252 in FIG. 119). If it is set to ON in the process of S252, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (the special symbol 1) in the same manner as during the change is executed (FIG. 119). S253). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thus, the fact that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped can be notified by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh to ON. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 123) that the flag is set to on (S751: Yes in FIG. 123), the flag is set to off (S753 in FIG. 123).

  In the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be able to win the small hit, so the special symbol for which the variable display is temporarily stopped based on the win of the small hit is the first special symbol. In the case where the lottery of the first special symbol can be won with a small hit, the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, the one special symbol is stopped in a combination indicating the big hit (based on the fact that the big hit game is executed). T), the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol, and if the result of the lottery of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped with a combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hitting game ends).

  That is, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. With such a configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes a game result (for example, a jackpot) that is most advantageous to the player, and while the variable display for indicating the game result is being executed, the other is displayed. The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and the big hit can be suppressed from being erased by the small hit.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S357 in FIG. 122). A value indicating the fluctuating time is set (see S559 in FIG. 122). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation executing process (see S255 in FIG. 123) is executed, and the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). Is determined (see S256 in FIG. 119). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S256 in FIG. 119: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing for stopping the changing first special symbol) Step S257 in FIG. 119) is executed.

  Further, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S1555 in FIG. 132). Thereby, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the departure during the big hit stop display of the second special symbol, the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di remains, and the forcible display is forcibly performed. After the stop display, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation of the first special symbol from being restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S956 in FIG. 129). A value indicating the fluctuating time is set (see S1260 in FIG. 129). The value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation executing process (see S261 in FIG. 131) is executed, and the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). Is determined (see S262 in FIG. 119). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262: Yes in FIG. 119), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing for stopping the changing second special symbol ( Step S263 in FIG. 119) is executed.

  Further, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit (see S855 in FIG. 124). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the departure at the time of the big special stop display of the first special symbol, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj remains, and the second symbol is forcibly displayed. After the stop display, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation of the second special symbol from restarting again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj.

  The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation of the first special symbol is a fluctuation to be subtracted from the value of the time reduction counter 203h when the fluctuation is stopped. This special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is used when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is determined to be a value larger than 0 in the first special symbol change start processing (see S258 in FIG. 120) (S358 in FIG. 120: Yes). Is set to ON (S359 in FIG. 120), and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON in the time saving update processing (see S863 in FIG. 125) of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124). (S2101: Yes in FIG. 125), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is subtracted (S2102), and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S2103).

  In addition, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is set to off in the first special symbol change stop processing (see S257 of FIG. 124). Similarly, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, it is set to off in the second special symbol change stop processing (see SS263 in FIG. 132). In addition, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to OFF when the special symbol lottery is won, if the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped after the big hit game, the fluctuation is changed. At the time of the fluctuation stop after the restart, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S2101 in FIG. 125). If it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (FIG. 125). S2101: No), the process of subtracting the value of the time reduction counter 203h (see S2102 of FIG. 125) is skipped, and the process of stopping the change is executed.

  With this configuration, the jackpot game ends, the temporarily stopped first special symbol resumes a change, and when the change stops, the remaining working hours are not updated (subtracted). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game awarded by the V-prize is based on the remaining variation of the first special symbol temporarily stopped, in addition to the number of special symbol lotteries determined by the jackpot. The time is also reduced to the time reduction game state. With this configuration, it is possible to set the time-saving gaming state, which is a period that is advantageous for the player, longer.

  The special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is a flag for indicating whether or not the fluctuation of the second special symbol is a fluctuation in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h should be subtracted when the fluctuation stops. In the second special symbol change start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (see S960 in FIG. 126), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0. When it is determined that the value is a value (that is, during working hours) (S960: Yes), it is set to ON (see S961 in FIG. 126). Then, it is referred to in the time saving update processing (S1661) of the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564), and when it is on, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is set to off. . In addition, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is set to off (see S860 of FIG. 124) in the first special symbol change stop process (see S257 of FIG. 124), and the second special symbol is turned off. When the jackpot is won in the lottery, it is set to off in the second special symbol change stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) (see S1560 in FIG. 132).

  In the present embodiment, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when a big hit is won, if the second special symbol fluctuates, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped outside the fluctuation. As described above, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is configured to be turned off. In addition, the processing for updating the value of the time reduction counter 203h can be skipped. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

  The time-saving end standby flag 203dm is a flag indicating that the special figure fluctuation that satisfies the condition for ending the time-saving state has been started. Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol is changed four times or 15 times as a prescribed period of the time-saving state, and the time-saving state is ended. This indicates that the final change of the time saving is started, and the time saving state is a standby state to be ended.

  The time-saving end standby flag 203dm determines whether or not the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 in the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 of FIG. 120) (that is, the final variation of the specified number of times in the time-saving state). (S360), when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), it is set to ON (see S361 in FIG. 120). Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 (S962: Yes), it is set to ON (see S963 in FIG. 126).

  Then, when the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 125), which is the timing to stop the change of the special symbol, is executed, or when a new special symbol is determined (the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 121) It is referred to in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127)), and when the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is set to ON, the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is set to OFF. .

  With such a configuration, in a state where the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (that is, a standby state), if any time-saving end timing has arrived, it is ensured according to each timing. Can execute the time-saving ending process.

<Control Process Executed by Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 119 to 136. In the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol overlap (in parallel with) the control process of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above. The present embodiment is different in that it is configured to be executable, and the contents of the control processing corresponding to the above-described difference are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 119, a special symbol variation process 4 (S151), which is one process of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 4 (S151). The special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) performs various determinations (win / fail determination) and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and performs predetermined control. Various commands for controlling the first symbol display device 37 to enable variable display in the determined variable display mode, and for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute variable display effects of the third symbol and the fourth symbol. Is set, and control is performed to stop and display in a display mode indicating a determination result (whether the result is a pass / fail determination result). Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), first, it is determined whether a big hit game is being performed (big hit) or a small hit game is being made (small hit) (S251). Here, based on the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the current game is a big hit game (a big hit) or a small hit game (a small hit).

  In the process of S251, when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is being made (S251: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on (S252). Is determined (S252: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure (the first special symbol (special figure 1) in this embodiment) is displayed. Update (S253), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON (S252: No), the process ends as it is.

  Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when the second special symbol is stopped (fixed display) in a display mode indicating a small hit winning. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the small hitting game, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display (special figure fluctuation display) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted). During this period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the variable display of the first special symbol, which was being executed along with the start of the small hit game, is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from having a mistrust when the first special symbol change in the middle has disappeared. In addition, as a display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that normal variable display is being performed (for example, at intervals of 0.2 seconds) The display mode may be the same as the display mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing, or may be the display mode in which the flashing interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that variable display is being performed (for example, lighting and extinguishing at 0.5 second intervals). May be used. Further, when the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be able to display a plurality of colors as a display mode, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only when the vehicle is temporarily stopped is used. Is also good.

  On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the present is not a big hit or a small hit (S251: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is larger than 0, that is, the first It is determined whether or not the special symbol is being changed and displayed (S254). If it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di is greater than 0) (S254: Yes), the first special symbol changing process is executed (S254: Yes). S255).

  In the first special symbol change execution process (S255), the variable display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 is changed (updated) while the first special symbol is changing. Is performed. Then, when the process of S255 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the first variation time counter 203a2 updated in the first special symbol variation execution process (S255) is 0 (S256). If it is determined in the processing that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S256: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S257), and the processing shifts to the processing of S259 described later.

  In the first special symbol change stop process (S257), when the change time specified for the first special symbol during the change display has elapsed, the change display is stopped at the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed. Further, in the first special symbol change stop process (S257), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the process of forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol being executed in a display mode indicating a detachment is performed. Is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won a jackpot, a process for deleting information on the jackpot is executed. Details of the first special symbol change stop processing (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S256 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not 0 (S256: No), the process of S257 is skipped and the process proceeds to S259.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S254 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S254: No), that is, if it is determined that the current state is that the special figure 1 is not changing. Executes the first special symbol change start process (S258). In the first special symbol variation start process (S258), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is determined that a new lottery (fluctuation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (fluctuation) is executed. The first special symbol change start process (S258) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the first special symbol change start process (S258), after determining that the special figure 1 is changing in the process of S256 (S256: No), or performing the first special symbol change stop process (S257). After the execution, next, a fluctuation process (S259 to S263) relating to the second special symbol is executed.

  First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0 (S259). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently being displayed in a fluctuating manner. If it is determined in the processing of S259 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S259: No), it means that the current state is that the special figure 2 is not changing. Next, a second special symbol change start process for executing a new lottery (change) of the second special symbol is executed (S260), and this process ends.

  In the second special symbol variation start process (S260), if the reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball count storage area 203b, a jackpot determination or a variation pattern selection based on the retained data is performed. The processing is executed. In the second special symbol change start process (S260), if the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203i (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON.

  On the other hand, in the process of S259, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0, that is, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is changing now (S259: Yes), then the second A special symbol change execution process is executed (S261). The contents of the second special symbol change executing process (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG. 131. However, the same process as the above-described first special symbol change executing process (S255) is performed. Is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

  Then, when the second special symbol variation executing process (S261) is completed, it is determined whether the current value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262), and if it is determined that the value is 0 (S262). : Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S263), and then the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not 0 in the process of S262 (S262: No), the process of S263 is skipped and the present process ends.

  The second special symbol change stop processing (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 132, but is specified for the second special symbol during the change display, as in the first special symbol change stop processing (S257). When the fluctuating time has elapsed, a process of stopping the fluctuating display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. In the second special symbol change stop process (S263), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a detachment. The processing is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won a jackpot, a process for deleting information on the jackpot is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, since it is configured to be able to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit, it corresponds to a small hit or a miss. Is performed.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 119, in this embodiment, the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). , A variation process (S254 to S258) for the first special symbol and a variation process (S259 to S263) for the second special symbol are executed within one special symbol variation process. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for each special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

  In this embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process relating to the first special symbol is executed (prioritized) before the variation process relating to the second special symbol. In this way, by clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol, even if the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol and the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol become the same, the second symbol is prioritized. One special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the variation process related to the first special symbol is configured to be executed prior to the variation process related to the second special symbol. However, the variation process related to the second special symbol is not limited to this. The processing may be configured to be executed prior to the fluctuation processing relating to the first special symbol.

  In addition, in the set game state, a variation process for a special symbol type in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed may be preferentially executed, and the player may be changed according to the set game state. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol type in which the lottery which is advantageous to the game is executed is switched, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol type in which the fluctuation process is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from being erased (discarded) by the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, the first special symbol change start process (S258), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start process (S258).

  In the first special symbol change start process (S258 in FIG. 120), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is acquired (S351), and the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is acquired. It is determined whether the value (N1) is larger than 0 (S352). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S352: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203dd is decremented by 1 (S353). ).

  Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the reserved ball number after the subtraction is set (S354), and the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. The processing for sequentially shifting to the side is performed (S355). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3.

  Next, a first special symbol big hit determination process is executed (S356). The first special symbol big hit determination process (S356 in FIG. 120) will be described later in detail, but using the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), A jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot is based on the set gaming state.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S357). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357), which will be described in detail later, is based on the result of the hit determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value.

  The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357) is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is during the time reduction (S358). ). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S358: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to ON (S359), and the process proceeds to S360. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S358 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not a value larger than 0 (S358: No), this processing ends as it is because the gaming state is the normal state. As described above, when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a value larger than 0, that is, when the time reduction is being performed, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to ON to start the time reduction when the fluctuation stops. It is possible to determine whether the change is a fluctuation, and to update the time-saving termination condition (subtract the value of the time-saving counter 203h) when the fluctuation stops.

  After executing the above-described processing of S359, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 (S360). That is, it is determined whether or not the final change is the end condition of the time saving state. If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S361), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not 1 in the processing of S360, this processing is terminated as it is not the final fluctuation of the time reduction gaming state.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol big hit determination process (S356).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S451). Then, in order to determine whether or not the time reduction termination condition is satisfied and the state is in a standby state, that is, whether or not the final variation of the time reduction is being executed in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time reduction is ended. It is determined whether the standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S452). When it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is on (that is, the second special symbol is undergoing the final fluctuation of the time saving) (S452: Yes), the period of the currently set time-saving state ends. Therefore, the normal state is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S453), and the time saving end standby flag 203dm and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl are set to off (S454). Next, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 (S455), a state command indicating that the gaming state has been switched to the normal state is set (S456), and the process proceeds to S457. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S452 that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not on (S452: No), the process is not in a state in which the final variation of the time-saving status is being executed, and the processes of S453 to S456 are skipped. The process proceeds to S457.

  As described above, in a state of waiting for the end of the time reduction state (a state in which the final variation of the time reduction state has started in the other special symbol), the game is performed before the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained. By setting the state to the normal state, even though the time-saving game state has ended, until the change of the special symbol in which the final change of the time-saving state is executed ends, the time-saving game state with the other special symbol ends The problem of executing a game based on the game can be eliminated. Therefore, an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

  When the processing of S452 or S453 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the big hit determination value based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23B). Then, the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S457). Then, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a jackpot (S458), and if it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S458: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON to indicate the jackpot winning of the first special symbol. (S459). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of the special symbol having won the jackpot in addition to the information indicating the presence or absence of the jackpot. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the processing of S459, information indicating the big hit is set for the area corresponding to the first special symbol in the big hit flag 203i.

  Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big hit (S460), and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired hit type counter C2 ( S461), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S458 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S458: No), a symbol that is out of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S462), and the process ends. I do.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, ie, It is determined whether or not the first special symbol jackpot has been set (S551). Here, the determination as to whether or not a big hit is made is based on whether or not the big hit flag 203i is turned on for the first special symbol. The big hit flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S459 in the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 121).

  In the process of S551, when it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is set (S551: Yes), the big hit type selection 4 table 202db, the value of the first hit type counter C2 that has been acquired, and Is determined on the basis of (S552). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is obtained (S553), and the current gaming state (normal state, hiding state) corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g. , And the fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 202dc corresponding to the probability change state) is read (S554).

  Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S553 and the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc read in the process of S554 (S555), and the variation pattern selected in the process of S555 is selected. Based on this, a special figure 1 variation pattern command is set (S556).

  Next, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S557), and the start of change of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S558). Is set to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di (S559), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S551 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place (that is, the big hit flag 203i for the first special symbol is off) (S551: No), the processing of S552 is performed. The process skips to step S553.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the first special symbol variation executing process (S255) which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change executing process (S255). In the first special symbol variation executing process (S255), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed and a special symbol interrupted by winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. A process for restarting the symbol change is executed.

  In the first special symbol change execution process (S255), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON. The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, when one special symbol wins a small hit, if the other special symbol is in a variable display, the other special symbol is changed for a predetermined period (from the small hit winning to the small hit game). (The period until the end of the small hit game), and after the predetermined period elapses (after the end of the small hit game), the other special symbol change is restarted.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which one special symbol change ends during one small hit game and a game that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. Furthermore, based on the fact that one of the special symbol lottery has won the small hit game, the lottery result of the other special symbol lottery will not be discarded. It is possible to prohibit (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery result (the lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the small win) is discarded.

  In the process of S751, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S751: Yes), a special figure 1 change restart command is set (S752), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. It is set to off (S753), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is decremented by 1 (S754), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S755), and this processing ends. .

  In the present embodiment, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds, the first special symbol variation execution process (See S255 in FIG. 119), and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is updated (1 subtraction) in the first special symbol fluctuation execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123). It is configured to be. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, “15000” is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di, and the value becomes 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S751 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON (S751: No), that is, when it is determined that the small special lottery is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol Skips the processing of S752 and S753 and shifts to the processing of S754.

  Next, a first special symbol change stop process (S257), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change stop process (S257). The first special symbol change stop process (S257) is performed when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di is “0”, that is, the change time of the first special symbol (special figure 1). This is a process executed when the time has elapsed.

  When the first special symbol change stop process (S257 in FIG. 124) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (S851). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (S851: Yes), then the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S852), A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df has been turned on is set (S853).

  Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a deviated symbol (S854), and the value of the special figure 2 variable time counter 203dj is set to 0 (S855). Thereby, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the variable display of the second special symbol (the special symbol 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the departure (the departure symbol). (Fixed display).

  After the processing of S855, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203i for the second special symbol is set to ON (S856), and if it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S856: Yes), In order to adapt the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol forcibly stopped and displayed in the process of S854, the big hit flag 203i for the second special symbol is set to OFF (S857). ), Delete the storage information for the special figure 2 jackpot (S858), and shift to the processing of S859. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S856 that the jackpot has not been won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the processes of S857 and 808 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S859.

  In the process of S859, first, the jackpot scenario won in the special symbol fluctuation is set (see 809). Then, the jackpot flag 203i, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, and the special figure 2 subtraction flag corresponding to the first special symbol are set. 203dl, the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is turned off, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is reset (S860). Then, information indicating that the current game state is a big hit (during a big hit game) is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S861). The gaming state storage area 203g is configured to be able to separately store a gaming state (normal state, time saving state) related to a lottery game and a gaming state (big hit middle, small hit middle) related to a hit game, By executing the process of S861, the gaming state (normal state, time-saving state) relating to the lottery game at the timing of winning the big hit and the gaming state indicating that the big hit is being performed are stored.

  With this configuration, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming state set at the timing of winning the jackpot can be determined.

  When the processing of S861 is completed, a special figure 1 determination command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to determine and stop the first special symbol is set (S863), and the first special symbol display device is set. A process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol which is displayed in a variable at 37 is executed (S864), and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S851 that the big hit flag 203i has not been set to ON for the first special symbol (S851: No), the time saving update processing (S862) is executed, and the above-described processing of S863 is performed. Move on to processing. A detailed description of the time saving update process (S862) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the first special symbol change stop process (S257), the process (S859 to S864) of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (first lottery game) is executed. If the current lottery result is a jackpot (S851: Yes), the changing second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed such that the lottery result is out (S854). In this way, in the process of stopping and displaying (fixing display) one special symbol with a symbol indicating a big hit, by executing the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol that is changing, it is possible to simultaneously execute Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol changes to be executed.

  That is, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the variation process related to the first special symbol and the variation process related to the second special symbol are sequentially executed, the variation process is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. The second special symbol variation process (forced stop process) is executed within the variation process related to the first special symbol, so that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at a timing when the variation process related to the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing relating to the second special symbol from being duplicated, and to smoothly execute the processing.

  In this embodiment, at the timing when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the big hit, the other special symbol is configured to perform the process of forcibly stopping with the symbol indicating the separation. For example, when it is determined that one special symbol has won a jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) ( In S458 of FIG. 121: Yes), the change of the other special symbol may be forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable to execute a special change that does not win a jackpot for the other special symbol that is forcibly removed and stopped until the jackpot change of one special symbol ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the change in the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped when one special symbol has won a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the other special symbol change has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the big hit has been won.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit, the lottery result for the other special symbol change being executed is discarded. Without limiting, for example, until the jackpot game based on one special symbol ends, the other special symbol change is interrupted, and after the big hit game ends, the interrupted special symbol change may be restarted. good. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player from having a mistrust of the pachinko machine 10 due to the discard of the game result of the lottery game executed by the player.

  In addition, in the case of controlling the other special symbol variation being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variation control content is made different according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. For example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol, when the lottery of the second special symbol is out of order (out of change), the lottery is performed. During the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) for indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit) by executing a forced stop process for discarding the result and forcibly stopping the deviation change. In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol ends, the interruption process may be executed so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

  In this case, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol ends, the player is interested in whether a new second special symbol change is executed or the interrupted second special symbol change is resumed. A game can be played. Further, when such a configuration is used, a configuration in which a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the status of the second special symbol (whether or not interrupted) during the jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed. Good.

  Next, referring to FIG. 125, one of the special symbol change stop processing (first special symbol change stop processing (see S151 in FIG. 119) and second special symbol change stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132)) Is described (S862 (S1661)). FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process (S862 (S1661)). In this time saving update process (S862 (S1661)), when the gaming state is the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is updated when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and when the end condition is satisfied, the gaming state is changed to the normal state. Execute the process of transitioning to the state. In the following description, a process in the case where the change of the first special symbol is stopped will be described. However, a similar process is executed when the target is the second special symbol.

  When the time saving update process (S864 (S1661)) is executed, first, whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on, that is, the variation of the special symbol executed this time starts to vary during the time saving game. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S2101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON, that is, it is determined that the fluctuation has started during the time saving game (S2101: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted (S2102). Then, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S2103), and the processing shifts to S2104. On the other hand, in the processing of S2101, if it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is not on (S2101: No), the processing of S2102 to S2106 is skipped because it is not a fluctuation stop that triggers updating of the time saving state. Then, the process proceeds to S2107.

  As described above, at the start of the change of the special symbol, if the gaming state is the time saving state, the subtraction flag of the corresponding symbol type is set to ON to subtract the value of the time reduction counter 203h when the change is stopped. Can be. Therefore, the time-saving game state can be set until the final change of the time-saving game state stops. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player as a maximum period.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation is not changed until the small hitting game ends. It is configured not to restart. Then, during the small hit game, a V prize is generated, a big hit is awarded, and after the big hit game ends, the temporarily stopped first special symbol restarts to change. Further, as will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 137, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF before the jackpot game is started. Since the subtraction flag 203dk in FIG. 1 is off, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not subtracted. That is, when the special symbol, which has been temporarily stopped after the end of the big hit game due to the V winning, stops fluctuating, the remaining short time is not subtracted. With such a configuration, in addition to the prescribed time period set by the jackpot type, the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special figure is also set as the time reduction game, which is an advantageous period for the player. The time saving state can be set to be as long as possible. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  In the processing of S2104, it is determined whether or not the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is on (S2104). When it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is ON (S2104: Yes), that is, the change of the special symbol of this time is the final change of the time saving, and in the second special symbol (the other special symbol), If the next change has not been started since the last change of the game, it is the timing to shift the game state to the normal state, so that the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is set to OFF (S2105), and the game state is stored. The normal state is set in the area 203g (S2106). Then, the flow shifts to the process of S2107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2104 that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not on (S2104: Yes), the state in which the final change of the time-saving game is not executed, that is, the state where the time-saving state is continued Therefore, the processing in S2105 to S2106 described above is skipped, and the processing shifts to S2107. As described above, in the simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, when the fluctuation that becomes the final fluctuation of the time reduction game is stopped, the fluctuation (the final fluctuation to the next fluctuation) exceeding the specified number of the time reduction gaming state is executed in the other special symbol. It is determined whether or not the game has been executed, and if not executed, the game state is shifted. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game without a sense of incongruity to the player.

  When any of S2101, S2104, and S2106 ends, the process moves to S2107. In the processing of S2107, a command indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the game state is set (S2107), and this processing ends.

  Next, the second special symbol change start process (S260), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start process (S260).

  When the second special symbol change start process (S260) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951). That is, the lottery of the first special symbol (the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) executed immediately before this process is executed (within the same special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)). )) To determine whether or not a jackpot has been won.

  In the process of S951, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951: Yes), various kinds of processing for starting the change of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to off (S952), and this processing ends. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol and the second special symbol big hit symbol is displayed. After the special symbol is released and the stop symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, execution of a new second special symbol change is prohibited. Thereby, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation process relating to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without any trouble.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON in the processing of S951 (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to OFF. Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df, the second special symbol change start processing (S260 in FIG. 126) can be skipped only once.

  This is because the lottery (first special) of the first special symbol executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S260) is executed (within the same special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)). Only when the jackpot is won in the symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), if the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 126) executed immediately after is skipped, the first special symbol is thereafter obtained. The big hit game is started based on the big hit information (big hit scenario) set in the big hit determination processing (see S356 in FIG. 121), and the big hit game is executed by the processing of S251 in the special symbol change processing 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). This is because the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 119) is not executed until the process is completed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of the other special symbol based on the result of the lottery of one special symbol, and thus the control process executed by the main control device 110 Can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly displayed (stopped with a missing symbol) and the other special symbol is displayed. Until the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery result is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to prevent the new fluctuation (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed, and the other special symbol fluctuation processing is performed. Is skipped once, but other configurations may be used.

  In other words, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit lottery), the other special symbol lottery (variation) does not win a big hit until the big hit game based on the big lottery is completed. For example, when a jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) for executing a jackpot game is executed in a main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 described later, FIG. The fluctuation stop flag 203df may be set to be off.

  With this configuration, even if the timing for turning on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the big hit game is executed. The execution of the change (lottery) of the new second special symbol can be prohibited.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON, the variation of the second special symbol is performed. The processing is skipped, that is, a new fluctuation is not started (the second special symbol is kept stopped), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is turned on. If it is set, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol for exclusive use.

  In this case, the second special symbol lottery is performed using a special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during a period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. A period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed, and a period until reaching a specific timing during the jackpot game without executing the lottery of the second special symbol may be configured. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol change has been forcibly stopped.

  The content of the above-mentioned variation processing for each special symbol is configured to be appropriately output to the sound lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and the third symbol display device is provided. The variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol displayed in the 81 main display area Dm can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. In such a case, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute the variable effect during the forced stop using the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is also good.

  In this manner, the actual second special pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 which is easy for the player to visually recognize, by using the symbols (the third symbol and the fourth symbol) which are displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Even in the case where the fluctuation effect is executed while the symbol is forcibly stopped, it is difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol fluctuation has been forcibly stopped.

  In the process of S951, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol (S951: No in FIG. 126), The processing of S953 to S959 is performed, and the process proceeds to S960 described later. The processing of S953 to S959 is different from the processing of S351 to S357 of the first special symbol variation start processing (S258 of FIG. 120) by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd and the first special symbol holding. The value of the ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S355), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S356), the second special symbol holding ball number The counter 203de, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S958), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959) Since they are the same except for the changed points, the description is omitted.

  Furthermore, after executing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909), the processes of S960 to S963 are executed, and this process ends. In the processing of S960 to S963, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is changed to the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl with respect to each processing of S358 to S361 of the first special symbol change start processing (S258 in FIG. 120). Except for the point described above, the description is omitted because it is the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are performed at the same time, the same processing is executed at the start of the variation of both special symbols. Thus, in the other special symbol, it is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of remaining working hours is not subtracted.

  Next, the second special symbol big hit determination process (S955), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955). The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955) is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) in that the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. And some other processing was added.

  The second special symbol big hit determination process (S955 in FIG. 127) is different from the first special symbol big hit determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) in the following points. That is, in the processing of S1051 corresponding to the processing of S451, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and S452 to S461. In the processing of S1052 to S1061 corresponding to the processing of the above, when the target is changed from the special figure 1 (first special design) to the special figure 2 (second special design) and the lottery result of the special design is out of order The difference is that the executed processing is changed. Since other points are the same, the description is omitted.

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955 in FIG. 127), when it is determined that the current lottery is not a jackpot (S1058: No), the special figure 2 departure variation process is executed (S1062), and this process ends. I do.

  This special figure 2 departure variation processing (S1062) is processing executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than a big hit, that is, a small hit or a departure. Although detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 128, if the lottery result is out of order, the same processing as the processing of S462 of the above-described first special symbol big hit determination processing (S356 of FIG. 121) is executed, If the lottery result is a small hit, a process corresponding to the small hit winning is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 128, the details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1062) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation change processing (S1062).

  In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing (S1062), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result (the lottery result acquired in the processing of S1057 of the second special symbol big hit determination processing (see S955 in FIG. 127)) is a small hit. (S1151).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1151 that the small hit has been won (S1151: Yes), the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1152), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1153). ) Then, the small hit symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1154), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1151, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is out of place (S1151: No), the out of place of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S1155), and this processing ends.

  As described above, the special figure 2 departure fluctuation processing (S1062 in FIG. 128) executed as one of the second special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S260 in FIG. 126), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol (lottery) When it is determined that the small hit is won in the processing executed at the timing of starting the small hit, the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON, and the setting status of the small hit flag 203dg at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol , It is possible to easily execute the processing corresponding to the small hit winning.

  Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S959).

  The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959 in FIG. 129) differs from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 122) in the following points. In the process of S1251 corresponding to the process of S551, the special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), and S552 to S559. The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command in each processing of S1252 to S1256 and S1258 to S1260 corresponding to each processing of FIG. 2 is different from that shown in FIG. 2 in that the processing of the variation pattern selection processing (S1257) is added. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 130, the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern executed in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (S959), which is one of the second special symbol fluctuation start processing (S260 in FIG. 126). The contents of the selection process (S1257 in FIG. 130) will be described.

  When the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 126) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S1351). In the process of S1351, a determination is made based on the lottery result acquired in the process of S1057 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S959 of FIG. 127).

  In the processing of S1351, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S1351: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1352), and the acquired small hit type counter C5 is obtained. The small hit type is selected based on the value (S1353). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one small hit type, different small hit types are not set based on the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the small hit type, a small hit type selection table in which different small hit types are defined with respect to the range of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is provided, and S1352 and S1353. May be configured so as to select a different small hit type by the above processing.

  As described in the present embodiment, by using the processing of S1352 and S1353 in spite of the fact that there is only one small hit type, for example, during the development period of the pachinko machine 10, the specification of the game is changed. Even if it is changed, it is possible to easily respond to the change.

  When the process of S1353 is completed, a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current game state is read out (S1354), and a small hit is determined based on the read variation pattern selection table and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected (S1355). Then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the small hit variation pattern selected in the process of S1355 is set (S1356), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1351 that the current lottery result is not a small hit (is out of place) (S1351: No), the process in which the lottery result is out of place (S1357 to S1359) is executed. In the process of S1357, first, a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the game state is read (S1357), and a variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS2 (S1358), and a variation pattern is selected based on the selected variation pattern. FIG. 2 sets the fluctuation pattern command (S1359), and terminates this processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the content of the second special symbol change execution process (S261), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change executing process (S261). In the present embodiment, since the first special symbol lottery is configured not to win a small hit, in the second special symbol variation executing process (S261), the above-described first special symbol variation executing process (S261) is performed. With respect to (see S255 in FIG. 123), is the flag (special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh) set when a small hit is won (the small hit game executed) in the other special symbol set to ON? The difference is that the process of determining is omitted, and the other points are the same except that the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, so that the detailed description is omitted. .

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to win the small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined that the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (the small hit game is executed). A flag (for example, special figure 2 temporary stop flag) for indicating is provided, and in the second special symbol variation executing process, the same process as the above-described first special symbol variation executing process (see S255 in FIG. 123). Should be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a description will be given of the second special symbol variation stop process (S263), which is one of the special symbol variation processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119). FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change stop processing (S263). In the second special symbol change stop processing (S263), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol in the first special symbol change stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124). The difference is that the content of the process executed when the lottery result is other than the jackpot is changed, and the process of setting a flag for stopping the change of the other special symbol is omitted.

  That is, the point that the process of S852 in the first special symbol change stop process (see S257 of FIG. 124) is deleted, and the process target of S851 and S853 to S864 are changed to the second special symbol (S1551 and S1553 to S1513). And that when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S1551: No), the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1558) is executed. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564) executed in the second special symbol change stop processing (see FIG. 132) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564). This special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564) is a special symbol corresponding to the case where the lottery result acquired in the second special symbol big hit determination processing (see S955 in FIG. 127) is other than the big hit (small hit or miss). This is to execute the fluctuation stop processing.

  When the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1651), and if it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON, (S1651: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S1652), and a special figure 1 temporary stop command for indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON is set (S1652). S1653). The special figure 1 temporary stop command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by an external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55). Then, when the special lamp 1 temporary stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, a temporary stop mode for indicating that the first special symbol (special map 1) has been temporarily stopped (doing) is set. A display command to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set and output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes a process for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

  Returning to FIG. 133, the description will be continued. When the process of S1653 is completed, a small hitting scenario (small hitting opening operation scenario) corresponding to the small hitting game is set (S1654), and the small hitting flag 203dg is set to off (S1655). The hit information indicating that the small hit is being played (small hit) is stored in the storage area 203g (S1656), and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) with the symbol indicating the small hit (small hit symbol). Is set (S1657), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 stops changing (fixed display) with a small hit symbol (S1658). Then, a time saving update process (S1661 (S863)) for performing a process such as subtraction of the number of remaining working hours is executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the small hit flag 203dg is set to OFF in the process of S1651 (S1651: No), this indicates that the second special symbol is to be stopped (fixed display) with a symbol indicating a deviation (a deviation symbol). Is set (S1659), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and stopped at the symbol (fixed display) (S1660). Then, the time saving update process is executed (S1661 (S863)), and this process ends.

  It should be noted that the time saving update process (S1661 (S863)) uses the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk referred to in the processing of S2101 and S2104 of the time saving update processing (S863 (S1661)) described above with reference to FIG. The only difference is that the subtraction flag is changed to the 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first The special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously changed and displayed. Therefore, a lottery game of more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit is given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and a lottery game is executed, if a jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other one is used. Since the change display of the special symbol is stopped, the player can concentrate on the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, when a symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. Although the display is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed while being temporarily stopped or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, since the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is being performed, the player loses the lottery game in the middle of the variable display. Can be grasped that it is not, you can play a jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, a description will be given of the start winning process 4 (S152), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 4 (S152). In the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), it is determined whether a ball has entered (start winning) the special figure entrance 64 or the second entrance 1645. The acquired counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol holding ball storage area up to the upper limit number of holdings (up to four for each of the special figure entrance 64 and the second entrance 1645). This is a process of storing the data in each of 203 db.

  When the respective counter values obtained based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da. Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage areas 203db, processing (so-called pre-reading processing) of predicting the result of the determination of the success or failure, the selected variation pattern, or the like is performed in advance. . Hereinafter, the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134) will be described.

  In the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 147), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (start winning) the special figure ball opening 64 which is the first starting port (S1751). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special figure entrance 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S1751: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is obtained (S1752). It is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753).

  That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserves for the special figure entrance 64 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether the number of reserves is not stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is added by 1 (S1754), and the sound lamp control device 113 A reserve ball number command for notifying the reserved number of special figure entrances 64 (the number of lottery rights reserved for the first special symbol) is set for the special figure entrance port 64 (S1755).

  Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 is read out. Each of them is held (stored) in the storage area corresponding to the number of held balls 203a (S1756).

  Next, a first prefetching process is executed (S1775). The first pre-reading process (S1757) will be described later with reference to FIG. 135. However, based on the counter values newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, the result of the hit / fail determination and the variation pattern to be determined. , A process of determining a stop type and the like is executed. In the present embodiment, it is configured to execute the process of determining the result of determination as to whether or not to perform the determination, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, and the like based on each of the newly stored counter values. For example, when there is a new start winning, for example, the result of determining whether or not all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the determined fluctuation pattern, A process for determining the type of stop or the like may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, that is, when a lottery right for the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol is obtained. The content of the lottery right (winning information) is determined in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the lottery right of the second special symbol (winning information) is obtained. ) May be determined in advance.

  Then, after executing the process of S1775, the process of S1758 is executed next. When it is determined in the processing of S1751 that the ball has not entered the special figure entrance 64 (S1751: No), or in the processing of S1753, the number of reserves for the special figure entrance 64 at present is the upper limit. If it is determined that the value is a value (S1753: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1758.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is added, the first look-ahead process (S1775) based on the added information on winning (winning information) is performed. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined in the process of S1753 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd is the upper limit number (4) (S1753) : No), that is, when a ball is thrown into the special figure entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaching the upper limit, the first look-ahead processing (S1775) can be executed. You may comprise so that it may be possible. Thereby, even in the state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the pre-reading process. In addition, when a ball is inserted into the special figure entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaching the upper limit, an added value can be given. It is possible to prevent the willingness to play when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 with the number of balls reaching the upper limit.

  Next, the processes in S1758 to S1764 are the same as the processes performed for winning the ball to the first starting port (special figure entrance 64) performed in the processes in S1751 to S1775. The only difference is that the process is performed on the second entrance 1645, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the present embodiment, since it is configured that the small hit can be won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is also acquired in the process of S1763.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, a description will be given of the first prefetching process (S1775), which is one process of the start winning process 4 (S152 of FIG. 134). FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the first prefetching process (S1775).

  In the first look-ahead process (S1775 in FIG. 135), first, a random number counter C1 per first, a counter type C1 per first, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a. Then, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in an area having the smallest winning order among the empty storage areas in the prefetch pending storage area (S1822).

  Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the pre-reading suspension storage area, the result of the rejection determination is determined. In this case, both the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the low-probability state and the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the high-probability state are determined. This is because the jackpot determination is based on the timing when a new hold is generated (the timing when a new hold (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a) and the winning information newly held this time. Since a time lag occurs at the execution timing, it is possible to predict the gaming state (probability state of the special symbol) set at the timing at which the jackpot determination based on the winning information newly held this time is executed. Because it is difficult.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel). And the fluctuation time set in accordance with the result of the lottery of each special symbol is set so as to be variable depending on the number of reserved memories (number of reserved symbols) at the time of the special symbol lottery. This is because it is difficult to determine in advance the timing at which the fluctuation (lottery) of the game starts.

  If it is determined that the result of the determination in the process of S1823 is a jackpot (a jackpot only in the low-probability state, a jackpot only in the high-probability state, a jackpot in any of the low-probability state and the high-probability state) (S1823: Yes), A first winning command indicating a winning condition (a gaming state set at the time of a lottery) and a jackpot type in the case of winning is set (S1824), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is out of the high probability state or the low probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the out is set. (S1825), this process ends.

  Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 includes common information as information in addition to the information for indicating the above-described determination result of the above-mentioned result (information giving a different meaning based on the determination result of the success or failure). The information is also set to include information for indicating the values of the various counter values read by the processing of S1821. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 54).

  When receiving the winning command, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the display mode of the holding ball based on various information included in the winning command (for example, changing the color of the holding ball to a color different from the normal color). An effect (pre-reading effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a notice symbol or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of the determination to the player can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the pre-reading process is executed, the result of the determination is determined by determining whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state and the result of the determination in the low probability state of the special symbol. Is configured to set the winning command based on the determination value. For example, the determination value (for example, whether the special symbol is in the high probability state or the low probability state is determined to be the big hit, (A value of the first random number counter C1), and a winning command indicating a special symbol big hit may be set only when the determination value is read.

  With such a configuration, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the sound lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that the jackpot is a specific jackpot. It is possible to give a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot to the fluctuation.

  Further, the game state at the time of performing a special symbol lottery based on the hold memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the game state. You may be comprised so that execution / non-permission judgment may be performed. In this case, the selection of the variation pattern is not made variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a fixed variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. When performing the pre-reading, the game state at the start of the change can be determined by determining the order of the change until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored and stored.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, a prefetching process based on the winning information is executed. In the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a is not limited to this. Information indicating the contents (each counter value) of the (pending storage) is set as a winning command, and the result of the hit determination is predicted based on the information included in the winning command received by the voice lamp control device 113 side. good.

  With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, and when it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is determined. It is preferable to configure so as to analyze (predict the result of determination of success or failure). As a result, when the pre-reading effect is not performed, a specific pre-reading process (prediction of the result of determination of success / failure) is not performed, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of useless control in the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the result of the prefetching process executed untitled is illegally obtained by the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, a description will be given of the second prefetching process (S1764), which is one of the startup winning processes 4 (S152 of FIG. 134). FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the second prefetching process (S1764). The second prefetching process (S1764 in FIG. 134) is based on the fact that the first prefetching process (S1775 in FIG. 133) enters a ball (starting prize) in the first starting port (special figure entrance port 64). The processing is to determine (read ahead) the pending data (prize information) in advance and perform various determinations. On the other hand, the target to be determined is determined to be the second start from the prize information based on the fact that the first start port has won the prize. Only the point is changed to the winning information based on the start winning at the mouth (the second ball entrance 1645), and the other processes are the same, so that the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, details of the V passage processing 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V passage processing 4 (S153). In the V passing process 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment, a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol in the V passing process (see S153 in FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. When a V prize occurs during a game, a process of setting the time-saving end standby flag 203dm and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to off is added. Since other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the V passing process 4 (S153), first, the processes of S1501 to S1502 described above are executed, and when it is determined that the V validity period is in progress (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether a small hit is occurring (S1571). ). If it is determined that the small hit is occurring (S1571: Yes), the above-described processes of S1504 to S1506 are executed, and the flow shifts to the process of S1572. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit is not occurring (S1571: No), the processing of S1504 to S1506 and S1572 to S1575 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S1509.

  In the processing of S1572, it is determined whether or not the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is on (S1572). If it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is ON (S1572: Yes), a new time-saving state period is set after the end of the jackpot game awarded from the V winning, so the time-saving end standby flag is set. 203dm is turned off (S1573). As described above, when a small hit is won in the final fluctuation of the time saving game and a V prize is generated and a big hit is given, a new time saving period is given. Therefore, when a V prize is won, it is possible to prevent a problem that the game is immediately shifted to the normal game state after a new time-saving period is set by setting the time-saving end standby flag 203dm to off.

  After executing the processing of S1572 or S1573, the flow shifts to the processing of S1574. In the process of S1574, it is determined whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574). That is, it is determined whether the first special symbol has been changed in parallel with the current change of the second special symbol, and the change of the first special symbol has not been stopped yet but has been temporarily stopped. . When it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S1575), and the process shifts to S1509. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S1574: Yes), the process of S1575 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, when the lottery of the first special symbol is being executed at the time of winning the small hit, the change of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped after the small hit game is finished is configured to resume the change, but in the present embodiment, there is a case where a V prize is won during the small hit game and a big hit is awarded. The lottery of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped during the jackpot game. Then, the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped after the end of the jackpot game is resumed. However, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining time reductions is subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped. However, there is a problem that the number is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the V prize occurs during the small hit, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF, so that the time reduction period is not reduced when the temporarily stopped fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, in addition to the period in which the time reduction is specified, the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped symbol can be set as the time reduction period for the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to set a longer time reduction period that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to provide joy for a longer period.

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the other special symbol, the variation of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) outside the fluctuation. In addition, when a small win is won, the change of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the small win is won, the change of the other special symbol is changed. May be configured to be discarded. With this configuration, after a jackpot game is awarded due to a V prize, it is possible to prevent the player from winning a jackpot due to the temporarily stopped fluctuation and giving an excessive privilege to the player.

  In addition, when one of the special symbols wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, the other special symbol wins a small jackpot, whereby the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation can be discarded. Therefore, more various game characteristics can be provided to the player.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine is such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed in parallel, and when the small hit is won, the other symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, if a V prize occurs during the small hit game and a big hit is awarded, the symbol temporarily stopped after the end of the big hit game resumes the change. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the time reduction state at the start of the fluctuation, the flag indicating that the value of the time reduction counter is to be subtracted at the start of the fluctuation is set to ON, and the fluctuation is set. When stopped, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is updated.

  Therefore, by setting the subtraction flag to OFF when the V winning occurs, the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is restarted. When the fluctuation is stopped, the time reduction counter is not decremented. That is, when the symbol that has been temporarily stopped resumes fluctuation and stops, the shortened time period is not updated. Therefore, in addition to the previously set short time period, the player is required to save the temporarily stopped special symbol. A fluctuation period can also be set. Therefore, it is possible to set the time shortening period that is advantageous to the player as long as possible.

  In the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot to be awarded by the V prize is set to one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of jackpots may be provided. In such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that is advantageous for the player and a jackpot type that is disadvantageous for the player. With this configuration, the player can execute the game while not only determining whether or not the V prize is generated but also being interested in the type of the jackpot to be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that one small hit type is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of small hit types may be provided. Further, the lottery of the first special symbol may be configured to win the small hit. By providing a plurality of small hit types in this manner, a player can execute a game while expecting a small hit that is more likely to generate a V winning.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be changed in parallel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executed (so-called winning order change). In addition, when comprised in this way, it is good to comprise so that the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol may differ in the degree of advantage of the big hit type to be won. With such a configuration, the player can execute the game while desiring to win the jackpot when the lottery of the special figure that is more advantageous is being performed, so that the player is nervous. Games can be offered.

  In the present embodiment, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped when a small hit is won. However, by providing a plurality of small hit types, the first special symbol is provided. The small hit which discards the fluctuation of the symbol (forcibly stops due to the deviation) and the small hit which is temporarily stopped may be set separately. In the case of such a configuration, when a change in the other special symbol wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous for the player, it is good to execute an effect that prompts the player to discard it. . With such a configuration, various game properties can be provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, two types of game states are set (normal state, time reduction state), but three types (normal state, time reduction state, probability change state) may be set, or four types (normal state, time reduction state, (Probable change state, latent state). Also, two or less types may be used.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game is executed so that the game ball flows down the left area of the game board 13 irrespective of the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the right area of the game board 13 is not limited to this. May be executed. Then, the switching of the game method may be set based on the game state. Further, in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to execute a guidance display mode for indicating a current game method to a player. By this guide display mode, the player can grasp not only the game method but also the current game state.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the update timing of the time saving state, that is, the timing of subtracting the number of times of saving time, and the timing of determining whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied are made different. As a configuration, after the time-saving state is updated, a configuration for determining whether the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied is used.However, without being limited to this, for example, it is first determined whether the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied. It is also possible to configure so as to execute the time-saving state update process when the determination is made and the termination condition is not satisfied. In addition, although the process of subtracting the number of time savings is performed after the special figure lottery is executed, the special figure lottery may be executed after the number of time savings is subtracted.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, even when the small symbol is won in the special symbol final change in the time saving state (the special symbol change executed in a state where the time saving end condition is satisfied), the special symbol change is performed. Is configured to end the time saving state at the timing when the stop display is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a small hit is won in the special symbol final fluctuation, the time saving until the small hitting game ends. The configuration may be such that the state does not end. That is, in the state where the time saving end condition is satisfied, at the timing of determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, if the switching condition (the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win), the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is preferable to switch the timing for determining the establishment (delay at the end of the small hit game). This allows the duration of the time reduction state to be varied based on the result of the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state, thereby allowing the player to play the game with a sense of expectation until the end. .

  It should be noted that other than the above-described contents (small winning) may be used as the above-described switching condition. For example, in a state where the time-saving end condition is satisfied, at the timing of determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the normal symbol fluctuation The execution condition or the fact that the game per game is being executed may be set as the switching condition, and at the timing of determining the establishment of the time reduction end condition, the special symbol reservation or the ordinary symbol stored and stored. The fact that the winning information included in the hold includes specific information (winning information) may be set as the switching condition. By providing a plurality of switching conditions in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Combination modification of the Puden winning device 640>
Next, a modified example will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, a special power operation port 643 is provided in the general power winning apparatus 640, and when a ball that has won the general power prize apparatus 640 during the per-game drawing wins in the special power operation port 643, an accessory is provided. Configure to run a hit game. Further, in the second embodiment described above, in order to solve the problem that can occur in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, that is, the problem that the game motivation is reduced due to the monotonization of the game during the time reduction state, A plurality of special power operation ports (special power operation port 643, second special power operation port 1643) are provided in the general power winning device 640, and according to the special power operation port where the ball has won, a V jackpot game is easily executed. It was configured to be able to execute a game and a bonus hit game in which the V jackpot game is difficult to be executed.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (the process of subtracting the change time of the special symbol change is interrupted) when the execution of the bonus game is executed. However, since the period of the time reduction state is configured to be longer, it is advantageous for the player to execute a lot of games per character during the time reduction state, and the game during the time reduction state becomes monotonous. Was. On the other hand, in the above-described third embodiment, the V jackpot type is configured to be selected based on the fact that the ball has won the special power operation port 643, and the bonus hit type is determined according to the selected V jackpot type. Any one of a pattern for interrupting a special symbol change being executed at the time of playing a game, a pattern for discarding, and a pattern for discarding and also terminating the time saving state is executed, and in the time saving state, By providing a new playability that allows a player to select whether or not to execute a winning game, the game during the time reduction state is prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In addition, in the above-described first to third embodiments, the special power prize device 640 is provided with the special power operation port 643, and when a ball wins in the special power operability port 643, a game per accessory is executed. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, a second entrance 1645 serving as a trigger for executing the second special symbol lottery is provided in the general winning award device 640, and the first embodiment to the third embodiment described above are different from the first embodiment. The same playability is configured to be realized by a so-called simultaneous fluctuation type specification in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed in parallel.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, as shown in FIG. 138, based on the configuration of the general winning award device 640 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 88), the second special power operating port is used. A second ball entrance 1645 is provided in place of the 1643 so that a ball won in the general winning device 640 can enter the special power operation port 643 or the second ball entrance 1645. Is different from the other embodiments.

  Then, a small hitting game executed when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1645, and a ball wins in the special power operation port 643. The V winning device 65 is configured to be opened with the same content in the bonus game executed based on this.

  With such a configuration, when the V winning device 65 is opened by the small hitting game, the second special symbol lottery is executed, so that the end condition of the time saving state is the same as in the above-described fourth embodiment. In contrast, when the V winning device 65 is opened for the bonus per game, the element relating to the time saving end condition is not updated. Therefore, the number of times the V winning device 65 has been opened and the number of times that the element that satisfies the time saving end condition is updated no longer match, so that the player is made aware of the period until the time saving state ends. Can be difficult.

  In this modification, an example in which the same end condition as that of the above-described fourth embodiment is set as the end condition of the time saving state is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The time saving termination condition may be satisfied even when the number of times reached reaches a specific number (for example, 50 times). With this configuration, it is determined whether the time reduction termination condition is satisfied first based on the lottery of the second special symbol, or whether the time reduction termination condition is satisfied based on the execution of the bonus per game. Can be played while the player is predicted.

  In this case, as an effect performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, based on the time saving end condition that is established based on the lottery of the second special symbol and the execution of the per-accessory game. A suggestion effect for suggesting to the player which of the time reduction end conditions to be satisfied is a situation in which the time reduction end condition is likely to be satisfied (for example, an effect indicating the number of times until each time reduction end condition is satisfied). It is good to be constituted to perform. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to know the period until any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied, so that it is possible to make the player feel excited about the flow destination of the ball that has won the general winning award device 640.

  As shown in FIG. 138, in the present modification, the special power operation port 643 and the second ball entry port 1645 are provided in the general power winning device 640, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second special power operation port 1643 is also provided. A configuration may be adopted in which the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 wins any one of the above-described three.

  Further, in the case of using the configuration of the present modified example, the small hit game is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1645, and the ball wins in the special power operation port 643. The process for the special symbol change during execution may be different from the case where the per-accessory game is executed on the basis of, for example, when the small hit game is executed, the per-accessory game is executed. It is easier to discard the running special symbol fluctuation than in the case, and to make it easier to interrupt the running special symbol fluctuation when the small hitting game is executed than when the small hitting game is executed. It is good to configure.

  In this modification, a ball may be won to the special power operation port 643 in a state where the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are being executed. In this case, both the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation are interrupted. Then, after the bonus game per end, the suspended first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are restarted. If the second special symbol change after the resumption is a small hit, if the small hit game is executed based on the small hit, the running first special symbol change is interrupted, or , It is configured to be discarded.

  As described above, the first special symbol change (lottery), the second special symbol change (lottery), the ball prize in the special power operation port 643, and three types of games can be simultaneously executed. It is possible to interrupt the first special symbol change in which the change time longer than the second special symbol change is easily selected in a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game about the timing and the period during which the first special symbol change is interrupted during the time saving state.

  Further, in the present modification, the ball winning in the general winning award device 640 is configured to be able to win in the special power operation port 643 or the second ball opening port 1645, but is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the configuration of the game board 13 may be changed so that the player can play the game aiming at the second ball entrance 1645 or the special power operation port 643. Specifically, the special power activation device 640 includes a special power activation device. An opening 643 may be provided, and a second entrance 1645 may be provided in the right area (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of selecting a game method.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 143. The fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a method of setting various commands for outputting the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is described. The difference is that they are different and that a part of the control processing executed when the voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 has been changed. is there. The same control contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment described above, the production mode of the effect (V rush) according to the special symbol change in the time reduction state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is changed to the remaining period of the time reduction state (the time reduction). In order to variably set according to the special symbol change executed during the state), the sound lamp control device is set based on information (state command) output from the main control device 110 when the time saving state is set. The period until the time saving state ends on the 113 side, that is, the number of time savings (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates) set as the end condition of the time saving state is stored, and information (the fluctuation pattern command) indicating the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol is stored. When received, by executing a process of updating the number of times saved, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the remaining period of the time saved state.

  With such a configuration, the first embodiment in which the timing of updating the number of times saved (at the start of the special symbol change) and the timing of determining whether the time saving condition is satisfied (at the time of stopping the special symbol change) are different. In the above, without setting a dedicated command on the main control device 110 side, that is, a special symbol lottery such as a status command to be set when the game status is changed or a variation pattern command to be set when the variation of the special symbol is started. By using only the command indicating the content of the game using, the remaining period of the time reduction state can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the effect according to the lapse of the period during the time reduction state can be set. Was something.

  However, in the control contents used in the above-described first embodiment, the update state of the gaming state in the time saving state is managed (temporarily stored) in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 having no backup function. Therefore, for example, when the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during a period in which the time saving state is set (a power failure occurs), and then the power supply is restarted, the audio lamp control device Various kinds of information temporarily stored in the RAM 223 on the 113 side are cleared (initialized), and there is a problem that the voice lamp control device 113 cannot determine the update state of the gaming state in the time saving state. .

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the main control device 110 executes the process of starting the special symbol variation (the process of setting the variation pattern command), the command indicating the update result of the number of time savings (the time saving command is executed). ) Can be set, and a command (time saving continuation command) for indicating the end determination result of the time saving state is set when executing the process of stopping the special symbol change during execution (the process of setting the fixed command). It is configured as follows.

  Then, the variation pattern command and the number of times saved command are configured to be output at the same timing, and the fixed command and the time saving continuation command are configured to be output at the same timing. Further, when the fluctuation pattern command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, it is determined whether or not a time saving command is also received, and the current time saving situation can be determined based on the determination result. When a command is received, it is determined whether or not a time saving continuation command is received, and the current time saving status can be determined based on the determination result.

  With this configuration, the status of the time saving state can be determined on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 by the combination of the commands set by the main control device 110 and received by the sound lamp control device 113. Even when a power failure occurs during the symbol change display, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the status of the time saving state based on the command output from the main control device 110.

  In addition, since the configuration is such that the status of the time saving state is determined based on the combination of the commands received at the same timing, the main control device 110 side sets each command to indicate the status of the time saving state. Also, the types of commands set in main controller 110 can be reduced, and the processing load of control processing in main controller 110 can be reduced.

<About the control processing contents of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141, of the control processing contents of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, points different from the above-described first embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, a special symbol start process 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) is replaced with a special symbol start process (see S235 in FIG. 139) in place of the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41). The special symbol variation stop process 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) is replaced with the normal symbol variation process 5 (see S106 in FIG. 48) instead of the process (see S208 in FIG. 45). (See FIG. 2), and otherwise the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the time reduction state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the number of times of reduction (the value of the time reduction counter 203h) is set. ) Is executed (see S205 in FIG. 139) to determine whether the condition for terminating the time-saving state is satisfied when stopping the change of the special symbol (FIG. 45). (See S208).

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, in order to manage the status of the time saving state on the sound lamp control device 113 side, the status command output from the main control device 110 (the status command set in the process of S1916 in FIG. 56). ) And a fluctuation pattern command (the special figure fluctuation pattern command set in S506 of FIG. 43).

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the special symbol starts to change or when the special symbol stops changing, in addition to the commands indicating the start and stop of the special symbol change, the state of the time reduction state (remaining time reduction) ) Is set, and the information for managing the state of the time saving state stored on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 is deleted (for example, the sound lamp control device due to a power failure or the like). Even if the information stored in the RAM 223 of the CPU 113 is erased), the status of the time reduction state (the number of remaining working hours) on the sound lamp control device 113 side based on various commands output from the main control device 110 side. Is configured to be able to be grasped.

  First, the contents of the special symbol change start process 5 (S235) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol change start process 5 (S235). In the special symbol change start process 5 (S235), a process for updating the time reduction state at the start of the special symbol change is different from the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the above-described first embodiment. Are different, and the others are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the above-described first embodiment, information indicating the processing content (update result) of the processing for updating the time saving state executed by the main control device 110 is output to the sound lamp control device 113. Since there is no need to perform this process, a process (time saving) for temporarily storing whether or not the current special symbol variation is the final variation in the time saving state (until the special symbol variation executed this time is stopped and displayed) is performed. The processing of updating the value of the counter 203h and the processing of setting the time reduction end flag 203j) are executed.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a command for indicating the number of times of special symbols (remaining number of times reduced) is set and output to the audio lamp control device 113.

  The processing content of the special symbol change start process 5 (S235) will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 139. First, the same as the special symbol change start process of the first embodiment (see S205 of FIG. 41). The processing from S301 to S308 is executed. If the value of the time-saving counter 203h is larger than 0 in the process of S308, that is, if it is determined that the current time is in the time-saving state (S308: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted (S371). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S372).

  If it is determined in the process of S372 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (is 1 or more), the value of the time-saving counter 203h after subtraction, that is, a time-saving number command indicating the remaining number of working hours is set (S373). Then, the present process ends. The time reduction command set in the process of S373 is executed by the main control at the same timing as the special figure variation pattern command (see S506 in FIG. 43) set in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43). An external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the device 110 (see FIG. 55) is output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the fifth embodiment, in the control processing of the sound ramp control device 113, a time-saving number command is also issued when a fluctuation pattern command (a special figure fluctuation pattern command) is received during the time-saving state. It is configured to determine whether or not it is received, and to determine the number of time savings (remaining time savings) corresponding to the current special symbol change based on the determination result.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S372 in FIG. 139, if the value of the time saving counter 203h after the update (after the subtraction) is determined to be 1 or more (S372: No), the command of the number of times In the control processing of the sound ramp control device 113, when the variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern command) is received during the time reduction state, the time reduction command is not received in addition to the variation time command. Can be determined to be the final fluctuation of the special symbol in the time saving state.

  Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. In the process of S372, when it is determined that the value of the updated time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S372: Yes), that is, when the special symbol variation executed this time is the final variation of the time-saving state, the above-described process is performed. As in the first embodiment, the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311), and the process ends.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, in addition to the case where the value of the time-saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (more than 1), even if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0, the time-saving end flag is set. As long as 203j is set to ON, a normal symbol high probability state is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139, when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 at the special symbol change start timing (S308: Yes), the process of always subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203h is executed. Control processing can be shared.

  Further, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction (after the update) is larger than 0 (1 or more), the command for the number of time savings is set, and after the subtraction (after the update). When the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0, the time reduction number command is not set. In addition, the time reduction command is set in the same process (special symbol variation start process) as the process of setting the special symbol variation pattern command (special symbol variation pattern command) (see S506 in FIG. 43). In the external output process (S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (refer to FIG. 55) of the main controller 110, the main controller 110 is configured to output to the sound lamp controller 113 at the same timing. .

  With such a configuration, when the variation pattern command is received in a state where the time saving state is set, the voice lamp control device 113 also determines whether or not a time saving number command has been received. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the special symbol change executed this time is the final change in the time saving state. In addition, when the time reduction command is received, it is possible to determine the remaining time (remaining time reduction) of the time reduction state updated by executing the special symbol change this time.

  Further, when the value of the updated time saving counter 203h becomes 0, that is, when the special symbol variation executed this time is the final variation in the time saving state, the configuration is such that the number of time savings commands is not set. If the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command in a state where the time reduction state is set and also does not receive the time reduction number command, it determines that it is the final fluctuation of the time reduction state. Thus, an effect mode corresponding to the final fluctuation of the time saving state is set. As described above, when the final variation of the special symbol in the time reduction state (the final variation of the time reduction) is executed, the time reduction number command is not set as the time reduction number command instead of setting the time reduction number command indicating 0 remaining time reduction times. With this configuration, when the command for the number of time savings set by the main control device 110 cannot be received, for example, when the command cannot be received normally due to noise or the like, the time saving final change Will be performed.

  Therefore, without using the special effect data when the command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 cannot be normally received, and less than the actually set remaining working hours. Since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of remaining working hours of 0, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort while reducing the processing load of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, as a time-saving ending condition for ending the time-saving state, the time-saving ending that is satisfied when the number of times of the change of the special symbol executed during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, four times). Although only the condition is provided, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the end condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol is changed, the end condition that is established based on the result of the special symbol lottery (specified by the special symbol lottery An end condition that is established when a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) is won for the lottery result (for example, a small hit) of (i).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of end conditions for terminating the time saving state, which of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied varies depending on the game content of the player. It is necessary to determine the update status until the end condition is satisfied with respect to the end condition. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the final change of the time saving state is executed, the time saving number command is not set. Therefore, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions that can be satisfied, even if any of the time-saving termination conditions are satisfied, it is easy for the voice lamp control device 113 to determine that the current special symbol variation is the final variation of the time-saving state. Can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of the special symbol change stop processing 5 (S238) will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol change stop processing 5 (S238) in the fifth embodiment. This special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) differs from the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment in the content of updating the time saving state when the special symbol variation is stopped. And the other points are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special symbol variation stop process 5 (S238) is executed, first, the same processes of S801 and S802 as the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 of FIG. 45) in the first embodiment are executed, and the process of S802 is executed. If it is determined in the processing that the time reduction end flag 203j is not on (S802: No), it is next determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S871). Is large, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol change stopped and displayed this time is not the final change in the time reduction (S871: Yes), a time reduction continuation command indicating that the time reduction state is continued is set (S872), and the above-described operation is performed. The same processing of S809 and S810 as the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 of FIG. 45) in the first embodiment is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S871, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not larger than 0 (S871: No), that is, if the current gaming state is the normal state, the processing of S872 is skipped and S809 is performed. Move to the processing of. Also, in the processing of S802, when it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol variation stopped and displayed this time is the final variation of the time saving (S802: Yes), The same processing as S804 and S805 is executed as in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above, and then the processing in S809 and S810 is executed, followed by terminating the present processing.

  In the processing of S801, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), the processing of S806 to S810 is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the special figure change command is set in the special design change stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) for stopping and displaying (fixing display) the special pattern change. At the same time, it is configured to set a time saving continuation command. Then, the special figure confirmation command and the time saving continuation command set in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) are output to the external output executed in the main processing of the main controller 110 (FIG. 55). In the process (refer to S1801 in FIG. 55), it is output to the sound lamp control device 113 at the same timing. When receiving the special figure determination command in a state where the time saving state is set, the sound ramp control device 113 determines whether a time saving continuation command has been received, and based on the determination result, the current stop display is performed. It is determined whether the special symbol variation is the final variation in the time reduction state (the final variation in the time reduction), and the effect form is set.

  More specifically, if the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure confirmation command and the time saving continuation command at the same timing in a state where the time saving state is set, it indicates that the time saving state is continued. In the case where only a special figure confirmation command is received, an effect mode for indicating that the time saving state is ended is set. In this way, by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 to be able to grasp the current status of the time saving state by combining a plurality of commands output from the main control device 110 at the same timing, the main control device 110 The types of commands set by main controller 110 can be reduced as compared with the case where individual commands are set to indicate the status of the time saving state.

  In the present embodiment, a special figure determination command and a time saving continuation command are set in the special symbol change stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140). Any command may be output at the same timing in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the process (FIG. 55), and the main process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). , A special figure determination command and a time saving continuation command can be set within an interval of 4 milliseconds at which the external output processing (S1801) is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 is executed, since the previous external output process is executed, Although various commands set during the interval (4 milliseconds) are configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 at one time (to be output as serial data), the present invention is not limited to this. When the special figure determination command is set, the output of the special figure determination command may be waited until the external output process (see S1801) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). With this configuration, it is possible to output the special figure determination command and the time saving continuation command to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing without setting them in the same process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the contents of the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S136) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S136). This normal symbol change process 5 (S136) determines whether or not the current gaming state is a normal symbol high-probability state with respect to the above-described normal symbol change process (S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment. Are different from each other in that the processing is changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the fifth embodiment, the state in which the value of the time-saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (the state in which the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more) and the state in which the time-saving end flag 203j is set to ON are ordinary symbols. It is configured to be managed as information indicating the high probability state, and only the state where the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (the state where the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more) indicates the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. This is different from the first embodiment that is managed as information.

  That is, unlike the first embodiment in which the process of subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203h is skipped when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1, in the fifth embodiment, the special symbol change start process 5 (see FIG. In S235 of 139), the processing for updating the time-saving counter 203h is simplified by configuring the time-saving counter 203h to be decremented until the value becomes 0, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is reduced to 0. However, the difference is that the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON to continue the high probability state of the ordinary symbol until the special symbol change is stopped and displayed. .

  Therefore, when the normal symbol variation process 5 (S136 in FIG. 141) is executed, first, the processes of S1101 to S1108, which are the same as the above-described ordinary symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see S106 in FIG. 48), are executed. If it is determined in the processing of S1108 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S1108: No), the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, that is, the time saving final time of the special symbol It is determined whether or not it is fluctuating (S1171), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1171: Yes), it is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, so the normal symbol variation of the first embodiment described above. The process in S1109, which is the same as the process (see S106 in FIG. 48), is executed, then the processes in S1111 to S1114 are executed, and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1171 that the time-saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1171: No), the current state is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (normal state), and thus the first embodiment described above is performed. The same processing as S1110 to S1114 in the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1102, when it is determined that the normal symbol is changing (S1102: Yes), the process of S1115 to S1118 is the same as the normal symbol change process of the first embodiment (see S106 of FIG. 48). The process is executed, and in the process of S1118, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (1 or more) (S1118: Yes), a scenario operation per time reduction general time is set (S1120). Then, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set (S1121), and this processing ends.

  In the processing of S1118, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S1118: No), it is next determined whether or not the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON ( If it is determined that it is set to ON (S1172) (S1172: Yes), since the current state is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol variation process of the first embodiment described above (see S106 of FIG. 48). ), The same processes in S1120 and S1121 are executed, and this process ends. In the process of S1172, when it is determined that the time-saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1172: No), the current state is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and thus the ordinary symbol of the first embodiment described above is used. The same processing of S1119 and S1121 as the fluctuation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) is executed, and this processing ends.

  That is, in the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the length of the period (dynamic display period) for stopping and displaying the lottery results of the ordinary symbols (the length of the dynamic display period), Alternatively, the contents (opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a) of the game per ordinary symbol executed when a winning is achieved in the ordinary symbol lottery (regular symbol lottery) are set to be different depending on the probability state of the ordinary symbol. In order to determine the probability state of a normal symbol, the setting of the time reduction end flag 203j is referred to in addition to the value of the time reduction counter 203h. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately determine the probability state of the ordinary symbol.

<Regarding the control processing of the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143, a control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is the control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. For the processing, the special figure change start processing 5 (see S4254 in FIG. 142) is replaced by the special figure change start processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62), and the stop-related processing is replaced by the stop-related processing (see S4215 in FIG. 65). Processing 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143) is different in that it is executed, and the other steps are the same. A detailed description of the same processing content is omitted.

  In the fifth embodiment, the types of commands output from the main control device 110 are added to the first embodiment described above, and the time reduction state based on various commands output from the main control device 110 is added. It is configured so that the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the middle situation (remaining working times). With such a configuration, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the time reduction state, and the data temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is erased. Even in such a case, after the power supply is restored, it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the actual situation of the time saving state (the number of remaining working hours).

  First, the contents of the special figure change start process 5 (S4254) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure change start process 5 (S4254). The special figure change start processing 5 (S4254) is a processing executed when a special figure change pattern command is received in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 61), and is a processing of the first embodiment described above. It differs from the diagram change start process (see S4204 in FIG. 62) in that the content of the process during the time saving state is changed, and is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special figure change start processing 5 (S4254) is executed, the same processing as S4301 to S4305, which is the same as the special figure change start processing of the first embodiment (see S4204 in FIG. 62), is executed, and this processing ends. I do. In the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state, that is, if a special figure variation pattern command is received while the time saving state is set (S4304: Yes), the current reception is performed. It is determined whether or not the received command includes a command for reducing the number of times (S4351).

  In the present embodiment, in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of main controller 110, audio ramp control is performed using serial data capable of storing a plurality of commands. It is configured to output a command to the device 113. Therefore, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) executed by the main control device 110, when the special symbol variation pattern command and the time reduction command are set within the same process. In the same serial data, at least the special figure variation pattern command and the time reduction command are stored and output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S4351, it is determined whether or not the command received this time includes a time saving command, that is, whether the serial data in which the special figure variation pattern command is stored includes the time saving command (S4351). When it is determined that the number-of-times command is included (S4351: Yes), the time saving state is set, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command received this time is the final variation of the time reduction state. Since this is not (time saving final change), a display command for indicating that the vehicle is in the time saving state is set (S4306), and the special figure change start process of the first embodiment described above (see S4204 in FIG. 62). ) Are executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4351 that the received command does not include the command for reducing the number of time savings (S4351: No), the special symbol change corresponding to the current special figure change pattern command is the time change final change. A display command indicating the final change is set (S4352), and after the process proceeds to the above-described process of S4307, the process of S4308 is executed, and this process ends.

  With this configuration, when the special figure variation pattern command is received during the time reduction state, the type of the command received at the same time as the received special figure variation pattern command is determined, so that the state of the time reduction state (remaining time reduction) The number of times can be easily determined on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  Next, the content of the stop-related process 5 (S4265) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating the content of the stop-related process 5 (S4265). This stop-related processing 5 (S4265) is different from the stop-related processing of the first embodiment described above (see S4215 in FIG. 65) in that the processing executed when a special figure determination command is received is changed. Are different. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the stop-related process 5 (S4265) is executed, first, it is determined whether a special figure fixing command has been received (S4601). If it is determined that the special figure fixing command has not been received (S4601: No), The same processes from S4602 to S4611 as the stop-related process of the first embodiment (see S4215 in FIG. 65) are executed, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the special figure confirmation command has been received (S4601: Yes), it is next determined whether a time saving continuation command has been received (S4631), and it is determined that the time saving continuation command has been received. If this has been done (S4631: Yes), a display command for fluctuation stop indicating continuation of working hours is set (S4632), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4602.

  In the processing of S4631, if it is determined that the time-saving continuation command has not been received, then it is determined whether a time-saving ending command has been received (S4633), and if it has been determined that a time-saving ending command has been received (S4633: yes). ), A display command for fluctuation stop indicating the end of the time saving state is set.

  As described above, when the special figure determination command is received, the time saving continuation command or the time saving ending command is configured to be able to be received at the same time. Therefore, the stop-related processing 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143) is executed. The display mode (effect mode) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 depends on whether a time saving continuation command is received, a time saving end command is received, or no command is received. It can be set to be variable. Therefore, a process for setting a display mode for fluctuation stop executed when a special figure determination command is received, a process for setting a display mode for indicating the status of the time reduction state (remaining time reduction), Can be executed in the same process, and the processing load of the control process can be reduced.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 155. In the above-described first embodiment, a game per an accessory is triggered by a game per a general figure executed when a win is made by a lottery of a normal symbol. While aiming for a ball to enter the special power operation port 643 provided), during the game per play (within the period during which the V winning device 65 is opened), the player goes to the V winning port 165 provided in the V winning device 65. And the ball is won, so that the player can execute a game (special electric game) aiming to execute a jackpot game (V jackpot game).

  Then, the time saving state in which the special electric game is executed is reached until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (four times or fifteen times) (until the special symbol change of the predetermined number is stopped and displayed) or reaches the predetermined number of times. Until the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot (the special symbol for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit is stopped and displayed), and the special symbol is changed during the time saving state The longer the time, the longer the period in which the time reduction state is set (the time reduction period) can be increased, and the number of ordinary symbol lotteries executed during the time reduction period can be increased.

  Further, if the game per bonus is executed in response to a ball winning to the special power operation port 643 during the normal per game, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (the fluctuation time of the special symbol change is subtracted). The process for interrupting the special symbol change (the process for subtracting the change time of the special symbol change) is performed after the end of the per-proxy game or the jackpot game ( After the end of the “V big hit game”, that is, when a condition for executing a new special symbol change is satisfied, the game is restarted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the length of the execution period (time saving period) of the special electric game is variable depending on the fluctuation time of the special symbol change and the interruption period of the special per game, so that the special electric game is performed. It was possible to make the middle player wish to select as long a fluctuation time as possible as a special symbol fluctuation, and to perform the game enthusiastically so as to execute many games per character. .

  However, during the special electric game, for example, during a period in which a normal symbol fluctuates, or during a game per ordinary figure, a ball cannot be awarded to the universal electric prize winning device 640 (it is difficult to win) (the electric auditors' role 640a). The closing period) is a period in which the game per role cannot be executed and the variation time of the special symbol variation is subtracted, so that the ball can be awarded to the electric accessory 640a. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a during the hitting game, that is, the period in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol change is subtracted, but the disadvantageous period that is more disadvantageous to the player than the period in which the game per hit can be executed. Becomes

  In addition, the special-game fluctuation in which the special symbol change is interrupted is an end condition (winning end condition) that is satisfied when the number of winning balls in the V winning device 65 reaches a predetermined number (three), or The end condition (time end condition) that is satisfied when a predetermined period (1.6 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the hit game is configured to end when any one of the end conditions is satisfied. In addition, according to the content of the game (whether the ball is fired) by the player during the per-accessory game, the per-accessory game ends when any one of the end conditions is satisfied.

  In other words, in the first embodiment described above, in consideration of the fluctuation state of the ordinary symbols during the special electric game and the game state of the per-regular game, it is determined which one of the termination conditions is satisfied for the currently-per-accessible per-game. It had a game to select. With such a configuration, the disadvantageous period during the above-described special electric game (the period in which the ordinary symbol is fluctuated, the period in which the electric accessory 640a is closed for the game per ordinary figure), and the execution period of the game per accessory are determined according to the skill of the player. Can be varied, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

  However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment, since a plurality of ending conditions are set, for example, even if the player plays a game to satisfy the prize ending condition, the V prize device 65 Although the ball does not win as expected and the time end condition is satisfied, or even though the player plays a game to satisfy the time end condition, the ball previously fired is transferred to the V winning device 65. A prize may be won and the prize ending condition may be satisfied, so that there is a problem that the ending condition desired by the player cannot be satisfied.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the player is able to select either the prize winning condition or the time ending condition as the condition for ending the game per role. In other words, when the prize ending condition is selected, the time ending condition is not satisfied even if a period in which the time ending condition can be satisfied has elapsed. Is configured such that the prize ending condition is not satisfied even when the number of prizes reaches the number at which the prize ending condition can be satisfied. With this configuration, when the termination condition desired by the player is satisfied, the game per accessory can be terminated, so that the player can more positively perform the game during the special electric game. .

  In the sixth embodiment, when the prize ending condition is selected, if the time ending condition is selected without terminating the game per role based on the elapsed time during the game per role, Although it is configured that the game per role is not terminated based on the number of balls won to the V-prize device 65 during the game per role, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, a forced time end condition or a time end condition that is satisfied when a time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than an elapsed time (for example, 1.6 seconds) set as a normal time end condition has elapsed. When is selected, the compulsory prize ending condition that is established when the number of prizes (for example, 10) is larger than the number of prizes (for example, 3) set as the normal prize ending condition is set. May be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a long-period game per accessory from being executed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 144, a characteristic configuration of the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, operation means (a switching button 22za, a first selection button 22zb, and a second selection button 22zb) that can be operated by a player are different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 2). The difference is that a two-selection button 22zc) is newly provided, and the rest is the same. About the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 144, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a switching button 22za is provided on the right side (right side in front view of FIG. 144) of the return button 43 provided on the ball lending operation unit 40. In addition, a first selection button 22zb and a second selection button 22zc are provided on the right side of the upper plate 17 (the right side when viewed from the front in FIG. 144). The switching button 22za, the first selection button 22zb, and the second selection button 22zc (hereinafter, also referred to as an end condition switching button group 22z) are pressed by a detection switch (not shown) when the player performs a pressing operation. Is output to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 21).

  Specifically, when the switch button 22za is pressed, a switch button detection switch (not shown) detects that the switch button 22za is pressed, and when the first selection button 22zb is pressed, the switch button 22za is pressed. When the detection switch for the first selection button (not shown) detects that the first selection button 22zb is pressed and the second selection button 22zc is pressed, the detection switch for the second selection button (not shown) is turned on. The second selection button 22zc is configured to detect pressing, and each detection switch is configured to output a detection result to the main control device 110.

  That is, the switch detection switch, the first selection button detection switch, and the second selection button detection switch are included in the various switches 208 described above with reference to FIG.

  In the sixth embodiment, the end condition switching button group 22z described above is provided at a distance of about 10 cm from the frame button 22. With such a configuration, in order to make the player interested in various effects performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, an operation effect using the frame button 22 is executed, and the game is executed. When the player operates the frame button 22, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating the end condition switching button group 22z.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has an operation device for effect (frame button 22), an operation device that affects game performance (end condition switching button group 22z), and Is provided, so that the player can arbitrarily select the content in both the production aspect and the game performance aspect. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game.

<Production contents in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 145 and FIG. 146, a description will be given of the characteristic effect content executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, as compared to the first embodiment described above, a selection effect for causing the player to operate the end condition switching button group, and a switching for indicating the operation result of the player with respect to the end condition switching button group. Direction and are configured to be executable.

  First, the display contents of the ending screen in the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the big hit ending screen in the sixth embodiment. The display screen shown in FIG. 145 (a) is different from the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 12 (a)) in the first embodiment described above in that the display mode for prompting the player to operate the switch button 22za is displayed. The difference is in the added points, and the others are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same display contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 145 (a), in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, a character "V rush starts after the end of the big hit!" Is displayed, and the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game. It is shown to the player that the game is shifted to the V rush mode, which indicates that the game is to be performed. Then, in the main display area Dm, the comment “V rush period 40 seconds get” of “40 seconds” is displayed in the remaining time reduction period mode 801 for indicating the period in which the time reduction state set after the end of the jackpot game is continued. Is done. When the display screen of FIG. 145 (a) is displayed, the storage status of the special symbol (see FIG. 145 (c)) is displayed on the display screen of FIG. 12 (a) of the first embodiment described above. This is the same as the special symbol holding storage status (see FIG. 12 (c)) at the time of execution, so that detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, a display area HR20 is formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (the lower left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 145), and the display mode for prompting to operate the switch button 22za is “selection of end condition by button PUSH”. And an icon imitating the switching button 22za are displayed.

  In the sixth embodiment, the player can operate (press) the switching button 22za during the period in which the ending screen of the big hit game is displayed, so that the end condition of the bonus hit game can be selected. . In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when the big hit game is executed, the end condition of the hit game is configured to be selectable, and during the time-saving state (V rush) set after the end of the big hit game, the hitting The game end condition cannot be switched.

  With this configuration, the end condition of the per-accessory game is frequently switched in accordance with the game situation during the V rush, that is, the special symbol fluctuation state and the normal symbol fluctuation state, and the It is possible to suppress providing a gaming situation that is advantageous to the player. In addition, since the game in which the variable prize device 650 wins the ball in the jackpot game ends at the timing before the special electric game is executed, it is possible to select the end condition of the per-accessory game at the timing before the special electric game is executed. Therefore, a game in which a ball is fired and an action of selecting an end condition do not overlap, and a game which is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), it is configured such that the condition for ending the game per accessory can be selected in a state in which the period (40 seconds) of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game is notified. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select the termination condition of the per-accessory game while grasping the remaining short time mode 801 displayed on the big hit ending screen. Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the period of the time reduction state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the remaining time reduction mode 801, the prize ending condition is set as the ending condition of the per-accessory game. By selecting and arbitrarily adjusting the game period of the per-government game, a special time game in which the period during which the special symbol change is interrupted is efficiently set is aimed at. If a display mode indicating that the display mode indicates (for example, 200 seconds) is displayed, the time ending condition is selected, and the number of balls to be awarded to the V prize device 65 in a single game per game is increased by increasing the number of balls. It is possible to aim for a special electric game in which the privilege amount (the number of prize balls) per time is increased.

  In the sixth embodiment, a configuration in which the player can select the termination condition of the per-prize game during the period in which the ending screen of the big hit game is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, At any time during the big hit game, the end condition of the special hit game may be selectable.

  In addition, even when a standby screen (demo screen) which is displayed when the special symbol change is not executed during the time reduction state is displayed, it is possible to select an end condition of the per-accessory game. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a condition for ending a game per accessory can be selected during a period in which the game per accessory is being executed. Even in such a case, it is possible to select the termination condition of the per-accessory game at a timing at which the remaining time (hours reduction period) of the time reduction state is not subtracted. The end condition of the winning game can be selected.

  On the other hand, different from the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the termination condition of the per-accessory game can be selected only during a period in which the remaining time in the time reduction state (time reduction period) is subtracted. With such a configuration, during the special power game in which the remaining time (time reduction period) of the time reduction state is subtracted, the game is performed by concentrating on only the special power game or selecting an end condition of the game per accessory. Can be selected by the player, and the player can play the game while predicting the contents of the game in the future, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When the player presses the switch button 22za while the screen shown in FIG. 145 (a) is displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (b) is displayed. Next, with reference to FIG. 145 (b), the display contents of the selection screen for allowing the player to select the termination condition of the per-prize game will be described. FIG. 145 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed as an end condition selection screen.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the switch button detection switch (not shown) detects that the switch button 22za has been pressed, the detection result is output to the main control device 110. The main controller 110 sets a command (switching command) indicating that the switch button 22za has been pressed, and executes the external output process (see FIG. 55) by executing the set command (switching command). It is configured to output to the audio lamp control device 113 in S1801 in FIG. 55). Then, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the display mode of the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (b) based on the reception of the switching command.

  The display contents of the end condition selection screen for selecting the end condition of the hit per game will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 145 (b). Please select the ending condition. " By visually recognizing the comment, the player can easily understand that the currently displayed screen is a screen for selecting the termination condition of the per-accessory game.

  In the main display area Dm, display areas (HR21, HR22) corresponding to a plurality of end conditions that can be selected by the player are defined, and the contents of the plurality of end conditions (winning end conditions, time end conditions) are defined. (Contents for satisfying the end condition) is displayed. More specifically, the display area HR21 is displayed in association with a prize ending condition as an end condition for a per-game, and the display area HR22 is displayed in association with a time ending condition as an end condition for a per-game. .

  In the display area HR21, a comment "I will end when three balls enter the V attacker" is displayed as a requirement for establishing the prize ending condition, and a "win ending" for indicating the target ending condition is displayed. It is displayed in the display area HR21a. Further, as a guide display mode 871 for guiding a selection button to be operated by the player when selecting a winning end condition, an icon (a circle with a numeral 1) imitating the first selection button 22zb is provided. Is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the display area HR22, as a requirement for satisfying the time end condition, a comment "I will end 1.6 seconds after the start of hitting the accessory" is displayed, and "an end condition for the target" is indicated. "Time end" is displayed in the display area HR22a. Further, as a guide display mode 872 for guiding the selection button to be operated by the player when selecting the time end condition, an icon (a circle with a numeral 2) imitating the second selection button 22zc is provided. Is displayed.

  Further, a display area HR23 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and characters of "time" for indicating the type of the end condition currently set as the end condition of the game per accessory are displayed. Have been. That is, FIG. 145 (b) shows a state in which the time end condition is set as the end condition of the game per accessory. Note that when a winning ending condition is set as the ending condition of the per-prize game, the character “winning” is set in the display area HR23. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment “Please select with a button” as a guidance display mode for guiding an operation to be performed by the player in order to select an end condition of the per-accessory game, An icon indicating that the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated (pressed) is displayed.

  By displaying such a selection screen, it becomes possible for the player to easily select the game while grasping the contents of the end condition of the game per accessory. In the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (b), when a selection screen capable of selecting the termination condition of the bonus hit game is displayed, a period of the time reduction state set after the end of the big hit game (time reduction period). 145 (a), the information suggesting the length (for example, the remaining short time period mode 801 shown in FIG. 145 (a)) is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured so that the remaining short time mode 801 is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to easily select the termination condition of the per-accessory game while referring to the length of the period of the time saving state set immediately after.

  When the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed) while the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)) is displayed, the fact that the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed) is indicated by the first selection button. The detection is detected by the detection switch, and the detection result is output to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. Then, in the control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, processing based on the operation of first selection button 22zb (processing for storing the selected end condition) is performed, and the first processing is performed. A command (operation command) for indicating that the selection button 22zb has been effectively operated is set.

  When an operation command is set in the control process of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device is used in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55). An operation command is output to 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display mode after the end condition is selected based on information (information indicating the type of the operated selection button) included in the received operation command. You. Here, an example of the display screen displayed after the end condition is selected will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed after a winning ending condition is selected as an ending condition of a per-bonus game.

  When the first selection button 22zb corresponding to the winning end condition is operated (pressed) in a state where the end condition selection screen shown in FIG. 145 (b) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 146 (a). A display area corresponding to the selected ending condition (winning ending condition) is formed on the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the word “OK” indicating that the selection of the ending condition is completed is displayed above the main display area Dm. Is done. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance mode for guiding the player to the timing at which the result of the current selection is reflected, a comment “I will finish prize winning from the next character hit” is displayed and displayed. In the area HR23, the characters "winning" indicating that the currently set end condition is the winning end condition are displayed.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the end condition of the game per character can be selected a plurality of times within a period in which the end condition of the game per character can be selected. The end condition selected at the time when a period in which the end condition of the game per object can be selected has elapsed is set as the end condition of the game per item. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly selects the end condition, the end condition can be selected again as long as the period in which the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected elapses.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated in a state in which the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected, the fact that the selection button has been operated is described. And an operation command indicating the type of the operated selection button, and when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, that is, at the end of the period in which the end condition of the per-game game can be selected, the final It is configured to set a command (end condition command) indicating the end condition of the specially selected per-game.

  In other words, during the period in which the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected, since the player may select the end condition a plurality of times, only the operation of each selection button is output to the audio lamp control device 113. The display mode according to the operation of the selection button is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and only the end condition finally selected is output to the audio lamp control device 113. are doing. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress output of unnecessary commands from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Then, when the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set, as shown in FIG. 146 (b), a display mode indicating that the V rush has started is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Is done. FIG. 145 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the V rush. The display screen shown in FIG. 146 (b) is the same as the situation (see FIG. 12 (c)) where the display screen shown in FIG. 12 (b) of the first embodiment is displayed (see FIG. 12 (c)). 146 (c)), and a display area HR23 for indicating the currently set end condition of the per-principal-game is formed with respect to the first embodiment described above. The differences are in the points, and the others are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (b), the display screen during the V rush displays the characters "winning" indicating that the winning ending condition is set as the ending condition of the per-accessory game. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the end condition of the per-accessory-per-game executed during the V rush in an easy-to-understand manner. Although not shown, the display area HR23 is configured to be always displayed during the V rush period. Is configured to be easily grasped. When the end condition is displayed during the per-accessory game, an element for satisfying the end condition (or a V attacker (V winning device 65) when the winning end condition is set) is used. In the case where the number of winning balls and the time end condition are set, the update status of the elapsed time from the start of the game per role) and the value at which the end condition is satisfied are displayed on the display surface. It is good to configure. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game per accessory is suddenly ended and the player is confused.

<Electrical Configuration of Main Controller in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of main controller 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 147, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment adds an end condition storage area 203ea, a switchable flag 203eb, and a switching flag 203ec to the RAM 203 of the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 29). The difference is that they are the same, and the others are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The ending condition storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing the ending condition of the per-accessory game selected by the player. In the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, When it is determined that the second selection button 22zc) has been operated, an end condition corresponding to the operation content is stored. Then, the end condition stored when the big hit game ends is read out, and is referred to when setting an end condition command corresponding to the read out end condition. In addition, the game is read out in the case of executing the bonus game, and the bonus game is executed based on the read end condition.

  In the sixth embodiment, information indicating a winning end condition is stored as initial data in the end condition storage area 203ea. More specifically, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) has been operated in the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54) (S1704 in FIG. 54: Yes), the process proceeds to S1714. As a part of the processing, information for indicating a winning end condition is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea.

  In this way, by configuring such that at least any one of the end conditions as the end condition of the per-accessory game is stored as initial data in the end condition storage area 203ea, a function capable of selecting the end condition of the per-accessory game is provided. In the pachinko machine 10 having the above, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which none of the end conditions of the game per accessory is set. In the present embodiment, information corresponding to the prize-winning condition is stored (stored) in the ending condition storage area 203ea as initial data of the ending condition of the end of the per game play. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least the prize ending condition and the time ending condition may be set as the initial data of the ending condition of the game per bonus.

  The switchable flag 203eb is a flag for indicating that it is a period in which the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected, and is set to ON when the ending period of the big hit game is started, and the ending period of the big hit game Is set to off when is completed.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the switch button 22za is operated in a state where the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, the operation on the switch button 22za is invalidated. With this configuration, even if the player erroneously operates the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc in a state where the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, processing based on the operation is performed. Execution can be suppressed.

  The switching flag 203ec indicates that the switching button 22za is operated (pressed) during the period in which the termination condition of the per-government game can be selected (the period in which the switchable flag 20eb is set to ON), and the first selection button 22zb Or a flag indicating that the end condition can be selected by operating the second selection button 22zc, and operating the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc. Is set to on when a period in which the end condition can be selected is set.

  This switching flag 203ec is determined when the switching button 22za is operated in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151) while the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (see S2201: Yes in FIG. 151). That is, when the switching button 22za is operated during the ending period of the big hit game (S2203 in FIG. 151: Yes), it is set to ON (see S2204 in FIG. 151).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the setting status of the switching flag 203ec is a period during which the operation on the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc can be effectively determined in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151). (S2202 in FIG. 151), and is set to OFF when the end condition is selected based on the operation on the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc (see S2206 in FIG. 151) (FIG. 151). S2209). If the selection operation by the player is not performed while the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, the selection operation is set to OFF at the end timing of the jackpot game (see S2303 in FIG. 153).

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the contents of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 148, in the sixth embodiment, the end storage area 223ea is set in the RAM 223 (see FIG. 30B) of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment of the first embodiment. The difference is in the added points, and the rest is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The end storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the end condition of the selected per-game play, and when an operation command is received in the end condition-related processing (see S4272 in FIG. 156), the operation is performed. Based on the operation information (information indicating whether the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc was operated) included in the command, the corresponding end condition is stored (see S5706 and S5707 in FIG. 155). ). Then, when the end condition command output at the end of the jackpot game is received (S5709 in FIG. 155: Yes), the content of the received end condition command (the type of the set end condition) and the end storage area 223ea are stored. The stored information (the type of the end condition stored in advance based on the operation command) is compared (S5710 in FIG. 155). If the comparison result is different, the content of the end condition command is added. The corresponding end condition is stored.

  That is, when an operation command indicating that the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) is operated by the player is received, the end storage area 223ea is based on the received operation command. The end condition is stored, and the display mode of the switching effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be set based on the end condition stored in the end storage area 223ea. When an end condition command for indicating the finally selected end condition is received, the end condition set on the sound lamp control device 113 side based on the operation command, the end condition actually set, Are compared, and if the comparison results are not the same, an end condition corresponding to the content of the end condition command is stored.

  With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which a command (end condition command) for indicating the finally selected end condition is set at the end of the jackpot game receives the end condition command. At an earlier stage, it is possible to predict an end condition selected by the player based on the operation command, set an effect mode based on the result of the prediction, and execute an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In the present embodiment, the setting timing of the end condition command is set as the end timing of the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the player may select a selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc). When operated, an end condition command may be set in addition to the operation command. In the case of such a configuration, a display mode to be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the received end condition command, that is, based on the actually set end condition. Can be.

<Control Process of Main Controller in Sixth Embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 149 to 153, control processing of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, a timer interruption process 6 (see FIG. 149) is replaced with a special power starting opening winning process (see FIG. 50) in place of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. The special power starting port winning process 6 (see S178 in FIG. 150) is executed instead of the special jackpot winning process 6 (see S178 in FIG. 56), and the jackpot control process 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152) is executed instead of the big hit control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56). Different, otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the timer interrupt processing 6 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt processing 6. This timer interrupt processing 6 is different from the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) in that the special power starting port prize processing (see S108 in FIG. 50) is replaced with the special power starting port prize processing 6 (see S178 in FIG. 150). ) Is performed, and a switching process (see S171) is added. The other processes (S101 to S107, S109 to S112) are the same as the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). Detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the contents of the special power starting opening winning process 6 (S178) will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special power starting opening winning process 6 (S178). In the special power starting port winning process 6 (S178), the processing executed when the execution condition of the per-accessory game is satisfied is changed from the special power starting port winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50). The differences are in the points, and the others are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special power starting port winning process 6 (S178) is executed, first, the processes of S1301 to S1307, which are the same as the special power starting port winning process of the first embodiment (see S108 in FIG. 50), are executed. The end condition stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read (S1381), and the read end condition is set (S1382). After that, a special power operation command is set (S1308), and the process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S1302 that it is not in the ordinary drawing (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1309), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the execution condition of the per-accessory game is satisfied, the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read, and the end condition corresponding to the read information is set. The setting is made so that the end condition of the game per accessory is made variable. As a result, when the termination condition selected by the player is satisfied, it is possible to terminate the game per accessory, so that the player can select the size of the privilege given during the special electric game, Motivation can be increased. In the present embodiment, the end condition of the executed per-game is set every time the execution condition of the per-game is established. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected only at the time of the end of the jackpot game, or the first execution condition of the per-accessory game after the end of the jackpot game, When the condition is established, the end condition stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read, and the operation scenario per accessory corresponding to the end condition is set, and the setting is performed until the next big hit game is executed. It may be configured to execute a per-accessory game based on the performed per-accessory operation scenario.

  With such a configuration, each time the execution condition of the per-accompaniment game is satisfied, it is not necessary to execute the process of reading the information from the end condition storage area 203ea, and the accessory corresponding to the end condition selected by the player. A winning game can be executed.

  Also, unlike the sixth embodiment, even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected during the special electric game (during the time saving state), for example, the A flag (end condition switch flag) indicating that the end condition has been switched is provided, and only when the end condition switch flag is set to ON, the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read and the combination is read. It is preferable to switch the end condition of the hit game. As a result, when a new per-game game is executed under the same end condition as the previous per-game game, the process of reading the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea can be skipped. It is possible to simplify the control processing when executing the game per accessory.

  Next, the contents of the switching process (S171) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the switching process (S171). This switching process (S171) is a control process executed in the timer interrupt process 6 (see FIG. 149), and a process based on a player's operation on the end condition switching button group 22z is executed.

  When the switching process (S171) is executed, first, it is determined whether the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S2201), and when it is determined that the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, that is, the ending of the current big hit game is performed. If it is determined that it is not during the period (S2201: No), the operation on the end condition switching button group 22z is in a period in which the operation is invalid, and thus this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the present is during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2201: Yes), then the switching is being performed. It is determined whether the flag 203ec is set to ON (S2202).

  In the process of S2202, when the switching flag 203ec is not set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, the switching button 22za is not operated (the display screen of FIG. 145 (a) is displayed). (S2202: No), it is determined whether or not an operation has been performed on the switch button 22za (S2203). If it is determined that the switch button 22za has not been operated (S2203: No), this processing is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the switching button 22za has been operated (S2203: Yes), the switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2204), and the switching command is set (S2205). To end.

  Here, the determination process in S2203 will be described. In the present embodiment, when the player operates (presses) the switch button 22za, the switch button detection switch detects the pressed switch button 22za and sends the detection result to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. Is configured to be output. In the determination process of S2203, it is determined whether a detection signal is output from the above-described switch button detection switch.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2202, when the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, the switching button 22za has already been operated (display of FIG. 145 (b)). If the screen is being displayed (S2202: Yes), it is determined whether any of the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is being operated (S2206). In the discriminating process of S2206, when the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed), the pressed first selection button 22zb is detected by the first selection button detection switch, and the detection result is determined by the main control device. Since the signal is output to the input / output port 205 of 110, it is determined whether the detection signal is output from the first selection button detection switch. When the second selection button 22zc is operated (pressed), the pressed second selection button 22zc is detected by the second selection button detection switch, and the detection result is input / output port of the main control device 110. Since it is output to 205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is being output from the second selection button detection switch.

  In the process of S2206, when it is determined that either the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc has been operated (S2206: Yes), information indicating that the selection button has been operated and the operation of the selected button have been performed. An operation command including the information indicating the type of the selected button is set (S2207), the end condition selected by the processing of S2206 is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea (S2208), and the switching flag 203ec is turned off. This is set (S2209), and this process ends.

  Also, in the process of S2206, when it is determined that neither the first selection button 22zb nor the second selection button 22zc has been operated, that is, from the detection switch for the first selection button to the detection switch for the second selection button, If it is determined that the detection signal has not been output (S2206: Yes), the present process is terminated.

  As described above, in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), at the timing when the operation on the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc) is determined to be valid, any one of the selection buttons When the (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated, information indicating the selected end condition is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea, and a command indicating the selected end condition is set. Without setting, an operation command including information indicating that the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated and information indicating the type of the operated selection button is set. are doing. In addition, in order to set the switching flag 203ec to OFF in the processing of S2209, the end condition switching button group 22z is operated during the ending period of the jackpot game, so that the end condition can be selected again. ing.

  That is, until the ending period of the jackpot game ends, the end condition is not determined, so that a command (end condition command) indicating the selected end condition is not output to the audio ramp control device 113. ing. With this configuration, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the end condition command, the information (end condition type) included in the received end condition command until the next jackpot game is executed. The effect can be set according to. Therefore, the control process on the audio lamp control device 113 side is simplified as compared with the case where the end condition command is set every time the player operates the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc). be able to.

  Further, an operation command indicating that the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) has been operated in a state where the switching flag 203ec is set to ON can be set. During the ending period of the game, an effect based on the received operation command can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect without giving a sense of incongruity to the player who operates the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc).

  Next, the content of the jackpot control process 6 (S1854) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 6 (S1854). In the jackpot control process 6 (S1854), the process executed at the start timing of the ending period and the end timing of the jackpot game are different from the jackpot control process of the first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56). Is different from the process executed by the other processes, and the other processes are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the jackpot control process 6 (S1854) is executed, first, the same processes of S1901 to S1911 as the jackpot control process of the above-described first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56) are executed, and the process of S1911 is completed. Thereafter, the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S1951), and the process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, when the ending period set after the last round game is completed in the big hit game is set, the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON, and the player operates the switch button 22za. Is configured to be effectively determined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1910 that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1910: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the big hit, that is, the end timing of the ending period (S1912). If it is determined that it is the timing of the jackpot end (S1912: Yes), the same processes of S1913 to S1917 as the above-described jackpot control process of the first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56) are executed. The setting process is executed (S1952), and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S1912 that it is not the timing of ending the big hit (S1912: No), the same processing as the big hit control processing of the above-described first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56) is executed, and the processing of S1918 is executed. This processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the end condition setting process (S1952) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the end condition setting process (S1952). This end condition setting processing (S1952) is executed in the big hit control processing 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152), and selection of the end condition selection of the per-proxy game executed during the ending period of the big hit game is selected. The processing based on the result is executed.

  When the end condition setting process (S1952) is executed, first, the switchable flag 203eb is set to off (S2301), and then it is determined whether the switching flag 203ec is set to on (S2302), and the switch is turned on. If it is determined that the setting has been made, that is, if the jackpot end timing has come when the selection screen for selecting the end condition (see FIG. 145 (b)) is displayed (S2302: Yes), the switching flag 203ec is set. Is set to off (S2303), the information (finally selected termination condition type) stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea is read (S2304), and the termination condition is determined based on the information read from the termination condition storage area 203ea. The command is set (S2305), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the switching flag 203ec has not been set to ON, that is, if the switching button 22za has not been operated on the big hit ending screen (see FIG. 145 (a)), or the process ends. If a desired selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated (pressed) on the condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)) (S2302: No), the processing of S2303 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S2304.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the end condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game, only the end condition command finally selected is set as the end condition command. Is configured to be set. Furthermore, the period in which the end condition of the per-prize game can be selected is set only during the big hit game. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of end condition commands output to the sound ramp control device 113 side to one at the time of one big hit game, and to set the end condition included in the end condition command. Is applied at least until the next big hit game is executed.

  Therefore, on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, the effect based on the received end condition command can be continuously executed at least until the next big hit game is executed. In a case where the effect mode is changed accordingly, it is possible to suppress the processing for changing the effect mode from becoming complicated.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155. The sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is executed instead of the command determination process (S4102 in FIG. 61). Are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the content of the command determination processing 6 (S4172) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating the content of the command determination process 6 (S4172). This command determination processing 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is different from the command determination processing in the above-described first embodiment (S4102 in FIG. 61) in that it is determined whether a command related to the end condition of the per-bonus game has been received. And a process executed based on the result of the determination process are different in that an additional process is added, and the other processes are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is executed, first, the same processes in S4201 to S4219 as the command determination process in the first embodiment described above (see S4102 in FIG. 61) are executed. Then, in the processing of S4218, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4218: No), it is next determined whether an end condition-related command has been received (S4271). Here, as the termination condition related command, the switching command and the operation command set in the switching process of main controller 110 (see S171 in FIG. 151) and the termination condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153). The set end condition command corresponds to this.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4271 that the termination condition related command has been received (S4271: Yes), then the termination condition related processing is executed (S4272), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4271 that the termination condition related command has not been received (S4271: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4220), and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the end condition-related processing (S4272) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the termination condition-related processing (S4272). In the end condition-related processing (S4272), when the player executes a selection operation for selecting an end condition of a per-accessory game, various processes for setting an effect mode corresponding to the selection operation are executed. You.

  When the end condition-related processing (S4272) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is currently being performed (S5701). If it is determined that a jackpot game is not being performed (S5701: No), this processing is performed as it is. finish. That is, in the present embodiment, since the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected only during the big hit game, if the end condition related command is received other than during the big hit game, the command corresponding to the received command is used. The effect is not set. Therefore, when an incorrect command is received due to noise or the like, it is possible to suppress an effect not intended by the player from being executed.

  In the process of S5701, if it is determined that the current game is a jackpot game (S5701: Yes), then a switching command is received, that is, the player operates the switch button 22za during the jackpot ending period. It is determined whether (pressed) (S5702). If it is determined that the switching command has been received in the process of S5702 (S5702: Yes), a display command indicating the selection screen is set (S5703), and this process ends.

  When the processing of S5703 is executed, the big hit ending screen (see FIG. 145 (a)) is switched to a selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)) for selecting the end condition of the per-bonus game. The display command is set. The display command set here is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, like the other display commands. Is output. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S5703, it creates image data for displaying an end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)), and displays the third symbol display device. A selection screen is displayed at 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5702, if it is determined that the switching command has not been received (S5702: No), it is determined whether an operation command has been received (S5704). The operation command is issued when it is determined that the player has operated (pressed) the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc), that is, during the ending period of the jackpot. 22za, a command to be set when a selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) is operated in a state where the selection screen of the end condition is displayed, and which is set by the player. This command includes information for indicating the type of the selection button.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5704 that the operation command has been received (S5704: Yes), it is determined whether the currently received operation command is the operation command corresponding to the first selection button 22zb, that is, the information included in the operation command It is determined whether or not information indicating that the first selection button 22zb has been operated is included (S5705). If it is determined that the button is the first selection button 22zb (S5705: Yes), the first selection button 22zb is displayed. A display command indicating a winning end (condition) as a corresponding end condition is set (S5706). When the display command is set in the processing of S5706, an end condition selection screen (FIG. 146 (a)) indicating that the player has selected the winning end condition from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)). Is displayed. Thereafter, the set end condition (winning end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and the process ends.

  In the process of S5705, if it is determined that the operation command received this time is not the operation of the first selection button 22zb (S5705: No), the operation command received this time is the operation of the second selection button 22zc. Therefore, a display command indicating the time end (condition) is set (S5707), and this processing ends. When the display command is set in the processing of S5707, an end condition determination screen indicating that the player has selected the time end condition is displayed from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)). Specifically, on the display screen described above with reference to FIG. 146 (a), display area HR22 (see FIG. 145 (b)) is enlarged and displayed instead of display area HR21, and “time” is displayed on display area HR22a. "End" is displayed, and the characters "time" are displayed in the display area HR23. Then, the set end condition (time end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5704 that an operation command has not been received (S5704: No), it is next determined whether an end condition command has been received (S5709), and it has been determined that an end condition command has not been received. If the processing has been performed (S5709: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the end condition command has been received (S5709: Yes), the information indicating the end condition stored in the end storage area 223ea is compared with the information included in the end condition command received this time. It is determined whether the same end condition is indicated (S5710).

  In the processing of S5710, when it is determined that the same end condition is satisfied, that is, when the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command indicate the same end condition. (S5710: Yes), the process ends. If the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command do not indicate the same end condition (S5710: No), the end condition that is actually set, Since the selection result displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is different, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the end condition indicated by the end condition command. The display command for switching to the display mode to be displayed is set (S5711), and the process ends.

  When the display command is set in the process of S5711, the comment corresponding to the end condition indicated by the end condition command is displayed in the display region HR23 while displaying the comment “switching the end condition” in the center of the main display region Dm. The mode is displayed.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the player can select any one of the winning ending condition and the time ending condition as the ending condition of the per-accessory game. In other words, when the prize ending condition is selected, the time ending condition is not satisfied even if a period in which the time ending condition can be satisfied has elapsed. Is configured such that the prize ending condition is not satisfied even when the number of prizes reaches the number at which the prize ending condition can be satisfied. With this configuration, when the termination condition desired by the player is satisfied, the game per accessory can be terminated, so that the player can more positively perform the game during the special electric game. .

  In the sixth embodiment, when the prize ending condition is selected, if the time ending condition is selected without terminating the game per role based on the elapsed time during the game per role, Although it is configured that the game per role is not terminated based on the number of balls won to the V-prize device 65 during the game per role, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, a forced time end condition or a time end condition that is satisfied when a time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than an elapsed time (for example, 1.6 seconds) set as a normal time end condition has elapsed. When is selected, the compulsory prize ending condition that is established when the number of prizes (for example, 10) is larger than the number of prizes (for example, 3) set as the normal prize ending condition is set. May be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a long-period game per accessory from being executed.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the player can operate (press) the switch button 22za while the ending screen of the jackpot game is being displayed, so that the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected. ing. In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when the big hit game is executed, the end condition of the hit game is configured to be selectable, and during the time-saving state (V rush) set after the end of the big hit game, the hitting The game end condition cannot be switched.

  With this configuration, the end condition of the per-accessory game is frequently switched in accordance with the game situation during the V rush, that is, the special symbol fluctuation state and the normal symbol fluctuation state, and the It is possible to suppress providing a gaming situation that is advantageous to the player. In addition, since the game in which the variable prize device 650 wins the ball in the jackpot game ends at the timing before the special electric game is executed, it is possible to select the end condition of the per-accessory game at the timing before the special electric game is executed. Therefore, a game in which a ball is fired and an action of selecting an end condition do not overlap, and a game which is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the end condition of the game per bonus is selectable in a state in which the period of the time-saving state (40 seconds) set after the end of the big hit game is notified, the remaining time displayed on the big hit ending screen is selected. In a state where the time reduction period mode 801 is grasped, it is possible to allow the player to select the termination condition of the game per accessory. Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the period of the time reduction state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the remaining time reduction mode 801, the prize ending condition is set as the ending condition of the per-accessory game. By selecting and arbitrarily adjusting the game period of the per-government game, a special time game in which the period during which the special symbol change is interrupted is efficiently set is aimed at. If a display mode indicating that the display mode indicates (for example, 200 seconds) is displayed, the time ending condition is selected, and the number of balls to be awarded to the V prize device 65 in a single game per game is increased by increasing the number of balls. It is possible to aim for a special electric game in which the privilege amount (the number of prize balls) per time is increased.

  In the sixth embodiment, a configuration in which the player can select the termination condition of the per-prize game during the period in which the ending screen of the big hit game is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, At any time during the big hit game, the end condition of the special hit game may be selectable.

  In addition, even when a standby screen (demo screen) which is displayed when the special symbol change is not executed during the time reduction state is displayed, it is possible to select an end condition of the per-accessory game. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a condition for ending a game per accessory can be selected during a period in which the game per accessory is being executed. Even in such a case, it is possible to select the termination condition of the per-accessory game at a timing at which the remaining time (hours reduction period) of the time reduction state is not subtracted. The end condition of the winning game can be selected.

  On the other hand, different from the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the termination condition of the per-accessory game can be selected only during a period in which the remaining time in the time reduction state (time reduction period) is subtracted. With such a configuration, during the special power game in which the remaining time (time reduction period) of the time reduction state is subtracted, the game is performed by concentrating on only the special power game or selecting an end condition of the game per accessory. Can be selected by the player, and the player can play the game while predicting the contents of the game in the future, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Second modification>
Next, a second modification of each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above-described embodiments, when the normal state is set, when the time saving state is set, in all the games such as the hit games (games per part, small hits, big hits), the game board 13 Of the game area formed on the left side (left side of the variable display unit 80), a game in which the ball is fired so that the ball flows down (left-handed game) is executed.

  As a result, the game area in which the ball is fired to the player is not changed, so that the player can easily understand the game. Further, in each embodiment, as described above, it is not necessary to change the game method in the middle of the game (for example, when the winning game is executed). a)), or even when a per-accessory game is executed (see FIG. 18A), a guidance notification for changing the game method (for example, a comment display of “right-handed”) is provided. In the display area HR3, a device that is opened during a hit game to be executed (for example, a general winning device 640, a V winning device 65, etc.) is notified to the player without being executed.

  However, in the display region HR3 (see FIG. 13A) in each of the above-described embodiments, an image display schematically showing a prize device (general power prize device 640) corresponding to a hit game to be executed is simply displayed. There is a problem that it is only displayed and becomes unnecessary display for a player who understands the content of the hit game to be executed. In addition, since the area of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is limited, when an unnecessary display is displayed in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13A), other display is performed. There is a problem that the effect display area is narrowed and the effect of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. On the other hand, if each display area on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set for the purpose of enlarging the area for executing another effect display and enhancing the effect of the effect, the display area of the display area HR3 is changed. There has been a problem that the game becomes narrower and a game that is difficult to understand for the player is provided.

  On the other hand, in the second modified example, the guide display mode (in the display area HR3) indicating the prize device (the ordinary prize device 640, the V prize device 65, the variable prize device 650) that the player should aim at during the winning game. This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that the display mode (display mode of the displayed image) can be variably set based on various conditions. Other contents are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, an example of a display screen displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display content displayed when a per-figure-per-game is executed during the V rush period, and FIG. 156 (b) is a schematic diagram of FIG. A schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (frame button 22) while the display screen shown in (a) is displayed. FIG.

  In the second modified example, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when the game is executed per ordinary figure, the ball can enter the ordinary electric winning device 640. A special power operation port 643 is provided inside the general power winning device 640, and when a ball wins in the special power operation port 643, a game per hit which enables the ball to win in the V winning device 65 is provided. It is configured to be executed. Further, a V winning opening 165 is provided in the V winning device 65, and when a ball wins in the V winning opening 165, a jackpot game (V jackpot) in which a ball can win on the variable winning device 650 is provided. (Game). In other words, it is configured such that a plurality of possible hit games can be executed based on one hit game (regular game hit game).

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, for example, when the ball enters the special power operation port 643 during the game for the regular figure, the game for the role is executed continuously with the game for the regular figure. become. In this case, if the guidance display mode is displayed in accordance with the type of the hit game being executed, the guide display mode displayed in the display area HR3 in accordance with the timing of switching from the per-figure per-game to the per-game per-game. , There is a problem that the timing at which the guidance display mode for guiding the player to the prize device (V prize device 65) corresponding to the bonus per game is delayed. Also, in consideration of the delay in the timing at which the guidance display mode is displayed, for example, when the hit game is switched from the per-figure per game to the per-acquisition per game, specifically, the per-figure per game is terminated. It is conceivable to set a waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) until the game per bonus is executed (after the ball wins to the special power operation port 643), but the waiting period is set. As a result, there is a problem that the sense of speed of the special electric game aiming at the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a series of flows is reduced, and the interest of the game cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, in the present second modified example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a), an image display which is a game per ordinary drawing and imitates the ordinary winning award device 640 as a guide display mode in the display area HR3 is displayed. In the running state, a hit game that can be executed next, that is, a hit game executed when a ball is inserted into the special power operation port 643 in the running general-purpose hit game (game per accessory) ), A second guidance display mode for guiding the player to the winning device (the V winning device 65) to be aimed at in advance is displayed in the display area HR30.

  With such a configuration, if the game result of the current general-purpose hit game is a specific game result (a game result in which a ball is won to the special power operation port 643), the next hit game is executed. Since the winning device to be aimed at can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, a game easy to understand for the player can be provided. In addition, by notifying in advance the game contents of the per-accessory game that can be executed next during the per-figure per game, during the period from the end of the per-figure per game to the execution of the per-accessory game, This eliminates the need to provide a waiting period for the player to know the game content of the hit game (prize device to be aimed) (the length of the waiting period can be shortened). Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by smoothly performing the special electric game aiming at the big hit game (V big hit game) in a series of flows.

  In addition, as described above, since the game per bonus item is executed when the game result of the current per-figure game is a specific game result, the display area during the per-figure per game is displayed. The comment of “Aim” is not displayed in the second guidance display mode displayed on the HR 30. In addition, in a state where the execution of the per-accompaniment game has not been determined, that is, in a state where the per-drawing game is being played and the ball has not entered the special power operation port 643, a display imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed. The configuration is such that only a part of the image (for example, the image displayed in the display area HR3 in FIG. 18A) is displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily understand the first guidance display mode indicating the game content of the hit game being executed and the second guidance display mode indicating the game content of the hit game that can be executed next. Since the identification can be performed, for example, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game aiming at the V winning device 65 during the game per ordinary drawing.

  In the example shown with reference to FIG. 156 (a), as the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode, an image display simulating a winning device that is opened in a corresponding hit game is used. The first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode may be set only by displaying characters, or may be set using both characters and images.

  In addition, as an image display imitating the prize device displayed as the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode, photographing data obtained by actually photographing each prize device provided in the pachinko machine 10 may be used. . Thus, an image obtained by actually photographing the winning device can be used as an image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that an effect that is easier for the player to understand can be achieved.

  Conversely, a simple display that displays only the minimum necessary display information among the winning devices corresponding to the winning games may be used. In this case, the simple display can be diverted to the plurality of pachinko machines 10, so that the cost of developing the gaming machine can be reduced.

  Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the second modified example, when the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode are displayed in the display area HR3, the currently executing hit game (for example, It is configured to also display a past history information mode for enabling notification of a type of a hit game that has triggered execution of a (big hit game).

  With this configuration, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, it is possible to look back on the contents of the past game. Therefore, the jackpot game executed this time has won the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Inform the player in a clear manner whether it is a jackpot game executed based on the above or a jackpot game executed based on the fact that a ball has entered the V winning opening 165 during the bonus game. Can be.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the second guidance display mode displayed during the per-figure game is changed according to the progress of the per-figure game, that is, the special power operation port 643 in the per-figure per game being executed. Is configured to be variably set in accordance with a change in the degree of expectation that a ball will win. Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating the start of the per-figure game from the main control device 110, the first image data to be displayed as the first guidance display mode (the general power winning award) A display command indicating image data of the device 640 and a display command indicating second image data (image data of the V winning device 65) to be displayed as the second guidance display mode. Is set, and transmitted to the display control device 114.

  The display control device 114 creates the image display data of the first guidance display mode and the image display data of the second guidance display mode shown in FIG. 156 (a) based on the reception of the display command described above. , On the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 156 (a) is displayed immediately after the start of the regular-drawing game. Then, when a prize command indicating that the prize sensor 640s detects that the ball has entered the prize winning device 640 during the per-game game is output from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 A command indicating the progress of the game per game is output to the display control device 114.

  As a result, an image imitating the V prize device 65 is displayed as the second guidance display mode as shown in FIG. 156 ( The image display data (image display data in which about 3/4 of the image imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed) that is more exposed than the display mode shown in a) is created, and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is generated. To be displayed. Similarly, a state in which the ball is determined to win the special power operating port 643, for example, a state in which the ball passes through the second movable valve 642 and flows down toward the special power operating port 643, is detected. When the command is output from the main control device 110, the entire image imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as a second guidance display mode.

  With this configuration, it is possible to change the display mode (second guide display mode) of the guide display for the next hit game that can be executed according to the progress of the hit game being executed. As the degree of expectation that a ball wins in the special power operation port 643 in the running normal game winning game increases, the guidance display for guiding the next game that can be executed next can be clearly displayed.

  The example shown with reference to FIG. 156 (a) is merely an example, and in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of winning games in a series of flows, during a period in which one winning game is executed, It is only necessary to be able to guide the game method of the hit game that can be executed next, and, for example, the next hit game (for example, an accessory) according to the type of the hit game to be executed (for example, a regular game per game) In the case of using a configuration in which the probability of executing the per-figure game is different, the first guidance display mode displayed during the per-figure game or the The two-guidance display mode may be changed. Specifically, the display color and the size of the first guidance display mode are configured to be changed to a mode that is more noticeable to the player as the probability that the next winning game (for example, a game per role) is executed is higher. Good. In addition, the display mode of the second guidance display mode displayed at the start of the regular winning game may be changed. For example, a disadvantage that the probability of executing the next winning game (for example, a bonus game) is low. When the game per figure is executed, a display mode in which about half of the image of the V winning device 65 is displayed as the second guide display mode, and the advantage per game is more easily executed than the per game figure per game. It is preferable that the horse where the per-game is executed is configured to display a display mode in which 3/4 of the image of the V winning device 65 is displayed as the second guidance display mode.

  With this configuration, by visually recognizing the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode, it is possible to not only easily understand the game method of the hit game to be executed, but also to determine whether the hit game being executed is a player. Since it is possible to make the player predict whether or not a winning game is advantageous, the effect of the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode can be enhanced. Further, as described above, the display mode is configured to be changed in a stepwise manner according to the game result and the degree of expectation that are advantageous to the player. By configuring so that the stage of the display mode initially set is different, that is, by changing the timing of displaying the display mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high, the execution is performed while using the common image data. Since the player can be notified of the degree of advantage of the winning game, the amount of image data can be reduced.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned content, the example in which the per-figure-per-game and the per-accessory-period game are executed as one example of the hit game is shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Naturally, it may be used in all cases.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156 (b), the display contents displayed when the player operates the operation means (the frame button 22) during the game per ordinary drawing will be described. When the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 once while the display screen shown in FIG. 156 (a) is displayed, the display area HR3 for guiding the game method of the per-usual-per-game being executed is displayed. Enlarged display. Thereby, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to a player who wants to know a game method of the hit game being executed. When the frame button 22 is operated twice, the display area HR3 is displayed smaller than the size shown in FIG. 156 (a). When the frame button 22 is operated three times, the display area HR3 is deleted from the display screen, When the button 22 is operated four times, the display returns to the display screen shown in FIG. 156 (a).

  As described above, by changing the size of the guide display mode (first guide display mode) for guiding the game method of the hit game being executed, based on the operation of the player, the size desired by the player is provided. To display the guidance display mode. When the guidance display mode is reduced or deleted, the display area of other effect displays (effect displays such as reference numerals 811, 812, etc.) displayed on the display screen overlapping the display timing of the guide display mode. Is configured to be large. Further, there is an effect display that is executed only when the display area of the other effect display is enlarged. This allows the player to positively operate the frame button 22.

  In addition, without being limited to this, for example, by enlarging and displaying the first guidance display mode, a detailed display location of the first guidance display mode, for example, the second movable valve 642 in the general winning award device 640 is imitated. A configuration in which the display mode is a specific display mode different from the normal mode is configured to be visually recognizable to a player, and the specific display mode is configured to be easily displayed when a hit game advantageous to the player is being executed. Good. Thereby, even the player who has already understood the game method can be interested in the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the example described above, the guidance display mode is configured to be able to be enlarged or reduced by the player operating the operation unit (frame button 22). However, the guidance display mode is performed based on the operation on the operation unit. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a directional operation means (cross switch) capable of performing at least an operation in the left-right direction or the up-down direction as the operation means, the directional operation By operating the means, an area other than the target prize apparatus of the guide display mode (near the area where the target prize apparatus is provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10) is displayed. The guide display mode may be changed, or the guide display mode may be changed so that the winning device to be the target of the guide display mode is rotated (horizontal rotation, vertical rotation). In this case, the display control device 114 previously stores image data indicating the entire game area of the game board 13 and three-dimensional image data (3D data) of the winning device, and stores the operation content for the direction operation means. When a command corresponding to the indicated operation signal is received, image data corresponding to the command may be created and displayed. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable that information that is advantageous to the player is displayed in the displayable area only when the direction operation means is operated. This allows the player to enthusiastically operate the operation means.

  As described above, in the second modified example described above, as in the first embodiment described above, all games are configured to be able to be executed as left-handed games, but, for example, a plurality of hit games are performed as a series of games. In the case of an executable gaming machine, in a case where one hit game is executed as a left-hit game and the next hit game is executed as a right-hit game, a display area HR3 in which the first guidance display mode is displayed is designated by a third symbol. The display area HR30 formed on the left side of the display surface of the display device 81 and displaying the second guidance display mode may be formed on the right side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest a game method to the player also by the position of the display area formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the player may operate the position where the display area HR3 or the display area HR30 is displayed by operating the above-described direction operation means.

  As described above, in the second modified example described above, the case where a plurality of winning games are executed as a series of games has been described. However, even in the case where a specific winning game is executed alone, the effect of the above-described contents is performed. Can be applied. For example, a special symbol change period and a jackpot game are set as a series of games, and during the special symbol change period, an image aiming at the special figure entrance 64 is displayed as a first guidance display mode, and a second guidance display mode is performed. May be applied so as to display an image showing the variable winning device 650. In this case, the first guidance display mode that does not require the player to be guided to the game method may be deleted, and only the second guidance display mode may be displayed. In the case of a gaming machine provided with a plurality of variable prize devices 650 that are opened when a special symbol lottery wins, which variable prize device 650 is finally displayed as the second guidance display mode. May be configured to be able to execute an effect that inspires the player.

  In the above-described second modified example, the guide display mode in the case where the per-figure per game is executed has been described. However, for example, a per-prize is won by a lottery of a normal symbol, and the per-figure per game is executed. In the period up to, only the first guidance display mode may be displayed. In addition, at that timing, the guide display mode is sequentially switched and displayed so as to sequentially show the flow of the game in the case where all of the examples of the game have succeeded, that is, the flow of the game per ordinary figure, the game per the accessory, and the flow per the big hit. It may be configured as follows.

  Furthermore, the variable content of the guidance display mode displayed during the hit game may be appropriately set. For example, the guidance display mode may be varied using blinking or discoloration in addition to enlargement, reduction, and rotation. Alternatively, the guidance display mode may be changed by causing a character to appear near the guidance display mode. Further, the game structure may be guided by combining a decorative structure imitating an actual winning device and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in each of the above-described second modified examples, the image display using the image imitating the real thing is executed in order to guide the player to a game method that is easy to understand and is playing. For example, in which position of the target prize device is disposed in the game area, a portion of the prize device where the ball can enter, and an area where the ball can pass through the prize device In the case where a region advantageous to the gaming machine and a disadvantageous region are provided, the display image is simplified to such an extent that the player can grasp at least one of the advantageous region and the location of the advantageous region. May be used. With this configuration, the minimum required information can be provided to the player, and the common image data can be used for different pachinko machines 10. Therefore, the development cost of the pachinko machine 10, Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

  In the above-described first embodiment, when a lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit, or when a ball enters a specific area (V winning opening 165) during a game per bonus game, a big hit game is played. Is executed, and a time-saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the end of the big hit game. In addition, as an end condition of the time reduction state, a time reduction end condition (time reduction number) that is established based on the fact that a predetermined number of (for example, four) special symbol lotteries are executed without winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. It is configured to be set. Furthermore, if a per-accessory game is executed during a dynamic display period (a special symbol fluctuation period) from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the stop display of the lottery result, the dynamic display period is subtracted. Is interrupted on the basis of the termination of the game per role, or the termination of the jackpot game executed based on the fact that the ball has passed (entered) the specific area during the game per role. It is configured to restart the process for subtracting the dynamic display period.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, a process of updating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state (a process of subtracting the number of remaining hours reduced) is executed based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, the special symbol lottery is executed during a period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the execution of the special symbol change, and after the special symbol change is stopped and displayed, it is configured to determine whether the time reduction end condition is satisfied. I have.

  With such a configuration, during the execution of the special symbol change, the process for subtracting the dynamic display period based on the execution of the per-accessory game is interrupted, and thereafter, the interrupted dynamic When the process for subtracting the display period is restarted, the number of times saved can be prevented from being updated when the dynamic display period after the restart has elapsed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, for example, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the remaining dynamic display period of the suspended dynamic display is extremely short, and the number of time savings set after the end of the jackpot game is changed by the special symbol change after the restart. With the stop display of, it is possible to suppress the instantaneous subtraction.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which it is determined whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied is the timing at which the dynamic display period of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, the time-saving state can be continued until the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in which the condition for ending the time-saving state is satisfied is stopped and displayed. Can be continued. Furthermore, during the dynamic display period of the special symbol, it is not determined whether or not the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied. There is no. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  The contents described above may be used for the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment provides a plurality of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol), a lottery (variation) of the first special symbol, and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. ) And are configured to be executable. When the result of one special symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (small hit, big hit), when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol change (the special symbol change The processing for subtracting the target display period is interrupted or discarded. Specifically, if one special symbol lottery wins a big hit, the other special symbol change being executed is discarded, and if a small hit is won, the other special symbol change being executed is interrupted. It is composed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the cumulative number of lotteries obtained by adding the number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, 100 ), Or when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol reaches a specific number (for example, four), the time-saving end condition is satisfied.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the above-described fourth embodiment performs the process of updating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (the process of subtracting the number of remaining short hours) based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. The timing to execute and determine whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, the timing to execute the determination whether the time saving state end condition is satisfied, or the timing when the special symbol dynamic display period has elapsed, or one of As a processing result of the process of subtracting the number of remaining hours saved during the special symbol change, during the execution of the special symbol change (the special symbol change in which the number of reduced hours becomes 0 after the subtraction) in which the time saving end condition can be satisfied, the other This is the timing when the condition for executing the special symbol lottery is satisfied and before the special symbol lottery is executed.

  With such a configuration, even in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) of the specified number or more is not executed during the time saving state, and it is advantageous for the player. Can be continued as long as possible.

  In the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, the processing for determining whether the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied, and the time-saving state is ended based on the processing result (transition to the normal state) The processing is defined as the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed). However, other timings may be used. For example, the stop display of the special symbol elapses for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). If a special symbol change (the final change in the time saving state) that satisfies the time saving end condition is a win (small hit or big hit), the hit game is performed. Is executed, a predetermined timing during the hit game (for example, one second after the start of the hit game), and an end timing of the hit game. . In other words, a process of updating the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time reduction state (a process of subtracting the number of remaining symbol reductions) is executed, and the special symbol variation that has been executed is stopped and displayed, and then the next special symbol is changed. Any period may be used until the lottery is executed.

  Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, the time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of drawing the special symbol reaches a specific number (for example, four) is provided. The number of times the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result other than the jackpot winning, and a part of the lottery result in the case of losing the winning) is not limited to this, and a predetermined number of times (for example, , Five times), a time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of balls passing through a specific end area in the time saving state reaches a specific number (for example, 10), The time saving termination condition that is satisfied when the elapsed time from the setting of the time saving state exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds) may be settable. Further, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, if the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a hit game (small hit game) different from the big hit game, the number of times the small hit game is executed reaches the specific number. It is also possible to configure so that the time-saving end condition that is satisfied in the case of being set can be set.

  Further, in a case where it is possible to set an end condition of the time-saving state that is established under various conditions, it is preferable to set a different time-saving end condition according to a trigger when the time-saving state is set. Specifically, when the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game, the time-saving termination condition may be set based on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type set at the time of the jackpot winning, The time-saving termination condition may be set based on the number of special symbol lotteries executed until the jackpot is won. Further, the time-saving termination condition may be set based on the number of times that a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is continuously set over the big hit game. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a pleasure of predicting the time-saving end condition set for the player.

  In addition, a configuration may be made so that a player can select a time-saving end condition set for the current time-saving state from a plurality of time-saving end conditions that can be set as the time-saving end condition. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while predicting which time-saving ending condition is selected to execute the most advantageous game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-described embodiments, when the special symbol change is interrupted during the time saving state, the number of time savings is not reduced when the restarted special symbol change is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the number of time savings is reduced when the restarted special symbol change is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the time reduction is performed at the timing when the special symbol change is stopped and displayed. The processing of updating (subtracting) the number of times may be executed. Even in the case of using such a configuration, the length of the short time period after resumption will be different depending on the length of the remaining fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation at the time of interruption, so that the player At which timing the special symbol change is interrupted (whether the jackpot game is executed) or not, it is possible to give an interest.

  Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, the processing for updating (subtracting) the number of times saved is performed during the period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the start of the special symbol change. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be executed, for example, after a lapse of a predetermined period (after 5 seconds) from the start of the special symbol change. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a case where the number of time savings is updated (subtracted) based on the special symbol change after resumption and a case where the number of time savings is not performed, depending on the timing when the special symbol change is interrupted. Specifically, when the special symbol change is interrupted two seconds after the start of the special symbol change, the update process of the number of times saved is executed three seconds after the special symbol change is restarted. On the other hand, when the special symbol change is interrupted 10 seconds after the start of the special symbol change, the update process of the number of times reduced after the special symbol change is restarted is not executed. Therefore, immediately after the special symbol change is started, that is, even if the special symbol change is interrupted in a state where the remaining change time is long, a disadvantageous state may occur to the player, On the other hand, the player can be interested in the game after the restart (game during the time reduction state). In addition, when configured to execute the update (subtraction) processing of the number of times saved during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change pattern of the selected special symbol (change time, jackpot lottery result, stop type, etc.) ), The timing of executing the update (subtraction) processing for the number of times saved may be made different. With this configuration, the special symbol variation is advantageous to the player (the number of times saved is not updated due to the special symbol variation after resumption, or the time saving state set at the time of resumption can be continued for a long time). Can be made difficult for the player to understand, so that the player can play the game while predicting the content of the game to be executed later, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed satisfies a predetermined condition, an effect for notifying the player to that effect is executed. I have. Specifically, when the remaining period of the special symbol change is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is longer than the changing time of the next special symbol change. Is long, the lucky time effect can be executed. With this configuration, when the game per V is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player can actively play the game. Can be.

  Also, when determining the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed, a method of determining whether the remaining period is longer than a predetermined length (for example, 30 seconds) (absolute determination) And a method (relative determination) of determining whether or not it is longer than the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation to be executed next is configured to be executable. This allows the player to know the timing at which the special symbol change is advantageously interrupted.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the effect that can notify the player of the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is configured to be executable, but the special symbol change that is advantageous to the player is interrupted. Any effect may be used as long as the effect allows the player to predict the timing, and the effect may be executed under conditions other than the remaining period of the special symbol change. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which the update process of the number of times reduced in the special symbol is executed during the change of the special symbols, an effect indicating that the update process of the number of times reduced is executed is configured. May be.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when a specific winning game (game per accessory, small hitting game, big hitting game) is executed during execution of the special symbol change, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted or discarded. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to interrupt or discard the special symbol change being executed when conditions other than the winning game are satisfied.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a normal symbol lottery is won, and when the game per game is executed, a general winning device 640 is provided so that the ball can easily win. When the ball passes through (enters) a specific area (special power operation port 643, special power operation port 1643, second entrance port 1645), a game advantageous to the player (game per accessory, small hit game), that is, Depending on the game result, a game in which a jackpot game can be executed can be executed. Further, a game state (time saving state) in which the ball winning the general electricity winning device 640 easily passes through the above-described specific area and a game state (normal state) in which the ball hardly passes are settable.

  With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the specific area even if the ball has won the general winning a prize device 640 during the general game executed during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress providing an excessively advantageous game to a player who is playing a game in a normal state.

  In addition, in order to prevent the ball from entering the specific area during the normal state, a special game for preventing the ball from winning in the general electric winning device 640 by the game per game performed during the normal state. Since it is not necessary to provide the configuration on the game board 13, the design flexibility of the game board 13 can be increased. In each of the above-described embodiments, among the balls that have won the general winning award device 640, the balls that have not passed (entered) the specific area are configured to enter the out mouth, and the However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide a first privilege (a game that can be a trigger for a jackpot game) to be granted when passing (entering) a specific area. ) May be configured to provide a second privilege (prize ball) different from the above.

  With this configuration, it is possible to vary the type of privilege given to the player by the ball that has won the general-prize winning device 640 according to the set gaming state. Sexual games can be provided.

  Further, in the above-described second embodiment, a game state (time saving state) in which the ball winning the general electricity winning device 640 easily passes through the above-described specific area and a game state (normal state) in which the ball is difficult to pass are set. After being configured as possible, the specific area in which the ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 during the time saving state enters the first specific area for executing the per-accessory game in which the opportunity to execute the jackpot game is easily established. (The second special power operation port 1643) and the second specific area (the special power operation port 643) for executing the hitting game, in which the chance of executing the jackpot game is less likely to be established than the first specific area. Switching means for switching (third movable valve 1642) is provided.

  With this configuration, the ratio (ease of passing) of the sphere that has won the general winning a prize device 640 passing through the specific area is made different depending on the set game state, and then the ball easily passes through the specific area. In the state where the gaming state (time saving state) is set, the ball which has won the general winning a prize device 640 is either a first specific area which is advantageous to the player or a second specific area which is more disadvantageous than the first specific area. Can be passed through. Therefore, even in a state where it is determined that the first privilege is given to the player by the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 (a state in which the first privilege is easily given), the ball enters (passes) any specific area. ) Can be interested. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the game performed during the time-saving state.

  In the above-described second embodiment, the ease with which a ball can be awarded to the V winning opening 165 in the per-proxy game executed in accordance with the type of the specific region (special power operation port) in which the ball enters is described. Different. In other words, the execution probability of the V jackpot game executed via the per-principal game is made different. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the V jackpot game executed when a ball wins in the V winning opening 165. (The number of rounds, the game state (number of times saved) set after the end of the big hit game) may be made different depending on the type of the specific area (special power operation port) where the ball enters.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments described above, when the ball has won the special power operating port 643, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (interruption processing of the change time is interrupted). However, as in the third embodiment described above, the special symbol change that is being executed is discarded according to the condition that is satisfied when the ball wins the special power operation port 643 (the special symbol change is forcibly applied). May be stopped), or the time saving state may be terminated after being discarded.

  Further, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 configured to execute a plurality of kinds of special symbol lotteries (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery) in an overlapping manner. The technical idea of the second embodiment described above may be applied. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the second winning opening 1645, which is a trigger for executing the lottery of the second special symbol, is provided in the general winning award device 640, and the ball wins in the general winning award device 640 during the normal state. The configuration is such that, when the ball wins in the general winning arrangement device 640 during the time saving state, the winning ball can easily enter the second entrance 1645 than in the case. In addition, a right first ball entry opening serving as a chance for a lottery of the first special symbol is provided in the general winning award device 640, and a ball that has won the general award winning device 640 during the time saving state is a second entrance 1645 or Switching means may be provided so as to enter any one of the right first entrance holes. In this case, a lottery that is more advantageous to the player when the ball enters the second entrance 1645 than in the right first entrance which is a chance for the first special symbol that can be executed even in the normal state. May be configured to be executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible for the player to enjoy the result of the per-figure-per-game executed during the time-saving state to the end. In the case where the number of lotteries of the first special symbol (the number of times of change) is defined as an end condition of the time saving state, as in the above-described embodiments, the lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving state (variation). ) Can be prevented from occurring. Further, in this case, the operation of the switching means provided in the general winning award device 640 may be configured to be variable based on the execution status of the first special symbol lottery and the number of balls retained in the first special symbol. If the time saving state is set and the first special symbol lottery is not executed, or if the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small (for example, one), a general electric winning prize The switching means may be operated and controlled so that the ball that has won the device 640 easily enters the right first entrance. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably execute the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the operation of each movable valve provided in the general winning a prize device 640 is configured to be executed at the start of the game per general figure, but is not limited thereto. For example, it may be configured to be executed based on the timing at which the ordinary symbol indicating the winning of the per-figure is stopped or the timing at which the stop display period has elapsed, or a predetermined time after the per-figure-per-game starts. It may be configured to be executed at a timing when a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, or may be executed at any timing as long as it operates according to a predetermined rule.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the time-saving state is set, the specific game (the game per character) before the time-saving state ends (until the special symbol change that satisfies the condition for ending the time-saving state ends). Or, the pachinko machine 10 having the playability aiming at the big hit game (V big hit game) via the small hit game has been described.

  In the pachinko machine 10 having such a playability, as the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the time reduction state becomes longer, the period in which the time reduction state is set (time reduction period) can be extended, and the identification during the time reduction period can be performed. The number of executions of the game can be increased.

  Furthermore, when the specific game is executed, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (the process for subtracting the change time of the special symbol change is interrupted), and the interrupted special symbol is changed. The change (the process for subtracting the change time of the special symbol change) is performed after the end of the specific game or the big hit game (V big hit game), that is, when a condition that can execute a new special symbol change is satisfied. It is configured to restart.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the length of the short-term and the short-term varies depending on the variation time of the special symbol variation and the interruption period of the specific game. While wishing to select a long fluctuation time, it was possible to make the player play a lot of specific games.

  However, for example, a game period for executing a specific game (a period during which a ball cannot be awarded to the general winning award device 640 during a normal symbol fluctuation period or during a general game per game (it is difficult to win)) ( The electric accessory 640a is closed during the period in which the specific game cannot be executed and the change time of the special symbol change is subtracted. Although the open period of the electric accessory 640a during the per-game per game where the ball can be awarded to the electric accessory 640a, that is, the period in which the change time of the special symbol change is subtracted, (Period during which execution is possible) is disadvantageous to the player.

  In addition, the specific game in which the special symbol change is interrupted is performed when the number of winning balls in the variable ball entry means (V winning device 65) released during the specific game reaches a predetermined number (for example, three). Either the ending condition that is satisfied (winning ending condition) or the ending condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, 1.6 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the game per bonus, (time ending condition) Is configured to be terminated when the termination condition is satisfied, and when one of the termination conditions is satisfied in accordance with the game content (whether the ball is fired) by the player during the game per role, the role is determined. The hit game was over.

  On the other hand, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the state in which the specific game is being executed and the above-described disadvantage period overlap, the effect of the specific game can be changed based on the length of the disadvantage period. Make up. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to select the content of the game during the specific game (end condition to be established), so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, as shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 88, or FIG. 89, the special power operation port 643 which is a trigger for interrupting the special symbol change being executed is provided in the general winning award device 640. Also, in the above-described fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, a second ball entrance 1645 serving as a trigger for interrupting a special symbol change being executed is provided in the general winning award device 640. With this configuration, in the gaming machine, the period until the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 enters the special power operation port or the second entrance port (flowing period of the ball) is randomized (delayed). It is preferable to provide delay means.

  That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, a period until a plurality of special symbol changes is completed is configured to be a time-saving period, and a time-saving state (the number of time-savings) is newly set by executing a jackpot game. In such a case, the remaining period of the suspended special figure change is added without decrementing the number of time savings. Therefore, in the state where the number of remaining hours is remaining, and in the state where the number of remaining hours is reduced, and the number of remaining In the case where the remaining period of the figure fluctuation is long, it is configured such that a case where the jackpot game is executed (a case where the jackpot game is executed after the time reduction period is shortened) is advantageous to the player.

  This may be advantageous to the player by providing a delay unit in the general winning award device 640 and delaying the timing at which the ball enters the special power operation port or the second entrance port. Thereby, it is possible to enjoy at what timing the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 enters the special power operation port or the second ball input port. In addition, it is possible to prevent a game in which a ball enters the special power operation port or the second entrance when the remaining time of the special figure change is long, being intentionally performed.

  In this case, as the delay means, a croon member on which the ball can roll is provided, and when a plurality of balls flow into the clune member, the ball easily flows into a passage provided in the central portion of the clune member. And the ball passing through the passage opening may flow into the special power operation opening or the second entrance opening. With such a configuration, the sphere is provided with a special power operation port or a second ball entry port in accordance with the content of the game being played per ordinary figure (degree of winning of the ball into the ordinary power winning device 640) while providing delay means. It is possible to control the timing of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game such that the ball enters the special power operation port or the second entrance at an arbitrary timing.

  In addition, when the ball has flowed into the delay means (cloon member), a suggestion effect that suggests to the player a period that is advantageous to the player (a period during which the remaining time of the special figure change is long) is executed. A result notifying means may be provided for notifying whether or not the timing of entering the special power operating port or the second entrance is a timing that is advantageous to the player (the remaining period of the special figure change is long). Further, in the above-described example, the example in which the cloon member is used as the delay unit has been described. However, any device that can change the falling period of the ball that has entered the general winning award device 640 may be used. A plurality of flow paths having different periods (flow-down periods) from the time the ball enters the winning device 640 to the time the ball enters the special power operation port or the second ball entrance are provided, and any one of the plurality of flow paths is provided. Distributing means for distributing the spheres may be provided.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 192. Like the pachinko machine 10 used in the above-described fourth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 lottery) are performed in an overlapping manner. By changing the length of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, which are selected according to the set game state, by changing the length of the fluctuation time, Among the two types of special symbol lotteries that can be executed in an overlapping manner, there is a type in which the special symbol type in which the lottery is easily executed is changed according to the gaming state. Specifically, when one game state (for example, normal state) is set, a short fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds to 60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is selected. A long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is selected as the symbol variation time, and when a specific game state (for example, latent state) different from the normal state is set, the first special state is set. A long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the symbol, and a short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol. There is a configuration in which the first special symbol lottery is easily executed and the second special symbol lottery is easily executed during the latent state.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the small special lottery is configured to win the small hit with a high probability (for example, about 1/1) in the second special symbol lottery, and the small hit executed based on the small hit win In some cases, a latent state in which a game is frequently executed is set as a gaming state advantageous to a player.

  In the above-described gaming machine, a game (advantageous game) in which small hitting games are frequently performed can be executed only in a specific gaming state (probable state), so that the player is expected to shift to the gaming state. It was possible to play while playing. However, since the fixed fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation executed during the latent state, the small hitting game during the latent state is performed. It is not possible to make a large difference in the execution frequency, that is, in the above-described gaming machine, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, a small win is almost won. Since the difference is provided in the frequency, there is a fear that the game in the latent state becomes monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the range that can be selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is changed according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, the configuration is such that the smaller the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a short variation time as the variation time of the second special symbol variation.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, by executing the game in the latent state (right-handed game), the start winning of the first special symbol (holding storage) and the starting winning of the second special symbol are both performed. Depending on the small hit type that is set when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the running of the first special symbol change is interrupted, or forcibly stopped with a lottery result indicating departure (discarded) It is possible to make it. By forcibly stopping the change of the first special symbol being executed, the number of reserved first special symbols can be positively reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the number of retained special symbols in the first special symbol based on the result of the lottery of the second special symbol executed mainly during the latent state.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is different. , The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. And the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fourth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the gaming state according to the seventh embodiment will be briefly described. In the seventh embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol), and a latent state. A certain state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) can be set. The detailed state will be described later, but the latent state is configured as a gaming state that is most advantageous to the player. Then, the normal state is configured as the most disadvantageous game state for the player. Further, the probable change state is configured as a gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the normal state. In the following description, the game state may be indicated by using the name of the effect mode executed during each game state. In some cases.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 157, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the above-described fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 2). The V winning device 65 and the motor-operated accessory 640 are deleted, and instead, a right variable winning device 1650, a right motor-operated accessory 164, and a right second ball entrance 645 are provided. Also, the difference is that the positions of the variable winning device 650 and the through gate 67 are different. The other configurations are the same, and the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the seventh embodiment, each of a left area (left area) and a right area (right area) of the variable display unit 80 in the game area formed on the game board 13 A prize port (ball entry port) is provided so that a ball can be awarded (ball entry). Therefore, unlike the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the above-described first embodiment, a game in which the ball flows down to the left area (left-handed game) and a game in which the ball flows down to the right area (right-handed) (Game)).

  Although a detailed description will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, the game is configured to allow the player to execute a different game according to the set game state, and when the normal state is set, In order to allow the ball to enter the first entrance 64, a left-handed game is executed. If the certainty-change state is set, a right-handed game is executed in order for the right motor-operated role product 164 to win the ball. In the case where the latent state is set, a right-handed game is executed in order to make the ball enter the right second entrance 645. In addition, even when a hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed, a right-handed game is executed.

  That is, when a game advantageous to the player is executed, a right-handed game is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know whether or not the current situation is advantageous by the game method, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided. Although details will be described later, during a game state in which the right-handed game is executed (probable change state, latent state, and various hit states), a right-handed game is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed so as to display a guidance display mode for executing As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the first ball entrance 64 (center first ball entrance 64c), the ball that has flowed down the left area by the left-hitting game is the first ball entrance 64 (central first ball entrance 64c). The ratio of entering the ball and the ratio of the ball flowing down the right area by the right-handed game entering the first entrance 64 are determined by nails and various structures planted on the board of the game board 13. Specifically, one out of about 15 balls that have flowed down the left region by the left-handed game enters the first entrance 64 (center first entrance 64c). In this manner, about 250 balls that have flowed down the right region by the right-handed game, one ball enters the first entrance 64 (center first entrance 64c). Therefore, in the normal state in which the ball is inserted into the first entrance 64 (the center first entrance 64c), and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, it is most likely that the player performs the left-handed game. It becomes an advantageous game method.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 157, in the right area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80), a right variable winning device 1650 and a through gate 67 provided downstream of the right variable winning device 1650 are provided. A right electric entrance 164r provided downstream of the through gate 67, and a right electric accessory 164 having an opening / closing door 164r1 capable of opening and closing the upper surface of the right first entrance 164r. In a state where the opening / closing door 164r1 is closed, the ball that has flowed (passed) on the upper surface thereof can enter the second right ball entry port 645 and the above-mentioned respective ball entry ports without entering the ball. A variable winning device 650 is provided in a downstream area where the ball flowing down the right area reaches.

  As shown in FIG. 157, only the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 in the state where the right electric accessory 164 is closed (the state where the opening / closing door 164r1 is closed) are in the right second entrance 645. A flowing path of the game ball is set so as to be reachable. In other words, even if a right-handed game is performed in a high probability state (probable change state) of a normal symbol in which the right electric auditors product 164 is likely to be opened, almost all the game balls passing through the through gate 67 are in the right first entry. Since the ball enters the ball entrance 164r, the game ball cannot enter the right second entrance 645. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a game by right-handed game even in a probable change state (probability change mode).

  In the seventh embodiment, the variable member (opening / closing door) 1650a is configured to be variable so that almost all balls flowing down the right region by the right-handed game can win the open right variable winning device 1650. I have. This right variable winning device 1650 is a variable winning device (variable ball-taking means) that is opened in a small hit game executed when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery.

  In a state where the right variable winning device 1650 is closed (a state in which the small hitting game is not executed), about a half of the ball flowing down the right region is an area where the through gate 67 is provided (right variable winning). Of the left and right areas defined by the nails implanted on the left side of the device 1650, it flows down the right side area (first path), and the remaining half is left side area (second path). Flow down. The ball flowing down the left area (second path) flows down to the variable winning device 650 without entering the right motorized accessory 164 and the right second ball entrance 1645.

  On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down in the right region (first path) where the through gate 67 is disposed flows down toward the upstream side of the right electric accessory 164 (the upstream end side of the door 164r1). Then, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 flows down from the upstream side to the downstream side. Then, about ／ of the balls ejected from the upper surface of the right electric accessory 164 enter the right second entrance 645, and about 約 of the remaining balls enter the right electric accessory 164 and the right second It passes through a gap formed between the ball and the entrance 645 and flows down to the variable winning device 650.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of paths are provided for the ball fired to the right region by the right-handed game to reach the variable winning device 650, and each of the paths is different so that the period required for the ball to flow down is different. A path has been formed. Specifically, the sphere in the right area (first path) has a falling time of about 2 seconds, and the sphere in the left area (second path) has a flowing time of about 1 second. With this configuration, a ball fired at a different timing (a ball fired by a right-handed game), specifically, a plurality of balls fired at 0.6 second intervals can be changed at a similar timing. It is possible to reach the winning device 650. Therefore, during the period in which the variable prize device 650 is in the open state (during the jackpot game), it is possible to easily make a plurality of balls easily enter the variable prize device 650 at the same time. You can be interested in the behavior of the sphere.

  The right electric accessory 164 is opened when a winning is achieved in a normal symbol lottery (a general drawing lottery) in which a lottery condition can be satisfied when a ball passes through the through gate 67 (when a general figure hitting game is executed). It is a variable ball entry means to be operated. Here, the contents of the ordinary symbol lottery (general figure lottery) and the game per general figure lottery in the seventh embodiment will be briefly described.

  In the seventh embodiment, even when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the ball is able to enter the right electric accessory 164 by the right-handed game although the probability is low, although the probability is low. For example, when a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, the ball can be awarded to the right electric auditors product 164 at a ratio of about 1 in 50 balls. This ball entry ratio is set to be lower than the ratio of balls entering the first entry opening 64 (the ratio of one ball per 20 balls) when a left-hitting game is performed in the normal state. The ball that has entered the right electric accessory 164 is configured to always enter the right first entry opening 164r. Then, when a ball is made to enter the right electric accessory 164, the lottery right for the first special symbol is acquired (satisfies the lottery condition), as in the case where the ball is made to enter the first entry opening 64. ).

  Furthermore, when a ball is made to enter the first entrance opening 64, prize balls (four) are given in addition to the lottery right of the first special symbol as a privilege of having the ball enter. On the other hand, when a ball is made to enter the right electric auditors product 164, a prize ball (one) is awarded as a privilege of having made the ball enter, in addition to the lottery right of the first special symbol. In other words, when the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed when the left-handed game is executed rather than the right-handed game. It is configured such that the number of prize balls awarded when the ball is thrown into the entrance where the ball is thrown in in order to easily acquire the right and to obtain the lottery right for the first special symbol is increased. ing. Therefore, during the normal state, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game.

  When a right-handed game is played in the normal state, about one third of the balls flowing down the right area enter the second right entrance 645. When a ball enters the right second entrance 645, a lottery right for executing a lottery of the second special symbol is given, and one prize ball is given. As will be described in detail later, the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to set a long time (10 minutes) as the fluctuation time. In the present embodiment, the lottery right for the second special symbol is not stored (reserved). Therefore, even if a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, the second special symbol lottery is not performed smoothly.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 157, when the jackpot game is executed, a game in which a right-handed game is performed and a ball is won to the variable prize device 650 is executed. Since the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set during the execution of the jackpot game, a ball enters the first right entrance 164r of the right motorized accessory 164 during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game ends. Later, the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol becomes the upper limit.

  Accordingly, when the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the game is started with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being the upper limit. In the present embodiment, when the latent state is set, a short variation (0.5 seconds, 10 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol, and a long time (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol. ) Is selected. Then, a game (small hit RUSH) of acquiring many prize balls while frequent small hits are won in the second special symbol lottery is executed.

  Further, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in the latent state has reached a predetermined number (one or two), the number of balls is not more than the predetermined number (0, 3, or 4). It is configured such that a short variation time is easily selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation. In other words, a period in which the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes a predetermined number during the latent state is a period in which the number of small hit games executed per unit time tends to be the largest, and a game period advantageous to the player Becomes

  As described above, since the present embodiment does not have the hold storage function of storing the lottery right of the second special symbol, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game during the latent state. Then, the first special symbol is configured to change for a long time (10 minutes) during the latent state. Therefore, in the latent state, it is difficult to reach the predetermined number (one or two) of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol after the elapse of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped (discarded) in a part of the case where a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. This allows the player to perform a game for reducing the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol while performing a game aiming for a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the advantage period of the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) in the latent state is set based on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, and further, the second special symbol lottery is executed. When the game to be executed (right-handed game) is executed, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol can be increased. Therefore, when the advantageous period of the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the advantageous period will continue.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the hold storage function of storing the lottery right of the second special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 changes the second special symbol based on the number of hold memories of the first special symbol. Is selected, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second special symbol may be selected based on a value obtained by adding the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol. May be selected.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the long variation time is always selected for the variation time of the first special symbol selected during the latent state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the fluctuation time of the short fluctuation (for example, 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of about 1/10 as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation in the latent state. With such a configuration, it is possible to include the lapse of the variation time of the first special symbol in a realistic method of causing the storage of the first special symbol to be held during the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to substantially have a plurality of triggers for reducing the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol in the latent state.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, when the discarding condition is satisfied in a part of the case of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded. Although it is configured as described above, a discard condition that can be satisfied regardless of the result of the lottery of the second special symbol may be used. For example, the number of balls that have entered the right variable winning device 1650 during the execution of the small hit game May be set based on a predetermined winning condition (for example, 11 winnings), or may be provided in any of the game areas (right area) of the game board 13. Discarding conditions that may be satisfied when a ball enters the ball opening may be set. As described above, the discarded state of the first special symbol is established due to various factors, so that it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing the advantageous period is set.

  Next, the configuration of the right electric accessory 164 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. FIG. 158 (a) is a front perspective view schematically showing a closed state of the right electric auditors product 164 (a state in which the opening / closing door 164r1 is closed). FIG. 158 (b) is a front perspective view of the right electric auditors product 164. It is the front perspective view which showed typically the open state (state in which the opening / closing door 164r1 was open).

  As shown in FIG. 158 (a), convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 so as to prevent the game balls from flowing down. Since the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the door 164r1 are prevented from flowing down by the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, they flow down on the door 164r1 from the left side to the right side along the outer periphery of the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c. That is, on the opening / closing door 164r1, a serpentine flow path is formed by the respective convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c. For this reason, as compared with a case where the respective convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c are not provided (that is, a case where the game ball flows down linearly from the left direction to the right direction as viewed from the front on the opening / closing door 164r1), the opening / closing door 164r1 is provided. The time required to completely flow down the upper surface can be increased. Thereby, while one ball is flowing down the upper surface of the door 164r1, a plurality of balls (subsequent balls) can be easily made to reach the upper surface of the door 164r1. Therefore, the period during which the ball passing through the through gate 67 flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 can be lengthened, and the ball can easily be awarded to the right electric auditors product 164 when the game per game is executed. can do.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 160, in the present embodiment, when a high probability state (probable change state) of a normal symbol is set as a game state, most of the balls passing through the through gate 67 are rightward. In order to enter the electric accessory 164, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the operation content of the game per ordinary symbol, and the path of the ball passing through the through gate 67 are designed. By configuring in this way, the probability change state increases the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery from the normal state, and executes the right-handed game, thereby performing the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal state. Can be easily executed. In addition, during the probable change state, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the second special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player playing the game during the probable change state. it can. In the present embodiment, if a ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the probable change state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time (60) shorter than the normal state is used. Second) is selected.

  With this configuration, during the execution of the second special symbol change for a long time (for example, 10 minutes), the state shifts from the probable state to the latent state, and the state shifts to the latent state. Nevertheless, the occurrence of a situation where the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed for a long time is suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a transition condition for transitioning the gaming state from the probable state to the latent state, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) executed during the probable state is a predetermined number (50 times). A first transition condition that is satisfied when the vehicle has arrived and a second transition condition that is satisfied when a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state are set. are doing. That is, in the probable change state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed, when a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (when the second shift condition is satisfied), the certainty change is performed. Even if the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) executed during the state has not reached the predetermined number (50 times), it is possible to shift to the latent state.

  FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram illustrating a state where the opening / closing door 164r1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 158 (b), the opening / closing door 164r1 slides from the front side in the front view to the rear side in the front view, and moves inside the game board 13 through an opening provided in the game board 13. Is stored. As a result, the right first entrance 164r is opened. Although not described in detail, the door 164r1 is connected to a solenoid (not shown) that can be switched between an on state and an off state based on an instruction from the main control device 110. When current is supplied to the solenoid, the solenoid is turned on and the open / close door 164r1 is opened. That is, the current is passed to the solenoid only when the normal symbol lottery is won and the normal symbol win game is executed. This eliminates the need for power during the period when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and when the open / close door 164r1 occupying a large proportion is in the closed state, so that the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed. .

  When the first entrance 164r is opened (when the opening / closing door 164r1 is opened), the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can win the right electric accessory 164. Further, since the interval in the height direction of the opening for accommodating the opening / closing door 164r1 is sufficiently small with respect to the diameter of the game ball, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 is moved when the sliding movement of the opening / closing door 164r1 is started. The game ball that has flowed down is not stored inside the game board 13 together with the door 164r1, and when the door 164r1 slides into the game board 13, it is located on the upper surface of the door 164r1. The ball can be dropped from the door 164r1 toward the first entrance 164r.

  In the seventh embodiment, by providing three convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1, a configuration is adopted in which the game balls bypass the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, and the game balls pass through the opening / closing door 164r1. Although the passage period is configured to be long, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 has a higher coefficient of friction than other parts (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the variable winning device 65, and the like). It may be made of a large material (for example, an elastic body or the like), or may be subjected to a process that makes it difficult for the game ball to roll (for example, to provide irregularities on the surface).

  FIG. 159 is a plan view of the opening / closing door 164r1 viewed from the vertical upper surface side. As shown in FIG. 159, passage detection sensors 228a to 228f capable of detecting passage of a sphere are embedded in a zigzag path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 where the sphere can roll (easily). These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged apart from each other by a distance at least exceeding the diameter of the game ball in the path formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1. The known outputs of these passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are H (high) when a game ball is arranged above them, and L (low) when there is nothing obstructing the upper part. It is composed of an optical sensor. In the seventh embodiment, a combination of the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is monitored on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Then, the passing state of the ball on the opening / closing door 164r1 is calculated based on the combination of the outputs of the passing detection sensors 228a to 228f, and the ball passing state notification based on the calculation result can be executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible for the player to know how close the ball fired by the right-handed game has approached the right second entrance 645 during the probable change state. Therefore, by shifting the execution timing of the right-handed game during the probable change state based on the content of the ball passing situation notification to be executed, the interest of the game during the probable change state can be improved. In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 159, the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are provided only on the opening / closing door 164r1, but the invention is not limited thereto. A passage detection sensor is provided in an area after passing through to reach the door 164r1 or in an area after passing through the upper surface of the door 164r1, and the number of balls reaching the door 164r1 and the upper surface of the door 164r1 are determined. The number of passed balls may be configured to be detectable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 160, a description will be given of a flowing state when a ball fired by a right-handed game flows down the right side region. FIG. 160 (a) is a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), and schematically shows a ball flowing state when the ball enters the second right entrance 645. FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the state of the ball flowing down when the small hitting game is being executed in the latent state.

  In the seventh embodiment, when a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set, a ball is inserted into the right second entrance 645 by a right-handed game. The game to be balled is configured to be the most advantageous game for the player. When the right-handed game is executed during the latent state, as shown in FIG. 160 (a), the ball passing through the through gate 67 flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 in the closed state, and 2 Enters the ball entrance 645.

  As will be described in detail later, in the latent state, which is a low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is reduced to ２. It is configured such that 30 seconds is set as a period (variation time) from the execution of the normal symbol lottery to the stop display (fixed) of the lottery result. In other words, when a right-handed game is performed in a game state in which a low probability state of a normal symbol is set (a normal state, a latent state, and a big hit game state), the through gate 67 is set at a ratio of one ball to two balls. Is passed, one ball per four balls is won per regular figure, and the game per regular figure is executed once every 60 seconds.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 158, a meandering spherical flow path (passing period 1....) Is provided on the opening / closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 that is opened as a per-game game. 3 seconds), by continuously executing the right-handed game, it is possible with a high probability that a plurality of balls can stay on the open / close door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 in the closed state. Make up.

  Therefore, even when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is possible to make one or two balls win the right electric combination 164 in one minute. In addition, since it is configured so that the ball can easily stay on the opening / closing door 164r1 of the right electric auditorium 164, even if the game period per game is set to a short period (for example, 0.2 seconds open), It is possible to make it easier for the ball to be awarded to the right electric auditors product 164 during the per-game game.

  By setting the game period of the per-figure per game to be short in this manner, when it is determined that the per-figure per-game is to be executed based on the normal symbol stop display mode, the right-handed game is executed. By the time the player reaches the right electric combination 164, it is possible to end the game per day drawing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game in which the right hitting game is executed after it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and the ball is efficiently won to the right electric auditors product 164.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), in the seventh embodiment, a right variable winning device (second attacker) that is opened during a small hit game is provided above (upstream) the through gate 67. Is provided. Therefore, even in the state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, if the second special symbol lottery can be smoothly executed in the gaming state (the latent state), the small hitting game is executed. It is possible to suppress the ball from reaching the through gate 67 and the right electric accessory 164.

  With this configuration, even when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is more difficult for the right electric accessory 164 to win a ball in the latent state than in the normal state or during the jackpot game. can do. Therefore, in the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game, by making the right electric auditors 164 win a ball, it is possible to acquire the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball number) up to the upper limit. However, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the number of special figure 1 reserved balls due to the right-handed game executed during the latent state.

<Production contents in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 161 to FIG. 165, among the various effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, characteristic effect contents will be described. Specifically, the flow of the effect from the setting of the probable state as the gaming state to the setting of the latent state and the flow of the effect executed during the latent state will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, a description will be given of the flow of the effect from the setting of the probable state as the gaming state to the setting of the latent state. In this embodiment, a part of the case where the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery is configured so that a probable change state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game. I have. When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the state where the probable change state is set, the game state is changed from the probable change state to the latent state. Specifically, as the probability change state, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot winning, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. That is, when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning a big hit after the probability change state is set, the game state is changed from the probability change state to the latent state. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the probable change state is set, an effect is performed to indicate a period until the latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set. This makes it possible to notify the player of the conditions until the latent state is set in an easily understandable manner.

  FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a state in which the probable change state (probable change mode) is set. FIG. 161 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied in the probability change mode. .

  As described above, the seventh embodiment is configured to directly shift to the most advantageous latent mode (latent state) by elapse (addition) of the number of time savings in the probable change state. Therefore, in the probable state (probable mode), an effect aiming at the latent state is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), an effect is performed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit climbs a rocky mountain. In addition, in the display area HR1 formed above the character 811 climbing the rocky mountain, the character “Aim for the top!” Is displayed, and in the display area HR2 formed on the right side of the character 811, the probability change mode is displayed. Is displayed, indicating the remaining number of times of change (number of lotteries) until the end of the period (the number of time savings passes a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times)). The example of FIG. 161 (a) illustrates a case where the character “remaining 50 m” is displayed in the display area HR2. The remaining meter display up to the top is decremented and displayed by 1 m each time the variable display (variable display of the third symbol) is executed once. ) Can be easily understood to be the remaining number of fluctuations before shifting to the latent mode.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the meter display displayed in the display area HR2 is changed (subtracted) every time the variable display of the third symbol is executed, and the meter display after the change (subtraction) is performed. When the display mode is a specific transition display mode (for example, “0 m remaining”), the game state is configured to shift from the probable state to the latent state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is configured so as to be added each time the variable display of the third symbol is executed, and the latent mode is set when the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display is added to a specific numerical value. You may. Further, it is not always necessary to change the display mode of the meter display every time the variable display of the third symbol is executed. For example, when the variable display of the third symbol is executed a plurality of times, the display mode of the meter display is changed. It may be configured to be variable. With this configuration, the timing at which the display mode of the meter display changes can be made different from the variation display timing of the third symbol. By performing the effect of greatly reducing the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display at a time while recognizing the approximate period until is set, an unexpected effect can be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a display mode of the meter display displayed in the display area HR2, it is assumed that the period until the latent mode is set is short (the timing at which the transition condition is satisfied is approaching). In order to notify the player, only the effect of subtracting the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display is executed, but a specific transition display mode (for example, "Remaining 0 m" may be displayed, and for example, an effect of temporarily increasing the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display may be executed while the probable change state is set. This makes it difficult for the player to predict when the latent state is set, so that the player can play the game while always expecting the latent state to be set.

  In this case, at least a plurality of transition conditions, specifically, a jackpot type that triggered the setting of the probability change state, and a transition condition for the transition from the probability change state to the latent probability state, Depending on the game state, as a time-saving ending condition for ending the time-saving state, a first shifting condition that is likely to be satisfied (for example, 20 times of saving time) and a second shifting condition that is harder to be satisfied than the first shifting condition ( (For example, 50 times), a time saving end condition is set, and when the probable change state is set, a display indicating a period until the first transition condition that is likely to be satisfied is satisfied. An effect in which a mode (for example, “remaining 20 m”) is displayed in the display area HR2, and when the actually set time saving end condition is the first transition condition, the display mode of the meter display is directly subtracted. When the time saving termination condition that is actually set is the second transition condition, a specific transition time is satisfied at a timing when the second transition condition is satisfied while increasing the display mode of the meter display based on the remaining number of times saved. What is necessary is just to comprise so that a transition display mode may be displayed. With this configuration, when the probability change state is set after the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what the time saving end condition set for the current probability change state is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions are set in a probable change state set after the execution of a specific jackpot game. More specifically, the first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol change (lottery) executed during the probable change state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), and the execution during the probable change state. The second time reduction ending condition that is established when the result of the special symbol change (lottery) performed is a specific result (for example, a small hit C win), is set. The display area HR2 is configured to display a meter display based on the first time-saving end condition capable of calculating the timing at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied in advance. That is, during the probable change state, the meter display is decremented each time the special symbol change is executed, and when the meter display becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, “0 m remaining”), the latent display state is set. The effect of notifying that the operation is performed is executed. On the other hand, before the first time saving end condition described above is satisfied (before the display mode of the meter display changes to a specific transition display mode), if the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the display of the meter display is displayed. As a shortened effect in which the mode (numerical value) rapidly decreases, an effect in which the meter display is in a specific transition display mode (for example, “0 m remaining”) is performed after the effect in which the character 811 climbs the mountain vigorously.

  In this way, by configuring the meter display displayed in the display area HR2 to be variable in various modes, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the transition to the latent state is made, so that Can be played while always expecting the player who is playing the game to shift to the latent state. In addition, even if any of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, the transition to the latent state can be notified to the player by displaying the specific transition display mode as the display mode of the meter display, An easy-to-understand effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161 (b), a description will be given of the contents of the effect that is executed when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the probable change state. FIG. 162 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents when the number of time savings has been elapsed (the time saving end condition has been satisfied) in the probable change mode (probable change state). As shown in FIG. 162 (a), when the time-saving end condition (for example, a predetermined number of special symbol changes) is satisfied, the effect of the character 811 reaching the top of the rocky mountain is executed, and the display area HR1 is displayed. The character "Arrive at the top!" Is displayed. In addition, a character “0 m remaining” is displayed in the display area HR2. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the state has shifted to the latent state (latency mode).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set, by executing the right-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed more than when the gaming state other than the latent state is set. Is configured to be easily executed, and a small hit is won with a high probability (higher probability than the lottery of the first special symbol) in the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, by executing the second special symbol lottery frequently, the small hitting game is frequently executed, and the player is allowed to execute a game capable of acquiring many benefits (prize balls). . Hereinafter, a game in which the small hit game is frequently executed by the second special symbol lottery in the latent state will be referred to as “RUSH”, and the effect performed during the RUSH game will be referred to as “RUSH effect”.

  FIG. 162 (a) shows the state from the transition to the latent state (latency mode) to the state in which a prize ball can be actually obtained (until the small win is won in the second special symbol lottery). It is a figure showing a display mode in an interim state (preparation state). As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the preparatory state, the character "Right-handed" is displayed in the small area Dm3, and "Rush is started by right-handed!" In the display area HR1. Is displayed. In addition, the text “RUSH in preparation” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the player enters a RUSH state in which a prize ball can be acquired by performing a right-handed game.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the probable state, but the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the latent state is set. You may not be able to. Specifically, when the second special symbol change is executed during the probable change state, and while the second special symbol change is being executed, the time saving end condition is established based on the execution of the first special symbol change. Means that the gaming state shifts from the probable state to the latent state while the second special symbol change is being executed. In this case, a situation occurs in which the second special symbol change in the latent state is not executed until the currently executed second special symbol change (the second special symbol change whose change is started during the probable change state) is stopped and displayed. .

  As described above, when a period during which the second special symbol lottery cannot be newly performed occurs after the latent state is set, the display screen (RUSH preparation) shown in FIG. By displaying the (screen), it is possible to notify the player that the RUSH game will be executed later, so that even when the latent state is set, the RUSH game is not executed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, at the timing when the gaming state shifts from the probable state to the latent state, the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation being executed is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds or longer). In the case of, the RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. 162 (a) is configured to be executed. However, after the game state in which the advantageous game that is advantageous to the player can be executed is set, the actual advantage is set. If the length of the period until the execution condition of the game is satisfied is a predetermined period, it may be configured to notify that the advantageous game will be executed later. For example, during the disadvantageous game (probable change state), In a pachinko machine 10 in which a game method (for example, left-handed game) to be executed by a player and a game method (for example, right-handed game) to be executed by a player during an advantageous game (probable state) are different, Latent state is set Using the period until the second special symbol variations are actually executed by the right-handed player since the, it may be configured to perform RUSH preparing display shown in FIG. 162 (a).

  Further, for example, in the disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player, it is easier to win a miss in the normal symbol lottery than in the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and the selected variable time is longer. A pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be easily configured, and that is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is easily executed during a general symbol per game that is executed when a normal symbol lottery is won. Then, when the advantageous game state is set, the RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. 162 (a) is executed during the period until the normal symbol change executed during the disadvantageous game state is stopped and displayed. May be configured. In this case, with respect to the display screen shown in FIG. 162 (a), the display mode of “right-handed” displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 is not displayed (displayed so as to be hard to see), or “preparation” is displayed in the display area HR1. Please wait for a while. " That is, although the latent state is set, the player is notified that the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed (is difficult to execute) even if the right-handed game is executed. The RUSH preparation period display may be displayed as described above. Thus, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the RUSH game is not executed in spite of the execution of the right-handed game, and the player is not distrusted.

  Then, when the second special symbol change (lottery) is executed during the latent state, the display screen shown in FIG. 162 (b) is displayed, and the RUSH effect is executed. FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the RUSH game is executed. As shown in FIG. 162 (b), when the ball enters the second right entrance 645 during the latent state and the second special symbol change in which the small hit is won is executed, the display area HR1 is displayed. The character "RUSH START" is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the character "RUSH rush !!" Further, an icon (treasure box 812) imitating a treasure box is displayed in the main display area Dm. Thus, during the RUSH game, it is possible to easily inform the player that the effect (RUSH effect) using the icon (treasure box 812) imitating a treasure box is executed.

  Next, the display contents of the RUSH effect executed during the RUSH game in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display contents displayed during the RUSH effect. As shown in FIG. 163, when the RUSH effect is executed, an effect in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812 is executed. Then, from the opened treasure box 812, an effect is executed in which a lottery result display mode indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery this time is displayed. As the lottery result display mode, for example, when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, a display mode imitating "V" is displayed, and when the lottery result is a big hit, the character of "this" is displayed. Is displayed, and if it is off, a display pattern imitating a "cross mark" is displayed. As described above, the effect of opening the treasure box 812 and the effect of displaying the contents of the treasure box 812 can be displayed on the constantly displayed treasure box 812, so that the lottery result of the second special symbol can be displayed. And the effect of displaying the treasure box 812, the effect of opening the treasure box 812, and the effect of displaying the contents of the treasure box 812, in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter. Also, since the number of effects to be executed can be reduced, it is possible to execute effects that are easy for the player to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164 and FIG. 165, an effect performed during a super RUSH game, which is advantageous to a player during a RUSH game, during another RUSH game will be described. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol executed during the latent state is configured to be variable based on the number of special figure reservations stored (the number of first special symbol storages). Specifically, in the second special symbol change executed when the number of special figure reservations is a specific number (for example, 1), the second special symbol change executed when the number of special figure reservations is other than the specific number is performed. It is configured such that a shorter change time is more easily selected than the special symbol change. As described above, while the latent state is set, an effect of giving a bonus (prize ball) to the player is performed by frequent occurrence of small hit games based on the small hit winning of the second special symbol lottery. .

  Therefore, the shorter the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation during the latent state, the larger the ratio of the small hitting game period to the unit period can be, so that the game state can be set to be more playable by the player. it can. Hereinafter, during the RUSH game, the RUSH game during the period in which the number of special figure reservations becomes a specific number and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation becomes short will be referred to as a super RUSH game, and will be described.

  First, a description will be given of the effect contents executed when the RUSH game is switched to the super RUSH game. FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents executed in a state where the special figure reservation number is easily subtracted during the RUSH game. In the present embodiment, when a specific small hit (for example, small hit B) is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the latent state, the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly removed. Is configured to stop display. Further, a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is easily selected for the first special symbol variation executed during the latent state. Furthermore, it is configured such that a reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball) can be obtained by a right-handed game executed during the latent state. In other words, the configuration is such that it is difficult to reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls based on the elapse of the fluctuation time while executing the RUSH game during the latent state.

  Therefore, in order to reduce the number of reserved special figure 1 balls until the condition for executing the super RUSH game is satisfied, it is necessary to win a specific small hit in the second special symbol lottery. Then, when the second special symbol variation that has won the specific small hit is executed, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), the character "Aim for more customers" is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the main In the display area Dm, an effect for the character 811 to aim at a higher position is executed.

  Specifically, a display mode indicating a stage corresponding to a difference between the currently acquired special figure 1 number of reserved balls and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls that is a condition for executing the super RUSH game is displayed. In the display area HR71 formed on the right side of the main display area Dm, a guidance suggestion display for suggesting a situation until the super RUSH game is executed to the player is displayed.

  Then, when a specific small hit is won a plurality of times during the RUSH game and the number of reserved special figure 1 balls reaches the specific number (2), the display mode shown in FIG. 164 (b) is displayed. FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of display contents displayed when the execution condition of the super RUSH game is satisfied. When the execution condition of the super RUSH game (for example, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 becomes 2) is established, the character 811 reaches the top, and the display mode for notifying that the execution condition of the super RUSH game is established is manually set. The effect taken is executed. Then, in the display area HR71, a display mode “2” indicating that the current special figure 1 reserved ball count has the execution condition of the super RUSH game is displayed.

  164 (a) and (b) are displayed, that is, after the effect mode indicating the super RUSH entry is set in the special figure discarding setting process (see S4643 in FIG. 186) described later, When the special figure 1 hold is acquired, the super RUSH game may not be executed when the first special symbol change being executed is discarded. Therefore, in a state where FIGS. 164 (a) and (b) are displayed, a process of determining whether or not a special figure 1 reservation has been newly executed is executed. Is executed. For example, when the special figure 1 reservation is newly acquired, an effect in which the top shown in FIG. 164 (a) moves away in accordance with the number of the newly acquired special figure 1 reservations is executed. Thereby, even if the super RUSH entry trigger disappears during the execution of the effect suggesting the super RUSH entry, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

  Further, in FIGS. 164 (a) and (b), the effect contents when the super RUSH game is executed by reducing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has been described. Even when the super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of balls, an effect indicating super rush entry is executed. In this case, a process is performed to determine whether or not the present time is in a state in which an advantageous period (a period during which a super RUSH game is executed) is set by increasing the number of special figure 1 reservations by one (increasing advantageous state). If it is determined that the game is in the increase advantage state, it is determined whether or not the game per ordinary drawing is executed. In this determination, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol fluctuation being executed and the prefetching process based on the information held in the ordinary symbol (the same process as the prefetching process for the special symbol executed in each of the above-described embodiments is performed by the ordinary symbol) Is determined based on the result of pre-determination (pre-reading result) as to whether or not the information for winning the public figure is included in the information processing. Then, when it is determined that the game per ordinary drawing is to be executed, a super RUSH entry effect for indicating that an opportunity to increase the number of special figure 1 reservations will come soon.

  As a production mode of this super RUSH entry performance, the player is notified that the super RUSH game is to be executed by increasing the number of special figure 1 reservations (by making the right electric role 164 win a ball). The notification mode is set. Thereby, it is possible to easily establish a condition for causing the player to execute the super RUSH game. In the present embodiment, the player can grasp the conditions for executing the super RUSH game, that is, the case where the super RUSH game is executed by reducing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, and the case where the special figure 1 reserved In the case where the super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of balls, an effect that enables the player to identify the super RUSH game is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the super RUSH game is executed. A configuration in which the player is notified only that it is in a state in which the condition for making it easy to be satisfied is established, and the player is allowed to select whether to execute a game for increasing the number of special figure 1 reservations or to execute a game for decreasing the number. You may.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the contents of the effect performed during the super RUSH will be described. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen during the super RUSH. When the super RUSH game is executed, the second special symbol change having a shorter change time than the normal RUSH game is easily executed, and as a result, the execution interval of the small hit game is shortened, and the small hit game is executed in a unit time. The number of times can be made larger than in a normal RUSH game. Therefore, during the super RUSH game, a game period that is more advantageous to the player than during the normal RUSH game is provided. Then, during the Super RUSH game, as shown in FIG. 165 (a), the character "Super RUSH" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a plurality of treasure boxes 812a to 812c are displayed. Then, the letters "speed up" are displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In other words, during the Super RUSH game, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol change becomes short (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the lottery of the second special symbol lottery is performed using one fluctuation period of the second special symbol change. Because it is difficult to execute the effect that suggests the result (the effect of displaying the treasure box) and the effect of informing the lottery result (the effect of opening the treasure box and display the contents), it is difficult to execute the The treasure boxes 812a to 812c are displayed, and an effect of opening the treasure box based on the lottery result is executed as appropriate.

  Specifically, a plurality of treasure chests having different display modes (for example, colors and designs) are displayed in advance, and an effect of opening a treasure chest according to the result of the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed is executed. Is configured. In this case, as a lottery result in which the lottery result of the second special symbol is advantageous to the player, for example, when a jackpot in which the latent state is set again after the end of the jackpot game is won, a rainbow or gold As a lottery result that opens a luxurious treasure chest and is disadvantageous to the player, for example, a jackpot in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, that is, a tatter that wins the RUSH game, An effect to open the treasure chest is executed.

  In this way, by displaying a plurality of treasure boxes having different display modes in advance, the lottery result can be changed without performing an effect of changing the display mode of the treasure box displayed according to the result of the second special symbol lottery. (An effect of changing the display mode of the open treasure chest) can be easily executed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the second special symbol mainly executed during the RUSH game (super RUSH game) does not have the hold storage function, for example, the winning information of the second special symbol stored and stored is not used. It is determined in advance, and based on the result of the preliminary determination, an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) indicating a lottery result cannot be executed from a period before the second special symbol change based on the winning information is executed. Is configured. Therefore, since it is difficult to set a long period for performing the effect indicating the lottery result of each second special symbol lottery, it is possible to further enhance the effect of displaying a plurality of treasure chests having different display modes in advance. it can.

  When a configuration in which a plurality of treasure boxes having different display modes are displayed in advance as in the present embodiment is used, the number of treasure boxes displayed simultaneously and the display mode may be set at random, The display mode may be configured to be variable according to the number of games (the number of executions of the special symbol lottery) in the state. In addition, the current special figure reserved ball number (reserved ball number of the first special symbol) is read, and it is determined whether or not the super RUSH game is easy to end based on the read result, and the treasure box is determined based on the determination result. May be configured to vary the display mode and the number of displays. With such a configuration, not only the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery but also the game status of the super RUSH game using the display mode and the number of display of the treasure box can be made to be understood by the player, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165 (b), a description will be given of the effect contents of the effect indicating the end of the super RUSH game during the super RUSH game. FIG. 165 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed in an end suggestion effect indicating the end of the super RUSH game. As described above, in the present embodiment, the super RUSH game is executed when the number of special figure reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is a specific number (one or two). The right side area of the game board 13 is configured so that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls 1) can be increased by a game (right-handed game) executed during the super RUSH game. (See FIG. 157).

  Therefore, during the Super RUSH game, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls may increase, that is, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls may increase from two to three, and the super RUSH game may end. In such a case, an end suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 165 (b) is executed. In the state shown in FIG. 165 (b), the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is two, and during the Super RUSH game, a normal symbol is won (winning probability 1/30), and the right electric accessory 164 is This is an end suggestion effect that is executed when the game is released, and a display mode indicating that the super RUSH game is ended is displayed in the main display area Dm, indicating that the character 811 is crouching down. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the character “Pinch to end” is displayed.

  By executing the end suggestion effect in this manner, a ball is awarded to the right electric auditors product 164 during the super RUSH game, and the super RUSH game shifts to a normal RUSH game due to an increase in the number of reserved special figure 1 balls. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In the example shown in FIG. 165 (b), in the state where the Super RUSH game ends, that is, in a state where the Super RUSH game ends due to an increase in the special figure 1 pending ball number, the special figure 1 pending ball number is increased. Although it is configured not to notify the player that the state is likely to increase (a state in which the game is executed per day), the present invention is not limited to this. A guidance message may be displayed to display a comment "Sasero" and make it difficult for the ball to win the right electric accessory 164 during the per-game game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the super RUSH game from ending based on the increase in the number of reserved special figure 1 balls, and to display the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to the player during the super RUSH game. Can be watched, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The execution timing of the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 165 (b) may be the start timing of a per-figure game, or the normal symbol fluctuation (variation time of 10 to 30 seconds) that has been won per per-figure. The start timing, the timing when the remaining variation time of the ordinary symbol variation reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the information included in the ordinary symbol holding ball is determined in advance, and a predetermined value set based on the result of the preliminary determination is determined. Timing (for example, 30 seconds before the game per day is executed) may be used.

  Furthermore, when the above-described guidance notification (the guidance notification that interrupts the right-handed game to make it difficult for the ball to win the right electric auditorium 164 during the per-game game) is executed, the notification content of the guidance notification is performed. When the right-handed game is interrupted after grasping, the ball fired by the right-handed game executed before the interruption is guided to the right electric auditorium 164 in such a period that the ball cannot be won. The notification may be executed, for example, the guide notification may be executed 10 seconds before the game per day is executed. This allows the player who has grasped the guidance notification to reliably execute a game without increasing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. In addition, in the case where the game per ordinary figure is not actually executed, or in the case where, for example, the information included in the ordinary symbol holding ball is determined in advance, and the case in which the game per ordinary figure is executed after 60 seconds is determined in advance, that is, the right The end suggestion effect (so-called gaseous effect) described above may be executed at a timing when the number of reserved special figure 1 reserved balls cannot increase without interrupting the betting game.

  In FIG. 165 (b) described above, the special figure 1 reserved ball number is increased and the special figure 1 reserved ball number is no longer a specific number (1 or 2), and the super RUSH game can be ended. Conversely, the effect of the end suggestion was explained, but conversely, as the number of special figure 1 reserved balls decreases, the number of special figure 1 special figure 1 reserved balls no longer becomes a specific number (one or two), and the Super RUSH game ends. In some cases.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 166, an end suggestion effect that is executed when the super RUSH game ends when the number of reserved special figure 1 balls decreases will be described. FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect screen of the end suggestion effect performed when the super RUSH game ends when the number of reserved special figure 1 balls decreases. The state shown in FIG. 166 is a state where the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is one and the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation being executed is 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 166, an end suggestion effect is executed in the main display area Dm on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode similar to the display mode shown in FIG. 165 (b) described above. .

  In this case, the first special symbol change is stopped and displayed after 1.5 seconds, and the next special symbol change is started, so that the number of reserved special figure 1 balls becomes 0 and the super RUSH game ends. Become. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters “Pinch of the end! By executing the end suggestion effect in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player that the Super RUSH game will end unless the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is increased.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of occasions for decreasing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls are provided. As shown in FIG. There is a case where a specific small hit (small hit B) is won in the special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped (discarded). In any state where the opportunity is established (can be established), by executing the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 166, the game is provided to the player when the super RUSH game shifts to the normal RUSH game. It is possible to suppress giving a strange feeling to the person.

  As the timing for executing the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 166, the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation being executed or the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation winning the small hit B is determined. It is also possible to calculate the remaining period until the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes 0 based on the determination result, and execute the calculation at the timing when the calculation result becomes a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the execution is performed at a predetermined interval (for example, at an interval of 30 seconds) from the timing when the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is reduced from two to one. In other words, the state in which the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is one is a state in which the super RUSH game continues even if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases by one, so the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes zero. The end suggestion effect may be executed in order to reduce the number of reserved special figure 1 spheres to two without determining the timing of obtaining.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the super RUSH game is configured to be able to end even when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases or decreases. Up to now, it is possible to execute a game in which the Super RUSH game is continued by increasing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls and a game in which the super RUSH game is continued without increasing the special figure 1 reserved number. It is possible to provide a novel playability that is not available.

  It should be noted that the effect content is different from the effect content of the present embodiment, and for example, an end suggestion effect executed in a state where the end condition for ending the super RUSH game is easily satisfied by increasing the number of reserved special figure 1 balls (FIG. 165) (See FIG. 166) and the end suggestion effect (see FIG. 166) executed in a state in which the end condition for ending the super RUSH game is likely to be satisfied by reducing the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is made the same. Alternatively, an effect may be performed in which the player is allowed to select whether or not to continue the right-handed game in the sub display area Ds. As a result, the game method selected by the player, that is, the game method of continuing the super RUSH game by executing the right-handed game to increase the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, and increasing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls The duration of the Super RUSH game can be made different depending on the game method of continuing the Super RUSH game by interrupting the right-handed game so as not to allow the player to actively play the game. Can be. In addition, when the player selects an incorrect game method, the game method is a game method that makes it easier to satisfy the end condition of the super RUSH game, so that the game method selected by the player is changed to a later game result. The effect can be increased.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the period in which the super RUSH game is executed is configured to be in a specific range (one or two) in which the special figure 1 reserved ball number is continuous. Without limitation, for example, the special figure 1 reserved ball number in which the super RUSH game is executed may be set in a discontinuous range. For example, the special figure 1 reserved ball number may be one and three. In such a case, a super RUSH game may be executed. In this case, as the end suggestion effect, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 can be changed from 1 to 0 or when the number of reserved balls can be changed from 3 to 4, as shown in FIG. 165 (b) and FIG. When the same end suggestion effect is performed and the special figure 1 reserved ball number can be changed from 1 to 2 or from 3 to 2, instead of suggesting the end of Super RUSH, the super RUSH game It is preferable that a standby effect is executed as an effect indicating that a transition to the standby state is made. That is, according to the above-described example, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is two, even if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls decreases or increases, the super RUSH game is executed, Compared to the case where the number of reserved balls 1 is 0 or four, the super RUSH game is more likely to be executed (standby state). It can be informed clearly. Also, in this case, the first special symbol change executed when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 2 (special figure 1 reserved ball in a state where the special figure 1 reserved ball used in the first special symbol lottery this time is subtracted) The variation time selected in the first special symbol variation when the number of balls is two) is configured to be shorter than when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is zero or four. May be. As a result, the transition from the standby state to the super RUSH game can be facilitated, and the player who has transitioned to the standby state can be motivated to play the game.

  Next, a game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a transition diagram schematically showing transition contents of a gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167, in the present embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) and the probable state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) as the gaming state in this embodiment. , The latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) can be set. The amount of privilege given to the player playing the game is different depending on the set game state. Specifically, when the latent state is set, the most privilege is given to the player, and then, the amount of privilege given to the player in the order of the probability change state and the normal state is reduced. Make up.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, a normal state is set as the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 (a state in which the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 122). Then, during the normal state, a special symbol lottery is easier to perform when the left-handed game is executed than when the right-handed game is executed, and therefore, the left-handed game aiming for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. Is executed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 during the normal state, a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/200 is executed. When the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot type (jackpot A7) in which the normal state is set again after the jackpot game is completed at a rate of 35% is set, and after the jackpot game is completed at a rate of 45% The jackpot type (jackpot B7) in which the state is set is set, and the jackpot type (jackpot C7) in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed is set at a rate of 20%.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the special symbol lottery in the normal state wins the jackpot, it is most likely to shift to the probable change state, and then to the normal state, and to shift to the latent state most. It is configured to be difficult. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game ability in which a latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set by passing through a plurality of game states.

  Next, when the probability change state is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so that the right electric accessory 164 is more easily opened than the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the first ball entry is performed by the left-handed game. Rather than letting the ball enter the mouth 64, it is easier for the ball to enter the right first entry opening 164r by the right-handed game, so that a game for executing the first special symbol lottery by the right-handed game is executed. . Further, during the probable change state, the special symbol is in a high probability state, and a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/60 is executed. If the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the probable change state, the jackpot type (jackpot A7) in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 35%, and the jackpot game is set at a rate of 45% The jackpot type (jackpot B7) for which the latent state is set after the end is set, and the jackpot type (jackpot C7) for which the probability change state is set again after the end of the jackpot game is set at a rate of 20%.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, the probable change state is configured to be more easily shifted to the latent state when the jackpot is won than in the normal state which is the initial state. With this, when the jackpot is won during the normal state and the state shifts to the probability change state, the state of the probability change can be set to a state that is easier to shift to the latent state than the normal state. It is possible to make it easy to continue playing the game.

  Also, if the special symbol change is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot in the state where the probability change state is set, the condition for terminating the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (time saving termination condition) is satisfied. , So as to shift to a latent state. In other words, when the probability change state is set, the first transition condition (the probability of establishment is approximately 35%) that is satisfied when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without the jackpot winning (the winning probability of 1/60), When the jackpot is won during the state and the jackpot B7 is set, the latent state is set when any of the second shift conditions (satisfaction probability is about 30%) is satisfied. Will be. Further, the first transition condition described above is one in which the probability of establishment varies according to the remaining period of the probable change state. The first transition condition is satisfied (the probability of establishment is about 90%) when the winning is achieved in the 50th special symbol change (winning probability 59/60).

  As described above, in the case where a plurality of transition conditions for transitioning the gaming state from the probability change state to the latent state are provided, a transition condition (first transition condition) in which the establishment probability varies according to the number of executions of the special symbol change. And a transition condition (second transition condition) in which the probability of establishment does not vary according to the number of times of execution of the special symbol change, a player playing a game in a certain change state is provided with a game The desired game result can be changed according to the progress of the game. Therefore, the probability that the latent state is set based on the establishment of the second transition condition is shorter than the probability that the latent state is set based on the establishment of the first transition condition immediately after the probable change state is set. During the period in which the second transition condition is higher, an effect is performed to inspire the player to determine whether the second transition condition is satisfied. If a predetermined period has elapsed since the probable change state was set, that is, the first transition condition was satisfied. The first transition condition is established for the player during a period in which the probability that the latent information is set based on the second transition condition is higher than the probability that the latent state is set based on the establishment of the second transition condition. It is possible to execute an effect that inspires whether or not.

  Next, the flow of the game during the latent state will be described. When the latent state is set, as described above, the RUSH game corresponding to the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 reserved balls) is executed. More specifically, when the number of reserved special figures (number of reserved special figure 1 balls) is 0, 3, or 4, a normal length is easily selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation during the latent state. If the RUSH game is executed and the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 reserved balls) is one or two, a shorter time than usual is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation during the latent state. It is configured such that an easy super RUSH game is executed. In this way, by changing the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation according to the game situation (special figure 1 number of reserved balls), the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery per unit time, and thus the small hit game Can be varied, so that the player can perform a game in the latent state while expecting a more advantageous RUSH game to be performed.

  Both the RUSH game and the super RUSH game described above are games executed during the latent state, and the winning probability of the special symbol (winning in the second special symbol) is set to common (1/60). ing. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is set to be a high probability (59/60). If a jackpot is won during the latent state, a jackpot type (jackpot D7) in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game is set at a rate of 35%, and the latent state is set at the end of the jackpot game at a rate of 65%. Is set again. On the other hand, when the small hit is won during the latent state, the gaming state does not change. That is, once the latent state is set, the RUSH game (game in the latent state) can be continued until the jackpot D7 (35% of the jackpot winning) is set.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 174. The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described fourth embodiment in that a part of the ROM 202, a part of the RAM 203, and a sound lamp control provided in the main control device 110 are provided. The difference is that a part of the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is changed, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 168, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the above-described fourth embodiment (see FIG. 116) in that the first random number 7 table 202fa is replaced with the first random number table 202a. The small random number 7 table is replaced with the small random number table 202de, the second random number 7 table 202fc is replaced with the second random number table 202b, and the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd is replaced with the large hit type selection 4 table 202db. The difference is that a variation pattern selection seven table 202fe is provided in place of the pattern selection four table 202dc, and a small hit type selection seven table 202ff and a normal figure variation pattern selection seven table 202fg are newly provided. ing. Further, although not shown, the seventh embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that the range in which the value of the first random number counter C1 can be updated ranges from “0 to 399” to “0 to 599”. The difference is that the range in which the value of the second random number counter C2 can be updated is changed from "0-999" to "0-299". The other configurations are the same, and therefore are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted.

  First, the first random number 7 table 202fa will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (b). FIG. 168 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 7 table 202fa. This first random number per 7 table 202fa is determined to be a hit based on the symbol type of the special symbol and the probability state of the special symbol with respect to the above-described first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23B). The difference is that the value of the first random number counter C1 is defined.

  Specifically, regardless of the type of the special symbol for which the special symbol lottery has been executed (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), if the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot determination value (special The range of the value of the first random number counter C1 “0 to 2” is defined as a value determined to be a big hit in a symbol lottery, and if the special symbol high probability state is set, the first hit random value is set as the big hit determination value. The range of the value “0 to 9” of the random number counter C1 per one is defined. That is, in the seventh embodiment, a jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/200, regardless of which type of special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the special symbol low-probability state is set. Regardless of which type of special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state in which the high probability state is set, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/60. In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit for each special symbol type is commonly defined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The value of the random number counter C1 per one may be defined to be the jackpot determination value, or the number of values of the first random number counter C1 that becomes the jackpot determination value for each special symbol type may be different. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the value (“0 to 2”) of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit when the low probability state of the special symbol is set is set to the special symbol. Even when the high probability state is set, the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit is configured. With this configuration, the first prefetching process (see S1775 in FIG. 135) executed in the start winning process 4 (see S152 in FIG. 134) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the second prefetching In the process (see S1764 in FIG. 136), for example, when the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is acquired, a special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information is executed. It is possible to predict in advance that the winning information includes the information for winning the jackpot without executing the process of determining (predicting) the gaming state at a certain point in time. In addition, without being limited to this, at least a part or all of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is not determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. The contents of the first random number table 202fa may be defined. With this configuration, when the same value of the first random number counter C1 is obtained, the value is set when the jackpot determination is performed using the obtained value of the first random number counter C1. The determination result can be made different depending on the game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for an illegal act of acquiring the value of the specific first random number counter C1 to be performed.

  Next, the contents of the small hit random number 7 table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit random number 7 table 202fb. The small hit random number 7 table 202fb is different from the small hit random number table 202da (see FIG. 117) in the above-described fourth embodiment in that the range of possible values of the first random number counter C1 is changed. The type is different only in that the range of the small hit determination value in the second special symbol is changed to “10-599”, and other types are the same, so that detailed description thereof is omitted. In other words, the seventh embodiment is configured so that a small hit is won with a high probability (590/600) in the lottery of the second special symbol without winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  Next, the contents of the second random number 7 table 202fc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 168 (d), this second random number 7 table 202fc indicates that the acquired second random number counter C4 has a value of “0” when the ordinary symbol is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. In the case where the normal symbol is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol hit is specified in the range of the acquired second random number counter C4 of “0 to 299”.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability (1/299) of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the low probability. As a result, it is possible to make the execution probability of the game per ordinary symbol different between the ordinary state and the latent state which are the low probability state of the ordinary symbol and the probable state which is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the same game method (right-handed game) is executed in the probable state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set and the latent state in which the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. It is configured so that: Then, in the right-handed game executed during the latent state, a game in which the second special symbol lottery is executed by causing a ball to enter the right second entrance 645 (see FIG. 157) is performed. In the right-handed game executed in this way, a game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed by causing the right electric accessory 164 to enter a ball is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, details of the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd. The big hit type selection 7 table 202fd is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, like the big hit type selection table 202d in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 169, in the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment, three big hits of "big hit A7" to "big hit C7" are set as the big hit types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The type is specified. On the other hand, as the jackpot types of the second special symbol, two jackpot types of "big hit D7" to "big hit E7" are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 169, as the big hit type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 34”, while the big hit type is “big hit A7”. It is defined in association. The "big hit A7" is a type of big hit (8 rounds (R) normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the special symbol is set to the normal state after the big hit is completed. In addition, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, whether or not the high probability state (saving time state) of the ordinary symbol is set varies. More specifically, when the "big hit A7" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is not set (0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203f). That is, when the "big hit A7" is won in the normal state, the probable state, and the latent state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set again.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit A7" is 35, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot A7" is determined is 35% (35/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 169, "big hit B7" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 79". The “big hit B7” is a type of big hit (eight round positive change big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the special symbol is set to the special change state after the big hit end. In addition, when the "big hit B7" is won in the normal state, 50 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, while when the "big hit B7" is won in the probable change state and the latent state, the time saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0.

  That is, when the "big hit B7" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to the relatively advantageous probability change state (50 times). On the other hand, when the "big hit B7" is won in the probability change state or the latent state, the number of times saved is set to 0, and the gaming state after the end of the big win is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, if the "big hit B7" is won in the normal state, it is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the winning is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the winning type is the most advantageous in the gaming state.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit B7" is 45, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit B7" is determined is 45% (45/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 169, "big hit C7" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". The “big hit C7” is a type of big hit (8 round positive change big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the special symbol is set to the special change state after the end of the big hit. In addition, when the "big hit C7" is won in the probability change, 50 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, and when the "big hit C7" is won in the normal state and the latent state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. Is set to 0.

  That is, in the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player to win the "big hit C7" than in the "big hit B7", and in the probable change state, the "big hit B7" is won rather than the "big hit C7". The player who wins is more advantageous to the player. Further, during the latent state, the degree of advantage does not change between the case where the "big hit B7" is won and the case where the "big hit C7" is won.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit C7" is 20, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot C11" is determined is 20% (20/100).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the rate of transition to the gaming state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is determined. The latent state is set at 20% during the normal state, 45% during the probable state, and 65% during the latent state, so that the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game. . By configuring in this way, when the gaming state transitions, for example, if the jackpot is won during the normal state, and if the probable change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the state shifts to the latent state than the normal state. Since it is possible to provide an easy advantageous state, it is possible to enthusiastically continue the game for a player for whom the latent state has not been set.

  As shown in FIG. 169, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in a range of “0 to 34”, and the jackpot type is “big hit D7”. Is associated and defined. The “big hit D7” is a big hit type in which the same content as the above “big hit A7” is defined, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the type in which the special state is set to a normal state after the big hit is completed. Jackpot (8 rounds (R) normal jackpot). In addition, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, whether or not the high probability state (saving time state) of the ordinary symbol is set varies. More specifically, when the "big hit D7" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, the time reduction state of the normal symbol is not set (the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to 0). That is, when the "big hit D7" is won in the normal state, the probable state, and the latent state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set again.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit D7" is 35, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit D7" is determined is 35% (35/100). In the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed in a case where the most advantageous gaming state (latent state) is set for the player. This is an end opportunity to end the gaming state (probable state) that is most advantageous to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 169, "big hit E7" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 99". The "big hit E7" is a type of big hit (8 rounds big change big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the special symbol is set to the certain change state after the big hit end. In addition, when the "big hit E7" is won in the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100. On the other hand, when the "big hit E7" is won in the probability change state and the latent state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0.

  That is, when the "big hit E7" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous probability change state (100 times). On the other hand, if the "big hit E7" is won in the probability change state or the latent state, the number of times saved is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the end of the big win is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, if the "big hit E7" is won in the normal state, the big hit type is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the winning is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the winning type is the most advantageous in the gaming state.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit E7” is 65, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit E7" is determined is 65% (65/100).

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, in the gaming state (latent state) most advantageous to the player, the jackpot is won mainly in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed mainly. Is configured such that the latent state loops at a rate of 65%, and the latent state ends (the normal state is set) at a rate of 35%. Therefore, in the state where the latent state is set, the player obtains the prize ball by the small hit game executed with a high probability (59/60) and wishes not to win the “big hit E7”. Will be executed.

  Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202fe in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202fe determines the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, similarly to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment. It is a data table for performing. In the seventh embodiment, the content of the data table referred to when the gaming state is the normal state is partially changed from the first embodiment described above as the variation pattern selection table 202fe. Is different in that a 7-table for probability change 202fe2 referred to in the case of the probable change state and a 7-table for latent search 202fe3 referred to in the case of the probable change state are added.

  First, the contents of the normal 7 table 202fe1 referred to when the gaming state is the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the contents specified in the normal seven table 202fe1. The normal 7 table 202fe1 is different from the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment described above in that the variation pattern corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) as the symbol type and the second special symbol It is greatly different in that a variation pattern corresponding to a symbol (special figure 2) is defined.

  Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern determined when a large hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 falls within a range of “0 to 99” and a normal fluctuation (10000 milliseconds (10 seconds) )), And the super fluctuation (15000 milliseconds (15 seconds)) in the range of “100 to 179”, and the special fluctuation (20,000 milliseconds (20 seconds)) in the range of “180 to 198” Are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 170, the length of the variation time specified for each variation pattern is shown in millisecond units (1/1000 second unit). However, for convenience of explanation, the length of the variation time will be described in the following description. Is described in units of seconds.

  As a variation pattern determined when a lottery is lost in the first special symbol lottery, a variation pattern of a short variation (1 second) out of the range of “0 to 180” is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. , "181 to 197" are associated with out-of-place middle fluctuations (10 seconds), and out of range "197, 198" are associated with out-of-range super fluctuations (15 seconds).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, a long fluctuation (hit long fluctuation, out-of-long fluctuation) (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the lottery result. Have been.

  In the present embodiment, when a variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the total value of the number of reserved memories of all the special symbols. In the present embodiment, since only the first special symbol is configured to have the hold storage function, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is substantially changed based on the number of hold storage (the number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol. , And the variation pattern of the second special symbol are selected. Here, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (see S307 of FIG. 139) is executed at a later stage than the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 139). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170, the variation pattern is not selected when the number of special figure reserved balls is four. On the other hand, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (see S1277 of FIG. 179) is executed independently of the first special symbol lottery, as in the above-described fourth embodiment. A variation pattern may be selected in a state where the number of balls (the number of reserved special figure 1 balls) is four.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 171 (a), a description will be given of the contents of the 7-table for probable variation 202fe2 which is referred to when the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the probable variation state is selected. FIG. 171 (a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the probable change seven table 202fe2. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the state in which the probable change state is set, a game in which the right electric auditors 164 wins a ball by the right-handed game and the first special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state. Done. For the first special symbol change during the probable change state, a change pattern having the same content as that of the above-described normal seven-table 202fe1 is defined. On the other hand, for the second special symbol variation, a variation pattern in which a variation time (60 seconds) shorter than the variation pattern defined in the normal 7-table 202fe1 is defined. The other elements are the same as those in the above-described normal seven-table 202fe1, and thus detailed description is omitted.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the probable change state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the ball is hard to enter the right second entrance 645 by opening the right electric accessory 164 with a high probability. It is configured to be. That is, the configuration is such that it is more difficult to enter the ball into the right second entrance 645 when the right-handed game is executed in the probable change state than when the right-handed game is executed in the normal state. . Further, when the normal state is set, the game in which the ball is thrown into the first entrance 64 by the left-handed game is an appropriate game method, and when the probable change state is set, the right-handed game is performed by the right-handed game. It is configured such that a game in which a ball enters the electric accessory 164 is an appropriate game method.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when a right-handed game is executed during the normal state, the ball can be easily made to enter the right second entrance 645, so that the normal state is achieved. By setting a variation pattern in which a long variation time (10 minutes) is defined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed during the right-handed game during the normal state, the second special symbol is executed. The act of executing a lottery is suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the right-handed game, which is an appropriate game method, is executed during the probable change state, as described above with reference to FIGS. Although the ball enters the object 164, the ball flowing down the right area has an irregular behavior, for example, if the balls flowing down the right area collide with each other and jump over the open door 164r1, the right second entry. There is a case where the ball enters the ball opening 645.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where the appropriate game method is executed as described above, when the ball flows down with unpredictable behavior and the ball enters the right second entrance 645, When a ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state ( (60 seconds). Furthermore, although details will be described later, when a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability change state is set to the latent state regardless of the number of special symbol changes executed during the probability change state. It is configured so that it can be shifted to.

  Thereby, the player who is executing the game in the probable change state is caused to watch the behavior of the ball flowing down the right area, and is eager to play the game while expecting the second special symbol lottery to be executed. Can be done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 171 (b), the content of the latent seven table 202fe3 that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation during the latent state will be described. FIG. 171 (b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the seven tables for latent accuracy 202fe3. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the state where the latent state is set, the ball is made to enter the second entrance 645 by a right-handed game, and the second special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state. A game to be performed is performed. Then, by executing a long variation (10 minutes) with respect to the first special symbol change executed during the latent state, the number of stored special symbols (first special symbol) during the latent state is determined. (The number of reserved balls in FIG. 1) is the upper limit number. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the second special symbol set during the latent state is made different according to the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved special balls 1) of the special symbol (first special symbol). Make up.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), the variation pattern determined in response to the first special symbol lottery includes the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. Regardless of this, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (super long fluctuation per hit, super long fluctuation out of range) is associated. In other words, the first special symbol variation executed during the latent state is configured such that a variation time of 600 seconds is always set.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a winning (big hit), the fluctuation pattern is determined when the number of reserved special figures (number of reserved special figures 1) is “0 to 3”, The long variation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range of the counter CS1 “0 to 198”, and when the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 reservations) is “4”, the total of the variation type counter CS1 is A short variation (1 second) corresponds to a range of “0 to 198”.

  In addition, as a variation pattern determined when a lottery of the second special symbol is lost (including small hits A and C), the number of special figure reservations (special figure 1 reservation number) is “1, 2” Is associated with a short variation (0.5 seconds) outside the entire range “0-198” of the variation type counter CS1, and the special figure reserved number (special figure 1 reserved number) is “0, 3, 4”. In this case, the entire range “0 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the middle variation (10 seconds).

  Further, as the fluctuation pattern determined when the small hit B is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the number of reserved special figures (number of reserved special figures 1) is “0, 1, 2”, The small hit middle fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range “0 to 198” of the type counter CS1, and when the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 reservations) is “3, 4”, the fluctuation type counter Small hit short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the entire range “0 to 198” of CS1.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) set for the second special symbol variation executed during the latent state is set when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. The variation pattern is configured such that a short variation of 0.5 seconds and a long variation of 10 seconds are set, and the small hits A and B set at about 95% of the small hits are won. In this case, if the special figure reservation number is a specific number (1, 2), a game (super RUSH game) in which a short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is set is executed, and a game other than the specific number (0, 3, 4) is executed. ), A game (RUSH game) in which a long variation (10 seconds) is set is executed.

  With this configuration, the number of small hit games per unit time can be varied according to the number of special figure reservations in the latent state (special figure 1 number of reserved balls). The amount of privilege (number of prize balls) obtainable by the player can be made different. Therefore, the player who is executing the RUSH game during the latent state can be motivated to play the super RUSH game which is more advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, when the small hit B is won, that is, when the small hit type in which the process of discarding (forcibly stopping) the first special symbol change being executed is executed, the number of special figure reservations (special figure 1 reservation) When the number of balls is larger than the specific number (1, 2), a short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is set for (3, 4), and the number of reserved special figures (number of reserved special figure 1 balls) is equal to the specific number (1). , 2) or less (0, 1, 2), the length variation (10 seconds) is set. In other words, if the small hits that can reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls are won, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved) is larger than the specific number, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls It is configured such that the fluctuation time is shorter than when the (special figure reservation number) is smaller than the specific number.

  With this configuration, when the special figure 1 reserved ball number (special figure reserved number) is larger than the specific number and the small hit B is won, the first special symbol change being executed is immediately discarded. Therefore, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (special figure reserved number) can be easily set to a specific number. On the other hand, if the small hit B is won in a state where the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of special figure reserved) is smaller than the specific number, a long-term fluctuation time is set as the small hit fluctuation, so The period required until the first special symbol change is discarded can be lengthened, so that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of reserved special figure) can be suppressed from decreasing below the specific number. .

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation) of the second special symbol variation is greater when the number of special figure reserved balls is “0”, which is the lower limit value, than when the number of special figure reserved balls is other than the lower limit value. It is configured to easily set a long-term fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) as the time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), when the number of special figure reserved balls is “0”, which is the lower limit value, a long-term fluctuation (10 seconds (Variation) is set.

  In this way, by imposing a penalty that the long-term fluctuation is likely to be executed when the number of special figure reserved balls is “0” which is the lower limit value, the special figure 1 reserved ball number after the latent state is set. The game is interrupted until the (special figure reservation number) becomes “0”. Specifically, the game is performed until the first special symbol change in the latent state where the change time of 10 minutes is set is executed four times. After the interruption, the act of executing the game in the latent state can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the degree of advantage during the latent state is divided into two stages according to the number of reserved special figures. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The medium advantage may be divided into three or more stages. In this case, for example, as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol set when the number of special figure reserved balls is “0” which is the lower limit, a fluctuation time longer than the above-described long-term fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) (for example, , 30 seconds) can be set, and when the number of special figure reserved balls is “0”, which is the lower limit, the penalty that the long-term fluctuation is likely to be executed may be increased, or the special figure reserved Among the specific numbers (1, 2), the special figure reservation number of one (for example, 1) has a shorter fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 second) than the special figure reservation number of the other (for example, 2). It may be configured to be settable, and may be able to execute advantageous games that are more advantageous to the player.

  In addition, when the latent state is set, i.e., when a jackpot is won after the jackpot game is completed and the latent state is set, and when the latent state is set via the probability change state, It is configured to refer to a different variation pattern table, and when one of the triggers (for example, the trigger for setting the latent state after the end of the jackpot game) is established, the one for which the latent state is set is determined by the other trigger ( For example, an advantageous game (second special symbol variation) that is more advantageous to the player during the latent state than when the latent state is set due to the establishment of the latent state via the probability changing state (A game in which a short fluctuation time is easily selected as a fluctuation pattern) may be easily executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected (determined) with the same specified content regardless of the number of times of the special symbol variation executed during the latent state. Without limitation, for example, the regulation content of the variation pattern selected in the first period (first half period) after the latent state is set and the second period (second half period) after the elapse of the first period 171 may be changed. In this case, for example, the number of times of the special figure change (first number) after the latent state has been set in the latent table 7fe 202 shown in FIG. Different fluctuation patterns are defined in accordance with the special symbol fluctuation and the number of times the second special symbol fluctuation is added, and the advantageous game (the second special symbol fluctuation) in which the second period is more advantageous to the player than the first period is Short fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of Which is likely to game) may be configured so is easily performed. With such a configuration, the latent state can be maintained for a long time, that is, the longer the period in which the jackpot is not won during the latent state (the so-called “harry period”), the more advantageous the player can be. It is possible to provide a novel game.

  In addition, when the probability change state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and based on the fact that the small hit C is won, the latent symbol is not executed without executing the special symbol change of a specified number of times (50 times). When the state is shifted to, the advantageous game (the game in which the short variation time is easily selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation) that is most advantageous to the player may be executed. In this case, for example, with respect to the probability change 7 table 202fe2 which is referred to when the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the variation pattern data referred to during the probability change state is changed to the special symbol variation a specified number of times (50 times). It suffices to specify the period corresponding to the execution, and also specify the special variation pattern data that is referred to when the state shifts to the latent state within the specified number of times. That is, the special symbol variation executed in the probability variation state within the defined number of times in the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 in which the variation pattern data is defined for the range of the number of times of the special symbol variation being defined (50 times). And the variation pattern data for the special symbol variation executed during the latent state may be defined in advance.

  With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while further expecting the second special symbol change (lottery) to be executed during the probable change state. In this case, after the number of executions of the special symbol change executed after the end of the big hit game reaches the specified number (50 times), the change is performed with reference to the seven-level latent table 202fe3 shown in FIG. 171 (b). It may be configured to set a pattern, and even after the number of executions of the special symbol change executed after the end of the big hit game reaches the specified number of times (50 times), the state shifts to the latent state within the specified number of times. The configuration may be such that the special variation pattern data referred to in such a case can be set continuously.

  The variation patterns (variation times) set corresponding to each game state have been described above with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171, but are not limited to the example described in the present embodiment, and may be set. The variation time of each variation pattern that is set based on the game state being performed, the symbol type of the special symbol, and the result of the determination of success or failure is within a range that does not deviate from the technical idea of the present embodiment (compared to other variation patterns). A range that does not relatively deviate from the technical idea) may be used. Further, in this embodiment, in order to simplify the description, an example in which a specific fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under various specific conditions is shown. A different variation pattern (variation time) may be selectable according to the value of the counter CS1. In this case, it is specified that the selection ratio of each variation pattern that can be latent and the average value calculated based on the variation time of each variation pattern are within a range that does not deviate from the technical idea of the present embodiment. For example, as a variation pattern for the special figure 1 defined in the seven-level latent table 202fe3, the variation pattern is executed with a small probability (for example, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “1”) during the latent state. A variation time (for example, 1 second) shorter than the variation pattern (variation time) that can be set for the second special symbol variation may be configured.

  With this configuration, it is possible to rarely provide the player with unexpected games without changing the flow of main games executed during the latent state, and It can improve the interest of the people. In the example described above, the variation pattern selected for the latent state is taken as an example. However, based on the same technical idea, the variation pattern selected when another game state is set is described. It goes without saying that a similar technical idea may be applied.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit type selection 7 table 202ff is a data table that is referred to when the small hit type is selected in the special symbol lottery and is then selected when the small hit type is selected, and is associated with the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. It is defined that three types of small hits, "small hit A7", "small hit B7", and "small hit C7" are selected.

  When a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, according to the selected small hit type, a small hit operation content, a symbol fixing time (a period required for fixing the special symbol stop display), a special symbol being executed. The configuration is such that the processing content for the fluctuation can be made different. In this embodiment, as described with reference to the small hit random number 7 table 202fb (refer to FIG. 168 (c)), the small hit random number is determined only by the lottery of the second special symbol. In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) executed by the control device 110, when it is determined that the small hit has been won, the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff is referred to.

  The contents defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff will be specifically described. When the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of “0 to 74”, “small hit A” is associated with the value. , “75-79” is associated with “small hit B7”, and “80-99” is associated with “small hit C”. Since the range of values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the rate at which "small hit A" is selected at the time of small hit winning is 75% (75/100), The rate at which "small hit B" is selected is 5% (5/100), and the rate at which "small hit C" is selected is 20% (20/100).

  When "small hit A" is selected, a small hit game in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed. Also, “0.2 seconds” is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol, and a process of interrupting the first special symbol (the special symbol 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of interrupting the currently executing first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, the process of interrupting the process of measuring the change in elapsed time of the currently executed first special symbol change is performed. Be executed. Specifically, when the small hitting game is executed, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on, and the first special symbol (special) is set while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203d is set to on. A process of skipping the process of updating the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di indicating the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time) in FIG. 1) is executed. Then, upon the end of the small hitting game, the restart condition is satisfied (the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to off), and the interrupted processing of updating the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di is restarted. . With such a configuration, it is possible to prohibit the remaining change time of the first special symbol change being executed from decreasing while the small hit game is being executed (while the interruption condition is satisfied). Therefore, while the small hit game is being executed, for example, the first special symbol change that has been won is stopped and displayed, and the win game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed repeatedly. Can be banned. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, since the process of measuring the elapsed time of the special symbol change during execution is only interrupted (skipped), the first special symbol change executed before the small hit game after the restart condition is satisfied. Can be resumed. Therefore, the result of the already executed special symbol lottery can be reliably notified to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied triggered by the winning of the small hit, the processing for interrupting the special symbol change being executed is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol fluctuation during execution may be continuously performed, and the stop display of the first special symbol fluctuation may be interrupted after the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has elapsed. In other words, even when the interruption condition is satisfied, the update processing for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is continuously executed, and when the update processing is executed until the predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the interruption is performed. It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the interruption condition is satisfied, the stop display of the special symbol change is not executed until the restart condition is satisfied. This eliminates the need to interrupt the update process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in a state where the interruption condition is satisfied and the special symbol change is interrupted, that is, in a state where the process of updating the value of the special figure 1 change time counter 203di is skipped, On the display surface of the three-symbol display device 81, the interruption effect in which the variation display of the special symbol variation (the first special symbol variation) is interrupted, and the game state that the first special symbol variation is being interrupted as the current game situation. A notification display for notifying a player and a guidance display for indicating that the suspended special symbol change is resumed after a predetermined period has elapsed (after the small hitting game has ended) can be displayed. Thereby, when the special symbol change is interrupted, it is possible to inform the player of the fact easily.

  Further, as the above-described interrupted effect, for example, an effect mode of a variable display effect (a variable display effect using a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to be able to execute different interruption effects according to, for example, when the interruption condition is satisfied and the special symbol change is interrupted, the third symbol changes at high speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, That is, when the third symbol is fluctuating at a speed at which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the fluctuating third symbol, an effect of continuing the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol until the restart condition is satisfied is executed as an interrupted effect. When the third symbol fluctuates at a low speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, when the third symbol fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the fluctuating third symbol. Is a low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol as a pause effect It may be configured to perform the production to continue until the resumption condition is satisfied. In this way, by changing the variable production mode (interruption production mode) during the period in which the interruption condition is satisfied, depending on the variation production mode of the third symbol at the time when the interruption condition is satisfied, The interruption effect can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity.

  Further, when the interruption condition is satisfied immediately before the stop of the fluctuation of the third symbol, for example, out of a plurality of symbols, other symbols except one symbol are stopped at a combination indicating a big hit (a combination of symbols indicating the same number). The interruption condition during the variable production (so-called reach production) that is displayed and inspires whether or not the remaining one symbol stops at the combination indicating the jackpot winning (whether or not all the symbols stop at the same number) In the case where is established, the interruption effect for continuing the fluctuation display for the remaining one of the above-described symbols may be executed, or one of the symbols in the fluctuation display may be displayed to indicate that the interruption condition has been satisfied. The stop display may be performed in a mode (for example, “Once a break!”) To end the reach effect. Then, after the resumption condition is satisfied, the character of "End of break!" Is displayed, and the result of the reach effect executed before the interruption is stopped and displayed without executing the reach effect. good. Accordingly, various effects can be executed in accordance with the timing at which the interruption condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to diversify the effect performed based on the satisfaction of the interruption condition, and to enhance the effect of the effect. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 172 (a), the description will be continued. When "small hit B" is selected, a small hit game in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed. Further, “0.5 seconds” is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol, and a process of discarding the first special symbol (the special symbol 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of discarding the currently executed first special symbol (special symbol 1) is executed, the first special symbol change is performed regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol change being executed and the remaining change time. Is performed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order. Specifically, when the small hitting game is executed, a process of clearing the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di indicating the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) to 0 is performed. Execute and set a forced stop command indicating that the first special symbol change has been stopped and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol change to be forcibly stopped has won a jackpot, the information indicating the jackpot winning set at the start timing of the first special symbol change is cleared (special figure 1 jackpot flag) 203i is turned off).

  When the forced stop command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the forced stop command (when the forced stop display condition is satisfied), the third symbol change being executed (the third symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol change). A forced stop effect for switching the variation display mode of (the third symbol variation) displayed on the display surface of the device 81 is executed.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the forced stop condition is satisfied based on winning of the "small hit B", and the special symbol change is forcibly stopped, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result has been forcibly stopped due to an error. Further, it is configured such that the effect form of the forced stop effect for forcibly stopping and displaying the third symbol variation being executed is changed according to the timing at which the forced stop condition is satisfied.

  Specifically, in the state where the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, in a state where the third symbol fluctuates at a speed that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the changing third symbol. When the forcible stop display condition is satisfied, as the forcible stop effect, an effect in which the forcible stop display is executed in a short period (first period) with respect to the third symbol change display during high-speed fluctuation is executed, and the third symbol is displayed. When the third symbol fluctuates at a low speed on the display surface of the display device 81, that is, when the third symbol fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the fluctuating third symbol, the low speed fluctuation is performed as a forced stop effect. It is configured to execute an effect in which the forced stop display is executed using the second period longer than the above-described first period with respect to the middle third symbol change display.

  In other words, during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, it is difficult for the player to identify the fluctuation-displayed third symbol. In order not to give a sense of incongruity to the player, the third symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a short period (first period) for the purpose of immediately informing the player that the forced stop condition has been satisfied. On the other hand, during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, since the player is able to identify the fluctuation-displayed third symbol, if the forced stop effect is suddenly executed in this state, the execution is executed. If the effect of the third symbol change in the middle is suddenly switched, the player will feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the forced stop effect is to stop and display the third symbol in a display mode finally indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, the effect mode of the third symbol change being executed is suddenly switched. After that, the third symbol is displaced and displayed, and the player's willingness to play is reduced.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol fluctuates at a low speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, when the third symbol fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the fluctuating third symbol. As a forced stop effect, an effect in which the forced stop display is executed using the second period longer than the above-described first period for the third symbol change display during the low-speed change is configured to be executed. The effect form of the forced stop effect to be executed during the second period is set according to the content of the third symbol change display, and finally the off display is executed. Therefore, according to the variation effect mode of the third symbol at the time when the forced stop condition is satisfied, the time from when the forced stop condition is satisfied to when the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By making the effect mode and the effect period different, the forced stop effect can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  When "small hit C" is selected, a small hit game in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed. In addition, "1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol, and a process of discarding the first special symbol (the special symbol 1) being executed is executed in the same manner as the "small hit A" described above. Further, when "small hit C" is selected during the high probability state (probable change state) of the ordinary symbol, a process of shifting the ordinary symbol high probability state to the low probability state is executed. That is, "small hit C" is set as a time saving end condition for shifting the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the processing to be executed for the first special symbol variation being executed is different depending on the small hit type selected when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. I'm making it. With such a configuration, the player can be interested in which small hit type is selected when the small hit is won. Furthermore, the degree of advantage of a game to be executed later can be varied according to the content of the processing (interruption, discarding) executed for the first special symbol change.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the special symbol determination time is made different depending on the small hit type selected. Thereby, the period from the stop display of the special symbol indicating the small hit winning until the small hit game is executed can be made different depending on the selected small hit type. Therefore, it is possible to predict the timing at which the small hit game is executed and to make it difficult to execute the game in which the ball is fired.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured that the small hitting game is executed with the same open contents regardless of which small hitting type is selected. Depending on the small hit type, the type of the attacker to be opened in the small hit game may be different, or the content of the opening operation (open time, number of times of opening) may be different.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 172 (b), the contents of the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202fg will be described. FIG. 172 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202fg. The normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202fg is a data table referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol lottery, and stores the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS3 and the set game state. Each data is defined so that a different variation pattern (variation time) is selected according to the data.

  Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, the value of the second variation type counter CS3 is set in the range of “0 to 198” and the variation time is set in the range of 10 to 30 seconds. Each variation pattern (long variation) is defined. More specifically, a variation pattern of “10 seconds” is in a range of “0 to 99”, a variation pattern of “20 seconds” is in a range of “100 to 149”, and “30 seconds” is in a range of “150 to 198”. Are associated with each other. In this way, by configuring the variation patterns of different variation times to be selectable according to the value of the second variation type counter CS3 acquired when the same game state is set, the player is provided with a normal The stop display timing of the symbol change, and thus the normal symbol change is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the normal symbol hit, so that it is difficult to predict the timing at which the general symbol hit game is executed.

  Further, during the probable change state, a change pattern (short change) of “0.8 seconds” is associated with the entire range in which the acquired value of the second change type counter CS3 is “0 to 198”. With such a configuration, a ball that has passed through the through gate 67, which is a trigger for executing a normal symbol lottery in a right-handed game executed during the probable change state, has a high probability of entering the right electric accessory 164. Can be.

  On the other hand, when the latent state is set, the variation pattern of “0.1 second” is associated with the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 in the range of “0 to 169”, and “170 to 198”. Is associated with a fluctuation pattern of “10 seconds”. With this configuration, it is possible to make it harder for the ball to enter the right motorized object 164 during the latent state than during the probable change state, and to appropriately move the ball during the latent state. The ball can be entered into the object 164.

  Next, contents specified in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. The RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the above-described fourth embodiment in that a probable change flag 203fa for storing a high probability state of a special symbol is added. is there. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the types and numbers of game states that can be set are different from those in the above-described fourth embodiment. For example, the game states can be stored in the game state storage area 203g. Although the type and number of the information are different, the role of the gaming state storage area 203g and the processing content for updating the stored information are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The probability change flag 203fa is a flag for indicating that the gaming state has changed to the probability change state, and is set to ON when it is determined that the probability change state is set. Then, it is set to off when the end condition of the certain change state is satisfied.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. In this embodiment, as compared with the above-described fifth embodiment, the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the change number counter 223fc, the preparation state flag 223fd, and the special figure 1 change time counter 223fe The difference is that the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ff, the RUSH flag 223fg, the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh, and the super RUSH flag 223fi are added, and the rest is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb will be described. The special figure 2 change start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb are different from the special figure change start flag 223d and the stop type selection flag 223e in that the target is changed to the second special symbol. are doing. Therefore, in the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the process of determining whether to set the flag on and the process of determining the setting status of the flag are the first special process. While the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb are set based on the pattern change, the flag is turned on in the processing executed based on the second special pattern change. A process of determining whether to set the flag and a process of determining the setting status of the flag are executed. The other elements are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The change number counter 223fc is a counter for measuring the number of changes in the special symbol change, and its counter value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol change.

  The preparation state flag 223fd is a flag for indicating whether or not the apparatus is in the preparation state. When the flag is on, it means that the apparatus is in the preparation state (see FIG. 162 (a)). Means no. In the latent state, the preparation state flag 223fd is referred to to determine whether the preparation state has already been completed (switched to the display of RUSH) and whether to perform the effect of the preparation state. , RUSH state effect is determined.

  The RUSH flag 223fg is a flag for indicating whether or not a RUSH game is in progress (rensou mode). This means that the game is not in the RUSH game (rensou mode). In the latent state, the preparation state flag 223fd and the RUSH state flag 223fg are referred to to determine which state of the effect mode to set.

  The ceiling effect execution flag 223fh indicates whether or not the effect (top reaching effect) of the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain, which is executed in the state where the number of probable changes or the number of time savings is 1, is remaining. This is a flag that indicates If this ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on, it means that the top reaching effect (see FIG. 161 (b)) is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the top reaching effect is not being executed. I do. When the symbol stop timing is reached in a state where the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is turned on, the mode shifts to the extended-villa mode and enters a preparation state. In the present embodiment, even if the remaining number of probable changes (time saving times) in the probable change state is not 1, the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (small hit C), and the time saving ends. The condition is established, and the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to ON. In this case, the staging mode is gradually changed in accordance with the state of subtraction of the number of times of the probability change, and the top reaching effect is suddenly executed as compared with the case where the top reaching effect is executed. The warp effect may be executed as a dedicated top arrival effect based on the information indicating that the winning has been achieved in C and the setting state of the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh. As a result, the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 can be performed without a sense of incongruity, and the player reaches the top at an earlier timing than expected (the latent state has been set). Can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The super RUSH flag 223fi is a flag for indicating that the number of special figure reserved balls becomes a specific number in a state where a RUSH game is being executed and a RUSH game advantageous to the player is being executed. If it is off, it means that a Super RUSH game is in progress, and if it is off, it means that it is not in a Super RUSH game. The super RUSH effect (see FIG. 165) is executed by setting the super RUSH flag 223fi to ON.

<Main Control Process in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 175 to 182, the contents of control processing executed by main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, similarly to the above-described fourth embodiment, a lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and a lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). (Special drawing 2 lottery) is configured to be able to be executed in an overlapping manner, and the function (temporary storage function) of temporarily storing the lottery right of the second special symbol is deleted from the above-described fourth embodiment. And the point where the high probability state of the special symbol can be set, and the case where the small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the type of the small hit type to be set is increased, and the small hit type to be set is set. That the processing to be executed for the first special symbol change (special figure 1 change) being executed is made different according to the game, and that the small hit type to be set is a specific small hit type. Transition state (normally transition from high-probability state to low-probability state) And the point was sea urchin configuration, in are different. Also, as described above with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172, the contents are different in that the contents specified in various data tables referred to in the control processing executed by main controller 110 are different. . Otherwise, the fourth embodiment is the same as the above-described fourth embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 175, the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) will be described. The first special symbol change stop process 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) is different from the first special symbol change stop process (see S258 in FIG. 124) of the fourth embodiment in that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is set. When it is determined that it is not set to ON (S581: No), that is, when the first special symbol change that is stopped and changed this time is a deviation change, the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 124) is executed. The point changed to the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 175) and the case where it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S581: Yes), that is, the first special symbol that is fluctuated and stopped this time Among various processes executed when the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, a process of clearing various flags and various counters based on the stop of the jackpot fluctuation (start of the big hit game) To S860) in FIG. 124, and differs in that executes a process to add the probability variation flag 203fa (S870 in FIG. 175), but is otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176) executed in the first special symbol change stop process 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176). In this time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176), it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON with respect to the above-described time saving update process in the fourth embodiment (see S862 in FIG. 125). The difference is that the game state set in the case (S2104 in FIG. 125: Yes) is changed, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 167, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) and the probable change state (high probability state of special symbol, ordinary) It is configured to be able to set three types of game states: a high probability state of a symbol) and a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol). When the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is set to ON, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is shifted to the low probability state. The state shifts from the state in which the probable change mode is set to the state in which the latent mode (RUSH game) is executed.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol change start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177). The seventh embodiment is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that the second special symbol is not provided with a holding function of the second special symbol. The content of the information referred to when the start condition for starting the special symbol change is satisfied is determined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 177, when the second special symbol change start processing 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) is executed, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON. (S951) If it is determined that the flag is set to on (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to off (S952), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S951 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951: Yes), the ball is then moved to the second entrance (right second entrance 645). It is determined whether the ball has entered (S974). In the present embodiment, since the second special symbol does not have the reserved memory function (because it does not have the second special symbol reserved ball number counter and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area), the second special symbol. In the state where the fluctuation start processing 7 (S280) is executed, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the right second entrance 645 and has acquired the execution right of the second special symbol lottery.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, when a detection switch (not shown) detects that the ball has entered the right second entrance 645, the second special symbol change start process 7 is performed in the control process of the main control device 110. The configuration is such that the detection signal is output during a period in which (S280) is executed a plurality of times, and is shorter than the shortest variation time set in the second special symbol variation, The configuration is such that the detection signal indicating that the ball has entered the right second entrance 645 is not lost due to the processing timing of various control processes executed by the main controller 110. Here, in the process of S974, when a winning of a ball is detected once, a process for starting the second special symbol change is executed, and the second special symbol change is executed for a predetermined change time. Therefore, even if the detection signal is output for the length of the period during which the second special symbol change start processing 7 (S280) is executed a plurality of times in the control processing of main controller 110, one detection is performed. Based on the output of the signal, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol change from being executed a plurality of times. The present invention is not limited to this, and a flag is set so that the currently output detection signal becomes invalid when a process for starting the second special symbol change is performed based on the reception of the detection signal. Processing may be added. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably suppress the second special symbol change from being executed a plurality of times based on one output of the detection signal.

  In the process of S974, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance (right second entrance 645) (S974: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 is executed. (S978) Thereafter, the same processes as S959 to S963 as the above-described second special symbol change start process (see S260 in FIG. 126) are executed, and this process ends. In addition, in the process of S974, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entrance (right second entrance 645) (S974: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the contents of the second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) executed in the second special symbol change start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be described. I do. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the content of the second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178). The second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) is different from the second special symbol big hit determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that the jackpot determination corresponding to the probability state is executed, and the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 178, when the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) is executed, the same S1051, S1052 as the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) are performed. If it is determined in the process of S1052 that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1052: Yes), the processes of S1053 to S1056 are performed, and the process proceeds to the process of S1071. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1052 that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm has not been set to ON (S1052: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S1071.

  In the process of S1071, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203fa is set to ON, that is, whether the current state is the special symbol high probability state (S1071), and it is determined that the probability change flag 203fa is set to ON. (S1071: Yes), the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) with reference to the data defined in the high probability state of the first random number table (first random number 7 table) 202fa (see FIG. 168 (b)). To get. On the other hand, in the processing of S1071, if the probability change flag 203fa is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (S1071: No), the first random number table (first random number 7) The lottery result (win / fail judgment result) is acquired with reference to the data defined in the low probability state of the table 202fa (see FIG. 168 (b)).

  After acquiring the lottery result in the process of S1073 or the process of S1072, the processes of S1058 to S1062, which are the same as the above-described second special symbol big hit determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127), are executed. The process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (S1277) will be described. This special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern selection processing 7 (S1277) is executed in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S956 in FIG. 129) for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation. Yes, this is a process that is executed when a variation pattern is selected when the result of the target second special symbol lottery is not a large hit (is a small hit including a small hit).

  FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (S1277). As shown in FIG. 179, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1257 of FIG. 130) is performed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is selected, the difference is that the processing content when selecting (deciding) the small hit type is different from the small hit that has been won this time, and the other is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (S1277) is executed, first, the same processing as S1371 as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1257 in FIG. 130) is executed, and the second special If it is determined that the symbol lottery result (special figure 2 lottery result) is not a small hit (S1371: No), the processing of S1377 to S1379, which is the same as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1257 of FIG. 130). Is executed, and the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1371 that the small hit is a small hit (S1371: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1372), and the small hit type is determined based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. The small hit type is selected with reference to the selection 7 table 202ff (S1391). Next, the same processing as S1374 to S1376 as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1257 in FIG. 130) is executed, and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the process of selecting the small hit type is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit in the determination process (the second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178)), a process of selecting a small hit type is executed. Alternatively, a different small hit determination value may be defined for each small hit type, and correspond to the small hit determination value (the value of the first random number counter C1) used when it is determined that the small hit has been won. The small hit type may be determined. As a result, the types of counters can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol change stop processing 7 (S283) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the content of the second special symbol change stop processing 7 (S283). The second special symbol change stop process 7 (S283) is a process executed when the change time of the second special symbol change has elapsed and the changing second special symbol change is stopped. The difference from the special symbol change stop process (see S263 in FIG. 132) is that a part of the process executed when the second special symbol change to be processed is the jackpot change is changed. Are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the second special symbol change stop process 7 (S283) is executed, first, the same processes from S1551 to S1559 as the above-described second special symbol change stop process (see S263 in FIG. 132) are executed. FIG. 2 The jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the second special symbol lottery among the jackpot flags 203i), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, the time saving end standby flag 203dm, and the probability change flag 203fa are set to off. The value of the time reduction counter 203h is reset to 0 (S1580).

  In other words, when one special symbol change is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the lottery result for the other special symbol change being executed, the remaining change time is completely discarded, and the stop display is performed. All the information on the playing state (probable change flag 203fa, time saving counter 203h, time saving end standby flag 203dm) is also reset. Therefore, since the normal state is set during the jackpot game, a bonus other than the bonus (prize ball) obtained by causing the variable ball entry means (first attacker 1650) opened by the jackpot game to win a ball is provided. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the privilege is excessively given to the player.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the simultaneous fluctuation specification, the special symbol change executed before the big hit game is restarted after the big hit game is ended, or the number of times of shortening is reduced by the information based on the special symbol change executed before the big hit game. Since the game is not played, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. When the processing of S1580 is completed, the processing of S1561 to S1563, which is the same as the above-described second special symbol change stop processing (see S263 of FIG. 132), is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (S1584) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (S1584). This special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (S1584) is a case where it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON with respect to the above-described special figure 2 departure stop processing (see S1564 in FIG. 133) (S1651: Yes) in that the small hitting process (S1671) is executed. Since the other processing contents are the same, detailed description is omitted. Here, the content of the small hit processing (S1671) executed in the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (S1584) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit processing (S1671). This small hit processing (S1671) is executed when the second special symbol having the small hit is stopped and displayed. The small hit processing (S1671) corresponds to the selected small hit type (interruption processing, forced stop ( Discarding process) is performed for the first special symbol change that is being executed.

  When the small hitting process (S1671) is executed, first, in the small hitting type set for the current second special symbol change (special figure 2 departure change pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179)). The selected small hit type is read (S1682), and it is determined whether the read small hit type is “small hit A” (S1683). If it is determined that it is "small hit A" (S1683: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present time is during the special figure 1 change (the first special symbol is changing) (S1684), and the special figure 1 is changing. If it is determined (S1684: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S1685), and the special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set (S1686). Then, the present process ends. In the process of S1684, when it is determined that the special figure 1 is not changing (S1684: No), the processes of S1685 and S1686 are skipped, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1683 that it is not “small hit A” (S1683: No), then it is determined whether the read small hit type is “small hit C” (S1687), If it is determined that it is "small hit C" (S1687: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the present time is in the probable change state (in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol). (S1688). If it is determined that the current state is in the probable change state (S1688: Yes), that is, the second special symbol change that has been won as the "small hit B" in the second special symbol lottery executed during the probable change state is the current processing. If it is the target, then it is determined whether the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1689), and if it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not ON (S1689: No), If it is determined that the state is not the final change, the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1690), and the flow shifts to S1684. If the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 in the process of S1688, that is, if it is determined that the present time is not in the probable change state (S1688: No), or the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set in the process of S1689. If it is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that it is the final variation of the probable variation state (S1689: Yes), the process of S1690 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the above-described process of S1684.

  In other words, when the "small hit C" is won during the probability change state, the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is forcibly set to ON even if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not reduced to 0. Before executing the special symbol change (lottery) a predetermined number of times (50 times), it is possible to shift the gaming state from the probable state to the latent state. Therefore, the "small hit C" winning is set as an end condition for ending the probable change state (normal symbol high probability state). In the present embodiment, since the latent state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the probable state, a state in which the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the probable state is small, that is, a jackpot is won during the probable state. By setting the value of the time-saving counter 203h to 0, the potential is shifted to the latent state in a state where the possibility of the transition to the normal state is low without shifting to the latent state. The end condition that is established by winning the "small hit C" is an end condition that is more advantageous to the player than the end condition that shifts to. In addition, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (in the case of the low probability state of the ordinary symbol), that is, in the normal state or the latent state, the processing for terminating the time saving state is not executed. , The same processing is executed when “small hit C” is won and when “small hit A” is won.

  In the process of S1687, if it is determined that the small hit is not “small hit C”, that is, if it is determined that the read small hit type is “small hit B” (S1687: No), the special figure 1 is currently changing. (S1691), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 is changing (S1691: Yes), a special figure 1 change stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 change. Is set (S1692), the first special symbol of the first symbol display device is deviated and stopped and displayed with a symbol (S1693), and the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di is set to 0 (S1694).

  Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol of the big hit flag 203i) is set to ON, that is, whether the first special symbol change being executed is a big hit change ( If it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the big hit flags 203i) is set to ON (S1695: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag (big hit flag 203i) The flag corresponding to the first special symbol is set to off (S1696), the storage information for the special figure 1 big hit is deleted (S1697), and the present process ends. In the process of S1691, if it is determined that the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (S1691: No), the present process is terminated as it is. Also, in the process of S1695, the special figure 1 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol of the big hit flag 203i) is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol variation being executed is a deviation variation. If it is determined (S1695: No), the processing of S1696 and S1697 is skipped, and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 183 to FIG. 192, the contents of control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the contents of the command determination processing 7 (S4192) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the content of the command determination processing 7 (S4192). This command determination process 7 (S4192) is a control process executed in place of the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61), and received from the main controller 110 in the same manner as the command determination process 7 (S4192) described above. It executes processing corresponding to various commands.

  When the command determination process 7 (S4192) is executed, first, it is determined whether a status command has been received (S4231). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4231: Yes), a status command reception process is performed (S4232). Then, the present process ends. This reception command processing (S4232) executes the same processing as the reception command processing (see S4213 in FIG. 64) executed in the above-described command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61). Although a detailed description is omitted, a state command indicating the current game state is received, a mode effect mode according to the game state is set, and a corresponding effect mode (for example, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is set. , A back image) is set. For example, when a status command indicating a probable state is received, a display command corresponding to the effect mode in which the character 811 shown in FIG. 161 climbs a mountain is set, and when a status command indicating a latent status is received, A display command corresponding to an effect mode for indicating the preparation state shown in FIG. 162 or the RUSH game state shown in FIG. 163 is set. The details of the control of the switching of the presentation mode during the latent state will be described later.

  In the command determination process 7 (S4192), the order of determining whether or not a status command has been received is different from the above-described command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61). Specifically, it is configured to determine whether a status command has been received before determining whether a special figure variation pattern command has been received. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably execute the processing based on the special figure variation pattern command after determining the current game state. The present invention is not limited to this, and various command determinations may be performed in the same order as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61).

  If it is determined in the process of S4231 that no status command has been received (S4231: No), then it is determined whether a special figure variation pattern command has been received (S4203), and if it has been determined that it has been received (S4203). : Yes), the change start flag (special figure change start flag 223d, special figure 2 change start flag 223fa) corresponding to the received special figure change pattern command is set to ON (S4233), and the change pattern command is changed from the received command. It is extracted (S4234). Then, the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4203 that the special figure variation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then it is determined whether a special figure stop type command has been received (S4205), and it has been determined that it has been received. (S4205: Yes), turns on the stop type selection flag (stop type selection flag 223e, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb) corresponding to the received special figure stop type command (S4235). The stop type is extracted (S4236). Then, the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4205 that the special figure stop type command has not been received (S4205: No), the same processing of S4208 to S4214 as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 of FIG. 61) is executed. If it is determined in the processing that a stop-related command has been received, stop-related processing 7 is executed (S4236), and this processing ends. The details of the stop-related process 7 (S4236) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4214 that the stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), then the same processing of S4216 to S4218 as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 of FIG. 61) is executed. If it is determined that the stop-related command has been received in the process (3), the hit-related process 7 is executed (S4237), and this process ends. Although the detailed description of the hit-related process 7 (S4237) is omitted, the above-described hit-related process (see S4219 in FIG. 67) is based on the reception of the small hit-related command instead of the accessory hit-related command. Is executed. The small hit related command is a small hit start command indicating the start of the small hit game, and indicates the start of the round game opened by the prize device to be operated during the small hit game, similarly to the above-described accessory hit related command. At least a round command and an ending command indicating the end of the small hit game are included, and processing for setting a display command corresponding to each received command is executed. Thus, an effect mode corresponding to the small hit game executed by the main control device 110 can be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, in the process of S4218, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4220: No), this process ends as it is.

  Next, the content of the stop-related process 7 (S4236) executed in the command determination process 7 (see S4192 in FIG. 183) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the content of the stop-related process 7 (S4236). This stop-related process 7 (S4236) is a preparation state setting process (S4641 in FIG. 184) when the special figure determination command is received (S4601: Yes) with respect to the stop-related process described above (see S4215 in FIG. 65). (See step S4642), and a process of determining whether a special figure discard command has been received is executed (S4642). If it is determined in step S4642 that a special figure discard command has been received (S4642: Yes), the difference is that a process of executing the special figure discard setting process (S4643) is added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the preparation state setting processing (S4641) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preparation state setting processing (S4641). This preparation state setting processing (S4641) is processing for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 162 (a)) as described above. In this preparation state setting processing (S4641), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on (S8001). If it is determined that it is off (S8001: No), the process proceeds to the preparation state. Since there is no possibility that the process is performed, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8001 that the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is ON (S8001: Yes), the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set OFF (S8002), and the display mode during RUSH preparation ( 162 (a) are set (S8003). Next, both the RUSH flag 223fg and the ready flag 223fd are set to ON (S8004), and the process ends.

  By executing the preparation state setting process (see FIG. 185), the display state of the preparation state can be set from the time when the mode is shifted to the extended play mode (RUSH game).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the latent state is changed to an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the small hitting game is frequently executed (the extended play mode). And the normal state was configured as the most disadvantageous normal mode. By terminating the number of times of probable change (50 times) in the probable change state, the mode is shifted to the most advantageous extended-villa mode. In other words, it is configured to be able to shift from the probable change state to the most advantageous game state directly without going through the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in the probable change state with one goal being to elapse the number of probable changes.

  Here, heretofore, there has been known a gaming machine that sets a latent state to a most advantageous gaming state and enables the latent state to be set after a jackpot winning. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the latent state is not set unless the jackpot is won, the ball is held while the player stays in the normal state (that is, until the jackpot is won). Since a disadvantageous state which is easy to decrease is formed, the player is not satisfied, and there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the number of probable changes is ended (elapsed) in the probable change state that is more disadvantageous than the latent state, so that the most advantageous extended play mode (the latent state ). In other words, it is configured to shift to an advantageous state where the prize ball can be easily and intermittently obtained simply by continuing the right-handed game without winning the jackpot. With this configuration, when the number of probable changes can be ended, the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. Can be.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (small hit C) in the state where the probability change state is set, the most advantageous consecutive play mode without elapse of the probability change count. (Latent state). This allows the player to have a sense of expectation even for a lottery result other than the jackpot winning during the probability change state.

  In addition, the above-mentioned lottery result (small hit C) is configured to be able to be won only by a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) which is hard to be executed in the probable change state. Therefore, when the game ball fired by the right-handed game in the probable change state enters the right second entrance 645 with an irregular behavior and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the player has an expectation. Can be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since there is no hold memory of the second special symbol, the small hit C cannot be won unless the ball enters the second entrance 645 during the probable change state. Make up. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to gaze at the behavior of the ball in the probable change state. Note that only a part of the configuration of the present embodiment described above may be employed. For example, a second special symbol holding function may be provided, and for example, the second special symbol acquired during a jackpot game in which a probable change state is set. The second special symbol lottery based on the reserved storage of the special symbol may be executed during the probable change state. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the second special symbol change a plurality of times immediately after the probable change state is set. In this case, as an effect during the period in which the second special symbol change is executed, for example, as a stage before the effect mode in which the character 811 shown in FIG. 161 (a) aims at the top, an effect to inspire whether or not to enter a helicopter. When the character 811 gets into the helicopter and performs the effect of reaching the top shown in FIG. 161 (b) when the result of the lottery effect of the second special symbol is “small hit C” by performing good.

  As a result, immediately after the probable change state is set, it is possible to inform the player of the fact that the period in which the transition to the latent state is easy is set. Further, in this case, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed during the probable change state, when the number of special symbol changes executed after the probable change state is set is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 10 times) It is preferable that the short fluctuation (the fluctuation time is 5 seconds) is easily selected. This makes it possible to smoothly execute the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the jackpot game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the right electric accessory 164 is frequently opened during the probable change state, so that the ball fired by the right-handed game is unlikely to enter the right second entrance 645. However, for example, a variation pattern of a long variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is selected with a small probability (for example, a probability of 1/100) as a variation pattern of a normal symbol, and the right pattern is temporarily set. You may comprise so that the state which a ball may easily enter into the 2nd ball entrance 645 may be formed. This makes it easy to temporarily execute the second special symbol lottery during the probable change state. Therefore, in the state where the probable change state is set, the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a specific lottery result (small hit C), and the chance of shifting to the latent state can be increased, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to. Further, in the present embodiment, the "small hit C", which is a trigger for shifting from the probable state to the latent state, can be won only by the second special symbol lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Also in the special symbol lottery, it may be configured to be able to win with a small probability (for example, 1/200) lower than the second special symbol lottery.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, a configuration in which a transition from the shift to the extended-shelf mode (latent state) to the first win of the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is notified as a preparation state. When a situation in which a prize ball can be actually acquired is reached (that is, when a small hit change is started), it is configured to notify that an advantageous state (RUSH state) has been achieved. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a prize ball cannot be acquired for a long time even though the RUSH state is notified, and the player is not satisfied.

  In the seventh embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to about 1/1 (59/60). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the small hit probability may be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the special figure discarding setting processing (S4643) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure discarding setting process (S4643). This special figure destruction setting processing (S4643) is executed when a special figure destruction command is received in the stop-related processing 7 (see S4236 in FIG. 184). In the present embodiment, by executing the right-handed game during the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed while the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball) is secured. RUSH game is executed to execute the small hit game.

  Then, during the latent state, the variation time set as the first special symbol variation is configured to easily become a long time (600 seconds). Further, the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the latent state is configured to be different according to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. Specifically, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is The configuration is such that the smaller the number is (the number of the special figure 1 reserved balls is 1 or 2), the shorter the fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation. In addition, when a specific lottery result (“small hit B”) is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded (forced stop).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, during the latent state, while the small hitting game is frequently executed in the second special symbol lottery, and the number of the reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced by the specific small hit winning, A game aiming at an efficient game (a game that increases the number of small hit games executed within a unit time) is executed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the RUSH game executed during the latent state is a normal RUSH game, and a super RUSH game in which the number of small hits executed in a unit time is larger than that of the normal RUSH game, To the player, and when a specific lottery result (“small hit B”) is won in the second special symbol lottery, a suggestion effect suggesting a shift to a super RUSH game (see FIG. 164). ) Is configured to be executable. This allows the player executing the game in the latent state to be informed clearly that there is a more advantageous state (super RUSH game) and the situation until the super RUSH game is executed. And the player's willingness to play can be further increased.

  When the special figure discarding setting process (S4643) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S8101), and if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is not set to ON (S8101: No). Since the current state is not the latent state (RUSH game), the processing of S8102 to S8107 described below is skipped, and the processing shifts to S8108.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8101, if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S8101: Yes), the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter) 203dd is read. It is determined whether the current number of special figure reserved balls is three. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is three and the state is forcibly stopped (S8103). Here, if it is determined that the number of special figure reserved balls is 3 (S8103: Yes), an effect mode indicating super rush entry (see FIG. 164 (b)) is determined, and the super RUSH medium flag is set to ON. Then, the forced stop mode of the first special symbol is determined (S8108), a display command for indicating the determined various modes is set (S8109), and the process ends.

  Here, the process of S8108 will be described. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be executed in parallel (overlapping). The timing at which the second special symbol change won in the win B7) is stopped and displayed is determined independently of the change timing of the first special symbol change. Therefore, the first special symbol change may be forcibly stopped (discarded) immediately after the start, or may be forcibly stopped (discarded) at a timing immediately before the stop display of the first special symbol change. Then, the variation mode of the third symbol (decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) variably displayed in response to the first special symbol variability is variable based on the elapse of the variation time. If the pachinko machine 10 is operated, for example, immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the player executes a high-speed fluctuation display to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify the third symbol. In general, a low-speed fluctuation display is executed in which the fluctuation speed is reduced to such an extent that a player can identify the change.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, based on the fact that the first special symbol change is forcibly stopped, the third symbol change being executed is changed to the third symbol display device at the timing of receiving the command indicating the forced stop. If stop display is performed with the display mode displayed on the display surface 81, for example, when the third symbol is displayed at a low-speed fluctuation, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit. There was a possibility that it would happen.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the process of S8108, based on the remaining period of the first special symbol change that is being executed as the forced stop mode of the special symbol (first special symbol), a high speed variation stop mode and a low speed Either the stop mode at the time of fluctuation is determined. Then, it outputs to the display control device 114 by the display command set in the process of S8109. The display control device 114 determines the forced stop display mode of the third symbol variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of the forced stop mode included in the received display command. Then, display control is performed based on the determined forced stop display mode.

  Specifically, when a display command indicating the high-speed fluctuation mode is received, the image data in the display mode indicating the forced stop is interrupted in the image data prepared for executing the high-speed fluctuation display, and the high-speed fluctuation mode is interrupted. The display control is executed such that the display is suddenly switched to the display mode indicating the forced stop. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol has been forcibly stopped without delay. Also, during the high-speed change, it is difficult for the player to identify the fluctuating third symbol, so even if the display mode indicating the forced stop is suddenly stopped and displayed, the image is replaced. There is no discomfort to the player.

  On the other hand, when the display command indicating the low speed fluctuation stop mode is received, the image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is read, and the reach state (the combination indicating the jackpot winning) is displayed. 3 symbols can be stopped and displayed). When it is determined that the current state is not the reach state, the image corresponding to the display data in which each third symbol is displayed at a predetermined position (established line) is forcibly stopped among the display data used for the low-speed fluctuation display. The image is determined, and the fluctuation display is forcibly stopped after the low-speed fluctuation is continued until the forced stop image is displayed. In the case of the reach state, image data is created by replacing one symbol included in the remaining third symbol column during the change with a forced stop symbol indicating forced stop, and the forced stop symbol is stopped and displayed. The variable display data for forced stop is generated as described above, and the display control based on the variable display data for forced stop is executed.

  As described above, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, the third symbol is forcibly stopped in accordance with the variation display mode of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By making the processing different, the third symbol can be stopped and displayed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player no matter at what timing the first special symbol change is forcibly stopped.

  Further, when the above-described display control is executed, the period from the first special symbol change is forcibly stopped to the stop of the third symbol change display is changed to the change display mode of the third symbol change being executed. In this case, for example, in a case where the first special symbol change is forcibly stopped, a period from when the first special symbol change is forcibly displayed until the forced stop is determined, or when the first special symbol change is forcibly stopped. The symbol determination period from when the special symbol indicating the small hit B win in the second special symbol change in which the forced stop condition for forcibly stopping the symbol is satisfied is displayed until the symbol is fixed is defined as a predetermined period (for example, one second). Then, within the predetermined period, various forced stop display controls for stopping and displaying the third symbol change may be executed. Then, a third symbol display mode (for example, “123”) for forcible stop determination is displayed based on the command (determination command) indicating that the determination period has elapsed being output from main controller 110. good. With this configuration, when the third symbol variation display is forcibly stopped, the period until the third symbol variation display is forcibly stopped is changed according to the variation display mode of the third symbol variation being executed. In this case, the third symbol change display can be forcibly stopped within the fixed period, and the third symbol can be displayed in the same display mode in a display mode for forcibly determining the stop after the fixed period.

  Returning to FIG. 186, the description will be continued. In the process of S8103, if it is determined that the number of special figure reserved balls is not 3 (S8103: No), then it is determined whether the number of special figure reserved balls is 4 (S8106) and determined to be 4. If it has been performed (S8106: Yes), an effect mode aiming at the top (for example, an effect mode in which the character 811 goes up one step from the effect screen shown in FIG. 164 (a)) is determined (S8107), and the process proceeds to S8108. Transition. If it is determined that the value is not 4 in the process of S8106, the process of S8107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8108.

  Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (S4153) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (S4153). This variable display setting process 7 (S4153) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and is used to execute a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. And generates and sets a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process 7 (S4153), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5201). If it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S5201: No), it means that the change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the processing of S5234 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is on (S5201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the change number counter 223fc (S5231), and the special figure change start flag 223d is set to off (S5202). Then, a rendering mode setting process for generating a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 based on the acquired variation pattern type is executed (S5232), and the data in the winning information storage area 223b is stored. The processing is shifted (S5233), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5234.

  In the process of S5234, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5234). If it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa is not on (that is, it is off) (S5234: No), the state is that the change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110. Move on to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa is on (S5234: Yes), the value of the change number counter 223fc is added by 1 (S5235), and the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa is set to off (S5235). (S5236) Then, the variable display setting process 7 for special figure 2 is executed (S5237). Details of the special figure 2 variable display setting processing 7 (S5237) will be described later with reference to FIG. Upon completion of the process in S5237, the flow shifts to a process in S5238.

  In the process of S5238, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5238). If it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223e or the special figure 2 change start flag 223fb is not on (that is, it is off) (S5238: No), no change pattern command has been received from the main control device 110. Since this is the state, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223e or the special figure 2 change start flag 223fb is ON (S5238: Yes), the special figure change start flag 223e or the special figure 2 change start flag 223fb is set to OFF ( (S5239) Then, the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5240), and thereafter, the present process is ended.

  Next, details of the above-described effect mode setting process (S5232) will be described. The effect mode setting process (S5232) is a process for setting an effect mode according to the change type of the first special symbol notified by the change pattern command, as described above. In the effect mode setting process (S5232), first, it is determined whether the current state is the normal state (S8201). If it is determined that the current state is not the normal state (S8201: No), then, it is determined whether the current state is the probable change state. (S8202). In the processing of S8202, when it is determined that the state is not the probable change state (S8202: No), it means that the apparatus is in the latent state (rensou mode), the ceiling effect setting processing is executed (S8203), and the determined effect mode is determined. Is set (S8208), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8202, when it is determined that the state is in the probable change state (S8202: Yes), the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc is set to determine whether the current first special symbol is the final fluctuation in the probable change state. It is determined whether it is 1 (S8204). In the process of S8204, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-times-of-change counter 223fc is 1 (S8204: Yes), the ceiling effect setting for selecting the effect mode of the last change display effect before shifting to the RUSH game. The process is executed (S8206), and the process proceeds to S8208. On the other hand, in the process of S8204, when it is determined that the number of remaining working hours is not 1 (S8204: No), that is, since there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state (the extended mode), the fluctuation pattern command indicates The effect mode corresponding to the variation type is determined (S8205), and the process proceeds to S8208. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the current game state is the normal state (S8201: Yes), then the effect mode for the normal mode corresponding to the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is determined. (S8207), and the process proceeds to S8208.

  Next, the ceiling effect setting processing (S8202, S8206) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 188. As shown in FIG. 188, in the ceiling effect setting process (S8203 (S8206)), first, in the winning information storage area 223b, data of an execution area corresponding to the first special symbol is read (S8301), and the read execution is performed. It is determined whether or not the data in the area is data corresponding to the jackpot (S8302), and if it is determined that the area is a jackpot (S8302: Yes), that is, it is determined that the current special figure 1 change is a jackpot change. In this case, the effect type corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command (the effect type for notifying the jackpot is determined (S8303), and this processing ends. That is, in the case where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. , Because the jackpot game is executed without shifting to the latent state, the effect of informing the arrival at the top (see FIG. 161 (b)) An effect mode for notifying a jackpot (for example, an effect mode for displaying a jackpot winning display while climbing a cliff) is determined without determining the mode. In spite of the fact that the top reaching effect has been executed, the jackpot game is executed, and thereafter, a game state other than the latent state is set, which can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. .

  In the present embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S8302 that the special symbol variation has won the jackpot, the top reaching effect is not executed regardless of the selected jackpot type. Without being limited to the above, if a jackpot in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game has been won, after performing the top reaching effect, further perform an effect of displaying a display mode indicating the jackpot winning on the top. It may be configured as follows. Further, in the present embodiment, the processing is performed so as to determine whether or not to execute the top reaching effect in the final variation of the probable change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case where the jackpot in which the latent state is set after the end is won (during the change of the jackpot), after the top reaching effect is executed, an effect of displaying a display mode indicating the jackpot winning on the top is executed. You may comprise. Thereby, the effect mode of the effect (the effect in which the character 811 aims at the top) executed during the probable change state can be changed based on the remaining period of the probable change state and the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery, In addition, it is possible to ensure that the latent state is set when the top-reach effect is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8302, when it is determined that the data read from the execution area is not the data indicating the jackpot (S8302: No), the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain (FIG. 169 (b)) (Refer to step S8304), the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to ON (step S8305), and the process ends.

  By executing the ceiling effect setting process (see FIG. 189), the top reach effect (see FIG. 169 (b)) according to the look-ahead result of the lottery result of the first special symbol at the time of shifting to the latent state. Can be suitably set.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 variable display setting processing 7 (S5237) executed in the above-described variable display setting processing 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 190. The special figure 2 change display setting process 7 (S5237) is a process for setting a change effect corresponding to the change pattern of the second special symbol change. When this special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is on (S8401), and it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is off. In the case (S8401: No), that is, when it is determined that the current game state is the normal state or the latent state, it is then determined whether the probable state is set (S8402).

  In the process of S8402, when it is determined that the probable change state is not set, that is, when it is determined that the current game state is the normal state (S8402: No), the process corresponding to the change type indicated by the change pattern command is performed. (2) The variable display mode of the special symbol is determined (S8403), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8402, when it is determined that the current game state is the probable change state (S8402: Yes), the probable change setting process for setting the fluctuation display mode of the second special symbol fluctuation during the probable change state ( S8404) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the setting process during probable change (S8404) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S8401, if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is on (S8401: Yes), then it is determined whether the preparation flag 223fd is on (S8405). If it is determined that the 223fd is off (S8405: No), it means that the RUSH game is in progress (the preparation state is completed), and thus the second special symbol in the latent state (RUSH game). The RUSH setting process (S8410) for setting the variation display mode of the variation is executed, and the process ends. The details of the RUSH setting process (S8410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8405, when it is determined that the preparation state flag 223fd is turned on (that is, in the preparation state) (S8405: Yes), the variation type of the small hit is notified by the variation pattern command. It is determined (S8406) whether or not the change type of the small hit has been notified (S8406: Yes), the preparation state flag 223fd is turned off (S8407), and the present fluctuation display effect is produced. As a mode, an effect mode (refer to FIG. 162 (b)) of a RUSH entry effect for notifying the RUSH entry is determined (S8408), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the contents of the probable change setting process (S8404) will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the setting process during probable change (S8404). In the probable change setting process (S8404), the effect mode when the second special symbol change is executed during the probable change state is set. A process for setting an effect mode (shortcut effect mode) when the latent state is set without executing 50 times) is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the right-handed game is executed during the probable change state, most of the balls flowing down the right area win the right electric combination 164, and the first special symbol change is executed. It is composed. However, when the balls flowing down the right region collide with each other, the ball rarely enters the right second entrance 645 when irregular behavior is taken, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. There are cases. Then, when the small hit C is won by the second special symbol lottery executed during the probable change state, the probable change without performing the special symbol change for the number of times of probable change (50 times) which is the end condition of the probable change state is performed. The state can be shifted to the latent state. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed during the probability change state, a special effect is executed to indicate to the player that a chance to shift to the latent state has come. .

  When the in-probability change setting process (S8404) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current second special symbol change is a change in which the small hit C is won (S8501). If it is determined that it is the small hit C (S8501: Yes), the value of the change number counter 223fc is read out next (S8502), and the probability of remaining change is 5 based on the value of the change number counter 223fc read out in the process of S8502. It is determined whether the number is less than or equal to the number of times (S8503). If it is determined that the number of times is less than or equal to 5 (S8503: Yes), an effect mode indicating entry of a small hit RUSH (RUSH game) is determined, and the process proceeds to S8506 described later. Transition.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8503, if it is determined that the number of probable calculations is not less than 5 (it is 6 or more) (S8503: No), an effect indicating that a short cut enters a small hit RUSH (RUSH game). A mode (for example, a warp effect) is determined (S8504), and the flow shifts to the process of S8506. If it is determined in the process of S8501 that the current fluctuation does not win the small hit C (S8501: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S8506.

  In the process of S8506, the character 811 wears a flame with the effect mode (for example, from the display mode illustrated in FIG. 161 (a)) indicating that the special 2 change (second special symbol change) has been performed during the probability change. The display mode of the character 811 is varied), the effect mode of climbing up the mountain vigorously) is determined (S8506), and the display pattern commands indicating the determined various effect modes are set (S8507), and the process ends. .

  Next, the contents of the RUSH setting process (S8410) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the content of the RUSH setting process (S8410). In the RUSH setting process (S8410), a process for setting various effects for the second special symbol change executed during the RUSH game is executed.

  When the RUSH setting process (S8410) is executed, it is determined whether the super RUSH flag 223fi is set to ON (S8601). If it is determined that the super RUSH flag 223fi is set to ON (S8601: Yes), the next step is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation has won the small hit B (S8602). If it is determined that the small win B has been won (S8602: Yes), the first special symbol change being executed at the time of the change stop is forcibly stopped, so that the end suggestion effect indicating the pinch of the end of the super RUSH is performed. This is set (S8603), and the effect mode for RUSH corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8604), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S8602, when the current fluctuation does not win the small hit B (S8602: No), or when it is determined that the super RUSH in-flight flag 223fi is not set to ON in the processing of S8601 (S8601: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S8604, and the process ends thereafter.

<About another example using the game board configuration of the seventh embodiment>
In the above-described seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, a flow path through which the ball passing through the through gate 67 can flow is formed in the right area of the game board 13, and the right electric accessory 164 is provided in the flow path. In addition, while the right electric accessory 164 is in the closed state (the state in which the ball is difficult to win in the right electric accessory 164), the ball is placed on the opening / closing lid 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164. A flow path (see FIG. 158) is formed so as to flow down, and the right second ball entrance 645 is arranged at a position where a ball flowing down on the opening / closing lid 164r1 can enter the ball. Then, in accordance with the opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164 (opening operation pattern of a game per ordinary figure), a sphere flowing down the right area, and eventually a flow path through which the sphere passing through the through gate 67 can flow down (hereinafter, specified). The ratio of the ball that flows down the flow path to the right electric accessory 164 (the right first entrance opening 164r provided in the right electric accessory 164 (the first random symbol lottery trigger). The ratio of entering the starting opening) and the ratio of entering the right second entrance 645 (the ratio of entering the starting opening which is a chance of the second special symbol lottery) are made variable. It was configured to be able to.

  Specifically, when the probable change state is set as the game state, the change time of the normal symbol change and the right electric change so that most of the balls flowing down the specific flow path win the right electric accessory 164. The opening pattern of the accessory 164 is defined, and when the latent state is set, the ball flowing down the specific flow path wins the right electric accessory 164 more than when the probable state is set. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation and the opening pattern of the right motor-operator 164 are defined so as to lower the ratio of the change. In addition, when the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is defined so that the winning ratio to the right electric auditors product 164 is further reduced than when the latent state is set. ing. In the latent state and the normal state, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set for both, and the opening operation pattern (opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164) executed in the game per ordinary figure is the same. However, by changing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the interval at which the game is executed per ordinary symbol is changed, and as a result, the ratio of the ball flowing down the specific flow path to the right electric accessory 164 is changed. Was configured.

  According to the configuration of the above-described seventh embodiment, the starting ports (the right first ball entry port 164r and the right second ball entry port 645) into which the ball easily enters differ according to the set game state. By performing the right-handed game, the type of the special symbol in which the special symbol lottery is mainly executed can be easily changed, so that when a different game state is set for the player, a different game is performed. Sex games can be played and the interest of the games can be improved.

  However, in the above-described seventh embodiment, a special symbol type in which a special symbol lottery is mainly executed is defined for a set gaming state (for example, a probability variation state). Is configured such that the first special symbol lottery is easily executed and the second special symbol lottery is easily executed during the latent state. Therefore, unless the set game state is variably set, the special symbol type corresponding to the special symbol lottery mainly executed cannot be changed, and a player who has played a game for a long time in the same game state cannot be used. There was a problem of getting tired of the game early.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, the following configurations or a combination of the configurations may be used instead of the configuration of the seventh embodiment.

<Structure example 1: Structure of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection table>
In the above-described seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), the variation pattern is defined in accordance with the set game state and the value of the second variation type counter CS3, and the variation pattern is selected. When the processing is performed, a variation pattern corresponding to the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 is selected. That is, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the same game state is set, a fluctuation pattern having the same content is defined regardless of the number of times of the special symbol fluctuation executed during the game state. The configuration is such that the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the second variation type counter CS3 acquired from the data table. On the other hand, in the present configuration example 1, according to the number of special symbol changes executed in the state where the specific game state (probable change state) is set (the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the probable variable jackpot game). The general-purpose variation pattern selection table is configured so that the selection ratio of the selected variation time and the length of the selected variation time can be varied.

  That is, in contrast to the configuration of the ordinary figure change pattern selection table 202fg (see FIG. 172 (b)) of the above-described seventh embodiment, different change patterns corresponding to the number of special pattern changes after the game state is set. They differ in the provisions. Specifically, in the range where the number of times of the special symbol change from the setting of the probability change state is 1 to 2 times, a change pattern of a change time of 2 seconds is defined, and in the range of 3 to 50 times, the above is described. A variation pattern in which the variation time is 0.8 seconds is specified as in the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment.

  With this configuration, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is usually selected as the symbol fluctuation from the setting of the probable change state to the execution of the special symbol fluctuation twice. Therefore, the predetermined period (the period until the special symbol change is executed twice) after the probable change state is set is more right than the predetermined period (the period after the special symbol change is executed twice). It is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 645. Thereby, it is possible to easily execute the second special symbol lottery only during a part of the period during the probability change state. Therefore, a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the second special symbol lottery only during a certain period during the probability change state, and the probability is changed without waiting for a predetermined period (the number of probability changes 50) to elapse. It is possible to easily make the transition from the state to the latent state which is more advantageous to the player than the probability change state.

  In the configuration example 1 described above, the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol that can be selected so that the predetermined period after the probable change state is set is more advantageous to the player than the period other than the predetermined period is defined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a certain period elapses after the probable change state is set, a change pattern of a normal symbol that is advantageous to the player may be easily selected. With this configuration, when the specific period has elapsed without terminating the probable change state, it is possible to execute a game more advantageous to the player than during the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to motivate a player who is performing a long-time game without changing the game state to play the game.

  Further, in the configuration example 1 described above, different variation times (variation patterns) are selected according to the number of special symbol variations after the probability variation state is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the number of special symbol fluctuations, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.8 seconds can be selected. , And specifically, when the number of special symbol changes after the probable change state is set satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the special symbol executed after the probable change state is set) A variation pattern (when the number of variations is less than two or when the number of variations of the special symbol after the probable variation state is set is even) is more advantageous to the player than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. S variation pattern) may be configured such is easily selected. With this configuration, it is possible to easily set a period in which a game advantageous to the player is executed only by variably setting the selection ratio of each variation pattern in accordance with the number of times the special symbol is varied.

  In the configuration example 1 described above, the general-purpose variation pattern selection table to be referred to when the probable change state is set is one type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and according to the jackpot type that triggers the probable change state to be set. It may be configured to select the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol by referring to a different data table. In this case, even if the jackpot type in which the same probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the winning jackpot Depending on the type, it is possible to select a variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol variation by referring to a different data table (general pattern variation pattern table). In this case, according to the jackpot type, the length of the advantageous period (the period in which a game (for example, the second special symbol lottery) that is more advantageous to the player than other periods is more easily executed) and the timing at which the advantageous period is set are set. It is good to make it different. In addition, when a specific advantageous jackpot type is set, the entire period of the probable change state is set as an advantageous period. You may comprise so that it may not be set.

  In addition, as described above, in a period in which a specific game state (probable change state) is set, in a case where a game that is more advantageous to the player than another period can be executed in some periods, For the player, in addition to the current playing state, the player determines whether or not the present period is an advantageous period (a period in which a game more advantageous to the player than other periods (eg, the second special symbol lottery) is more easily executed). It is preferable to perform a period suggestion effect for suggesting (notifying) a rabbit. For example, during the hill-climbing effect (see FIG. 161 (a)) executed during the probable change state in the above-described seventh embodiment, the rabbit Is changed to a display mode in which the character 811 imitating the character is powered up, the character "powerful zone entry" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an effect capable of shortening a period until reaching the top is executed. Good.

  With this configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player that the current period is the advantageous period. Therefore, for example, a plurality of general figure fluctuation pattern tables having different advantageous periods are prepared as the general figure fluctuation pattern table referred to during the probability change state, and based on the jackpot type set at the time of the probability change jackpot, one Even in the case where the ordinary figure variation pattern table is configured to be selectable, the advantage period can be easily notified to the player. Note that the above-mentioned period suggestion effect is intended for all effects that are configured to be more easily executed during the advantageous period than during the outside of the advantageous period. Even if it is a production other than a production that directly explains something, at the time the production is executed, the possibility of the current advantageous period is higher than the possibility of being outside the advantageous period, so the period suggestion Included in the production. Therefore, the period suggestion effect only needs to be performed at a frequency lower than the advantageous period, and may be executed in a period (a disadvantageous period) outside the advantageous period.

  Further, in addition to the above-mentioned period suggestion effect, that is, an effect for suggesting to the player that the current time is likely to be an advantageous period, the universal figure change pattern table referred to in the current state of probable change includes It may be configured to execute a state suggestion effect that indicates that the table is a general-purpose variation pattern table in which an advantageous period is easily set among a plurality of general-purpose variation pattern tables that can be referred to during the state.

  Further, in the case where the probability change state is set, when a ball enters the right second entrance 645, a notification for notifying that the ball has entered the right second entrance 645. The effect mode of the effect may be configured to be different based on the result of determining whether or not the current time is the advantageous period. For example, a ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the advantageous period. In this case, since the ball is entered with a high ball entry frequency (during the advantageous period), the notification effect is executed without setting an effect mode that excessively celebrates the player, and the ball entry frequency is low. In a state (during a disadvantage period), when a ball enters the right second entrance 645, a notification effect that can be set when the ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the advantageous period It is preferable that an effect mode for celebrating the player is set rather than the effect mode of (1). In the case where a plurality of periods in which the ease of entering a ball for a specific entrance is different can be set as described above, by changing the presentation mode of the notification effect according to the set period, When a ball can be made to enter a specific entrance during a period in which it is difficult to enter, a notification effect of a special effect mode can be executed.

  In the configuration example 1 described above, the specific symbol (the through gate 67) is changed by varying the variation time of the ordinary symbol in accordance with the predetermined condition (big hit type, game state, number of special symbol changes, value of the variation type counter CS3). It is configured to vary the rate at which the ball that has flowed down the flow path along which the ball has passed) reaches the right second entrance 645. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of winning, the length (period fixing period) of the period from the stop of the display of the winning regular symbol change to the execution of the per-figure per game is determined by the type of per-prize winning or the selection. It may be made different depending on the type of the ordinary figure variation pattern. That is, the period from the start of the ordinary symbol fluctuation to the execution of the game per ordinary figure is determined by predetermined conditions (big hit type, game state, number of special symbol fluctuations, value of the fluctuation type counter CS3, general figure lottery result, etc.). May be configured to be variable according to

<Structure example 2: Opening operation configuration of right electric accessory>
In the above-described seventh embodiment, an example of one type of opening operation pattern of the right electric accessory 164 in the per-figure game executed during the probable change state is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of types of opening operation patterns of the right electric accessory 164 in the per-figure per game executed during the game can be set, and the right electric accessory 164 during the per-figure per game is set according to the set opening operation pattern. The length of the period during which the ball is in the closed state (the ball flows down the opening / closing lid 164r1 to the right second ball entrance 645) may be configured to have different lengths. With this configuration, the sphere that has flowed down the specific flow path (the flow path through which the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down) according to the hit type of the game-per-game played during the probable change state is the second right-hand ball. The ratio of reaching the entrance 645 can be varied.

  Further, for example, as the opening operation pattern of the game per day, the first open state (the state where the ball easily enters the right electric accessory 164) is in the first closed state (the ball is moved to the right electric accessory 164) for 2 seconds. (A state in which it is difficult to win) is set for 5 seconds, and the second opening state is set for 0.5 seconds. It may be configured such that the game per day is ended.

  With such a configuration, for example, if the ball is made to win the right electric accessory 164 during the first open state, the game per ordinary drawing ends at that time, but during the first open state, By executing the game so that the ball does not win the right electric accessory 164, it is possible to easily make the ball reach the right second ball entrance 645 during the game per ordinary drawing. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the opening operation pattern in which the game for the ordinary drawing ends when the period of the first opening state elapses can be set. Thereby, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to select whether to fire the ball during the per-game game (perform the right-handed game) or not.

  In the seventh embodiment described above and another configuration example of the seventh embodiment, in the above-described seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, the ball passing through the through gate 67 in the right area of the game board 13. Is formed such that the right electric accessory 164 is disposed in the flow passage, and the right electric accessory 164 is closed (the ball wins in the right electric accessory 164). During a difficult state), a flow path (see FIG. 158) is formed so that the ball flows down on the opening / closing lid 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164, and the ball flowing down on the opening / closing lid 164r1 can enter the ball. The right second entrance 645 is arranged at a certain position. Then, in accordance with the opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164 (opening operation pattern of a game per ordinary figure), a sphere flowing down the right area, and eventually a flow path through which the sphere passing through the through gate 67 can flow down (hereinafter, specified). The ratio of the ball that flows down the flow path to the right electric accessory 164 (the right first entrance opening 164r provided in the right electric accessory 164 (the first random symbol lottery trigger). The ratio of entering the starting opening) and the ratio of entering the right second entrance 645 (the ratio of entering the starting opening which is a chance of the second special symbol lottery) are made variable. In the probable change state, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. In other words, the starting port provided on the upstream side of the specific flow path is configured so that a lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed than the starting port provided on the downstream side, and the starting port provided on the upstream side is formed. By changing the winning ratio of the ball, the winning ratio of the ball to the starting port on the downstream side in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed is configured to be variable, but is not limited to this, for example, The configuration is such that a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed when the ball enters the starting port provided on the upstream side of the specific area, than when the ball enters the starting port provided on the downstream side. May be.

  Also, in the above-described seventh embodiment, no matter what trigger sets the latent state that is most advantageous to the player, specifically, the jackpot is won after the jackpot game ends. Then, even if the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed, or even if the predetermined transition condition (for example, the number of times of the probability change is 50) is satisfied and the latent state is set during the positive change state, the latent state is set. Is set during a jackpot game or a probable change state in order to facilitate a state where a predetermined number (for example, four) of reserved memories (for example, four reserved special figures) of the first special symbol is reserved. In such a right-handed game, a special figure 1 reservation can be obtained. Specifically, the first special symbol change is executed during the probability change state, and the first special symbol change is not executed during the jackpot game, so that the latent state is set when the potential big hit is won. Is more likely to be executed in the state where the number of reserved special figures 1 is the upper limit value (4) than when the latent state is set via the probability change state.

  When the latent state is set, a game (second special symbol lottery) having a different degree of advantage (having a different fluctuation time) is executed according to the number of special figure 1 reservations, and special figure 1 reservation is performed. It was configured such that the smaller the number, the more advantageous the game is executed than the case where the number of special figure 1 reservations is large.

  In other words, when the number of times of the probability change (the number of times of the special symbol change executed during the state of the probability change) reaches 50 during the state of the probability change, the special figure is executed by the right-handed game executed until the number of times of the probability change reaches 50 times. It was configured so that the number of 1 reservation could be the upper limit (4) with high probability. Furthermore, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the small hit C is won in the second special symbol lottery during the probability change state, the probability change state is changed to the latent state before the number of probability changes reaches 50 times. It was configured so that it could be migrated. Therefore, for example, immediately after the probability change state is set, the small hit C is won, and when the state shifts to the latent state, the latent state is set as compared with the case where the latent state is set based on the fulfillment of other transition conditions. Since the execution period of the right-handed game before the certainty state is set becomes shorter, it is possible to easily reduce the number of special figure 1 reservations at the time when the certainty state is set. Therefore, it is possible to set a transition condition more advantageous to the player than the other transition conditions described above (transition conditions that are satisfied when the number of times of probability change reaches 50).

  In this manner, a plurality of transition conditions (big hits, the number of times of change of probability of 50, small hit C winning) are set in advance in order to set a specific game state (for example, a latent state), and the type of the satisfied transition conditions is set. Is configured to be variable in the degree of advantage after a specific game state is set in accordance with the game state, so that the player is interested not only in the game state set for the player but also in the transition condition that is established. be able to. Further, in order to set a specific game state (for example, a latent state) in a state where the same game state (for example, a probability change state) is set, a plurality of transition conditions (50 times of probability change, small hit C win) Since a transition condition that can be satisfied without passing through a jackpot is set in advance and the degree of advantage after a specific game state is set according to the type of the satisfied transition condition is configured to be variable, A game aiming to win a jackpot and a game aiming to establish advantageous transition conditions can be performed in parallel. Further, the specific transition condition (small hit C winning) set in advance is configured so that the degree of advantage after setting the latent state is easily changed according to the timing of establishment. When the transition condition is satisfied in a state where the number of reserved special figures 1 is small, an advantageous game (super RUSH) is configured to be easily executed after the latent state is set. The game can be performed while expecting whether or not the transition condition is satisfied. Also, since the specific transition condition (small hit C winning) can be satisfied regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations, it is possible to always expect the player to expect the specific transition condition to be satisfied. .

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, of the plurality of shift conditions for shifting to the latent state, the shift condition established by the small hit C win is configured to be most advantageous to the player, but is not limited to this. Alternatively, the player may be configured to be more advantageous when the number of times of the probability change reaches 50 times. In this case, for example, the probabilistic state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the latent state, What is necessary is just to comprise so that a game advantageous to a player may be performed rather than a state being set.

  Further, as the effect (hill-climbing effect) performed during the probable change state shown with reference to FIGS. 161 (a) and (b), the effect mode of the effect performed when the transition condition is satisfied is shown at the time. It may be changed in accordance with the number of reserved special figure 1 balls. For example, when an execution condition for executing an advantageous game after setting a latent state is satisfied (for example, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is one) In the case where the transition condition is satisfied in the state of, the effect of reaching the summit (for example, an effect mode in which the summit is a flower field) is performed more gorgeously than in the case where the transition condition is not satisfied. It may be configured to notify that the transition condition is satisfied in an advantageous state. In addition, when the small hit C is won (the time when the second special symbol change in which the small hit C is won is started) or when it is determined that the number of times of the probability change reaches 50 times (the special figure 1 reservation is read ahead and the At the time when it is determined that the jackpot is not won until the number of times reaches 50), an effect prompting to interrupt the right-handed game may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an unnecessary increase of the special figure 1 reservation.

  Further, in the above-described seventh embodiment, in the state where the latent state is set, the game is interrupted until the first special symbol change (the 10-minute change) of the long-term change is executed a plurality of times, thereby forcibly. It is possible to play a game in a game state that is advantageous to the player, but on the other hand, by interrupting the game for a long time during the latent state, the game most disadvantageous to the player is executed It is good to set a penalty as follows. Specifically, it is configured such that the selected general symbol variation pattern is made different depending on the number of reserved symbols of ordinary symbols (number of reserved ordinary symbols), and is selected when the number of reserved symbols of ordinary symbols is zero. It is preferable that the general figure variation pattern is more disadvantageous to the player than the general figure variation pattern selected when the number of stored ordinary symbols is more than 0 (for example, 3). More specifically, the configuration may be such that a general-purpose variation pattern in which a long variation time is set is easily selected.

  With this configuration, when the game is suspended for a long time during the latent state, and the number of ordinary drawing reservations is set to 0, the player in a disadvantageous situation where it is difficult to increase the special figure 1 reservation from 0. Can play the game. Further, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the general figure change pattern can be selected based on the number of reserved general figure and the number of reserved special figure 1 balls. When the number of reserved figures is one or two, a short variation time is easily set so that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls tends to be three or more as a variation time of a normal symbol, and the number of reserved general figures is 0. When the number of special figure reservations is 0, it is preferable that a long fluctuation time is set in order to make it difficult to newly acquire special figure 1 reservations.

  Further, a configuration in which the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is made different according to the number of ordinary symbols to be stored may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the following configuration. Specifically, as a configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, a through gate 67 is provided also on the left side of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. A position where a ball can be won (for example, a first ball entry) regardless of whether a game is played, that is, a game in which a ball flows down in the left area, or a game in which the ball strikes right (a game in which a ball flows down in the right area). The position of the variable prize device 650 that is opened during a jackpot game is arranged at a different position from the gaming board 13 (a position below the mouth 64), and a left-hit game and a right-hit game are played during the jackpot game. Is configured to allow the user to make a selection. Then, the rate at which the shot ball passes through the through gate 67 is made different between when the right-handed game is played and when the left-handed game is played. This makes it possible to vary the number of stored ordinary symbols (the number of reserved ordinary symbols) acquired at the end of the big hit game, depending on which game is played during the big hit game. Then, as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, a first game state in which a larger number of ordinary figure reservations is more advantageous than in a case where the number is smaller, and a second game state in which a larger number of ordinary figure reservations is more disadvantageous than when the number is smaller. The game state is settable.

  With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of selecting a game method during the big hit game while predicting a game state set after the big hit game ends.

<Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the above-described seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described seventh embodiment, a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation) in which the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) can be executed in an overlapping manner In the specification, when a specific game state (for example, a latent state) is set, a long-time (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern as a fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation is changed to a second special symbol fluctuation. The configuration is such that a short-term (for example, one second) variation pattern is set as the variation time, and further, it is configured such that a small hit can be won in the special drawing 2 lottery.

  With this configuration, it is possible to increase the number of times the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the latent state and to execute the special figure 2 lottery based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. Frequent small hit games can provide a game advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, in a modified example of the seventh embodiment, similarly to the above-described seventh embodiment, a gaming machine (so-called so-called “lottery”) that can execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery in an overlapping manner. , Simultaneous fluctuation specification), when a specific game state (for example, a probable change state) is set, the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) becomes longer (for example, 10 minutes). By configuring so that the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is shortened (for example, 1 second), the other special symbol lottery is preferentially executed.

  Then, the lottery of the other special symbol lottery (for example, the second special symbol) is more advantageous than the lottery of one special symbol lottery (for example, the first special symbol) (for example, the second special symbol lottery). It is easier to win the small hit than the first special symbol lottery, or the content of the big hit game executed when the big hit is won), and is advantageous to the player during a specific game state (for example, a probable change state). There are things that make the game easier to play.

  In the gaming machine described above, at least during the period in which the probability change state is set, the first special symbol lottery becomes a disadvantageous lottery disadvantageous to the player, and the second special symbol lottery becomes an advantageous lottery advantageous to the player. . Further, in the above-described gaming machine, at least one of the ending conditions for ending a specific gaming state (for example, a probable change state) includes a lottery result of one special symbol lottery (for example, a first special symbol lottery). Set the ending condition that is established when the lottery result (for example, a loss winning or a jackpot winning) is obtained, and provide a gaming ability to execute a number of advantageous special symbol lotteries until the ending condition is satisfied by the disadvantageous special symbol lottery By doing, there is something that improves the interest of the game.

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, when a specific gaming state (for example, a probable change state) that is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the period in which the advantageous gaming state continues is the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible for the player to enthusiastically play a game while expecting the advantageous game state to continue for a long time. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a lottery result for terminating the advantageous gaming state (for example, a jackpot winning in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game), the result for indicating the lottery result is displayed. The period until the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the period until the jackpot game based on the lottery result is started) is a period in which the advantageous gaming state is continued, and once the period in which the advantageous gaming state is continued is set. However, there is a problem that the period cannot be changed (discarded).

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, when a small hit is won in an advantageous special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) mainly executed during the advantageous gaming state, the disadvantageous special symbol variation (the (1 special symbol variation) can be discarded. In other words, if the result of the disadvantageous special symbol change being executed is a result of terminating the advantageous gaming state (for example, a result indicating a jackpot winning in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game), the lottery result is displayed. By discarding, the advantageous game state can be extended (continued). Further, when the disadvantageous special design change (first special design change) being executed is discarded, the number of the disadvantageous special design change is not updated (added) by the discarded disadvantageous special design change. Therefore, as a termination condition for terminating the advantageous gaming state, a variation number termination condition that is satisfied when the number of disadvantageous special symbol variations during the advantageous gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, two) is set. Also in this case, the advantageous game state can be extended (continued).

  With such a configuration, the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues can be changed based on the result of the lottery of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol), so that a player who performs a game in the advantageous gaming state can be changed. It is possible to make the player play the game enthusiastically.

  Further, in the present modification, when a small hit is won in the advantageous special symbol lottery in the advantageous game state (probable change state), the above-described disadvantageous special symbol change (first special symbol change) being executed is discarded. (Small hit B) and a small hit type (small hit C) for terminating the advantageous gaming state after discarding the disadvantageous special symbol change (first special symbol change) being executed are configured to be at least configurable. ing.

  That is, in the present modification, an end condition that is established based on a lottery result of an advantageous special symbol (a second symbol) is set as an end condition for terminating the advantageous gaming state. By providing a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the advantageous gaming state in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the length of the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues.

  In addition, since an end condition that can be established based on the result of the lottery of the advantageous special symbol (the second special symbol) in the advantageous gaming state is set, a surprising game can be provided to the player. In addition, as described above, when the small hit is won in the advantageous special symbol lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state continues can be shortened or lengthened depending on the set small hit type, When a small hit is won in the lottery of the advantageous special symbol (the second special symbol), it is possible to cause the player to watch the subsequent game contents.

  Further, in the present modified example, similarly to the above-described seventh embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the disadvantageous special symbol (first special symbol) (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the advantageous special symbol). The variable time of the variation of the advantageous special symbol (the second special symbol) can be variably set in accordance with the number of the reserved balls of the disadvantageous special symbol (the first special symbol). As the number of reserved balls and the sum of the number of reserved special design symbols and the number of reserved balls are smaller, the shorter variation time is set as the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the advantageous gaming state (during the probable change state). It is configured to be easy.

  Thereby, by winning a small win in the lottery of the advantageous special symbol (the second special symbol) and discarding the disadvantageous special symbol variation being executed, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol in the advantageous gaming state can be increased. .

  Further, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the special symbol high probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol high probability state continues until the next special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. The probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed from the high probability state to the low probability state when a predetermined transition condition (specific small hit winning or execution of a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries) is satisfied. Was configured as follows. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, once the special symbol high probability state is set, the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol lottery can be increased until the next jackpot winning, so that the player can play the game with confidence. On the other hand, if the special symbol high probability state is set, the special symbol high probability state will not end until the jackpot is won, so the special symbol high probability state There is a problem in that the player's willingness to play decreases.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, the condition that the high-probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low-probability state is added, so that even if the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot, the high probability state of the special symbol is low. It is configured so that it can transition to a probability state. As a result, even when the special symbol high probability state is set, the special symbol high probability state may end without winning the jackpot, so the player is playing during the special symbol high probability state. It is possible to cause the player to play a game with a sense of tension.

  In addition, in this modified example, when the probable change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the special symbol is set, When the second transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and when the first transition condition is satisfied before the second transition condition, the state is changed from the probable change state to the time saving state (the low probability state of the special symbol). State, high probability state of the ordinary symbol), and when the second transition condition is satisfied before the first transition condition, from the probable state to the latent state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the low state of the ordinary symbol) (Probability state). Then, when both transition conditions are satisfied, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set.

  In other words, the system is configured to finally transition to the normal state through different processes depending on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition that can be satisfied during the probable change state are satisfied. With such a configuration, the player who is playing in the probable state is not only interested in when the probable state ends, but also about which game state to transition from the probable state. be able to.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment, while the latent state is set, a long-term (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation, and the normal state is set. Is set so that a long-term (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern is set as the variation time of the second special symbol variation, and the special symbol lottery is used as in the present modification. When a first transition condition (for example, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery is 50) that can be satisfied even if no winning is set, a normal state set based on the first transition condition being satisfied is set. In the meantime, both the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change may change for a long time (for example, 10 minutes), and the player cannot play the game smoothly. was there.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, the special pattern fluctuation (for example, the first special symbol fluctuation) is changed from the gaming state (for example, the probable change state) in which the long-term fluctuation is set as the fluctuation pattern of the other special symbol fluctuation. It is configured not to directly transition to a gaming state (for example, a normal state) in which a long-term variation is set as a variation pattern (for example, a second special symbol variation) without going through a special symbol jackpot winning. The first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are configured to be less likely to fluctuate for a long time (for example, 10 minutes). This allows the player to play the game smoothly.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of this modification is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 157) in the right area (the right side of the variable display unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13. A part of the configuration of the region to be formed is different, and the other configuration is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 193, in the present modification, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right region, and a left flow path 701 in which a ball fired by a right-handed game is formed on the left side of the distribution member 700, It is configured to be alternately distributed to the right channel 702.

  On the upstream side of the left flow path 701, a movable lid 1500 that forms the lower surface of the left flow path 701 is provided. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, a fixed opening / closing operation is performed by a movable control unit (not shown). And an open state in which a ball can enter the right first entrance port 64b disposed below the movable lid 1500, and a closed state in which entry is difficult (impossible). The opening and closing operation is performed so as to be located at the first position.

  Specifically, a movable lid opening / closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (refer to FIG. 55) of main controller 110, and the movable lid opening / closing process provides an opening period of 0.1 second. And an opening / closing operation in which a closing period of an average of 0.8 seconds is repeated according to a predetermined scenario. The right first ball entrance 64b controlled to be opened and closed in this manner is configured such that a ball is more difficult to enter than the first ball entrance 64.

  Then, the sphere flowing down the left channel 701 and flowing down on the movable lid 1500 (the sphere flowing down the channel formed on the movable lid 1500 in the closed state) flows down the bent portion of the left channel 701. Then, the nail flows down toward the electric accessory 640a with a nail planted at a position where the lower end of the left flow path 701 faces.

  On the other hand, a bending portion is formed in the right flow path 702 by the distribution device 700, and a small hitting attacker (variable ball entry means) 3650 is provided so as to be a part of the flow lower surface of the bending portion. ing. The small hit attacker 3650 flows in when the open / close lid 3650a is open and the open / close lid 3650a is controlled to be opened / closed during the small hit game executed based on the small hit winning in the second special symbol lottery. And a flow path through which the dropped ball flows down, and a small winning prize hole 3653 into which the ball flowing down the flow path enters. The contents of the opening / closing control of the opening / closing lid 3650a during the small hit game are described in the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. And the detailed description is omitted.

  Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be changed between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on power being supplied to the pachinko machine 10. I have. Specifically, in the movable member driving process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 55), the operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in ROM 203. Have been. In this movable scenario, an operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 second and thereafter closing the movable member 1500 for 0.8 second is repeatedly executed.

  That is, in the game board 13 of this modification, the ball shot in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at 1.2-second intervals, and the rolling surface on which the constantly movable member 1500 is provided. It flows down while rolling. When the timing at which the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) coincides with the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entry port 64b.

  The timing of rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling on the constantly movable member) is an interval of 1.2 seconds, and the timing of constantly opening the movable valve 1500 is 0 in 0.9 seconds. .1 second, the timing at which they match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-hitting game is continuously executed, about four balls enter the right first entrance opening 64b in one minute.

  In other words, in a gaming state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-short game, a ball periodically enters the right first entrance 64b, so that the jackpot game is not performed. When the probable change state is set after completion, it is possible to prevent a state in which the first special symbol is not held (special figure 1 held). In addition, since the period during which the movable valve 1500 is always opened at one time is set to a period (0.1 seconds) during which it is difficult for the player to aim and hit, the first entrance port is set in the normal game state. A right-handed game may be more disadvantageous to a player than a left-handed game aiming at 64.

  More specifically, in the case where the left-hitting game is performed in the case where the gaming state is the normal state, a design is made so that, out of the 250 shot balls, about 15 shots enter the first entrance 64. If a ball enters, five prize balls are paid out. Further, it is designed so that approximately five shots enter the general entrance 63, and when a ball enters, five prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, it is possible to allow approximately 20 balls to enter the first entrance 64 in consideration of re-launching the prize balls to be paid out when 250 balls are fired. Become.

  On the other hand, in the case where the game state is the normal state, when a right-handed game is performed, it is designed that, out of the 250 balls fired, about 9 rounds enter the right first entrance opening 64b. If the ball enters, two prize balls are paid out. The general entrance 63 is not provided in the right area. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, even if considering that the awarded ball to be paid out will be fired again, about 10 balls should be made to enter the right first entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing a right-handed game.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning opening 63 is not provided in the game area (the right area) through which the ball fired by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal game state, the right-handed game is performed more than the left-handed game. The general winning opening 63 may be provided based on a design concept to the extent that is not advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls to be paid out as prize balls in a right-handed game during a time-saving state or a jackpot state.

  Furthermore, since the distribution member 700 is provided as a delay unit that delays the flow of the ball in a path until the ball fired by the right-handed game reaches the movable lid 1500, the ball fired by the right-handed game is movable. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing of reaching the lid 1500. In addition, in this modification, the purpose of delaying the flow of the ball (differing the flow behavior of the ball) and the purpose of distributing the ball fired by the right-handed game to a plurality of flow paths are also used. Although the distribution member 700 is provided, the invention is not limited thereto, and a different configuration may be used for each purpose, or the sphere distributed to the first flow path 701 by the distribution member 700 may be used. On the other hand, a delay means (for example, a flow path in which the friction coefficient of the lower surface is different from that of another lower surface, a sphere, or the like) for differentiating the flow period of the ball (flow period until reaching the movable lid 1500). The downstream direction may be branched midway, and a flow path that eventually reaches the movable cover 1500 may be provided in any case.

  Next, a description will be given of the electric accessory 640a to which the ball flowing down the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 reaches. As shown in FIG. 193, the electric accessory 640a is provided in an area where any of the sphere flowing down the first flow path 701 and the sphere flowing down the second flow path 702 can be reached, and is usually provided by a symbol drawing. A guided state (protruding state) in which a ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a can flow down toward the second entrance 640 by a general-purpose hit game executed when a winning is won, and an electric accessory 640a The state can be changed to a released state (embedded state) in which the ball that has reached can not be received.

  Furthermore, the variable mode (opening / closing control content) of the electric accessory 640a executed as a per-game per-game described above is made different depending on the set probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed. In the set gaming state (probable change state, time saving state), the electric accessory 640a has a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) for the ball reaching the electric accessory 640a to reach the second entrance 640. In the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, the ball reaching the electric accessory 640a is directed to the second entrance 640 in the gaming state in which the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. The opening / closing control is performed such that the electric accessory 640a is in the guiding state for a time (for example, 0.1 second) that cannot be reached.

  With such a configuration, during a game state in which a low probability state of a normal symbol is set (for example, a normal state, a latent state), a left-handed game is more advantageous than a right-handed game. During a game state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set (for example, a probable change state, a time saving state), a right-handed game can be an advantageous game that is more advantageous to a player than a left-handed game.

  Finally, the balls that have passed through the motorized accessory 640a (the balls that have flowed down the first flow path 701 and the balls that have flowed down the second flow path 702) reach the V winning device 2650. The V prize device 2650 is controlled to be opened and closed by a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery. When a ball that has won the V prize device 2650 during the jackpot game passes through a specific gate, After the jackpot game, a special symbol high probability state can be set.

  Next, the internal structure of the V winning device 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the structure of the V winning device 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 2650.

  As shown in FIG. 194, the V prize device 2650 is combined with the opening forming member 2650b that is arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 2650b, and the V prize device 2650 is formed. A base member 2650c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 2650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 In order to open and close the arranged LED board 2650d, the back cover body 2650e that sandwiches the LED board 2650d with the base member 2650c, and the jackpot winning port (jackpot winning port) 2650a formed in the opening forming member 2650b. Opening / closing unit 2650f having an opening / closing door 2650f1, and a back cover body 2650e. A flow path cover body 2650g that is combined with the surface side to form a flow path, a switching member 2650h that protrudes into a flow path formed by the back cover body 2650e and the flow path cover body 2650g and switches the flow path of the game ball; A link member 2650i locked to the switching member 2650h, a back cover body 2650j disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 2650g, and fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j to operate the link member 2650i. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 2650k to be closed, and a fixing cover 2650m for covering the flow path solenoid 2650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 2650j with screws.

  FIG. 195 is a sectional view of the V winning device 2650. FIG. 195 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 2650, and FIG. 195 (b) is a sectional view of the V winning device 2650 along Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 195 (b), the V prize winning device 2650 is formed with a jackpot prize opening (big hit prize opening) 2650a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The jackpot winning port (jackpot winning port) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 195 (b). Has a bottom surface inclined downward and to the left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 195 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 195 (b), the opening of the jackpot winning port (jackpot winning port) 2650a is an opening through which a ball can enter by an opening / closing door 2650f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism which can come and go from the gaming board 13 side. The state is changed to a closed state where the ball cannot be entered (ball entry is difficult). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 2650f1, and the ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the opening / closing door 2650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the base member 2650c (the interior of the game board 13) so as to be retracted from the inside of the jackpot winning port (big jackpot winning port) 2650a. .

  In the open state, a surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently used for the jackpot winning jackpot (jackpot winning port) 2650a. You can win within. Therefore, the ball can be reliably won by the V prize device 2650 during the big hit game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 195 (a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 195 (b). As shown in FIG. 195 (a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel of the back cover body 2650e.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a configuration in which the sphere guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 2650e is distributed to a normal discharge channel 2650e1 and a special discharge channel 2650e2 described below.

  FIG. 196 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is operated so that the ball is distributed to the special discharge channel 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted, and a guiding piece 2650h2 for guiding the ball. It is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650h is rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the flow path cover 2650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the sphere guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of a guide piece 2650h2 disposed diagonally below and to the left and a special discharge channel (specific gate) 2650e2. It is guided to. The special discharge channel (specific gate) 2650e2 is configured to have a V route through which the flowing sphere passes through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3. The passage is detected by the detection switch 2650e3 which can detect the passage, and thereafter, the ball is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the detection switch 2650e3 detects a ball during the jackpot game, that is, when the ball passes through the V route, a special symbol It is configured such that a high probability state is set. That is, the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for setting the special symbol high probability state. The switching member 2650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2) that can pass through a specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 as a flow path of a ball that has won the V prize device 2650 during the jackpot game. This is for setting one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot pass through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3, and sets the flow path solenoid 2650k to ON. The flow path is switched so that the ball that has won the V prize device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196 (a)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 198, a description will be given of the content of the transition of the gaming state in the present modification. FIG. 198 is a transition diagram schematically showing transition contents of a gaming state in a modification of the seventh embodiment. In this modified example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set to 1/200, and in the state where the normal state is set, the ball is thrown into the first entrance 64 by the left hitting game. Thereby, a game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery), a jackpot A is set at a rate of 40% as a jackpot type, and a jackpot B is set at a rate of 60%. Then, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery), the jackpot C is set at a rate of 100% as the jackpot type.

  When the jackpot A is set as the jackpot type, the same jackpot game as the jackpot A7 of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 169) is executed, and the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. When the big hit B is set, the same big hit game as the big hit B7 (see FIG. 169) of the above-described seventh embodiment is executed, and the probability change state is set after the big hit game ends. In this modified example, when the probable change state is set, the special symbol executed during the special symbol high probability state is set as the end condition (first transition condition) of the special symbol high probability state (special symbol high probability). The number of lotteries (ST times) is set to 50, and the special symbol lottery number executed during the normal symbol high probability state is set as the end condition (second transition condition) of the normal symbol high probability state (normal symbol high probability). The number of times (time savings) is set to 70 (second transition condition A), or the number of lottery 1 lottery times is set to two (second transition condition B).

  When the big hit game is executed, a right-handed game is performed. As described above with reference to FIG. 193, by executing the right-handed game during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball number) is the upper limit (4). Can be easily reached. During the probable change state, a game for executing a special drawing 2 lottery by a right-handed game is performed. In this modified example, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to execute a lottery more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery so that the gaming state most advantageous to the player becomes the probable change state. This embodiment is different from the seventh embodiment in that the special figure 2 lottery is easily executed when the symbol high probability state is set.

  Specifically, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to be easier to win the small hit than the special figure 1 lottery, and the probability of winning the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery is set to 1/20. In addition, in the case where the big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, a game state (probable change state) advantageous to the player after the big hit game is set is more easily set than in the case where the special figure 1 lottery is won. ing. In addition, in the seventh embodiment described above, the latent-seventh table 203fe3 referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern during the latent state is referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern during the high-probability state of the normal symbol, In the seventh embodiment, the probable variation 7 table 202fe2 referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern in the latent state. .

  In the present embodiment configured in this manner, a right-handed game in which the special figure 2 lottery is mainly executed in the probability change state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and the time reduction state, is performed, and the low probability of the ordinary symbol is performed. In the normal state where the state is set and the latent state, the left-handed game in which the special figure 1 lottery is mainly executed is performed.

  Next, the relationship between the game result in the probable change state and the transition content of the game state will be described. As described above, in the present modification, the first transition condition for transitioning from the probable state to the time saving state when the condition is satisfied and the second transition condition for transiting from the probable state to the latent state when the condition is satisfied are set. Have been. Specifically, the number of special symbol lotteries executed 50 times during the special symbol high-probability state (ST times) is set as 50 as the first transition condition, and the normal symbol high-probability state is set as the second transition condition. The number of executed special symbol lotteries (time saving times) is set to 70 (second transition condition A) or the number of special figure 1 lotteries is set to two (second transition condition B).

  In other words, if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot after the probable change state is set, the state shifts to the time reduction state, and thereafter, the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state is executed 20 times. , So as to shift to a normal state. Here, in this modified example, during the probable change state, a different fluctuating time is set as the fluctuating time of the second special symbol according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (number of reserved balls of special figure 1). Make up. More specifically, similarly to the above-mentioned seven tables for latent accuracy 203fe3 in the seventh embodiment, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is equal to or smaller than a predetermined number (for example, 1, 2), when the number of reserved balls is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, It is configured such that the fluctuation time shorter than 4) is easily selected.

  With such a configuration, in the probable change state in which the set period (50 ST times) is defined, the special figure 2 in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player is easily executed is increased in order to increase the number of times the special figure is executed. It is possible to cause the player to perform a novel game in which the small hit B is won in two lotteries and the special figure 1 fluctuation is discarded to reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls.

  Further, in the present modification, since the second transition condition B is set, for example, when the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the game is interrupted, and the special figure 1 change is executed plural times. When the act of decreasing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is executed, the second transition condition B is satisfied, and a transition is made from the probable state to the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the game is reduced due to the interruption of the game during the execution of the special figure 1 change in the probable change state in which the long change time is easily selected. it can.

  Next, a description will be given of how the special symbols change when the gaming state shifts. First, the flow when the second transition condition B is satisfied in the state where the probable state is set and the latent state is set will be described. As described above, since the second transition condition B can be satisfied when the special figure 1 change is stopped and displayed, a new special figure 1 change is executed immediately after the latent state is set. Since the variation pattern (variation time) of the newly executed special figure 1 variation is selected using the variation pattern table referred to during the latent state, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation during the normal state is changed. A variation pattern that can be selected will be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the long-term special figure 2 fluctuation from being executed during the long-term special figure 1 fluctuation.

  On the other hand, a case where the first shift condition is satisfied during the probable change state and the time saving state is set will be described. As described above, the first shift condition can be satisfied either when the special figure 1 fluctuation is stopped and displayed, or when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed. At a different timing, there may be a case where the special figure 1 fluctuation for a long time is executed. However, the time reduction state is configured so that the special figure lottery is continued 20 times or until the special figure lottery wins the jackpot, and the sum of the fluctuation times for the 20 special figure 2 fluctuations executed during the time reduction state The value is at least longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation set during the latent state. The contents of the variation pattern table are defined so that the variation of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is easier to select a variation time shorter than the variation of the special figure 1 executed during the latent state.

  With this configuration, in the case of shifting from the probable change state to the time saving state and then to the normal state, both the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are for a long time (for example, 10 minutes). ) It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that fluctuates. In addition, during a time saving state or a latent state, if a special jackpot is won by a special drawing lottery, the special figure change being executed is discarded, so after the big hit game ends, the game state set after the big hit game ends A new special drawing lottery corresponding thereto is executed. Therefore, in the case where a new gaming state is set at the time of the jackpot winning, the long-time special figure change executed before the jackpot winning is continuously executed even after the jackpot game is ended, so that the first special is performed. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which both the symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation fluctuate for a long time (for example, 10 minutes).

  As described above, in the present modified example, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be able to be executed in an overlapping manner, and the second special symbol lottery is more specially executed than the case where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured such that the winning state in the symbol lottery is more likely to set the probability change state after the end of the big hit game. With this configuration, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the game state set after the end of the big hit game.

  In addition, the same technical idea as the present modification may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having a different playability from the present modification. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be applied by using the above-described first to third embodiments. As described above, if a predetermined execution condition (for example, entry of a ball into a special power starting port, or a small hit in a special symbol lottery) is established without a jackpot winning in a special symbol lottery, a predetermined game ( (Game per accessory, small hit game) can be executed, and it is determined that a ball that has entered the variable entering means that is opened during the predetermined game has entered a specific area (for example, a V winning opening). The present invention may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which a jackpot game is executed at the opportunity.

  In this case, as shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and (b), the internal structure of the small hit attacker 3650 is changed, and the ball that has won the small hit attacker 3650 is either the normal winning opening 3652 or the V winning opening 3653. The movable valve 3651 may be configured to be movable so as to win a crab, and the jackpot game may be executed when the ball wins the V winning opening 3653 (see FIG. 197 (b)). Even when the ball that has won the small hit attacker 3650 has won the normal winning opening 3652 (see FIG. 197 (a)), the same award ball as when winning the V winning opening 3653 is provided. It is good to configure.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 199 and FIG. 200, the contents of the effect performed in the present modification will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, various transition conditions for terminating the probable change state are set, and the probable change state is changed to a different game state according to the satisfied transition condition. Among them, the effect contents regarding the second transition condition B that is satisfied when the special figure 1 change is executed a predetermined number of times (twice) during the probable change state will be described.

  In the present modified example, when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, similar to the above-described seventh embodiment, the small hit type (small hit A, small hit C) that interrupts the running of the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed. , A small hit type (small hit B) for discarding the running special figure 1 fluctuation can be set. Then, when the special figure 1 change is stopped and displayed without being discarded, the special figure 1 change number is updated.

  That is, when the small hit B is set when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the change of the special figure 1 being executed is discarded, and the number of the special figure 1 changes is not updated, and the new special figure 1 is not updated. It is configured to execute the fluctuation. Therefore, in the probable change state, if the change of the special figure 1 being executed is continuously discarded, the second shift condition B described above is hardly satisfied. On the other hand, as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation during the probable change state, a long special figure 1 fluctuation in which a long time (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation time is set and a short time (for example, 1 minute) fluctuation time are set. In the case where the short special figure 1 fluctuation is selected and the long special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed and the remaining fluctuation time is, for example, 8 minutes, the small hit B is won. It is more advantageous for the player to win the small hit A and interrupt the long special figure 1 fluctuation than to discard the long special figure 1 fluctuation. That is, the second transition condition B may not be easily satisfied.

  Specifically, when the special figure 1 fluctuation newly executed after the long special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is discarded is the short special figure 1 fluctuation, the case where the long special figure 1 fluctuation is not discarded is compared with the case where the long special figure 1 fluctuation is not discarded. When the fluctuation time of the short special figure 1 fluctuation elapses, the possibility that the number of times of the special special figure 1 fluctuation is updated may be increased.

  Therefore, in this modification, in the state in which the probable change state is set, the state of the special figure 1 change being executed (the length of the remaining change time) and the change of the special figure 1 executed next are set. Whether the current gaming state is advantageous to the player based on the variation pattern (fluctuation time) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery mainly executed (a state in which the probable variation state is easily continued). Or not). This allows the player to be notified of the game content in the probable change state in an easily understandable manner.

  FIG. 199 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of display contents when a RUSH period variable effect executed when a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in the probability change state (RUSH) is executed. FIG. 199 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of an extended display indicating that the RUSH period has been extended as a result of the RUSH period variable effect. FIG. 200 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an extended display indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened as a result of the RUSH period variable effect, and FIG. 200 (b) is a diagram showing the RUSH period. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the extended display which shows that the RUSH period was extended as a production result of a variable production. In this modification, among the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in the above-described seventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. I do.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (a), during the RUSH period, when the result of the special drawing 2 lottery result is a predetermined lottery result (a large hit, a small hit, a part of a miss), the rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm. An effect (variable period effect) in which the character 811 imitating the game finds the treasure chest 812 to which the extra bag 812h is attached is executed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a character "What is the content of the bonus" is displayed. The treasure box 812 is a display mode for mainly displaying the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed, and the bag 812h changes how the RUSH period (probable change state period) changes based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. This is a display mode for notifying a player of the fact.

  After the variable period effect shown in FIG. 199 (a) is started and the special figure 2 change is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. An effect is executed in which a result display mode 812a indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 199 (b), as the result display mode 812a, a display mode of “V” indicating that the small hit has been won in the special drawing 2 lottery is displayed. As the result display mode 812a, a display mode imitating "V" is displayed when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, and the character "" is displayed when the lottery result is a big hit. Is displayed, and if it is off, a display pattern imitating a "cross mark" is displayed.

  Then, from among the opened bags 812h, a status display mode 812j indicating whether the RUSH period (probable change state period) is variable based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery this time (whether the state has shifted to a state in which it is easy to change). Is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 199 (b), a “long” display mode indicating that the RUSH period has been extended is displayed as the status display mode 812j. As the status display mode 812j, in addition to the "extended" display mode indicating that the RUSH period has been extended, "sorry" indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened, the small hit C is set, and the RUSH period ends. "End", the drawing of special figure 2 lottery subject to variable period production is out of place, and does not affect the RUSH period, "?", The drawing of special figure 2 lottery subject to variable period production A display mode such as “celebration” to congratulate that the result is a jackpot is displayed.

  Here, regarding the setting method of various display modes displayed when the variable period effect is executed, the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIGS. 183 to 192). This will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the status command receiving process (see S4232 in FIG. 183) executed in the command determination process 7 (S4192 in FIG. 183), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the probable changing state, and the probable changing state is in progress. If it is determined that “RUSH” in FIG. 199 (a) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a process for setting a display command is executed.

  Next, instead of the special figure 2 change display setting processing 7 (see S5237 in FIG. 190) executed in the change display setting processing 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187), the current special figure 2 change is a big hit change, A selection process is performed to determine whether the variation is a small hit variation or an out-of-office variation, and to select whether to execute the variable duration effect based on the determination result. In this selection process, whether or not to execute the variable period effect is selected based on the contents specified in the dedicated data table (variable period effect selection table). Specifically, the period of the special figure 2 is about 20% if the change is a big hit change, 100% if it is a small change, and 10% if it is a change. The contents of the period variable effect selection table are defined so that the execution of the variable effect is selected.

  Here, when it is selected to execute the variable period effect in the jackpot fluctuation, the display mode of “this” is displayed as the result display mode 812a and the “celebration” is displayed as the status display mode 812j in accordance with the stop timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation. A display command for displaying the display mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. Also, if it is selected to execute the variable period effect in the deviating fluctuation, the display mode of “X” is displayed as the result display mode 812a and the “?” Is displayed as the status display mode 812j in accordance with the stop timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation. A display command for displaying the display mode of on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  On the other hand, if it is selected to execute the variable duration effect in the small hit change, then the small hit type set in the current small hit change is read, and the special figure 1 being executed at the stop timing of the special figure 2 change is read out. A type determination process is performed to determine whether the type is a small hit type that interrupts fluctuation or a small hit type that is discarded. Next, the remaining time of the currently running special figure 1 fluctuation is calculated based on the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223fe, and is executed next from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the fluctuation pattern command included in the winning information stored in the reserved first area) is predicted.

  Then, as a result of the type determination processing, when it is determined that the small hit type interrupts the special figure 1 change, the remaining time of the special figure 1 change at the time of interruption is changed to the change time of the next special figure 1 change. If it is longer, the display mode of “extended” is displayed as the status display mode 812j. If the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation at the time of interruption is shorter than the fluctuation time of the next special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed, “ A display command for displaying the display mode of “sorry” on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. Also, as a result of the type determination process, when it is determined that the small hit type is to discard the special figure 1 fluctuation, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation at the time of destruction is changed to the fluctuation time of the next special figure 1 fluctuation. If it is longer, the display mode of “sorry” is displayed as the status display mode 812j. If the remaining time of the special figure 1 change at the time of discarding is shorter than the change time of the next special figure 1 change, “ A display command for displaying the “extended” display mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. Furthermore, when the small hit type set this time is the small hit C, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol shifts to the low probability state at the stop timing of the special figure 2 change, so that the status display mode 812j is “end”. A display command for displaying the display mode of on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  As described above, in the present modification, even when the same small hit type is set, the timing at which the small hit change is stopped and displayed and the special figure 1 change executed next time are changed. The production result of the variable duration production is varied according to the set fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the small hit variation is stopped and displayed as the result of the variable duration effect, the small hit type that interrupts the special figure 1 change that is being executed at the special figure 2 change stop timing, It is configured to relatively determine which is more advantageous to the player depending on the type of the small hit to be discarded, and to set an effect mode (display mode) of the period variable effect based on the discrimination result. ing. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the small hit changes, it is possible to easily inform the player whether or not the small hit type advantageous to the player is set at that time.

  In this modification, as described above, the effect of the variable period effect is configured to be relatively set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect form of the period variable effect may be determined based on whether the fluctuation time is longer than a specific time (for example, 1 minute), or the remaining fluctuation time when the special figure 1 fluctuation is discarded is a specific time (for example, , 30 seconds).

  Further, the technical idea of the seventh embodiment described above and the technical idea of the modification of the seventh embodiment may be combined. For example, in the latent state of the seventh embodiment, an end condition other than the jackpot winning is set. Alternatively, the latent state may be terminated even when the termination condition is satisfied.

  Specifically, the first end condition that can be satisfied when the total of the number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol reaches 100, and the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 5 A second end condition that can be satisfied when the number of times has been reached and a third end condition that can be satisfied when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a specific small hit (small hit C) can be set. Just do it.

  With this configuration, when a latent state that is advantageous to the player is set for the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the player is notified of how long the latent state is to be continued. It can be difficult to understand. That is, in the above-described seventh embodiment, once the latent state is set, the latent state continues at least until the next big hit game is executed (until the big hit is won). There is a problem that the game becomes monotonous, but in this modified example, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the latent state to continue for a long time or until the jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Furthermore, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit type (small hit A) for interrupting the first special symbol change being executed and the second special symbol change being executed are discarded (forced upon departure). A plurality of small hit types including at least a small hit type (small hit B) to be stopped) can be set. Then, when the small hit B is set as the small hit type and the first special symbol change is discarded, the lottery count of the first special symbol in the latent state is updated by the discarded first special symbol change. It is configured not to be. With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the ease with which the above-described second end condition is satisfied during the latent state based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. Further, the degree of advantage of the lottery result of the second special symbol can be changed according to the execution status of the first special symbol.

  For example, in a gaming machine in which the fluctuating time A (2 minutes) and the fluctuating time B (10 minutes) can be set at least as the fluctuating time of the first special symbol in the latent state, the fluctuating time B (10 minutes) is set. ) Is set, and when the remaining time of the running first special symbol change is longer than 2 minutes, the running first special symbol change is discarded rather than discarded. In the state where the remaining time of the first special symbol change during execution is shorter than 2 minutes, it is more advantageous for the player to be discarded than when the first special symbol during execution is interrupted. This is advantageous.

  Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in both the result of the lottery of the special symbol and the fluctuation state of the first special symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the degree of advantage to the player can be made different by a combination of a plurality of events (special symbol lottery, the state of fluctuation of the first special symbol), so that it is possible to provide a game that is difficult for the player to predict.

  Further, the technical idea described above may be used for a gaming machine using the configuration of the third embodiment. In this case, the processing for the running of the special figure may be made different depending on the hit type obtained when the special power operation port is won.

  In the seventh embodiment, in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variation specification) in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in an overlapping manner, the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained. Accordingly, the length of the period in which the advantageous game state is set can be varied by discarding or interrupting the first special symbol change being executed. In other words, the first special symbol change is discarded, thereby making it difficult to satisfy the end condition that can be satisfied based on the number of times the first special symbol lottery is executed, thereby aiming at a long-term advantageous gaming state. In place of this, a specific area is provided in the small hit attacker opened in the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, and when the ball passes through the specific area. May also be configured to execute a jackpot game.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, the configuration in which only the first special symbol has the hold storage function is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold storage function is provided in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A function may be provided. In this case, in the gaming state (probable state) which is advantageous to the player, only the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is used as the number of reserved balls to be referred to when selecting the variation time of the second special symbol to be executed. May be referred to, or the total number of reserved balls obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol may be referred to. Furthermore, the variation time of the second special symbol may be selected based on the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In this case, for example, the second As the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is larger, a variation pattern (fluctuation pattern with a shorter variation time) advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is good to constitute so that it becomes.

  With this configuration, the player needs to reduce the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol while acquiring the reserved ball of the second special symbol. The act of reducing the number of balls can be suppressed. In addition, the total number of reserved balls obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol When the variation time of the second special symbol is selected based on both the difference and the total number of reserved balls is equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 5) and the difference is equal to or more than 3 In the above, it is preferable that a configuration is adopted such that a variation pattern (a variation pattern with a short variation time) that is advantageous to the player is easily selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. This allows the player to actively play the game, thereby improving the operation of the game.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, when the gaming state (latent state) advantageous to the player is set, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a specific number (one or two). The variation pattern (short-term variation pattern) more advantageous to the player is selected as the second special symbol variation than the case other than the specific number, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is set as the specific number. Although a small value is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific number may be a plurality of values (for example, three or four) including the upper limit number (4) of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Alternatively, it may be a distant value (for example, one or three). In this case, if a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery and a small hit type for discarding the running first special symbol change is set, the small hit win is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Can be varied according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. In other words, depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the case where discarding the first special symbol change is advantageous to the player, and the case where not discarding (interrupting) the change is advantageous to the player. Can be provided. With this configuration, the player can be more interested in the relationship between the lottery result of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, when a game state (probable state) advantageous to the player is set, one type of variation pattern table referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, a large number of jackpot types in which a probability change state and a latent state are set after the end of the jackpot are provided, and are referred to during the latent state based on the set jackpot type. A plurality of variation pattern tables referred to during the latent state may be provided so that the variation pattern tables can be different. In this case, the second special pattern table may be provided according to the referenced variation pattern table. It is preferable to change the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in which a variation pattern (short-time variation pattern) advantageous to the player is easily selected as the symbol variation. With such a configuration, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol that the player aims at during the latent state can be varied, so that it is possible to provide a game that is difficult for the player to predict. Further, in the case where a plurality of variation pattern tables referred to during the latent state are provided, a part of the variation pattern table is provided to the player as the second special symbol variation regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. An advantageous variation pattern table in which an advantageous variation pattern (a short-time variation pattern) is easily selected (always selected), and a second special symbol variation is advantageous to the player regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is preferable to provide both or one of a disadvantageous variation pattern table in which a variation pattern (a short-term variation pattern) is difficult to be selected (it is not selected).

  Further, in the modification of the above-described seventh embodiment, when the currently executed first special symbol change is discarded, the number of time savings is not subtracted. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the fluctuation is discarded, the number of time savings may be subtracted. In such a configuration, when a game state (probable change state) advantageous to the player is set, a short time (for example, 5 seconds) change time is set as the change pattern of the second special symbol change. A variation pattern is set so as to be easily selected, and a variation pattern in which a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation is easily selected. Then, in the second special symbol change that is efficiently executed with respect to the first special symbol change, a certain number of times (for example, two times) of small hits in which the first special symbol change being executed is discarded is reliably changed until the winning is achieved. It is possible to provide the player with a novel game property of being able to execute the middle game.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, when the number of reserved special symbols becomes one or two during the latent state, the variation time of the second special symbol change is shortened. Was. Furthermore, a specific small hit (small hit B) is won in the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded (forced stop), so that the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is reduced. Was configured. In addition, as a configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, in a game executed during the latent state (right-handed game), it is configured to be able to acquire a hold memory of the first special symbol. In addition, the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the latent state is configured to be long (for example, 10 minutes). With such a configuration, as a game during the latent state, in the second special symbol lottery in which a lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed, a big hit or a small hit which is advantageous to the player A game that has never been played in which a game in which many prize balls are obtained by winning a game and a game in which the reserved memory of the first special symbol is reduced and the frequency of executing the second special symbol lottery is increased are simultaneously executed. Could be provided to the player.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is four (upper limit), the execution frequency of the second special symbol lottery may be increased. In this case, in contrast to the configuration of the above-described seventh embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which it is difficult to acquire the hold storage of the first special symbol during the game in the latent state (right-handed game). In this case, unlike the above-described embodiments, it is disadvantageous for the player to win a specific small hit (small hit B) in the second special symbol lottery.

  Even in the case of such a configuration, it is easy to perform a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player in accordance with the number of reserved special symbols (first special symbol) stored disadvantageously to the player. Can be different. In this case, for example, the second special symbol lottery is advantageously executed by obtaining the reserved number of the first special symbol up to the upper limit value during the jackpot game in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to easily set the state to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to acquire the reserved number of first special symbols up to the upper limit during the jackpot game.

  In addition, even if the number of reserved special symbols is held up to the upper limit during the jackpot game, the process of starting the first special symbol change after setting the latent state starts the second special symbol change. Since the process is executed before the process, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol change from being executed in an advantageous state after setting the latent state. In addition, as the control process of the main control device 110, the process of starting the second special symbol change may be executed before the process of starting the first special symbol change. With this configuration, for example, in the case where the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game, the number of the stored holdings of the first special symbol is changed (decreased) from the number of the held storages acquired during the big hit game. The second special symbol change can be executed without any change.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the number of special symbols to be stored (the number of special figure reserved balls) is a specific number (for example, one), a game advantageous to the player (for example, The first game (for example, a game for forcibly stopping the special symbol change) in which the special symbol change is configured to be easily executed, and the special symbol holding number (special figure reserved ball number) is easily set to a specific number. ) And a second game (for example, a game in which a special symbol change is stopped after a lapse of a change time) that is difficult to obtain a specific number. Further, the design is made such that the specific number (for example, one) of special figure reserved balls in which a game advantageous to the player is easily executed is smaller than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the special figure reserved balls. However, when the current number of special figure reserved balls is larger than the specified number, the first game is more easily executed than when the number is smaller than the specified number. In addition, when the current number of special figure reserved balls is a specific number, or when the number is smaller than the specific number, the first game is more difficult to be executed than when the number is larger than the specific number.

  With this configuration, the number of special figure reserved balls can be brought close to a specific number simply by having the player play the game aiming at the execution of the first game. Easy games can be played.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, the number of special figure reserved balls that facilitates the execution of a game advantageous to the player is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number of special figure reserved balls. Alternatively, the upper limit number of special figure reserved balls may be set as the number of special figure reserved balls (specific number) that facilitates execution of a game advantageous to the player. In this case, if a game in which the special symbol change is forcibly stopped is executed, the number of special figure reserved balls tends to decrease, which is disadvantageous for the player. That is, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property in which a game is performed with the aim of not executing the game in which the special symbol change is forcibly stopped.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described seventh embodiment, the processing content for the first special symbol change being executed is made different depending on the small hit type set when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. Was. Specifically, when the small hit type A or the small hit C is set as the small hit type, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted, and when the small hit B is set, the special symbol change being executed is changed. It was configured to be destroyed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, no matter what the lottery result of the first special symbol variation being executed, the process according to the set small hit type is executed. There is a problem in that even if during a jackpot change that is a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player, the jackpot change is discarded based on the small hit win. In addition, when such a configuration is used, a high expectation effect with a high expectation in which the first special symbol change during execution is a big hit is executed before the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to execute the high expectation effect because the player notices that the jackpot change has been discarded (the jackpot winning has been invalidated).

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment described above, when the gaming state (latent state) advantageous to the player is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, In addition, since the second special symbol is configured not to be stored on hold, for example, the second special symbol that has won the small hit is stopped and displayed at a timing before the first special symbol that has won the big hit is stopped and displayed. Even if a means for determining in advance is provided, the timing when it is determined that the stop display is not performed is immediately before stop display of the jackpot change, so that the high expectation effect is performed for a long time (the jackpot change). (Corresponding to the fluctuation time).

  On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, when the small hitting game is executed (when the special process is executed for the special symbol change being executed), the small hit game is performed according to the content of the special symbol change being executed. This is largely different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that the configuration is such that the processing content is determined. More specifically, at the time when the small hit game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation being executed If the result of the determination is a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set), the other special symbol fluctuation being executed is discarded, and the specific fluctuation is discarded. If it is other than a pattern, the other special symbol variation being executed can be interrupted.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, as a variation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) which has won the big hit, the big hit type in which the big hit game (for example, the probable big hit) which is advantageous for the player is executed, and the disadvantage pattern for the player is given. A different big hitting game (for example, a normal big hit) is executed so that a different changing pattern is selected depending on the type of the big hit. Further, the changing pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is changed. It is configured to be different.

  More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is large, the variation time of less than 30 seconds is set as the variation pattern corresponding to the advantageous jackpot type than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is small. A variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set as a variation pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type is configured to be easily selected.

  With such a configuration, when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is large, a jackpot game (for example, a probable big hit) advantageous to the player is more easily executed than when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is small ( A jackpot game (for example, a normal jackpot) that is disadvantageous to the player can be made difficult to be executed (it is easy to be discarded by the small hit winning). That is, it is possible to vary the ratio of the probability change jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to accumulate the number of reserved balls of the special symbol while expecting an advantageous jackpot game to be executed, thereby improving the operation of the game.

  Further, the eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a small win can be won in any one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. I have. By configuring in this way, even if one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is won, it is possible to discard the big hit lottery by the other small hit lottery, According to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the ratio occupied by the jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot can be reliably varied.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 201, the configuration of the game board 13 in the present embodiment differs from the above-described modification of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 193) in part of the configuration in the right area and in the lower area (variable The difference is that a part of the configuration of the display unit 80 (the lower area) is different. Other components are the same, and the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 201, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 193). The first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 through which the balls distributed by the distribution member 700 can flow are provided to extend to the lower side of the right side region, The structure and arrangement position of the object 640a are changed, and the small hitting attacker (the second attacker) that is opened in a part of the small hitting game that is opened in the small hitting game instead of the small hitting attacker 3650 ) 5650 is disposed at a lower central position of the game board 13. The other components are the same, and the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 will be described focusing on the differences from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 193). The ball distributed to the first flow path 701 by the distribution member 700 passes through the curved path 701a, passes through the through gate 67, and flows downward in the right region. The sphere distributed to the second flow path 702 flows down the third flow path 703a provided on the downstream side, flows into the inflow port 704a, and flows into the back side of the first flow path 701 (FIG. 201). It flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the far side from the viewpoint, passes through the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, and flows out from the outlet to the lower right side area on the game board 13. . Then, the balls distributed to the two flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 join under the right region, flow down on the variable winning device (first attacker) 2650, and out. It flows into the mouth 66.

  Next, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 of the configuration arranged in the right area of the game board 13 will be described. In the present embodiment, the through gate 67 is disposed downstream of the first flow path 701 having the curved path 701a, and the second ball is provided downstream of the second flow path 702 (the lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). A mouth 640 is provided. With this configuration, the sphere flowing into the second flow path 702 at 1.2-second intervals can be made to flow toward the second ball entrance 640 without decreasing the flow velocity. Therefore, since the falling intervals of the spheres flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the spheres are connected in the second flow path 702, and a plurality of spheres enter the second entrance 640 at the same time. Can be suppressed. In addition, when the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the electric accessory 640a is open without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the ball is quickly released to the second entrance 640. You can get into the ball.

  In addition, different flow paths (first flow path 701,...) Through which the through gate 67 which is an execution trigger of the normal symbol lottery and the electric accessory 640 a whose operation is controlled by the winning of the normal symbol are distributed by the distribution member 700. Since the distributing member 700 is disposed in the second flow path 702) so as to cause the ball to flow down only one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled), the second entrance port is provided. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are disposed in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is broken, and a state in which the ball flows down only in one of the flow paths is created. This makes it possible to create a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. However, by using the configuration of this modification, a ball is illegally entered into the second entrance 640. Creating a state that is easy to cause can be suppressed.

  Next, a case where a ball flows down the second flow path 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured such that the period during which the ball flows down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, the time required for the sphere that has flowed into the second flow path 702 to flow out of the outlet is about 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, when 100 spheres are fired toward the right region in one minute, the sphere that has flown into the first flow path 701 and the sphere that is fired next to the sphere are fired, and the second flow path 702 Will flow down the lower right area (the area where the first variable winning device 2650 is provided) of the game board 13 almost simultaneously (about 0.1 second difference). Therefore, in the gaming state in which the first variable winning device 2650 is opened (big hit state or small hit state), it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at once.

  Further, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 so that a plurality of flow paths are overlapped in a front view. As described above, by forming a plurality of ball channels using the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to reduce a space for forming the ball channels (an area occupied by the ball channels in the game board 13). it can.

  Further, the ball outlet of the second channel 702 is located below the outlet of the first channel 701 (downstream of the second ball inlet 640), and the first outlet is located in the lower right area of the game board 13. The sphere is configured to flow out downstream of the sphere flowing out of the flow path 701. As a result, the ball that has flowed out of the outlet 704c (the ball that has flowed out faster than the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 701) directly collides with the ball that has flowed out of the first flow path 701, and is irregular. A situation in which a ball flow occurs can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the ball fired by the right-handed game by the distribution member 700 is alternately distributed to two flow paths. However, other configurations may be used. Instead of alternating (1: 1) to the channels, the balls may be distributed at different ratios, or the balls may be distributed to three or more channels. Further, the configuration may be such that the sphere is randomly distributed to a plurality of flow paths in accordance with the weight of the sphere and the timing of the flow. Further, in the present embodiment, the sorting member 700 in which the sorting destination of the next passing ball changes according to the own weight of the passing ball is used. For example, a sorting member electrically driven in accordance with a predetermined rule is used. A dividing member may be used.

  Next, a lower region of the game board 13 in which the small hit attacker 5650 is provided will be described. This small hitting attacker 5650 is a variable ball-in means that is opened in a small hitting game executed when a small hitting is won in the first special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 201, the small hitting attacker 5650 is disposed at a position below the first ball entrance 64, and a ball flowing down on the game board 13 reaches by a nail implanted in the game board 13. It is configured to be difficult. Therefore, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small hit game in which the player is unlikely to acquire a prize ball is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a control for interrupting or forcibly stopping the other special symbol variation being executed is configured to be executable. The control content to be executed is switched based on the variation content of the other special symbol variation. In other words, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball, but a predetermined control (interruption or forced stop) is executed with respect to the second special symbol variation being executed. This is a trigger for execution.

<Electrical Configuration in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a part of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the RAM 203 are different. Otherwise, it is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, contents specified in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 202, the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 168 (a)) in that the small hit random number table 202fb is replaced with the small hit random number 8 table. 202gb, instead of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd, the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd, the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fe, the variation pattern selection 8 table 202ge, and the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff, The difference is that a selection eight table 202gf is provided, and the other points are the same.

  Here, the contents of the small hit random number 8 table 202gb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number 8 table 202gb. As shown in FIG. 203, the small hit random number 8 table 202gb defines a small hit determination value for the first special symbol. Specifically, the small hit determination value is defined in a range of “300 to 599” for the first random number counter C1 regardless of the probability state of the special symbol for the symbol type of the first special symbol, Regarding the second special symbol, the small hit determination value is defined in a range where the value of 1 of the first random number counter C1 is "550 to 599" regardless of the probability state of the special symbol.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the small hit is won with a probability of about 1/2 when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and the small hit with a probability of about 1/12 when the second special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to win. In the present embodiment, when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the small hit attacker 5650 in which the ball cannot be won during the small hit game (it is difficult to win) is opened. Is executed, and when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small hit game in which the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the big hit game is opened is executed. Therefore, even if the first special symbol lottery is set to win a small hit with a high probability, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively specific (prize ball). Also, in the second special symbol lottery, it is set so as to win a small hit with a probability lower than the small hit probability of the first special symbol lottery, and in a probable state or a latent state in which a game is executed by a right-handed game. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to reduce the ball possession.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd. As shown in FIG. 204, the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is different from the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) in that a prize device (a prize device to be opened) in which a jackpot operation is executed. The difference is that they differ from each other in that the value of the hour-saving counter 203h set after the end of the jackpot is different, and the other points are the same. Note that, for convenience of explanation, each of the jackpot types used in the above-described seventh embodiment and the jackpot types used in the eighth embodiment have partially different names (for example, jackpot A7). And jackpot A8) are the same for the elements that are not described for the differences. A detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 204, in the eighth embodiment, when a normal jackpot (jackpot A8, jackpot D8) is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, it is set at the time of the jackpot winning. Regardless of the game state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0, that is, it is defined that the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is not set after the big hit game ends. In addition, when the jackpot C8 set at a rate of 20% of the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery is won, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 10,000 regardless of the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot winning. Is set to That is, it is configured that the probable change state is set until substantially winning the next big hit.

  As described above, the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery defines a jackpot type having a different degree of advantage for the player, and the "jackpot A8" "Big hit B8" and "big hit C8" are defined. In other words, it is stipulated that “big hit C8” is the type of big hit that is most advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, in the case of winning the probability change big hit in the second special symbol lottery (the case of winning "big hit E8"), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 100 regardless of the gaming state set at the time of the big hit winning. . In other words, if the "big hit E8" is won, a probability change state of 100 times (100 special symbol changes) after the big hit game is set.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the right-hitting game is executed during the probable change state, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol are executed in parallel (overlapping). While aiming to win the "big hit C8", a game is executed that aims not to win the big hit types "big hit A8" and "big hit D8" whose probable change state ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 205 and FIG. 206, among the variation pattern selection tables in the eighth embodiment, the probable change 8 table 202ge and the latent probabilities 8 table 202ge referred to during the probable change state will be described. I do. FIG. 205 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the eight tables for probabilities of change 202ge, and FIG. 206 is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the eight tables for latent probability 202ge. .

  In the present embodiment, a right-handed game is executed in a state in which the probability change state and the latent state are set, and a game in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed in an overlapping manner is performed. Then, the fluctuation pattern set when the big hit is won is made different depending on the selected big hit type. In addition, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved balls) and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved balls) are different based on the total number of reserved special figures. It is configured so that a fluctuation pattern can be selected.

  More specifically, the system is configured so that the larger the number of combined special figure reservations is, the shorter the fluctuation time selected when the player wins a jackpot advantageous to the player than the case where the total number of special figure reservations is short. The variation time selected when the number of the combined special figure reservations is larger is longer than that in the case where the total number of the special figure reservations is shorter than when the total number of special figure reservations is short.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case where a small hit is won in one special symbol lottery, the control to be executed for the other special symbol variation being executed in accordance with the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation being executed. The content is configured to be different. Specifically, when the other special symbol variation being executed is a variation pattern of 30 seconds or more, a process for discarding the special symbol variation is executed. If the variation pattern is less than 30 seconds, a process for interrupting the special symbol variation is executed.

  With this configuration, when the number of combined special figure reservations is large, the special symbol fluctuation is discarded when the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player is set, compared to the case where the number of combined special figure reservations is small. When a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is set, the special symbol change can be made difficult to discard (easy to interrupt). Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to continue the state where the total number of special figure reservations is large.

  As shown in FIG. 205, in the probable change 8 table 202g2, different fluctuations are performed based on the special symbol type, the result of the determination of success / failure (the result of the selected type), and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations). A pattern is defined.

  More specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit A", and the number of special symbols suspended (sum of the special symbols) In the range of “0 to 3”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern. In the range of (total number of reserved special figures) "4 to 7", the long range of the variation time of 30 seconds is associated as a variation pattern with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1. Stipulated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit B", and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) is In the range of “0 to 3”, the long range of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as the fluctuation pattern. In the range of “4 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern. .

  The symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is “big hit C” in the jackpot, and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) is “0”. In the range of “−3”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with a super long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (total special figure reservation) In the range of “number” from “4 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in association with a super short variation having a variation time of 10 seconds. .

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is “0 to 3”. , The long range of the fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is “ In the range of “4 to 6”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a middle variation having a variation time of 25 seconds as a variation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (total special figure reservation) In the range of “7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in which a short variation having a variation time of 15 seconds is associated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type is "big hit D", and the number of special figures held (the total number of special figures held) is In the range of “0 to 3”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 20 seconds as a variation pattern. In the range of “4 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a long variation having a variation time of 35 seconds as a variation pattern. .

  The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the result of the hit determination is a jackpot type of "big hit E", and the number of special figures held (the total number of special figures held) is "0". In the range of “−3”, the long range of the fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the special figure reservation number (total special figure reservation number) ) Is "4 to 7", and the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in which a short variation having a variation time of 20 seconds is associated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbol reservations (the total number of special symbol reservations) is “0 to 7”. , Ie, the entire range, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 15 seconds as a variation pattern.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, in the 8 tables for latents 202g2, the special symbol type, the result of the determination of the success or failure (the result of the selected type), the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) are displayed. A different variation pattern is defined based on this.

  More specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit A", and the number of special symbols suspended (sum of the special symbols) In the range of “0 to 4”, the short range of 28 seconds as the variation pattern is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1. In the range of (total number of reserved special figures) “5 to 7”, the long range of 30 seconds as the fluctuation pattern is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Stipulated.

  Also, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit B", and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) is In the range of “0 to 4”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (summed special figure) In the range of “5 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a long variation having a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern. .

  The symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit C" and the number of special figures held (the total number of special figures held) is "0". In the range of “−4”, the long range of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) ) Is "5 to 7", and the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in which a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds is associated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is “0 to 6”. , The long range of the fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is “ In the range of “7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in association with a middle variation having a variation time of 25 seconds.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit D", and the number of special figures held (the total number of special figures held) In the range of “0 to 4”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (summed special figure) In the range of “5 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a long variation having a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern. .

  The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the result of the hit determination is a jackpot type of "big hit E", and the number of special figures held (the total number of special figure held) is "0". In the range of “−4”, the long range of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) ) Is "5 to 7", and the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in which a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds is associated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbols reserved (the total number of special symbols reserved) is "0 to 3". , The long range of the fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is “ In the range of “4 to 6”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a middle variation having a variation time of 325 as a variation pattern. ) Is “7” and the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with a short variation having a variation time of 15 seconds as a variation pattern. As described above, in the present embodiment, the execution is performed when the execution condition for executing the specific control (for example, interruption or discard) for the special symbol variation being executed is satisfied (for example, at the time of executing the small hit game). The content of the specific control to be performed is switched according to the content of the special symbol change being executed. The variation display mode of the special symbol variation being executed (the variation display mode set at the time of executing the special symbol variation) is switched to a variation display mode according to the content of the specific control. As a result, the switching content of the variation display mode can be changed according to the content of the special symbol variation being executed, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the switching condition for switching the variation display mode of the special symbol variation being executed to the specific variation display mode (variable display mode for forcibly stopping) according to the set game state. Are different in the easiness of establishment. Further, the easiness of establishing the switching condition is changed according to the type of the special symbol being executed or the set jackpot type (the length of the selected change time is changed). Accordingly, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting how the variable display mode is switched when the execution condition is satisfied. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ease of establishment of the execution condition is configured to be different according to the special symbol type, and specifically, a lottery result ( The probability of winning (small hits) is made different according to the special symbol type, and the length of the change time of the special symbol change set when the small hits is won is made different. Thereby, the game result can be made to differ greatly depending on which special symbol type performs the change indicating which lottery result at which timing. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 205 and FIG. 206, a specific variation time is selected corresponding to each condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of fluctuation times that can be selected in this manner may be defined, and a fluctuation pattern of a different fluctuation time may be selected according to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Further, in the present embodiment, the threshold value is set to a variation time of 30 seconds as a condition for switching the content of the specific control to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of threshold values may be set. In the present embodiment, a variation time (for example, 28 seconds, 30 seconds) close to a threshold value set as a condition for switching the content of the specific control to be executed is selected. Thereby, when the fluctuation effect corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation effect in the same effect mode can be executed. It should be noted that the difference between the fluctuation times (for 2 seconds) can be dealt with by delaying the start timing of the fluctuation effect from the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, or making the end timing of the fluctuation effect earlier than the end timing of the special symbol fluctuation. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that a still image (for example, the image displayed at the start of a fluctuation effect or the image displayed at the end of a fluctuation effect) may be displayed for the difference period.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf. The small hit type selection 8 table 202gf is different from the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 172 (a)) in that the small hit type is defined for the first special symbol, The point that the opening target that is opened in the game is changed, the point that the symbol confirmation time is changed, and the point that the control content to be performed for the special symbol change during execution is changed are the same. is there. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The content specified in the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf will be specifically described. When the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in a range of “0 to 89”, “small hit A8” is associated with the value. , “90-99” is associated with “small hit B8”. Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the rate of selecting "small hit A8" at the time of the small hit winning is 90% (90/100), The rate at which the small hits B8 are selected is 10% (10/100).

  When "small hit A" is selected, a small hit game in which the small hit attacker (second attacker) 5650 is opened for 0.1 second is executed. Further, “0.1 seconds” is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol, and a process of interrupting the second special symbol (the special symbol 2) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of interrupting the currently executing second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed, the process of interrupting the process of measuring the change in elapsed time of the currently executing second special symbol change is performed. Be executed. Specifically, when the small hitting game is executed, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to ON, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to ON. ) Is performed to skip the process of updating the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj indicating the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time). Then, upon the end of the small hitting game, the restart condition is satisfied (the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to off), and the process of updating the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj that has been interrupted is restarted. With such a configuration, while the small hit game is being executed (while the interruption condition is satisfied), it is possible to inhibit the remaining change time of the second special symbol change being executed from decreasing. Therefore, while the small hit game is being executed, for example, the second special symbol change that has been won is stopped and displayed, and the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed repeatedly. Can be banned. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, since the process of measuring the elapsed time of the special symbol change during execution is only interrupted (skipped), the first special symbol change executed before the small hit game after the restart condition is satisfied. Can be resumed. Therefore, the result of the already executed special symbol lottery can be reliably notified to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied triggered by the winning of the small hit, the processing for interrupting the special symbol change being executed is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol fluctuation during execution may be continuously performed, and the stop display of the first special symbol fluctuation may be interrupted after the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has elapsed. In other words, even when the interruption condition is satisfied, the update processing for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is continuously executed, and when the update processing is executed until the predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the interruption is performed. It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the interruption condition is satisfied, the stop display of the special symbol change is not executed until the restart condition is satisfied. This eliminates the need to interrupt the update process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when "small hit A" is selected, the small hit game opening target is the small hit attacker (second attacker) 5650, and the small hit game in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball during the small hit game is executed. .

  When "small hit B" is selected, the small hit game is executed with the same operation content as "small hit A" described above. Further, depending on the variation state of the second special symbol being executed, either a process of interrupting the variation of the running special figure 2 or a process of forcibly stopping (discarding) the variation is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, in a part of the case where the small hit is won in one special symbol lottery, the content of the control executed for the other special symbol variation being executed is changed to the other special symbol variation status ( (Change situation, setting situation). Specifically, when the variation pattern set for the other special symbol variation being executed is a variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds or more, the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped (discarded). If the variation pattern has a variation time of less than 30 seconds, the control contents can be switched so that the special symbol variation is interrupted. With this configuration, it is determined whether or not to cancel the lottery result of the special symbol lottery being executed according to the fluctuation state of the special symbol fluctuation being executed, so the timing of winning the small hit B8 is determined. The player can be watched at which timing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the content of the variation pattern, that is, the length of the variation time is set as a condition for switching the control content for the special symbol variation being executed, for example, it corresponds to a lottery result disadvantageous to the player. By simply defining the variation pattern table so that the variation time of the variation pattern becomes longer, it is possible to easily stop (discard) the special symbol variation corresponding to the lottery result disadvantageous to the player. The conditions used to determine the control content are not limited to the above. For example, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation during execution, or whether the lottery result satisfies a specific condition, is determined. The result of the control content may be determined based on Furthermore, the control content to be executed for the running first special symbol variation may be determined based on a combination of the running first special symbol variation and the lottery result of the second special symbol that has won the small hit. .

  Next, the content of the small hit type corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) as the symbol type in the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf will be described. "Small hit C8" is associated with the range of the value of the small hit type counter C5 from "0 to 79", and "Small hit D8" is associated with the range of "80 to 89". , “90-99” is associated with “small hit E8”. Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the rate of selecting "small hit C8" at the time of the small hit winning is 80% (80/100). The rate at which “small hit D8” is selected is 10% (10/100), and the rate at which “small hit E8” is selected is 10% (10/100).

  When "small hit C8" is selected, a small hit game in which the big hit attacker (first attacker) 2650 is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed. Also, “0.5 seconds” is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol. Also, when the “small hit D8” is selected, the same small hit game as the above “small hit C8” is executed, and furthermore, according to the fluctuation state of the first special symbol being executed, Either a process of interrupting the change of the special figure 1 or a process of forcibly stopping (discarding) is executed. In addition, the content of the control process at the time of interrupting or forcibly stopping the first special symbol change based on the "small hit D8" is the target of the control process executed based on the "small hit B8". Since only the first symbol has been switched to the first special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 208, the present embodiment is different from the above-described RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment in that a special variation flag 203ga is added, and the rest is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special fluctuation flag 203ga is for indicating whether the special symbol fluctuation to be executed is a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set, and is used when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set. Set to on. In the present embodiment, when the small hit change that has been won for the specific small hit type is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol change is interrupted according to the change pattern set for the other special symbol change being executed. It is configured to be able to switch between executing a process and executing a process of discarding (forcibly stopping). That is, in one special symbol lottery, for the other special symbol variation, the processing condition for switching the variation mode being executed to a variation mode different from the variation mode set when executing the other special symbol variation. Is established, the variation after switching is made different according to the variation during execution.

  With such a configuration, when the above-described processing condition is satisfied, the type of variation to be switched to is determined based on the other special symbol variation. Some games can be offered.

<Control Process of Main Controller in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 209 to FIG. 215, control processing contents of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. The eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that the first special symbol lottery is configured to be able to win a small hit, and when a variation pattern is selected, the variation time is 30 seconds or more. Is added to the process of determining whether the variation pattern in which is set is selected, and when the special symbol variation winning the small hit is stopped and displayed, the process is executed for the other special symbol variation being executed. The difference is that processing for determining the processing content is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Note that in the eighth embodiment, various control processes executed for the first special symbol will be used to illustrate and explain the characteristic processing contents of the eighth embodiment. This is also executed in the control processing of the corresponding second special symbol, but the detailed description using the drawings is omitted because the description is duplicated.

  First, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the content of the first special symbol big hit determination process 8 (S386). This first special symbol big hit determination processing 8 (S386) is different from the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see S356 in FIG. 121) of the above-described seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment) in that the current lottery result is obtained. When it is determined that it is not a big hit (see S457 in FIG. 121), the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8 (S481) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the details of the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8 (S481) executed in the first special symbol big hit determination processing 8 (see S386 in FIG. 209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 departure variation process 8 (S481). In the special figure 1 departure variation process 8, when the first special symbol lottery has not been won (when departure has been won), a process for determining whether or not a small hit has been won is executed. Note that the detailed contents are different from the above-described special figure 2 deviation variation processing (see S1059 in FIG. 128) in that the processing target is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol. Are the same.

  In the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing 8 (S481), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result (the lottery result obtained in the processing of S457 of the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see S386 in FIG. 209)) is a small hit. It is determined (S485).

  If it is determined that the small hit has been won in the processing of S485 (S485: Yes), the small hit flag 203i is set to ON (S486), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S487). Then, the small winning symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S488), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S485, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is out of place (S485: No), the out-of-spec symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S485), and this processing ends.

  As described above, the special figure 1 departure fluctuation processing (S481 in FIG. 210) executed as one processing of the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S258 in FIG. 120), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol (lottery) The small hit flag 203i is set to ON when it is determined that the small hit has been won in the processing executed at the timing of starting the small hit, and the setting status of the small hit flag 203i at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol , It is possible to easily execute the processing corresponding to the small win.

  It should be noted that the small hit flag 203i used in the present embodiment is a special figure 1 area indicating that the small hit has been won in the first special symbol lottery, and a special figure 2 area indicating that the small hit has been won in the second special symbol lottery. When a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the flag in the special figure 1 area is set to ON, and when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, , The flag in the special figure 2 area is set to ON. Thus, even if the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are overlapped and a small hit is won, the state can be easily stored.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387). This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is different from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) executed in the above-described seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment). , The difference between adding a special variation flag to ON after selecting a variation pattern, and adding a process for selecting a variation pattern other than the jackpot winning Are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is executed, the same processes as S551 to S555 as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) are executed, and thereafter, the currently selected symbol is selected. It is determined whether the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more (S582). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or longer (S582: Yes), the special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to ON (S583), and the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S357 in FIG. 122) is performed. The same processing from S556 to S559 is executed, and this processing ends. If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not longer than 30 seconds (S582: No), the processing of S583 is skipped, and the same S556 to S559 as the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S357 of FIG. 122). Is performed, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S551 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S551: No), the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing is executed (S581), and thereafter, the processing shifts to S553. Details of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S581) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 212, the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing 8 (S581) will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing 8 (S581). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing 8 (S581), the same processing content as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) of the seventh embodiment described above is applied to the second special symbol. Is switched to the first special symbol.

  When the special figure 1 departure variation pattern selection process 8 (S581) is executed, if it is determined that the current lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery result) is not a small hit (S591: No), The processing having the same contents as S1377 to S1379 of special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S597 to S599), and thereafter, this processing is performed. To end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S591 that the small hit is a small hit (S591: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S592), and the small hit type is determined based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. The small hit type is selected with reference to the selection 8 table 202gf (S593). Next, the processing having the same contents as the processing in S1374 to S1376 of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S594 to S596). The process ends.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol change stop process 8 (S288) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 8 (S288). This first special symbol variation stop processing 8 (S288) determines that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON with respect to the first special symbol variation stop processing 7 (see S278 of FIG. 175). (S851; No), that is, the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 175) executed when the first special symbol change to be stopped and changed this time is the out-of-place change, 8 (S892), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S581: Yes), a process of determining whether the second special symbol change is executed is executed. (S891) The point that the processing of S853 to S855 is skipped when the second special symbol change is not executed, and the stop of the jackpot change (start of the jackpot game) Zui and various flags, and the process of clearing the various counters (S870 in FIG. 175), differs in that to perform the add special variation flag 203ga processing (S893 in FIG. 213), but is otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the details of the special figure 1 departure stop process 8 (S892) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 departure stop process 8 (S892). In this special figure 1 departure stop processing 8 (S892), the same processing as the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 of the seventh embodiment described above (see S1584 of FIG. 181) is performed by changing the processing target from the second special symbol to the first special pattern. This is different in that it is switched to the special symbol and executed, and a small hitting process 8 (S1972) is executed instead of the small hitting process (see S1671 in FIG. 181). Description is omitted.

  Here, the small hit processing 8 (S1972) executed in the special figure 1 departure stop processing 8 (see S892 in FIG. 214) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hitting process 8 (S1972). This small hitting process 8 (S1972) differs from the small hitting process of the above-described seventh embodiment (see S1671 in FIG. 182) in the content of the control process executed according to the type of the winning hit. Are different in that Specifically, when a specific small hit type (small hit B, D, E) is won, a process (interruption process, forced stop (discard) process) according to the variation pattern of the running special symbol variation is performed. It differs in that it is configured to execute.

  When the small hit processing 8 (S1972) is executed, first, the small hit type set for the current first special symbol change is read (S1682), and the read small hit type is “small hit A or small hit. It is determined whether it is "hit C" (S1981). If it is determined to be "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S1981: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present time is changing the special figure 2 (during the change of the second special symbol) (S1684). If it is determined that FIG. 2 is changing (S1684: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag indicating that the second special symbol change is interrupted (temporary stop) is set to ON (S1885), and the special figure 2 is set. A special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that the temporary stop flag is turned on is set (S1686), and the process ends. In the process of S1684, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not changing (S1684: No), the processes of S1685 and S1686 are skipped, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1981, if it is determined that the small hit is not “small hit A” or “small hit C” (S1981: No), then it is determined whether the read small hit type is “small hit E8”. (S1982), if it is determined that it is "small hit E8" (S1982: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, the current state is in the probable change state (in the normal symbol high probability state). ) Is determined (S1688). If it is determined that the current state is in the probable change state (S1688: Yes), it is next determined whether the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1689), and if the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not ON. If it is determined (S1689: No), that is, if it is determined that it is not the final change in the probable change state, the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1690).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special variation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1983). If it is determined that the special variation flag is not set to ON, that is, the variation pattern set to the second special symbol variation being executed is determined. If the variation pattern does not have a variation time of 30 seconds or longer, or if the second special symbol variation has not been executed (S1983: No), the flow shifts to S1684 described above. If the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 in the process of S1688, that is, if it is determined that the present time is not in the probable change state (S1688: No), or the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set in the process of S1689. If it is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that it is the final variation of the probable variation state (S1689: Yes), the process of S1690 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the above-described process of S1684. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1983 that the special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1983: Yes), the flow shifts to the processing of S1692. If it is determined in the processing of S1982 that it is not “small hit E8”, that is, if it is determined that it is “small hit B8” or “small hit D8” (S1982: No), the processing of S1688 to S1690 is performed. Is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1983.

  In the processing of S1692 to S1697, the same processing as the small hit processing (see S1671 in FIG. 182) of the above-described seventh embodiment is executed by switching the processing target from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, and thereafter. Then, the special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to off (S1184), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the small hitting game is executed (when the special process is executed for the special symbol change being executed), the content of the special symbol change being executed is described. Is configured to determine the processing content according to. More specifically, at the time when the small hit game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation being executed If the result of the determination is a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set), the other special symbol fluctuation being executed is discarded, and the specific fluctuation is discarded. If it is other than a pattern, the other special symbol variation being executed can be interrupted. In other words, when the specific condition for executing the special process for the special symbol variation being executed is satisfied, the processing content of the special process is determined with reference to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol being executed. The configuration is not limited to this. For example, the content of the special processing determined when the specific condition is satisfied may be changed according to the set game state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, even if the specific condition is satisfied, only “interruption” is determined as the special processing, and when the certain change state is set, the above-described eighth execution is performed. As in the embodiment, “interruption” or “discard” may be configured. By making the content of the determination of the special processing different according to the game state set in this way, it is possible to give a variety of playability in each game state.

  Further, the content of the special processing to be determined may be made different depending on the type of the special symbol in which the specific condition is satisfied. For example, the second special symbol may be different from the case where the specific condition is satisfied in the first special symbol. May be configured such that “discard” is more easily determined when the specific condition is satisfied. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery may be configured such that the specific condition is less likely to be satisfied than the second special symbol lottery (so that it is difficult to win a small hit), or the specific condition is satisfied. In the case, the condition for determining “discard” (in the eighth embodiment, the variation pattern being executed is 30 seconds or more) is determined by the second special symbol when the specific condition is satisfied in the first special symbol. You may be comprised so that it may become conditions (for example, the variation pattern under execution is 32 seconds or more) which are harder to be satisfied than when a specific condition is satisfied. Thereby, the content of the special processing can be made different depending on which special symbol type meets the specific condition, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the specific condition for executing the special process for the special symbol variation being executed is satisfied, the processing content of the special process is determined with reference to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol change being executed is a specific lottery result, the special symbol change being executed is not discarded. The condition for determining “discard” when the lottery result of the special symbol change being executed is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (in the eighth embodiment, the running change pattern (30 seconds or more). With this configuration, the ease of “discarding” can be varied according to the result of the special symbol lottery, so that a game suitable for the design concept can be easily executed.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, as a variation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) which has won the big hit, the big hit type in which the big hit game (for example, the probable big hit) which is advantageous for the player is executed, and the disadvantage pattern for the player is given. A different big hitting game (for example, a normal big hit) is executed so that a different changing pattern is selected depending on the type of the big hit. Further, the changing pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is changed. It is configured to be different.

  More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is large, the variation time of less than 30 seconds is set as the variation pattern corresponding to the advantageous jackpot type than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is small. A variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set as a variation pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type is configured to be easily selected.

  With such a configuration, when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is large, a jackpot game (for example, a probable big hit) advantageous to the player is more easily executed than when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is small ( A jackpot game (for example, a normal jackpot) that is disadvantageous to the player can be made difficult to be executed (it is easy to be discarded by the small hit winning). That is, it is possible to vary the ratio of the probability change jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to accumulate the number of reserved balls of the special symbol while expecting an advantageous jackpot game to be executed, thereby improving the operation of the game.

  Further, the eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a small win can be won in any one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. I have. By configuring in this way, even if one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is won, it is possible to discard the big hit lottery by the other small hit lottery, According to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the ratio occupied by the jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot can be reliably varied.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the condition (specific condition) that triggers the execution of the special processing (interruption or discard) for one special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation) is set as the other special symbol variation. Although the condition that is satisfied when a specific small hit is won in the fluctuation (for example, the second special symbol fluctuation) is shown, an opportunity to satisfy the specific condition may be provided. May be configured so that a specific condition is satisfied when the ball enters the entrance of the pachinko machine, or when the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is not normal (for example, noise is generated and the power supply is temporarily stopped). May be configured so that the specific condition is satisfied when it is determined that the state is interrupted. Further, a game method executed by a player is an illegal game method (for example, a magnetic sensor for detecting a magnetic force is provided, and a game method when the magnetic sensor detects a magnetic force, and a shock detection for detecting an impact on the pachinko machine 10). A sensor may be provided, and the specific condition may be satisfied when the impact detection sensor detects a game method when a predetermined amount of impact is detected.

  Also, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the special symbol change executed when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (when the probable change state and the time saving state are set) is discarded (forced stop), In addition, the configuration is such that the number of time savings (the number of probable variations) is not added according to the discarded special symbol variation. Specifically, in a gaming machine configured such that when the number of special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50) in the state where the probability change state is set, the latent probability state is set. When the special symbol change executed during the probable change state is discarded (forcibly stopped), the number of time savings (probable change number) is not added. In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, for example, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a display mode (for example, FIG. The value of (a) displayed in the display area HR2) is also configured so that the display mode is not updated in synchronization with the number of times of saving time. Therefore, it is possible to easily notify the player that the special symbol change has been discarded without updating the number of times saved. In this case, for example, the pachinko machine is configured to update the display mode for indicating the number of time savings (the number of times of change) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start timing of the special symbol change. In the case of the machine 10, the display mode is restored based on the fact that the special symbol change has been discarded (for example, when the remaining number of hours saved is displayed, the addition is performed, and when the elapsed number of hours saved is displayed, The effect of subtracting (if any) is performed.

  Also, a plurality of time-saving end conditions (for example, the first special symbol) are set as a transition condition (an end condition (time-saving end condition) for ending the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol) for shifting from the probable state to the latent state. The first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the total number of changes and the second special symbol change reaches 100, and the second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the second special symbol change is executed five times) In the pachinko machine 10 that has been set, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 displays, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, an end condition that is most likely to be satisfied among a plurality of time saving end conditions (for example, corresponding to the second special symbol change five times). In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to notify the player of the game content in an easily understandable manner by displaying only “5”), the first special symbol change is executed immediately after the probable change state is set. Also, the third symbol display device Display mode of "5" displayed at the first display surface is configured not updated. When the first special symbol change is executed 95 times after the first special symbol change is executed 95 times after the probability change state is set (when the 96th first special symbol change is executed) The display control for updating the display of “5” displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to “4” is executed. As described above, it is determined whether or not to update the number of hours saved displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 according to the special symbol type in which the special symbol change is executed during the probable change (time saving) state. This makes it possible to notify the player of the period until the probable change state ends in an easily understandable manner.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ninth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a hold storage function is provided also for the second special symbol, and an effect (RUSH) performed during the latent state (RUSH game). There is a great difference in that the effect mode of the “medium effect” is changed, and that the variation pattern of the big hit type, the small hit type, and the normal symbol is changed.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, the special symbol reservation number for indicating the reserved symbol storage number is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see dm1a in FIG. 161). In addition, in recent gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved special figures on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in order to easily show the number of reserved special figures to the player. . Further, a pre-reading process (prior discrimination process) is performed on the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored, and the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) is changed in a display mode of a corresponding reserved symbol (for example, a reserved symbol). There is a type that executes a hold change effect that informs the player by changing the color or effect of the game or changing the design of the hold symbol).

  However, in the above-described pending change effect, the number of reserved symbols to be subjected to the pending change effect is determined according to the number of acquired special figure reserved balls. It is more difficult to execute the change-on-hold effect than in the case where the number of holding balls is large. In other words, as long as the effect using the reserved symbols displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is executed in accordance with the number of acquired special figure reserved balls, it depends on the number of acquired special figure reserved balls. Since the effect of the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) for notifying the player of the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) is variable, for example, for a player who cannot acquire many special figure reserved balls However, there is a problem in that the player is dissatisfied with the fact that he cannot obtain many special figure reserved balls, and he is dissatisfied with the effect of the pre-reading effect being reduced, which lowers the willingness to play.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of special figure reserved balls acquired is determined according to the result of the pre-reading processing (preliminary determination processing) executed for the special symbol winning information stored and stored. Regardless, it is configured to execute a look-ahead effect (icon effect) that varies the number of specific symbols (exclusive icons displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81). Thereby, even if the number of acquired special figure reserved balls is small, it is possible to execute the same prefetching effect as in the case where the acquired number of special figure reserved balls is the upper limit, according to the prefetching result. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect with a high effect even for a player who cannot acquire many special figure reserved balls, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of specific symbols displayed in the above-described icon effect is set to the number of special figure reserved balls that can be retained (the storage of the second special symbol mainly executed during the latent state). ) Is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (it is difficult for the player to discriminate). ). With this configuration, the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect is as if the number of special figure reserved balls (the number of stored second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state) is the same. It can make you think it is a reserved symbol to show. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play of a player who cannot acquire many special figure reserved balls.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading result is a specific result (for example, a jackpot in which a latent state is set), a special figure holding ball in which the number of the specific symbols displayed in the icon effect can be held and stored. It is configured to be larger than the upper limit value (4) of the number (the number of stored second special symbols mainly executed during the latent state). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a surprising effect to a player who has an illusion that the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect is a reserved symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of the pre-reading process (preliminary determination process) performed on the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored, the number of times of opening of the attacker that is opened in the small hit game is determined. The number of specific symbols to be displayed is determined based on the determination result. The number of times the attacker is released in one small hit game is made different depending on the type of the small hit that has been won. Furthermore, as a part of the big hit game executed when the big hit is won, the same attacker releasing operation as that of the small hit game is executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict the number of small hit games to be executed in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as the icon effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the player is notified that the period in which the specific symbol is displayed is a period in which the latent state (RUSH game) does not end. That is, when at least one specific symbol remains at the end of the big hit game, the fact that the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game is notified in advance. Therefore, each time the number of specific symbols is changed, the player pays attention to the icon effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

<Production contents in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 216 to FIG. 219, characteristic effect contents among the effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described. Specifically, the contents of the icon effect for variably displaying a specific symbol executed during the latent state (during the RUSH game) will be described. This icon effect is an effect in which the number of specific symbols (icons) is variably displayed based on a pre-read result with respect to the reserved memory of the acquired second special symbol (special symbol 2 reservation).

  First, with reference to FIG. 216 (a), the display contents of the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the latent state (RUSH game) is set immediately after will be described. FIG. 216 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an ending screen displayed during an ending period in a jackpot game before entering a RUSH game. In the ninth embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when a latent hit is won in a state where the latent state is not set (a jackpot in which the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game), , The effect mode displayed during the ending period is made different between the first hit when entering the RUSH game and the case where the potential hit is won in the state where the latent state is set. .

  As shown in FIG. 216 (a), a display area 71 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and a display area HR70 is formed in the center during the ending period of the first hit when entering the RUSH game. Then, in the display area HR70, an icon 871 imitating carrot and acquired number information 872 (4 in FIG. 216 (a)) are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "RUSH continues as long as there is an icon" are displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the RUSH game is executed, an icon 871 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the game executed during the RUSH game based on the number of displayed icons 871 and the display mode. Is suggested to the player. This icon 871 is configured such that the number of display and the display mode are variably set based on information (lottery information, look-ahead information) relating to the second special symbol mainly executed during the RUSH game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment in which the icon effect is executed during the RUSH game, during the ending period of the jackpot game which triggers the entry into the RUSH game, the icon effect initial shown in FIG. The display screen is displayed, and four icons 871 are displayed irrespective of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the prefetch result at that time. By this, no matter what state the RUSH game is executed, the effect mode of the icon effect at the time of the RUSH game entry can be made the same. It is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play the game.

  In the present embodiment, four icons 871 are displayed at the start of the icon effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the specific start condition is satisfied at the start of the icon effect, for example, In the case where there is a jackpot advantageous to the player in the pre-reading result for the reserved ball of the second special symbol (the latent jackpot whose latent state is set again), the number of icons 871 displayed at the start of the icon effect May be configured to be a number other than four. In this case, it is preferable to display a smaller number of icons 871 than four.

  When the RUSH game is started, an icon 871 displayed in the display area HR70 is displayed as a hold icon 873 in the display area HR71, and an effect using the hold icon 873 and a character 811 imitating a rabbit is mainly displayed. This is executed in the area Dm. As shown in FIG. 216 (b), in the present embodiment, the upper limit display number of the hold icon 873 is configured to be the same as the upper limit hold number of the second special symbol in which the lottery is mainly executed during the RUSH game. Therefore, a maximum of four hold icons 873a to 873d are displayed in the display area HR71.

  As for the reserved icons 873a to 873d, a first reserved icon 873a, a second reserved icon 873b, a third reserved icon 873c, and a fourth reserved icon 873d are displayed in order from the top of the display area HR, and an effect is produced in order from the first reserved icon 873a. Used. Then, when the first hold icon 873a is deleted from the display area HR71 for use in the effect, the remaining second hold icons 873b to 873d are shifted to the hold icons in the previous order, respectively. You. When a new hold icon is acquired, additional icons are displayed in the order following the already displayed hold icons.

  In the present embodiment, the small hitting game executed during the RUSH game, more specifically, the number of release of the second attacker 1650 is pre-read, and the number of the reserved icons is determined based on the pre-read result. ing. Then, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small hit game is made different depending on the small hit type that has been won. A big hit game in which the attacker 1650 is opened a predetermined number of times is executed.

  That is, for example, even if the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls is two, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is released is four times as a result of the pre-reading (prior determination) for the two special figure 2 reserved balls. In this case, a configuration is made such that four icons can be set as the number of display of the hold icons. With this configuration, the number of reserved icons to be displayed can be determined irrespective of the actual number of special figure 2 reserved balls, so that a large number of special figure 2 reserved balls cannot be acquired. Even if it is, it is possible to execute an interesting icon effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217 (a), among the icon effects during the RUSH game, the effect contents that consume the reserved icon will be described. FIG. 217 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small hitting game is executed during a RUSH game. As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the small hit game is executed, the digestion effect in which the character 811 eats the hold icon 873a is executed, and the prize ball display mode indicating the prize balls acquired in the small hit game. 874 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 217 (a), a prize ball display mode 874 is displayed in a display mode of “+15” indicating that one ball has been won in the second attacker 1650 and that there were 15 prize balls. I have. In addition, the character "I'll give you" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and informs the player that the character 811 is performing the effect of eating the hold icon 873a in an easily understandable manner.

  Note that in FIG. 217 (a), the display screen displayed during the digestion effect has been described with an example in which a small hit game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened once is performed, so that the character 811 is held in the hand. Although the number of hold icons 873a to be taken is one, for example, when a small hit game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened twice is executed, a digestion effect in which the character 811 eats two hold icons is executed. Is done. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in some small hit games, or in some big hit games, a hit game that opens the second attacker 1650 a plurality of times is configured. The configuration is such that the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is larger in the big hit game than in the small hit game.

  That is, as the effect shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the effect in which the character 811 eats a plurality of hold icons is executed, the degree of expectation for the jackpot winning can be increased. With such a configuration, among the icon effects performed during the RUSH game, the player can also be interested in the contents of the effect of consuming the reserved icons (decreasing the number of reserved icons).

  In the present embodiment, the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 opened in the small hit game and the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 opened in the big hit game are configured to be the same. ing. Therefore, by grasping the content of the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the hit game, it is possible to prevent the type of the current hit game (small hit game, big hit game) from being determined by the player. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, the number of the reserve icons 873 displayed in the number corresponding to the number of times the character 811 eats in one digestion effect, that is, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small hitting game being executed is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect in which the hold icon used for the digestion effect remains at the end timing of the digestion effect, that is, the number of hold times larger than the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small hit game is released. A digestive effect using icons may be executed. With this configuration, the number of reserved icons displayed at the start of the digestive effect can be increased, and thus the player can be expected to win the jackpot.

  In addition, during the execution period of the digestion effect, the number of hold icons used in the digestion effect may be configured to be variable. By this, since the number of reserved icons can be increased at any timing, even if an icon production with a low jackpot expectation is executed, the number of reserved icons used for the production during the digestion production period is reduced. A game can be performed while expecting the game to increase during the digestion effect period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217 (b), description will be given on the effect contents of the acquired effect indicating that a plurality of pending icons have been acquired as the icon effect executed during the RUSH game. FIG. 217 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed as an acquisition effect indicating that a plurality of hold icons have been acquired, as an icon effect performed during the RUSH game. In the present embodiment, as in the effect performed during the RUSH game of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 162 (b)), an effect in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812 is executed. Then, an acquisition effect in which a predetermined number (1 to 3) of hold icons are displayed from the treasure box is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (b), a treasure chest 812 displayed during the RUSH game opens, and an icon 871 imitating carrot and acquired number information 872 (3 in FIG. 217 (b)) are displayed in the display area HR70. Is displayed. Then, the character "get ginseng" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and an effect of notifying the player that the number of displayed hold icons has increased is executed.

  As described above, in the icon effect of the present embodiment, while the RUSH game continues, the display number of the hold icon is controlled so that the hold icon does not become 0, and the acquisition for increasing the hold icon at various timings is performed. The effect is configured to be executable. The configuration is such that the greater the number of icons 871 acquired in one acquisition effect, the more advantageous the game is to be executed for the player. Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the number of displayed suspension icons can be increased at a timing different from the timing of increasing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218 (a), the content of the continuous effect performed during the icon effect will be described. FIG. 218 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed during a continuous effect performed during the icon effect. In the present embodiment, a continuous effect can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the start of the change of the second special symbol. This continuous effect includes a pattern executed for one fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation and a pattern executed across a plurality of second special symbol fluctuations. An effect using all the icons is executed.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that a continuous effect can be executed when four (upper limit) icons are displayed, and when the continuous effect is executed, FIG. ), The four reserved icons (873a to 873d) displayed in the display area HR71 are displayed in a line at the center of the main display area Dm, and the character 811 eats the first reserved icon 873a in order. Is executed. After the last hold icon 873d, a V icon 873y indicating a jackpot win (a jackpot win of a jackpot type advantageous to the player) is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Eat carrots! Treasure may come out from inside" are displayed to indicate to the player the effect of the continuous effect.

  In other words, when the continuous effect is executed, it means that all the reserved icons are consumed and the jackpot is won, or the reserved icons cannot be completely consumed and the RUSH game is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 218 (b), the V icon 873z may be displayed from among the pending icons being consumed in a state where the continuous production is being performed and the last pending icon is consumed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 218 (b), a description will be given of the contents of the effect when the V icon 873z is displayed during the continuous effect. FIG. 218 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the V icon 873z is obtained without exhausting all the pending icons during the continuous production. As shown in FIG. 218 (b), an effect of finding a V icon 873z from among the third holding icons 873c is performed while the third holding icon 873c is being digested (during eating). . In this case, since the fourth holding icon 873d is not digested, the fourth holding icon 873d is displayed in the display area HR71. If the jackpot game is started in this state, the jackpot game will be executed while the hold icon is displayed. At this point, the latent state (RUSH game) is executed again after the jackpot game ends. It will inform the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 219, a description will be given of the contents of the effect in which a special icon different from a normal hold icon is displayed during the icon effect. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when a special icon is displayed during an icon effect. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of reserve icons that can be displayed is calculated based on the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the number of releases of the second attacker 1650 calculated in advance. I have.

  Then, a special icon is displayed when the number of displayable reserved icons exceeds a predetermined number (for example, four or more), that is, when the display upper limit number is exceeded. Then, when the second special symbol change during execution or the prefetch result of the second special symbol includes a jackpot winning advantageous to the player, the number of displayable reserved icons is likely to exceed a predetermined number. are doing.

  As shown in FIG. 219, when the number of displayable hold icons is calculated to be equal to or more than a predetermined number, a special icon effect in which a special icon 873x imitating a gorgeous ginseng in the acquired effect appears from the treasure box 812 is executed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters “Lucky, SP ginseng get” are displayed to indicate to the player that the icon acquired this time is a special icon. In the present embodiment, the number of icons that can be simultaneously displayed in the display area HR71 is defined as four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. When the number exceeds the number, the special icon is displayed, and the effect of increasing the expectation of the jackpot for the player is performed while maintaining the upper limit of the number of icons simultaneously displayed in the display area HR71. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the number of hold icons that can be displayed exceeds four (when a special condition is satisfied), the upper limit number of hold icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71 is set. You may comprise so that it may be larger than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of a 2nd special symbol. With this configuration, the player who has recognized that the holding icon indicates the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is given a number of holdings exceeding the upper limit of the number of holding balls of the second special symbol. By displaying the icon, it is possible to execute a surprising effect. Furthermore, when the number of reserved icons exceeding the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed, the expectation of the jackpot winning can be increased. It can be performed using sexual effects.

  The various effect screens executed during the characteristic effect (icon effect) executed in the ninth embodiment have been described above with reference to FIGS. 216 to 219, but are not limited thereto. For example, in the state where the RUSH game is being executed, if the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 0, one or more reservation icons are displayed, and the reservation icon which does not relate to the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed. The pseudo-variation effect using the icon may be configured to be executed, or the suspension icon may be hidden.

  In the present embodiment, as the display mode of the hold icon, a display mode imitating a normal carrot (see the hold icon 873a in FIG. 217 (a)) and a display mode imitating a luxurious ginseng (the special icon in FIG. 219) 873x) can be set, but other display modes may be settable. For example, the first display mode corresponding to either the small hit or the big hit and the big hit may be set. A corresponding second display mode and a third display mode corresponding to a specific jackpot may be settable. Further, in order to additionally display a large number of reserved icons at once, a reduction effect of digesting a large number of reserved icons at once may be executed.

<Electrical Configuration in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the ninth embodiment, a part of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a part of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, and a part of the RAM 223 are different from the above-described seventh embodiment. are doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd included in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection 9 table 202hd. The big hit type selection 9 table 202hd is different from the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) in the seventh embodiment described above in that the big hit type (big hit) associated with the first special symbol (special figure 1). The target of opening the jackpot operation specified for A to C) is different from the value of the time saving counter 203h set after the end of the jackpot game, and is associated with the second special symbol (special figure 2). The difference is that the types of the jackpot types are increased, and the others are the same.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220, as the big hit type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 34", and the big hit type is "Big hit A9" is associated and defined. The “big hit A9” is the same big hit type as the “big hit A7” in the above-described seventh embodiment, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, “big hit B9” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “35 to 79”. The “big hit B9” is different from the “big hit B7” of the above-described seventh embodiment in that the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the end of the big hit game is changed, and is otherwise the same.

  Specifically, when the "big hit B9" is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100. Is set. On the other hand, when "big hit 9" is won in the latent state, 0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h.

  That is, when the "big hit B9" is won in the normal state or the probable change state, the state shifts to the relatively advantageous probable change state. On the other hand, when "big hit B9" is won in the latent state, the number of times saved is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the end of the big win is the most advantageous latent state. Further, even when the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is over, it is more advantageous for the player to win the "big hit B9" in the probability change state than to win the "big hit B9" in the normal state. In order to set the probability change state, the number of times of probability change is smaller in the case of winning in the probability change state than in the case of winning in the normal state.

  With such a configuration, by shifting from the normal state, which is the initial game state, to a different game state, the game state can be easily shifted to the most advantageous game state for the player. It is possible to enthusiastically play a game aiming at the most advantageous game state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 220, "big hit C9" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". The "big hit C9" is different from the "big hit C7" of the above-described seventh embodiment in that the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the end of the big hit game is changed, and the rest is the same.

  Specifically, when the "big hit C9" is won in the normal state, the probable change state and the latent state, that is, when the "big hit C9" is won, the time-saving counter 203h is set regardless of the set gaming state. The value is set to 0. That is, when the "big hit C9" is won, the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game is the most advantageous big hit type for the player. In the state where the latent state is set, the value of “big hit B9” and “big hit C9” are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, according to the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit in the first special symbol lottery, the rate of transition to the gaming state (latent state) most advantageous to the player is determined. The normal state and the probable state are set differently from the case where the latent state is set. The normal state and the probable state are set to 20%, and the latent state is set to 65%. It is configured such that the latent state is set after the big hit game ends.

  Further, as described above, the normal state in which the transition rate to the latent state is set to 20% and the probable change state are both configured to transit to the probable state at a rate of 45%. The expected degree of transition to the latent state when the state is shifted to is different. With such a configuration, the transition rate for shifting to the most advantageous gaming state (latency state) for the player after the end of the jackpot game for a plurality of gaming states as the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot winning is set. Even if they are set to be the same, the degree of expectation of shifting to the latent state can be different for each game state set at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Next, the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery will be described. As shown in FIG. 220, in the ninth embodiment, four types of jackpots (jackpots D9 to G9) associated with the second special symbol (special figure 2) are defined, and according to the selected jackpot type. The jackpot game opening operation contents are different.

  Specifically, as the big hit type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in a range of “0 to 34”, and “big hit D9” is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. The “big hit D9” is a big hit type in which the same content as the “big hit D7” of the above-described seventh embodiment is defined. "Big hit E9" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 69". The "big hit E9" is a type of big hit (8 rounds big change big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds and the special symbol is set to the certain change state after the end of the big hit. Note that when the "big hit E9" is won in the normal state, the probable state, and the latent state, 0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h.

  That is, when the "big hit C9" is won, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 regardless of the set gaming state. That is, when the "big hit C9" is won, the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game is the most advantageous big hit type for the player. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit E9" is 35, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the “big hit E9” is determined is 35% (35/100).

  "Big hit F9" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 89". In the "big hit F9", the number of rounds of the big hit is 9 rounds, and in the first round (R), the second attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds, and the second round (R) to the ninth round (R). Up to this point, a jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds is executed, and after the end of the jackpot, there is a jackpot of a type set to the special symbol change state (9 round change jackpot). Note that when the "big hit F9" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, 0 is set to the value of the time-saving counter 203h.

  As described above, when the "big hit F9" is won, the same opening operation as the small hit game is executed as the first round. That is, in the pre-reading of the second special symbol, the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is calculated in addition to the jackpot winning. Thereby, in the icon effect that determines the number of hold icons to be displayed based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 has been released (the number of times the small hit game has been released), a pattern that suggests a small hit and a pattern that suggests a big hit It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand, and it is possible to enhance the production effect. In the "big hit F9", nine rounds of big hit games are defined so that the number of times the first attacker 650 is released is the same as the above "big hit E9". With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot type selected based on the number of times of opening the first attacker 650.

  In the present embodiment, the same opening operation as that of the small hit game is executed in the first round (R), and the actual big hit game is executed in the second round (R) and thereafter. For example, even if the "big hit F9" is won, the jackpot game of 8 rounds (R) is executed, and the second attacker 1650 is opened for 1.5 seconds in the first round (R). The opening operation and the opening operation for opening the first attacker 650 for 28.5 seconds may be executed. With this configuration, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed can be unified, and therefore, for example, a notification unit (for example, an LED) that notifies the first symbol display device 37 of the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed. In the case where a means for informing the number of rounds by lighting of the lamp) is provided, the number of types of rounds to be informed by the informing means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot type based on the notification content of the notification means.

  "Big hit G9" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99". In the “big hit G9”, the number of rounds of the big hit is 11 rounds. In the first to third rounds (R), the second attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds, and the 11th round (R) from the fourth round (R). The jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds is executed until the first hit, and after the end of the jackpot, there is a jackpot of the type set to the special change state of the special symbol (11 round certain change jackpot). Note that when the "big hit G9" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, 0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h.

  As described above, when the “big hit G9” is won, the same opening operation as the small hit game is executed as the first to third rounds. That is, in the pre-reading of the second special symbol, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened three times is calculated in addition to the jackpot winning. Thereby, in the icon effect that determines the number of hold icons to be displayed based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 has been released (the number of times the small hit game has been released), a pattern that suggests a small hit and a pattern that suggests a big hit It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand, and it is possible to enhance the production effect. In addition, since the number of times of release of the second attacker 1650 is calculated three times as a result of one lottery of the second special symbol lottery, the number of times of release of the second attacker 1650 even when the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is small. Can be calculated a lot, and the effect style of the icon effect can be diversified. In the "big hit G9", a big hit game of 11 rounds is defined so that the number of times of opening the first attacker 650 is the same as the above "big hit E9". With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot type selected based on the number of times of opening the first attacker 650.

  In the present embodiment, the same opening operation as the small hit game is executed in the first to third rounds (R), and the actual big hit game is executed in the fourth and subsequent rounds (R). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the “big hit G9” is won, the big hit game of the 8th round (R) is executed, and the second attacker 1650 is executed in the first round (R). May be configured to execute an opening operation for opening the first attacker 650 for 25.5 seconds after the opening operation for opening the first attacker for 1.5 seconds is performed three times. With this configuration, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed can be unified, and therefore, for example, a notification unit (for example, an LED) that notifies the first symbol display device 37 of the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed. In the case where a means for informing the number of rounds by lighting of the lamp) is provided, the number of types of rounds to be informed by the informing means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot type based on the notification content of the notification means.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf. As shown in FIG. 221 (a), the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf is different from the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff of the above-described seventh embodiment in that the types of the small hit types are increased. The content of the small hit operation specified for the small hit type (opening content of the small hit game) and the content of the processing for the first special symbol change executed when the small hit game is executed are changed. And the other points are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  The small hitting type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small hitting type after the small hitting is won in the special symbol lottery similarly to the small hitting type selection 7 table 202ff described above, and is acquired. It is defined that four types of small hits, "small hit A9" to "small hit D9", are selected in accordance with the value of the small hit type counter C5.

  When a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the content of the small hit operation and the content of the processing for the special symbol change being executed can be made different depending on the selected small hit type. In the present embodiment, the interruption process is executed for the special symbol variation being executed, regardless of which small hit type is selected. This interruption process is a process of temporarily interrupting the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed (for example, until the small hitting game ends). This interruption processing is the same as that in the above-described seventh embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The contents defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff will be specifically described. When the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of “0 to 59”, “small hit A9” is associated with the value. , "60-79" is associated with "small hit B9", "80-89" is associated with "small hit C9", and "90-99" is assigned. Is associated with “small hit D9”. Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the rate at which "small hit A9" is selected at the time of small hit winning is 60% (60/100), The rate at which "small hit B9" is selected is 20% (20/100), the rate at which "small hit C9" is selected is 10% (10/100), and the rate at which "small hit D9" is selected is 10%. (10/100).

  When "small hit A9" is selected, a small hit game in which the variable winning device (first attacker 650) is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed, and when "small hit B9" is selected, the right variable winning is selected. When a small hitting game in which the device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds is executed and “small hitting C9” is selected, the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds. The small hit game to be executed twice is executed, and when "small hit C9" is selected, the small hit game to execute the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 for 0.5 seconds three times is executed. It is stipulated that

  That is, in the present embodiment, according to the small hit type selected when the small hit is won, the small hit game that opens the first attacker 650 that is mainly opened during the big hit game and the small hit game that is mainly performed during the small hit game And a small hitting game in which the second attacker 2650 to be opened is opened. With this configuration, the jackpot game was executed immediately after the small jackpot game was executed? Can be made to remind the player. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed in a state where the hold icon is displayed in the latent state, the latent state is set again after the end of the jackpot game. The icon effect is executed. Therefore, if the player wins the "small hit A" while the hold icon is displayed, the player can be delighted that an advantageous big hit game is executed when the first attacker 650 is opened.

  When "small hit B9" to "small hit D9" are selected, a small hit game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened is executed, but the second attacker is selected for each selected small hit type. The number of times of opening 1650 is different. That is, the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 calculated for one special symbol lottery can be made different. Thereby, when calculating the display number of the reserved icon in the icon effect, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened can be largely deviated from the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and thus the number of small hits. Become. Therefore, it is possible to easily display the number of reserved icons determined based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 is released without synchronizing with the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2.

  In the present embodiment, a small hitting game in which either the first attacker 650 or the second attacker 1650 is opened according to the selected small hitting type is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an opening operation of sequentially opening the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 1650 may be set in one small hitting game. Thereby, the opening operation performed as one small hitting game can make the player think that a plurality of small hitting games are continuously performed. Therefore, the relationship between one special symbol lottery and the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened can be made more difficult to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 221 (b), the contents of the ordinary figure variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg will be described. FIG. 221 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection 9 table 202hg. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the ordinary figure variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg is different from the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202fg of the above-described seventh embodiment in the variation of the ordinary symbol selected during the latent state. The difference is that the pattern is the same as during the normal state, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  As shown in the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 9 table 202hg, in the present embodiment, during the probable change state, the ball fired by the right-handed game enters the right electric accessory 164 as in the seventh embodiment. are doing. On the other hand, the ball fired by the right-handed game during the latent state is configured to be harder to enter the right electric combination 164 than in the above-described seventh embodiment. That is, in the above-described seventh embodiment, even in the latent state, the ball is inserted into the right electric accessory 164 to easily increase the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. In the ninth embodiment, the same variation pattern as in the normal state is selected because the game does not have such a game property.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 included in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222 (a), in the ninth embodiment, an icon display number selection table 222ha, a continuous effect selection table 222hb, Are provided, and are otherwise the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The icon display number selection table 222ha is a data table that is referred to when selecting the display number of the hold icon displayed in the icon effect described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, and is a non-display information storage area 223hb. And the display number of the hold icon based on the information on the number of times the second attacker 1650 has been opened calculated based on the winning information command received from the main control device 110 and the acquired special figure 2 hold number Is stipulated.

  Here, the contents of the icon display number selection table 222ha will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the icon display number selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 223 (a), the number of icons that can be selected (the number of reserved icons displayed) is the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 reserved number (special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c). Value) and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb, the number of icons to be displayed is defined.

  Specifically, when the special figure 2 reservation number is “1” and the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb is “0 to 2”, “1” is defined as the icon display number. When the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb is “3 to 5”, “5 (special)” is defined as the number of icons to be displayed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is “1”, the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb does not exceed “6”, and the corresponding value is not defined.

  If the number of reserved special figure 2 is “2” and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “0 to 2”, “1 to 2” is defined as the number of icons to be displayed. When the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “3 to 5”, “1 to 4” is defined as the number of displayed icons, and the icon display number is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb. When the value is "6 to", "5 (*)" is defined as the number of displayed icons.

  When the number of reserved special figure 2 is “3” and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “0 to 2”, “1 to 3” is defined as the number of displayed icons, When the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb is “3 to 5”, “2 to 4” is defined as the number of displayed icons, and the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb is In the case of “6 to”, “4” is defined as the number of displayed icons.

  When the number of reserved special figures 2 is “4” and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “0 to 2”, “1 to 4” is defined as the number of icons to be displayed. If the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb is “3 to 5”, “3 to 4” is defined as the number of icons to be displayed, and the icon display number is stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb. When the value is “6 to”, “4” is defined as the number of displayed icons.

  Here, when the number of displayed icons is “5 (special)”, the icon display number larger than “4”, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved special figure 2 balls, is selected. In the embodiment, the upper limit display number of the reserve icon is “4”, and therefore, the special icon (FIG. 219 special icon 873x) is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as the difference between the number of reserved special figure 2 spheres and the value stored in the display information storage area 223hb increases, that is, as a prefetch result of one special figure 2 reserved. The special icon is configured to be more easily displayed as the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated a plurality of times. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation even in a situation where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is small.

  On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is large (for example, three or four), the execution is performed when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is small because the number of special figure 2 reserved balls to be prefetched increases. It is more likely that the number of releases of the second attacker 1650 will be calculated a plurality of times as a prefetch result of one special figure 2 reservation than the prefetch result performed, but if the number of special figure 2 reservation balls is large (for example, 3 (4) is configured such that “4” is easily set without setting “5 (special)” as the number of displayed icons. Then, when the number of displayed icons is “4”, the configuration is such that a continuous effect described later is easily executed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a special icon is frequently displayed in a state where the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is large.

  Further, even when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is small (for example, two), the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is large as a pre-read result, that is, a small hit C9 or a small hit D9 (FIG. 221 (a)). ), Or when the big hit G9 (see FIG. 220) is won, an icon display number larger than the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is selected.

  On the other hand, even when the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is large, when the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is small as a pre-read result, that is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, or when the small hit A9 ( If the player has won the jackpot D9 or the jackpot E9 (see FIG. 220), the number of icons displayed is smaller than the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (see FIG. 221 (a)). It is configured to:

  With this configuration, the display number of the reserved icons used for the icon effect can be determined irrespective of the actual number of the special figure 2 reserved balls, and therefore, it is interesting regardless of the number of the special figure 2 reserved balls. It is possible to execute a prefetching effect.

  In the present embodiment, since the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved ball number) is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the reserved icon is displayed to the player. Special figure 2 It is configured to be able to execute an interesting look-ahead effect regardless of the actual number of reserved special figure 2 balls. Instead, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a reserved icon used for icon effect and a reserved symbol indicating the actual number of reserved special figure 2 balls are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since the player can grasp the actual number of special figure 2 reserved balls and the number of displayed reserve icons, for example, if a large number of reserved icons are displayed in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball number is small. We can make you think you won the jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot type (jackpot F9 or jackpot G9) for which the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is calculated is won, a latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, all jackpots that can be predicted based on the number of display of the hold icons are jackpots in which the latent state is set. Therefore, since the prediction based on the presentation mode of the icon effect (display of the reserved icon) is the prediction of the jackpot winning which is advantageous to the player, the player is more interested in the prediction than the prediction including the jackpot winning which is disadvantageous to the player. Yes, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a jackpot winning in which the number of releases of the second attacker 1650 is not calculated, that is, when a jackpot (jackpot D9, jackpot E9) in which the second attacker 1650 is not opened during the jackpot game is executed, The rate at which the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game is configured to be 50%. Therefore, even if a large jackpot is won in a case where the icon presentation is in a presentation mode in which a jackpot win cannot be predicted (for example, in a state where the number of displayed icons is small), the latent state after the jackpot game ends. Can leave the possibility to be set. In addition, in this case, before the execution of the jackpot game, an effect for invoking whether or not the hold icon is completely consumed is executed. If at least one of the hold icons is displayed at the age of the jackpot game being executed, the jackpot is played. It is configured to notify that the latent state is set after the game is over (RUSH game is continued).

  As described above, by using the hold icons displayed in the icon effect for various purposes, more various effects can be executed and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Returning to FIG. The continuous effect selection table 222hb is a data table that is referred to when selecting whether or not to execute the continuous effect described above with reference to FIG. 218. In the icon effect, the number of displayed pending icons is four. It is referred to when the second special symbol change is started in the state. In the continuous effect selection table 222hb, whether or not to execute a continuous effect is defined based on winning information (special figure 2 winning information) on the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b.

  Here, the contents specified in the continuous effect selection table 222hb will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 223 (b). FIG. 223 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the continuous effect selection table 222hb. As shown in FIG. 223 (b), in the continuous effect selection table 222hb, among the special figure 2 winning information, the winning information of the execution area (the winning information used in the second special symbol lottery this time) and the pending The execution status is defined based on the winning information of the (reserved area), the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 4. That is, it is defined that the continuous effect can be selected only in a state in which four hold icons 873 are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  Specifically, if the winning information included in the execution area is a big hit, that is, if the second special symbol change executed this time is a big hit change, if the big hit type is “big hit F9, big hit G9”, In the case where the execution of the continuous effect A (execution A) is specified and the other jackpot types are “big hit D9 and big hit E9”, the range of the obtained effect counter 223f is continuously set in the range of “0 to 89”. The non-execution of the effect is associated, and the execution of the continuous effect B (execution B) is defined in the range of “90 to 99”. When the execution area includes the winning information regarding the jackpot winning, since the jackpot game is executed after the second special symbol change, the continuous winning game is performed without considering the winning information stored in the holding area. Whether or not the performance is performed is specified.

  Here, in the continuous production of the pattern that finally wins the jackpot, as the production result of the continuous production, the first result in which all the reserved icons are digested to get the V icon 873y, and the V icon in which all the reserved icons are not digested, A determination is made as to which of the second result for obtaining 873z is the effect result. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot to be executed in this continuous production is a probability-variable jackpot (jackpot E9 to G9). If it is determined that the jackpot is not a probability-variable jackpot (jackpot D9) (execution B In the case), a first result for digesting all the reserved icons is set, and if it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot, a lottery for determining whether to set the first result or the second result (result). Selection lottery), and the type of the effect result is set based on the result of the selection lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to surely prevent a situation in which the latent state is not set after the jackpot game is completed even though the jackpot game is executed in a state where the hold icon remains. it can.

  In addition, even if the winning is achieved in the probability change jackpot (execution A), since the first result can be set as the production result of the continuous production, for example, the continuous production in which the V icon 873y is obtained. Even if is executed, the player can play the game while keeping expectations to the end. In addition, if the jackpot game corresponding to the probability change jackpot is executed in a state where all the hold icons are consumed, the hold icon is displayed until the jackpot game ends when the predetermined occurrence condition is satisfied during the jackpot game. It is good to carry out the effect to be displayed, for example, when performing an operation effect to operate the frame button 22 for the player during the jackpot game, when the effect result of the operation effect is a predetermined effect result It is preferable that the generation condition be satisfied.

  With this configuration, the player who is playing the big hit game can be motivated to play the game in order to quickly grasp the game state set after the big hit game ends. Further, the technique for establishing the occurrence condition is not limited to this. For example, a variable number of balls (first attacker 650 or second attacker 1650) that is opened during a jackpot game is made to win a predetermined number of balls. May be set, or an occurrence condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls enter a different ball entry device than the variable entry device that is opened during a jackpot game.

  Returning to FIG. 223 (b), the description will be continued. If the execution area of the special map 2 winning information includes winning information indicating a small hit winning, and the winning information is “small hit B9” to “small hit D9”, “big hit E” in the hold, When there is winning information indicating one of the jackpot types “big hit F” and “big hit G”, the execution of the continuous effect B (execution B) is associated with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of “0 to 69”. Non-execution of the continuous effect is defined in association with the range of “70 to 99”. If there is no winning information indicating any of the jackpot types of “big hit E”, “big hit F”, and “big hit G” in the hold, the value of the effect counter 223f is continuously in the range of “0 to 69”. The non-execution of the effect is associated with the execution (execution C) of the continuous effect C in the range of “70 to 99”. Also, in the execution area of the special map 2 winning information, winning information indicating the small hit winning is included, and when the winning information is “small hit A9”, regardless of the winning information stored in the holding area. Non-execution of continuous production is specified.

  If the execution area of the special map 2 winning information includes winning information indicating a winning, the winning information indicating any one of the "big hit E", "big hit F", and "big hit G" in the hold. If there is no winning information indicating any of the jackpot types of "big hit E", "big hit F", and "big hit G" in the hold, the continuous Non-execution of the production is specified.

  As described above, when selecting whether or not to execute the continuous effect, the result of the lottery of the second special symbol executed this time and the result of the pre-reading of the second special symbol stored on the hold (stored in the hold area) (Winning information), it is possible to execute a continuous production with a high degree of expectation of big hits. Therefore, after grasping that the jackpot is won at the time when the continuous production is executed, it is possible to make the continuous production look at the continuous production while watching whether the production result of the continuous production is the first result or the second result. Since it can be performed, the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the continuous effect is executed only when four hold icons are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), the configuration is such that the larger the actual number of special figure 2 reserved balls, the more easily four reserved icons are displayed. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the four reserved icons are displayed, and the operation of the game can be enhanced. In addition, even if the special figure 2 reserved ball number has reached the upper limit, the reserved icon may not be displayed in the upper limit number (four), so the special figure 2 reserved ball number has reached the upper limit. Even in the state, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the four hold icons are displayed, and the operation of the game can be further enhanced.

  In this embodiment, the continuous effect can be executed only when four hold icons are displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that production may be performed. In this case, for example, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute a continuous effect based on the actual number of reserved special figure 2 balls and the result of pre-reading, and, for example, win a big hit (big hit E9) which is advantageous to the player. Only when there is winning information indicating that the game is to be performed, it is preferable that the continuous effect is executed with a small number of hold icons. Thereby, according to the display number of the hold icon at the time when the continuous production is executed, the degree of expectation of the continuous production, that is, the expectation of the jackpot winning which is advantageous to the player can be made different, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to make the user interested in the timing at which the continuous production is performed.

  Furthermore, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect based on the actual number of reserved special figure 2 balls and the result of the pre-reading. When there is the winning information shown, as a preparation effect for executing the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be executed after the forced increase display is executed so that the display number of the hold icon becomes the upper limit. .

  When the contents defined in the continuous production selection table 222hb have been described with reference to FIG. 223 (b), the continuous production types A, B, B A continuous production C (execution C) is provided. In the execution A, a continuous production (see FIG. 218 (b)) for mainly acquiring the V icon 873z in the middle of the continuous production, and in the execution B, a V icon is mainly provided at the end of the continuous production. (Execution C to acquire the V icon 873y in FIG. 218 (a)). In the execution C, during the continuous production, the holding icons 873a to 873d imitating carrots cannot be completely digested (cannot be eaten). Although it has been described that the effect in which the icon cannot be acquired is performed, it is sufficient that the effect having the above-described content is mainly performed. For example, the effect of the execution B is executed in the execution A with a low probability, that is, If production which effect result is than the actual game result disadvantage may be executable to configure another continuous effect.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222 (b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the ninth embodiment is not displayed on the RAM 223 (see FIG. 174) of the audio ramp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment. The difference is that an information storage area 223ha, an undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, a displayed icon number counter 223hc, and a continuous effect flag 223hd are added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The undisplayed information storage area 223hb is a data area for temporarily storing the number of releases of the second attacker 1650 calculated based on the winning information command (winning command) received from the main control device 110, and will be described later. In the winning command processing 9 to be performed (see S4281 in FIG. 224), the number of times of release of the extracted second attacker 1650 is stored (S4486 in FIG. 224). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of displayed icons based on the stored information, and thereafter, the referred information is discarded. For the winning information already acquired before the latent state is set, the second attacker 1650 is opened for all the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223hb at the end timing of the jackpot game. The number of times is extracted and the result is stored.

  By providing the undisplayed information storage area 223hb in this way, the timing at which the special symbol winning information is received and the timing at which the effect mode is determined can be easily made different.

  The not-yet-displayed-icon counter 223hb is a counter for indicating the number of pending icons that are not yet displayed among the number of currently-displayable pending icons, and the counter value is decremented when a new pending icon is displayed. Is done. In the present embodiment, as effects for increasing or decreasing the number of reserved icons, a true icon effect for increasing / decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hc, a value for the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and a value for displaying / displaying the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb. A pseudo-effect (an effect having the same value) that increases / decreases only the apparent number of reserved icons without increasing / decreasing the value of the completed icon counter 223hc is configured to be executable.

  The displayed icon number counter 223hc is a counter for counting the number of currently-held icons, and is added when a new icon is displayed, and is subtracted when the number of held icons decreases. It is. When displaying a new reserved icon, the total number of reserved icons to be displayed is determined with reference to the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and the determined total number is displayed. The number of displayed icons is determined based on the difference from the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc.

  The continuous effect flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to ON while the continuous effect is being executed. While the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON, the effect of increasing or decreasing the number of reserved icons in the icon effect is not executed.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device of the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 224 to FIG. 227, a description will be given of the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device out of the control contents of the ninth embodiment. The control contents of the audio lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment include a winning command process 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) instead of the winning command process (see S4211 in FIG. 183) in the seventh embodiment. The jackpot end process 9 (see S4954 in FIG. 225) instead of the jackpot end process, and the ready state setting process 9 (see S4691 in FIG. 226) instead of the ready state setting process (see S4641 in FIG. 185) are set during the RUSH. RUSH setting process 9 (see S8450 in FIG. 227) is performed instead of the process (see S8410 in FIG. 192), and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  First, the content of the winning command processing 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning command processing 9 (S4281). In the winning command processing 9 (S4281), processing for updating information related to the icon effect performed during the RUSH game and determining the number of display of the hold icons 873 (see FIG. 217) displayed in the icon effect is executed. Is done.

  When the winning command processing 9 (S4281) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4481), and it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON. (S4482) If it is set to ON (S4482: Yes), the winning information (big hit information, small hit information) included in the received winning command is extracted (S4484). That is, it is determined whether or not the winning command received this time is a winning command to be won.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4484 that there is hit information (S4484: Yes), the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is extracted based on the hit type (big hit type, small hit type) indicated by the hit information (S4485), The value corresponding to the extracted number is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S4486). Then, the number of displayed icons is selected with reference to the icon display number selection table 222ha based on the special figure 2 number of reserved balls and the information stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S4487). Thereafter, the difference between the selected icon display number and the displayed icon number counter 223hc is added to the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb (S4488), and other processing is executed (S4412), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a winning command is received as a winning command, control for changing the number of displayed suspended icons is not executed, only updating information used for icon effects. This makes it possible to make the timing at which the display number of the hold icon changes and the timing at which the winning winning command is received different from each other, making it difficult for the player to understand when and how the display number of the hold icon changes. be able to. In the present embodiment, when a winning command is received as a winning command, the information used for the icon effect is only updated, and the control for changing the display number of the pending icon is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Control for changing the display number of the holding icon may be executed, or control for changing the display number of the holding icon when a predetermined lottery is executed and the winning is performed. It may be configured to execute.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4484 that there is no hit information (S4484: No), it is next determined whether or not the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S4489), and the flag is not set to ON. Is determined (S4489: No), it is determined whether the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is larger than 0 (S4490). If it is determined that it is larger than 0 (S4490: Yes), the effect mode of the pseudo effect for increasing or decreasing the number of icons is set (S4491), the execution timing of the pseudo effect is set (S4492), and the pseudo effect effect is set. Then, the values of various counters (undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, displayed icon number counter 223hc) are updated (S4493), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (S4494), and the process proceeds to S4412. I do.

  In the process of S4489, when it is determined that the continuous rendering flag 223hd is set to ON (S4489: Yes), that is, when the continuous rendering is currently being performed, or when the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is 0 In the case (S4404: No), that is, when it is in a state where the display number of the hold icon cannot be increased, the process proceeds to the process of S4412 without setting the pseudo effect.

  Next, the content of the big hit end processing 9 (S4954) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the content of the big hit end process 9 (S4954). This jackpot end processing 9 (S4954) is based on winning information already acquired when the RUSH game can be executed after the jackpot has ended, that is, when the latent state is set or when the probable change state is set. In this regard, the processing content is largely different from the jackpot ending processing described above in that the processing for setting the information regarding the icon effect is executed.

  When the jackpot end process 9 (S4954) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S5051), and if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is not set to ON (S5051: No), Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability change jackpot (S5052). If it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S5052: Yes), that is, if the jackpot has been set at a timing other than during the RUSH game, all jackpots stored in the winning information storage area 223b are set. The winning information is read (S5053), the winning information (big hit information, small hit information) included in the winning information is extracted (S5054), and the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is calculated based on the extracted winning information (S5054). S5055). Then, the calculated total number of second attackers (total release number) is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S5056).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a latent jackpot (S5057). If the jackpot is a latent jackpot (S5057: Yes), a display for indicating a corresponding latent mode (preparation mode, RUSH mode) is made. Command (S5058), the number of displayed icons is set to 4 (S5059), the value of the displayed icon counter is set to 4 (S5060), and the information stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is set. The information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is deleted (S5061), a display command indicating the end of the big hit is set (S5062), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5057 that the hit is not a latent big hit (S5057: No), a display command to indicate the certainty change mode is set (S5063), and the process proceeds to S5062. .

  If it is determined in the process of S5051 that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON, that is, if the jackpot has been won during the RUSH game (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot is a normal jackpot. (S5064), if it is a normal jackpot (S5064: Yes), since the RUSH game is over, various flags and counters related to the RUSH game are reset (set to the initial state) (S5065), and the current jackpot is reached. The corresponding RUSH display command is set (S5066), and the flow shifts to the process of S5062. In this case, in the processing of S5066, a display command indicating the end of the RUSH game is set. If it is determined in the process of S5065 that it is not a normal jackpot (S5064: No), the process of S5065 is skipped and the process of S5066 is executed. In this case, a display command indicating that the RUSH game will be continued is set.

  Next, the contents of the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691). In the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691), a hold icon is displayed at the timing of shifting from the probable change state to the latent state with respect to the preparation state setting process of the seventh embodiment (see S4641 in FIG. 226). The processing is different in that a processing for adding the same is added, and the other processing is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the detailed description is omitted.

  When the preparation state setting processing 9 (S4691) is executed, first, the same processing as S8001 to S8004 as the preparation state setting processing (see S4641 in FIG. 226) is executed, and then, the corresponding latent mode (RUSH mode) Is set (S8051), the number of displayed icons is set to 4 (S8052), the value of the displayed icon counter is set to 4 (S8053), and stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb. The information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is deleted from the displayed information (S8054), and the process ends.

  That is, the same processing as the processing executed at the end of the big hit when the latent state is set after the big hit game is executed is executed. This makes it possible to unify the initial display of the icon effect (a state in which four reserved icons are displayed irrespective of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2) regardless of the trigger when the latent state is set. Therefore, the control process for changing the effect mode of the icon effect according to the transition trigger to the latent state can be unified, so that the load of the control process can be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450). In the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450), a process for setting the effect mode of the icon effect to be executed according to the second special symbol change executed during the RUSH game is executed.

  When the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 4 (S8651), and if it is 4, (S8651: Yes), and the continuous effect selection is performed. The continuous effect is selected with reference to the table 222hb (S8652), and it is determined whether the continuous effect is to be executed (S4453). If it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (S4453: Yes), a display command for indicating the effect mode of the selected continuous effect is set (S4454), and the process ends. In the process of S4454, the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc and the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb are also updated in accordance with the number of reserved icons used (consumed) in the selected continuous effect. If it is determined in the processing of S4453 that the continuous effect is not to be executed (S8653: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8651 that the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is not 4 (S8651: No), then it is determined whether the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S8655). ), If it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8655: No), it is determined whether the value of the undisplayed icon counter 223hb is greater than 0 (S8656). When it is determined that it is larger than 0 (S8656: Yes), the effect mode of the pseudo effect for increasing or decreasing the number of icons is set (S8657), the execution timing of the pseudo effect is set (S8658), and the pseudo effect mode is adjusted. Then, the values of the various counters (undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, displayed icon number counter 223hc) are updated (S8659), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (S8660), and the process ends. .

  In the process of S8655, when it is determined that the continuous production flag 223hd is set to ON (S8655: Yes), that is, when the continuous production is currently being performed, or when the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is 0. In this case, that is, when it is not possible to increase the display number of the hold icons, the process ends without setting the pseudo effect.

<Regarding Modification of Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the ninth embodiment will be described. In the icon effect performed in the above-described ninth embodiment, a continuous effect can be performed based on the pre-read result. And the production mode of the continuous production was determined when the continuous production was set. Specifically, as the effect of the continuous effect, the type of effect, such as an effect that is executed so that the reserved icon remains, or an effect that is executed to exhaust all the reserved icons, is determined in advance. The effect according to the type was configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load during the continuous production without any difference between the production result of the continuous production and the actual game result. There was a problem that could not be given diversity.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, at the start of the jackpot game to be the target of the continuous production, it is configured to vary the production mode of the continuous production based on the winning jackpot type and the number of remaining reserved icons. I have. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the production mode of the continuous production mode, for example, by dividing the production mode into the first half period until the jackpot game is started and the second half period after the jackpot game is started. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effect patterns of the continuous effect.

  Further, in the present modification, since the process of increasing the display number of the hold icons after the jackpot game is started is configured to be executable, an effect mode in which all the hold icons are consumed in the first half period of the continuous effect is set. Even if the type of the winning jackpot is a latent hit jackpot, the number of displayed hold icons can be increased during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to relax the prohibition condition when deciding the effect mode in the first half period of the effect pattern of the continuous effect, and it is possible to easily diversify the effect pattern.

  Further, in the present modification, the continuous effect is configured to progress in accordance with the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the big hit game. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the small hit game is being executed even though the second attacker 1650 is opened in the big hit game.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of Ninth Embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIG. 228, a control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described. This modified example is different from the above-described ninth embodiment in that a jackpot-related process 9 (S4802) executed at the start timing of the jackpot game is executed, and the rest is the same. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related process 9 (S4802).

  When the jackpot-related process 9 (S4802) is executed, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S4901), and if it has been determined (S4901: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S4902). Then, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S4951). If it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S4951: Yes), then the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON. It is determined whether the setting has been made (S4952). That is, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot to be subjected to the continuous production.

  In the process of S4952, when it is determined that the continuous production flag 223hd is set to ON (S4952: Yes), the continuous production flag 223hd is set to OFF (S4953), and the current big hit is a latent big hit ( It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game (S4954), and if it is determined that the jackpot is a latent jackpot (S4954: Yes), the number of open second attackers 1650 during the jackpot is determined. The information in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc are updated correspondingly, that is, the hold icons are displayed in correspondence with the release of the second attacker 1650 executed in the big hit game executed this time. Each value is updated to digest the number (S4955).

  Thereafter, a display command corresponding to the updated content is set (S4956), and after the update, it is determined whether the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 0 (S4957), and when it is determined that the value is 0, that is, In the case where the continuous effect is advanced in accordance with the opening of the second attacker 1650, even though the RUSH continues at the latent hit, if the display number of the hold icon becomes 0 (S4957), the continuous effect is executed. Later, an additional effect (mode) for displaying one hold icon is set (S4958), and the process ends. As an additional effect mode set here, there is an effect in which ginseng falls from the sky during a jackpot game. In addition, although detailed description is omitted, a jackpot game executed during the RUSH is being performed and the hold icon is not displayed, that is, a RUSH game may be ended by the current jackpot game. Is configured to execute a pseudo additional effect as to whether or not the above additional effect is executed. This pseudo additional production is formed of a first production that stimulates that something falls from the sky, similarly to the additional production, and a second production that other than ginseng falls from the sky. This allows the player to play a game while keeping expectations until the end.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4954 that the current big hit is not a latent big hit (S4954: No), that is, if the RUSH game ends with the current big hit, all the displayed holding icons are consumed. The effect mode is determined (S4959), the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is cleared (S4960), and the process ends. If it is determined in the process of S4951 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4951: No), the same processes of S4913 to S4916 as the above-described jackpot-related process (see S4802 in FIG. 68) are executed. This processing ends.

  Note that the technical concept used in this modification, that is, the technical concept of performing an effect of changing the display number of the hold icon at the timing when the jackpot game is started, is used for purposes other than executing in a continuous effect. Is also good.

  In the present modification, since the process of increasing the number of display of the hold icons after the jackpot game is started is configured to be executable, it is assumed that the effect mode in which all the hold icons are consumed in the first half period of the continuous effect is set. In addition, when the type of the winning jackpot is a latent jackpot, the number of displayed hold icons can be increased during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to relax the prohibition condition when deciding the effect mode in the first half period of the effect pattern of the continuous effect, and it is possible to easily diversify the effect pattern.

  Further, in the present modification, the continuous effect is configured to progress in accordance with the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the big hit game. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the small hit game is being executed even though the second attacker 1650 is opened in the big hit game.

  As described above, in the ninth embodiment described above, in accordance with the result of the pre-reading process (prior discrimination process) performed on the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored, the special map acquired in accordance with the result is obtained. It is configured to execute a look-ahead effect (icon effect) in which the number of specific symbols (dedicated icons displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is varied regardless of the number of reserved balls. Thereby, even if the number of acquired special figure reserved balls is small, it is possible to execute the same prefetching effect as in the case where the acquired number of special figure reserved balls is the upper limit, according to the prefetching result. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect with a high effect even for a player who cannot acquire many special figure reserved balls, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of specific symbols displayed in the above-described icon effect is set to the number of special figure reserved balls that can be retained (the storage of the second special symbol mainly executed during the latent state). ) Is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (it is difficult for the player to discriminate). ). With this configuration, the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect is as if the number of special figure reserved balls (the number of stored second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state) is the same. It can make you think it is a reserved symbol to show. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play of a player who cannot acquire many special figure reserved balls.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading result is a specific result (for example, a jackpot in which a latent state is set), a special figure holding ball in which the number of the specific symbols displayed in the icon effect can be held and stored. It is configured to be larger than the upper limit value (4) of the number (the number of stored second special symbols mainly executed during the latent state). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a surprising effect to a player who has an illusion that the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect is a reserved symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of the pre-reading process (preliminary determination process) performed on the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored, the number of times of opening of the attacker that is opened in the small hit game is determined. The number of specific symbols to be displayed is determined based on the determination result. The number of times the attacker is released in one small hit game is made different depending on the type of the small hit that has been won. Furthermore, as a part of the big hit game executed when the big hit is won, the same attacker releasing operation as that of the small hit game is executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict the number of small hit games to be executed in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as the icon effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the player is notified that the period in which the specific symbol is displayed is a period in which the latent state (RUSH game) does not end. That is, when at least one specific symbol remains at the end of the big hit game, the fact that the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game is notified in advance. Therefore, each time the number of specific symbols is changed, the player pays attention to the icon effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  In the ninth embodiment described above, the number of icons that can be displayed (the number of reserved icons) in the winning command processing 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) executed when the winning information command indicating the winning information of the special symbol is received. ) Is determined and the effect of increasing / decreasing the number of pending icons displayed at various timings is executed. However, a process of determining the number of icons that can be displayed (the number of pending icons) (display) The number-of-possible-icons determination process) is not executed every time the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) is executed when the winning information command indicating the winning information of the special symbol is received. When the process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) is executed, the process may be executed only when the predetermined condition is satisfied. More specifically, the number of additional receptions of the prize information command (prize command) becomes a predetermined period (for example, a period indicating an elapsed time of 30 seconds) from the execution of the previous displayable icon number determination process. May be configured to execute the process of determining the number of displayable icons when the period up to) has elapsed. This makes it possible to make the timing at which the winning information command (winning command) is actually received different from the timing at which the number of displayable icons is determined based on the information included in the command. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the number of reserved icons has been determined for (reserved figure storage). In this way, the received winning information command includes the effect of changing the timing of determining the number of icons that can be displayed, thereby increasing or decreasing the number of reserved icons displayed within the range of the number of icons that can be displayed. Since it can be easily separated from the winning information to be provided, it is easy to provide a surprising effect to the player.

  Further, in addition to the winning command processing 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224), for example, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, the displayable icon number determination processing is executed. May be configured. In this case, it is preferable to execute an operation effect on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 so that the player can operate the operation means with predetermined contents. This makes it easy for a player who has operated the operating means correctly for the operation effect to be executed to execute an icon effect based on the winning information included in the received winning information command. Can be motivated to play the game.

  In addition, it detects that a ball has entered the general winning opening 63 or the through gate 67 provided on the game board 13 and displays the result based on the detection result (at a predetermined probability when the ball enters). You may comprise so that possible icon number determination processing may be performed. With this configuration, the number of holdable icons that can be displayed is determined by a game that is not related to the special symbol lottery. Since the timing for determining the number of displayable icons based on the information included in the command can be made different, it is possible to determine which winning information (special figure reservation storage) the number of reserved icons has been determined for. Can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, as effects for increasing or decreasing the number of reserved icons, a true icon effect for increasing / decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hc, a value for the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and a value for displaying / displaying the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb. Pseudo-effects (effects that finally have the same value) in which only the number of appearance reserved icons is increased / decreased without increasing / decreasing the value of the completed icon counter 223hc. The mode is also configured to be set by the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When it is determined that the effect is to be executed, the range of the number of icons to be increased / decreased in the pseudo effect and a display frame indicating that the effect is to be executed. When a display command indicating that a pseudo effect is to be executed is received by the display control device 114, an effect based on information included in the received display command is set. You may be comprised so that an aspect may be determined.

  With this configuration, only the icon effect (true icon effect) set based on the winning information of the special symbol needs to be controlled by the sound lamp control device 113, so that the sound lamp control device 113 The processing load of the control processing can be reduced. In addition, by executing a pseudo effect of increasing or decreasing (variable) only the apparent number of reserved icons without increasing or decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, the icon effect is held. The variable pattern of the number of icons can be diversified. In addition, since the pseudo effect is executed such that the final increment and decrement of the pending icon match, when setting the effect mode of the true icon effect, care is taken about the effect status of the pseudo effect. There is no need, and the processing load of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The tenth embodiment differs from the seventh embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed, and that the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 are partially configured. Changes, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a control process executed by the main control device 110, and a control executed by the sound lamp control device 113 The difference is that part of the processing has been changed. In addition, due to the above-described differences, some of the effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are also different. Note that the same components as those of the above-described seventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, a major difference between the tenth embodiment and the above-described seventh embodiment will be briefly described. In the tenth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured not to be performed in parallel (in parallel), and the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. This is configured to be executed in preference to the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, the lottery in which the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed. Further, it is configured such that the ease of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is changed according to the set game state. Specifically, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (time saving state, probable change state), the case where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (normal state) is set. In order to make it easier to acquire the lottery right for the second special symbol, the entrance with the electric accessory 640a that is opened in the hit game (normal game per game) executed at the time of winning the normal symbol. When a ball enters the (second entrance 640), a lottery right for the second special symbol can be acquired. In other words, when playing a game in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be more easily executed than the second special symbol lottery, and the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. At the same time, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol can be set, and when the ordinary symbol high probability state is set, the second special symbol lottery which is more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery is executed. Is configured. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly changed according to the set game state, and it is expected that a game state with a high degree of advantage to the player is set. It is possible to make the player play the game while being eager.

  Here, for example, when the normal state which is the most unfavorable game state among the plurality of game states is set, the lottery of the second special symbol which is a lottery advantageous to the player is not executed at all. With such a configuration, the player's willingness to play in the normal state, that is, the player's willingness to set a more advantageous game state (time saving state, probable change state) is reduced, and Had the problem of getting tired early. On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied during a period in which the normal state is set, a predetermined number (up to five) of lottery rights for the second special symbol can be obtained. are doing. Specifically, in the case where a win is made in a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the electric bonus game 640 is opened for 5 seconds. Make up. With this configuration, it is possible to temporarily provide a period in which the second special symbol lottery can be easily performed even in the normal state which is a disadvantageous gaming state to the player. For a player playing a game, a game aimed at winning a special symbol lottery winning and a game aiming for a winning in a regular symbol lottery can be executed, so that the player gets tired of the game early. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect form of the special figure 2 variable effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is stored. It is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights of the second special symbol, that is, the number of special figure 2 reservations. Specifically, as an effect mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a pseudo-off-variation fluctuation effect indicating that the lottery result is off during the first half period of the fluctuation effect. In the second half period, the third symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo off-state fluctuation effect is restarted to execute a pseudo-hit fluctuation effect indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, The number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-hit variation effect is configured to be variable in accordance with the number of special figure 2 reservations. With this configuration, the variable effect in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped a plurality of times before the third symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. Can be executed. In other words, it can be assumed that the jackpot has been won through a plurality of second special symbol lotteries.

  With this, even if the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 reservation used for the second special symbol lottery executed first among the plurality of special figure 2 reservations acquired during the regular figure game, the player On the other hand, since a plurality of special figure 2 reservations were acquired during the per-figure game, it can be assumed that the big hit was won. Can be done.

  When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 in the case of winning the big hit in the second special symbol lottery, when the first special symbol lottery is executed as the above-mentioned pseudo-hit variation effect, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A variable effect simulating a variable effect displayed on the display surface (an effect mode of the special figure 1 variable effect performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the first special symbol lottery) is executed. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the repetition of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect in a situation where the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired, and therefore, the pseudo fluctuation effect is provided to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to identify that the operation is being performed. In addition, after a pseudo variable effect imitating the special figure 1 variable effect is executed, the third symbol is stopped (fixed display) in a combination indicating that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, so that the game is performed. It is possible to execute a surprising fluctuating effect on the user.

<About the game board configuration of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 229, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the gaming board 13 in the above-described pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 157) on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The configuration is different in that the configuration of the formed right region and the configuration of the lower region formed below the variable display unit 80 are different, and the other configurations are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment executes a game in which a ball flows down to a left area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left-handed game), but a game in which a ball flows down to the right area. The game board 13 is configured so that, even when (right-handed game) is executed, there is no difference (less likely) in the game value obtained by the player. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 229, the game board 13 is formed symmetrically with respect to a vertical line at the center of the game board 13, and a ball enters the lower area of the variable display unit 80. The first entrance 64 that can be a chance for a lottery of the first special symbol and the second entrance that is provided below the first entrance 64 and can be a lottery for the second special symbol when the ball enters. 2 entrance 640, an electric accessory 640 a attached to the second entrance 640, and opened in a normal game per game executed when a normal symbol lottery is won, and a second entrance thereof. A V winning device 2650 which is provided at a position below the ball opening 640 and is opened in a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery is provided.

  The ball fired by the left-handed game flows down the left region, passes through the through gate 67 provided in the left region at a rate of 1/2, and the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 does not pass through the through gate 67. The dropped ball also flows down toward the first ball entry port 64 provided in the lower region by the nail implanted in the game board 13. Here, the ball that has flowed downward from between the nails enters the two general entrances 63. In the present embodiment, about 1/50 of the sphere flowing down the left area is configured to enter one of the two general entrances 63, and the sphere enters the general entrance 63. When a ball is entered, ten prize balls (privileges) are provided.

  The first ball entrance 64 is configured so that one ball can enter at a ratio of one to fifteen balls, similarly to the first embodiment described above. The ball is configured to be paid out as a prize ball. In the state in which the electric accessory 640 is closed (the state shown in white in FIG. 229), the second entrance 640 has almost no ball in it, and the electric accessory 640 is open ( In the state shown in black in FIG. 229), the ball is shot in a left-handed game, and is configured so that one out of every two balls that flow down the left region enters the ball. When a ball is entered, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. Further, the V winning device 2650 is configured such that in the state where the jackpot game is not executed, almost no balls enter the ball, and during the jackpot game, balls enter at a ratio of about 2 out of 3 balls. When a ball enters, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Here, the V winning device 2650 will be described. The V prize device 2650 is a variable ball entry means that is opened in a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and a ball that has won the V prize device 2650 during the jackpot game is specified. By passing through the gate, a special symbol high probability state can be set after the big hit game is over. In addition, according to the type of the winning jackpot, the ball winning the V-prize device 2650 can execute a jackpot game in which the ball easily flows down the specific gate and a jackpot game in which the ball hardly flows down. In the jackpot game in which the ball winning the V-prize device 2650 easily flows down the specific gate, that is, a jackpot (game) in which the ball can easily flow down to the specific gate if a normal game is performed during the jackpot game ) Is a jackpot game (game), in which a ball that has won the V prize device 2650 is unlikely to flow down a specific gate, ie, a ball flows down to a specific gate even if a normal game is played during the jackpot game. The jackpot (game) in which it is difficult is described as a normal jackpot (game).

  As described above, even if the jackpot game is executed, even if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game, the special symbol high probability state (the jackpot state) after the jackpot game ends. ) Is never set. That is, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the big hit game is executed, the game state set after the big hit game ends is not determined. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in the round game executed in the fifth round of the jackpot game, a round game (V round game) in which the ball is most likely to flow down to the specific gate is executed. Is configured. Therefore, the game state set after the end of the big hit game cannot be determined until the V round game ends. In this way, by configuring so that the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is determined based on the game result during the jackpot game, the player can obtain various benefits (high prize balls, special symbol high probability state) in the jackpot game. Can be played, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the case of using the above-described configuration, the production mode of the notification effect (for example, the production mode of the jackpot ending period) for notifying the player of the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game (for example, the jackpot) At the start of the game) it is not possible to set, the control process for the pitching out and the control process for the display must be performed densely. There is a problem that control processing becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the probability change jackpot game is executed, an effect mode indicating that the probability change state is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the notification effect after the end of the jackpot game is set. Immediately before the notification effect is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the effect mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to the specific gate, When the ball is flowing down the specific gate, the notification effect of the preset effect mode is executed, and only when the ball is not flowing down the specific gate, the effect mode of the notification effect is switched. Make up.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probable jackpot and the normal jackpot, so that the ending period longer than the normal jackpot is set for the probable jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Make up. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the probability change state is set after the big hit game is completed, before the probability change state is actually set. On the other hand, if the probable change state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the fact is notified for a long period of time, the ending period is shortened because it only gives the player an unpleasant feeling.

  As described above, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability jackpot game, the jackpot ending By simply performing the process of switching the production mode of the period to the production mode executed during the ending period of the normal hit game, the length of the ending period is different, so that an uncomfortable notification production is performed during the ending period. There was a problem. In addition, if a special effect mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate in the probability change jackpot game is facilitated in advance, image data (effect data) for the effect mode is displayed in advance. It is necessary to store the information in the character ROM 234 of the control device 114, and there is a problem that the storage capacity increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type. When the ball could not flow down to the specific gate, only the staging mode corresponding to the latter half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the staging mode set for the latter half of the ending period of the normal hit game. Make up. As a result, a notification effect without providing a special effect mode used only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability change jackpot game and without giving a sense of incongruity to the player is executed. can do.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the second half period is configured to have a common length regardless of the jackpot type. It is configured to switch and set the production mode of the notification production performed when it is not possible to flow down to the specific gate, but without being limited to this, for example, during the last round period of the jackpot game By executing the notification effect, the notification effect that is executed for a longer period than the actual jackpot ending period may be configured to be executable, or the jackpot game may be terminated for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set. By continuing to execute the round effect performed during the round period, and then executing the notification effect, the actual jackpot ending period It may be configured to perform a notification effect of remote short period of time.

  Since the V winning device 2650 has the same contents as the V winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 194 to 196) of the above-described eighth embodiment, the same symbols are given and the detailed description is omitted. . Further, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the ball flowing down the right area are sent to the through gate 67, the general entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650. Since the ratio of entering the ball is the same as the above-described left region, detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of the set game state, and regardless of whether the jackpot game is executed or not, even if the player executes the right-handed game, Is executed, the same privilege is provided. Therefore, the player can play a game by any game method according to his / her mood.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 229, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that there is no large difference between the case where the left-handed game is played and the case where the right-handed game is played. The number of entrances 63 is smaller than the number of entrances 63, and the ratio of the ball entering the first entrance 64 is configured so that the left-handed game is higher than the right-handed game. It is more difficult to obtain the prize ball than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery. May be configured. In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, that is, during the execution of the game in which the ball enters the first entrance hole 64, the player can play the game by any game method. In a game in which a ball enters the second entrance 640 (a game in a time-saving state or a probable change state), a right-handed game can be a game more advantageous to a player than a left-handed game. .

<About Display Contents in Tenth Embodiment>
Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 230A and 230B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth control example is changed and displayed in synchronization with the third symbol (the special symbol) with respect to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example described above. The scroll direction of the decorative pattern is changed from vertical to horizontal (from right to left), and the number of activated lines for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is one (see FIG. 11A). ) Is changed to five (see FIG. 230 (a)), and the point of notifying the information related to the game is different. Some elements are the same (similar) as those in the first control example, but have different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. Otherwise, they are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of upper, middle, and lower ( Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 230 (a)). The third symbol (decorative symbol that changes in response to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is: It is composed of ten types of main symbols to which identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9" are attached. In the present embodiment, the number of pieces of identification information imitating a specific number (for example, the identification information imitating the number “4”) is configured to be greater than the number of pieces of identification information imitating other numbers. are doing. Thereby, when the identification information imitating the specific number is in the reach state, the jackpot symbol passing on the active line (imaging the specific number) is more effective than when the identification information is in the reach state with other identification information. Since the number of (identification information) can be increased, it is possible to visually predict that the player has a high expectation of the jackpot winning.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, the main symbol is formed using different types of characters (such as fish) for each piece of identification information that imitates a number. In this way, by using the character corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually notify the result of the lottery of the special symbol to the player, so that the player can play the game easily. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the game is over. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the result of the lottery of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in the left-right direction with a periodicity to perform variable display.

  Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 is configured such that a symbol row is formed so that numbers are ascending from right to left, and is scrolled and displayed from right to left. The row of symbols Z2 and the row of lower symbols Z3 are formed such that the symbols are arranged in ascending order from left to right, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variably manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) which does not show the result of the lottery of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols. In FIG. 230 (b), a blank symbol (sub symbol) is displayed using a symbol imitating a triangle.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (a), the main display area Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed in the oblique direction. If the third symbol is stopped in a combination of big hit symbols (in the present control example, the same combination of main symbols) in a state where the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, A jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (a), in the present control example, each of the activated lines (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display position of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Until all the symbol rows V1 to V3 displayed in the 81 main display area Dm are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol. Therefore, until the last symbol row (in the present control example, the middle symbol row V2) is stopped and displayed, the user can be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, each symbol The number of symbols in a row can be changed as appropriate. The symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those described above. For example, a symbol that combines an image of a figure or a character with a numeral may be configured as the third symbol. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed is variable. For example, when a specific effect is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol is displayed. Or by moving the variable display area to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the third symbol is fluctuating. You may make it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be changed again.

  Further, in the present control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player is difficult to identify). ), But the display style and the display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the special symbol that is changing.

  Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 230 (b), a small display area Dm1 is formed at the upper left of the main display area Dm in front view, and a small display area Dm2 is formed at the upper right of front view. The small display area Dm1 is an area in which identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating a special symbol lottery status (whether or not a lottery is in progress (change) and a lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the fourth symbol (showing the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2)) (Special figure 2 fourth symbol) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

  The small display area Dm2 is an area in which identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the ordinary symbol (whether or not the lottery is being performed (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. , A fourth symbol (fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the ordinary symbol (figure symbol), or a fourth symbol (special symbol 2) for indicating the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (Fourth symbol) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

  By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol and the lottery status of the normal symbol. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle and a cross, and the fourth symbol is displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. Is displayed (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 230 (b)) to show the situation where the special symbol is changing, and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 230 (b), the small display area Dm2), the special symbol lottery result is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol, a plurality of colors, By using the display mode that indicates the number, the display mode that changes the color indicates that the special symbol is fluctuating, and the display mode that indicates the specific symbol or color is stopped and displayed, so that the special symbol lottery result is displayed. May be configured to indicate .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result), but this is not restrictive. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is being drawn (changed). Further, as shown in FIG. 230 (b), in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which a fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is displayed on the main display. An example is shown in which the upper left and upper right sides of the area Dm are formed, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are changed in the effect of a variable effect executed in the center of the main display area Dm. It may be different depending on the mode.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a region in which the variable effect is executed from being restricted by the fourth symbol display region, thereby suppressing a reduction in the effect of the effect. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed using the light emitting means (eg, an LED) provided in the variable display device unit 80. Should be configured to execute.

  The display contents displayed in the sub-display area Ds are substantially the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description is omitted. However, in the eighth control example, the display area of the sub-display area Ds is limited to the small area Ds1, and the active area Ds1a and the standby area Ds1b are formed in the small area Ds1. I have. The display content of the active area Ds1a is the same as that of the small area Ds1 of the above-described first control example, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the display contents of the waiting area Ds1b will be described. In the present embodiment, eight pedestals are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and normally, a reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed.

  In addition, when the sum of the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball) and the reserved ball of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved ball) is 8, that is, the rightmost pedestal When a reserved symbol is displayed on the screen, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches the upper limit (8), a dedicated effect (period effect) using the eight reserved symbols stored and executed is executed. During the period during which the period effect is being executed, the waiting area Ds1b is not a reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, but a period during which the period effect is executed. It may be configured such that an effect-holding symbol indicating only the (holding symbol targeted for the period effect) is displayed.

  With this configuration, even if a new holding ball is acquired during the period effect, a new holding symbol is not displayed in the waiting area Ds1b. It can be informed clearly.

  In the tenth embodiment, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be left-right symmetric, and the same game result is provided when a right-handed game is performed and when a left-handed game is performed. It is not displayed because it is configured so that, for example, depending on the set game state, a right-handed game is a more advantageous game method than a left-handed game, In the case of the pachinko machine 10 capable of setting the case where the left-handed game is more advantageous than the hitting game, the direction in which the ball is fired toward the player is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A guide display mode for guiding the (game direction) may be configured to be displayed. With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board the ball should be fired simply by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  To describe in more detail, as a guidance display area, a display mode of “right-handed” for guiding a player to perform a right-handed game, and a display of a left-handed game for the player. And a display mode of "left-handed" for guiding the player may be displayed, and a display mode of "right-handed" may be a game state in which right-handed game is advantageous to a player, for example, a probable change state. It is displayed during the time-saving state and during the jackpot game, and the display mode of “left-handed” may be configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is completed. Also, in the game state where the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the normal state, the “left-handed” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Is preferably displayed. In addition, various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described in the above embodiments may be configured to be appropriately displayed.

<About the effects of the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 231 to FIG. 236, characteristic effect contents among various effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. do. First, with reference to FIG. 231 (a), a display screen when reach is established in the normal state will be described. FIG. 231 (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed when a reach state is set in a normal state (normal state). In the present embodiment, the third symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed in the order of the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z2, and a big hit is made on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 230 (a)). When the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed as a part of the third symbol combination indicating the winning, the reach state is established, and the upper symbol row Z1, as a part of the third symbol combination indicating the jackpot winning, An effective line in which the lower symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed is set as a reach effective line, and the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed. Then, after reaching the reach state, the middle symbol row Z2 shifts by one low speed (the main symbol (the third symbol simulating a number)) at which the player can visually recognize each piece of identification information (the third symbol). (The time required for about 0.5 seconds).

  As described above, in this embodiment, since one symbol row has ten types of main symbols, when the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed at a low speed, the time required for one round is displayed. It is configured to be 5 seconds (0.5 × 10). Then, the middle symbol row Z2 which is variably displayed at a low speed is stopped and displayed as it is. Alternatively, it is configured to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on the satisfaction of a specific transition condition.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 231 (a), the reach state is established with any third symbol (in FIG. 231 (a), the identification information simulating “9” (the third symbol simulating a crab)). , The identification information (the third symbol imitating the octopus) of the middle symbol column Z2 (see FIG. 230) variably displayed during the reach can be visually recognized first. The low-speed fluctuation display is executed such that

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the variable effect is configured to be variable according to the change mode of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach state, and, for example, after the reach state, It is configured such that it can be changed to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing when the symbol row Z2 makes one round or the timing when the symbol row Z2 makes two rounds. Therefore, by unifying the identification information of the middle symbol row Z2 that can be visually recognized first after entering the reach state as in the present embodiment, a different presentation mode (reach mode) is given to the player at any timing. Can be easily understood.

  In the present embodiment, the timing of changing to a different presentation mode (reach mode) is the timing of one round of the middle symbol row Z2 or the timing of two loops after the reach state, but is not limited thereto. For example, the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information of which the reach is stopped) which becomes the combination indicating the jackpot after the reach state is determined from the timing at which the reach effective line is passed or the identification information which becomes the combination indicating the jackpot. You may be comprised so that the shifted identification information may change to a different production mode (reach mode) at the timing of passing through the reach effective line. In this way, the game is configured such that the specific identification information corresponding to the type of the identification information of which the reach is stopped is changed to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on passing through the reach valid line. It is possible to give a relationship between the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a winning combination and the timing at which it is changed to a different presentation mode (reach mode). More specifically, the identification information (identification information that is the same as the identification information in which the reach is stopped), which is a combination indicating the jackpot after the reach state, is changed to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing of passing through the reach effective line. In this case, the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a winning combination for the player and the timing at which it is changed to a different effect mode (reach mode) are overlapped. The identification information (the same identification information as the identification information of which the reach has been stopped), which is a combination indicating a jackpot, is closely watched for the fluctuation effect while giving the player a great sense of expectation when approaching the reach effective line. Can be done.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, a specific identification state (a third pattern imitating the numeral 1) becomes first visible regardless of which of the third symbols is in the reach state. As described above, since the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to be displayed at a low-speed fluctuation, for example, a combination in which the third symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed is shifted by one type from the third symbol combination which is a big hit. In the case where (reach one frame deviates) (when the final stop display mode is determined in advance), all the third symbols are stopped and displayed after the reach state (the final stop display mode is stopped and displayed). ) Is different depending on the type of the third symbol in the reach state.

  Specifically, when the reach state is reached with the "third symbol imitating the numeral 1", the middle symbol row Z2 displays the low-speed fluctuation display with the "third symbol imitating the numeral 1" as a specific symbol. Therefore, in order to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 one frame off the reach as the final stop display mode, 5.5 seconds (first lap) and 10.5 seconds (second lap) from the reach state are set. In short, when the reach state is reached with the “third symbol imitating the numeral 6”, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed at a low speed with the “third symbol imitating the numeral 1” as a specific symbol. In the final stop display mode, it takes 8 seconds (first lap) and 13 seconds (second lap) from the reach state to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 at one frame off the reach.

  Therefore, in order to establish the reach state with different types of third symbols in the variation pattern in which the same variation time is set, the timing of reaching the reach state from the stop display timing of the third symbol is set in reverse. Processing had to be performed. In other words, there is a problem that a reach effect without uniformity is performed in which the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reach state is changed according to the type of the third symbol in the reach state, and the effect of the effect is reduced. Was.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, along with the execution of the special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of the first symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is determined by the main controller 110 by lottery, and the determined fluctuation is determined. The time is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a fluctuation pattern command. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 selects a fluctuation display effect of the effect period that matches the fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation pattern command, synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the first symbol, and displays the fluctuation display effect of the third symbol. Is executed. The fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating a basic fluctuation time and an addition time command indicating a fluctuation time to be added. The type of the third symbol in the reach state is made variable based on the length of time. More specifically, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as a basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as an addition time. You. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is added as the addition time. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to identify the variation type that is longer than the basic time by 7 seconds based on the notification content of the addition time command. Thus, the type of the third symbol to be in the reach state can be set only by confirming the content of the addition time command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231 (b) to FIG. 234, description will be given of the effect contents regarding the second special symbol change (lottery) executed when the normal state is set. First, with reference to FIG. 231 (b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation that has been won in the normal state will be described. FIG. 231 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed during the execution of the normal symbol change in which the winning has been won in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 231 (b), when the ordinary symbol variation is executed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the ordinary symbol variation is being executed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. . Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the electric accessory 640 that is opened in a game per ordinary drawing is displayed therein, and the small display area Dm3 is displayed. Is displayed (indicated by six lines in the figure) for notifying the player that is formed. Note that the icon shown in the small display area Dm3 is a display that imitates the electric accessory 640 in the closed state because the situation shown in FIG. It is an aspect. With this configuration, the game will be executed soon for the player. It can be predicted that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In FIG. 231 (b), an example has been described in which the execution of the normal symbol change that has been won has been described as an example. (Probability of 1/100), a small display area Dm3 is formed, and an effect (gase effect) of displaying an icon imitating the electric accessory 640 is executed. In this case, an effect mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears before the currently executed normal symbol change (out-of-position change) is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the player is expected to execute the game per ordinary figure.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a maximum of four lottery rights for ordinary symbols can be reserved, and when a new lottery right (regular drawing reservation) is acquired, the acquired lottery right is used. The result of the ordinary symbol lottery can be determined in advance. Then, a command (information) indicating the result of the preliminary determination is configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the stage prior to the execution of the normal symbol change, which is winning the suggestive effect suggesting the execution of the game per day, that is, the stage where the pre-discrimination result is the winning of the day-posting, which is the winning. Thus, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect indicating that the game per day is to be executed soon. In this case, it is preferable that the suggestion effect is executed in an effect mode that is difficult for the player to understand, rather than the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 231 (b). For example, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol change during execution may be performed. As a result, or a preliminary determination result for the acquired special figure reservation, the suggestion effect is configured to be executed in the same effect mode as the effect indicating the effect, and a situation advantageous to the player is achieved by the executed suggestion effect. You may be comprised so that a player may be notified only of coming soon.

  In this way, it is understood that the presentation mode of the suggested effect for indicating to the player that the timing at which the per-figure game is actually executed is different from the execution timing of the suggested effect to the player is such that the per-figure game is executed. By making it difficult to understand that the target of the suggested effect is a game per ordinary figure, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the suggested effect is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 232 (a), a description will be given of the contents of the effect in the case where the general per-game (long-open per game) is executed during the normal state. FIG. 232 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content displayed when the game per ordinary drawing (game per long opening) is executed in the normal state (during the normal state). In the present embodiment, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the ordinary symbol is executed in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. The variation time of the symbol variation is designed to be 10 seconds. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 229, in any of the case where the right-handed game is executed and the case where the left-handed game is executed, about １ ／ of the fired balls pass through the through gate 67. ing. Further, a maximum of four lottery rights for ordinary symbols (regular symbol reservation) can be stored.

  That is, while the game is continued in the normal state, the ordinary symbol lottery is continuously executed, and the winning is performed per ordinary figure at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. Further, in the case where a win is made in the normal state, a game in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds is executed (a long opening win). In addition, as shown in FIG. 229, since the electric accessory 640 is provided below the first entrance 64, the ball fired only by continuing the game aiming at the first entrance 64 becomes the second entrance. It is configured to be able to enter the ball entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the player cannot enter the ball into the second entrance 640 in the per-figure game in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol generated with a low probability. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (a), when the normal symbol hitting game is executed in the normal state, a combination (two circles in the figure) indicating that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a hit in the small display area Dm2. ), The identification information (symbol) is stopped and displayed, a comment "Aim for the electric tuy" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and the open electric chew (motor combination) is displayed in the small display area Dm3. An icon imitating the object 640) is displayed. In addition, since the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery are configured to be able to be executed in parallel (overlapping), the variation display and the small display of the third symbol executed in response to the special symbol variation The variable display of the fourth symbol executed in the area Dm1 is continuously executed even during the normal symbol game.

  In addition, the waiting area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds includes a special number indicating the number of second special symbol holding memories (special figure 2 holding) acquired based on the ball entering the second entrance 640. In FIG. 2, the reserved symbol (indicated by a black circle in the figure) is larger than the special figure 1 reserved symbol (indicated by a white circle in the figure) indicating the number of the reserved memories (special figure 1 pending) of the first special symbol that have been acquired. It is displayed preferentially (to the left of the waiting area Ds1b). In other words, the state shown in FIG. 232 (a) is a state after four or more balls have been entered into the second entrance 640 during the game per ordinary drawing, and the special figure 2 is held with the upper limit number. This shows a state after obtaining four pieces.

  In the present embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol, the special figure 2 reserved acquired later is acquired first. The special symbol lottery is executed prior to the reservation in FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the second special symbol lottery continuously with priority when the game per game is executed during the normal state and a plurality of special figure 2 holds are acquired. Therefore, it is possible to execute a dedicated effect with one period during which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed as an advantageous period (chance zone) advantageous to the player, and to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. it can.

  Next, the effect content in the chance zone in which the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed during the normal state will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 (b) to 234. FIG. 232 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the effect contents executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in FIG. 232 (b), when the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state, a comment of “entering a chance zone” is displayed above the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period which is set to a period until all special figure 2 reservations acquired during the normal state are consumed, and is basically from the start of the first second special symbol lottery (change). It is configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 until the last second special symbol lottery (change) is completed. As a result, the player can be informed clearly that the current period is the advantageous period.

  In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, when a jackpot is won in the chance zone, the character "" Probable GET high probability "" is displayed as a guide display mode for indicating that a probable change state can be acquired with a high probability. In addition, as will be described in detail later, during this chance zone, a pseudo-variation effect that makes it appear that a plurality of special symbol changes are executed during one special symbol change (second special symbol change) is performed. It is configured to run. Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 232 (a)) indicating the number of reserved symbols stored in the sub display area Ds is not displayed, and the small display area Ds11 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. In the small display area Ds12, the number of reserved special figure 2 (in the figure, the number of reserved special figure 2 is “2” indicating that the number of reserved special figure 1 is two). "3") indicating that the number is three is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (b), the display mode displayed in the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 is smaller than the display mode displayed in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 232 (a)) of the sub display area Ds. Since the player is configured to be difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special figures during the chance zone. Therefore, when the pseudo fluctuation effect is executed in the chance zone, it can be assumed that a plurality of special symbol lotteries (changes) are actually executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, the number of special figure reservations is displayed using a partial area (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12) of the main display area Dm. During the zone, the number of reserved special figures may not be notified to the player, or a special figure may be provided in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, an LED provided in the variable display unit 80). You may be comprised so that the figure reservation number may be alert | reported. Further, it may be configured so that the player cannot easily identify the number of special figure reservations. The display mode may be changed to a display mode in which the color can be changed. In such a configuration, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the number of special figure reservations, it is possible to prevent the current number of special figure reservations from being easily identified. Therefore, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (b), a character 1801 imitating a rabbit indicating that the second special symbol is currently changing is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. As described above, the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) and the ordinary symbol lottery (fluctuation) are performed in parallel (overlapping), so that the period in which the game per regular symbol is being executed is the first special symbol lottery. There is a case where it overlaps during the fluctuation period (see FIG. 232 (a)) and a case where it does not overlap. In the case where the game per common symbol is executed while overlapping with the period during which the first special symbol fluctuates, the second special symbol lottery is executed after the running of the first special symbol fluctuating, and the first special symbol lottery is executed. If it does not overlap during the fluctuation period, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the per-figure game (during the per-figure game). In other words, the execution timing of the second special symbol lottery is different depending on the variation state of the first special symbol when the game per ordinary game is executed, and the currently executed special symbol variation is changed to the first special symbol. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to accurately determine whether the change is the change or the second special symbol change.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change is executed, the character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm. It is possible to notify the player of the first special symbol change or the second special symbol change in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 233 (a) to 234, among the variable effects executed in the chance zone, the effect contents of the pseudo variable effect (special variable effect) will be described. FIG. 233 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special fluctuation effect, and FIG. 233 (b) acquires special figure 2 suspension. FIG. 234 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is restarted in a special fluctuation effect executed in a state where the special figure 2 is not held. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display screen when the 3rd symbol restarts in the special fluctuation effect performed in a state.

  Here, the effect contents of the special fluctuation effect (pseudo fluctuation effect) will be described. This special fluctuation effect is a fluctuation effect in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) during one fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation and then restarted. This is a pseudo fluctuation effect that makes it seem that the pattern fluctuation has been executed. First, the reach effect is executed using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special fluctuation effect, and at the end timing of the first half period, as shown in FIG. ), The third symbol is tentatively stopped (in the figure, the third symbol is indicated by a wavy line). At this timing, that is, at the end timing of the first half period of the special fluctuation effect, the character “sorry” indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and a chance is given to the player. The first special symbol lottery executed during the zone is configured to be considered to have missed. In other words, in the first half period of the special fluctuation effect, the special first effect in which the reach effect having the expectation for the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) with the effect result indicating the deviation is executed.

  Thereafter, in the latter half period of the special fluctuation effect, a fluctuation effect (special latter effect) for restarting the temporarily stopped third symbol is executed. This special second half effect is configured so that the effect mode is changed according to the number of reserved special figure 2 reservations. For example, in a state where the special figure 2 reservation is secured, FIG. As shown, the special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol change in the chance zone, and in the state where the special figure 2 reservation is not secured, the chance zone ends as shown in FIG. After that, the special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the first special symbol change executed. That is, in the present embodiment, as the special variation effect, the type of the special symbol variation executed after the second special symbol variation being executed is ended is determined based on the number of reserved special symbols, and the effect corresponding to the determination result is provided. The effect mode of the special second-stage effect is set in the mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more strongly think that a plurality of special symbol changes have been executed during one second special symbol change.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if the special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol change in the chance zone (see FIG. 233 (b)), the acquired special figure 2 reserved number The number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the latter half of the period is made different. Although the detailed description is omitted, when neither the special figure 2 reservation nor the special figure 1 reservation is secured when the special fluctuation effect is executed, the third symbol shown in FIG. Without performing the temporary stop display of the second special symbol change, a single variable effect (a variable effect that does not cause the third symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed) by using the entire variable period of the second special symbol change. Make up. As a result, the above-described special fluctuation effect is executed only in a state where the number of special figure reservations is secured, so that a plurality of special symbol fluctuations are executed during one second special symbol fluctuation. It can make you think strongly.

  In addition, only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, an effect mode is set in which the number of temporary stops of the third symbol executed during the latter half of the period is different from the number of reserved special symbols 2 reserved. It is configured to be. Therefore, for example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped five or more times, it is possible to give the player the expectation that the second special symbol variation being executed is a big hit. Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case where the third symbol is temporarily stopped and the case where the third symbol is stopped and displayed. hard. Therefore, the number of times of temporary stop display and the number of times of stop display are mixed, and it is assumed that the temporary stop display is performed five times or more. Nevertheless, it can be assumed that the number of times of temporary stop display has not reached five, and it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting the effect result.

  It should be noted that other configurations may be used as the effect form of the special fluctuation effect. For example, in order to allow the player to easily grasp the number of times of the third symbol temporarily stopped and displayed during one second special symbol change. May be configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol displayed temporarily during the second special symbol change is displayed. At least a part (for example, the background color, the effect of the third symbol, and the like) of the special variation effect may be configured to be changed stepwise according to the number of times. In addition, a display mode (for example, the first time and the second time) indicating the number of times of the temporary stop display may be displayed at a timing when the temporarily stopped third symbol is displayed again.

  As shown in FIG. 234, when the special fluctuation effect is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reservation is not secured, the character “CHANCE ZONE END” is sub-displayed as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended. An effect mode in which the variation display of the third symbol displayed in the area Ds and executed in the main display area Dm is a variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (variation display in which the third symbol varies in the horizontal direction). Is performed as a special second half effect, so that after the player is made to think that the chance zone has ended, the effect result of the special variable effect, that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. . Therefore, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the effect contents in the state where the probable change state is set will be described. FIG. 235 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents when the first special symbol change is executed in a state where the probable change state is set, and FIG. 235 (b) It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the effect content when the 2nd special symbol change is performed in the state where the probable change state is set.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed when a probable change state (a special symbol high probability state, a normal symbol high probability state) is set. Then, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a probability change state is set with a high probability (the probability change jackpot game in which the ball can easily flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game is always executed) ). The probable change state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

  In other words, once the probability change state is set, the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/50) until the predetermined number (50 times) of the special symbol lottery is executed. ), So that the probability change state can be looped with a high probability as long as winning. Therefore, the player who is executing the game in the probable change state can be motivated to play the game so as to win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery as soon as possible.

  On the other hand, even in the state in which the probability change state is set, for example, the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state wins the probability change jackpot, and immediately after the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, that is, In the state where the probable change state is set, the first special symbol lottery may be executed when the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired and the special figure 1 reservation is acquired. In the present embodiment, as described above, if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability change jackpot game is executed at a rate of 100%, whereas if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, It is configured such that the probability jackpot game is executed at a rate of 50%, and the normal jackpot game is executed at the remaining 50%. In other words, even if the probable change state is set, if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the probable change state may not be able to be looped.

  In the case where the jackpot has been won in the first special symbol lottery in the probable change state as described above, if the player determines early that the won jackpot is the jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the normal jackpot game is executed. In the present embodiment, the third design corresponding to the probability change jackpot is used as a variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed during the probability change state, since the problem that the player's willingness to play decreases. A double-reach effect, which is a variable effect in which a (representing identification information with an odd number) and a third symbol (identification information with an even number) normally corresponding to a jackpot, simultaneously enters a reach state, is executed. It is configured to be easy. More specifically, when the first special symbol lottery executed during the probable change state wins the normal jackpot, the above-described double reach effect is always executed (FIG. 235 (a)). reference).

  Thereby, when the first special symbol lottery executed during the probable change state wins the normal jackpot, only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) assigned to the normal jackpot is in the reach state. The effect can be prevented from being executed, and it can be suppressed that the player is predicted in advance to win a normal jackpot during the fluctuation period of the special symbol.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), in the present embodiment, when the probable change state is set, the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed in the same manner as in the chance zone described above, and The special figure reservation number is configured to be difficult to grasp. Then, above the main display area Dm, a character string “super chance mode” is displayed as a display mode for notifying the player that the current state is in the probable change state.

  Here, in the super chance mode, the double symbol (the third symbol (identification information numbered with 1) corresponding to the probability change jackpot) shown in FIG. 235 (a) and the third symbol (the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot) shown in FIG. In the case where the identification information with the number 2) and the double-reach effect that is a fluctuation effect that simultaneously reaches the reach state are executed, it is determined that the special symbol change being executed is the first special symbol change. In this embodiment, the double reach effect shown in FIG. 235 (a) can be executed even in the variable effect executed in response to the second special symbol change because there is a possibility that the player may be easily grasped by the player. It is composed. In other words, in the case of the jackpot winning, the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variable jackpot game is always executed is configured to be able to execute the double reach effect using the third symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot. ing.

  With this configuration, even if the double-reach effect shown in FIG. 235 (a) is executed, it is determined whether the special symbol variation being executed is the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily determine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a double-reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the third symbol, which is in the reach state at the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one round, is As shown in FIG. 235 (b), an effect of changing to a third symbol (identification information with a number of 1 and identification information with a number of 9) corresponding to a probability change jackpot (to a probability change double reach). Promotion effect) is executed.

  With such a configuration, when the special symbol lottery being executed is a big hit, the player can be notified in advance that the probability change big hit game will be executed. In addition, even if a double-reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the player is expected to be promoted to a probable double reach in the middle of the process, and to perform the game while expecting the player. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the currently-running double-reach production to a probable double-reach production, a case where the variation mode of the middle symbol Z2 is a predetermined mode (one lap has elapsed) is set. The variable condition to be satisfied is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a third symbol corresponding to the reach state (the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot) is displayed as the third symbol variably displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. A variable condition that is satisfied when the symbol passes through the reach effective line may be set, or the variable condition that is satisfied when the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) operable by the player is a specific operation result. You may comprise so that a variable condition may be set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the type of the third symbol in the reach state is changed when the variable condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that the number of symbols may be increased. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 235 (a), blank symbols (indicated by triangles in the figure) are deleted, and “3.2.1” is displayed in order from the left as an upper symbol row Z1. Then, a triple reach effect in which “1.2.3” is displayed in order from the left as the lower symbol column Z3 may be executed. Even in the case of such a configuration, the triple reach production can increase the number of reach of the third symbol corresponding to the probability change jackpot than the double reach production, so the special symbol lottery in this special symbol lottery. Can be visually notified to the player that the possibility of winning is high.

  In addition, the above-mentioned technical idea may be applied to the fluctuation effect performed during the normal state. For example, only the third symbol (identification information with even-numbered numbers) corresponding to the normal jackpot is in the reach state. When the variable condition is satisfied during the normal single-reach production, the type of the third symbol in the reach state may be switched to the type of the third symbol corresponding to the probability change jackpot, or the third symbol in the reach state May be configured to increase the number. This allows the player to play a game while expecting a more advantageous effect to be provided to the player until the variable effect ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the effect content performed during the jackpot ending period in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 236 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game, and FIG. 236 (b) is an ending of the probable jackpot game. FIG. 236 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the period, and FIG. 236 (c) is a display mode displayed in the second half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game FIG. 236 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display mode displayed in the latter half of the ending period of the probability-change jackpot game. .

  In the present embodiment, in a jackpot game (probably variable jackpot game) in which a probable change state that is an advantageous game state for a player is easily set, a jackpot game (probably a jackpot game) in which a probable change state that is an advantageous game state for a player is difficult to be set. ), The jackpot ending period is set longer. Specifically, it is stipulated that 17 seconds is set as the jackpot ending period in the probability change jackpot and 15 seconds is set as the jackpot ending period in the normal jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to easily notify the player that the probable change state is set during the ending period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, even if the probability-change jackpot game is executed, the probability-change state is not set unless the ball that has won the V-prize device 2650 flows down to the specific gate. I have. Therefore, if the ball cannot be flowed down to the specific gate during the probability-change jackpot game, the probability-change state is not set after the probability-change jackpot game ends, and the time-saving state (special symbol A low probability state, a normal symbol high probability state) are set.

  In this case, if the notification effect indicating that the probability change state is set during the ending period of the probability change jackpot game is executed, the effect content of the notification effect and the actually set game state differ, and the player There was a problem of giving dissatisfaction. Furthermore, when the presentation mode of the notification effect executed in the ending period of the probability change jackpot game (17 seconds) is switched to the presentation mode of the notification effect executed in the ending period of the normal jackpot game (15 seconds), There is a problem that the length of the actual ending period is different from the length of the production period of the notification effect, so that a notification effect that is uncomfortable for the player is executed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a uniform period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of the big hit game. I have. And it is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect of the notification effect performed in a latter half period may be determined according to the game state set after a big hit game is over.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236, when the normal jackpot game is executed, the time reduction state is set for the first half period (8 seconds) as the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period. When the effect mode (refer to FIG. 236 (a)) in which the character “Chance Mode 100 times” indicating that the game is performed is executed, and then, in the latter half period (7 seconds), a jackpot is won during the time saving state. (If a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery), an effect mode (FIG. 236 (c)) in which characters of “hit and super chance GET during the chance mode” are displayed as a game guidance mode for indicating that the probability change state is likely to be set ) Is performed.

  On the other hand, when the probability change jackpot game is executed, the “super chance mode 100” suggesting that the probability change state is set for the first half period (10 seconds) as a notification effect performed during the jackpot ending period. The effect mode (see FIG. 236 (b)) in which the characters "times" are displayed is executed, and then, during the latter half of the period (7 seconds), "card picking" is performed as an alert mode that is not directly related to the game content. The effect mode (see FIG. 236 (d)) in which the character "Please note forgetting" is displayed is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode during the above-described jackpot ending period is configured to be set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. Thereby, during the jackpot game in which various control processes are executed, it is not necessary to execute the process for determining the presentation mode of the notification effect every time, so the processing load of the control process executed during the jackpot game is reduced. Can be done.

  Here, a case will be described in which a ball cannot be caused to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game, despite the fact that the jackpot game has been executed. In this case, in the display mode shown in FIG. 236 (b), the process of hiding the character “super” and the notification effect executed in the second half period (7 seconds) of the big hit ending period are performed in the normal hit mode. A process of switching to the notification effect (see FIG. 236 (c)) executed in the second half (7 seconds) of the ending period of the game is executed.

  More specifically, as a display mode shown in FIG. 236 (a), a display layer (display hierarchy) in which the character “super” is displayed and a display layer (display) in which the character “chance mode 100 times” are displayed Display layer (display hierarchy) based on the result of determining whether or not the ball was able to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game. The configuration is such that the presence or absence of an instruction can be switched. This makes it possible to execute a notification effect corresponding to the determination result as to whether or not the ball was able to flow down to the specific gate during the big hit game by a simple control process. Furthermore, in the period set with the same length, that is, the latter half of the jackpot ending period, the effect mode is switched, so that the effect mode of the notification effect can be switched without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the present embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is different depending on the type of the jackpot, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be unified for all jackpot types without being limited to this. In the present embodiment, the second half of the jackpot ending period is set as a period having the same length for all jackpot types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may become the same length with respect to a kind. Further, when there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all the jackpot types. For example, the first half period of the jackpot is the same for jackpot type A and jackpot type B. The big hit type B and the big hit type C may be configured so that the latter half period of the big hit has the same length.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the ending period having a different length is set according to the type of the jackpot that has been won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the length of the ending period is set according to the game result during the jackpot game. It may be configured so that the lengths are different.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the relationship between the variation pattern of the special symbol selected in the present embodiment and the effect mode to be executed will be described. FIG. 237 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a flow of an effect when a fluctuation pattern in which a non-reach fluctuation effect is executed is set as the fluctuation effect of the third symbol, and FIG. 237 (b) It is the schematic diagram which showed the flow of the effect when the fluctuation pattern in which the reach fluctuation effect is performed is set as the fluctuation effect of the third symbol.

  Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 242, in the present embodiment, a variation pattern obtained by adding the basic time and the addition time is used as a variation pattern (variation time) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. Stipulates. Then, the period corresponding to the basic time is set as a common fluctuation pattern, and the period corresponding to the addition time is set as a specific fluctuation pattern.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as the effect of the third symbol change performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to show the result of the special symbol lottery, the third symbol is displayed after the reach state is displayed. The period until the stop display is made varies depending on the type of the third symbol in the reach state. The third symbol corresponding to the time set as the addition time is set as the third symbol in the reach state. With this configuration, the third symbol variation effect (the third symbol variation effect executed in correspondence with the basic time) performed during a predetermined period after the third symbol starts to vary is common. Can be changed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), in the case of the non-reach fluctuation effect, since the addition time is not set, the common fluctuation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the third symbol is set. The upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating effect (for example, a timing of 5 seconds), and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped one second later after the reach state does not occur on the activated line. Stop display is performed in the display mode, and two seconds later, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order. Thereafter, after a stop display period (determination time) of one second, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is definitely displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 237 (b), when the reach fluctuation effect is executed, a basic time (30 seconds) is set, and as a common fluctuation pattern of 30 seconds, until 5 seconds elapse from the reach state. Is set. That is, the effect form from the reaching state to the middle symbol row Z2 making one round is set as the common variation pattern. Thereafter, an effect mode (reach pattern, stop symbol) according to the addition time is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 238, description will be given of an effect mode of the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. FIG. 238 (a) shows the flow of the effect of the ending period for the normal jackpot, FIG. 238 (b) shows the flow of the ending period for the jackpot, and FIG. 238 (c) shows the ball during the jackpot game. It shows a flow when a specific gate does not flow down.

  As shown in FIG. 238, in the present embodiment, the ending period (ED period) is different between the normal jackpot and the probable jackpot, so that the ED period of 15 seconds for the normal jackpot and 17 seconds for the probable jackpot is set. Make up. Then, the ending display mode divided into the first half period and the second half period is displayed (see FIG. 236).

  In the present embodiment, at the start timing of the jackpot game, an effect mode in the ending period is set, and it is determined whether or not a V prize has been made during the jackpot period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to the specific gate) in the ending period ( The determination is made at the start timing of the (ED period), and the ending display mode is switched based on the determination result.

<Electrical Configuration in Tenth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 245. The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment in that a part of the ROM 202, a part of the RAM 203, and a sound lamp control provided in the main control device 110 are provided. The difference is that a part of the ROM 222 and a part of the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 are changed, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 242. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 239 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 239 (a), the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the above-described fourth embodiment (see FIG. 116) in that the special symbol big hit random number 10 table 202ja is substituted for the first random number table 202a. Is replaced with a variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb instead of the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc, a common random number 10 table 202jc instead of the second random number table 202b, and a jackpot type selection 10 table instead of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db. The difference is that the 202jd is provided and the small hit random number table 202de is deleted. Although not shown, the tenth embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that only the update range is changed in place of the first random number counter C1 and the other special hits having the same function are performed. The random number counter C1 (update range "0-999") is replaced with the second random number counter C2, and only the update range is changed. Otherwise, the ordinary random number counter C5 (update range "0-299") having the same function. ) Is provided. The other configurations are the same, and therefore are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted. As described above, the names of the various counters are partially changed, but since the basic functions are the same, various counters referred to in the detailed description and various data tables defined in the ROM 202 are used. Is omitted.

  First, the special symbol jackpot random number 10 table 202ja will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 240A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol big hit random number 10 table 202ja. This special symbol big hit random number 10 table 202ja is determined to be a hit according to the symbol type of the special symbol and the probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23B). The difference is that the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is defined.

  Specifically, regardless of the type of the special symbol for which the special symbol lottery has been executed (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), if the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the big hit determination value (special The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is defined as a range of "0 to 4" as a value determined to be a big hit in the symbol lottery, and if the special symbol high probability state is set, the special hit is determined as the big hit determination value. The range of the value “0 to 19” of the random number counter C1 is defined. That is, in the tenth embodiment, even if a special symbol lottery of any type is executed in a state where the special symbol low-probability state is set, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/200 and the special symbol is selected. Even if a special symbol lottery of any type is executed in a normal state in which the high probability state is set, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/50. In the present embodiment, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit for each special symbol type is commonly defined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The value of the random number counter C1 may be defined as a jackpot determination value, or the number of values of the special hit random number counter C1 serving as a jackpot determination value may be made different for each special symbol type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the value (“0 to 4”) of the special hit random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit is set to the high of the special symbol. Even when the probability state is set, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit is configured. With this configuration, the first prefetching process (see S1775 in FIG. 135) executed in the start winning process 4 (see S152 in FIG. 134) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the second prefetching In the process (see S1764 in FIG. 136), for example, when the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is acquired, a special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information is executed. It is possible to predict in advance that the winning information includes the information for winning the jackpot without executing the process of determining (predicting) the gaming state at a certain point in time. In addition, without being limited to this, at least a part or all of the value of the special hit random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is specially controlled so as not to be determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. The contents of the symbol big hit random number table 202ja may be defined. With this configuration, when the same special hit random number counter C1 is obtained, the gaming state set when the big hit determination is performed using the obtained value of the special hit random number counter C1. The determination result can be made different according to. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for an illegal act of acquiring the value of the specific special random number counter C1 to be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 240 (b), the contents defined in the ordinary random number 10 table 202jc will be described. FIG. 240 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ordinary random number 10 table 202jc. As shown in FIG. 240 (b), if the ordinary symbol random number counter C5 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the acquired ordinary random number counter C5 falls within the range of "0 to 2". When the normal symbol is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol random number counter C5 defines the ordinary symbol hit in a range of “0 to 149”.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the low probability. As a result, it is possible to make the execution probability of the game per ordinary symbol different between the normal state, which is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the probable state, which is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the time reduction state.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd. Like the big hit type selection table 202d in the first embodiment, the big hit type selection 10 table 202jd is a data table in which determination values for determining the big hit type are stored for each special symbol type.

  As shown in FIG. 241 (a), the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd in the tenth embodiment includes a special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1 referred to when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. A special figure 2 big hit 10 table 202jd2 which is referred to when a big hit is won in the 2 special symbol lottery is defined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 241 (b), the contents specified in the special figure 1 big hit 10 table 202jd1 will be described. FIG. 241 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 big hit 10 table 202jd1. The special figure 1 big hit 10 table 202jd1 is a data table which is referred to when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery and a big hit type is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 241 (b), the special figure 1 big hit 10 table 202jd1 in the tenth embodiment includes "big hit A" to "big hit B" as the big hit types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The two jackpot types are defined.

  Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot type for the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 (update range “0 to 99”) is “0 to 49”. "Big hit A" is defined in association with this. The "big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 7 rounds, and the probability change jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is "100" after the jackpot game is completed, and the value of the probability change counter 203ja Is a jackpot type in which “50” is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the probability change jackpot game (when not in V), the jackpot After the game ends, “0” is set to the value of the probability change counter 203ja. Further, “big hit A” specifies that “17 seconds” is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, there are 50 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit A", so the first special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the “jackpot A” is determined is 50% (50/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 241 (b), "big hit B" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2 of "50 to 99". The "big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 7 rounds and the normal big hit game is executed. After the big hit game is over, the value of the time saving counter 203h is "100", and the value of the probability change counter 203ja is Is a jackpot type in which "0" is set to "." Further, in the "big hit B", it is defined that "15 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B” is 50, so that the first special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the “jackpot B” is determined is 50% (50/100).

  That is, the two jackpot types (jackpot A and jackpot B) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery have the same number of rounds of jackpot games, but the number of rounds in the V prize device 2650 during the jackpot game. Are different from each other in the ease with which the ball can pass through the specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the "big hit A" than the "big hit B". Is configured to execute a jackpot game that is easy to flow down to a specific gate. Therefore, "big hit A" becomes a big hit type which is more advantageous than "big hit B".

  Next, with reference to FIG. 241 (c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 big hit 10 table 202jd2 will be described. FIG. 241 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 big hit 10 table 202jd2. The special figure 2 big hit 10 table 202jd2 is a data table which is referred to when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery and a big hit type is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 241 (c), the special figure 2 big hit 10 table 202jd2 in the tenth embodiment includes "big hit C" to "big hit E" as the big hit types of the second special symbol (special figure 2). The three jackpot types are defined.

  Specifically, as the big hit type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 29”, and “big hit C” is defined as the big hit type in association with each other. Have been. The “big hit C” is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 4 and the probability change jackpot game is executed. After the big hit game ends, “100” is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, and the value of the probability change counter 203ja. Is a jackpot type in which “50” is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the probability change jackpot game (when not in V), the jackpot After the game ends, “0” is set to the value of the probability change counter 203ja. Further, in the "big hit C", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the special hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit C” is 30. When a big hit occurs, the rate at which the “big hit C” is determined is 30% (30/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (c), "big hit D" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the range of "30 to 69". The "big hit D" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 7 rounds, and the probability change jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is "100" after the jackpot game is completed, and the value of the probability change counter 203ja Is a jackpot type in which “50” is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the probability change jackpot game (when not in V), the jackpot After the game ends, “0” is set to the value of the probability change counter 203ja. Further, in the "big hit D", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit D" is 40, so that the second special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the “jackpot C” is determined is 40% (40/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (c), "big hit E" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". The "big hit E" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds and the probability change big hit game is executed, and "100" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h after the big hit game is ended, and the value of the probability change counter 203ja Is a jackpot type in which “50” is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the probability change jackpot game (when not in V), the jackpot After the game ends, “0” is set to the value of the probability change counter 203ja. Further, in the "big hit E", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit E" is 30. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the “jackpot E” is determined is 30% (30/100).

  That is, the three jackpot types (jackpot C, jackpot D, and jackpot E) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery all execute the jackpot game, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game is The "big hit E" in which the most round games are executed is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player, and the "big hit A" is the jackpot type most disadvantageous to the player.

  As described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability change jackpot game is always executed, so that the probability change 50% of the first special symbol lottery is executed. In terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type is advantageous. In addition, in terms of the number of round games executed during the jackpot game, that is, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game, the maximum number that can be obtained is larger in the second special symbol lottery and the minimum number that can be obtained. Also specifies that the number of the second special symbol lottery is smaller. In addition, the number of prize balls that can be acquired on average is defined to be larger in the second special symbol lottery.

  Therefore, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls obtainable under the minimum condition, and the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous in other aspects. Note that, in the present embodiment, the jackpot types shown in FIG. 241 are defined. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and various types of jackpot types that can be set in the above-described embodiments may be used. The jackpot type may be configured to be settable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the contents of the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 242 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb. As shown in FIG. 242 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection 10 table 202jb includes a normal 10 table 202jb1 that is referred to when a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol fluctuation is selected in the state where the normal state is set, A probability change / time saving 10 table 202jb2 that is referred to when a change pattern of the special symbol change is selected in a state where the state or the time saving state is set is defined.

  First, the normal ten table 202jb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 242 (b). FIG. 242 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the normal ten table 202jb1. In the normal 10 table 202jb1, various fluctuation patterns are defined corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns. Specifically, the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit / failure determination result is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is “0 to 19”. In this case, a normal (reach) with a fluctuation time of 33 seconds to 42 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern. When this normal is determined, a combination command indicating any one of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 3 seconds to 12 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the addition time is configured in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds in accordance with the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. When the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0", the addition time is "3 seconds", when it is "1", the addition time is "3.5 seconds", and when it is "2", it is added. If the time is "4 seconds" or "3", the addition time is "4.5 seconds". If the time is "3", the addition time is "5 seconds". If the time is "4", the addition is performed. When the time is “5.5 seconds” and “5”, the addition time is “6 seconds”, and when the time is “6”, the addition time is “6.5 seconds” and “7”. Indicates that the addition time is “7 seconds”, if the addition time is “8”, the addition time is “7.5 seconds”, and if the addition time is “9 to 11”, the addition time is “8 seconds” or “12”. When the addition time is “8.5 seconds”, when the addition time is “13”, the addition time is “9 seconds”, and when the addition time is “14”, the addition time is “9.5 seconds”, “15”. ", The addition time is" 10 seconds ", if it is" 16 ", the addition time is" 10.5 seconds ", and if it is" 17 ", the addition time is" 11 seconds "," 18 ". ", The addition time is set to" 11.5 seconds ", and when it is" 19 ", the addition time is set to" 12 seconds ".

  When the command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and the command indicating the addition time (addition command) are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, information included in the basic command is included. , A fluctuation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the information, and a reach symbol (type of the third symbol) is set based on information included in the addition command. Accordingly, the type of the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 that can be visually recognized first by the player in the reach state is always a specific third symbol (in the present embodiment, the third symbol having the number 1 added thereto). Even if it is configured so as to be a symbol, the reach effect can be executed in various third symbol types without changing the period from the execution of the variable effect to the reaching state.

  When the value of the obtained change type selection counter CS1 is “20 to 169”, a super (reach) with a change time of 43 seconds to 52 seconds is defined as a change pattern. When the supermarket is determined, a combination command indicating any one of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 13 seconds to 22 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. In this embodiment, the addition time is configured in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds in accordance with the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1, and the content is the same as the above-described normal pattern. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effect form of the reach effect is configured to be variable in accordance with the information (number of seconds) included in the addition command. Specifically, the number of seconds included in the addition command is “ In the case of "3 seconds to 12 seconds", the normal reach effect (the effect that is stopped and displayed after the middle symbol sequence Z2 fluctuates about one turn), and in the case of "13 seconds to 22 seconds", the super reach effect (the middle symbol sequence An effect that is stopped and displayed after Z2 fluctuates about two turns) is executed.

  With such a configuration, for example, during the first predetermined period, the variable effect is executed in the same effect mode, and thereafter, in the case of performing the variable effect in which the effect mode branches, the same effect mode is executed. It is possible to set a period based on a basic command (a command including information indicating a basic time) and to set a fluctuation effect after branching based on an addition command (a command including information indicating an additional time). . Therefore, for example, even when the entire fluctuation time is the same, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily change the fluctuation time only by changing the ratio of the basic time and the ratio of the addition time. A fluctuating effect can be set.

  In this embodiment, the basic time (30 seconds) when the normal reach is executed and the basic time (30 seconds) when the super reach is executed are the same, and the fluctuation time set as the addition time is set. According to the length of the reach effect is configured to be variable, but without being limited to this, the basic time for normal reach is 30 seconds, the basic time for super reach is 40 seconds, Alternatively, the addition time may be selected from the range of "3 to 12 seconds" only to determine the type of the third symbol.

  Next, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is “170 to 198”, SP (reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 55 seconds and an addition time of 35 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Here, when the SP is determined, the effect in which the fluctuation effect of the third symbol once in the reach state is switched to another fluctuation effect is executed. Even if it is configured such that the type of the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 in which the can be visually recognized is always a specific third symbol (the third symbol with the numeral 1 in this embodiment), Without giving a sense of incongruity, the display order of the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 can be changed in correspondence with the third symbol to be finally stopped during the change, so that, as in the above-described normal and supermarkets, There is no need to change the addition time and set the type of the third symbol in the reach state.

  Similarly, in the case where the symbol type is the special figure 1 and the result of the determination as to whether or not the pattern is out of order, if the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is “0 to 179”, the variation time is 8 seconds as the variation pattern. Departure is specified. When this deviation is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 8 seconds and an addition time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when the deviation is determined, a fluctuation effect in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the deviation without being in the reach state is executed as the fluctuation effect of the third symbol. Therefore, there is no need to set the addition time.

  When the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is “180 to 198”, the variation pattern is defined as a variation out of reach of 33 seconds to 52 seconds. When the deviation from the reach is determined, a command of a combination indicating any of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 3 seconds to 22 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. In this embodiment, the addition time is configured in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds in accordance with the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1, and the content is the same as the above-described normal pattern. Therefore, detailed description is omitted. That is, even when the lottery result is out of order, the same variation pattern command is set as in the case where the lottery result is a hit. If the lottery result is out of order, it is necessary to set the type of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed so that the third symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is a combination other than the winning combination. On the side of the lamp control device 113, a correction process is performed so that the third symbol shifted by one from the setting content of the third symbol type based on the addition command referred to when winning is won. Thus, when the out-of-reach effect is executed, it is possible to easily set an effect mode in which the third symbol is stop-displayed (out-of-stop display) in the vicinity of the third symbol to be a big hit combination.

  On the other hand, when the type of the special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is “0 to 99”. In this case, a special reach having a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern. When the special reach is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds and an addition time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. When the value of the obtained change type selection counter CS1 is “100 to 198”, a special reach with a change time of 10 seconds is defined as a change pattern. When this special reach is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds and an addition time of 0 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the normal state is set, the fluctuation in the chance zone is performed as described above with reference to FIGS. The effect is configured to be performed. When the command (basic command) indicating the basic time (10 seconds) and the command (addition command) indicating the additional time (30 seconds) are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the commands are included in the basic command. A fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation) is set based on information to be set, and a special reach is set based on information included in the addition command. More specifically, when a basic command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds is notified as a variation pattern command of the second special symbol in a state where the normal state is set, as shown in FIG. An effect mode of a special fluctuation effect in which the third symbol fluctuates in the vertical direction is set. Then, at the timing when the basic time elapses, an effect mode is set in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) as shown in FIG. 233 (a). If the addition command indicating the addition time of 0 second has been received (if the fluctuation pattern is a special deviation), the third symbol is displayed as it is and the fluctuation effect ends.

  On the other hand, when the addition command indicating the addition time of 30 seconds has been received (when the variation pattern is the special reach), the third temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 233 (b) and FIG. 234. A fluctuation effect in which the symbol is restarted is set. The detailed effect form of the variable effect in which the temporarily stopped third symbol is restarted will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 239 (b) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 239 (b), the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, and a normal symbol holding ball storage area. 203dc, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a game state storage area 203g, a time reduction counter 203h, a probability change counter 203ja, a jackpot start flag 203jb, and a jackpot Medium flag 203jcc, probable change setting flag 203jd, probable change pass counter 203je, winning number counter 203jf, remaining ball timer flag 203jg, remaining ball timer 203jh, probable change valid flag 203ji, probable change valid timer 203jj, discharge number counter 203jk, And at least a memory area 203Z.

  Of the various configurations of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment, some of the configurations having the same names as those of the above-described embodiments are denoted by different reference numerals for convenience of description. Are the same, and the detailed description is omitted, even if the reference numerals are different, they have the same contents.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a special random number counter C1 and a special hit type counter C2. , And the respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in main controller 110, the values of counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present control example, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, data is shifted only for holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db has four holding areas, like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, each counter value acquired based on the winning winning in the second entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter value and the like are the same as those in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, and thus a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas stores an ordinary winning random number counter C5. More specifically, the value of the counter C5 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to first holding area). Of the vacant areas (four areas), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the lottery for the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C5 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that it is the same as the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db. Then, a shift process is performed to pack the winning data stored in the other reserved areas into the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. Are incremented by one. On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol is changed) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command. The reserved ball count command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203dd is changed.

  Each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 displays the variable display retained in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of retained balls can be obtained. As a result, the number of spheres of variation display that is managed by the first special symbol retention sphere number counter 223c1 of the voice lamp control device 113 increases the actual variation display that is suspended in the main control device 110 due to noise or the like. Even if the number of balls has deviated from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203de is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the second entrance 640 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is set to zero, and the maximum value of 4 is set every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of suspended display balls increases. Are incremented by one. On the other hand, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203de is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed. The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d counts up to four times the number of holding balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to. The ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d has the same contents as the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d used in the above-described first embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The probability change counter 203ja is a counter for indicating a state in which the special symbol high-probability state is set, and a value corresponding to a case where the special symbol high-probability state is set is set. After the jackpot game ends, a value corresponding to the won jackpot type is set in the probability change counter 203ja (see S2602 in FIG. 253). And when the big hit game is won, it is cleared to 0. In addition, when the value of the probability change counter 203ja is larger than 0, that is, in a state where the special symbol high probability state is set, the value is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol change is stopped and displayed (S622 in FIG. 248). reference).

  In this embodiment, when the special symbol high probability state is set, the value of the probability change counter 203ja is set, and the value of the probability change counter 203ja is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (fluctuation). When the value of becomes zero, the probable change state ends and shifts to the time saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special symbol is executed until the next big hit game is executed. May be configured to continue. In this case, the value of the probability change counter 203ja may be set to “10000”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a condition for terminating the probability change state, that is, a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203ja, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is subtracted based on the number of special symbol lotteries (changes). Although only the condition is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the end condition that can be satisfied by the processing content of various processes executed by main controller 110 is satisfied, the value of positive change counter 203ja is subtracted. May be configured. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special out-of-order lottery), Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning for a special public figure), the value of the probability change counter 203ja may be subtracted, or the ball may enter a specific entrance (for example, The value of the probability change counter 203ja may be subtracted based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or the like.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the probability change counter 203ja is configured to be decremented by one, but a plurality of values of the probability change counter 203ja are grouped (for example, 2) according to the type of the end condition that is satisfied. The subtraction may be performed, or the subtraction may be performed such that the value of the probability change counter 203ja becomes “0” regardless of the current value of the probability change counter 203ja. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the probable change state will continue, and to interest the player in the game in the probable change state.

  Further, the condition for terminating the probable change state may be changed according to the content of the condition for setting the probable change state (big hit type). Thereby, not only can the player execute the jackpot game, but also the player can be interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  The jackpot start flag 203jb is a flag indicating whether to start a jackpot. If the big hit start flag 203jb is on, it means that it is the time to start the big hit, and if it is off, it means that it is not the timing to start the big hit. The big hit start flag 203jb is set to ON when it is time to end the variable display indicating the big hit. The jackpot start flag 203jb is set to off when the start of the jackpot is set (see S2403 in FIG. 251).

  The big hit flag 203jc is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit (special game state) is being performed. If the big hit flag 203jc is on, it means that a big hit is being made, and if it is off, it means that there is no big hit. The big hit flag 203jc becomes a big hit by a special symbol lottery, and is set to ON at the start of the big hit (special game state) (see S2403 in FIG. 251). Also, it is set to off at the end of the big hit (special game state) (see S2605 in FIG. 253). Then, in the special symbol variation process 10 (see FIG. 247), it is determined whether or not a big hit is being made by referring to the big hit flag 203jc (see S601 in FIG. 247).

  The probability change setting flag 203jd is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability variation state after the jackpot game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probable change state is determined by determining whether the ball is at a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game. It is determined by whether or not the ball has entered (flowed down). Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (flowed down) the specific gate (passing through the certain change switch provided in the specific gate), the certain change setting flag 203jd is set to ON (S2715 in FIG. 254). . On the other hand, the probability change setting flag 203jd is turned off at the end of the jackpot (see S2605 in FIG. 253). Note that the probability change setting flag 203jd is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 203jd is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the power has passed through the probability change switch before the power is turned off. If it is determined that the power has passed, the probability change setting flag 203jd is determined. May be configured to be officially set to ON and return. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the power has passed through the probable variable switch before the power is turned off, based on whether or not a probable variable passage counter 203m described later is a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by judging whether or not the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203jd while the power is off. it can.

  The probability change passage counter 203je is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the probability change switch (flowed down the specific gate) in one round of the jackpot game (five rounds in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all of the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 2650a of the V winning device 2650 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probable variable passage counter 203je and the discharge number counter 203jk described later. The probability variable passage counter 203je is updated by being incremented by one each time the ball passes through the probability variable switch (flows down a specific gate). In addition, after performing a process of determining whether or not the number of balls won in the V winning device 2650 matches the number of ejected balls, the initial value is reset to “0”. It should be noted that the probability change passage counter 203je is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203jf is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 2650a of the V winning device 2650 in one round in the jackpot game, and it is determined that the winning in the specific winning opening 2650a has been detected. Based on this, it is updated by being added one by one. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the V winning device 2650 (the value of the winning number counter 203jf) and the number of dischargeds (the total value of the number-of-discharging counter 203jk and the positive variable passing counter 203je) are reduced by one. After it is determined whether or not they match, it is reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203jf is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203jg is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball throwing period after the end of one round and the specific winning opening 2650a is closed. If the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to ON, it means that the ball is out of the ball. While the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203r described later is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203r is a counter for determining a time since the specific winning opening 2650a is closed, and determines whether or not a time necessary for discharging the game ball in the V winning device 2650 has elapsed. It is a counter for.

  The remaining ball timer 203jh is a time required for a ball won in the V winning device 2650 to be discharged when the specific winning opening 2650a of the V winning device 2650 is closed after one preset round is completed. Is a counter for determining whether has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the winning ball to be discharged to the V winning device 2650 is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is previously set to the remaining ball timer 203jh. Is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203jh (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the V-winning device 2650 and the number of dischargeds match. You. If they do not match, an error command is set and that effect is reported. Therefore, it can be notified early that the game ball is clogged in the V winning device 2650.

  If the winning number does not match the discharge number, a dedicated flag is set on. If the flag is on, the probable change setting flag 203jd is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probable change switch. May not be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress improper assignment of the probable change state.

  The probable change valid flag 203ji indicates that the game ball has passed through the probable change switch (entered the V region) after the distributing member has been switched to an arrangement in which the ball cannot be distributed to a specific gate, and the ball is passed (entered). This flag is used to determine whether or not the ball is valid. If the probability change valid flag 203ji is set to ON, it indicates that the game ball passes through the probability change switch during a normal period.

  The probable change valid timer 203jj is a counter for counting the time since the above-described probable change valid flag 203ji was set to ON. After the V-prong is switched to the non-V-side arrangement, the period required for normal passage through the probabilistic switch can be determined by the probable change valid timer 203jj. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has reached the V bonus item to pass through the probability change switch is 0.3 second. The upper limit value of the probability change valid timer 203jj is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds. Even after passing through the probability change switch, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to pass.

  As a result, the game ball is illegally entered into the V region and passed through the probable change switch, the game ball is pushed up from below the probable change switch with a piano wire or the like, or is erroneously detected as passing the magnetic sensor by radio waves or the like. Damage caused by fraudulent activities.

  The discharge number counter 203jk is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203jk is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after it is determined that the number of balls winning the variable prize device 65 matches the number of discharges.

  Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 to 245. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, a normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja and a probable changing effect selection table 222jb are added to the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above, The difference is that the contents of the table 222a and the contents of the operation scenario table 222b are changed corresponding to the present embodiment. The details of the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a and the contents of the operation scenario table 222b will not be described in detail, but various values associated with the changes of the main control device 110 will be omitted. Is what it is.

  First, the contents of the normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja. The normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja shows the third symbol change when the change pattern with the addition time of 30 seconds is selected from the second special symbol change executed while the normal state is set. It is a data table that is referred to when selecting an effect mode, and is associated with a lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the second special symbol lottery, the number of special figure 2 reservations, the number of special figure 1 reservations, and the value of the effect counter 223f. Different production modes (production contents).

  In the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change is executed during the normal state, a common out-of-reach effect is executed in correspondence with the basic time (10 seconds) (see FIG. 233 (a)). The pseudo fluctuation effect (see FIGS. 233 (b) to 234) is executed during the addition time (30 seconds) as the effect content (effect mode) selected with reference to the normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja. It is composed.

  Specifically, when the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of special figure 2 reservations is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations changes to a range of “0 to 79”. "Pseudo 3 effects" is specified as a pattern, "special 2 effects" is specified as a variation pattern in the range of "80 to 99", and if the special figure 2 reservation number is 2, the special figure 1 reservation number is set. Regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the range of “0 to 99”, “pseudo 2 effect” as a variation pattern, and if the number of special figure 2 reservations is 1, regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations The value of the effect counter 223f is defined in the range of "0 to 89", the fluctuation pattern is "simulated 1 effect", and the range of "90 to 99" is specified as the fluctuation pattern is "special pseudo 4 effect".

  In addition, when the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of special figure 2 reservations is 0, the special special effect is performed when the number of special figure 1 reservations is 1 to 4, and when the number of special figure 1 reservations is 0, "Simulation-free production" is set.

  When the lottery result is out of order, when the number of special figure 2 reservations is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations is in the range of “0 to 99”, and the variation pattern is “ If the number of reserved special figure 2 is 2, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of reserved special figure 1 is within the range of “0 to 99” and the variation pattern is “ When the pseudo figure 2 effect has the special figure 2 reservation number of 1, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 reservation number is in the range of “0 to 99”, and the fluctuation pattern is “pseudo 1 effect”. However, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0, “simulation-free production” is defined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when setting the effect form of the pseudo fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, the presence / absence of the number of reserved special figure 2 and the number of reserved special figure 1 is determined, and the next execution is performed. It is configured to execute a pseudo fluctuation effect in an effect mode corresponding to a special symbol lottery. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to think that the pseudo fluctuation effect executed during one special symbol fluctuation period is a fluctuation effect corresponding to the next special symbol fluctuation.

  Further, since the number of pseudo fluctuations executed in the pseudo fluctuation effect (the number of temporary stoppages of the third symbol) is configured to correspond to the number of reserved special figure 2 reservations, during the normal state. It can be assumed that all of the special figure 2 reservations acquired during the game performed for the ordinary figure executed have been used. Therefore, when the pseudo-variation effect in which the jackpot has been won is executed, the player thinks that the jackpot has been won as a result of acquiring many special figure 2 reservations during the per-figure game executed in the normal state. Can be made. In addition, when the pseudo-variation effect that has been won is executed, it is assumed that all the special figure 2 reservations have been exhausted, and then a variable effect using the special figure 2 reservation is executed (chance zone Continuation), it is possible to provide the player with extraordinary effects.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the pseudo fluctuation effect (special pseudo 2 effect, pseudo 4 effect) which is set only when the jackpot is won is provided, the number of pseudo fluctuations executed in the pseudo fluctuation effect and the special figure The player can be interested in the two reserved numbers.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the contents of the probable changing effect selection table 222jb will be described. FIG. 245 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the during-probability-change effect selection table 222jb. The probable variation effect selection table 222jb is a data table that is referred to when setting a fluctuating effect when a variation pattern with a basic time of 30 seconds is selected as a variation pattern of a special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 245, different rendering modes are defined according to the type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the rendering counter 223f. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is a probability change jackpot, the value of the effect counter 223f falls within the range of “0 to 49” and “probability change single reach”. However, “double reach” is defined in the range of “50 to 99”, and “double reach” is defined when the jackpot is normal, and “non-reach” is defined when it is out of the range.

  When the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a probability change jackpot, the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", and "special double reach" is set to " "Probable change double reach" is defined in the range of "50 to 99", and in the case of deviation, "double reach" is set in the range of the effect counter 223f of "0 to 4" and "double reach" is set in the range of "5 to 10". The “non-reach” is defined in the range of “11 to 99” for “probable change double reach”.

  With such a configuration, both the case where the first special symbol lottery is executed and the case where the second special symbol lottery is executed in the probable change state are “double reach” (the normal hit shown in FIG. 235 (a)). (A reach effect in which two or more third symbols including the third symbol corresponding to the "reach state") is executed, so that when "double reach" is executed for the player, It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the third symbol variation effect corresponding to the special symbol lottery is being executed.

  Further, when "special double reach" is set, the effect mode of "double reach" is set first, and thereafter, the effect effect in which the effect mode is changed to "probable double reach" shown in FIG. 235 (b). Is executed. Therefore, even when "double reach" is executed in response to the first special symbol lottery, a game can be performed while expecting to be promoted to "probable double reach" in the middle. In this “special double reach”, the timing at which the staging mode of the reach effect is changed is the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 makes one or two turns. However, the timing is not limited to this, and the player can use the operation buttons 22 The effect mode may be changed based on the timing at which is operated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the flow of the game in the tenth embodiment will be briefly described. FIG. 246 is a transition diagram showing a game flow in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 246, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to set three game states as a game state: a normal state, a probable change state, and a time saving state. In the normal state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery. In the probable change state and the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is executed more than the first special symbol lottery. It is configured to be easy.

  When the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state wins the jackpot (the jackpot probability is 1/200), the normal jackpot game and the probable variable jackpot game are executed with the probability of 1/2, and to the specific gate during the jackpot game. When the ball has flowed down, the state shifts to the positive change state. When the ball does not flow down to the specific gate, the state shifts to the time saving state.

  The probable change state is configured so that the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times or continues until the jackpot is won. If the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without the jackpot being won during the probable change state, the time saving is reduced. Transition to state. This time saving state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the jackpot game ends. For example, if the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, Becomes 100 times, and when the state shifts from the probable change state to the time reduction state, the number of times of time reduction becomes 50 times.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Control Device in Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 255. In the tenth embodiment, as described above, in a state in which the lottery right of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reservation) and the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) are both stored, The point that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed with priority. By causing a ball to flow down to a specific gate provided in the V winning device 2650 during the execution of the jackpot game, a special symbol high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. Point. As a termination condition for terminating the probable change state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, a special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in addition to the termination condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that an end condition that is satisfied in the case of the above is provided.

  In order to configure the pachinko machine 10 having the above-described difference, as a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, a special symbol variation process 10 (see S154 in FIG. 247) described later, and a normal symbol variation Processing 10 (see S166 in FIG. 249), through gate passing processing (see S157 in FIG. 250), and jackpot control processing 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251) are executed. The other control contents are the same as any of the control processing contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment described above, and therefore, detailed description will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 247, the special symbol variation process 10 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 10 (S154). The special symbol variation process 10 (S154) is executed in the timer interrupt process, and is a variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 or a third symbol display device 81 performed by the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for controlling a variable display of three symbols.

  In the special symbol change process 10 (S154), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol big hit (big hit game) (S601). Specifically, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203jc is on. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a jackpot (during a jackpot game) (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S601, if it is determined that the special symbol is not during the big hit (big hit game) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S602). ), If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S602: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (change) can be executed, the second special symbol holding ball number counter The value of 203de (the number of times N2 of the variable display is suspended based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is larger than 0 (S604). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203de is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203de is subtracted by 1 (S605) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the performed second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is set (S606). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in an external output process of a main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Sent. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de from the reserved ball number command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Of these, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c2 corresponding to the second special symbol is stored.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S606, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is shifted (S607). In the process of S607, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S608.

  On the other hand, in the process of S604, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (the first special symbol The number of times N1) of the variable display based on the lottery is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is larger than 0 (S609).

  In the processing of S609, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is 0 (S609: No), the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S609, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S609: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number is set. The value (N1) of the counter 603dd is decremented by 1 (S610), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd changed by the calculation is set (S611). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in an external output process of a main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Sent. When receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203dd from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223c of the RAM 223. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1 corresponding to the second special symbol is stored.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S611, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storing area 203da is shifted by the same method as the processing of S607 (S612), and the processing is performed by the processing of S608. Move to. In the processing of S608 performed after the processing of S607 or S612, a special symbol change start processing for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S608), and this processing ends. In this special symbol change start process, similar to the special symbol big hit determination process (see S306 in FIG. 41) executed in the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the first embodiment described above, A process for determining a special symbol lottery result and a process for selecting a special symbol variation variation pattern are executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 41).

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S602: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S614). In the process of S614, the value of the fluctuation time counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated in accordance with the updated value of the fluctuation time counter. In this fluctuation time counter, a value indicating the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in the special symbol fluctuation start process (S608) is set at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, and thereafter, the process of S614 is executed. It is updated (subtracted) every time. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S613 (S613: Yes), that is, when the value of the fluctuation time counter updated in the processing of S614 is 0, the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set (S615). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S608). When the special symbol change start process (S608) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Any of the jackpots A to E is determined.

  In the present control example, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. , The green LED is turned on, and in the case of the jackpot D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S615 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S616). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S616: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203jb is set to ON (S617), and the values of the time saving counter 203h and the probability change counter 203ja are cleared (set to 0) (S618). ), And proceeds to the process of S619. When the jackpot start flag is set to ON by the process of S617, when the jackpot control process 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251) of the main process executed by the main control device 110 is executed, the process proceeds to S2401: Yes. The process branches to set an opening command (S2402). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  In the processing of S616, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (S616: No), the processing of S617 and S618 is skipped, the update processing is executed (S620), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S619.

  The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in an external output process (S1001) of a main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Sent to. Upon receiving the status command, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the game status included in the status command. Thereby, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be made to coincide with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the contents of the update process (S620 in FIG. 247) executed in the special symbol change process 10 (see S154 in FIG. 247) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process (S620). The update process (S620) is a process that is executed when the change time of the special symbol change has elapsed (when the change is stopped). Processing for updating the remaining period of the period in which the time reduction state is continuously set is executed.

  When the update process (S620) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is larger than 0, that is, whether the current state is the special symbol high probability state (S621), and the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0. If it is determined that the value is greater than (S621: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203ja is decremented by 1 (updated) (S622), and then it is determined whether or not the updated value of the probability change counter 203ja is 0 (S623). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S623: Yes), the time saving state is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S624), and the process proceeds to S625. When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203ja is not larger than 0 (is 0) in the process of S621 (S621; No), the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is not present because the special symbol is not in the high probability state at present. Is skipped, and the process proceeds to S625.

  In the process of S623, the process of S624 is also skipped when the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is not 0, that is, when the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is larger than 0 and the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol) continues. Then, the process proceeds to S625.

  In the process of S625, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0. If it is determined that the value is greater than 0, that is, if the current state is a normal symbol high probability state (S625: Yes), the time reduction is performed. The value of the counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S626), and it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S627). The horse that has determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 in the process of S627 sets the normal state in the gaming state storage area 203g (S628), and sets the value of the probability change counter 203ja, the value of the time reduction counter 203h, and the current game. A status command indicating the status is set (S629), and the process ends. Further, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not larger than 0 (it is 0) in the processing of S625 (S625: No), or it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not 0 in the processing of S627. In this case (S627: No), the process directly proceeds to S629.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the contents of the ordinary symbol variation process 10 (S166) will be described. The normal symbol variation process 10 (S166) includes various processes related to the ordinary symbol variation (lottery) (the process of executing the ordinary symbol variation, the process of setting the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol variation to be executed, and the execution). The process of updating the normal symbol fluctuation in the middle, the process of stopping the normal symbol fluctuation, and the process of determining the game content of the normal symbol per game executed when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win. In addition, a part of the processing of selecting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the processing of determining the game content of the general symbol per game are partially included in the normal symbol fluctuation processing of the first embodiment (see S106 in FIG. 48). They differ in that they are changed, and are otherwise the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the normal symbol variation process 10 (S166) is executed, first, the same processes as S1101 to S1113, which are the same as the above-described ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), are executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is during the time reduction (normally high probability state of the symbol) by referring to the value of the time reduction counter 203h (S1161), and is determined to be during the time reduction (normal symbol high probability state). If this is done (S1161: Yes), the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 3 seconds (S1162), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1161 that it is not during the working hours (normally high probability state of the symbol) (S1161: No), the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 10 seconds (S1163), and the process ends.

  In addition, the same processing as S1115 to S1118, which is the same as the above-described normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), is executed to determine whether or not the current gaming state is during the time reduction (normal symbol high probability state) by the time reduction counter 203h. It is determined with reference to the value (S1118), and when it is determined that the time is during the time saving (normally high probability state of the symbol) (S1118: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640 is determined as the game content of the game per ordinary figure. Sets the game content (opening operation) x 2 times per second (S1165), executes the process of S1121, and ends the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1118 that the time is not during working hours (normally high probability state of the symbol) (S1118: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640 is 5 seconds × 1 The content of the game (opening operation) is set (S1164), the process of S1121 is executed, and the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is lower in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol than in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 240 (b)), and Although the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to be long, the period during which the electric accessory 640 is opened in the normal symbol winning game executed when a winning is won is configured to be long. With such a configuration, in a normal state (a low probability state of a normal symbol), a situation occurs in which a ball cannot be made to enter the second entrance 640 when a winning is performed with a low probability per a general figure. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the upper limit number (four) of special figure 2 reservations can be easily acquired during one game per ordinary game, a plurality of second special symbol lotteries are performed in the chance zone (see FIG. 233 (b)). The game can be easily executed twice, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the through gate passage processing (see S157) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the content of the through gate passage process (see S157). This through gate passage processing (see S157) is different from the through gate passage processing of the above-described first embodiment (see S107 in FIG. 49) by using the acquired value of the ordinary random number counter C5 to determine the actual success / failure. Is executed (prior to execution of the win / fail determination (see S1111) in the ordinary symbol variation process 10 (see S166 in FIG. 249)), the lottery result (win / fail determination result) is obtained in advance. The processing is different in that a processing for performing the processing is added, and the other processing is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the through gate passage processing (see S157) is executed, first, the same processing as S1201 to S1205 as the through gate passage processing (see S107 in FIG. 49) of the above-described first embodiment is executed. A lottery result is obtained in advance based on the random number 10 table 202jc (S1211), and a general-purpose winning information command including a normal hit determination result (prior determination result obtained in the process of S1211) is set (S1212). The process ends.

  The general-purpose winning information command set in the process of S1212 is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the same process as the winning information command indicating the pre-determination result of the special symbol set in each embodiment described above. You. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine in advance the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery corresponding to the lottery right of the ordinary symbol stored and stored, and to execute an effect based on the preliminary determination result.

  Specifically, in the state in which the chance zone is set, that is, in the state where the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the fact that the game per game is executed during the normal state, When the winning information command includes information indicating the winning of the normal symbol, an effect of continuing the chance zone until the next time the normal winning game is executed can be executed. In this case, even if the second special symbol lottery is completed and the first special symbol lottery is executed before the next regular symbol game is executed, the first special symbol lottery is executed. As an effect mode of the variable effect executed correspondingly, instead of an effect mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, an effect mode in which the third symbol is fluctuated in the horizontal direction shown in FIG. 231 (b)), It is preferable that an effect mode corresponding to the 2 special symbol lottery (for example, an effect mode in which the third symbol is changed in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 232 (b)) is set. With this configuration, in the case where a plurality of games per regular figure are executed within a predetermined period in the normal state, the chance zone can be set for a long period of time, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, if the chance zone is not completed despite the fact that the second special symbol lottery has been performed a predetermined number of times since the chance zone was set, the player will immediately execute the next per-figure-per-game. Can be grasped, so that the player can be interested in the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed in the chance zone. In addition, in the present embodiment, as a variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed in the chance zone, a pseudo variable effect of temporarily stopping the third symbol a plurality of times is configured. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pleasure of allowing the player to predict when the chance zone ends or whether the chance zone is extended.

  Next, the content of the jackpot control process 10 (S1074) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 10 (S1074). The jackpot control process 10 (S1074) is a process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). This is a process for executing various effects and opening or closing the special winning opening (large opening) 2650a.

  In the jackpot control process 10 (S1074), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203jb is on (S2401). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203jb is on (S2401: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2402), and the jackpot start flag 203jb is turned off and the jackpot medium flag 203jc is set on (S2403). Then, the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2401 that the big hit start flag 203jb is off (S2401: No), then the special symbol big hit is currently being made (that is, the big hit flag 203jc is on). Or not) is determined (S2404). In the process of S2404, when it is determined that the present is not a big hit (the big hit flag 203jc is off) (S2404: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2404, when it is determined that the present is a big hit (the big hit flag 203jc is on) (S2404: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a new round start timing (S2404: Yes). S2405).

  In the process of S2405, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2405: Yes), a big hit operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 2650a according to the number of rounds is executed (S2406). ), End this processing. Details of the jackpot operation setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2405 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2405: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S2407). . Here, in the present control example, when the final round of the jackpot has ended, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (S2407: Yes), the ending command is set (S2408), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. . When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits an ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect (see FIG. 236) indicating the end of the big hit is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2407, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (S2407: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2409). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. In the process of S2409, if it is determined that it is the timing of ending the jackpot (S2409: Yes), a jackpot ending process for setting a game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S2410), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S2409, when it is determined that the timing is not the end of the big hit (S2409: No), a winning process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning opening 2650a is executed (S2411), and the identification is performed. Abnormality processing is performed to determine whether the ball that has entered the winning opening 2650a has been normally ejected (S2412), and then this processing ends. Details of the winning process and the abnormal process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255.

  Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S2406) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S2406). The jackpot operation setting process (S2406) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 2650a according to the number of rounds.

  When the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 252) is started, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of five rounds (S2501). If it is determined in the process of S2501 that it is the start timing of the fifth round (S2501: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the V-government (flow path solenoid (positive-change solenoid)) 65k is set (S2502), and the big hit is made. An opening pattern of the specific winning opening 2650a corresponding to the type is set (S2503).

  Here, although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the content of the round game executed in a specific number of rounds (the fifth round) among the round games executed plural times during one big hit game Is different according to the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (probably variable jackpot), V is set as a fifth round game so that the ball can easily flow down to a specific gate. The round game for operating the accessory is configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the probability that the ball will flow down to the specific gate only during a specific period in the jackpot game that is executed for a long time, so that the player can play the jackpot game without cutting his concentration. Game can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the fifth round in the probability-change jackpot game is executed, it is a chance period in which the ball flows down to the specific gate for the player on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Is configured to display a character "Aim for V" as a guide notification mode for indicating "." Thereby, it is possible to clearly inform the player of a specific period in which the ball can easily flow down to the specific gate among the jackpot games executed for a long time. Further, based on the fact that the detecting means detects that the ball has flowed down the specific gate, "VGET" is provided as a guidance notification mode for guiding that the ball has flowed down the specific gate to the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to easily notify the player that the condition for setting the probable change state after the end of the jackpot game is satisfied.

  In addition, the notification mode of the above-described guidance notification may be changed in accordance with the satisfaction of the condition. For example, “Aim V” based on the elapsed time of a specific period in which a ball easily flows down to a specific gate or the remaining time. May be changed, the size of the display area may be changed, or a character with more emphasized content (for example, “Aim at V quickly”) may be changed. This can prevent a situation in which the player does not shoot the ball in a situation where the ball easily flows down to the specific gate.

  Further, in the present embodiment, by changing the operation pattern of the V character to switch the flow path of the winning ball to the V winning device 2650, the period in which the ball easily flows down to the specific gate and the difficult period are set. Although it is possible, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is configured such that the V-prong is operated in a common operation pattern from the start of the jackpot game, and the timing at which the specific winning opening 2650a is opened is varied depending on the jackpot type. Thereby, a period in which the ball easily flows down to the specific gate and a period in which the ball is difficult to flow may be settable. Thereby, the operation pattern of the V-cassette can be shared, so that the V-cassette can be hardly broken down.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if it is determined that the current round is not the fifth round (S2501: No), the processes of S2502 and S2503 are skipped, and the opening of the normal specific winning opening 2650a is set (S2504). ) And the process moves to S2505. In the processing of S2505, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S2505), and this processing ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio ramp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. Sent. Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the jackpot.

  By executing the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 252), it is possible to open the special winning opening 2650a in each round of the jackpot, and to enable the passage of the special discharge channel 2665e2 in the fifth round. it can. As a result, in the jackpots A, CE, and E, the ball almost certainly passes through the specific gate (probability change switch 2665e3) only by the player firing the ball in the fifth round. Symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) can be set.

  Next, the jackpot end process (S2410) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S2410). The big hit end process (S2410) is executed in the big hit control process 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251), and is a process for setting the gaming state after the big hit end as described above.

  In the big hit end processing (S2410), first, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203jd is on (S2601). If it is determined in the processing of S2601 that the probability change setting flag 203jd is ON (S2601: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the specific gate (probability change switch 2650e3) during the jackpot, and thus the probability change counter 203ja The value is set to 50 (S2602), and the process moves to S2603. On the other hand, in the processing of S2601, if the probability change setting flag 203jd is off (S2601: No), the processing of S2602 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S2603.

  In the process of S2603, 100 is set to the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S2603), and then a status command is set based on the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the probability change counter 203ja (S2604). The status command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio ramp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. Sent. When receiving the status command, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the slave status setting area 223g according to the gaming status notified by the status command. This allows the audio lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the big hit flag 203jc and the probability change setting flag 203jd are set to off (S2605), and this processing ends.

  By executing the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 253), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ending according to whether or not the ball has passed the specific gate (probable change switch 2665e3) during the jackpot game. it can.

  Next, the details of the winning process (S2411) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S2411). The winning process (S2411) is executed in the big hit control process 10 (see FIG. 251), and is a process for controlling according to the winning in the specific winning opening 2650a as described above.

  In the winning process (S2411), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is a round valid period (S2701). Here, the round valid period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 2650a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S2701, if it is not the round validity period (S2701: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2701 that the current time is the round valid period (S2701: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a winning in the specific winning opening 2650a has been detected (S2702). If a winning is detected (S2702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203jf and updated (S2703), and a winning command indicating that a winning in the specific winning opening 2650a is detected is set. (S2704), the flow shifts to the process of S2705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2702 that a winning in the specific winning opening 2650a has not been detected (S2702: No), the process skips steps S2703 and S2704 and shifts to the process in step S2705.

  In the process of S2705, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 10 or more (S2705). If the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 10 or more (S2705: Yes), the process proceeds to S2707. On the other hand, in the process of S2705, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 9 or less (S2705: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2706), and the round time has elapsed. If it has been performed (S2706: Yes), the process proceeds to S2707. In the process of S2706, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of each round game of the current big hit. Note that, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the round game is established by the same round time lapse and the number of wins regardless of the jackpot type and the number of rounds. The end condition of the round game may be changed, or the end condition of the round game may be changed depending on the number of rounds to be executed.

  In the process of S2707, the closing of the specific winning opening 2650a is set (S2707), and a closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 2650a is set (S2708). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specific winning opening 2650a this time is a closing based on the end of the five rounds (S2709). The solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 2665k is set to off (S2710), and the process shifts to S2711. On the other hand, in the processing of S2709, if it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening 2650a this time is due to the completion of a round other than five (S2709: No), the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 2665k is turned on. Is not set, the process of S2710 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2712.

  In the process of S2711, the remaining ball timer flag 203jg, the probability change valid flag 203ji, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2712. If it is determined in the processing of S2705 that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less (S2705: No), and if it is determined in the processing of S2706 that the round time has not elapsed (S2706: No), the processing proceeds to S2707. Steps S2711 to S2711 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2712.

  In the process of S2712, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is on (S2712), and if the round end flag 203 is off (S2712: No), the process proceeds to S2713. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2712 that the round end flag 203 is on (S2712: Yes), then it is determined whether the probable change valid flag 203ji is on (S2716). In the processing of S2716, if the probability change valid flag 203ji is off (S2716: No), this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probable variable valid flag 203ji is on (S2716: No), 1 is added to the value of the probable variable valid timer 203jj (S2717), and it is determined whether the value of the probable variable valid timer 203jj is the upper limit value (S2717). S2718). If the value of the probable change enable timer 203jj is not the upper limit value (S2718: No), the process shifts to the process of S2713 to execute the process of monitoring the probable change switch 2665e3 and updating the probable change setting flag 203jd. Accordingly, if the probability change valid timer 203jj is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed the probability change switch 2665e3, so that the probability change state can be set in consideration of the time of ball ejection. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the probability change switch 2665e3 and imparting the probability change state.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probable variable valid timer 203jj is the upper limit (S2718: Yes), the probable variable valid flag 203ji and the round end flag 203 are set to off (S2719), and the value of the probable variable valid timer 203jj is reset (S2720). ), End this processing.

  In the process of S2713, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the probability change switch 2665e3 (S2713). If the ball has not passed through the probability change switch 2665e3 (S2713: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball has passed the probable variable switch 2665e3 (S2713: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probable variable passage counter 203je (S2714), the probable variable setting flag 203jd is set to on (S2715), and this processing is performed. To end.

  Next, the abnormal processing (S2412) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing this abnormal processing (S2412). This abnormal process (S2412) is a process executed in the jackpot control process 10 (see FIG. 251), and as described above, determines whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 2650a has been normally ejected. This is the process to perform.

  In the abnormal processing (S2412), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the round validity period (S2801). If the current time is not the round validity period (S2801: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is valid (S2801: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 2650e4 (see FIG. 196) (S2802).

  In the process of S2802, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 2650e4 (S2802: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the number-of-discharges counter 203jk (S2803), and the flow shifts to the process of S2804. On the other hand, in the process of S2802, if the ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 2650e4 (S2802: No), the process of S2803 is skipped and the process shifts to the process of S2804.

  In the processing of S2804, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is on (S2804). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is off (S2804: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is ON (S2804: Yes), since the ball is in the throwing period, 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh and updated (S2805). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is the upper limit value (S2806). If the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is not the upper limit value (S2806: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is the upper limit value (S2806: Yes), the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the positive variable passage counter 203je and the value of the discharge number counter 203jk) is awarded. It is determined whether the number matches the value (the value of the winning number counter 203jf) (S2807).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2807 that the number of discharged papers and the number of winnings do not match (S2807: No), an error command is set (S2808), and the flow shifts to the processing of S2809. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of illegally entering a ball into the special discharge channel 2650e2 and passing through the positive change switch 2650e3 while the special discharge channel 2650e2 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2807, when it is determined that the number of discharges and the number of winnings match (S2807: Yes), the process of S2808 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2809. In the process of S2809, the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to off (S2809), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is reset (S2810). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203jf, the number-of-discharge counter 203jk, and the value of the variable probability passing counter 203je are reset (S2811), and the process ends.

  Executing this abnormal process (see FIG. 255) may cause a problem that a ball entering the specific winning opening 2650a may not be discharged properly due to clogging of the ball inside the V winning device 2650 or the like. It can be detected and notified early.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 to 263. In the tenth embodiment, a command determination process 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 183) is replaced by a command determination process 10 (see S4193 in FIG. The difference is that the variable display setting process 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261) is performed instead of the variable display setting process 10 (see S4153 in FIG. 187), and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the command determination processing 10 (see S4193) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 10 (see S4193). When the command determination processing 10 (see S4193) is executed, the same processing as S4231 to S4208 is performed as the command determination processing 7 of the seventh embodiment (see S4192 in FIG. 183).

  In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the command of the number of reserved balls is received (S4208: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding value is set to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (first special number). This is stored in the symbol retaining ball number counter 223c1, the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c2), and the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 223ja (S4291), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4208: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning command (winning information command) has been received (S4210). (S4210: Yes), the winning command processing 10 is executed (S4292), and this processing ends. The details of the winning command processing 10 (S4292) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4210, if it is determined that the winning command (winning information command) has not been received (S4210: No), it is next determined whether a stop command has been received (S4293), and it has been determined that it has been received. (S4293: Yes), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S4294), and this processing ends. If it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S4293: No), then it is determined whether a general-purpose related command has been received (S4216), and if it has been determined that it has been received (S4216: Yes), The related process 10 is executed (S4295), and thereafter, the present process ends. A detailed description of the general-purpose related process 10 (S4295) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S4216, when it is determined that the general-purpose related command has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether the jackpot-related command has been received (S4296), and when it has been determined that it has been received (S4296: Yes). ), And executes the jackpot-related process 10 (S4297), and thereafter ends this process. A detailed description of the jackpot-related processing 10 (S4297) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S4296: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4220), and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the winning command processing 10 (see S4292) executed in the command determination processing 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command processing 10 (S4292). The winning command processing 10 (S4292) is set when a special symbol lottery lottery right is acquired from the main control device 110 or when a general symbol lottery lottery right is acquired. This is a process executed when a general-prize winning information command is received or a V winning command set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probability change switch) during a jackpot game.

  When the winning command processing 10 (S4292) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the area corresponding to the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (S4401). ), It is determined whether or not the command received this time is a general-purpose winning information command (S4441). If it is determined that the command is a general-purpose winning information command (S4441: Yes), the received information includes the winning information ( It is determined whether or not the winning information that has been won per day is included (S4442). If it is determined that there is winning information (S4442: Yes), then the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0, That is, it is determined whether or not the current state is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (S4443).

  Here, if the current state is not the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, that is, if it is determined that the normal state is present (S4443: No), the state in which the lottery right of the ordinary symbol lottery to be won per ordinary figure is acquired during the normal state. Since there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set, a display command for suggesting opening of the electric tulong is set (S4444), and the flow shifts to the process of S4445. When the display command is set in the process of S4444, the display control device 114 is notified to the display control device 114 with the same control contents as the various display commands set in the control process of the other audio lamp control devices, and during the normal state. The suggestion effect (for example, the small display area Dm3 is displayed in the main display area Dm on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) suggesting that the game per day is executed and the electric accessory 640 is opened long (opened for 5 seconds). An effect that stimulates whether or not it is formed) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect described above is executed only when the lottery right of the ordinary symbol lottery to be won per ordinary figure is acquired during the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The above-described suggestion effect may be configured to be executed even when it is determined that the general-purpose winning information command includes winning information indicating a specific out-of-prize winning. With this, it is possible to set a case where the per-figure-per-game is executed when the suggested effect is executed and a case where the game is not executed, so that the player performs the game while predicting the game content to be executed in the future. Can be made.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery right of the ordinary symbol lottery to be won per ordinary figure is acquired during the normal state, the suggestion effect is configured to be executed. Based on the special symbol lottery or the pre-determination result of the special symbol lottery stored in the prize information storage area 223b, the timing at which the game for the general symbol is actually executed, that is, the symbol for the general symbol indicating the winning for the general symbol Preliminary game state processing is performed to determine whether or not the game state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information command is executed (the timing at which the game per common figure is executed) is the normal state. When it is determined that there is a suggestion effect, the above-described suggestion effect may be executed. This makes it possible to more appropriately indicate that a chance zone is set.

  Returning to FIG. 257, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4441 that the general-purpose winning information command has not been received (S4441: No), if it is determined in the processing of S4442 that there is no hit information (S4442: No), the time reduction counter is determined in the processing of S4443. When it is determined that the value of 203h is larger than 0 (S4443: Yes), the process also proceeds to S4445.

  In the process of S4445, the command received this time is the V winning command (refer to the command set when the ball flows down to the certain change switch (specific gate) in the winning process (see S2411 of FIG. 254) (see S2791)). It is determined (S4445) that the command is a V winning command (S4445: Yes), the V winning flag 223jc is set to ON (S4446), other processing is executed (S4412), and the present processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S4445 that the V winning command has not been received (S4445: No), the process of S4446 is skipped, the process of S4412 is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the contents of the general figure related processing 10 (S4295) executed in the command determination processing 10 (see S4193 of FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general-purpose-related process 10 (S4295). The general figure related processing 10 (S4295) includes a general figure change pattern command indicating that the ordinary symbol lottery has been executed from the main control device 110, a general figure start command indicating that the general figure lottery game has been started, and the like. This is a process that is executed when a general-period end command indicating the end of the general-period game is received.

  When the general-figure-related processing 10 (S4295) is executed, first, it is determined whether a general-figure fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4701). If it is determined that the command has been received (S4701: Yes), the display general-figure fluctuation is displayed. A start command is set (S4702), and it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, whether the symbol is in a high probability state of a normal symbol (S4781). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S4781: Yes), the process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the value is not larger than 0 (S4781: No), the currently received ordinary figure fluctuation is received. It is determined whether or not the pattern command is a normal figure variation pattern command corresponding to the ordinary symbol lottery that has been won per ordinary figure (S4782). If it is determined that the pattern command has not been won per ordinary figure (S4782: No) Then, the processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning has been made per ordinary figure (S4782: Yes), a display command indicating that the long opening waiting is in progress is set because of the fluctuation in the ordinary opening where the long opening winning is executed ( (S4783), this process ends. By setting the display command in the processing of S4783, the display mode shown in FIG. 231 (b) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible for the player to easily predict that the chance zone is likely to be set soon.

  In the present embodiment, a process of displaying the display mode (display mode for forming the small display area Dm3) shown in FIG. 231 (b) based on whether or not the normal symbol change is a hit change is used. However, the display mode shown in FIG. 231 (b) is not limited to this, and is a specific out-of-usual variation (for example, a part of out-of-usual variation in which the same variation time is set as the per-usual variation). (A display mode for forming the small display area Dm3) may be displayed.

  Further, the size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be changed according to the content of the variation effect (third symbol variation effect) corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. When a fluctuation effect with a high jackpot expectation degree (for example, a reach effect) is executed in the symbol fluctuation effect, a smaller display area is displayed than when a fluctuation effect with a high jackpot expectation degree (for example, a reach effect) is not executed. It is preferable to change the display content so that the display area of Dm3 is reduced. In this way, the variable content suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed independently and the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery have a relationship, and the display content is variably controlled, so that It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by providing a lot of unnecessary game information to the player, and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  Returning to FIG. 258, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the general figure variation pattern command has not been received (S4701: No), it is next determined whether a general figure start command has been received (S4703), and the general figure start command has been received. Is determined (S4703: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4784), and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4784: No), the long release is performed. A display command indicating "in" is set (S4785), and this process ends. By setting the display command in the processing of S4785, the display mode shown in FIG. 232 (a) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the long open win is being executed. If it is determined in the processing of S4784 that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S4784: Yes), the processing of S4785 is skipped and the present processing ends.

  In the process of S4703, if it is determined that the general figure start command has not been received (S4703: No), it is determined whether the general figure end command has been received (S4709). (S4709: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S4786). It is determined whether or not there is (S4787), and when it is determined that it is 1 or more (S4787: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223jb is set to ON (S4788). If it is determined (S4788: No), a display command indicating the entry into the chance zone is set (S4789), and the special effect flag 2 is set. Set off a 3jb (S4790), the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4786 to S4788, if it is determined that the determination result is other than the determination result described above, the present processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, the content of the jackpot-related processing 10 (S4297) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related process 10 (S4297). In the jackpot-related process 10 (S4297), a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won is performed. The processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot-related process 10 (S4297), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined that the command is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4902). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4981). If it is determined that the jackpot game is a normal jackpot (S4981: Yes), the chance mode entry (time saving state is set) is determined. The ending display mode shown is set (S4982), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S4981: No), that is, when it is determined that it is a probable change jackpot, an ending display mode indicating entry into a super chance mode (a probable change state is set) is set ( S4983), and terminates this processing.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 241, the ending periods of different lengths are set according to the set jackpot types (normal jackpots and probability-change jackpots), and the jackpot game is started. The ending display mode (see FIG. 236) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed this time at the timing is set in advance. With this configuration, various controls (variable display control of the jackpot game information variably displayed according to the progress state of the jackpot game (for example, control for displaying information for indicating the acquired number of prize balls, Control for displaying information indicating the number of round games) and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls in accordance with the number of balls that have won the V prize device 2650 during a jackpot game are frequently executed. Since there is no need to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the process of setting the ending display mode at the start timing of the jackpot game is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol jackpot determined to execute the jackpot game is not limited to this. The ending display mode may be set during the fluctuation, or may be set using the remaining period of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 executed during the period in which the control processing is small during the jackpot game period. Is also good.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4901 that a jackpot-related command has not been received (S4901: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S4913), and it has been determined that a round number command has been received. If this is done (S4913: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S4914), and it is determined whether the current round number is 5 rounds (V rounds) (S4984). If it is determined that the round is 5 rounds (V round) (S4984: Yes), a display command for guiding the V winning is set (S4985), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the processing of S4984 that the current round number is not five rounds (V rounds), that is, if it is determined that a round game other than the fifth round is to be started (S4984: No), the processing ends as it is. .

  If it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4986), and if it has been received (S4986: Yes). ), The ending process 10 is executed (S4987), and this process ends. If it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S4986 (S4986: No), it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S4915), and if it has been received (S4915: Yes). ), And execute a jackpot ending process (S4916), and thereafter terminate this process. If it is determined in the process of S4915 that the jackpot end command has not been received (S4915: No), this process ends.

  Next, the ending process 10 (S4987) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 10 (S4987). The ending process 10 (S4987) is a process executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the above-described jackpot-related process 10 (see S4297 in FIG. 259), and is performed during the ending period. The processing for finally determining the display mode is executed.

  When the ending process 10 (S4987) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223jc is set to ON (S4991), and if it is determined that the V winning flag 223jc is set to ON (S4991: Yes), V The winning flag 223jc is set to off (S4992), the execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode already set is set (S4995), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the processing of S4991 that the V winning flag 223jc is not set to ON (S4991: No), it is determined whether or not the current big hit is a probable big hit (S4993), and it is not a probable big hit (normal If it is determined that it is a big hit (S4993: No), the process directly proceeds to S4995.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4993, if it is determined that it is a probability change jackpot (S4993: Yes), a display switching command for switching the display mode of the latter half period (7 seconds) of the ending period is set (S4994). The flow shifts to S4995.

  When the display switching command is set in the process of S4994, it is notified to the display control device 114, and the display mode in the latter half of the ending period set in advance in response to the setting of the probable change state (FIG. 236 ( d) is switched to a display mode (see FIG. 236 (c)) corresponding to the setting of the time saving state. In the present embodiment, since the display period of the display mode switched based on the display switching command is fixed (7 seconds), the display mode can be easily switched.

  Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 10 (S4183) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the content of the variable display setting process 10 (S4183). The variable display setting process 10 (S4183) is different from the variable display setting process 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187) of the seventh embodiment in that the special figure 1 effect mode setting is performed instead of the effect mode setting process (S5232). The difference is that the process (S5251) is executed and that the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed instead of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237). In addition, the difference is that the process of subtracting the value of the variation counter (S5231 and S5235 in FIG. 187) is deleted. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 10S (S5251) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 10S (S5251). The special figure 1 effect mode setting process 10S (S5251) is executed when the variable effect of the first special symbol is set in the variable display setting process 10 (see S4183 of FIG. 261). A process for setting an effect mode of a variable effect corresponding to the playing state being performed is executed.

  When the variable display setting process 10 (S4183) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the probable change state based on the information set in the slave state setting area 223g (S8251). Here, when it is determined that the state is not the probable change state (the normal state or the time saving state) (S8251: No), an effect mode corresponding to the basic command (command indicating the length of the basic time) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command (for example, An effect mode in which the third symbol change is started and the game is stopped without coming out of reach, or an effect mode in which the third symbol change is started and reaches 5 seconds after the start of the third symbol change), that is, the third symbol (S8252), and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the addition command (command indicating the length of the addition time) indicated by the variation pattern command. Mode (for example, a rendering mode corresponding to a period from when the reach state has been reached for 5 seconds until the third symbol is stopped and displayed), that is, a stop diagram of the third symbol In response to determining the effect mode of the period variably (S8253), the process proceeds to the below-described processing of S8257.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8251 that the state is the probable change state (S8251: Yes), the change time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the change pattern command is extracted (S8254), and the basic change time (basic change time) is extracted. It is determined whether (time) is 30 seconds (S8255). Here, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 242 (c), when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the probable change state, the basic time is always 30 when the jackpot is won. A variation pattern of a second is selected, and a variation pattern of a basic time of 30 seconds is selected so that about 90% of cases where a winning is missed is selected.

  In the process of S8255, when it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is 30 seconds (S8255: Yes), an effect mode (effect content) is determined based on the probable change effect selection table 222jb (S8256), and the determined effect is determined. The display variation pattern command indicating the mode is set (S8257), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S8255: No), the above-described processing of S8252 and S8253 is executed, and then the processing of S8257 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252). The special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed when the variable effect of the second special symbol is set in the variable display setting process 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261). A process for setting an effect mode of a variable effect corresponding to the playing state being performed is executed.

  When the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state (S8261), and if it is determined that the current game state is the normal state (S8261: Yes). Then, a display command indicating the entry into the chance zone is set (S8262), then the special effect flag 223jb is set to ON (S8263), and the effect mode is determined based on the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja (S8262). (S8264), the display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S8265), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S8261, if it is determined that the game state is not the normal state (S8261: No), then it is determined whether the current game state is the probability change state (S8266), and if it is determined that the current game state is not the probability change state. Is (S8266: No), an effect mode (for example, an effect in which the third pattern change is started, and the game is stopped without reaching the reach after the start of the third pattern change) corresponding to the basic command (command indicating the length of the basic time) indicated by the change pattern command. Mode, or an effect mode from the start of the third symbol change to the reach state until 5 seconds elapse), that is, an effect corresponding to a period in which the common effect mode can be executed regardless of the stop symbol of the third symbol. The mode is determined (S8267), and thereafter, the effect mode (for example, R) corresponding to the addition command (command indicating the length of the addition time) indicated by the variation pattern command. After 5 seconds have passed since the switch was in the hunch state, an effect mode corresponding to a period until the third symbol is stopped and displayed), that is, an effect mode of a period that is changed corresponding to the stop symbol of the third symbol. It is determined (S8268), and the process shifts to the above-described process of S8265, and thereafter, this process ends.

  Further, in the process of S8266, when it is determined that the state is the probable change state (S8266: Yes), the fluctuation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is extracted (S8269), and the basic fluctuation time (basic time) is determined. It is determined whether (time) is 30 seconds (S8270). Here, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 242 (c), when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the probable change state, approximately 25% of the case where the jackpot has been won, and the off winning has been achieved. In such a case, a variation pattern of a basic time of 30 seconds is selected with a probability of about 4% of the case where the operation is performed.

  In the processing of S8270, when it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is 30 seconds (S8270: Yes), the effect mode (effect contents) is determined based on the probable changing effect selection table 222jb (S8271), and the determined effect is determined. The display variation pattern command indicating the mode is set (S8265), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S8270: No), the above-described processing of S8267 and S8268 is performed, and then the processing of S8265 is performed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured not to be performed in parallel (in parallel), The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be executed prior to the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, the lottery in which the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed. Further, it is configured such that the ease of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is changed according to the set game state. Specifically, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (time saving state, probable change state), the case where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (normal state) is set. In order to make it easier to acquire the lottery right for the second special symbol, the entrance with the electric accessory 640a that is opened in the hit game (normal game per game) executed at the time of winning the normal symbol. When a ball enters the (second entrance 640), a lottery right for the second special symbol can be acquired. In other words, when playing a game in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be more easily executed than the second special symbol lottery, and the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. At the same time, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol can be set, and when the ordinary symbol high probability state is set, the second special symbol lottery which is more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery is executed. Is configured. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly changed according to the set game state, and it is expected that a game state with a high degree of advantage to the player is set. It is possible to make the player play the game while being eager.

  In addition, in the case where a winning is achieved in a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, a general symbol winning game in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds is configured to be executable. I have. With this configuration, it is possible to temporarily provide a period in which the second special symbol lottery can be easily performed even in the normal state which is a disadvantageous gaming state to the player. For a player playing a game, a game aimed at winning a special symbol lottery winning and a game aiming for a winning in a regular symbol lottery can be executed, so that the player gets tired of the game early. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect form of the special figure 2 variable effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is stored. It is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights of the second special symbol, that is, the number of special figure 2 reservations. Specifically, as an effect mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a pseudo-off-variation fluctuation effect indicating that the lottery result is off during the first half period of the fluctuation effect. In the second half period, the third symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo off-state fluctuation effect is restarted to execute a pseudo-hit fluctuation effect indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, The number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-hit variation effect is configured to be variable in accordance with the number of special figure 2 reservations. With this configuration, the variable effect in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped a plurality of times before the third symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. Can be executed. In other words, it can be assumed that the jackpot has been won through a plurality of second special symbol lotteries.

  With this, even if the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 reservation used for the second special symbol lottery executed first among the plurality of special figure 2 reservations acquired during the regular figure game, the player On the other hand, since a plurality of special figure 2 reservations were acquired during the per-figure game, it can be assumed that the big hit was won. Can be done.

  When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 in the case of winning the big hit in the second special symbol lottery, when the first special symbol lottery is executed as the above-mentioned pseudo-hit variation effect, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A variable effect simulating a variable effect displayed on the display surface (an effect mode of the special figure 1 variable effect performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the first special symbol lottery) is executed. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the repetition of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect in a situation where the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired, and therefore, the pseudo fluctuation effect is provided to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to identify that the operation is being performed. In addition, after a pseudo variable effect imitating the special figure 1 variable effect is executed, the third symbol is stopped (fixed display) in a combination indicating that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, so that the game is performed. It is possible to execute a surprising fluctuating effect on the user.

  In the present embodiment, when the probability change jackpot game is executed, an effect mode indicating that the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as an effect mode of the notification effect, Immediately before the notification effect is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the effect mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to the specific gate. When it is flowing down, a notification effect of the preset effect mode is executed, and the effect mode of the notification effect is switched only when the ball is not flowing down the specific gate.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probable jackpot and the normal jackpot, so that the ending period longer than the normal jackpot is set for the probable jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Make up. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the probability change state is set after the big hit game is completed, before the probability change state is actually set. On the other hand, if the probable change state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the fact is notified for a long period of time, the ending period is shortened because it only gives the player an unpleasant feeling.

  As described above, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability jackpot game, the jackpot ending By simply performing the process of switching the production mode of the period to the production mode executed during the ending period of the normal hit game, the length of the ending period is different, so that an uncomfortable notification production is performed during the ending period. There was a problem. In addition, if a special effect mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate in the probability change jackpot game is facilitated in advance, image data (effect data) for the effect mode is displayed in advance. It is necessary to store the information in the character ROM 234 of the control device 114, and there is a problem that the storage capacity increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type. When the ball could not flow down to the specific gate, only the staging mode corresponding to the latter half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the staging mode set for the latter half of the ending period of the normal hit game. Make up. As a result, a notification effect without providing a special effect mode used only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability change jackpot game and without giving a sense of incongruity to the player is executed. can do.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the second half period is configured to have a common length regardless of the jackpot type. It is configured to switch and set the production mode of the notification production performed when it is not possible to flow down to the specific gate, but without being limited to this, for example, during the last round period of the jackpot game By executing the notification effect, the notification effect that is executed for a longer period than the actual jackpot ending period may be configured to be executable, or the jackpot game may be terminated for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set. By continuing to execute the round effect performed during the round period, and then executing the notification effect, the actual jackpot ending period It may be configured to perform a notification effect of remote short period of time.

  Since the V winning device 2650 has the same contents as the V winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 194 to 196) of the above-described eighth embodiment, the same symbols are given and the detailed description is omitted. . Further, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the ball flowing down the right area are sent to the through gate 67, the general entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650. Since the ratio of entering the ball is the same as the above-described left region, detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of the set game state, and regardless of whether the jackpot game is executed or not, even if the player executes the right-handed game, Is executed, the same privilege is provided. Therefore, the player can play a game by any game method according to his / her mood.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 230, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that there is no large difference between the case where the left-handed game is performed and the case where the right-handed game is performed. For example, the number of the general entrance holes 63 provided in the left region is changed to the general number provided in the right region. The number of entrances 63 is smaller than the number of entrances 63, and the ratio of the ball entering the first entrance 64 is configured so that the left-handed game is higher than the right-handed game. It is more difficult to obtain the prize ball than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery. May be configured. In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, that is, during the execution of the game in which the ball enters the first entrance hole 64, the player can play the game by any game method. In a game in which a ball enters the second entrance 640 (a game in a time-saving state or a probable change state), a right-handed game can be a game more advantageous to a player than a left-handed game. .

  In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, each time the value is increased or decreased), the reserved ball number command is issued. Has been described from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. By this means, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the special figure entrance 64 is held up to four times, and the passage through the through gate 67 is held up to one time, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to this. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the prize in the special figure entrance 64 can be changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as described in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. In addition, it is difficult for the player to identify the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using the common image data of the display control device 114.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for displaying the result of the lottery of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, of the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol and the display means for displaying the slave symbol, which are emphasized and displayed to the player. Further, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used as the configuration of the display unit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the left side of the game board 13 is in a gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player and in a gaming state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state. Although the left-handed game aiming at the area is configured to be executed, the aiming area of the game board 13 which is different according to the game state may be configured to be different. A left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 may be executed, and a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 may be executed in the time-saving state. May be executed, and the right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

  Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, the left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is executed regardless of which game state is set and whether the big hit game is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a right-handed game is executed during the time-saving state and during a jackpot game, and a left-handed game is executed only during the normal state. With this configuration, the player can easily understand whether or not the player is in an advantageous state according to the game method to be executed (right-handed game, left-handed game).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 for determining that the operating means has been operated by the player performing a pressing operation is used as the operating means operable by the player. It is also possible to use, it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, and it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by touching or approaching the lever A simple touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 changes the effect mode of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player. For example, the effect mode of various effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player on the frame button 22 may be varied. For example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or input of an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22) may be performed, and the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display A control device that can generate an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. With such a configuration, even when a plurality of effect operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of effect operation means can be centrally managed. The effect mode for the player's operation on the means can be set smoothly.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment, a switch button group 22z (switch button 22za, first select button 22zb, second select button 22zc) for selecting the end condition of the game per accessory is provided, and the movable valve 750 Part of or a part of each operation control of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c The whole may be configured to be executed by the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above, by shifting to the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol having a high small hit probability becomes easy to be executed, and the game ball enters the right variable winning device 1650. In such a case, a state in which an opportunity to acquire a prize ball can be frequently obtained is formed. In other words, a very advantageous game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained without winning a jackpot is formed.

  In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 10, the jackpot probability and the high probability state (probable change state) of the low probability state of the special symbol are obtained. The combination (setting) with the jackpot probability can be changed. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, six combinations (settings) are defined as combinations (settings) of the jackpot probability (see FIG. 269 (a)). The clerk of the hall or the like performs a predetermined operation (setting change operation) outside business hours or the like, so that the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 can be arbitrarily set. The higher the jackpot probability (high setting), the easier it is to win a jackpot in the normal state (special symbol low probability state) and in the latent state (special symbol high probability state). On the other hand, the most advantageous latent state is likely to be completed in a relatively short period of time (in the latent state, another gaming state is easily set by the jackpot win). On the other hand, the lower the jackpot probability (lower setting), the easier it is for the normal state to continue for a longer period of time (more likely to cause hammering), but the more advantageous latent state tends to continue for a relatively long time. In the latent state, the total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit game is likely to increase. In other words, according to the jackpot probability (probability), the game property (the game state in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are easily completed in a relatively short period, and the game state in which the disadvantageous game state and the advantageous game state are both advantageous for a relatively long time) Since it is possible to make the game characteristics different from each other easily, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described seventh embodiment in configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. In addition, various operation means (setting key 110b, setting change switch 110c) for changing the setting of the pachinko machine 10 (combination of the jackpot probability in the high probability state and the low probability state) are provided. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the control device 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 Is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is one. Is a point that is the change. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the seventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 264 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 264, the gaming board 13 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the gaming board 13 in the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 157) in that a first special board is provided below the central first ball entrance 64c. The only difference is that a special figure 1 prize device 1640 that is opened when a small win occurs in a symbol lottery is provided. In other words, in the eleventh embodiment, not only the lottery of the second special symbol but also the lottery of the first special symbol is adopted so that the small hit can be won. The types of prize devices that are opened (can be entered) at the time of winning are different.

  The special figure 1 prize device 1640 includes a special figure 1 prize port 1640a into which a game ball can enter, an oblong rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the special figure 1 prize port 1640a, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate. And at least a solenoid (not shown) for a small hit in a special figure for opening and closing the shaft as a shaft. In the special figure 1 prize device 1640, normally, the opening and closing plate completely covers the special figure 1 prize port 1640a, so that it becomes difficult for game balls to enter the special figure 1 prize port 1640a (see FIG. (The closing port 1640a for FIG. 1 is closed). In the case of a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol, the solenoid for the special figure 1 small hit is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, so that the game ball is easy to win in the special figure 1 winning opening 1640a. An open state is formed temporarily. As shown in FIG. 264, the special figure 1 prize winning device 1640 has a central first ball entrance 64c disposed vertically above the same, and the upper right direction and the upper left direction as viewed from the front are closed by game nails. Therefore, even if the special figure 1 winning port 1640a is opened, it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the special figure 1 winning port 1640a. That is, the small hit of the first special symbol in the eleventh embodiment is not provided for the player to obtain the prize ball, and the player has intentionally or mistakenly right-handed in the normal state. When the lottery of the second special symbol has been executed due to, for example, the second special symbol is forcibly terminated (discarded) by the long hit of the first special symbol. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of one special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, when the change display of the big hit or the small hit is stopped, the change display of the other special symbol is being executed. If so, the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly deviated and stopped at the symbol. That is, in normal times, a game ball enters the second entrance 645 by right-handing, and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and a long fluctuation (a fluctuation display for 600 seconds) of the second special symbol is executed. Even if, after that, a game ball is made to enter the central first entrance hole 64c by left-handing and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, so that the probability is high (for example, a ratio of about 90%). A big hit or a small hit of the first special symbol is won, and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol can be forcibly removed and terminated (discarded). As a result, it is possible to more easily execute the variation of the special symbol on the side that is easily executed for each game state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 265, details of various operation means for changing the setting of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 265 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 265, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, a set value display device 110a capable of displaying a set value on the main controller 110, a setting change operation (and a setting confirmation operation) ) And a setting key 110b capable of switching between a non-accepting state (normal game state) and an operator (for example, installing the pachinko machine 10 in a state of accepting a setting change operation (setting change state)). And a setting switch 110c capable of changing the set value of the pachinko machine 10 in response to an operation of a pachinko clerk at the hall where the pachinko machine is located. A method of changing settings using this setting change mechanism and a method of checking settings will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, a procedure for changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 using the setting change mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 266 (a) to 266 (d), in order to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10, first, the setting key 110b is rotated clockwise while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. As a result, it is turned to the ON position (see FIG. 266 (a)). That is, in order to change the settings, it is necessary to first shut down the power of the pachinko machine 10. Next, the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on while the setting key 110b is turned to the ON side, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (see FIG. 266 (b)). Thereby, the state of the pachinko machine 10 after the power is turned on is set to the setting change state. When the setting is changed, "-" is displayed for each digit of the setting value display device 110a constituted by a 4-digit 7-segment display. With this display content, the operator (for example, a store clerk in the hall) can easily understand that the setting has been normally changed to the setting change state.

  In the setting change state, the set value is switched by one each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (see FIG. 266 (c)). In the eleventh embodiment, six types of setting values 1 to 6 are provided, and the larger the numerical value is, the higher the jackpot probability becomes. That is, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 is the lowest (for example, 1/320 in the low probability state, and 1/102 in the high probability (probable change) state), and the jackpot probability of the setting 6 is the highest (for example, 1 in the low probability state). / 220, 1/70 in the high probability state). In the setting change state, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, the setting is changed in the order of 1 → 2 →... → 6. When the setting switch 110c is pressed in a state where the setting value is 6, the setting value returns to 1. Further, every time the setting switch 110c is pressed, a numeral indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 110a. FIG. 226 (c) is a diagram showing a display mode in a state where the set value is set to “5”. As shown in FIG. 226 (c), when the setting value is switched to 5 by pressing down the setting switch 110c, the numeral “5” indicating the setting 5 is displayed in the lower one digit of the setting value display device 110a. Is done.

  After the operator completes the switching operation to the desired setting value, the setting key 110b is rotated counterclockwise to dispose the setting key 110b at the OFF position, whereby the setting change state is ended and the normal game is performed. (See FIG. 266 (d)). The setting key 110b includes a key portion having a key shape and a keyhole portion having a keyhole shape matching the key portion, and the key portion can be removed. Thus, the key portion can be inserted into the keyhole portion only when the operator (for example, a hall clerk) performs the setting change operation, and the key portion can be removed and stored when the setting change operation is completed. it can. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized player or the like from changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 during business hours, thereby preventing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. it can.

  Next, a procedure (setting confirmation operation) for confirming the setting will be described with reference to FIGS. In order to confirm the setting, first, as in the setting change operation, the setting key 110b is turned to the ON position while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off (see FIG. 266 (e)). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without turning on the RAM clear switch 122 (that is, with the RAM clear switch 122 kept off), the setting confirmation state is set (see FIG. 266 (f)). When the mode shifts to the setting confirmation state, the currently set value is displayed on the set value display device 110a. The example of FIG. 266 (f) shows a state where “5” is set as the set value. When the setting confirmation by the operator is completed, the setting confirmation state is terminated by turning the setting key 110b to the ON side, and the state is shifted to a state where a normal game can be performed (see FIG. 266 (g)).

  Although the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately in the eleventh embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the setting switch 110c is deleted and the setting can be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, the setting may be switched in the order of 1 → 2 →... → 6 each time the setting key 110b is turned by 60 degrees. Then, at the end of the setting change operation, the key portion of the setting key 110b may be pulled out of the keyhole portion so as to return to a state where a normal game can be played. With this configuration, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, and the number of components can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 267, a description will be given of a transition of the effect mode in the eleventh embodiment in a case where the setting change operation is completed and a transition is made to a state where a normal game can be played. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, an effect capable of suggesting to the player the set value set by the setting change operation is configured to be executable. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, each time a specific change pattern is selected, the current setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set only between the time when the setting change is performed and the time when the first jackpot is won. A setting suggestion effect that suggests a value by the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be executable.

  In this setting suggestion effect, the left symbol column and the right symbol column are stopped and displayed in the third symbol with the same number, and an effect that finally comes off (so-called out-of-reach effect) is executed, and the reach is performed. The set value is indicated to the player by the numbers of the left and right third symbols stopped at the time of occurrence. More specifically, the reach of one symbol (the reach effect in which the third symbol with the number “1” attached to the left and right is stopped and displayed) is selected when “1” is set as the set value. There is a high possibility that the reach of two symbols is selected when the set value is set to “2”, and the reach of three symbols is set to “3” as the set value. Is highly likely to be selected, and the reach of four symbols is likely to be selected when the set values “4” to “6” are set, and the reach of five symbols is set as “ It is highly likely that the selection is made when “5” or “6” is set, and the possibility that the reach of 6 symbols is selected when “6” is set as the set value is increased. It is configured. The reach of the symbol “9” is configured to be selected only when “6” is set as the set value. On the other hand, the reach of the eight symbols is configured to be more likely to be selected as the setting is lower.

  FIG. 267 is a diagram showing a transition of the presentation mode after the setting change operation in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 267, in the eleventh embodiment, after the setting change operation is completed, the normal effect mode is executed over the fluctuation display based on the 49th special symbol lottery, and the 50th fluctuation is performed. In the display, a setting suggestion effect is executed. Then, in the 51st to 99th fluctuation displays, a normal effect mode is executed, and in the 100th fluctuation display, a setting suggestion effect is executed. Thereafter, a setting suggestion effect is executed every time the number of times of the variable display becomes a multiple of 50 until the first win of the jackpot. In the eleventh embodiment, whether the setting suggestion effect is a variation pattern to be set according to the type of the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to determine whether or not it is not.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272 (b), in the eleventh embodiment, when the power-on with the RAM clear 122 is executed, the number of fluctuations after the power-on is 50. The scenario of the variation pattern is set such that a special variation type (out-of-range special reach variation) that is not normally selected is selected every time the multiple is reached. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the production mode of the setting suggestion production and execute the fluctuation pattern production of the decided production mode only when the special reach fluctuation is notified as the fluctuation pattern command. are doing. With this configuration, the audio lamp control device 113 grasps whether or not the setting change (power-on with the operation of the RAM clear switch 122) has been executed, the number of fluctuations after the power-on, and the like. Since there is no need, the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  After the setting is changed, the setting suggestion effect is executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed until the jackpot is won for the first time. It is possible to start the game with the pachinko machine 10 that has not been won a jackpot, and to make the user decide to check whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. Continued motivation can be provided to the player. More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the result of the previous day is bad (the jackpot probability calculated from the actual number of games (number of lotteries of special symbols) and the number of jackpots is low). When the setting suggestion effect can be confirmed, the player can be predicted that the expectation changed to the advantageous setting value can be obtained, so that the game in the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting suggestion effect is confirmed is to be continued. I can make you think. Further, for example, when the result of the previous day is good (the result of the jackpot probability calculated from the actual number of games and the number of jackpots is high), if the setting suggestion effect cannot be confirmed in the pachinko machine 10, the previous day Since the player can be convinced that the setting has not been changed as it is, the game can be continued in expectation of a good result as in the previous day. Further, in the setting suggestion effect, when an effect that can be expected to be set at a high setting is executed, the game can be continued with a stronger expectation of the high setting. In addition, even if the jackpot is won before the setting suggestion effect is executed (before the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times), the event of winning within 50 times occurs at a higher setting. Since it is possible to make the player think that the game is easy, it is possible to make the player want to continue the game.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, after the setting is changed, the specific number of times (50 times) of the special symbol lottery is executed until the first win of the jackpot, and the identification regarding the degree of advantage of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. By executing an effect that can suggest the element (setting value), it is possible to increase the motivation of the player for the game. Thereby, especially, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the jackpot has not been won can be improved.

<Electrical Configuration in Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 268 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 268 (a), the ROM 202 according to the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 168 (a)) in that the first random number 7 table 202fa is replaced. In that a first random number 11 table 202 ma is provided, a small random number table 202 fb is provided in place of the small random number table 202 fb, and a big hit type selection 11 table is provided instead of the big hit type selection 7 table 202 fd. This is different in that a 202 md is provided, a fluctuating pattern selection 11 table 202me is provided in place of the fluctuating pattern selection 7 table 202fe, and a fluctuating pattern scenario table 202mf is added. The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf includes four fluctuation pattern tables defined in the fluctuation pattern 11 table 202me (11 tables 202me1 for normal use, 11 tables 202me2 for time saving / probable change, 11 tables 202me3 for latent detection, and the RAM clear table 202me4). Is a data table that is referred to to determine which of the fluctuation pattern tables is to be referred to to select a fluctuation pattern (variation time).

  First, the details of the first random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 269 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number 11 table 202ma. As shown in FIG. 269 (a), the first random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment has a random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in association with a special symbol state and a set value. Is defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 269 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, for the set value “1” (set 1), the counter value of the first random number counter C1 (random value ) Is defined in association with “0 to 204”, and for the set value “2” (set 2), “0 to 217” is set as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. Is defined in association with the setting value “3” (setting 3), and “0 to 233” is defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. For the setting value “4” (setting 4), “0 to 251” is defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1, and the setting value “5” (setting 5) ), The counter value of the first random number counter C1 The range of “0 to 272” is defined in association with the range of “random value”, and the range of “0” is set as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 for the set value “6” (setting 6). To 297 ”are defined in association with each other. In the eleventh embodiment, the range that the first random number counter C1 can take is expanded to “0 to 65535”. Therefore, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/320 (205/65536), the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/301 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is It is 1/280 (234/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/260 (252/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/240 (273/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 Is 1/220 (298/65536).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269 (a), in the high probability state of the special symbol, “0 to 643” corresponds to the setting 1 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. For setting 2, “0 to 686” is defined as the range of the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1. The range of the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C1 is defined in association with “0 to 735”. For the setting 4, the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is set to “0”. ７９791 ”is defined in association with the setting 5, and“ 0 to 857 ”is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 for setting 5, and the setting value 6 The first hit "0-935" is defined in association with a range of counter value of the counter C1 (random number). Therefore, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 in the special symbol high-probability state is 1/102 (644/65536), the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/95 (686/65536), and the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is 1/89 (736/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/82 (792/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/76 (858/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 Is 1/70 (936/65536). Note that the ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is common.

  In the eleventh embodiment, as a whole, the higher the setting, the higher the advantage for the player. That is, the configuration is such that setting 6 is most advantageous for the player, and setting 1 is most disadvantageous. In other words, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability, so the total prize balls that can be acquired by the jackpot itself increase, and even taking into account the fact that the number of prize balls due to the small jackpot that can be acquired during the latent state decreases , The higher the setting is, the higher the total advantage is. In other words, the low setting (for example, setting 1) is more disadvantageous to the player as the game is continued, so how many prize balls can be obtained in the 1 latent state (big hit) How many times a special symbol lottery can be executed without winning the game), and the short game will be a good game. It becomes a long-running game in which a prize ball can be stably obtained.

  As described above, the eleventh embodiment is configured so that it can be set to one of the six set values from 1 to 6, and the higher the setting, the lower the probability state and the higher the probability ( The jackpot probability in the (probable change) state increases. Therefore, the higher the setting, the more difficult the normal state is to continue for a long period of time (the less likely to be hammering), but the more advantageous latent state is likely to end in a relatively short period of time (big hit in the latent state). Other game states are easily set by winning.) Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state, the small winning is won with a high probability and the right variable winning device 1650 is opened. Therefore, the opportunity to win a prize ball is often given without winning the jackpot. Further, once the game is shifted to the advantageous latent state, the game is not shifted to another game state unless a jackpot is won. Therefore, in the latent state, the longer the period in which the jackpot is not won (that is, the more the player gets addicted), the more prize balls can be obtained by the small hit, which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in an advantageous latent state, the jackpot probability is relatively low, and the low setting in which the hammer is relatively easy is more likely to be 1 than in the high setting in which the jackpot probability is high and the hammer is less likely to occur. , The total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit game is likely to increase. In other words, according to the jackpot probability (probability), the game property (the game state in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are easily completed in a relatively short period, and the game state in which the disadvantageous game state and the advantageous game state are both advantageous for a relatively long time) Since it is possible to make the game characteristics different from each other easily, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the special symbol low-probability state and the jackpot probability in the special symbol high-probability state (probable change state) is configured to be common to all settings. However, the ratio of the jackpot probability between the low probability state and the high probability state may be different for each setting. More specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the low-probability state is made different according to the set value similarly to the above-described eleventh embodiment, while the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is constant regardless of the set value (for example, , 1/90). With this configuration, it is possible to make the easiness of addiction in the high-probability state common regardless of the setting, so that the advantage degree in the advantageous latent state can be made common regardless of the setting. Therefore, the superiority of the high setting can be further enhanced, so that it is possible to provide easy-to-understand gaming characteristics in which a higher setting is advantageous in all aspects. In addition, for example, the odd-number setting (settings 1, 3, and 5) and the even-number setting (settings 2, 4, and 6) may have different jackpot probabilities in the high-probability state. Specifically, for example, the configuration is such that the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is low (for example, 1/100) in the odd-number setting, while the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is high (for example, 1/70) in the even-number setting. May be. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage in the advantageous latent state can be made different between the odd number setting and the even number setting, so that the playability can be greatly changed according to the setting. Furthermore, in this case, as a jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol, even setting is configured so that the jackpot probability is higher than the odd setting, in the odd setting, and in the even setting, the setting is high It may be configured such that the greater the probability of a big hit, the higher the probability. With such a configuration, it is possible to greatly vary the playability depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. That is, in the even number setting, the disadvantageous normal state is hard to last for a long time, but since the latent state is hard to last for a long time, it is possible to realize the gaming property in which the transition of the payout is relatively gentle, while in the odd number setting, the disadvantageous normal state is difficult. It is easy to last for a long time, but the latent state is easy to last for a long time, so the addiction is severe, but once you shift to the latent state, you can expect to get more prize balls, which makes it easy for the ball change to go up and down violently In other words, it is possible to realize a game like a rough sea. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, since an appropriate setting can be selected according to the business policy of the hall, the convenience of the hall can be improved.

  Next, details of the small hit random number 11 table 202mb in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 269 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the small hit random number 11 table 202mb in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269 (b), in the eleventh embodiment, a common value is associated with the random number value determined as the small hit (the value of the first random number counter C1) regardless of the type of the special symbol. Stipulated. More specifically, 936 to 58981 is associated and defined as a range of the random number value corresponding to the small hit (the counter value of the first random number counter C1). Of the 65535 random number values (counter values) from 0 to 65535 that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) corresponding to small hits is 58046, so that the lottery of the special symbol is not performed. When executed, the rate at which the lottery result is a small hit is about 88.6% (58046/65536).

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when a lottery of a special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (a ratio of 88.6%). , The right variable winning device 1650 is frequently opened, and the prize ball can be frequently acquired by the player. Therefore, the interest of the game in the latent state can be improved, and the game can be played with a strong expectation of shifting to the latent state. In addition, by making a lottery winning with a high probability in the lottery of the first special symbol as well as in the lottery of the second special symbol, the player has intentionally or mistakenly made a right hand in the normal state. For example, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the long change of the second special symbol can be forcibly terminated (discarded) by the small hit of the first special symbol.

  Next, details of the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 270 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md. The big hit type selection 11 table 202md is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, similarly to the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 270, the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md in the eleventh embodiment includes six jackpots of "big hit A11" to "big hit F11" as the big hit types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The type is specified. On the other hand, as the jackpot types of the second special symbol, five jackpot types of “jackpot G11” to “jackpot K11” are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 270, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), “big hit A11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value “0” of the first hit type counter C2. ing. In the “big hit A11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the most advantageous latent state irrespective of the gaming state at the time of winning (time saving regardless of the gaming state). The value of the counter 203h is set to 0, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON.) This is a type of jackpot (16 round (R) probability change jackpot). The "big hit A11" is the most advantageous big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous. Since the random number value (counter value) associated with “big hit A11” is one of the 100 random number values (counter value) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the first special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of the jackpot, the rate at which the "small jackpot A11" is determined is 1% (1/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit B11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “1 to 49”. The “big hit B11” has a number of rounds of big hits of eight, and is set to a special symbol probable state after the jackpot is completed (the probable variable flag 203g is set to ON). It is. In the case where the "big hit B11" is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 65536, while in the gaming state other than the normal state (the time saving state, the probability change state, and the latent state), the time saving time is set. 0 is set to the value of the counter 203h.

  That is, when the "big hit B11" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous probability change state. In this probable change state, the number of times saved is set to 65536, so that the probable change state substantially continues until the next big hit. On the other hand, if the "big hit B11" is won in a gaming state other than the normal state, the number of times saved is set to 0, and the gaming state after the end of the big win is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit B11" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when the winning is performed in the normal state. On the other hand, when the winning is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the winning type is the most advantageous in the gaming state. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B11” is 49, so that the first special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot B11" is determined is 49% (49/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit C11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 59”. In the “big hit C11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning (the value of the time-saving counter 203h). Is set to 65536, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON).

  That is, when the "big hit C11" is won, a probable change state that substantially continues to the next big hit is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Therefore, the "big hit C11" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit C11” is 10, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot C11" is determined is 10% (10/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit D11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “60 to 64”. In the “big hit D11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning (the value of the time-saving counter 203h). Is set to 100, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON). In addition, unlike “big hit C11”, in “big hit D11”, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, so that the probability change state does not always continue until the next big hit. That is, if the special symbol lottery within 100 times after the "big hit D11" has not become a big hit, the value of the time reduction counter 203h becomes 0, and the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit D11" is a big hit type that is more advantageous than the "big hit C11" in the game state after the end of the big hit. In addition, when a special symbol lottery is won within 100 times, the operation becomes exactly the same as the "big hit D11", so that the game state after the big hit is completed is more advantageous than the "big hit C11". It can be rephrased as an easy jackpot type. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, five random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "big hit D11". In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot D11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit E11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 84”. In the “big hit E11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively disadvantageous time-saving state regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning (the value of the time-saving counter 203h). Is set to 100, and the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF). Therefore, the "big hit E11" is a big hit type that is relatively disadvantageous in terms of a game state after the big hit end. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit E11" is 20, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit E11" is determined is 20% (20/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit F11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “85 to 99”. In the “big hit F11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol (the probability change flag 203g is set to off). (8 rounds regular jackpot). In addition, when the "big hit F11" is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100, whereas when the "big hit F11" is won in a game state other than the normal state, the time saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0. Therefore, if a "big hit F11" is won in a game state other than the normal state, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, the "big hit F11" is the most disadvantageous in the game state after the end of the big hit. It is a big hit type. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit F11” is 15, so the lottery of the first special symbol is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot F11" is determined is 15% (15/100).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”, while the jackpot type is “big hit”. G11 "is defined in association with the above. In the “big hit G11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the probable change state of the special symbol (the probable change flag 203g is set to ON). 16 rounds with a big change). In addition, in the case of winning in the "big hit G11" in the normal state, 65536 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, while in the case of winning in the gaming state other than the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0. Therefore, when the "big hit G11" is won in the normal state, a probable change state that substantially continues to the next big hit is set, whereas when the "big hit G11" is won in a game state other than the normal state, An advantageous latent state is set. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit G11" is 5, so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit G11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit H11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 9”. In the “big hit H11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is two rounds, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the special change state of the special symbol (the certain change flag 203g is set to ON). (2 rounds jackpot). In addition, in the case of winning in the "big hit H11" in the normal state, 65536 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, while in the case of winning in the game state other than the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0. Therefore, when the "big hit H11" is won in the normal state, a probable change state that substantially continues to the next big hit is set, and when the "big hit H11" is won in a game state other than the normal state, An advantageous latent state is set. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit H11" is 5, so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot H11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit I11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “10 to 14”. In the “big hit I11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is two rounds, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to a certain change state of 100 time saving times regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning (of the time saving counter 203h). (The value is set to 100 and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON.) Therefore, the "big hit I11" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the game state after the big hit end. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit I11" is 5, so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit I11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 270, "big hit J11" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "15 to 64". The “big hit J11” has two rounds of big hits and is set to a probable change state in which the game state after the big hit is substantially continued to the next big hit regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning. (The value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 65536, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON.) Therefore, the "big hit J11" is a big hit type having a lower degree of advantage than the "big hit I11" in the gaming state after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 50 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit J11", so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot J11 is determined is 50% (50/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit K11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 99”. In the “big hit K11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is two rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state of 100 times of the time saving regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning (time saving counter). The value of 203h is set to 100, and the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF). Therefore, the "big hit K11" is the most unfavorable big hit type among the big hit types of the second special symbol both in terms of the number of rounds and in the game state after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit K11” is 35, so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot K11" is determined is 35% (35/100).

  In the case where the jackpot has been hit in the second special symbol lottery in the normal state, there is no jackpot type that directly shifts to the latent state. The purpose is to suppress an irregular game method of firing a game ball. That is, if the player hits right in the normal state, a long fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed, and the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that playing an irregular game is disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods.

  Next, the details of the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me in the eleventh embodiment determines a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after the end of the big hit. 11 table 202me1 for normal use, which is referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the probable change state and the time saving state, and the latent state And a fluctuation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after the RAM is cleared, and a latent 11 table 202me3 which is referred to determine a fluctuation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed. And the RAM clear table 202me4 which is referred to for the It is composed of Buru.

  Of these, the prescribed contents of the time saving / probability change 11 table 202me2 are the same as those of the probability change 7 table 202fe2 in the seventh embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here. First, with reference to FIG. 271 (a), details of the latent 11 table 202me3 constituting the variable pattern selection 11 table 202me in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 271 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the eleventh table for latent image 202me3.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (a), a super long variation of 60000 ms is defined in association with the lottery of the first special symbol regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the latent state, the fluctuation display for 600 seconds (10 minutes) is always executed. On the other hand, in the case of the lottery result of the second special symbol, if the lottery result is a hit, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 49” and the fluctuation time is 2000 ms. When the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “50 to 198”, a long variation per 5000 ms is defined in association with the variation. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 271 (a), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of place (or a small hit), the change time of the change type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 49”. An off-short variation of 2000 ms is defined in association with a long variation of 5000 ms in a variation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 198". Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, only the fluctuation pattern of a short fluctuation time (2 seconds or 5 seconds) is executed, so that the small hit of the second special symbol is performed in a relatively short period of time. The game is executed. Therefore, more prize balls can be acquired in a short period of time in the latent state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the details of the RAM clear time table 202me4 will be described with reference to FIG. 271 (b). As described above, the RAM clear table 202me4 has a special symbol lottery in a normal state (normal state after the RAM clear operation) set when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed. 6 is a data table referred to for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) based on. Here, as described above, in order to change the setting of the pachinko machine 10 (setting of a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the high probability state), the RAM clear operation is indispensable. For this reason, the RAM clearing table 202me4 is always referred to until the jackpot is won after the setting is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 39” regardless of the number of variations after the RAM clear operation. A fluctuation normal time of 20000 ms is defined in association with the normal fluctuation, and a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in a range of "40 to 119". When the value of CS1 is in the range of “120 to 198”, a special fluctuation per 40,000 ms is specified in association with the fluctuation.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is out of order and the number of changes after the RAM clear operation is a multiple of 50, a special reach change with a change time of 25000 seconds is supported regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. It is stipulated. This out-of-special-reach variation is a variation type that can be determined only in the normal state after the RAM clear operation. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a setting suggestion effect as an effect mode (fluctuation pattern effect) during execution of the out-of-special reach reach fluctuation, when receiving the fluctuation pattern command indicating the out-of-special reach reach fluctuation. I have. In other words, after the RAM clear operation (after the setting change), the setting suggestion effect can be executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times on condition that no jackpot has been won. Therefore, the player who wants to guess the setting of the pachinko machine 10 which is currently playing the game based on the content of the setting suggestion effect desires that the special symbol lottery be continuously removed at least 50 times or more. It is possible to provide a novel playability. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, if the setting suggestion effect does not occur even if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times or more after the power is turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear operation has not been performed (that is, the setting has not been changed). Can be convinced. Therefore, in the case where the result of the previous day of the pachinko machine 10 performing the game is good (the result of the jackpot probability calculated from the actual number of games (the number of special symbol lotteries) and the number of jackpots is high). Can be set to a setting (high setting) with a large jackpot probability before the previous day, and the player can be predicted that the setting has not been changed to the good setting until today. On the other hand, on the other hand, the result of the previous day of the pachinko machine 10 performing the game is poor (the actual number of games (the number of special symbol lotteries) and the number of jackpots are low and the jackpot probability is low). In this case, it is possible to make the player predict that the jackpot probability is set to a bad setting (low setting) before the previous day and the bad setting is not changed until today. As described above, the game playability of estimating the presence or absence of the setting change and the setting value can be realized by the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect, so that the interest for the advantage of the player can be further improved.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the lottery result is out of order and the number of times of change after the RAM clear operation is other than a multiple of 50, the value of the change type counter CS1 is set to “0”. A variation time of 8000 ms is defined in association with the range of “~ 70”, and a variation time of 12000 ms is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “71 to 130”. When the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "131 to 170", the variation time is out of 20,000 ms and the normal variation is associated with the value, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "171 to 198". On the other hand, a super-variation with a variation time of 30,000 ms is defined in association with the super-variation. In other words, when the number of times of change is other than a multiple of 50 and the lottery of the first special symbol is lost, the out-of-special reach change is not selected. In this way, by limiting the timing at which the out-of-special reach reach is executed (that is, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect) to the number of times that is a multiple of 50, it is possible to continue the game until the number of times of the change becomes a multiple of 50. The player can have a sense of purpose. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 that has not won the jackpot at least once on the day.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit, the change time is long per 600,000 ms regardless of the number of changes after the RAM clear operation and the value of the change type counter CS1. Fluctuations are defined in association with each other. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the out-of-change long-time change of 600000 ms is defined in association with the number of changes after the RAM clear operation and the value of the change type counter CS1. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state after the RAM clear operation, an extremely long fluctuation time of 600,000 ms is set under any circumstances. Therefore, in the normal state, the game efficiency in the case of performing the game by right-handing can be extremely deteriorated, and the special reach fluctuation is not selected even if the game comes off (the setting suggestion effect is not executed). Is extremely disadvantageous for Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of right-handing in the normal state.

  In the case of the normal table 202me1, if the first special symbol is drawn out of the RAM clearing table 202me4 by lottery, the special reach change is not selected even if the number of changes is a multiple of 50. (A variation pattern at a variation number other than a multiple of 50 is selected), and the other specified contents are the same as those in the RAM clear table 202me4. Detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf includes four fluctuation pattern tables (11 normal time tables 202me1, 11 time saving / probability change tables 202me2, 11 latent time tables 202me3, and RAMs) defined in the fluctuation pattern 11 table 202me. This is a data table that is referenced to determine which variation pattern table (variation time) is selected with reference to any of the variation pattern tables in the clear time table 202me4).

  As shown in FIG. 272, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf in the eleventh embodiment includes the gaming state after the end of the previous jackpot, the type of the previous jackpot, and the number of lotteries (variations) of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. A variation pattern table referred to for selecting a variation pattern is defined in association with the variation pattern table. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 272, the gaming state after the end of the previous jackpot is the latent state, and the previous jackpot type is the jackpot A11, B11, G11, H11, after the jackpot is over. Irrespective of the number of lotteries (number of times of change) of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the change pattern (time of change) is determined by referring to the latent 11 table 202me3 (see FIG. 271 (a)) is defined in association. Have been. Therefore, when the big hits A11, B11, G11, and H11 are won, the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed by right-handing until the next big hit, and the small hit of the second special symbol is won. An advantageous game state is provided in which the opportunity to obtain a prize ball is frequently given.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 272, the number of special symbol lotteries within 100 after the end of the jackpot for the jackpots D11 and I11 for the previous jackpot type D11 and I11 for the jackpot D11 and I11 after the end of the jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern scenario in which the time saving / probability change 11 table 202me2 is referred to and the special probability 11 table 202me3 is referred to in the case of 101 or more special symbol lotteries is defined in association with each other. For this reason, if the gaming state after the jackpot is won and the jackpot D11 or I11 is set to the probable change state, the first special symbol lottery is performed by right-handing until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the jackpot. On the other hand, the lottery is frequently executed (the long fluctuation is always set when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed). On the other hand, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed frequently after 101 times, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. An advantageous game state is formed in which a chance of winning a small hit and obtaining a prize ball is frequently given. Therefore, in the probable change state, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the lottery will be executed 101 times or more without winning the jackpot, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 272, the gaming state after the end of the previous jackpot is in a probable change state, and the previous jackpot type is other than the jackpot D11 and I11 (that is, any one of the jackpots B11, C11, G11, H11, and J11). ), A variation pattern scenario in which the time saving / probability variation 11 table 202me2 is referred to is defined irrespective of the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when the jackpots B11, C11, G11, H11, and J11 are won and the probable change state is set, a relatively advantageous game state in which the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls held until the next jackpot. To form

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 272, when the gaming state after the end of the previous jackpot is the normal state and the last jackpot type is the jackpot F11, the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the jackpot is determined. Instead, a variation pattern scenario in which the normal 11-table 202me1 is referred to is defined. For this reason, if the player does not play the game by aiming at the central first ball entrance 64c by left-handing, a game state is formed which is disadvantageous for a player whose game efficiency is significantly deteriorated.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 272, when the gaming state after the end of the previous jackpot is the time saving state and the last jackpot type is any of the jackpots E11, F11, and K11, the number of hits is within 100 after the end of the jackpot. In the case of the number of special symbol lotteries, the variation pattern scenario in which the time saving / probability change 11 table 202me2 is referred to, and in the case of 101 or more special symbols lottery times, the normal 11 table 202me1 is referred to, is defined in association with each other. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 272, the normal state after the RAM is cleared is associated with a variation pattern scenario that refers to the RAM clear table 202me4 regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries after the RAM is cleared. Stipulated. Therefore, in the normal state after the RAM is cleared, the special reach variation is selected and the setting suggestion effect is executed every time the number of times of drawing the special symbol becomes a multiple of 50. Therefore, the player who wants to guess the setting of the pachinko machine 10 which is currently playing the game based on the content of the setting suggestion effect desires that the special symbol lottery be continuously removed at least 50 times or more. It is possible to provide a novel playability. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 268 (b), details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 268 (b) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 268 (b), the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 173) in that a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db and a second 2 special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, set value storage area 203ma, winning state storage area 203mb, special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, The difference is that a special map 2 small hit flag 203mf is added. Further, the difference is that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203d k, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and the time saving end standby flag 203dm are deleted.

  The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is different from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small collision type counter C5, and the variation Each value of the type counter CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is an area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Are stored in order from the smallest area. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db are changed to the execution area. Is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each counter value stored in the execution area. When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd is a counter for counting the number of holding balls based on winning in the right second entrance 645, and the first special symbol holding for counting the number of holding balls of the first special symbol. It has the same function as the ball number counter 203da. That is, it is a counter capable of counting the reserved balls of the second special symbol up to the upper limit (4).

  The set value storage area 203ma is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the set values of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, if “00H” is stored as data in the set value storage area 203ma, it indicates that the set value “1” is set, and if “01H” is stored as data, If the set value “2” is set, and “02H” is stored as data, it indicates that the set value “3” is set, and “03H” is stored as data. For example, it indicates that the set value “4” is set, and if “04H” is stored as data, it indicates that the set value “5” is set, and “05H” is stored as data. Indicates that the set value “6” has been set. When a special symbol lottery is executed, the data in the set value storage area 203ma is read, and a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is executed with a lottery probability corresponding to the set value indicated by the read data. That is, in the first random number 11 table 202ma (see FIG. 269 (a)), the range of the random number value corresponding to the set value indicated by the data in the set value storage area 203ma and the first random number stored in the execution area A special symbol lottery is executed by comparing the value of the random number counter C1 (see S492 and S493 in FIG. 278 and S1081 and S1082 in FIG. 285). Note that the initial value of the setting value storage area 203ma is set to “00H”, and every time the setting switch 110c is pressed (operated) in the setting change state, “01H” → “02H” →. -> The value is updated by "05H" and "01H" each time. When the setting switch 110c is further pressed while the data is "05H", the data is updated to "01H". When the power is turned on with the depression of the RAM clear switch 122, all the data in the RAM 203 is reset (cleared) to write. Therefore, when only the RAM clear operation is performed, the value of the set value storage area 203ma is also reset to the initial value “01H”. That is, even if only the RAM clear operation is performed without performing the setting change operation, the setting can be changed to 1. Thereby, the convenience of the hall can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, all the data in the RAM 203 is cleared when the power is turned on by pressing the RAM clear switch 122 (RAM clear operation). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, only the data in the setting value storage area 203ma may be retained even when the RAM clear operation is performed. That is, the configuration may be such that the data in the setting value storage area 203ma is not updated (changed) unless the setting switch 110c is operated (pressed) in the setting change state. With such a configuration, when the hole side desires to reset the data in the RAM 203 without changing the set value (for example, the business hours of the hall end with the most advantageous latent state, the resetting is performed). Otherwise, the most advantageous state may be maintained even at the start of the next business day, etc.), so that the desire can be easily fulfilled, so that the convenience of the hall can be improved.

  The winning state storage area 203mb is a storage area for storing information indicating a gaming state at the time of winning a jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 and the probability change flag 203fa is off), the normal state is stored in the winning state storage area 203mb. "00H" is stored as information indicating On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time reduction state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more and the probability change flag 203fa is off), the time reduction state is indicated in the winning state storage area 203mb. “01H” is stored as information. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probable change state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more and the probable change flag 203fa is on), the probable change state is indicated in the winning state storage area 203mb. “02H” is stored as information. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 and the probability variable flag 203fa is on), the latent state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. “03H” is stored as the indicating information. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203mb is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting a gaming state after the jackpot has ended (see S1991 in FIG. 292).

  The special map 1 big hit flag 203mc indicates that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on a game ball having entered the central first entrance 64c or the right first entrance 164r is changed at the start of the change. This flag is set to ON when it is determined that the value matches the jackpot determination value (see S459 in FIG. 278). This special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol (S10855 in FIG. 282, S1594 in FIG. 288, S11608 in FIG. 289). reference).

  When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends in a state where the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc is turned on, a process of detaching the second special symbol and forcibly stopping at the symbol is executed (see S854 of FIG. 282). . Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is a big hit.

  The special figure 2 big hit flag 203md is set when the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the right second entrance 645 is determined to match the big hit determination value at the start of the change. This flag is set to ON (see S1059 in FIG. 285). This special figure 2 big hit flag 203md is set to OFF when the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit or the small hit of the first special symbol is set (S10855 in FIG. 282, S1594 in FIG. 288, S11608 in FIG. 289). reference).

  When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends in a state where the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md is on, a process of removing the first special symbol and forcibly stopping the second special symbol is executed (see S1554 of FIG. 288). . Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is a big hit.

  The special figure 1 small hit flag 203me indicates that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on a game ball having entered the center first entrance 64c or the right first entrance 164r at the start of the change. This flag is set to ON when it is determined that it matches the small hit determination value (see S10481 in FIG. 279). This special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit or the big hit of the second special symbol (S3009 in FIG. 283, S1594 in FIG. 288, and S1594 in FIG. 289). See S11608). When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends in a state where the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is turned on, a process of detaching the second special symbol and forcibly stopping at the symbol is executed (see S3006 of FIG. 283). ). As a result, during the execution of the small hit of the first special symbol, a large hit or a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, and a problem occurs in which the big hit or the small hit is started while the small hit is repeated. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  The special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf indicates that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on the game ball having entered the right second entrance 645 coincides with the small hit determination value at the start of the change. This flag is set to ON when it is determined (see S1332 in FIG. 286). This special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit or the large hit of the first special symbol (S10855 in FIG. 282, S3009 in FIG. 283, and S3009 in FIG. 289). See S11608). When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends in a state where the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is on, a process of removing the first special symbol and forcibly stopping at the symbol is executed (see S11605 in FIG. 289). ). As a result, during the execution of the small hit of the second special symbol, a lottery or a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, and a problem occurs in which the big hit or the small hit is started while the small hit is repeated. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  Next, a method of shifting the state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment realized by performing control based on various tables specified in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described. 273 will be described. FIG. 273 is a diagram illustrating a method of shifting the state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment. Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment has roughly four game states. That is, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), a time reduction state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a time reduction state of a normal symbol), and a probability change state (a probability variation state of a special symbol) In addition, there are provided four game states of a normal symbol time reduction state and a latent state (a special symbol positive change state and a normal symbol normal state). In the following, for the sake of simplicity, the most disadvantageous normal state is referred to as a normal mode, and the degree of advantage is the second lowest after the normal state (normal mode), but the game can be played with almost no decrease in the number of balls held. The time saving state is referred to as a pullback mode, and the probable change state having a relatively high degree of advantage in which the player can play a game until the next jackpot with almost no reduction of the possessed ball is referred to as a extended play mode A, and then the jackpot. The most advantageous latent state in which small wins are frequently won and the number of possessed balls can be continuously increased is referred to as extended mode B. In FIG. 273, the normal mode is illustrated on the upper left side, the pullback mode is illustrated on the upper right side, the extended mode A is illustrated on the lower left side, and the extended mode B is illustrated on the lower right side.

  As shown in the upper left part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility that the mode will shift from the normal mode to another state when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 273, when the jackpot A11 determined to be the jackpot of the first special symbol and determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 1% is selected (determined), after the end of the jackpot, the consecutive The mode shifts to Zhuang mode B. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected and one of the jackpots B11 to D11 determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 64% is selected (determined), a relatively advantageous extended mode A after the end of the jackpot. Move to. On the other hand, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected and one of the jackpots E11 and F11 determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 35% is selected (determined), the pullback mode having a relatively low degree of advantage after the jackpot is completed. Move to. For this reason, when a jackpot is won in the normal mode, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of shifting to one of the extended game modes A and B. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability is different depending on the setting, and the higher the setting (the higher the setting), the higher the jackpot probability. Therefore, the possibility of winning a jackpot earlier in the normal mode, which is more disadvantageous as the setting is higher, is increased. In other words, the higher the setting, the longer the period during which the jackpot is not won in the disadvantageous normal mode is less likely to be longer (more difficult to add). As described above, if a jackpot is won in the normal mode, the mode always shifts to another mode with a higher degree of advantage compared to the normal mode. Therefore, in the normal mode, the higher setting with the higher jackpot probability is compared with the lower setting. The degree of advantage is increased.

  Also, as shown in the upper right part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility that the state may be shifted from the retraction mode to another state when a jackpot has been reached or when a prescribed number of time savings has elapsed. Specifically, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 273, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected and one of the jackpots A11 and B11 determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type is selected (determined). Shifts to the most advantageous series mode B after the end of the jackpot. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected and one of the jackpots C11 and D11 determined at a rate of 15% as the jackpot type is selected (determined), a relatively advantageous extended mode A after the end of the jackpot. Move to. In addition, when the jackpot F11 determined as the jackpot type of the first special symbol and determined at a rate of 15% as the jackpot type is selected (determined), and a prescribed number of times of reduction (100 times) elapses after the pullback mode is set. In this case, the mode is shifted to the normal mode which is disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot E11 determined as the jackpot type of the first special symbol and determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 20% is selected (determined), the pullback mode having a comparatively low degree of advantage is again performed after the end of the jackpot. Set (loop through pullback mode). Therefore, in the pull-back mode, the ratio of setting the most advantageous extended mode B when a jackpot is won is significantly higher than that in the normal mode (1% → 50%). , It can be expected to shift to the extended-villa mode B more strongly. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot during the prescribed number of time savings (100 times). In other words, the higher the setting, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot again within the number of time savings (returning the jackpot) and shifting to the most advantageous extended play mode B, while the lower the setting, the less the number of time savings The possibility of shifting to the disadvantageous normal mode without winning a jackpot increases. Therefore, also in the retraction mode, the high setting having a high jackpot probability has a higher degree of advantage than the low setting as in the normal mode.

  In addition, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility that the state shifts from the extended-villa mode A to another state when a big hit occurs or when a specified number of time savings has elapsed. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 273, the first special symbol is a jackpot, and the jackpots A11 and B11 determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type are selected (determined). When the number of time savings set in the mode A has elapsed, the mode shifts to the extended play mode B, which is the most advantageous for the player. In addition, when the jackpot E11 determined as the jackpot type of the first special symbol and the jackpot type determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the pullback mode having a relatively low degree of advantage. You. Further, when the jackpot F11 determined as the jackpot type of the first special symbol and determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 15% is selected (determined), the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode most disadvantageous to the player. You. On the other hand, when the jackpots C11 and D11 determined as the jackpot type of the first special symbol and determined at a rate of 15% as the jackpot type are determined, the extended game mode A is set again after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in the extended game mode A, the jackpot probability increases, and the ratio of shifting to the advantageous extended mode B at the time of winning the jackpot is also increased (50%) as in the pullback mode. , To form a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, even in the high probability (probable change) state of the special symbol, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability. Therefore, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot earlier. If 100 times are set as the number of time savings in the extended-villa mode A, the lower the setting is, the lottery of the special symbol, and the number of consecutive times is 100. Is more likely to occur, so that it is easier to shift to the more advantageous extended-villa mode B. That is, a novel gaming property in which the lower the setting is, the higher the advantage is, can be realized. In addition, in the extended-villa mode A, it is more likely that the number of time savings (65536 times) that substantially lasts until the next big hit is set, but when continuing to the next big hit, the big hit probability gives the degree of advantage. The effect is relatively small. This is because, while the probable change state continues, the game ball can easily enter the right first entrance 164r, so that the game can be played with almost no decrease in the number of possessed balls.

  Further, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility that the state is shifted from the extended-villa mode B to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 273, the jackpot becomes the second special symbol, and the jackpots I11 and J11 determined at a rate of 55% as the jackpot type are selected (determined). After the end, the mode is shifted to the extended play mode A which is relatively advantageous to the player. If the jackpot K11 is determined to be the jackpot of the second special symbol and determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 35%, the pullback mode having a low degree of advantage is set after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, when the jackpots G11 and H11 determined as the jackpot type of the second special symbol and determined at a rate of 10% as the jackpot type are selected (determined), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is the most advantageous again. The mode is set to the extended mode B (the extended mode B is looped). As described above, in the extended play mode B, while staying in the extended play mode, it is possible to obtain a prize ball due to a small hit of the second special symbol, and to switch to the most disadvantageous normal mode when a big hit occurs. This is very advantageous for the player because there is no possibility of shifting to the above. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the higher the setting is, the higher the jackpot probability becomes, so that the extended-villa mode B which is advantageous to the player is easily ended early (the jackpot is won with a small number of lotteries). Easier). The extended play mode B substantially continues until the next jackpot, and while the extended play mode B is continued, it is possible to frequently acquire a prize ball due to a small hit, so that the big hit is not won. You can expect to get more prize balls. Therefore, a low setting in which it is difficult to win a jackpot (the jackpot probability is low) has a higher expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained when the mode is shifted to the extended-play mode B, and is therefore the most advantageous game. In this state, a novel gaming property in which a lower setting is more advantageous can be realized. In other words, in the extended-villa mode B, it is possible to realize a very special playability in which the degree of advantage decreases as the winning becomes easier, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 274, details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 274, the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RM 222 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 30A) in the setting suggestion effect selection table. The only difference is that 222 ma is added. The setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma indicates the effect of the setting suggestion effect performed during the execution period of the out-of-special reach reach change when the main controller 110 notifies the change type command of the out-of-special reach reach as a change type. It is a data table referred to for selection.

  Details of the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 275 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma. As shown in FIG. 275, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma in the eleventh embodiment defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect mode in association with each setting value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 275, for the effect mode of one symbol reach, in the case of setting 1, ten counter values “0 to 9” are associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f. In the case of settings 2 to 6, three counter values “0 to 2” are defined in association with each other as a range of the value of the effect counter 223f. For this reason, when the out-of-special reach fluctuation is notified in the setting 1 (when the number of fluctuations after the setting change becomes a multiple of 50), the fluctuation pattern effect of one symbol reach is selected at a rate of 10% (10 / On the other hand, when a special reach variation is notified in a setting other than the setting 1, the variation pattern effect of one symbol reach is selected at a rate of 3%. Therefore, when one symbol reach is executed when the number of changes after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of the minimum setting of 1 is relatively high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the setting 1, three counter values “10 to 12” are defined as the value of the effect counter 223 f in association with the effect mode of the two symbol reach, and the setting is performed. In the case of 2, ten counter values of "3 to 12" are defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of the setting 3 to 6, three counter values of "3 to 5" are associated with each other. Stipulated. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the setting 1, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the two symbol reach is selected is 1% (1/100), and when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the setting 2, 2 The ratio at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the symbol reach is selected is 10% (10/100), and the ratio at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the two symbol reach is selected when the special fluctuation is notified in the setting 3 to 6 is 3 % (3/100). For this reason, when the two symbol reach is executed when the number of changes after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of the setting 2 is relatively high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the settings 1 and 2, three counter values “13 to 15” are defined as the value of the effect counter 223 f for the effect mode of the three symbol reach. In the case of setting 3, 15 counter values of “6 to 20” are defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of settings 4 to 6, three counter values of “6 to 8” correspond. It is stipulated. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the three symbol reach is selected is 3% (3/100). When the change is notified, the ratio at which the change pattern effect of the three symbol reach is selected is 15% (15/100). Therefore, when the three symbol reach is executed when the number of changes after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 3 is relatively high.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the settings 1 and 2, three counter values “16 to 18” are defined as the value of the effect counter 223f for the effect mode of the four symbol reach. In the case of setting 3, three counter values of "21 to 23" are defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 4, fifteen counter values of "9 to 23" are associated with each other. In the case of settings 5 and 6, seven counter values “9 to 15” are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 1 to 3, the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern effect of the four symbol reach is 3% (3/100), and when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the setting 4 The ratio at which the four-pattern reach variation pattern effect is selected is 15% (15/100), and the ratio at which the four-pattern reach variation pattern effect is selected when a special deviation is notified in the settings 5 and 6. Is 7% (7/100). Therefore, when the four symbol reach is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of the setting 4 is relatively high, and the player has the expectation of the setting 5 or 6 as well. You can make it.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the settings 1 and 2, three counter values “19 to 21” are defined as the value of the effect counter 223 f in the five symbol reach effect mode. In the case of settings 3 and 4, three counter values of "23 to 26" are defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 5, 15 counter values of "15 to 29" correspond. In the case of setting 6, seven counter values “16 to 22” are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 1 to 4, the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern effect of the five symbol reach is 3% (3/100), and when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the setting 5 The rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the five symbol reach is selected is 15% (15/100), and the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the five symbol reach is selected when the special fluctuation is notified in the setting 6 is 7 % (7/100). For this reason, when 5 symbol reach is executed when the number of changes after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of the setting 5 is relatively high, and the expectation of the setting 6 is also given to the player. Can be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the setting 1 or 2, three counter values “22 to 24” are defined as the value of the effect counter 223 f for the effect of the six symbol reach. In the case of the settings 3 and 4, three counter values of “27 to 29” are defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of the setting 5, three counter values of “30 to 32” correspond. In the case of setting 6, fifteen counter values “23 to 38” are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 1 to 5, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the 6 symbol reach is selected is 3% (3/100), and when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the setting 6 The ratio at which the fluctuation pattern effect of 6 symbol reach is selected is 15% (15/100). Therefore, when the six symbol reach is executed when the number of changes after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of the setting 6 is relatively high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the setting 1 or 2, the value of the effect counter 223f is defined in association with 75 counter values of “25 to 99” for the effect mode of the eight symbol reach. In the case of settings 3 and 4, 70 counter values of "30 to 99" are defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 5, 67 counter values of "33 to 99" correspond. In the case of setting 6, 57 counter values “39 to 96” are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 1 and 2, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the eight symbol reach is selected is 75% (75/100), and the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 3 and 4. In this case, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the eight symbol reach is selected is 70% (70/100), and the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the eight symbol reach is selected when the special fluctuation is notified in the setting 5 Is 67% (67/100), and when the special fluctuation is notified in the setting 6, the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern effect of the eight symbol reach is 57%. Therefore, the lower the setting, the easier it is to select the variation pattern effect of the eight symbol reach, and when the eight symbol reach is executed at a multiple of 50 of the variation after the setting change, the possibility of the low setting is relatively low. Get higher.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the setting 6 for the effect form of the nine symbol reach, three counter values “97 to 99” are defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f. On the other hand, in the case of other settings, the value of the effect counter 223f is not associated. Therefore, when 9 symbols reach is executed when the number of changes after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the setting 6, which is the highest setting, is determined.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the setting can be estimated from the content every time the number of times of change after the setting change becomes a multiple of 50 (the selectivity of each effect mode differs for each setting value). It is configured to execute a setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to remind the player to continue the game until the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is a multiple of 50, thereby improving the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 from the time when the power is turned on until the jackpot is won. Can be done.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Control Device in Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 276 to 292. First, the details of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121) will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121) is executed in place of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 119, S151) of the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), and is executed in the seventh embodiment (FIG. 119, S151). Similarly to the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 119) in the fourth embodiment), this is a process for performing display settings on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

  Of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIGS. 276 and S121), in the processes of S251, S254, S259, and S262, the special symbol variation process 4 (FIGS. 119 and S151) of the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) is respectively performed. ), The same processes as those of S251, S254, S259 and S262 are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 276, in the special symbol variation process 11 (S121) in the eleventh embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed in the process of S254 (the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203di). Is larger than 0) (S254: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di is subtracted and updated (S291), and the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device is performed. Update (S292). Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di updated in the process of S291 is 0 (S256), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S256). : Yes), the first special symbol change stop process 11 for setting the stop display of the first special symbol is executed (S293), and the process proceeds to S259. Details of the first special symbol change stop processing 11 (S293) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 282 and 283. If it is determined in the process of S256 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not 0 (S256: No), the process of S293 is skipped and the process proceeds to S259.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S254 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S254: No), it means that the first special symbol is not in the fluctuation display. Next, a first special symbol variation start process 11 for starting the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (S294), and the process proceeds to S259. Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 277 to 281, the first special symbol change start process 11 (S294) is the first special symbol change start process 7 (see FIG. 177) in the seventh embodiment. Is a process executed in place of.

  In the special symbol variation process 11 according to the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S259 that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is a value larger than 0 (S259: No), the current value is the In order to indicate that the special symbol 2 is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuating time counter 203dj is subtracted and updated (S295), and the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device. Is updated (S296), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj after the update in the process of S295 has become 0 (S262). In the processing of S262, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj has been updated to 0 (S262: Yes), it means that the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol has elapsed, The second special symbol change stop process 11 for setting the symbol stop display is executed (S297), and this process ends. Here, although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289, the second special symbol change stop processing 11 (S297) is the second special symbol change stop processing 7 (see FIG. 180) in the seventh embodiment. ). On the other hand, in the process of S262, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj after the update has not been updated to 0 (S262: No), the process of S297 is skipped and the present process ends as it is. I do.

  As shown in FIG. 276, if it is determined in the processing of S259 that the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S259: No), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed. Since it means that the display is not executed, the second special symbol change start process 11 for starting the change display of the second special symbol is executed (S298), and this process ends. Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 284 to 287, this second special symbol change start process 11 (S298) is replaced with the second special symbol change start process 7 (see FIG. 177) in the seventh embodiment. This is the process executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 277, details of the first special symbol change start process 11 (S294), which is one of the special symbol change processes 11 (FIG. 276, S121), will be described. The first special symbol change start process 11 (S294) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 120, S258) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) described above. This is a process for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294), in each process of S351 to S355, the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S258) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) is performed. The same processes as those in S351 to S355 are executed.

  In the first special symbol change start process 11 (S294) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S355, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 for executing the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is executed. (S391). Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 278 and 279, the first special symbol big hit determination process 11 (S391) is the first special symbol big hit determination process in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment). This is a process executed in place of (see FIG. 121).

  When the process of S391 is completed, next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) according to the result of the special symbol lottery is executed (S392). Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 280, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 7) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment). 122). When the processing in S392 ends, a game state update process for updating the game state is executed (S393), and the processing ends. Details of the game state update processing (S393) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 278, details of the first special symbol big hit determination process 11 (S391), which is one of the first special symbol change start processes 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. The first special symbol big hit determination process 11 (S391) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 121, S356) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) described above. As described above, this is a process for executing the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol.

  Of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391), in each of S451 and S458 to S461, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 121, S356) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) is respectively performed. The same processes as those of S451 and S458 to S461 are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 278, in the first special symbol big hit determination process 11 (S391) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S451 is completed, it is next determined whether the probability change flag 203fa is set to ON. (S491), when it is determined that the probability change flag 203fa is ON (S491: Yes), it means that the current state is the special symbol high probability state (probability variation state), and thus the first hit for the high probability time is performed. The random number value corresponding to the current set value is read out from the random number 11 table 202ma (see FIG. 269 (a)) (S492), and the process proceeds to S494. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S491 that the probability change flag 203fa is off (S491: No), it means that the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol, and thus the first random number for the low probability state. From the eleventh table 202ma (see FIG. 269 (a)), a random number corresponding to the current set value is read out (S493), and the process proceeds to S494. In the processing of S494 executed after the processing of S492 or S493, a lottery result (judgment result) of the jackpot lottery is acquired using the winning random number value read in the processing of S492 or S493 and the data of the execution area (S494). ), The process proceeds to S458.

  In the first special symbol big hit determination process 11 (see FIG. 278) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S458 that the current lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit (S458: No) ), The special figure 1 departure variation process 11 for setting a stop symbol according to the departure type is executed (S495), and this process is ended. Details of the special figure 1 departure variation processing 11 (S495) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The special figure 1 departure variation process 11 (S495) is a process for setting a stop symbol when the special symbol lottery result is deviated (including a small hit which is a type of departure). This processing is the same as the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8 (see FIG. 210) in the embodiment. Of the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 11 (see FIG. 279) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of S485 and S487 to S489, the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8 (FIG. 210, S481) in the eighth embodiment is respectively performed. ), And the same processes as those in S487 and S487 to S489.

  In the special figure 1 departure variation processing 11 (S495) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the processing of S485 that the current special symbol lottery result is a small hit (S485: Yes), the special figure The small hit flag 203me is set to ON (S10481), and the process shifts to S487. By setting the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, it is possible to easily determine that it is sufficient to stop at the small hit symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 280, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392), which is one of the first special symbol variation start processes 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 122, S357) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) described above. It is.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392), in each of the processes S551 to S553 and S555 to S559, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) is performed. The same processes as those of S551 to S553 and S555 to S559 of (FIG. 122, S357) are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 280, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) in the eleventh embodiment, after performing the process of S553, referring to the variation pattern scenario table 202mf (see FIG. 272). The variation pattern table corresponding to the number of times of variation is read (S560), and the process proceeds to S555. By reading the fluctuation pattern table with reference to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf, the fluctuation pattern can be varied according to the number of fluctuations after the big hit, the game state, and the previous big hit type, so that the fluctuation pattern is diversified. be able to. In the processing after S555, the variation pattern is selected by referring to the read variation pattern table, as in the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 122) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment). Then, a process of setting the start of the selected variation pattern is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 281, details of the game state update processing (S393), which is one of the first special symbol change start processing 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. This game state update processing (S393) is processing for updating the game state at the start of the change.

  As shown in FIG. 281, in the gaming state update processing (S393), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a value larger than 0, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is during the time reduction (S2901). ). In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 (S2901: No), the game state (the number of time reductions) does not need to be updated, and thus the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S2901: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S2902), and the remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the time reduction counter is issued. It is set (S2903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h after the subtraction has become 0 (S2904). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h has become 0 (S2904: Yes), the gaming state has been changed. This means that the process moves to S2905 to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the changed gaming state. On the other hand, in the process of S2904, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h after the subtraction is not 0 (S2904: No), the game state is not changed, and thus the present process is terminated as it is.

  In the processing of S2905, it is determined whether or not the probable change flag 203fa is on (S2905). If it is determined that the probable change flag 203fa is on (S2905: Yes), the number of time savings is 0 in the probable change state. Therefore, a state command indicating the latent state is set (S2906), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2905 that the probability change flag 203fa is OFF (S2905: No), it means that the number of time savings has become 0 in the time saving state and the state has shifted to the normal state. The indicated status command is set (S2907), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 282, details of the first special symbol change stop processing 11 (S293) will be described. The first special symbol change stop process 11 (S293) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol change stop process 7 (FIG. 175, S278) in the seventh embodiment described above. This is a process for setting a stop display.

  In the first special symbol variation stop process 11 (S293), in each of the processes of S851 to S855, S863, and S864, S851 of the first special symbol variation stop process 7 (FIG. 175, S278) of the seventh embodiment is respectively performed. The same processing as the processing of S855, S863, and S864 is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 282, in the first special symbol variation stop process 11 (S293) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S851, it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc is set to off. (S581: No), it means that the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit, so the special figure 1 departure stop processing for stopping and displaying the first special symbol with the deviated symbol is executed (S10851), and Move on to processing. Details of the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S10851) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S581 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc is set to ON (S581: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0. It is determined (S10852). In the processing of S10852, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0 (S10852: Yes), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is removed and the forcible stop is performed at the symbol. To S855, and then proceeds to S10853. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is 0 (S10852: No), it means that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not executed, and thus the processing of S852 to S855 is performed. Is skipped, and the flow shifts to the process of S10853.

  In the processing of S10853, the start of the jackpot is set (S10853), and the data stored in the winning state storage area 203mb is changed to data according to the current gaming state (that is, data indicating the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning). The value is updated (S10854), and the values of the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf, probability change flag 203fa, and time-saving counter 203h are all reset (S10855). Next, the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S10856), and the flow shifts to the process of S863.

  Next, the details of the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S10851) executed in the first special symbol change stop processing 11 (see FIGS. 282 and S293) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S10851).

  In the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S10851), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is on (S3001), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is off. (S3001: No) means that the lottery result of this special symbol is purely out of place (not a small hit), so the first symbol display device 37 displays the first special symbol during the variable display. The fluctuation stop at the off symbol is set (S3002), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3001 that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is ON (S3001: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 or not. (S3003). In the process of S3003, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S3003: Yes), it means that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is being executed, A process for forcibly stopping the second special symbol when it comes off is executed. More specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S3004), a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol is set (S3005), and the first symbol display device 37 is set. In step S3006, a change stop is set for the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner. Next, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is set to 0 (S3007), and the process proceeds to S3008.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3003 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is 0 (S3003: No), it means that the second special symbol is not in the fluctuation display, so The process of S3007 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3008.

  In the processing of S3008, the start of the small hit of the first special symbol is set (S3008), and the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf are turned off ( 3009). Next, data indicating that a small hit is being made is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S3010), and the first symbol display device 37 stops changing the first special symbol being changed and displayed with the small hit symbol. This is set (S3011), and this process ends.

  By executing the special figure 1 departure stop processing (see FIG. 283), when a small hit of the first special symbol is achieved, the second special symbol is forcibly deviated and stopped when the small hit is displayed. Can be done. Therefore, especially in the case where the second special symbol performs a long fluctuation in the normal state, the long fluctuation can be easily terminated only by the small win of winning with a high probability in the lottery of the first special symbol. .

  Next, the details of the second special symbol change start process 11 (S298) will be described with reference to FIG. The second special symbol change start process 11 (S298) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol change start process 7 (FIG. 177, S280) in the seventh embodiment.

  In the second special symbol change start process 11 (S298), in each of the processes of S951 and S952, the processes of S951 and S952 of the second special symbol change start process 7 (FIG. 177, S280) in the seventh embodiment are respectively performed. The same processing as each processing is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 284, in the second special symbol change start process 11 (S298) in the eleventh embodiment, the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is not set to ON in the process of S951, that is, When it is determined that the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol (S951: No), the processes of S953 to S957, S981, and S982 are executed, and the process proceeds to S983 (S393) described later. The processing of S953 to S957, S981, and S982 is different from the processing of S351 to S355, S391, and S392 of the first special symbol variation start processing 11 (FIG. 277, S294) by the first special symbol holding ball. Number counter 203dd, value of first special symbol reserved ball number counter (N1), first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, first special symbol big hit determination process 11 (S391), first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 ( S392), the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981), The details are the same as in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) except that the process is changed to S11. For omitted. Furthermore, in the second special symbol variation start process 11 (see FIG. 284) in the eleventh embodiment, when the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) is completed, the above-described gaming state update process (FIGS. 281 and S393) ) Is executed (S983), and this process ends.

  Next, the details of the second special symbol big hit determination process 11 (S981), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process 11 (FIG. 284, S298), will be described with reference to FIG. The second special symbol big hit determination process 11 (S981) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (FIG. 178, S978) in the seventh embodiment described above, and the second special symbol big hit determination process 11 This is a process for executing a jackpot lottery.

  Of the second special symbol big hit determination processing 11 (S981), in each of S1051, S1058 to S1061 and S1071 processing, S1051, S1051 of the second special symbol big hit determination processing 7 (FIG. 178, S978) of the seventh embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those in S1058 to S1061 and S1071 are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 285, in the second special symbol big hit determination processing 11 (S981) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1071 that the probable change flag 203fa is set to ON (S1071). : Yes), the random number value corresponding to the current set value is read out from the first random number 11 table 202ma for high probability (see FIG. 269 (a)) (S1081), and the process proceeds to S1083. I do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1071 that the probability change flag 203fa is not set to ON (S1071: No), the first random number 11 table 202ma for the low probability state (see FIG. 269 (a)) is used. The random number value corresponding to the current setting value is read (S1082), and the process proceeds to S1083. In the processing of S1083, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery (result determination result) is obtained based on the winning random number value read in the processing of S1081 and S1082 and the data of the execution area (S1083).

  In the second special symbol big hit determination process 11 (see FIG. 285) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the current lottery is not a big hit in the process of S1058 (S1058: No), the second special symbol big hit is determined. The special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing 11 for setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the deviation is executed (S1084), and this processing ends. Details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 11 (S1084) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 286, in the special figure 2 deviation variation process 11 (S1084), first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S1331), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit, (S1331: Yes), the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is set to ON (S1332). Next, the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S1333), a small hit symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1334), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1331, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (that is, it is out of place) (S1331: No), a out-of-design symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Is set (S1335), and this processing ends. By executing the special figure 2 deviation variation process 11 (see FIG. 286), an appropriate stop symbol can be set according to whether the type of deviation is a pure deviation or a small hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 287, details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processes 11 (FIG. 284, S298), will be described. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) is performed in place of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 129 and S956) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment). It is.

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982), in each process of S1251 to S1253, S1255, S1256, and S1258 to S1260, the second special symbol in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) is used. The same processes as those of S1251 to S1253, S1255, S1256, and S1258 to S1260 of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 129, S956) are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 287, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1251 that the special figure 2 lottery result is not a jackpot ( (S1251: No), the process of S1252 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1253.

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (see FIG. 287) according to the eleventh embodiment, after performing the process of S1253, the variation corresponding to the number of variations is performed with reference to the variation pattern scenario table 202mf (FIG. 271). The pattern table is read (S1281), and thereafter, the processing of S1255, S1256, S1258 to S1260 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol change stop processing 11 (S297) will be described with reference to FIG. The second special symbol change stop process 11 (S297) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol change stop process 7 (FIG. 180, S283) in the seventh embodiment.

  In the second special symbol variation stop process 11 (S297), in each of the processes of S1505, S1551, S1553, S1554, and S1561 to S1563, the second special symbol variation stop process 7 (FIG. 180, FIG. The same processes as those of S1505, S1551, S1553, S1554, and S1561 to S1563 of S283) are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 288, in the second special symbol change stop processing 11 (S297) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1551 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md is off (S1551). : No), a special figure 2 departure stop process 11 for stopping and displaying the second special symbol with a stop symbol corresponding to the departure is executed (S1596), and the flow shifts to the processing of S1562. Details of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 (S1596) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1551 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md is ON (S1551: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is greater than 0 ( S1591). In the process of S1591, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is greater than 0 (S1591: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (S1592), and the first figure during the fluctuation display is set. The processing of S1553, S1554, and S1505 for forcibly stopping the special symbol with the missing symbol is executed, and the process proceeds to S1593.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1591 that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S1591: No), it means that the first special symbol is not in the fluctuation display, and the first special symbol is not displayed. Since it is not necessary to forcibly stop the special symbol, the processing of S1592, S1553, S1554, and S1505 is skipped, and the flow proceeds to the processing of S1593.

  In the processing of S1593, the start of the jackpot is set (S1593), and the data in the winning state storage area 203mb is updated to data according to the current gaming state (data indicating the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning) (S1594). Next, the values of the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, the probability change flag 203fa, and the time-saving counter 203h are all reset (S1595), and the processing shifts to S1561.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 (S1596) will be described with reference to FIG. The special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 (S1596) is a processing executed in place of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (FIG. 181, S1584) in the above-described seventh embodiment, and removes the second special symbol. This is a process for stopping at a corresponding stop symbol.

  In the special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 (S1596), the processing of S1660 is the same as the processing of S1660 of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (FIG. 181, S1584) in the seventh embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 289, in the special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 (S1596) in the eleventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is set to ON (S11601). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203m in FIG. 2 is set to ON (S11601: Yes), then, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is larger than 0, that is, the first special symbol fluctuates. It is determined whether it is being displayed (S11602). In the process of S11602, if it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (the value of the special figure 1 fluctuating time counter 203di is larger than 0) (S11602: Yes), the fluctuating first special symbol is displayed. Is executed and a process of forcibly stopping at a symbol is executed. Specifically, the special figure 1 change stop flag is set to ON (S11603), and a special figure 1 change stop command for indicating that the special figure 1 change stop flag is set to ON is set (S11604). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a deviated symbol (S11605), the value of the special symbol 1 variable time counter is set to 0 (S11606), and the process shifts to S11607.

  On the other hand, in the process of S11602, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 change time counter is 0 (S11602: No), the change display of the first special design is not performed because the first special design is not changing. The process of S11603 to S11606 for forcibly stopping is skipped, and the process proceeds to S11607.

  In the process of S11607, the start of the special figure 2 small hit is set (S11607), and the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf are set to off (S11608). Next, data indicating that a small hit is being made is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S11609), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol (S11610), and this processing is performed. To end.

  Next, the content of the startup process 11 will be described with reference to FIG. This start-up process 11 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (FIG. 54) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process executed to perform various initial settings based on.

  In each of the steps S1701 to S1714 of the start-up processing 11, the same processing as the steps S1701 to S1714 of the start-up processing (FIG. 54) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed. You.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 290, in the startup process 11 in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S1703, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is located at the ON position (S1721). In the process of S1721, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is located at the ON position (S1721: Yes), it means that the setting key 110b is set to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. A set value control process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S1722), and the process proceeds to S1710. Details of the set value control processing (S1722) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1721 that the setting key is not at the ON position (S1721: No), the process proceeds to step S1704.

  In the start-up process 11 (see FIG. 290) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S1710, a status command indicating the current game state is set (S1723), and the process proceeds to S1711.

  Next, the contents of the set value control process (S1722), which is one of the startup processes 11 (FIG. 290), will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 291, in the setting value control process (S1722), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 265) is turned on (S3101). ), A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S3102). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S3103, S3104). In the initialization processing of the RAM (S3103, S3104), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S3103), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S3104). After the execution of the initialization processing of the RAM 203, a state command indicating a setting change state is set (S3105), and the processing shifts to S3106.

  In the process of S3106, it is determined whether the setting switch 110c is turned on (pressed) (S3106). In the process of S3106, when it is determined that the setting switch 110c is turned on (pressed) (S3106: Yes), the data of the setting value storage area 203ma is updated by adding 1 (S3107), and the process of S3108 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S3106, if it is determined that the setting switch is off (S3106: No), the process of S3107 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3108.

  In the process of S3108, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is located at the off position (S3108). If it is determined that the setting key 110b is located at the off position (S3108: Yes), the process ends. That is, the setting change state ends, and the process returns to the start-up process 11 (see FIG. 292). Thereby, it is possible to shift to a playable state in which a normal game can be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3108 that the setting key 110b is not located at the off position (S3108: No), the process returns to step S3106. That is, the processes of S3106 to S3108 are repeated until it is determined in the process of S3108 that the setting key 110b is located at the off position.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3101 that the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S3101: No), first, a payout return command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S3109), and then the set value storage area is set. The data of 203 ma is read (S3110). When the process of S3110 is completed, next, the set value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the set value display device 110a (S3111), a status command indicating a setting confirmation status is set (S3112), and the setting key 110b is set. It is determined whether or not it is located at the off position (S3113). In the process of S3113, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is located at the off position (S3113: Yes), the process ends. That is, the game state is shifted to a playable state. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3113 that the setting key 110b is not located at the off position (S3113: No), the processing of S3113 is repeatedly executed. That is, the setting confirmation state is continued until the setting key 110b is arranged at the off position.

  By executing the setting value control process (see FIG. 291), the setting value can be changed according to the operation on the setting switch 110c in the setting change state. Further, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value can be continuously displayed on the setting value display device 110a until the setting switch 110b is disposed at the off position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 292, details of the jackpot control process 11 (S1831) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. The jackpot control process 11 (S1831) is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process (S1804 in FIG. 56) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and performs various controls during the jackpot game. This is the process to be performed.

  In the big hit control process 11 (S1831), in each of the processes of S1901 to S1912 and S1916 to S1918, the big hit control process (S1804 in FIG. 56, S1804) of the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed. The same processes as those in S1916 to S1918 are executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 292, in the jackpot control process 11 (S1831) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1912 that the current time is the end of the jackpot (S1912: Yes), the winning The data in the state storage area 203mb is read (S1991), and the time-saving counter 203h and the probability change flag 203fa are updated according to the gaming state (game state at the time of winning the jackpot) corresponding to the read data and the current jackpot type. Then (S1992), and shifts to the processing of S1916. By executing the jackpot control process 11 (see FIG. 292), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot can be appropriately set according to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning and the jackpot type.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 293 to 296. First, the contents of the command determination process 11 (S4131) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The command determination process 11 (S4311) is a process executed in place of the command determination process 7 (FIG. 183, S4192) in the above-described seventh embodiment. This is the process for performing.

  In each of the command determination processes 11 (S4131) except for the process of S4241, the same processes as those of the command determination process 7 (FIG. 183, S4192) of the seventh embodiment except for the process of S4232 are respectively performed. Is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 293, in the command determination process 11 (S4131) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4231 that the status command has been received (S4231: Yes), the command is notified by the status command. A state command reception process 11 for performing control according to the performed game state is executed (S4241), and this process ends. Details of the status command processing 11 (S4141) will be described with reference to FIG. The status command receiving process 11 (S4241) is a process executed instead of the status command receiving process (FIG. 64, S4213 (S4232)) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the status command receiving process 11 (S4141), the process of S4509 is the same as the process of S4509 of the status command receiving process (FIG. 64, S4213 (S4232)) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). Is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 294, in the status command receiving process 11 (S4241) in the eleventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating a setting change state (S4511). If it is determined that the command indicates a change state (S4511: Yes), a display command corresponding to the setting change screen is set (S4512), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4509.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4511 that the received command is not a command indicating the setting change state (S4511: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating the setting confirmation state. (S4513). If it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the setting confirmation state (S4513: Yes), a display command corresponding to the setting confirmation screen is set (S4514), and the process shifts to S4509.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4513 that the received command is not a command indicating the setting confirmation state (S4513: No), then it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed ( S4515). When it is determined that there is no change in the gaming state (S4515: No), the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4515 that there is a change in the game state (S4515: Yes), a display command corresponding to the changed game state is set (S4516), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4509. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 295, the details of the variable display setting process 11 (S4132) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 11 (S4132) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 7 (FIG. 187, S4153) in the seventh embodiment.

  Of the variable display setting processing 11 (S4132), in each processing except S5261, the same processing as that of the variable display setting processing 7 (FIG. 187, S4153) except for S5232 in the seventh embodiment is executed. .

  As shown in FIG. 295, in the variable display setting process 11 (S4132) in the eleventh embodiment, after performing the process of S5202, the variable display mode according to the variable pattern notified by the currently received variable pattern command. Is performed (S5261), and the flow shifts to the process of S5233. Details of the effect mode setting process 11 (S5261) will be described with reference to FIG. This effect mode setting process 11 (S5261) is a process executed instead of the effect mode setting process (FIG. 188, S5232) in the seventh embodiment described above.

  In the rendering mode setting process 11 (S5261), in the respective processes of S8201, S8207, and S8208, the processes of S8201, S8207, and S8208 of the rendering mode setting process (FIGS. 188, S5232) in the seventh embodiment are respectively performed. The same processing is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 296, in the effect mode setting process 11 (S5261) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S8201 that the current gaming state is not the normal state (S8201: No), The effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8281), and the flow shifts to the process of S8208.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8201, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S8201: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a special reach fluctuation (S8282). In the process of S8282, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a special reach variation (S8282: No), the process proceeds to S8207. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8282 that the current fluctuation pattern is out of the special reach fluctuation (S8282: Yes), after the setting is changed (after power-on with the RAM clear operation), the number of fluctuations without a big hit Is a multiple of 50, and it is the setting suggestion effect execution timing. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma (see FIG. 275) is read out (S8283), and the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma (see FIG. 275) ) Is determined (S8284), and the process proceeds to S8208.

  By executing the effect mode setting process 11 (see FIG. 296), the setting can be estimated from the contents every time the number of times of change after the setting change becomes a multiple of 50 (each effect mode for each setting value). Is different), the setting suggestion effect can be executed, so that the player can be made to think that the player wants to continue the game until the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on becomes a multiple of 50. It is possible to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 until winning.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 can be set to any value (for example, (Any of six types of jackpot probabilities). The higher the jackpot probability (high setting), the easier it is to win a jackpot in the normal state (special symbol low probability state) and in the latent state (special symbol high probability state). On the other hand, the most advantageous latent state is likely to be completed in a relatively short period of time (in the latent state, another gaming state is easily set by the jackpot win). On the other hand, the lower the jackpot probability (lower setting), the easier it is for the normal state to continue for a longer period of time (more likely to cause hammering), but the more advantageous latent state tends to continue for a relatively long time. In the latent state, the total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit game is likely to increase. In other words, according to the jackpot probability (probability), the game property (the game state in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are easily completed in a relatively short period, and the game state in which the disadvantageous game state and the advantageous game state are both advantageous for a relatively long time) Since it is possible to make the game characteristics different from each other easily, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the configuration is changed so that the setting is always set to the normal state (the setting of the RAM 203 is initialized by the RAM clear operation). Only in a normal state where a transition is made after the change (after the RAM clear operation), a particular type of variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on satisfaction of a specific condition. That is, each time the number of times of drawing of the special symbol after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation) is a multiple of 50, the fluctuation of the fluctuation time is 25 seconds and the special reach fluctuation is selected. With this configuration, after the power is turned on, whether the setting change operation is performed according to the variation type of the variation pattern that is executed when the specific condition is satisfied (the number of special symbol lotteries is a multiple of 50). Since it is possible to confirm whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved until the specific condition is satisfied. Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, as the effect mode (fluctuation pattern effect) during the execution of the off-special reach change, the setting is made by the type of the third symbol (the number attached to the third symbol) when the reach occurs. It is configured so that the set value that is set can be suggested. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to play a game when a reach effect in an effect mode that is easily executed at a high setting is executed. In addition, in the case where the effect of the content suggesting the high setting is not executed in the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to remind the user to confirm the setting suggestion effect again. In other words, it is possible to make the user think that the lottery of the special symbol is to be executed 50 times, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Although the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately in the eleventh embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the setting switch 110c is deleted and the setting can be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, the setting may be switched in the order of 1 → 2 →... → 6 each time the setting key 110b is turned by 60 degrees. Then, at the end of the setting change operation, the key portion of the setting key 110b may be pulled out of the keyhole portion so as to return to a state where a normal game can be played. With this configuration, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, and the number of components can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot probability in the high probability state (probable change state) of the special symbol is configured to be common to all settings, but is not limited to this. Instead, the ratio of the jackpot probability between the low probability state and the high probability state may be different for each setting. More specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the low-probability state is made different according to the set value similarly to the above-described eleventh embodiment, while the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is constant regardless of the set value (for example, , 1/90). With this configuration, it is possible to make the easiness of addiction in the high-probability state common regardless of the setting, so that the advantage degree in the advantageous latent state can be made common regardless of the setting. Therefore, the superiority of the high setting can be further enhanced, so that it is possible to provide easy-to-understand gaming characteristics in which a higher setting is advantageous in all aspects. In addition, for example, the odd-number setting (settings 1, 3, and 5) and the even-number setting (settings 2, 4, and 6) may have different jackpot probabilities in the high-probability state. Specifically, for example, the configuration is such that the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is low (for example, 1/100) in the odd-number setting, while the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is high (for example, 1/70) in the even-number setting. May be. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage in the advantageous latent state can be made different between the odd number setting and the even number setting, so that the playability can be greatly changed according to the setting. Furthermore, in this case, as a jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol, even setting is configured so that the jackpot probability is higher than the odd setting, in the odd setting, and in the even setting, the setting is high It may be configured such that the greater the probability of a big hit, the higher the probability. With such a configuration, it is possible to greatly vary the playability depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. That is, in the even number setting, the disadvantageous normal state is hard to last for a long time, but since the latent state is hard to last for a long time, it is possible to realize the gaming property in which the transition of the payout is relatively gentle, while in the odd number setting, the disadvantageous normal state is difficult. It is easy to last for a long time, but the latent state is easy to last for a long time, so the addiction is severe, but once you shift to the latent state, you can expect to get more prize balls, which makes it easy for the ball change to go up and down violently In other words, it is possible to realize a game like a rough sea. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, since an appropriate setting can be selected according to the business policy of the hall, the convenience of the hall can be improved. Furthermore, for example, only the setting 6, which is the highest setting, may be configured so that the playability is significantly different from other settings. Specifically, for example, for the setting 1 to the setting 5, the jackpot probability in the above-described eleventh embodiment is adopted, but only the setting 6 has an extremely high jackpot probability (for example, the probability of being twice or more the setting 5). ) May be configured. Specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol may be set to 1/100, and the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol may be set to 1/30. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether or not the setting is 6 in a relatively short game from the jackpot winning rate. Therefore, the player who is convinced that the setting is 6 can play the game for a long time, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, by making it easy to determine whether or not the setting is 6, the setting uses the highest setting (that is, the most advantageous setting for the player) when the setting 6 is set. Can be recognized by the player. Therefore, the reputation of the hall can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a part of the probability change jackpot (in the case of the jackpots D11, E11, and I11) is configured such that a probability change state of 100 time savings after the end of the jackpot is set. When 100 time savings have been passed (the number of special symbols has been lost consecutively in the 100 lotteries), the system shifts to the most advantageous latent state. In other words, in the specific game state (probable change state), the game machine shifts to an advantageous state by continuously deviating (lottery result different from the jackpot) over a specific number of times (100 times) of the special symbol lottery. With this configuration, the lower the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol (that is, the lower the setting), the more advantageous the gaming property is realized. However, the lower the jackpot probability, the more advantageous the gaming property is realized. The configuration for performing this is not limited to this. For example, it is assumed that the special symbol change state is set to be terminated based on the fact that a special symbol lottery of a specific number of times (for example, 100 times) has been executed, and the latent accuracy state is set to the most disadvantageous state (right-handed In a state in which it is difficult to execute the 1 special symbol lottery and the 2nd special symbol lottery), a transition is made to the normal state, which is relatively advantageous when the lottery of the special symbol of a specific number of times is consecutively lost in the latent state. May be configured. In other words, in the latent state, even if the jackpot is won, the number of rounds is small and the latent state is set again after the end of the jackpot. It may be configured such that the type of the jackpot set to the advantageous probable change state later becomes the majority. Then, in the probable change state, it is easy to win the jackpot with almost no reduction of the possessed ball, and it is configured so that the probable change state is easily set again after the end of the jackpot. A specification in which a game is played by two goals may be adopted. Also in this specification, the lower the jackpot probability in the latent state, the easier it is to transition to the relatively advantageous normal state, and consequently the transition to the most advantageous probability change state. , The lower the setting, the higher the degree of advantage is. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, if the jackpot probability is low, the jackpot is not likely to be large in the normal state where the degree of advantage is high, and the probability that the number of times of specific change (specific number) ends without being a large jackpot in the advantageous probability change state is also increased. Therefore, in the high setting where the jackpot probability is high, the latent state and the disadvantageous jackpot are easily repeated, but if it can be shifted to the normal state, the jackpot can be won with a relatively small number of lotteries, In the probable change state, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which the jackpot and the probable change state are easily repeated more times. As described above, since the playability can be made different between the low setting and the high setting, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the configuration is made such that the off-special reach change can be executed only in the normal state set after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the normal state set under conditions other than after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation), each time the number of special symbol lotteries becomes a multiple of the specific number of times (50 times), the probability is relatively low (for example, 1). (Probability of / 10) so that the special reach fluctuation is executed, so that the setting suggestion effect may be executed even in a normal state other than after the setting change. With this configuration, even in the normal state set under conditions other than the setting change, it is possible to make the player think that the game is to be continued until the number of lotteries is a multiple of the specific number (50 times). The operating rate of the machine 10 can be improved. Also, instead of making the selection probability of the out-of-special reach reach change different, for example, the period in which the out-of-special reach reach change is selected is made longer than the normal state after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation) (for example, the special symbol). Each time the number of lotteries becomes a multiple of 100). In the normal state, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to a common variation pattern scenario regardless of whether the setting has been changed. In other words, even in the normal state other than after the setting change, the configuration is such that the special reach fluctuation is executed every time the number of lotteries becomes a multiple of 50, and the setting suggestion effect is executed every time the number of lotteries becomes a multiple of 50. It may be configured to obtain. With this configuration, it is possible to further improve the operation rate in a disadvantageous normal state.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when the RAM clear operation is performed when the power is turned on, the RAM clear time table 202me4 is stored in the RAM clear state table while the normal state continues, regardless of whether or not the state has shifted to the setting change state. It was configured to determine the fluctuation pattern with reference to the reference. In other words, even if the setting change state has not been reached, if the RAM clear operation has been performed, the special reach variation is executed every time the number of special symbol lotteries becomes a multiple of 50, and a setting suggestion effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the setting is changed to the setting change state when the power is turned on, the setting suggestion effect may be executed every time the number of times of drawing the special symbol becomes a multiple of 50 in the normal state. With this configuration, only when the clerk of the hall is actually performing the setting change operation, the special reach fluctuation is performed and the setting suggestion effect is performed, so that it is easier to determine whether the setting has been changed. Can be identified by the player.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when the out-of-special reach change is executed, as a change pattern effect, the setting value is indicated by the number attached to the third symbol when the reach occurs, However, it is not always necessary to indicate the set value by the effect. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a variation pattern effect of an effect mode that can indicate only whether or not a special reach variation is performed is performed. That is, even if the out-of-office special reach fluctuation is determined, the configuration may be such that the setting value is not suggested from the effect mode. With this configuration, it is not necessary for the voice lamp control device 113 to know the set value, and only when the variation type of the out-of-special reach fluctuation is notified (or appears only in the case of the out-of-spec special reach fluctuation). Since it is sufficient to execute the effect of (Easy Mode), the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the setting is low due to the suggestion of the setting, and to reduce the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the configuration suggestion effect is executed when the variation pattern of the deviation special reach variation is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The sound lamp control device 113 may simply be configured to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1%) when determining the effect mode of the fluctuation pattern effect. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a special reach variation, and a common variation pattern table can be used in a normal state, so that the number of variation pattern tables can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  In the eleventh embodiment, in the normal state after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation), the setting suggestion effect is executed every time the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times regardless of the setting value set in the setting change state. (A special reach variation is selected), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect is executed when the out-of-special reach variation is selected may be made different. In other words, the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect on the sound lamp control device 113 side when the out-of-office special reach change is notified may be changed according to the set value. Alternatively, by changing the variation pattern selection table that is referred to in the normal state after the RAM clear operation for each set value, when the variation count becomes a multiple of 50 according to the set value, a special reach variation is selected. The ratio itself may be different. More specifically, for example, at multiples of 50, the higher the setting, the more easily the variation pattern other than the special reach variation may be selected (the more difficult the setting suggestion effect is). With this configuration, when the special reach variation is not executed (the setting suggestion effect is not executed) even though the number of special symbol lotteries is a multiple of 50, an expectation for a high setting is made. Feeling can be improved. In addition, for example, by making the variation pattern selection table referred to in the normal state after the RAM clear operation differ for each set value, a special reach variation is executed in accordance with the set value (a setting suggestion effect is executed). ) The periods may be different. With such a configuration, the game can be performed by focusing on how many times the variation and the special reach variation are executed, so that the game can be positively started from the state where the jackpot is 0 times. it can. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the data in the set value storage area 203ma is also cleared to the initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clear operation. It is not limited to. For example, the data of the set value storage area 203ma may be configured not to be cleared even if the RAM clear operation is performed. In other words, the data in the setting value storage area 203ma may be configured to be updated only while the setting key 110b is located at the ON position. With this configuration, when the hall does not want to change the setting, but wishes to perform the RAM clear operation, the wish can be fulfilled, so that the convenience of the hall can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, in the case of a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol, the right variable winning device 1650 that can win during the small hit game, and in the case of a big win in the special symbol lottery, Although the variable prize winning device 650 capable of winning in each round of the jackpot is separately provided, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable prize winning device 650 may be configured to be able to enter a ball when a small win or a large win is made in the second special symbol lottery. With this configuration, the right variable winning device 1650 can be eliminated, so that the number of components of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the degree of freedom of the game area can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the setting value is suggested only by the setting suggestion effect. That is, in the normal state after the setting change, when the number of times of the special symbol lottery is a multiple of 50 and the variation pattern of the deviation special reach fluctuation is set, the setting suggestion effect is executed as the fluctuation pattern effect in the deviation special reach fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a setting is suggested in a jackpot opening effect or an ending effect. In this case, the type (selection ratio) of the character appearing on the third symbol display device 81 in the opening effect or the ending effect may be different for each set value. Further, for example, after a transition to the advantageous game state (the extended mode A or the extended mode B), the advantageous game state is terminated, and is displayed when the transition to the disadvantageous normal mode is performed. The type of display mode of the display mode (so-called result display) showing the game result in the game state may be different. Specifically, for example, as a title displayed according to a game result, a title of a type determined only according to a game result and a title of a type determined also in consideration of a set value may be provided. Good. With this configuration, the result display can be focused on at the end of the advantageous gaming state.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 110a in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a numerical value indicating a set value.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the configuration is such that the higher the setting, the more likely it is to be advantageous to the player (so-called, the higher the opportunity percentage), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the total advantage is equal between some settings and other settings. More specifically, for example, by adjusting the jackpot probability, the advantages of the setting 1 and the setting 6 may be equalized. That is, in the setting 1, once the system shifts to the latent state, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the latent state is significantly increased as compared with the other settings (for example, the special symbol height). By setting the jackpot probability in the probability state to 1/200), it is more advantageous than the setting values other than the setting 6 (settings 2 to 5) even in consideration of the fact that the jackpot probability is low in the low probability state of the special symbol. It may be configured as follows. In addition to this, the configuration 2 and the configuration 5 may be configured to have the same advantageous degree, and the configuration 3 and the configuration 4 may be configured to have the same advantageous level. That is, the setting 1 and the setting 6 may be configured to be the setting having the highest degree of advantage, and the setting 3 and the setting 4 may be configured to be the setting having the lowest degree of advantage. In other words, in the settings 1 to 3, the lower the jackpot probability becomes, the more advantageous the gaming performance (the main gaming performance is to increase the number of possessed balls with small winning prize balls in the latent state), and the setting from the setting 4 In 6, it may be configured such that the higher the jackpot probability becomes, the more advantageous the gaming property (the main gaming property is to increase the number of possessed balls with the jackpot prize ball). With this configuration, it is possible to make the difference in the playability of each setting more remarkable, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Furthermore, in this case, whether the setting (settings 1 to 3) of the playability in which increasing the number of possessed balls with the small winning prize balls in the latent state is set or whether the winning prize balls with large hits are held balls May be configured to be able to notify the player whether or not the setting of the gaming property (settings 4 to 6) in which increasing is set. More specifically, for example, in the demonstration display displayed when the game in the pachinko machine 10 has not been performed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or more, the user is notified of the playability (for example, setting If the setting is 1 to 3, the character "strike type" is displayed, and if the setting is 4 to 6, the character "click type" is displayed.) This allows the player to start playing the game with the desired playability setting, thereby improving the convenience of the player. Further, in place of or in addition to the demonstration display screen, a volume display is displayed when a volume change operation for changing the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, and a light amount of various light emitting members such as LEDs is changed. The display mode such as the light amount display displayed when the light amount changing operation is performed may be configured to be able to notify the player of the game performance (whether it is a one-shot type or a slick type). With this configuration, it is possible to check the playability at an arbitrary timing of the player by performing the volume change operation or the light amount change operation, so that the convenience of the player can be further improved. Furthermore, the display mode on the jackpot ending screen or the result screen after the completion of the latent state may be varied according to the game characteristics. Specifically, for example, in the case where the one-shot type of playability (settings 1 to 3) is set, the total number of prize balls acquired in the advantageous state is displayed in a more conspicuous manner, while the tricky-type game is performed. If the gender (settings 4 to 6) is set, the total number of jackpots won in the advantageous state may be displayed in a more prominent manner. With this configuration, it is possible to easily configure an item that the player tends to pay more attention to for each game property, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. In this case, the setting value display device 110a may be configured to display the settings A, B, and C instead of the settings 1, 2, and 3. In other words, the notation of the set value may be changed according to the game characteristics. With this configuration, when the clerk of the hall changes or confirms the set value, the degree of advantage is not in numerical order (the degree of advantage is in the order of setting 3, 4, 2, 5, 5, 1, 6). It is possible to suppress confusion due to the increase in the height).

  In the eleventh embodiment, after the setting is changed, the RAM clearing table 202me4 (see FIG. 271 (b)) is referred to to determine the variation pattern table until the first big win is won (50 special symbols). Is executed every time the lottery is executed), but is not limited to this. For example, the fluctuation pattern scenario may be set so that a winning is achieved by switching to a state where the normal 11 table 202me1 is referred to by winning. In this case, the RAM clear time table 202me4 may be configured to always execute the special reach fluctuation when a lottery result other than the jackpot is obtained. In other words, in the specification that wins the small hit with a high probability, after the setting change, the special reach is executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed until the first small hit game (or the big hit game) is executed. May be configured. With this configuration, the setting change can be performed by executing only one special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol lottery has not been executed once after the opening of the hall. It can be determined whether or not there is a possibility. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the special reach variation is executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times only after the setting change. However, even in a normal state other than after the setting change, Each time the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, a special reach variation may be executed. With this configuration, the number of fluctuations at which the special reach is set when the setting has not been changed is predicted from the number of fluctuations at the end of the game on the previous day, and the special reach at the predicted number is set. Is not executed, it is possible to realize a novel playability that a player can be convinced that the possibility of setting change is high.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the special reach variation is executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the off-special reach fluctuation can be executed only once. In other words, when the normal state is set, the number of special symbol lotteries until the special reach variation is set is set. When the setting is changed, 50 is set, while other conditions are set. When the normal state is set in, the number of times that the digestion cannot be substantially performed, such as 65536 times, may be set. Then, after the out-of-special reach fluctuation is set, the number of times that can not be substantially consumed, such as 65536 times, may be set. With this configuration, when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times in a state where the jackpot has not been won, a game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the special reach is generated.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described eleventh embodiment is configured such that the jackpot probability can be set to any one of a plurality of (six-step) settings, and the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability. Configured.

  In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, a period (chance zone) that is advantageous to the player is formed when a specific lottery result different from the big hit is obtained in a predetermined game state. More specifically, it is configured such that it is easier for the player to win the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the case of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol. In the case where the first special symbol is lost in the lottery in the latent state, a variation pattern having a long variation time (long variation) can be set. That is, by performing the lottery of the second special symbol intensively while the long fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, without winning the jackpot of the first special symbol having a relatively low degree of advantage, An advantageous period (chance zone) can be formed in which the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage can be aimed at the jackpot.

  In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, when the first special symbol is fluctuated and the second special symbol is randomly selected and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is discarded. It is configured so that it will not be stopped (it will not be stopped and displayed with a missing symbol). With such a configuration, when a small hit of the second special symbol is made during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol (during the chance zone), the long fluctuation is discarded (the chance zone is forcibly terminated). Can be suppressed). Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the chance zone once entered.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The configuration of the RAM 223 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. The processing is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 297 and FIG. 298, a description will be given of a characteristic effect mode executed in the extended-villa mode B (latent state) of the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 297 is a diagram showing a display mode of a continuous out-of-control effect that is executed when the lottery of the first special symbol is out of order in the extended mode B of the twelfth embodiment. Here, in the twelfth embodiment, similarly to the above-described eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit or the big hit is configured with a high probability (about 90%). ing. In other words, it is configured such that a lottery of a special symbol is lost with a relatively low probability. In the twelfth embodiment, when the relatively low probability of the disconnection continues for a predetermined first number of times (for example, three consecutive disconnections in the lottery of the first special symbol), the first number of times is determined. It is configured such that a long fluctuation is set as an out-of-sight fluctuation (a chance zone in which a lottery of an advantageous second special symbol can be intensively executed is formed). Also, in the case where the disconnection continues for a second number of times less than the first number (for example, two consecutive disconnections), the second number of disconnections at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). It is configured to set a long fluctuation as the fluctuation (form a chance zone). That is, since the chance zone is formed more easily as the first special symbol continues to deviate, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of consecutive departures of the first special symbol. The continuous departure effect to be described below is an effect mode executed to suggest (notify) to the player the number of consecutive departures and whether or not entry into the chance zone is possible.

  First, with reference to FIG. 297, a display mode at the time of starting the above-described discontinuous production effect will be described. This continuous loss effect is started when the lottery of the first special symbol is lost for the first time after the end of the big hit or the small hit of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 297, when the lottery of the first special symbol is lost, the character 811 imitating a rabbit has the character SP at the top in the main display area Dm when the first special symbol is stopped. The effect of finding the hill on which the flag FG has been raised is executed. In addition, along with the effect of finding this hill, the character "Aim for more stakes" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In addition, on the right side of the main display area Dm, a guidance suggestion display for suggesting to the player the situation until the chance zone (super RUSH game) is executed is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the chance zone is started if the character 811 imitating a rabbit can climb the hill and reach the flag FG. As shown in FIG. 297 (a), the hill discovered by the character 811 has two ladders, a ladder HG1 extending from the foot to the middle and a ladder HG2 extending from the middle to the top. In addition, a jumping platform JD is installed at the foot of the hill. In the case where the chance zone is started in the twelfth embodiment, an effect in which the character 811 reaches the top (flag FG) in two changes by climbing the ladder one by one, and one using the jump stand JD. Either one of two patterns, that is, a case of jumping to the top at a stretch due to the change, is executed. More specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol is missed for two consecutive times, and when the fluctuation pattern of the second consecutive pattern is set to the long fluctuation, the user jumps to the top at a stretch using the jumping stand JD. The effect is executed and the start of the chance zone (super RUSH) is notified. On the other hand, in the case of three consecutive misses in the lottery of the first special symbol, and if the second consecutive miss is not a long fluctuation, the effect of climbing the ladder HG1 extending from the foot to the middle during the second consecutive fluctuation. Is performed, and during the third consecutive departure change, an effect of climbing the ladder HG2 continuing from the middle to the top is executed, and the start of the chance zone (super RUSH) is notified.

  On the other hand, if the lottery of the first special symbol following the first departure was not departed (small hit), the character 811 was displayed in the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 297 (b). An effect is performed in which the user jumps toward the top using the jumping stand JD, but falls over without reaching the top. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "failure ..." are displayed. According to these effect modes, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the detachment is not continuous and does not enter the chance zone.

  FIG. 298 is a diagram showing a display mode in a case where the lottery of the first special symbol is repeated three times consecutively and the long variation of the first special symbol is set in the consecutive mode B (RUSH). As shown in FIG. 298, when the long fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 reaches the flag SP, and a rejoicing effect with the flag SP raised is executed. In addition to this, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters “Super RUSH rush!” Are displayed, and the remaining fluctuation time until the long fluctuation ends (that is, the remaining time until the chance zone ends). Time) countdown display is displayed. Thus, the player can easily confirm the end of the chance zone (super RUSH) in which only the advantageous second special symbol lottery can be executed, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the twelfth embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability is made different depending on the setting, while the small jackpot probability is common to all the settings. Then, only three kinds of lottery results of a large symbol, a small ball, and a miss are provided as the special symbol lottery results. For this reason, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of a disconnection, so that the possibility of entering the chance zone (continuous disconnection) is reduced. In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the possibility of shifting to the chance zone which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when shifting to the extended play mode B, the lower setting has a higher degree of advantage. Extremely special and novel playability can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Electrical Configuration in Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, the ROM 202 according to the twelfth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 268 (a)) in that the first random number 11 table 202ma There is a point of providing 202 na, a point of providing a small hit random number 12 table 202 nb instead of the small hit random number 11 table 202 mb, and a big hit type selection 12 table 202 nd is provided instead of the big hit type selection 11 table 202 md. The difference is that a variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me.

  First, details of the first random number 12 table 202na in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 299 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number 12 table 202na in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 299 (a), the first random number 12 table 202na in the twelfth embodiment is similar to the first random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment. A range of a random value (counter value) determined to be a jackpot is defined in association with the range. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, for the setting 1, the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 0". 204 is defined in association with the setting 2, “0 to 217” is defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 for setting 1, and setting 3 is defined in association with the setting 3. The range of the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is defined in association with “0 to 233”. For the setting 4, the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is The range is defined in association with “0 to 251”, and for setting 5, “0 to 311” is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. For 6, the first "0-409" is defined in association with a range or a counter value of the random number counter C1 of the (random number). Therefore, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/320 (205/65536), the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/301 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is It is 1/280 (234/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/260 (252/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/210 (312/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 Is 1/160 (410/65536).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), in the high probability state of the special symbol, “0 to 467” corresponds to the setting 1 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. For setting 2, “0-498” is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. The range of the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C1 is defined in association with “0 to 534”. For the setting 4, the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is “0”. To 575 ", and for setting 5," 0 to 712 "is defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. The first hit "0-935" is defined in association with a range of counter value of the counter C1 (random number). Thus, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 in the special symbol high probability state is 1/140 (468/65536), the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/131 (499/65536), and the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is It is 1/123 (535/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/114 (576/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/92 (713/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 Is 1/70 (936/65536). Note that, as in the eleventh embodiment, the ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is common.

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, mainly, the jackpot probability of the setting 5 and the setting 6 in the low probability state of the special symbol is increased, and the jackpot probability in the high probability (probable change) state of the special symbol is generally reduced. To lower. As a result, it is possible to relatively increase the probability of occurrence of a loss in the first special symbol lottery and increase the execution frequency of the continuous loss effect, so that the player who has confirmed the start of the continuous loss effect is provided with a chance zone. More often than not. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, details of the small hit random number 12 table 202nb in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 299 (b). FIG. 299 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the small hit random number 12 table 202nb in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 299 (b), the small random number 12 table 202nb has 58982 pieces of 936 to 59917 as random numbers (values of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a small hit of the first special symbol. A random number value (counter value) is defined in association with each other. Of the 65536 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random number values (counter values) determined to be small hits is 58982, so that the small number is determined by lottery for the first special symbol. The probability of winning a win is 1 / 1.11 (58982/65536). As described above, the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state of the special symbol is 1/140 (setting 1) to 1/70 (setting 6). Therefore, the probability that the first special symbol will be lost by lottery in the special symbol probable change state is 1 / 10.8 (setting 1) to 1 / 11.7 (setting 6). As described above, in the latent state, an advantageous chance zone is more likely to be set as the consecutive removal in the first special symbol lottery. Then, the lower the setting, the lower the probability of jackpot, the higher the probability of departure. Therefore, in the latent state, a novel gaming property in which the low setting is easier to enter the advantageous chance zone can be realized, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 299 (b), the small random number 12 table 202nb includes 64599 of 936 to 65534 as random numbers (values of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. A number of random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with each other. Of the 65,536 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be small hits is 64599, so that the small number is determined by lottery for the first special symbol. The probability of winning a win is 1 / 1.01 (64599/65536). For this reason, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the winning is almost completed. However, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the extended-villa mode B (the latent state), the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is distributed in the same manner as the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured to be determined. For this reason, if the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first during the small special change of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped due to being removed. In other words, even if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, about half of the lottery is changed to be out due to the first small hit symbol of the first special symbol being stopped and displayed. The opportunity to get a prize ball is lost by the small hit game of the symbol. In other words, the extended play mode B in the twelfth embodiment has the frequency of small hits of the second special symbol approximately half as compared to the extended play mode B (latent state) in the eleventh embodiment described above. (The frequency of winning prize balls is about half). Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the special symbol high-probability state is reduced as a whole, and the small jackpot probability of the second special symbol is increased, so that the extended mode B (invisible) State) so as not to be too disadvantageous.

  As described above, the twelfth embodiment has a configuration in which long fluctuations of the first special symbol can be set in the case where the consecutive departures in the first special symbol lottery. During this long fluctuation, there is no possibility that the small hit symbol (and the big hit symbol) of the first special symbol is stopped. Therefore, when the small hit symbol of the second special symbol is won, the small hit symbol is reliably based on the small hit symbol. A small hit game can be executed. In other words, during the long fluctuation (chance zone) of the first special symbol, the execution frequency of the small hitting game of the second special symbol increases, and the winning frequency of the prize ball increases. In addition, even if a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, the long variation of the first special symbol is controlled so as not to be discarded (forcibly stopped by a missing symbol). ) Can be continued longer. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, it is configured such that a large hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than a large hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, the ratio of the jackpot of the second special symbol being set to the most advantageous extended play mode B (latent state) after the end of the jackpot (looping the extended play mode B) than the jackpot of the first special symbol. Is configured to be higher. For this reason, in the chance zone in which the lottery of the first special symbol is difficult to be executed (the lottery of the second special symbol is intensively executed), the loop rate of the extended game mode B in the case of a big hit is substantially improved. This is advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the extended-villa mode B, it is possible to realize a very special and novel playability of expecting continuous disconnection in order to shift to the chance zone. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 300 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 300, in the big hit type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment, six big hit types from "big hit A12" to "big hit F12" are defined as the big hit types of the first special symbol. On the other hand, as the jackpot types of the second special symbol, three types of jackpot types of "big hit G12" to "big hit K12" are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 300, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), “big hit A12” is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value “0” of the first hit type counter C2. ing. In the “big hit A12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the most advantageous latent state irrespective of the gaming state at the time of winning (time reduction regardless of the gaming state). The value of the counter 203h is set to 0, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON.) This is a type of jackpot (16 round (R) probability change jackpot). This “big hit A12” is the most advantageous big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there is one random number value (counter value) associated with “big hit A12”, so that the first special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which "big hit A12" is determined is 1% (1/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300, “big hit B12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 being “1 to 49”. In the “big hit B12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and after the big hit is finished, the special symbol is set to the certain change state (the certain change flag 203g is set to ON). It is. In the case of winning in the "big hit B12" in the normal state and the latent state, 65536 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, whereas in the time saving state and the probable change state, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h. You.

  That is, when the "big hit B12" is won in the normal state and the latent state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous state of change. In this probable change state, the number of times saved is set to 65536, so that the probable change state substantially continues until the next big hit. On the other hand, if the "big hit B12" is won in the time saving state and the probable change state, the number of time savings is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the end of the big hit becomes the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit B12" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when the winning is performed in the normal state and the latent state. On the other hand, when the winning is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the winning type is the most advantageous in the gaming state. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 49 random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit B12" are selected, so that the first special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit B12" is determined is 49% (49/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300, “big hit C12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 being “50 to 59”. In the “big hit C12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning (the value of the time-saving counter 203h). Is set to 65536, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON).

  That is, when the "big hit C12" is won, a probable change state that substantially continues to the next big hit is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Therefore, the "big hit C12" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit C12” is 10, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot C12" is determined is 10% (10/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300, “big hit D12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “60 to 64”. In the “big hit D12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning (the value of the time-saving counter 203h). Is set to 100, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON). Note that, unlike “big hit C12”, in the “big hit D12”, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, so that the probability change state does not always continue until the next big hit. In other words, if the special symbol lottery within 100 times after the “big hit D12” is completed does not result in a big hit, the value of the time reduction counter 203h becomes 0 and the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit D12" is a big hit type that is more advantageous than the "big hit C12" in the game state after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit D12” is 5, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot D12" is determined is 5% (5/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300, “big hit E12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 84”. In the "big hit E12", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively disadvantageous time-saving state regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning (the value of the time-saving counter 203h). Is set to 100, and the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF). Therefore, the "big hit E12" is a big hit type that is relatively disadvantageous in terms of a game state after the big hit end. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit E12" is 20, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit E12" is determined is 20% (20/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300, “big hit F12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “85 to 99”. In the “big hit F12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol (the probability change flag 203g is set to off). (8 rounds regular jackpot). In addition, when the "big hit F12" is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100. On the other hand, when the "big hit F12" is won in a game state other than the normal state, the time saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0. Therefore, if the "big hit F12" is won in a game state other than the normal state, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, the "big hit F12" is the most disadvantageous in the gaming state after the end of the big hit. It is a big hit type. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit F12” is 15, so the lottery of the first special symbol is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot F12" is determined is 15% (15/100).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 9”, while the jackpot type is “big hit”. G12 "is defined in association. In the “big hit G12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the special change state of the special symbol (the positive change flag 203g is set to ON). 16 rounds with a big change). In addition, in the case of winning in the gaming state other than the latent state, when the "big hit G12" is won, 65536 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, while in the latent state, when the "big hit G12" is won, the time saving counter is set. 0 is set to the value of 203h. Therefore, if the player wins the "big hit G12" in a game state other than the latent state, a probability change state that substantially continues to the next big hit is set, while if the "big hit G12" is won in the latent state, Is set to the most advantageous latent state. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit G12" is 10, so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit G12" is determined is 10% (10/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300, “big hit H12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “10 to 64”. In the “big hit H12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the special change state of the special symbol (the certain change flag 203g is set to ON). 8 rounds jackpot). In addition, in the gaming state other than the latent state, when the "big hit H12" is won, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 65536. 0 is set to the value of 203h. Therefore, in the case of winning the "big hit H12" in a gaming state other than the latent state, a probability change state substantially continuing to the next big hit is set, while in the latent state, the "big hit H12" is won. Is set to the most advantageous latent state. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 55 random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit H12” are drawn, so the second special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot H12" is determined is 55% (55/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300, “big hit K12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 99”. In the “big hit K12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state of 100 times of the time saving regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning (the time saving counter). The value of 203h is set to 100, and the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF). Therefore, the "big hit K12" is the most disadvantageous big hit type among the big hit types of the second special symbol both in terms of the number of rounds and in the game state after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 35 random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit K12” are selected, so the second special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot K12" is determined is 35% (35/100).

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, in the extended game mode B (latent state), when the first special symbol has a big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is more disadvantageous than the eleventh embodiment described above. It is configured to be. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, a rate of 50% (that is, one of the jackpots A11 and B11 is won) ), The gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to be the most advantageous extended play mode B (latency state). However, in the twelfth embodiment, the extended play mode B (latency state) is set. In the meantime, if the first special symbol is a big hit, the advantageous extended mode B is set only at a rate of 1%. On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, in the advantageous extended-village mode B (latent state), when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the advantageous extended-village mode with a high probability (65% ratio) B is set. Therefore, in the latent state, a game can be performed with a stronger expectation of a big hit in the second special symbol lottery than in a lottery in the first special symbol lottery. In addition, a game can be performed with a stronger expectation that a chance zone (a long fluctuation period of the first special symbol) in which the special symbol lottery can be executed biased to the second special symbol lottery will be set. Since it is possible, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the twelfth embodiment, in the advantageous latent state, the rate at which the jackpot of the second special symbol is set to the advantageous latent state after the end of the jackpot is higher than that of the first special symbol. With such a configuration, the chance zone in which the special symbol lottery can be executed with a bias toward the second special symbol lottery is formed in an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by configuring so that the jackpot of the second special symbol is higher in the probability of the jackpot of the variable probability (the jackpot that shifts to the probability change state or the latent state after the jackpot) than the jackpot of the first special symbol, You may comprise so that the advantage degree of a 2nd special symbol may become high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 301, details of the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment will be described. Here, although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment determines a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after the end of the big hit. 12 table for normal use 202ne1 for reference, 12 table for time saving / probable change 202ne2 referred to determine a fluctuation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the probable change state and the time saving state, and a latent state And a fluctuation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state after the RAM is cleared, and a latent 12 table 202ne3 which is referred to determine a fluctuation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed. And the RAM clear time table 202ne4 referred to for It is composed of Buru. Of these four types of data tables, the normal 12 table 202ne1, the time saving / probable change 12 table 202ne2, and the RAM clearing table 202ne4 are the normal 11 table 202me1 and the time saving / probable change in the above-described eleventh embodiment, respectively. Since the same data as those in the eleventh table 202me2 and the RAM clearing table 202me4 are defined, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  With reference to FIG. 301, the details of the latent twelve table 202ne3 constituting the fluctuating pattern selection twelve table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 301 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the latent 12 table 202ne3 in the twelfth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 301, in the twelfth table for latent accuracy 202ne3 in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, regardless of the number of changes after the hit and the small hit, the change type counter CS1 For a range of values from "0 to 149", a variation type (fluctuation pattern) is defined in association with a short variation per 2000 ms of variation time, and a value of a variation type counter CS1 is defined for a range of "150 to 198". In this case, a long variation per 5000 ms is associated and defined as a variation type.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order, the variation time is varied according to the number of times the first special symbol varies after the end of the big hit and the small hit. . More specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit and the small hit (the number of lotteries of the first special symbol) is 1, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is used. (That is, for the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take), the variation type is defined in association with a short variation with a variation time of 1000 ms. For this reason, the chance zone (long fluctuation) is not set in the first (not continuous) departure in the latent state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of changes of the first special symbol after a hit (big hit or small hit) is two, the value of the change type counter CS1 falls within the range of “0 to 158”. On the other hand, a short variation with a variation time of 1000 ms is defined in association with the variation type, and the variation type counter CS1 has a variation type with a variation time of 600,000 ms and a very long variation with a variation type of “159 to 198”. It is defined in association. Therefore, when two consecutive misses occur in the latent state, the extra long variation is set at a rate of about 20% (40/199). That is, it is possible to form an advantageous state (chance zone) in which only the advantageous second special symbol lottery can be executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of changes of the first special symbol after a hit (big hit or small hit) is 3 or more, the change time is 600,000 ms as the change type regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. The super long fluctuations are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the case of three or more consecutive deviations in the latent state, a deviation long fluctuation (chance zone) is always set. Therefore, a novel gaming ability that strongly desires continuous detachment can be realized, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of the first special symbol coming off. Therefore, in the latent state, the lower the setting, the more advantageous (the chance zone is easily set, and as a result, the more advantageous the second special symbol). It is possible to realize a novel game characteristic of making it easier to win a jackpot. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  As shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, the value of the change type counter CS1 is "0 to 49" regardless of the number of changes after the hit (big hit and small hit). The variation type (variation pattern) is defined in association with a short variation of 2000 ms as a variation type (variation pattern), and the variation type counter CS1 has a variation time of 5000 ms as a variation type for a range of “50 to 198”. Is defined in association with each other.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the value of the change type counter CS1 is “0 to 149” regardless of the number of changes after the hit (big hit and small hit). The variation type (variation pattern) is defined in association with a short variation with a variation time of 2000 ms as a variation type (variation pattern), and the variation type counter CS1 has a value of "150 to 198" as a variation type as a variation type. Is defined in association with a long variation per 5000 ms. In other words, the distribution is the same as that in the case where the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol. In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the out-of-short variation in which the variation time is 1000 ms corresponds to the variation type regardless of the number of variations after the hit (big hit and small hit) and the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is stipulated. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the change type counter CS1 is set to a value of the change type (0-49) regardless of the number of changes after the hit (big hit and small hit). A fluctuation pattern is defined in association with a short fluctuation of 2000 ms, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with a long fluctuation of 5000 ms as a fluctuation type in a range of “50 to 198”. Stipulated. In other words, the distribution is the same as in the case where a small win has been achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, in the latent state (ie, the state in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the latent 12 table 202ne3), if a lottery result other than the deviation is obtained, the first special symbol is displayed. The correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is common to the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent only the disadvantageous first special change from continuing to be stopped first. Further, as the number of consecutive misses in the lottery of the first special symbol increases, the rate of setting the extra long variation (chance zone in which the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol can be intensively executed) is set higher. As a result, a novel playability that strongly expects the continuation of the detachment can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 302, details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 302 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment (and the seventh embodiment) described above (see FIG. 174) in that a continuous out-of-game effect counter 223na is added. Only in that

  The consecutive-miss effect counter 223na is a counter that indicates the progress of the effect in the continuous-miss effect (see FIGS. 297 (a), (b), and FIG. 298). The initial value of the consecutive out-of-control effect counter 223na is set to 0, and the value is incremented by one each time a consecutive out-of-sequence in the lottery of the first special symbol is performed during the latent state. See S8735 and S8741). When setting the effect mode of the continuous out-of-control effect, the effect mode is set according to the value of the continuous out-of-control effect counter 223na and the variation type.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Control Device in Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, the special figure 2 departure stop processing 12 (S11595) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 departure stop processing 12 (S11595) in the twelfth embodiment. The special figure 2 departure stop process 12 (S11595) is a process executed in place of the special figure 2 departure stop process 11 (FIG. 289, S1596) in the above-described eleventh embodiment.

  This special figure 2 departure stop processing 12 (S11595) is different from the special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 (FIG. 289, S1596) in the eleventh embodiment in that the processing of S11602 to S11606 is deleted. The difference is that the process of S11611 is executed instead of the process of. In other words, when the second special symbol is stopped at the small hit, even if the first special symbol is changing, the first special symbol during the change is not removed and the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped at the symbol (the variable display is continued as it is). ) Is different only in the configuration. By configuring so that the change display of the first special symbol is not discarded (forced stop) when the small hit of the second special symbol is achieved, the chance zone (the change in the departure of the first special symbol) becomes the second special symbol. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the game is forcibly terminated regardless of the remaining time in the chance zone just by winning once in the lottery.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 304, details of the rendering mode setting process 12 (S5271) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. This effect mode setting process 12 (S5271) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process 11 (FIG. 296, S5261) of the eleventh embodiment described above.

  In the effect form setting processing 12 (S5271), in each of the processing of S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281 to S8284, S8201, S8207, S8208 of the effect form setting processing 11 of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 296, S5261), respectively. , And S8281 to S8284.

  As shown in FIG. 304, in the effect mode setting process 12 (S5271) in the twelfth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the current state is not the normal state (S8201: No), the current It is determined whether it is in the certain state (S8291). If it is determined that the current state is not the latent state (S8291: No), the process proceeds to S8281, whereas if it is determined that the present state is the latent state (S8291: Yes), the first in the latent state is determined. When the special symbol lottery is executed, a special figure 1 effect setting process for setting an effect mode is executed (S8292), and the flow shifts to a process of S8208. Details of the special figure 1 effect setting process (S8292) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 305, in the special figure 1 effect setting process (S8292), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern corresponding to the deviation (step S8292). S8701). In the process of S8701, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S8701: Yes), the out-of-stage effect setting process for setting the effect mode of the continuous out-of-order effect (see FIG. 297). Is executed (S8702), and this processing ends. Details of the out-of-office effect setting process (S8702) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8701, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S8701: No), then it is determined whether the value of the consecutive deviation effect counter 223na is greater than 0. (S8703). In the process of S8783, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive out-of-control effect counter 223na is larger than 0 (S8703: Yes), an effect mode in which the arrival at the top of the hill fails is determined (S8704), and the continuous out-of-control effect counter 223na. Is reset to 0 (S8705), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8703, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive out-of-sequence effect counter 223na is 0 (S8703: No), the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is determined (S8706). It is determined whether or not the super RUSH flag 223fi is ON (that is, whether or not the vehicle is in the chance zone) (S8707). If it is determined that the super RUSH flag 223fi is on (S8707: Yes), the super RUSH flag 223fi is set to off (S8708), and the process ends. If it is determined that the super RUSH in-flight flag 223fi is off (S8707: No), the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 306, details of the above-described out-of-office effect setting process (S8702) will be described. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the out-of-stage effect setting process (S8702) in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 306, in the off-stage effect setting process (S8702), first, it is determined whether or not the super RUSH flag 223fi is on (S8731). In the process of S8731, if it is determined that the super RUSH flag 223fi is ON (S8731: Yes), at least the previous fluctuation display has been set to the super long fluctuation, and this time, the super fluctuation has been set to the super long fluctuation. Since it means that the chance zone has been set (at least two consecutive chance zones), an effect mode indicating the addition of Super RUSH is determined (S8732), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8731 that the super RUSH flag 223fi is off (S8731: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the non-continuous effect counter 223na is 0 (S8733). In the process of S8733, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive out-of-sequence effect counter 223na is 0 (S8733: Yes), an effect mode (see FIG. 297 (a)) corresponding to the first variation of the out-of-sequence effect is determined. (S8734), 1 is added to the value of the consecutive out-of-game effect counter 223na (S8735), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8733, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive out-of-game effect counter 223na is not 0 (S8733: No), it is then determined whether the value of the continuous out-of-game effect counter 223na is 1 (S8736). ). If it is determined that the value of the consecutive out-of-control effect counter 223na is not 1 (it is 2 or more) (S8736: No), an effect mode is set in which the user climbs the second-stage ladder and enters a super RUSH (chance zone). (S8737), and shifts to the processing of S8742.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the continuous out-of-game effect counter 223na is 1 (S8736: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a super-long fluctuation (S8738). ). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a super long fluctuation (S8738: Yes), the effect of entering the super RUSH (chance zone) by arriving at the top of the hill at a stretch with a jumping platform. It is determined (S8739), and the flow shifts to the process of S8742. On the other hand, in the process of S8738, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern corresponding to the departure super long variation (S8738: No), an effect mode of climbing the first ladder is determined (S8740). One is added to the value of the consecutive out-of-game effect counter 223na (S8741), and then this processing ends.

  In the process of S8742, the value of the consecutive-miss effect counter 223na is reset, the super RUSH flag 223fi is set to ON (S8742), and the process ends. By performing the out-of-sequence effect setting process (see FIG. 306), when the first special symbol is continuously out, the effect of the out-of-sequence effect is suitably performed according to the number of times of continuous and the selected variation pattern. Can be set.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the higher the setting is, the lower the probability that the special symbol comes off is, and the first special symbol is randomly selected in the advantageous latent state. In the case where the number of consecutive misses is equal to the number of times, a chance zone advantageous to the player is set. More specifically, a configuration is adopted in which a very long (for 10 minutes) extremely long variation is set as the first variation. With this configuration, it is possible to bias and execute the advantageous second special symbol lottery during the execution of the extra long variation. In other words, in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a chance to win a prize ball by winning a small hit with a high probability, and when a big hit is won, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is again the most advantageous latent It can be configured to increase the possibility of being set to the state. Therefore, in the latent state, a novel gaming property in which the chance zone is more likely to be set as the setting is lower can be realized, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the twelfth embodiment, a chance zone is set at a rate of 20% when the lottery of the first special symbol misses two consecutive times in the latent state, and when the lottery continues three or more times. Although the chance zone is set at a rate of 100%, the correspondence between the continuous number of misses and the set rate of the chance zone is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the chance zone may be set even if the continuation does not continue, or a certain percentage (for example, 50% or less) may be set in the case of losing the lottery of the first special symbol regardless of the number of continuations. The chance zone may be set at a rate of 100%). With this configuration, the appearance rate of the chance zone can be increased, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol, which is easily executed in the chance zone, is executed, it is easy to select a large jackpot type which is advantageous when a large jackpot is won. In the case of winning, it was configured so that prize balls can be easily obtained during the small hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specifications are arbitrarily determined within a range that is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol be able to. Specifically, for example, the ratio of the probability of winning the jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot differs between the lottery of the second special symbol and the drawing of the first special symbol, and 50%) may be configured to increase the rate of the probability of winning the random change in the second special symbol lottery (for example, to 80% or 100%). With this configuration, it is possible to play a game with a strong expectation that a big win will be achieved by a lottery of the second special symbol in the chance zone. In addition, for example, with respect to the type of jackpot, the lottery of the second special symbol is more disadvantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, the rate at which the advantageous extended mode B (the latent state) is set is lower. Or to reduce the probability of a jackpot). In such a configuration, during the chance zone, there is a high possibility of being disadvantaged if the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, but it is advantageous to the player by continuing to win the small jackpot. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player can play a game in the hope that no big hit will occur.

  In the twelfth embodiment, basically, when a large hit or a small hit is made in the lottery of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol is deviated and forcibly stopped at the symbol. The variable display is configured to continue the variable display even when the first special symbol is performing the variable display only when the small hit occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the lottery of the second special symbol, in the case of a big hit or a small hit, if the change display of the first special symbol is being executed at the time of stopping the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, the running The fluctuation display is continued without forcibly stopping (during the big hit game and the small hit game, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is interrupted, and the change display of the first special symbol after the big hit game and the small hit game ends) May be restarted). With this configuration, when a jackpot is won during the chance zone, the chance zone continues even after the end of the jackpot. ), The benefits of the chance zone can be continued even after the jackpot. Therefore, the advantage of the chance zone can be further enhanced, and the interest of the player in playing the game when the chance zone is set can be further improved.

  In the twelfth embodiment, in the advantageous extended-village mode B (latency state), when the lottery of the relatively disadvantageous first special symbol is lost, only the relatively advantageous second special symbol lottery is performed. Although the chance zone that can be executed frequently is formed, the opportunity to set the chance zone is not limited to the occasion. For example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation is lengthened (for example, set to 10 minutes), so that during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation, an advantageous second special symbol is displayed. It may be formed as a chance zone in which only the lottery can be executed frequently. In this case, the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the chance zone, and the second special symbol jackpot symbol is not stopped and displayed before the chance zone ends (that is, the first special symbol is not displayed). If the jackpot change of the second special symbol is not forcibly changed to the stop by the big symbol stop of the second special symbol), the relatively special first special symbol big jackpot is started at the end of the chance zone, so that during the chance zone, It is possible to realize a gaming ability that strongly expects to win a favorable second special symbol. Therefore, the interest of the player between the chance zones can be further improved. Further, a chance zone may be formed when a small win is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  In the twelfth embodiment, as an arrangement for forming an advantageous chance zone in which only an advantageous second special symbol lottery can be intensively executed when a disadvantageous first special symbol lottery is lost. However, in place of or in addition to this, a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, 5 minutes) can be set even when a lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is lost, so that it is comparatively possible. It may be configured to form a period (pinch zone) in which only the disadvantageous first special symbol lottery is executed. With such a configuration, the lower the setting, the more likely the chance zone and the pinch zone appear. Therefore, the lower the setting, the more advantageous the game in the extended play mode B can be added. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, in the specification in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously (overlapping), the first special symbol is displayed in a latent state. In the case where the lottery is missed, a chance zone can be set that can be executed biasedly in the lottery of the second special symbol which is advantageous.

  On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, in a specification in which only one type of variable display can be executed, a period (chance zone) advantageous to the player is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. The configuration was adopted. More specifically, in the thirteenth embodiment, a jackpot (direct hit) executed when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, and a specific area (V area) provided at a predetermined position on the game board 13. ) Is provided with a jackpot (per V) which is executed based on a game ball having entered (winning a V), and when a special symbol is removed by a special symbol lottery in a specific game state (time saving state). By executing a specific game method during the deviation change, the ball entry rate (V winning rate) to the specific area (V area) is configured to be high. With such a configuration, similar to the twelfth embodiment, a novel gaming property can be realized in which the lower the setting is, the more the advantage in a specific gaming state (reduced time) can be improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment in the configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main controller 110 Of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 are partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The point is that the control processing has been partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the twelfth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 307 is a front view of the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307, the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment is different from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) in the game board 13 (see FIG. 264). A lottery device 6750 is provided below the three symbol display device 81 to execute a jackpot lottery (cassette lottery) by allocating the flowing game balls to a specific area (V area) or an out port. In which the right variable winning device 1650 and the right motorized accessory 164 are deleted, and a second ball provided with a motorized accessory 6400a instead of the right second ball entry port 645. The difference is that a mouth 6400 is provided.

  The lottery device 6750 is in a state in which a game ball can enter for a predetermined period when a small hit is made in the special symbol lottery (that is, the small hitting attacker 6750a provided at the entrance portion of the lottery device 6750 is used). Released), the game ball that has entered during the state where the ball can be entered enters the V winning opening 6750f1 provided inside the lottery device 6750, and the game ball enters the jackpot (per V). Win. Note that one lottery winning port and five out ports (out ports 6750f2 to 6750f6) are provided inside the lottery device 6750. A game ball that has entered the inside of the lottery device 6750 always enters the V winning opening 6750f1 or one of the out openings, so that a game ball that has entered the lottery device 6750 enters the V winning opening. The rate (probability) at which the player wins (the V prize occurs) is 1/6.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the possibility of winning a small hit is 0, but when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a high probability (for example, , 98%). Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol in which the game ball easily enters the second entrance 6400, by continuing to right-hand, the small hit is achieved with a high probability and the small hit attacker 6750a is opened. Therefore, it is easy to enter the V winning hole. On the other hand, in the normal state of the normal symbol, it is difficult to make the game ball enter the second entrance 6400 even if the player hits right, so it is necessary to advance the game by hitting left. A left-hit game ball can enter the first entrance 64, but cannot enter the second entrance 6400, so in the normal state of a normal design, the ball is won by a small hit. There is no. In the thirteenth embodiment, only two types of gaming states, a normal state and a time saving state, are provided. That is, the special symbol high probability state and the low probability state are not provided, and the special symbol lottery probability (direct hit lottery probability) is configured to be always constant.

  Next, details of the lottery device 6750 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 308 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the lottery device 6750. As shown in FIG. 308, one V winning port 6750f1 and five normal V winning ports 6750f2 to 6750f6 are provided in the inside of the lottery device 6750, and the distribution rotator 6750f constantly performs a rotating operation at a constant speed. Is provided. The game ball that has reached the distribution rotator 6750f enters one of one V winning port and five out ports. The distribution rotator 6750f always rotates at a constant speed from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the power is turned off. Depending on the rolling speed and the like of the game ball at, which one of the entrances (one V winning opening and five out entrances) provided in the distribution rotator 6750f varies. That is, each time a game ball enters the lottery device 6750 as a small hit, the game ball can be randomly distributed to any of the entrances.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 308, a small hitting attacker 6750a for opening and closing the entrance portion of the lottery device 6750 is provided on the right side of the lottery device 6750 in a front view. When the small hit is won, the small hit attacker 6750a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). The game ball that has reached the small hitting attacker 6750a from above during the opening period flows into the inside of the lottery device 6750. As shown in FIG. 308, a guiding channel 6750b for letting game balls flow down to the sorting rotator 6750f is provided inside the lottery device 6750. The part is provided with a ball discharge door 6750c that opens and closes the floor. When the ball discharge door 6750c is closed, one flow path is formed by the floor surface of the guide flow path 6750b and the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c, and thus the game ball is moved downstream from the ball discharge door 6750c. And can flow down. On the other hand, when the ball discharge door 6750c is open, the game ball falls to a discharge area 6750d formed below the ball discharge door 6750c and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. That is, it is discharged to the outside without reaching the distribution rotator 6750f. Also, as shown in FIG. 308, the flowing game balls are temporarily stopped in the guide channel 6750b about one game ball downstream of the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c (the guide channel). A ball stopper 6750e capable of closing a specific position of 6750b) is provided.

  The ball discharge door 6750c, the discharge area 6750d, and the ball stopper 6750e are provided to limit the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotator 6750f to one at a minimum. A control method for limiting the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotator 6750f to one will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 309 (a) is a diagram illustrating a case where a plurality of game balls enter the inside of the lottery device 6750 in a state where both the ball discharge door 6750c and the ball stopper 6750e are closed. As shown in FIG. 309 (a), when the ball discharge door 6750c and the ball stopper 6750e are closed, the game balls flowing into the inside of the lottery device 6750 pass through the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c. As a result, the ball stop 6750e prevents the flow from flowing down and is stopped to the right of the ball stop 6750e. If one game ball further flows down in the guide channel 6750b while one game ball is stopped, the flow is prevented by the already stopped game ball, and the right side of the stopped game ball is prevented. Parked. As described above, since the ball stopper 6750e is disposed at a distance of about one game ball from the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c, it enters the lottery device 6750 after the second ball. The played game ball is stopped on the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c.

  FIG. 309 (b) is a diagram showing a state where the ball discharge door 6750c is opened while the game ball is parked. As shown in FIG. 309 (b), when the ball discharge door 6750c is opened, the game balls other than the game balls stopped to the right of the ball stopper 6750e fall into the discharge area 6750d, and the pachinko machine is used. It falls outside the machine 10. Thus, a state where only one game ball is stopped inside the lottery device 6750 can be formed. After 0.5 second has passed since the ball discharge door 6750c was opened, the ball stopper 6750e is tilted leftward when viewed from the front, so that it can pass through the guide channel 6750b. Thereby, one game ball remaining in the lottery device 6750 can be caused to flow down to the distribution rotator 6750f. The game ball that has flowed down the guiding flow path 6750b is dropped toward the distribution rotator 6750f from the upper right direction when viewed from the front with respect to the distribution rotator 6750f, and substantially enters the ball disposed on the right side in front view at the time of the fall. Get into the mouth. By controlling in this way, the number of game balls that can reach the sorting rotator 6750f in one small hit can be limited to a maximum of one, so that the probability of the jackpot using the lottery device 6750 (sorting) The proportion allocated to the V winning opening by the rotating body 6750f) can be made constant.

  Next, the details of the distribution rotator 6750f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 310 is a top view of the distribution rotator 6750f. As shown in FIG. 189, the sorting rotator 6750f is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the top, and has six entrances arranged at an outer edge thereof. Since the distribution rotator 6750f is provided with a slope that is directed downward from the center thereof toward the outer edge, the game sphere that has reached the vicinity of the center of the distribution rotator 6750f from above is inclined toward the outer edge. Along, the ball is distributed to any of the entrances provided in the outer edge portion.

  As shown in FIG. 310, one V winning opening having a substantially trapezoidal shape in a top view and five out ports having a substantially trapezoidal shape in a top view are arranged on the distribution rotator 6750f. That is, the V winning opening 6750f1 and the out openings 6750f2 to 6750f6 are arranged in order. As shown in FIG. 310, while the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, the distribution rotator 6750f always has the shaft 6750fz as the rotation axis and has a constant speed in the clockwise direction in a top view (for example, for 6 seconds). (A rotation speed that makes one rotation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 311, each part (small hitting attacker 6750 a, ball stopper 6750 e, and ball) of the lottery device 6750 in the case of a small hit in the second special symbol lottery in the thirteenth embodiment. The operation pattern (opening pattern) of the discharge door 6750c) will be described. FIG. 311 is a diagram showing a change with time of the state of each part at the time of the small hit winning.

  As shown in FIG. 311, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit attacker 6750 a is opened together with the start of the small hit (start of the effective period of the small hit). As shown in FIG. 311, the open state of the small hitting attacker 6750 a continues for 2 seconds, and is closed when 2 seconds have elapsed. Thereafter, the small hitting attacker 6750a is maintained in the closed state until the small hitting ends. If the game ball can enter the small hitting attacker 6750a during the opening period of 2 seconds, the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f during the small hitting effective period, and any of the entering balls A game ball can enter the mouth.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 311, the ball stopper 6750 e is maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 309 (a)) until 3.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit, and 3.5 seconds have elapsed. From the point in time (1.5 seconds after the closing of the small hitting attacker 6750a) to the end of the small hitting, the state is switched to the open state (a state in which the guiding flow path 6750b can flow down) and closed again at the end of the small hitting. Can be switched to a state. On the other hand, the ball discharge door 6750c is maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 309 (a)) until three seconds have elapsed since the start of the small hit, and at the time when three seconds elapse (the closing of the small hit attacker 6750a). The state is switched to the open state (see FIG. 309 (b)) from the time one second elapses to the end of the small hit, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small hit. In other words, for three seconds after the start of the small hit, both the ball stopping portion 6750e and the ball discharge door 6750c are in a closed state, so that all the game balls entering the inside of the lottery device 6750 are ball stopped. The portion 6750e is stopped in the guide channel 6750b.

  When three seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit, the ball discharge door 6750c is opened with the ball stopper 6750e closed, and the ball is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stopper 6750e. All of the game balls other than the above-mentioned game ball fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6750c to the discharge area 6750d and are discharged to the outside. That is, there is only one game ball stopped inside the lottery device 6750. Then, 0.5 seconds after the ball discharge door 6750c is opened, the ball stopper 6750e is opened, so that one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6750 is directed toward the sorting rotator 6750f. Flow down. As described above, by opening the ball discharge door 6750c first and then opening the ball stopper 6750e, two or more game balls are set inside the lottery device 6750 during the opening period of the small hitting attacker 6750a. Even if the ball enters, the second and subsequent game balls can be discharged from the discharge area 6750d to the outside until the ball stopper 6750e is opened. Therefore, the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotator 6750f in one small hit can be limited to one each time, and thus, the winning probability of the big hit in the small hit (the probability that the game ball enters the V winning opening) ) Can always be constant (１ ／).

  In the thirteenth embodiment, in the normal symbol time-saving state, if the lottery of the second special symbol executed with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol being 0 gives a small hit, the fluctuation time is 1 For 2 seconds, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds. For this reason, even if the fluctuation start timing (ball entry timing to the second entrance 6400) can be adjusted by adjusting the launch timing of the game ball, it is not possible to adjust up to the start timing of the small hitting game. Since it becomes impossible (started at any timing of 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the small hit start timing at which the V prize becomes easy from the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6750f is set. The game method of predicting and adjusting the firing timing of the game ball can be configured so as not to be established. In other words, the big hit (per V) winning rate in the case of a small hit in the time reduction state can be made constant (１ ／). Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is fixed to 30 seconds regardless of the game state, the electric accessory 6400a is opened only at an interval of at least 30 seconds (second ball entry). The opportunity to enter the mouth 6400 is given only every 30 seconds). On the other hand, when a small hit is won at a rate of 98% in the second special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds or less (one of 1 second, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds). That is, even if the effective period (six seconds) of the small hit game is taken into account, the period required from the start of the lottery of one special symbol to the end of the small hit game is 9 seconds or less (the normal symbol fluctuation time). Therefore, in the time-saving state, it is basically difficult to accumulate the reserved balls even if the player keeps right-handing continuously. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, “0.5 seconds × 1 time” is set as the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a when a normal symbol is hit in the normal symbol time-saving state, so It is configured such that it is only possible to enter one game ball during the open period based on the symbol hit. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to store the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a situation where the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists, the fluctuation time is fixed to one second. That is, while the reserved ball is present, a new special symbol lottery is executed every 7 seconds (variable time 1 second + small hitting game period 6 seconds). In this case, the timing at which the ball stopping portion 6750e is opened and the game ball stopped inside the guiding flow path 6750b moves toward the distribution rotator 6750f is also every 7 seconds. Here, as described above, the distribution rotator 6750f is configured to always perform the rotation operation at a rotation speed of one rotation in six seconds while the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. When the game ball heads to the distribution rotator 6750f every 7 seconds, the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f approximately every 7/6 laps. Here, as described above, the distributing rotator 6750f has six entrances (V winning opening 6750f1, out exits 6750f2 to 6750f6) arranged at equal intervals, so that the game balls are placed every 7/6 laps. When the ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f, the ball almost enters the ball entrance that is adjacent in the rotation direction to the ball entrance that has been allocated (entered) about the previous time (about 7 seconds ago). I do. Therefore, as the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol increases, the game balls can be made to enter the adjacent entrance at every small hit change, so that the game balls can easily enter the V winning opening 6750f1. I can say. In the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost, the long variation of the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol is changed during the long variation. It was configured to be able to accumulate up to (4) retaining balls. This makes it possible to realize a novel game property that can make a departure that is not very pleasing to a large chance per V on the contrary.

  Next, an overview of the chance zone in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state, control is performed such that a long fluctuation time (for example, 5 minutes) fluctuation pattern (out-of-long fluctuation) is set. During this time, it is possible to store up to (four) reserved balls of the second special symbol. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost, the variation time of the length is set so that the lottery of the ordinary symbol can be executed at least four times or more. As described above, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is 30 seconds, and the opening period of the ordinary symbol is 0.5 seconds. Therefore, during the long fluctuation, the lottery of the ordinary symbol can be executed about five times. . Therefore, it is possible to easily accumulate up to the maximum value of four reserved balls of the second special symbol only by continuously right-handing during the deviation long fluctuation. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing a temporal change of the progress of the game after the reserved ball is accumulated up to the upper limit in the chance zone (off-long variation).

  FIG. 312 (a) shows an example of a temporal change in the arrangement (rotational position) of the distribution rotator 6750f immediately after the end of the chance zone. 312 (a) correspond to any of the six entrances (V winning opening 6750f1, out exits 6750f2 to 6750f6). That is, the numeral “1” represents the first entrance (any one of the six entrances), and the numeral “2” represents the second entrance adjacent to the first entrance in the rotation direction. The mouth and the number "3" indicate the third entrance which is adjacent to the second entrance in the rotational direction, and the numeral "4" indicates the fourth entrance which is adjacent to the third entrance in the rotational direction. The numeral “5” indicates the fifth entrance that is adjacent to the fourth entrance in the rotation direction, and the numeral “6” indicates the entrance in the rotation direction relative to the fifth entrance. The adjacent sixth entrances are shown. Note that FIG. 312 (a) shows the change over time of the entrance where a game ball dropped from the guide channel 6750b can enter as the position (rotation position) of the distribution rotator 6750f. Here, FIG. 312 (a) exemplifies a situation in which the first entrance is arranged to be able to enter the ball at the end timing of the chance zone for easy understanding. Since the rotation of the distribution rotator 6750f is executed irrespective of the end timing of the chance zone (the state of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol), the end timing of the chance zone and the first entrance are not necessarily entered. The timing at which the ball moves to the position where the ball can be moved is not the same.

  As shown in FIG. 312 (a), the type of the entrance that is arranged at a position where the game ball can enter the distribution rotator 6750f is switched every second. That is, as shown in FIG. 312 (a), until one second elapses from the end of the chance zone, the arrangement is such that the game ball can enter the first entrance, and two seconds after the elapse of one second Until the elapsed time, the game ball can enter the second entrance, and after 2 seconds, the game ball can enter the third entrance until 3 seconds. The game ball can enter the fourth entrance from 3 seconds to 4 seconds, and the fifth entrance from 5 seconds to 4 seconds. The arrangement is such that the ball can enter the ball, and from the lapse of 5 seconds to the lapse of 6 seconds, the arrangement is such that the game ball can enter the sixth entrance. Thereafter, the entrance that can enter the ball is switched one by one every one second.

  On the other hand, FIG. 312 (b) is a diagram showing the transition of the game after the end of the long miss change (chance zone). If the reserve ball is accumulated until the end of the long deviation change (during the chance zone), the small hit change starts with the end of the chance zone. As described above, the small hit variation of the second special symbol is always set to one second in a situation where the reserved ball exists, so the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed after one second elapses, and the small hit game is performed. Is started. As described above with reference to FIG. 311, in the small hitting game of the thirteenth embodiment, the small hitting attacker 6750a is opened for two seconds immediately after the start, and the ball first enters the lottery device 6750 during the opening period. The ball (game ball stopped by the ball stopper 6750e) flows down to the distribution rotator 6750f after 3.5 seconds from the start of the small hit. That is, the small hitting attacker 6750a is opened from the lapse of 1 second to the lapse of 3 seconds after the end of the chance zone, and the gaming ball is directed to the distribution rotator 6750f when the lapse of 4.5 seconds after the end of the chance zone. Flowed down. In this case, since the flow-down period from the ball stopper 6750e to the distribution rotator 6750f requires 0.5 seconds to 1 second, it actually takes 5 seconds from the end of the chance zone to reach the distribution rotator 6750f. This is between 5.5 seconds later. That is, as shown in FIG. 312 (a), in an arrangement in which the sixth entrance can enter the ball, the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f. Therefore, if the sixth winning opening is the V winning opening 6750f1, the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 (that is, a V winning occurs) and wins per V (at the end of the small hitting). On the other hand, if the sixth entrance is any one of the out entrances, no V prize is generated, and no victory is won. FIG. 312 (b) illustrates a case where the sixth entrance is an exit.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 312 (b), if the V winning does not occur in the first small hit after the end of the chance zone, after the small hit validity period elapses (after 6 seconds from the start of the small hit). Then, the variable display based on the second reserved ball retained in the chance zone is started. That is, after the end of the chance zone, the fluctuation display based on the second reserved ball is started at the lapse of 7 seconds. In addition, when the reserve ball is stored up to the upper limit (four) in the chance zone, the variation time of the variation display based on the second reserve ball (the variation display executed when there are two reserve balls) Is always set to one second. Therefore, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the elapse of 1 second (8 seconds after the end of the chance zone) after the start of the fluctuation, and the small hit game is started, and the small hit attacker 6750a is operated for 2 seconds (at the end of the chance zone). It is released (after 8 seconds elapse to 10 seconds elapse). Then, as a result of the ball stopping portion 6750e being opened 3.5 seconds after the start of the small hit (11.5 seconds after the end of the chance zone), the range from 12 seconds to 12.5 seconds after the end of the chance zone. Within, the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f. That is, as shown in FIG. 312 (a), in an arrangement in which the first entrance can enter the ball, the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f. Therefore, if the first entrance is the V winning opening 6750f1, the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 (that is, a V winning occurs) and wins per V (at the end of the small hitting). On the other hand, if the first entrance is any one of the out entrances, no V prize is generated and no victory is won. FIG. 312 (b) illustrates a case where the first entrance is an out entrance. As described above, in the second small hitting game after the end of the chance zone, in the rotation direction with respect to the entrance port (sixth entrance) that has entered in the first small hitting game after the end of the chance zone. The ball enters the adjacent entrance (first entrance).

  Then, similarly, as shown in FIGS. 312 (a) and 3 (b), the second hit in the small hit based on the third held ball held in the chance zone (the third small hit after the end of the chance zone). The game ball enters the entrance (second entrance) adjacent to the entrance (first entrance) in the rotation direction with respect to the entrance (first entrance) in the small hit game. Regarding the fourth retained ball, since the retained ball is 0 at the time of digestion of the reserved, any one of 1 second, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds is randomly set as the fluctuation time, but 1 In the case where the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set, the entrance (the third entrance) which is adjacent to the entrance (the second entrance) in the rotation direction in the third small hitting game. In the case of entering the ball into the mouth, and setting a fluctuating time of 2 seconds, two in the rotation direction with respect to the entrance (the second entrance) that entered the ball in the third small hitting game When the ball enters the entrance (the fourth entrance) at the position advanced by the minute and the variation time of 3 seconds is set, the entrance (the fourth entrance) that entered the ball in the third small hitting game The ball enters the entrance (the fifth entrance) at a position advanced by three in the rotation direction with respect to the entrance 2 (the entrance 2).

  In summary, by continuously right-handing in the chance zone, the reserve ball is accumulated to the maximum, and the game ball enters the small hit attacker 6750a during the opening period of the small hit game after the end of the chance zone. By doing so, it is possible to almost certainly enter the sixth entrance, the first entrance, and the second entrance, and any one of the third to fifth entrances , A game ball can be entered. In other words, it is possible to allow the game balls to enter four different entrances among the six entrances provided in the distribution rotator 6750f during the holding digestion after the end of the chance zone. . Therefore, the probability that the V prize will occur is 4/6 from when the chance zone ends to when all the reserved balls of the upper limit number (four) accumulated during the chance zone are consumed. Since the V winning rate is about 52% (1-5 / 6 × 5/6 × 5/6 × 5/6) when the small hitting game is executed four times with the reserved ball being 0, the chance zone Is set, it is possible to form an advantageous situation in which the V winning rate is increased by 10% or more. In addition, when the winning of the normal symbol is started during the holding digestion and the number of the holding balls of the second special symbol increases, the number of small hitting games increases, so that the V winning rate further increases. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the player loses in the time reduction state, an advantageous situation in which the V prize is more likely to occur than usual can be formed. It is possible to realize a novel gaming ability that hopes to become. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, a characteristic effect in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost in the time saving state, control is performed so that the variation time is set to a variation long time of 5 minutes (300 seconds). It is configured to be able to accumulate up to the maximum number of reserved balls during the execution of the change. Then, by storing the reserved balls up to the upper limit number, it is highly likely that the V prize will occur in the small hitting game that is executed from the end of the departure long fluctuation until all the reserved balls are consumed ( 4/6 or more). FIG. 313 describes an effect mode (charge time effect) executed on the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the off-long variation (during the chance zone).

  FIG. 313 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the charge time effect executed when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 313 (a), when a long deviation change is executed (enters a chance zone) and a charge time effect is executed, a character 811 imitating a rabbit is substantially at the center of the main display area Dm. A display mode in which the whole body starts to exert force with a steep expression is displayed, and a display area in which a character “Charge time has entered!” Is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape above the character 811. In this display area, a countdown display of the remaining period until the end of the charge time (chance zone) is also displayed. The example of FIG. 313 (a) illustrates a state where the time is 4 minutes and 56 seconds remaining, and the character “4:56 remaining” is displayed in the display area. Further, on the right side of the character 811 in a front view, an expected degree display image KH of a vertically long substantially rectangular shape is displayed. The expected degree display image KH is a display area in which characters indicating the expected degree of occurrence of the V prize in the small hit game for the number of reserved balls executed after the end of the chance zone are displayed, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is displayed. It is configured such that the degree of expectation displayed increases as the number increases. FIG. 313 (a) illustrates a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, and “Expectation 0/6” is displayed in the expectation display image KH. Further, the character “Right-handed raises the expectation !!” is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the small display area Ds1 formed on the right side of the sub display area Ds The number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous manner by numbers. According to these display modes, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the right hitting improves the expectation of the big hit.

  FIG. 313 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a game ball enters the second entrance 6400a and the number of reserved balls increases during execution of the charge time effect. When a ball entering the second entrance 6400a is detected during the execution of the charge time effect, the character 811 is switched to a display mode in which the character 811 is dressed in an aura OG (the surrounding area emits light), and is displayed on the upper left side of the character 811. , An expectation-up image UG in which the characters “UP !!” are displayed in a horizontally long elliptical shape is formed. Further, the degree of expectation displayed in the degree-of-expectation display image KH increases by one and becomes “１ ／”. Further, the number indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the small display area Ds1 is also updated. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the expectation increases as the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol increases. The range of the aura OG increases as the number of reserved balls increases, and the degree of expectation displayed in the degree of expectation display image KH increases to a maximum of 4/6. These changes in the display content can further increase the sense of expectation for the small hit game executed after the end of the chance zone (charge time), thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the display mode of the aura image OG and the expected degree display image KH is simply changed according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, each time the number of reserved balls increases, the prefetch result may be determined, and the display mode may be determined in consideration of the determination result. More specifically, for example, when the prefetch result is a small hit, the display mode of the aura image OG or the expected degree display image KH is raised by one step, while when the prefetch result is a big hit, the maximum May be set to a display mode corresponding to the degree of expectation (for example, 6/6). With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the change in the display mode (suggested degree of expectation) during the execution of the charge time effect, so that the interest of the player in the game is further improved. Can be.

<Electrical configuration in thirteenth embodiment>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 314 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 314 (a), the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment in that the first random number table 202pa is replaced by the first random number table 202na. A small random number 13 table 202pb is provided instead of the small random number 12 table 202nb, and a second random number 13 table 202pc is provided instead of the second random number 7 table 202fc. The difference is that a jackpot type selection 13 table 202pd is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd, and a variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne. .

  First, the details of the first random number 13 table 202pa in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 315 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first random number 13 table 202pa. As shown in FIG. 315 (a), in the first random number 13 table 202pa in the thirteenth embodiment, a range of values of one type of first random number counter C1 is defined in association with each set value. I have. That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, the special symbol low-probability state and the probable change state do not exist, and the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery) is always executed with a constant jackpot probability.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 315 (a), for setting 1, “0 to 204” is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. For setting 2, "0 to 217" is defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1, and for setting 3, the counter of the first random number counter C1 is set. “0 to 233” is defined in association with the range of the value (random value), and “0 to 251” corresponds to the setting 4 in the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. For setting 5, “0 to 311” is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. Counter value of random number counter C1 "0-409" is defined in association with a range of random number). Therefore, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/320 (205/65536), the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/301 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is It is 1/280 (234/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/260 (252/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/210 (312/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 Is 1/160 (410/65536).

  Next, the details of the small random number 13 table 202pb in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 315 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the small hit random number 13 table 202pb in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 315 (b), the value of the first random number counter C1 is not associated with the first special symbol. Therefore, the probability of a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol is zero. On the other hand, for the second special symbol, "410 to 64634" is defined in association with the range of the counter value of the first random number counter C1. Therefore, the probability of a small win in the second special symbol lottery is 1 / 1.02 (64225/65536). Therefore. Taking into account the jackpot probability, the probability of a loss in the second special symbol lottery is 1/59 (setting 1) to 1/73 (setting 6). In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of rushing into the chance zone in the time reduction state (becoming out of the lottery of a special symbol and setting a long fluctuation), so the time reduction after the advantageous time reduction state is set Until the lottery based on the reserved balls of all the second special symbols suspended in the state is completed, the probability of winning per V is higher in the low setting. Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, when a winning per V is won, the gaming state after the end of the per V is always set to an advantageous time saving state. Therefore, once the time saving state is set, the lower the setting, the easier the time saving state and the jackpot are repeated for a longer time (more times). Therefore, in an advantageous time-saving state, a novel game property in which a game is played in expectation of a low setting can be realized, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, details of the second random number table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 315 (c) is a diagram showing the prescribed content of the second random number table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 315 (c), the second random number 13 table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment includes a random number value (second value) determined to be a normal symbol hit in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol. Only "0" is specified as the counter value of the random number counter C4. For this reason, in the low probability state (normal state) of the ordinary symbol, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is 1/300.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 315 (c), the second winning random number 13 table 202pc includes a random number value (second winning random number counter C4) determined to be a normal symbol hit in the normal symbol high-probability state (time saving state). “0 to 299” is defined as the counter value of the above. For this reason, in the low probability state (normal state) of the ordinary symbol, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is 1/1 (300/300). As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol low-probability state (ordinary state) is configured to be extremely low. Thereby, even if it is attempted to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high small hit probability by right-handing in the normal state, it is difficult to hit the normal symbol, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second entrance 6400. Is difficult, so that it is possible to make the structure easier to lose than performing left-handed driving. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of right-handing in the normal state.

  Next, the details of the first hit type selection 13 table 202pd in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection 13 table 202pd is a data table referred to for specifying (determining) the big hit type when the big hit is won, similarly to the first hit type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment. is there. FIG. 316 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the first hit type selection 13 table 202pd.

  As shown in FIG. 316 (a), the first hit type selection 13 table 202pd in the thirteenth embodiment has a big hit when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit (a so-called “direct hit” occurs). In the case where a big hit has occurred based on the direct hit table 202pd1 for specifying (determining) the type and the fact that a V prize has occurred (the gaming ball has entered the V prize opening 6750f1 during the small hit game). And a V hitting table 202pd2 for specifying (determining) the jackpot type. First, the details of the direct hit table 202pd1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 316 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the direct hit table 202pd1. As shown in FIG. 316 (b), in the thirteenth embodiment, as a jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (a direct hit has occurred), Two types of big hits, "big hit B13", are provided. The "big hit A13" is a big hit type (four round time-saving big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is four, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state of five times regardless of the game state. . On the other hand, the "big hit B13" has four rounds of the big hit, and when the winning is performed in the normal state, the normal state is set again after the end of the big hit, and when the winning is performed during the time saving state, It is a jackpot type (four rounds regular jackpot) to which the number of times saved is five. Therefore, in the normal state, “big hit A13” is more advantageous to the player than “big hit B13” because the gaming state after the end of the big hit is more advantageous. In the time-saving state, no matter which jackpot is won, the advantageous time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, so that the degree of advantage is equal.

  As shown in FIG. 316 (b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 64" and the "big hit A13", and the range of "65 to 99" is defined. Thus, "big hit B13" is defined in association with it. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the "big hit A13" is determined at a rate of 65% (65/100), and the "big hit B13" is determined at a rate of 35% (35/100).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 316 (b), the jackpot C13 is provided in the direct hit table 202pd1 as a jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. The "big hit C13" has a number of rounds of big hits of 12 rounds. If the winning is made in the normal state, the normal state is set again after the jackpot is finished, and if the winning is made during the time saving state, the time is reduced. It is a jackpot type (four rounds regular jackpot) to which the number of time savings of five times is given. If you win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. 100% (100/100) "big hit C13" is determined.

  Next, details of the V hitting table 202pd2 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the V hitting table 202pd2 is for specifying (selecting) the type of the big hit executed based on the fact that the V winning has occurred in the small hitting game (the gaming ball has passed the V winning switch 6500e3). Is a data table in which the data of (1) is defined. FIG. 316 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the V hitting table 202pd2. As shown in FIG. 316 (c), in the V hitting table 202pd2, three kinds of big hit types, "big hit D13", "big hit E13", and "big hit F13" are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 316 (c), “big hit D13” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 49”. The “big hit D13” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 12 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. The “big hit D13” is the most successful big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest among all the big hit types, and the game state after the end of the big hit is also advantageous. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit C7” is 50, The probability (ratio) that “big hit D13” is determined (selected) as the type of big hit that is started when a V winning occurs during execution of the small hit game is 50/100 (50%).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 316 (c), the "big hit E13" is defined in association with the hit of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 69". The "big hit E13" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. The "big hit E13" has the second largest number of rounds after the "big hit C13" and the "big hit D13", and the game state after the end of the big hit is an advantageous time-saving state. , "Big hit D13", which is the second most advantageous jackpot type. It is also the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit E13” is 20, The probability (ratio) that “big hit E13” is determined (selected) as the type of big hit that is started when a V winning occurs during execution of the small hit game is 20/100 (20%).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 316 (c), the "big hit F13" is defined in association with the hit of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". The “big hit F13” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is four and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "big hit F13" is the most disadvantageous in terms of the number of rounds, but is the most advantageous big hit type in terms of the gaming state. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit F13” is 30. The probability (ratio) that “big hit F13” is determined (selected) as the type of big hit that is started when a V winning occurs during execution of the small hit game is 30/100 (30%).

  In addition, as described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is won at a rate of about 98%, and a V prize is generated in one small hit game. The probability is 1/6. Further, it is almost impossible to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special symbol unless the lottery of the second special symbol is deviated with a relatively low probability. Therefore, when the time saving state of the number of time savings of 5 is set, the small hitting game is executed 5 times and the ball is shifted to the normal state with the holding ball of the second special symbol being 0, or the V prize is completed within 5 times. In most cases, it occurs or the voltage becomes V. The probability of a V winning occurring within 5 small hits executed in the time saving state is about 59.8% (1-5 / 6 × 5/6 × 5/6 × 5/6 × 5/6). Therefore, basically, once the time saving state is set, the jackpot is won at a rate of about 59.8% (more than 60% when the direct hit is also taken into account). In the case where the second special symbol is won directly, and in the case where the V winning is achieved, an advantageous time-saving state is always set again after the end of the big hit. An advantageous state in which the jackpot and the time saving state are repeated is formed. Therefore, the game can be performed with one goal of shifting to the time saving state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 317, details of the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. Here, although illustration is omitted, the fluctuation pattern selection 13 table 202pe in the thirteenth embodiment is a normal pattern 13 which is referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. Table 202pe1, 13 tables 202pe2 for time saving referred to to determine a variation pattern when a lottery of a special symbol is executed in the time saving state, and lottery of a special symbol in a normal state after clearing the RAM (after setting change). And a RAM clearing table 202pe3 which is referred to to determine a variation pattern when is executed. For convenience of description, first, details of the time saving 13 table 202pe2 will be described.

  FIG. 317 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time saving 13 table 202pe2 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 317, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is hit in the 13 tables for time saving 202pe, the variation type (variation) is applied to the entire range of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the number of balls retained. As a pattern, a short-circuit fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1000 ms is associated and defined. On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is out of order, regardless of the number of retained balls, the outgoing short-time fluctuation of 1000 ms is defined as the fluctuation type with respect to the entire range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. I have. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the time saving state, the fluctuation time is set to 1000 ms regardless of the lottery result.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit, a middle variation corresponding to a variation time of 5000 ms corresponds to a value of the variation type counter CS1 in a range of “0 to 49”. In addition, a long variation per 10,000 ms of variation time is associated with a value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “50 to 198”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of range, the out-of-range long fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is 300,000 ms is associated with the entire range in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. Have been. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost in the time saving state, the second special symbol continues to fluctuate for 5 minutes, so that a chance zone in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be stored during that time is formed. Can be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the fluctuation time is configured to be variable according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of retained balls in the second special symbol is 0, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 65”, and the variation type is the variation time. Is defined in association with a small-hit variation A of 1000 ms, and a small-hit variation B with a variation time of 2000 ms is defined as a variation type in a range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 of “66 to 132”. The variation type counter CS1 defines a small hit variation C of 3000 ms as the variation type in association with the range of "133 to 198". That is, it is configured that the fluctuation time of 1 second, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds, and the fluctuation time of 3 seconds are selected at a ratio of approximately 1: 1: 1. For this reason, in the state where the number of reserved balls is 0, it is possible to configure so that the game method aiming at the small hit start timing that is easy to win V from the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6750f is not established. The V winning rate in the state can be uniformly reduced to 1/6.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one or more, the value of the variation type counter CS1 falls within the entire range that can be taken. On the other hand, a small hit variation A with a variation time of 1000 ms is defined in association. For this reason, if the reserved balls are accumulated up to the upper limit number in the chance zone, the fluctuation time is fixed at 1 second until the reserved balls become 0 (until the three reserved balls are digested). The interval at which the sphere reaches the distribution rotator 6750f can be made constant (7 second intervals). As a result, with respect to the sorting rotator 6750f that makes one round in 6 seconds, until the reserved ball becomes 0, the entry adjacent to the entrance that entered in the previous small hit in the direction of rotation is made in each small hit. A game ball can enter the ball opening. That is, in the small hitting game corresponding to the number of the reserved balls, it is possible to configure so that it is difficult to enter the same entrance, so that the possibility of winning a V can be improved. Therefore, when a chance to shift to the chance zone and accumulate the reserved balls is given, the sense of expectation for the V winning can be improved. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the normal state, the correspondence between the variation pattern of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same except for the deviation. ing. Therefore, for example, even when a long variation is set due to a lottery of the second special symbol executed in a state where the number of time savings is one, the holding ball of the second special symbol is released during the long variation. By accumulating, after the end of the long fluctuation (that is, after the end of the time saving state), it is possible to execute a small hit game with a high V winning rate. That is, a small hit game with a high V prize rate can be executed after the end of the chance zone regardless of the timing when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost. Can be expected. It should be noted that, in the normal state, if the lottery is lost in the second special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time is set to be one second and the short fluctuation is set. This is because, even if a long change is executed in the case of a departure in the normal state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is low and the reserved ball of the second special symbol cannot be accumulated, so the lottery of the special symbol is executed. In other words, it is intended to suppress a long useless period in which a reserved ball cannot be accumulated.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 314 (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 314 (b), the RAM 203 in the thirteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) (see FIG. 268 (b)) in the jackpot type. The difference is that a storage area 203pa and a V passing flag 203pb are added. In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj, the positive change flag 203fa, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, The difference is that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf are deleted. The deletion of these flags and counters is due to the elimination of the simultaneous variation function and the probability variation function.

  The jackpot type storage area 203pa is used to determine the jackpot type (type per V) set when the game ball that has won the lottery device 6750 enters the V winning opening 6750f1 during the execution of the small hit game. Is a storage area in which the data of FIG. In the big hit type storage area 203pa, when the change of the special symbol whose judgment result is the small hit stops, the data value corresponding to the big hit type corresponding to the judged small hit type is stored (FIG. 320). S36022). When a game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 in the lottery device 6750, at the end of the small hit, the start of the big hit of the type corresponding to the data value stored in the big hit type storage area 203pa is set (FIG. 324). S3311).

  The V passing flag 203pb is a flag indicating whether or not a V winning has been detected during the small hitting game. If the V passing flag 203pb is on, it indicates that the V winning has already been detected during the small hit game, and if it is off, it means that the V winning has not been detected. The V passing flag 203pb has an initial value set to off, and is set to on when a V winning is detected (see S3406 in FIG. 325). Further, at the end of the small hit in which the V winning is detected, the start of the big hit according to the small hit type is set, and thereafter, the setting is turned off (see S3312 in FIG. 324). With the V passing flag 203pb, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not a big hit should be started at the end of the small hit game (ie, whether or not a V winning has occurred during the small hit game).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 318, the details of the special symbol variation process 13 (S141) will be described. The special symbol variation process 13 (S141) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment), and is a first symbol display. This is a process for setting a special symbol variable display in the device 37.

  In the special symbol variation process 13 (S141), in the process of S251, the same process as the process of S251 of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) is executed. Is done.

  In the special symbol variation process 13 (S141) in the thirteenth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S251 that the current time is not a big hit or a small hit (S251: No), the first symbol display device is executed. It is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S10201). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S10201: No), the first special symbol holding ball counter 203dd is displayed. A value (the number of times N1 of the variable display is held based on the lottery of the first special symbol) is acquired (S10202), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is larger than 0. (S10203).

  In the process of S10203, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S10203: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd. Is subtracted by one (S10204), and a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd changed by the calculation is set (S10205). The special figure 1 pending sphere number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output by the MPU 201 to an external output process of a later-described main process 13 (see FIG. 322) (S1801). ) Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number of the RAM 223. It is stored in the counter 223c.

  After the special figure 1 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S10205, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da is shifted (S10206). In the process of S10206, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203dd to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S10212.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10203, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is 0 (S10203: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (second The number of times the variable display is suspended based on the special symbol lottery N2) is acquired (S10207). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is larger than 0 (S10208). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203de is not 0 (S10208: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203de is subtracted by 1 (S10209) and changed by calculation. A special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the performed second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is set (S10210). The special figure 2 reserved sphere number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output by the MPU 201 to an external output process of a later-described main process 13 (see FIG. 322) (S1801). ) Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de from the reserved figure number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number of the RAM 223. The value is stored in the counter 223c.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S10210, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is shifted by the same method as the processing of S10206 (S10211).

  In the process of S10212 executed after the process of S10206 or S10211, the special symbol variation start process 13 for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10212), and this process ends. The details of the special symbol change start process 13 (S10212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S10201, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10201: Yes), the change time counter for measuring the change time is updated (S10213), and the updated change time counter is updated. Based on the value, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S10214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S10214: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S10215), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10214, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S10214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process 13 (S10212) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process 13 (S10212) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Jackpot type is determined.

  After the processing of S10216 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S10217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S10217: Yes), data corresponding to the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area 203mb (S10218), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is reset to 0. (S10219). Next, the start of the big hit is set, and the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S10220), and the process shifts to S10225.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S10217, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (including the small hit) (S10217: No), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a value larger than 0 (that is, the time reduction of the ordinary symbol). State is determined (S10221), and when it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S10221: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is updated by subtracting 1 (S10222), and the processing is performed. Is shifted to S10223. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 in the process of S10221 (S10221: No), the process of S10222 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S10223.

  In the process of S10223, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (S10223). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S10223: Yes), the start of the small hit is performed. A small hit start process for setting is executed (S10224), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10223, when it is determined that the current lottery result of the special symbol is not a small hit (that is, a loss) (S10223: No), the process of S10224 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S10225. I do.

  In the process of S10225, a stop command indicating a stop type is set, and the process ends (S10225). The stop command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1801) of a main process 13 (see FIG. 322) described later executed by the MPU 201 (S1801). It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a stop symbol of the third symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

  By executing the special symbol change process 13 (see FIG. 318), it is possible to execute only one of the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol. Further, the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed with priority over the lottery of the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 319, details of the special symbol change start process 13 (S10212), which is one of the special symbol change processes 13 (FIG. 318, S141), will be described. In the special symbol change start process 13 (S10212), first, data stored in the execution area is acquired (S321), and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the second The lottery result of the big hit lottery is acquired with reference to the per-random number 13 table 202pa (see FIG. 315, (a)) and the per-random number 13 table 202pb (see FIG. 315, (b)) (S322). Next, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S322 is a special symbol jackpot (S323). If it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S323: Yes), the jackpot type The data indicating the current jackpot type is stored in the storage area 203pa (S324). Then, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set according to the current big hit type (S325). In the process of S325, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the type of the big hit. The big hit type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S326). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S326, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the table corresponding to the current game state in the fluctuation pattern selection 13 table 202pe, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is calculated. The corresponding fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined. When the process of S326 ends, the process moves to the process of S332.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S323 that the current special symbol lottery is not a big hit (S323: No), then it is determined whether the current special symbol lottery is a small hit (S327). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S327: Yes), the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S328). When the processing of S328 is completed, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit is determined (S329). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S329, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at a combination of symbols indicating a small hit. The fluctuation time of the third symbol until the operation is performed is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the table corresponding to the current game state in the fluctuation pattern selection 13 table 202pe, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is calculated. The corresponding fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined. When the processing in S329 ends, the flow shifts to the processing in S332.

  On the other hand, in the process of S327, when it is determined that the current lottery of the special symbol is not a small hit (S327: No), a display mode (missing symbol) at the time of departure is set (S330). A variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S331). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S329, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe corresponding to the current game state, and the variation is determined. A variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the value of the type counter CS1 is determined. When the processing in S331 ends, the flow shifts to the processing in S332.

  When any of the processes in S326, S329, and S331 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in any of the processes in S326, S329, and S331 is set (S332). ). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter (S333). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in any of S325, S328, and S330 is set (S334). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are used in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing 13 (see FIG. 322) described later to control the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the processing of S334 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 318).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 320, details of the small hit start process (S10225) described above will be described. The small hit start process (S10225) is, as described above, a process for starting a small hit when a small hit is won by lottery of a special symbol. In this small hit start processing (S10225), first, the operation scenario (see FIG. 311) of the lottery device 3750 in the small hit game is read out (S3601), and then the current small hit is stored in the big hit type storage area 203pa. In step S3602, data indicating a jackpot type that is started when a V winning occurs is stored. More specifically, in the process of S3602, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, a big hit D13 (12 rounds hourly big hit) is stored as the big hit type, and the first hit If the value of the type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 69", the jackpot E13 (eight rounds of time and small jackpot) is stored as the jackpot type, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "70 to 99". If so, the jackpot F13 (4 rounds time-saving jackpot) is stored as the jackpot type. When the processing of S3603 ends, the start of the small hit is set, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 321, the contents of the ordinary symbol variation process 13 (S142) will be described. This ordinary symbol variation process 13 (S142) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 48, S106) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the ordinary symbol variation process 13 (S142), the processes of S1101 to S1113, S1115 to 1118 and S1121 are respectively performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 48, S106) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processes as those of S1101 to S1113, S1115 to 1118 and S1121 are executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 321, in the ordinary symbol variation process 13 (S142) in the thirteenth embodiment, after executing the process of S1112 or S1113, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be 30 seconds (S1131). The fluctuation time of 30 seconds is a period in which it is difficult to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol even if the player keeps right-handing in an advantageous time-saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is changed to the game state so that the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol cannot be increased unless the special symbol lottery is deviated and the departure long fluctuation is set. It is fixed for 30 seconds. Thereby, when a lottery of the second special symbol is lost during the time reduction state, great joy can be given to the player.

  Also, in the processing of S1118, if the time reduction counter 203h is not on (is off), that is, if it is determined that the current state is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (S1118: No), the opening time of the electric accessory is determined. The number of times is set to “0.2 seconds × 1 time” (S1133). On the other hand, in the process of S1118, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is set to ON (S1118: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory are set to “0.5 seconds × 1 time” ( S1132). This opening time of 0.5 seconds × 1 time makes it difficult to enter two or more game balls into the second entrance 6400 (a reserved ball of the second special symbol per normal symbol). It will be difficult to obtain) is composed of length. After executing the processing of S1132 or S1133, the process proceeds to the processing of S1121.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 322, details of the main processing 13 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The main process 13 is a process executed instead of the main process (see FIG. 55) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the main processing 13, the processing of S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816 respectively correspond to the processing of S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816 of the main processing (FIG. 55) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processing is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 322, in the main process 13 of the thirteenth embodiment, after executing the process of S1803, the main process 13 replaces the big hit control process (see FIG. 56) of the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The big hit control process 13 is executed (S1841). Details of the jackpot control process 13 (S1841) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S1841 is completed, a small hit control process for executing various controls during execution of the small hit game is executed (S1842), and the process proceeds to S1806. Details of the small hit control process (S1842) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the jackpot control process 13 (S1841), which is one of the processes in the main process 13 (FIG. 322), will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 13 (S1841) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (S1804 in FIG. 56, FIG. 56) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for executing control.

  In the big hit control process 13 (S1841), in each of the processes S1901 to S1912 and S1916 to 1918, the big hit control processes (S1801 and S1904 in FIG. 56, S1804) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) are respectively performed. The same processes as those in S1916 to S1918 are executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 323, in the jackpot control process 13 (S1841) in the thirteenth embodiment, in the process of S1912, when it is determined that the current time is the end of the jackpot (S1912: Yes), the winning time is determined. The data of the state storage area 203mb is read (S1991), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is updated according to the gaming state corresponding to the read data of the winning state storage area 203mb and the current big hit type (S1992). , To S1916.

  Next, the content of the small hit control process (S1842), which is one of the processes in the main process 13 (FIG. 322), will be described with reference to FIG. In the small hit control process (S1842), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the start timing of the small hit (S3301). In the process of S3301, when the start of the small hit is set in the small hit start process (see FIG. 320), it is determined that the timing is the start timing of the small hit.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3301 that it is the start timing of the small hit (S3301: Yes), a small hit opening command indicating the start of the small hit opening period is set (S3302), and the small hit flag 203dg is turned on. (S3303), the start of the operation scenario for small hits is set (S3304), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of the small hit (S3301: No), then, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203dg is ON (that is, whether the small hit is in the middle of the small hit) ( If it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is off (S3305) (S3305: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is ON (S3305: Yes), it means that the small hit game is being executed, and it is next whether the small hit end timing is reached (ie, , The end timing of the ending period) is determined (S3306). If the end timing of the small hit is determined (S3305: Yes), the end of the small hit is set by turning off the small hit flag 203dg. It is set (S3308). Next, it is determined whether or not the V passing flag 203pb is on (S3309). If it is determined that the V passing flag 203pb is on (S3309: Yes), the V winning has been detected in the current small hit. Therefore, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S3310), the start of the jackpot of the type corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203pa is set (S3311), and V passing is performed. The flag 203pb is set to off (S3312), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3309, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203pb is off (S3309: No), it means that no V winning has been detected, and therefore, a big hit game based on the V winning is set. The processing is skipped from S3310 to S3312, and the processing ends.

  In addition, in the process of S3306, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the small hit (S3306: No), the entrance to the V winning opening 3750f1 is monitored, and when the entrance is detected, the occurrence of the V winning is determined. A V-pass detection process for storing is executed (S3307), and this process ends. By executing the small hit control process (see FIG. 324), the big hit game can be started only when the V winning is detected during the execution of the small hit game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 325, the contents of the V passage detection processing (S3307), which is one of the small hit control processing (FIG. 324, S1842), will be described. As described above, this V passage detection processing (S3307) is processing for monitoring the incoming ball into the V winning opening 3750f1 and storing the occurrence of the V winning when the incoming ball is detected.

  As shown in FIG. 325, in the V passage detection process (S3307), first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203pb is on (S3401), and if it is determined that the V passage flag 203pb is on (S3401). S3401: Yes), since the ball entry (passing) into the V winning opening has already been detected, which means that monitoring of the incoming ball to the V winning opening 3750f1 is not required, and thus the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203pb is off (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not a ball entry (pass) to the V winning opening 3750f1 is detected (S3402), and the V winning is achieved. If it is determined that the incoming ball (passing) to the mouth 3750f1 has not been detected (S3402: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3402 that a ball has been detected in the V winning opening 3750f1 (S3402: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning period is in effect (S3403). If it is outside (S3403: No), an error command is set (S3404) because there is a possibility that the game ball has entered (passed) the V winning opening 3750f1 due to fraud or the like. finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3403 that the current time is within the V validity period (S3403: Yes), a V passing command is set (S3405), and then the V passing flag 203pb is set to ON (S3406). ), End this processing.

  According to the V passage detection processing, when a V prize occurs, the occurrence of the V prize can be stored by setting the V passage flag 203pb to ON. Whether it is possible or not can be accurately determined.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 326 and 327. First, the contents of the variable display setting process 13 (S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This variable display setting process 13 (S4161) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 11 (FIG. 295, S4132) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) described above.

  In the variable display setting processing 13 (S4161), the processing of S5231 is the same as the processing of S5231 of the variable display setting processing 11 (FIGS. 295, S4132) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment). Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 326, in the variable display setting process 13 (S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5281). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is off (S5281: No), the process proceeds to S5285 because the special figure variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change start flag 223d is on (S5281: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the change number counter 223fc (S5231), and the change start flag 223d is set to off (S5282). Next, an effect mode setting process 13 for setting an effect mode according to the fluctuation pattern type notified by the fluctuation pattern command is executed (S5283), and the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5284), and S5285. Move to the processing of. Details of effect mode setting process 13 (S5283) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S5285, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S5285). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not set to ON (S5285: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5285: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S5286), and a display stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command. (S5287), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 327, the contents of the rendering mode setting process 13 (S5283) will be described. This effect mode setting process 13 (S5283) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process 12 (see FIG. 304) in the twelfth embodiment.

  In each of the effect mode setting processes 13 (S5283), S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281 are performed in S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281, respectively, of the effect mode setting process 12 (see FIG. 304) in the twelfth embodiment. The same processing as the above processing is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 327, in the effect mode setting process 13 (S5283) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the current state is not the normal state in the process of S8201 (S8201: No), It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a long fluctuation (S18201). In the process of S18201, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a long variation (S18201: No), the process proceeds to S8207. On the other hand, in the process of S18201, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a long variation (S18201: Yes), an effect mode corresponding to the charge effect (see FIG. 313) is determined (S18202), and the process of S8208 is performed. Move to. By executing the charge effect, the player can easily understand that the player can play the game with the aim of increasing the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by right-handing during the chance zone (charge time). be able to.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, in the time-saving state where the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the normal state (the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), It was configured so that V winning would occur at a rate of 1/6. When a V-prize occurs, a big-hit is started after the end of the small-hit, and the game state after the end of the big-hit becomes an advantageous time-saving state again. Therefore, pay attention to whether or not a V-prize occurs in the small-hit game. A game can be played. In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, a chance zone in which a reserve ball of the second special symbol can be stored up to the upper limit number is formed when the player wins in the time saving state. By executing the right hit continuously in the chance zone and accumulating the reserved balls to the maximum, a small hit game with a higher V prize rate than usual is executed, so a special wish for a strong hope that the player will lose in the time saving state A great amusement can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In the thirteenth embodiment, the higher the setting (the higher the jackpot probability), the lower the probability of departure. Therefore, when shifting to the time-saving state, the lower setting becomes the chance zone. The possibility of migration is increased. In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the degree of advantage in the time saving state, so that when shifting to the time saving state, it is possible to realize a very special and novel gameplay that makes it hope that the setting is lower. it can. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, when a lottery of the first special symbol is lost during the time saving state, a long variation (5 minutes) is set, and only during the long variation. Although it was configured to be able to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special symbol, a period in which the retained balls of the second special symbol can be accumulated (that is, the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening 6750f1 by the distribution device 6750). The period during which control is performed so as to be easily performed is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the reserved balls of the second special symbol are easily accumulated even during the execution of the jackpot game. With such a configuration, a situation in which the player is likely to be assigned to the V winning opening 6750f1 immediately after the end of the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, for example, when a direct hit is won in the time reduction state, by increasing the fluctuation time of the direct hit (for example, to 5 minutes), a state in which a V winning is likely to occur after the end of the direct hit is formed. You may. In this case, the higher the setting, which is easier to win in a direct hit, the higher the degree of advantage, so that the player can be made to think that he / she wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 with the higher setting.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, in a situation where one or more reserve balls of the second special symbol are present, each time the small hit game is executed, the game ball enters the previous small hit (the distribution rotator). The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set (set to one second) so that the game ball can easily enter the entrance that is adjacent to the entrance in the rotation direction with respect to the entrance (distributed by 6750f). Although the configuration has been described, it is not always necessary to set a fluctuation time during which the ball easily enters the ball entrance adjacent in the rotation direction. The behavior when the small hit game is executed continuously in the situation where the reserved balls are accumulated, is arbitrarily determined within a range that is more advantageous than the case where the small hit game is executed the same number of times without holding For example, even if a fluctuating time (for example, 7/6 seconds) in which it is easy to enter the next two entrances in the rotation direction with respect to the entrance that entered in the previous small hit is set. Good.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, in the lottery device 3750 that performs a lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot is to be won by the entered game ball, the possibility that the V prize is generated is increased as the setting becomes lower. It is not limited. For example, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 having a specification in which a probability variable lottery device for performing a lottery during a jackpot game is provided in a gaming state after a jackpot (either a low probability state of a special symbol or a probability variation state). Good. Specifically, if at least one game ball that has entered the probability variable lottery device that allows game balls to enter during the execution of the jackpot game enters the V winning opening, the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot May be set to a special symbol probable change state, while the special symbol is set to a low probability state when no V winning occurs during the jackpot game. Then, the lower the setting, the lower the jackpot probability, but the configuration may be such that the ratio of the jackpot types in which the probability variable lottery device is operated in the operation pattern in which the V prize is likely to occur becomes higher. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, a chance zone (long fluctuation) in which a situation in which a V prize is likely to occur in a small hitting game (a state in which a reserved ball has accumulated up to an upper limit value) is easily formed when a loss occurs in a time saving state. Is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the normal state, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is configured to be able to win a small hit with a lower probability (for example, the probability of 1/100) than the lottery of the second special symbol, the predetermined condition is satisfied. May be configured to form a chance zone. Specifically, for example, in the case of winning two consecutive small wins in the lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time is configured to be extremely long, and by right-handing during that time, during the time reduction state It may be configured such that a reserved ball of the second special symbol can be stored like a set chance zone. With this configuration, even if no V prize occurs in the small hit game of the first special symbol, the V prize is won if the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit after the end of the small hit game. Since it is possible to obtain a chance to easily occur, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the result of the first special symbol lottery after the small hit. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<14th embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the jackpot lottery of the special symbol and the lottery for determining a variation pattern for indicating the result of the jackpot lottery are executed with reference to different random numbers. Was configured as follows. That is, the big hit lottery is executed by comparing the value of the first random number counter C1 with the first hit type selection 13 table 202pa, and the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern is performed by comparing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. , The fluctuation pattern selection 13 table 202pe.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment is configured to execute the special symbol jackpot lottery and the lottery for determining the variation pattern based on the same random number value. Then, a special outlier variation pattern is selected as an outlier variation pattern corresponding to a random number value that is a hit at some set values and is outlier at some set values. In other words, the configuration is such that the set value can be estimated (narrowed down) when an out-of-place variation pattern that is selected only with some set values is executed. With this configuration, the player can play a game by paying attention to the type of the variation pattern executed at the time of departure, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, the execution ratio of the specific effect (winning rate suggestion effect) capable of suggesting the setting increases as the situation becomes more disadvantageous for the player. In other words, the execution rate of the winning rate suggestion effect increases as the number of times that the game cannot be shifted to the advantageous game state after the end of the jackpot (a probable change state that continues until the next jackpot or the number of time savings is 100) continues. It was constituted so that it might become. This makes it possible to remind the player to start the game in the pachinko machine 10 in which the disadvantageous situation continues for a long time, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Although details will be described later, in the fourteenth embodiment, four types of game states of a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, and a latent state are provided, and the normal state and the latent state are disadvantageous. It is configured as a gaming state. In other words, in the normal state and the latent state, even if the electric accessory 6400a is hard to be opened and right-handed, the lottery of the second special symbol is hard to be executed. It is necessary to advance the game). In addition, in the disadvantaged game state, even if the player wins the probability change jackpot, a small percentage of time savings (for example, eight times) is set at a high rate. It is configured such that it is difficult to shift to an advantageous probable change state that continues up to the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which a game is played with a strong desire to win a jackpot in a small number of times (8 times). Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a high ratio (90% ratio) is set, and a special symbol high probability state (latent state or probable change state) is set after the end of the jackpot. Instead, the upper limit number (for example, 11 times) is provided for the number of consecutive times (probable change limit number) of the special symbol high probability state. That is, when the number of times of the probability change is reached, even if the player wins the probability change jackpot, the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is forcibly set to the low probability state of the special symbol. This makes it difficult to predict the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, thereby realizing a deep gaming ability.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. , The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 It is partially changed and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the thirteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 328 is a diagram showing a board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 328, the gaming board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment differs from the board configuration of the gaming board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment (see FIG. 307) in that the lottery device 6750 is deleted. The difference is that various movable members (accessories) capable of executing a predetermined effect operation are provided for each part of the game board 13.

  Next, an operation unit 300 provided with various movable members will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 329 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300, and FIG. 330 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300 when the disassembled operation unit 300 is viewed from the front. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the operation unit 300 is open on one side (the front side in FIG. 330) from the bottom wall 311 and the outer wall 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall 311. And a rear case 310 formed in a box shape. The rear case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 328) (that is, in which the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the operation unit 300, the swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, the box-shaped unit 600, the decorative accessory unit 700, and the second slide operation unit 800 are accommodated in the internal space of the rear case 310, respectively. It is configured as one unit. Specifically, the second slide operation unit 800 is formed to have an outer shape that is slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall 312 of the rear case 310, and contacts the inner surface of the outer wall 312 while Is disposed on the bottom wall portion 311 in a manner surrounded by a circle. In the assembled state (see FIG. 329), the second slide operation unit 800 has a rectangular opening at a position corresponding to the opening 311a of the rear case 310 in a front view.

  The swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, the box-shaped unit 600, and the decoration accessory unit 700 are disposed on the front side of the second slide operation unit 800 in a stacked state, respectively. (See FIG. 329). As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 800) and another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 500) are stacked on the front side in a stacked state. Since it is provided, a predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in a front view. In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 328) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, the predetermined operation unit Can be visually recognized by the player, and other parts can be shielded from the player by other operation units. Accordingly, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation units on the assumption that the entire effect member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 331 and FIG. 332, an outline of the operation mode of the upright object 400 and the first slide operation unit 500 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 331 and 332, FIGS. 329 and 330 are appropriately referred to.

  331 and 332 are front views of the operation unit 300. FIG. Note that FIG. 331 shows a state in which the upright part 410 and the arm member 420 of the swing operation unit 400 are arranged at the extended position, and FIG. 332 shows a state in which the tilting part 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 is arranged at the extended position. Each state is shown in the figure. As shown in FIG. 331, the swing operation unit 400 includes an arm member 420 whose base end is pivotally supported so as to swing and a swing end side opposite to the base end of the arm member 420. Erection member 410 that is pivotally supported, and moves these arm members 420 and erection member 410 between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329 and the extended position shown in FIG. 331. Let it. At the evacuation position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329, the upright member 410 and the arm member 420 are retreated below the opening 311a of the rear case 310, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 328). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 331, the arm member 420 is lifted, and the upright member 410 is arranged at the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, at the front of the third symbol display device 81).

  As shown in FIG. 332, the first sliding operation unit 500 includes a tilting member 510 that is slid and moved obliquely downward, and a rotation that can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 520 a as a rotation axis. An accessory 520 is provided. The tilting role object 510 operates between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329, the tilting role object 510 is retracted to the right of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 328). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 332, the tilting role object 510 is disposed at the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, at the front of the third symbol display device 81).

  As described above, the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment is provided with a plurality of movable members (a variety of role members such as the standing role member 410 and the tilting role member 510), and can perform various staging operations. It is configured to be executable. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 333, a description will be given of a characteristic effect mode in the fourteenth embodiment. In the fourteenth embodiment, in the normal state and the latent state, which are relatively disadvantageous to the player, the degree of expectation (winning rate) of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery of 100 times or less as one type of the variable display effect is shown. It is configured to be able to execute a winning rate suggestion effect that informs (indicates) the player. Here, in the fourteenth embodiment, as described above, in both the normal state and the latent state, it is extremely difficult to execute a special symbol lottery even if the player strikes right (the game must be advanced by left strike). A) disadvantageous game state. That is, since the behavior of the pachinko machine 10 other than the jackpot probability (operation of the pachinko machine 10) is common between the normal state and the latent state, it is basically the normal state or the latent state. It will be difficult to identify. However, if the normal state or the latent state is not known at all, if the special symbols are continuously removed by lottery, the normal state with a low jackpot probability may be set The player has a sense of anxiety as to whether or not the player is motivated to play the game despite the fact that the latent state has a slightly higher degree of advantage than the normal state and a slightly higher degree of advantage has been set. And the player may quit the game. That is, there is a possibility that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. Thus, in the fourteenth embodiment, the winning rate suggestion effect is executed so that the normal state or the latent state can be identified based on the effect content. Thereby, in addition to being able to remind the player to continue the game until the winning rate suggestion effect is executed, motivation for the game is improved when the effect content has a high possibility of a latent state. be able to. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In the fourteenth embodiment, the rate at which the number of time savings is set to 0 is lower when a jackpot is won in the normal state than when the jackpot is won in the latent state. This can prevent the normal state from being excessively disadvantageous as compared with the latent state, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operation rate in the normal state.

  FIG. 333 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode at the start of a winning rate suggestion effect. When the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is set in the normal state or the latent state, the boy with a beeper displayed in the small area Ds2 is imitated while all the third symbols are fluctuated and displayed at high speed. An effect is produced in which the character 710 that has made a speech saying “the winning rate within 100 games is... The dialogue emitted by the character 710 after the dialogue indicates a probability (winning rate) of winning a jackpot during 100 games (that is, until 100 special symbol lotteries are completed). Since the probability of a big hit in the latent state is higher than in the normal state, a higher winning rate is more likely to be suggested in the latent state.

  FIG. 333 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in a case where the winning rate is suggested by the character 710 in the winning rate suggesting effect. As shown in FIG. 333 (b), in the winning rate suggestion effect, an effect is executed in which the character 710 suggests a numerical value of the winning rate to the player by dialogue. FIG. 333 (b) exemplifies a situation in which the dialogue “30% over” indicating that the winning rate is at least 30% or more is issued. Although the details will be described later, the effect mode in which the dialogue “30% over” is issued is configured so that the probability of being selected in the latent state is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the degree of expectation of the latent state is high, and it is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game. In the fourteenth embodiment, the jackpot probabilities of the setting 1 in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol are set to 1/200 and 1 / 55.6. In the low probability state of the special symbol, the ratio of winning the 1/200 jackpot (the winning rate) before the 100 special symbol lotteries are executed is about 39.4%, so the "30% over" winning is achieved. The rate is a numerical value that is applicable even in the normal state of setting 1. As a result, even if a winning rate of “30% over” is suggested in the normal state where the jackpot probability is low, a behavior of winning the jackpot at a rate exceeding 30% can be realized, and therefore the player can be realized. Can be suppressed from causing distrust of the user.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 334 (a), another mode of the winning rate suggestion effect in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. Here, in the winning rate suggestion effect according to the fourteenth embodiment, the theoretical value of the rate of winning a jackpot (winning rate within 100 games) must be maintained before 100 special symbol lotteries are executed. In addition, the winning rate is suggested. The winning rate within the 100 games varies according to the setting. More specifically, in the fourteenth embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot probability of setting 1 is set to 1/200, while the jackpot probability of setting 6 is set to 1/90. ing. Therefore, the winning rate within 100 games of the setting 1 is about 39.4%, while the winning rate within 100 games of the setting 6 is about 67.3%. Therefore, for example, when the winning rate of “40% over” is reported in the normal state, the setting 1 is denied. Conversely, if the winning rate of “40% over” is reported in setting 1, the normal state is denied (the latent state is determined). As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, in consideration of the difference in the jackpot winning rate between each setting and the game state word, in the winning rate suggestion effect, the specific production mode (within 100 games within the specific setting or the passing place state) When a win rate higher than the win rate is executed), a part of the situation (a part of the setting or the normal state) is denied. As a result, in the winning rate suggestion effect, in addition to being able to suggest to the player whether the game is in the normal state or in the latent state, it is also possible to indicate the set value. Can be realized.

  FIG. 334 (a) is a diagram illustrating an effect mode of a winning rate suggestion effect in which the setting 6 is determined. As shown in FIG. 334 (a), the setting 6 is configured so that a winning rate of “66.6% over” can be reported as a winning rate suggesting effect. By setting all the places (the tens place, the ones place, and the one place after the decimal point) of the value indicating the winning rate to “6”, it is possible to indicate to the player that the setting is 6. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier to understand. The effect mode of “66.6% over” is configured to be executed only in the normal state in setting 6. In the normal state, the 100 game winning rate of setting 5 (big hit probability 1/120) is about 56.7%, and the 100 game winning rate of setting 6 (big hit probability 1/90) is about 67.3%. In a case where “66.6% over” is notified in the normal state of the setting 6, the behavior of winning a jackpot at a rate exceeding 66.6% can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a distrust.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, as the situation becomes more disadvantageous for the player (the more advantageous game state (either the probable change state that continues until the next big hit or the time reduction state where the number of time savings is 100) is shifted to). It is configured to increase the probability that the winning rate suggestion effect will be executed as the number of consecutive times (the number of through times) that could not be increased increases. That is, it is configured such that the ratio at which the setting is suggested is high. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that he / she wants to continue the game in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, a setting suggestion effect in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the fourteenth embodiment, the main control device 110 is provided with an out-of-order variation pattern (variation type) that can be selected (or easily selected) with only some set values. More specifically, an outlier fluctuation selected only at setting 2 or higher (setting 1 negative super reach), an outlier fluctuation selected only at setting 4 or higher (high setting confirmed super reach), or an outlier fluctuation selected only at setting 6 (Setting 6 confirmed super reach) is provided. In addition, an out-of-order variation (even suggestion super reach) in which an even-numbered setting is more easily selected than an odd-numbered setting, and an out-of-order variation (radix super-reach) in which an odd-numbered setting is more easily selected than an even-numbered setting are provided. . On the sound lamp control device 113 side, when these change types are notified, as in the case of the eleventh embodiment, as a change pattern effect, by the numbers attached to the third symbols on the left and right when a reach occurs, It is configured to suggest a variation pattern type (that is, a setting value) (execute a setting suggestion effect).

  FIG. 334 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern effect (effect mode) when the variation type (variation pattern) of the high setting confirmed super reach is notified from the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 334 (b), when the high setting confirmation super reach is executed, a third symbol with a numeral “4” and a numeral with a numeral “5” are attached to the right symbol column. While the third symbol and the third symbol with the number "6" are stopped vertically in a row, the third symbol with the number "6" is assigned to the left symbol column. , The third symbol with the number “5” and the third symbol with the number “4” are stopped in a vertical line, and a reach effect is executed. That is, the reach of the third symbol with the number “4” is generated in the downward direction, the reach of the third symbol with the number “5” is generated in the horizontal direction, and “6” is obtained in the upward direction. The reach effect (so-called triple reach effect) in which the reach of the third symbol with the number "" is generated is executed, and finally the symbol is stopped and displayed. In the setting suggestion effect, the setting is suggested by the number attached to the symbol to which the reach is applied. Therefore, only the third symbol is checked during the execution of the high setting confirmation super reach, and the settings 4, 5, 6 are set. Can easily be understood.

  In addition, in the setting suggestion effect, in order to execute an effect in which a reach is generated in the third symbol to which any number from “1” to “6” is attached, a normal out-of-range super reach (that is, a selection is made regardless of the setting). When the obtained “super reach” is notified as a variation type, an effect in which reach occurs in the third symbol to which a value other than “1” to “6” (that is, any of “7” to “9”) is added. Is configured to execute. Thus, when the out-of-reach super-reach effect is executed, the player can easily understand whether the effect is a setting suggestion effect or a normal super-reach effect simply by checking the number attached to the third symbol. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier to understand.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourteenth Embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 335 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 335 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (see FIG. 314 (a)) in that the first random number 13 table 202pa Is provided in place of the first random number 14 table 202qa, a jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd is provided in place of the jackpot type selection 13 table 202pd, and a variation pattern is provided in place of the variation pattern selection 13 table pe. The difference is that the selection 14 table 202qe is provided, the time saving provision table 202qf is added, and the small hit random number 13 table 202pb is deleted due to the abolition of the small hit lottery result. I have. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described thirteenth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  First, the details of the first random number 14 table 202qa in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 336 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first random number 14 table 202qa. As shown in FIG. 336 (a), the first random number 14 table 202qa according to the fourteenth embodiment stores a random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in association with a special symbol state and a set value. A range is defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 336 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, for setting 1, the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 0". 328 counter values (random values) of “89, 200 to 437” are defined in association with each other, and for setting 2, the range of the counter values (random values) of the first random number counter C1 is “100 to 189”. , 230 to 503 ”are defined in association with each other. For the setting 3, the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is“ 0 to 89, 230 counter values (random value) are defined in association with each other. For setting 4, the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is set to "100 to 189,280". ~ 6 768 counter values (random number values) of “7” are defined in association with each other, and for setting 5, “0 to 89, 280 to 735” are set as the range of the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1. 546 counter values (random number values) are defined in association with each other. For setting 6, the range of the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is “100 to 189, 300 to 937”. 728 counter values (random number values) are defined in association with each other. Therefore, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/200 (328/65536), the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/180 (364/65536), and the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is 1/160 (410/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/140 (468/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/120 (546/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6. Is 1/90 (728/65536).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 336 (a), in the high probability state of the special symbol, “0 to 1179” corresponds to the setting 1 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. For setting 2, “0 to 1310” is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1. The range of the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C1 is defined in association with “0 to 1474”. For the setting 4, the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is “0”. １６1684 ”are associated with each other. For setting 5,“ 0 to 1965 ”is associated and defined as the range of the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1. The "0-2620" is defined in association with a range of counter values per random number counter C1 (random number). Therefore, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 in the special symbol high probability state is 1 / 55.6 (1180/65536), the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/50 (1311/65536), and the jackpot of the setting 3 The probability is 1 / 44.4 (1475/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1 / 38.9 (1685/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1 / 33.3 (1966/65536). And the jackpot probability of setting 6 is 1/25 (2621/65536). Note that, as in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the low probability state to the jackpot probability in the high probability state is common.

  Here, unlike the other embodiments, the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is not continuous (the value is partially skipped). ) Is a range in which the odd number setting is easier to select than the even number setting as a random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) that is not determined as a special symbol big hit (that is, determined to be out of range), A range where an even number setting is easier to select than an odd number setting, a range that cannot be selected with a setting 1, a range that can be selected only with a high setting (settings 4 to 6), a range that can be selected only with a setting 6, and the like are provided. That's why. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 339 and the like, in the variation pattern selection 14 table according to the fourteenth embodiment, the variation pattern at the time of disconnection and the value of the first random number counter C1 are defined in association with each other. I have. In other words, the configuration is such that the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern lottery are determined with reference to a common counter (first random number counter C1). Then, the configuration is such that a special outlier variation pattern type is associated with a range of random numbers determined to be a jackpot in some set values. With this configuration, it is possible to estimate (narrow down) the set value when the special out-of-offset variation pattern is executed. Therefore, the player can play the game paying attention to the type of the variation pattern executed at the time of departure, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 336 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 336 (b), the first hit type selection 14 table 202qb according to the tenth embodiment includes a large hit type determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. At least a special hitting table 202qd1 and a special hitting table 202qd2 for determining (selecting) a jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery are defined. First, with reference to FIG. 337 (a), the details of the special hit table 202qd1 will be described.

  FIG. 337 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special hit table 202qd1 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 337 (a), in the special hitting table 202qd1 in the fourteenth embodiment, eight jackpot types from "big hit A14" to "big hit H14" are set as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Stipulated. “Big hit A14” to “big hit C14” are the big hit types in which the number of rounds is nine and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the special symbol high probability state. The “big hit D14” to “big hit F14” are the big hit types in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the special symbol high probability state. “Big hit G14” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is nine and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. Further, "big hit H14" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is three rounds and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. Note that whether or not the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is given is configured to be different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit and the big hit type.

  As shown in FIG. 337 (a), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 5”, “big hit A14” (9 rounds probability change big hit) is defined in association with the big hit type. ing. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit A14” is “0 to 5”. ”, The rate at which“ big hit A14 ”is determined (selected) when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery is 6% (6/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “6 to 46”, “big hit B14” (9 rounds probability change big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B14” is 41, “6 to 46”. When a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the rate of determining (selecting) the "big hit B14" is 41% (41/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in a range of “47 to 66”, and “big hit C14” (9 round probability change big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit C14” is 20, which is “47 to 66”. When the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the rate of determining (selecting) the "big hit C14" is 20% (20/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), "big hit D14" (three round probability change big hit) is defined as the big hit type in association with the value "67" of the first hit type counter C2. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit D14" is one, so the first special symbol lottery When the jackpot is won, the rate at which "big hit D14" is determined (selected) is 1% (1/100).

  As shown in FIG. 337 (a), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “68, 69”, “big hit E14” (three round probability change big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit E14” is two, so the first special symbol lottery The rate at which the "big hit E14" is determined (selected) when the big hit is won is 2% (2/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “70 to 89”, “big hit F14” (three round probability change big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit F14” is 20, which is “70 to 89”. When a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the rate of determining (selecting) the "big hit F14" is 20% (20/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “90 to 92”, “big hit G14” (9 rounds normal big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit G14" is 3, so the first special symbol lottery When the jackpot is won, the rate at which "big hit G14" is determined (selected) is 3% (3/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “93 to 99”, “big hit H14” (3 round normal big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit H14” is 7, so the first special symbol lottery When the jackpot is won, the rate at which "big hit H14" is determined (selected) is 7% (7/100).

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the probability of changing the jackpot is 90% (when the jackpot is one of “jackpot A14” to “jackpot F14”), At the rate of 10% (in the case of one of "big hit G14" and "big hit H14"), the normal jackpot is won. The configuration is such that a jackpot of nine rounds is determined at a rate of 70%, and a jackpot of three rounds is determined at a rate of 30%.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 337 (b), the details of the special hit table 202qd2 will be described. As described above, the special two-win table 202qd2 is a data table for determining a hit type when a large hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 337 (b), in the fourteenth embodiment, four big hit types of "big hit I14" to "big hit L14" are provided as the hit types of the second special symbol. “Big hit A14” to “big hit C14” are the big hit types in which the number of rounds is nine and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the special symbol high probability state. The “big hit D14” to “big hit F14” are the big hit types in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the special symbol high probability state. “Big hit I14” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is nine and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the special symbol high probability state. “Big hit J14” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. “Big hit K14” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the special symbol low probability state. Furthermore, "big hit L14" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is three and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the special symbol low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 337 (b), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 66”, “big hit I14” (9 rounds of probability change big hit) is defined in association with the big hit type. ing. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit I14” is “0 to 66”. , 67% (67/100) when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the “big hit I14” is determined (selected).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 337 (b), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “67 to 89”, “big hit J14” (three rounds probability change big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit J14” is “67 to 89”. , 23% (23/100) is determined (selected) when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 337 (b), for the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “90 to 92”, “big hit K14” (9 rounds normal big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit K14” is “90 to 92”. ”, The rate at which“ big hit K14 ”is determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery is 3% (3/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 337 (b), for the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “93 to 99”, “big hit L14” (three round normal big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit L14” is “93 to 99”. ”, The rate at which“ big hit L14 ”is determined (selected) in the event of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery is 7% (7/100).

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the 90% ratio ("big hit I14", The jackpot is determined to be a probable variable jackpot when any one of "big hit J14" is reached, and a normal jackpot is won at a rate of 10% (if any of "big hit K14" or "big hit L14"). The configuration is such that a jackpot of nine rounds is determined at a rate of 70%, and a jackpot of three rounds is determined at a rate of 30%. In other words, the arrangement is such that the number of rounds is equal to that in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery.

  Next, details of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the fourteenth embodiment is different from the other embodiments in that the variation pattern (variation time) is determined according to the value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. Data is defined. FIG. 338 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the fourteenth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 338 (a), the fluctuating pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the fourteenth embodiment includes a game state in which a normal state of a normal symbol is set (that is, a normal state in which a game is to be advanced by left-handed, a latent state). A left-handed state table 202qe1 for determining (selecting) a fluctuation pattern (variation time) in a certain state, and a game state in which a time-saving state of an ordinary symbol is set (that is, a time-saving state in which the game is to be advanced by right-handing) And a right-handed state table 202qe2 for determining (selecting) a variation pattern (variation time) in the (probable variation state). First, the details of the left-handed state table 202qe1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 338 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the left-handed state table 202qe1. As shown in FIG. 338 (b), in the left-handed state table 202qe1 in the fourteenth embodiment, the symbol type, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 are associated with the variation pattern. Stipulated. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is “big hit”, the value of the first random number counter C1 is 4 Is defined in association with the value of the multiple of the “normal hit” of which the fluctuation time is 20,000 ms. For the value of the first random number counter C1 other than a multiple of 4, the “per-hit” of the fluctuation time is 30000 ms. "Super reach" is defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the normal state and in the latent state, when the first special symbol has a big hit, the fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds at a rate of about 1/4, and the fluctuation time is set at a rate of about 3/4. Set to 30 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 338 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is “missing”, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “0 to 99”. Is defined in association with “even suggestive super reach” having a variation time of 30,000 ms. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the odd-number setting, “0 to 89” in the range of the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the even-numbered super reach is set. Is set to the random value determined to be a jackpot, while the even number setting is set so that the range of the random value corresponding to the even-numbered super reach and the range of the random value determined to be the jackpot do not overlap. Is set. Therefore, in the odd number setting, even if the special symbol lottery is executed with the random number value corresponding to the even number suggestion super reach, it is 90% big hit (the deviation change is not executed). Substantially 1/10. That is, even-numbered super-reach is more likely to be executed ten times in the case of even-numbered super-reach, so that when even-numbered super-reach is executed, it is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility that even-numbered super reach is even-numbered.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “100 to 199”, and “odd number suggested super reach” having a variation time of 30,000 ms is defined in association with the value. I have. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the even number setting, “100 to 189” in the range of the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the odd suggestion super reach is set. Is set to the random number value determined to be a jackpot, while the odd number setting is set so that the range of the random number value corresponding to odd-numbered super reach and the range of the random number value determined to be the jackpot do not overlap. Is set. Therefore, in the even-number setting, even if the random number value corresponding to the odd-numbered suggestion super-reach is executed, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the big hit becomes 90% (the deviation change is not executed). Substantially 1/10. In other words, the odd-numbered super-reach is more likely to be executed 10 times in the odd-numbered super-reach, so that when the odd-numbered super-reach is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the odd-numbered setting is more likely to be an odd-numbered setting.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), the value of the first random number counter C1 is in a range of “200 to 229”, and “setting 1 negative super reach” with a variation time of 30000 ms is defined in association with the value. ing. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the setting 1, the entire range of the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach becomes the big hit. In the other settings, the random number value is set so that the range of the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach does not overlap with the range of the random number value determined to be the jackpot. ing. Therefore, in the setting 1, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed with the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negation super reach, the jackpot becomes a jackpot (the deviation change is not executed), so that the setting 1 negation super reach may be executed. Becomes 0. That is, since the setting 1 negative super reach is executed only with the setting 2 or more, when executed, the player can have a sense of security that at least the minimum setting is not attained. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), the value of the first random number counter C1 is in a range of “200 to 229”, and “setting 1 negative super reach” with a variation time of 30000 ms is defined in association with the value. ing. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the setting 1, the entire range of the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach becomes the big hit. In the other settings, the random number value is set so that the range of the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach does not overlap with the range of the random number value determined to be the jackpot. ing. Therefore, in the setting 1, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed with the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negation super reach, the jackpot becomes a jackpot (the deviation change is not executed), so that the setting 1 negation super reach may be executed. Becomes 0. That is, since the setting 1 negative super reach is executed only with the setting 2 or more, when executed, the player can have a sense of security that at least the minimum setting is not attained. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), the “high setting fixed super reach” with a variation time of 30,000 ms is defined in association with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the range of “230 to 279”. ing. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the settings 1 to 3 (low settings), the range of the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the high setting confirmed super reach is set. While the entire range is set to random numbers determined to be a jackpot, in settings 4 to 6 (high setting), a range of random numbers corresponding to a high setting confirmed super reach and a range of random numbers determined to be a jackpot are set. And the random number value is set so as not to overlap. Therefore, in the settings 1 to 3, even if the special symbol lottery is executed with the random number value corresponding to the high setting confirmed super reach, the jackpot becomes a jackpot (the deviation change is not executed), so that the high setting confirmed super reach is executed. The possibility is 0. In other words, since the high setting confirmation super reach is executed only at the setting 4 or higher (high setting), the player feels a great sense of security that the high setting is set (the jackpot probability is set relatively high) when executed. Can be embraced. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be improved.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), the value of the first random number counter C1 is in a range of “280 to 299”, and “setting 6 fixed super reach” with a variation time of 30,000 ms is defined in association with the range. ing. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the settings 1 to 5 (settings other than the setting 6), the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the setting 6 confirmed super reach Is set to random numbers determined to be jackpots, while in setting 6, the range of random numbers corresponding to set 6 confirmed super reach overlaps with the range of random numbers determined to be jackpots The random number value is set so that it does not occur. Therefore, in the settings 1 to 5, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed with the random number value corresponding to the setting 6 confirmed super reach, the jackpot becomes a jackpot (the deviation change is not executed), so the setting 6 confirmed super reach is executed. The possibility is 0. That is, since the setting 6 confirmed super reach can be executed only in the setting 6 (high setting), when executed, it is the highest setting (the jackpot probability is set to the highest) and a great sense of security and satisfaction. Can be held by the player. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be further improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), in the range where the value of the first random number counter C1 is “300” or more, the normal (that is, selected without depending on the setting) variation pattern is different. Are associated. More specifically, “out-of-reach super reach” with a variation time of 30,000 ms is defined in association with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the range of “300 to 10084”. A value of “1085-33465” is associated with “short deviation” of 8000 ms, and a value of the first random number counter C1 is varied with respect to a range of “33466-53224”. “Long deviation” with a time of 12000 ms is defined in association with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the range of “53225 to 65535”, and “Normal reach” with a variation time of 20,000 ms is defined in association with the value. ing.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is "big hit", the variation time is 120,000 ms with respect to the entire range of possible values of the first random number counter C1. Is defined in association with each other. When the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is "out", the variation time of 120,000 ms is "out of range" with respect to the entire range of possible values of the first random number counter C1. “Long variation” is defined in association with the “long variation”. For this reason, when the irregular game method of right-handing in a state where the game is to be advanced by left-handing (normal state, latent state) is practiced, since the electric accessory 6400a is hardly released, the second special symbol Even if the lottery becomes difficult to execute, and even if the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, the fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, so that the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method of right-handing in a game state (normal state, latent state) in which a game is to be advanced by left-handing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 339, in the fourteenth embodiment, it is determined that a random number (counter value of the first random number counter C1) associated with various variation patterns corresponding to the departure and a hit are detected. The outline of the correspondence between the random number value (the counter value of the first random number counter C1) and the setting 1 and setting 4 will be specifically described.

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 339, the random number value determined to be a hit in setting 1 is within the range of the random number value corresponding to even-numbered super reach (the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 99”). , 90% occupying 90%, the whole range of the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach (the range of the first random number counter C1 is "200 to 229"), and the high setting finalized. The entire range of the random number value corresponding to the super reach (the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “230 to 279”) and the random number value range corresponding to the setting 6 confirmed super reach (the first random number counter C1 is "30" which is a part of the entire range of "280 to 299" and the range of the random value corresponding to the out-of-range super reach (the range of the first random number counter C1 is "300 to 10084"). And scope of the ～437 ", is set to. For this reason, if the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of the start winning in the setting 1 is within the range of the random number value corresponding to the even-number suggestion super reach (within the range of "0 to 99"), 90% (" 0-89 ") is determined to be a big hit, and a winning normal variation or a winning super variation is executed. In other words, in the setting 1, which is an odd number setting, even if a random number value corresponding to the even number suggestion super reach is obtained, the ratio at which the even number suggestion super reach is actually executed is only 10%. Becomes difficult to execute.

  In addition, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of starting winning in the setting 1 is within the range of the random number value corresponding to any of the setting 1 negative super reach, the high setting confirmed super reach, and the setting 6 confirmed super reach (“200 299 "), it is always determined to be a big hit, and a winning normal variation or a winning super variation is executed. In other words, the setting 1 is configured so that the possibility of executing the setting 1 negative super reach, the high setting confirmed super reach, and the setting 6 confirmed super reach becomes zero.

  Also, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 339, the random number value determined to be a hit in the setting 4 is in the range of the random number value corresponding to the odd suggestion super reach (the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “100 to 199”). Out of the range of “100 to 189” that occupies 90%, the entire range of the random number value corresponding to the setting 6 determined super reach (the range of the first random number counter C1 is “280 to 299”), The range is set to “300 to 657” which is a part of the range of the random number value corresponding to the super reach (the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “300 to 10084”). For this reason, if the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of the start winning in the setting 4 is within the range of the random number value corresponding to the odd suggestion super reach (within the range of “100 to 199”), 90% (“ 100 to 189 ") is determined to be a big hit, and a winning normal variation or a winning super variation is executed. In other words, in setting 4 which is an even number setting, even if a random number value corresponding to the odd number suggesting super reach is obtained, the odd number suggesting super reach is actually executed only by 10%, and thus the odd number suggesting super reach is performed. Becomes difficult to execute.

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained at the time of the start winning in the setting 4 is within the range of the random number value corresponding to the setting 6 confirmed super reach (within the range of “280 to 299”), it is always determined to be a big hit. Then, the winning normal variation or the winning super variation is executed. In other words, the setting 4 is configured so that the possibility of executing the setting 6 confirmed super reach becomes zero.

  Although illustration is omitted, the same applies to other settings. In setting 2, odd-number suggestion super reach (range of random numbers “100 to 199”) is difficult to be executed, and high setting confirmed super reach and setting 6 are set. A random value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit is set (distributed) so that the possibility of executing the determined super reach (range of random numbers “230 to 299”) becomes zero. ing. In setting 3, even-number suggestion super reach (range of random numbers “0 to 99”) becomes difficult to execute, and high setting confirmed super reach and setting 6 determined super reach (range of random numbers “230 to 299”) Is set (distributed) such that the possibility of the execution is zero, which is determined to be a big hit (the counter value of the first random number counter C1). In setting 5, even-number suggestion super reach (range of random numbers “0 to 99”) becomes difficult to be executed, and setting 6 confirmed super reach (range of random numbers “280 to 299”) may be executed. A random value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit is set (distributed) so as to be 0. In setting 6, the odd-number suggestion super reach (the range of random numbers “100 to 199”) becomes difficult to execute, and the random number (first number) determined to be a big hit is executed so that the other fluctuation types are executed without restriction. The counter value of the random number counter C1 is set (distributed).

  With this configuration, it is possible to provide an outlier variation type that is hard to be executed for each setting and an outlier variation type that is not likely to be executed. It is possible to realize the gaming ability that. For example, when the setting 1 negative super reach and the odd suggestion super reach are confirmed, it is possible to make the player guess that the possibility of the setting 3 or the setting 5 is high. In addition, when the high setting confirmed super reach and the even number suggested super reach are confirmed, the player can be inferred that the possibility of the setting 4 or the setting 6 is high. Further, when the setting 6 confirmation super reach is executed, the player can be convinced that the setting 6 is set. As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel playability of estimating (narrowing down) the setting based on the execution status of the specific type of deviation variation pattern. Interest in games can be further improved. In addition, since the setting can be suggested by the variation type randomly selected in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 simply analyzes the variation pattern command output each time a special symbol lottery is executed. Thus, it is only necessary to execute a fluctuation pattern effect according to the analysis result, and the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 only needs to define the correspondence between the variation type and the effect mode of the variation pattern effect, and does not need to know the set value itself (that is, the main control device). 110 does not need to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the set value. Therefore, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and the setting value can be prevented from being illegally acquired ( Suppression).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 340, the details of the right-handed state table 202qe2 constituting the above-described variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe will be described. FIG. 340 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the right-handed state table 202qe2. As shown in FIG. 340, when the lottery result is “big hit”, the value of the first random number counter C1 is a multiple of 4 and the variation time is 10000 ms regardless of the type of the special symbol. A "per-reach reach" is defined in association with a value other than a multiple of 4 of the first per-random number counter C1, and a "reach super reach" with a variation time of 15000 ms is defined. Therefore, when a special symbol lottery wins in the time saving state and the probable change state, the fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds at a rate of about 1/4, and the fluctuation time is set to 15 seconds at a rate of about 3/4. Is set. That is, a short fluctuation pattern is more likely to be set as compared to a state in which the game needs to be advanced by left-handing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 340, when the lottery result is “missing”, the variation time of the first random number counter C1 is set to “0 to 4999” regardless of the type of the special symbol. Is defined in association with “missing super reach” of 15000 ms, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first is defined in association with the range of “5000 to 44999” and “short deviation” with a variation time of 5000 ms. The range of the value of the first random number counter C1 is “45000 to 54999” and “variable length” of 7000 ms is defined in association with the range, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is “55000 to 65535”. Is defined in association with “out-of-range normal reach” with a variation time of 10,000 ms. That is, in the time saving state or the probable change state, even in the case of deviation, a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time is easily selected compared to the normal state or the latent state. As a result, the game efficiency in the advantageous state can be increased, and the interest of the player in the advantageous state can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 341, details of the time savings assignment table 202qf in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This time savings grant table 202qf is a data table referred to for setting the number of time savings after the end of the big hit according to the big hit type and the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time-saving provision table 202qf.

  As shown in FIG. 341, in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set, the jackpot A14 (9 rounds variable jackpot) and the jackpot D14 (3 rounds variable jackpot) won in the gaming state. If the probability-change jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability-change limit, the number of time savings (65536 times) substantially continuing to the next jackpot is given, while the probability-change limit number (11 times) is reached by the jackpot. Is set to eight time savings. Therefore, if the jackpot A14 or the jackpot D14 is won before the arrival of the probability change limit number, the probability change state (the most advantageous game state) to be continued until the next jackpot is set, while the probability change limit number is reached. , Only the low probability state of the special symbol and the eight time saving states are set, so that the degree of advantage of the player varies greatly depending on whether or not the number of times of the probable change has been reached.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot A14 (9 rounds probability change jackpot) and the jackpot D14 (3 rounds probability change jackpot) won in the gaming state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is set. If the probability change jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability change limit, the number of time savings (65536 times) substantially continuing to the next jackpot is given, while if the probability change limit number is reached by the jackpot, 100 The number of times saved is set. Therefore, even if the number of times of the probability change has been reached, the lottery of the special symbol can be executed 100 times without reducing the number of balls held, so that it is possible to give a sense of expectation to return the jackpot. In the fourteenth embodiment, it is configured not to clearly notify the player whether or not the limit number has been reached (whether the state is the probable change state or the time saving state). For this reason, even if the time-saving state has been set by actually reaching the probability-change limit number, the probability-change state can be expected from the player, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, in the game state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set, the jackpot B14 (9 round probability variable jackpot), the jackpot E14 (3 round probability variable jackpot), and Regarding the jackpot I14 (9 round probability change jackpot), eight time saving times are given regardless of whether the hit is before reaching the probability change limit or the probability change limit number is reached. In other words, if the limit is not reached, the state will be in a stable state until the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the end of the big hit, and the latent state will be in the ninth and subsequent times. On the other hand, if the number of times of the limit has been reached, the time is reduced until the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the end of the big hit, and the normal state is set after the ninth time. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot B14 (9 round probability variable jackpot), the jackpot E14 (3 round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot won in the gaming state (time reduction state, probability change state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. The same number of time savings granted as the big hit A14 and the big hit D14 is associated with I14 (9 round probability change big hit). In other words, the number of time savings (65536 times) that substantially lasts until the next big hit is defined in association with the hit before reaching the probability change limit number, and the number of time savings of 100 times is reached for the hit after reaching the probability change limit number. The number of times is defined in association with each other. Therefore, the jackpots B14, E14, and I14 are more disadvantageous than the jackpots A14 and D14 in the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, when the winning is performed in a normal state or a state where the probability limit number has not been reached in the latent state. In the case of winning in other situations (when winning in the probable change state, time saving state, or when the probable change limit is reached), the same gaming state as the jackpots A14 and D14 is set.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot C14 (9 round probability change jackpot) and the jackpot F14 (3 round probability change jackpot), which are won in the normal state, are defined in association with eight times as the number of time savings. . In addition, in the case of winning the probability change jackpot in the normal state, the number of times of saving will not be reached because the number of times of probability change will not be reached. No need). Regarding the jackpots C14 and F14 which have been won in the latent state, even if the hits are before reaching the probability change limit or the number of times of the probability change is reached, 0 times are defined as the number of time savings in association with each other. I have. That is, when the jackpots C14 and F14 are won in the latent state, the time saving state of the symbol is not given even once, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot C14 (9 rounds probability change jackpot) and the jackpot F14 (3 rounds probability change jackpot) won in the gaming state (hours reduction state, probability change state) in which the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is set. For example, the same number of time savings as the jackpots A14, B14, D14, E14, and I14 are associated with each other. That is, the hit before the arrival of the probability change limit is defined in association with the number of time savings to be continued until the next big hit, and the hit after the arrival of the probability change number of times is defined in association with the number of time reduction of 100 times. ing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot G14 (9 round ordinary jackpot), the jackpot H14 (3 round ordinary jackpot), and the jackpot won in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set. For K14 (9 round normal jackpot) and jackpot L14 (3 round normal jackpot), eight times are defined as the number of time savings. It should be noted that, when a jackpot is won, it is impossible to reach the number of times of probability change, and therefore, the number of times of saving the time when the number of times of probability variation is reached is not specified (it is not necessary to specify). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, for the jackpots G14, H14, K14, and L14 that have been won in the gaming state (the time saving state, the probable change state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, 100 times are given as the number of time savings. Corresponding. In other words, when the jackpots G14, H14, K14, and L14 are won, the number of time savings to be continued until the next jackpot cannot be set, which is more disadvantageous than the jackpots A14 to F14 and H14 to J14.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability limit number of times has been reached for the jackpot J14 (three round probability variation) which has been won. Regardless of whether or not the number of times, the number of times saved is set to 0 in association with it. Therefore, the jackpot J14 has a small number of rounds and is not provided with a time saving state, and thus becomes a disadvantageous jackpot type for the player when the player is won in the normal state or the latent state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, for the jackpot J14 which has been won in the game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is set, if the probability variation jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability variation limit. While the time saving state (65536 times) substantially continuing to the next big hit is provided, if the number of times of the probability change has been reached due to the big hit, 100 time saving times are set.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, according to the jackpot type, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and whether or not the number of times of the probability change has been reached, the number of time savings given after the end of the jackpot is made different. are doing. Thereby, the game state after the end of the big hit can be diversified, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 335 (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 335 (b), the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the fourteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the above-described thirteenth embodiment (see FIG. 314 (b)) in that a probable change flag 203fa and a limit counter 203qa and a limit reaching flag 203qb are different. Further, the difference is that the small hit flag 203dg, the big hit type storage area 203pa, and the V passing flag 203pb are deleted. The deletion of these components is intended to delete the configuration for realizing the V-hit, since the fourteenth embodiment does not include the jackpot (V-hit) based on the V-prize.

  The probability change flag 203fa is a flag for indicating that the gaming state has changed to the probability change state, and is set to ON when it is determined that the probability change state is set. Then, it is set to off when the end condition of the certain change state is satisfied.

  The limit counter 203qa is a counter for counting the number of times of the probability change limit. If the value of the limit counter 203qa is less than 11 at the end of the probability change jackpot, the state after the jackpot is set to the special symbol high probability state to indicate that the number of times of the probability change has not been reached. On the other hand, if the value of the limit counter 203qa is 11 at the end of the jackpot, the state after the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol to indicate that the number of times of the jackpot has been reached. The initial value of the limit counter 203qa is set to 0, and is updated by adding a value one by one at the end of the probability change jackpot every time the probability change jackpot is won (see S3504 in FIG. 352). The limit counter 203qa resets its value to 0 when it is determined that the probability change limit has been reached (the counter value has been updated to 11) at the end of the probability change jackpot and at the end of the normal jackpot (FIG. 352). S3502).

  The limit reaching flag 203qb is a flag indicating whether or not the number of times of the probability change limit has been reached. If the limit reaching flag 203qb is on, it means that the number of times of the probability change has been reached (election has been won 11 times in a row), and if it is off, it has not reached the number of times of the probability change. . The limit reaching flag 203qb is set to off in the initial state, and is set to on based on the fact that the counter value of the limit counter 203qa has been updated to 11, which is the number of times of the probability change at the end of the big hit (see FIG. 352). See S3507). The limit reaching flag 203qb is set to off at the start of the big hit (see S10233 in FIG. 347).

  Next, a state transition method according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, in the fourteenth embodiment, as described above, four game states are provided: a normal state and a latent state that are disadvantageous to the advantage, a time saving state and a probability change state that are advantageous to the player. Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, there are provided two types of probable change states: a probable change state in which the number of time savings is eight and a probable change state that continues until the next jackpot win. In addition, two types of time reduction states are provided: a time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is eight and a time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is 100. In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the normal state and the latent state that are disadvantageous to the player are referred to as a normal mode A and a normal mode B, respectively. Are referred to as a chance mode A and a chance mode B, respectively, and the time saving state in which the number of time savings is large (100 times) is referred to as a pullback mode, and a probable change state (substantially when the extended house This state is referred to as a connected mode. First, a mode transition method in the normal mode A will be described with reference to the upper left side of FIG.

  As shown in the upper left part of FIG. 342, in the normal mode A, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted to another mode only when a jackpot is won. In other words, when one of the jackpots A14 and D14 determined at a rate of 7% is won in the case of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is advantageous to the player in the extended game mode. Is set to In addition, when one of the jackpots B14, C14, E14, and F14 determined at a rate of 83% is won in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is changed to the chance mode B. Is set. Further, when either one of the jackpots G14 and H14 determined at a rate of 10% is won in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is set to the chance mode A. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the normal mode A, the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is always given at least eight times. Can be expected. Further, when the jackpot is won in the normal mode A, the player wins one of the jackpots B14, C14, E14, and F14 (at a high rate of 83%), and shifts to the chance mode B. That is, in most cases, it is possible to receive eight lotteries in the special symbol high probability state, so that the shift to the extended-villa mode can be expected to be stronger.

  Next, a mode transition method in the normal mode B will be described with reference to the upper right side of FIG. As shown on the upper right side of FIG. 342, in the normal mode, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted to another mode only when a jackpot is won. Specifically, when either of the jackpots A14 and D14 determined at a rate of 7% is won in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is advantageous to the player. The mode is set to the extended-villa mode. In addition, when the number of times of the probability change has reached the jackpot due to the jackpot, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the chance mode A. In addition, in the case of winning in the lottery of the first special symbol, if one of the big hits B14 and E14 determined at a rate of 43% is won, the mode after the big hit is set to the chance mode B. In addition, when the number of times of the probability change has reached the jackpot due to the jackpot, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the chance mode A. Further, when either one of the jackpots G14 and H14 determined at a rate of 10% is won in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is set to the chance mode A. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in either of the jackpots C14 and F14 determined at a rate of 40% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode after the end of the jackpot is changed to the normal mode B again. Is set. That is, a disadvantageous state in which the normal symbol time reduction state is not provided is set. In addition, when the number of times of the probability change is reached by the jackpot, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode A. That is, regardless of whether the number of times of reaching the probability change limit has been reached or not, the time saving state is not provided. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the normal mode B, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is given only at a rate of 60%. Therefore, in the game state after the end of the jackpot, the normal mode B is more effective than the normal mode A. Is disadvantageous. However, in the normal mode B, the jackpot probability is increased three times or more. Therefore, the normal mode B is more advantageous in terms of the jackpot probability.

  Next, a mode transition method in the chance mode A will be described with reference to the center left side of FIG. As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 342, in the chance mode A, there is a possibility that the state may shift to another state when the number of time savings ends, in addition to the case where the jackpot is won. Specifically, as shown on the left side in the center of FIG. 342, when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the winning rate is determined at a rate of 90% (big hits A14 to F14, I14, J14). The mode after the end of the big hit is set to the extended play mode most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery wins a regular jackpot (big jackpot G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10%, the mode after the jackpot is set to the pull-back mode. On the other hand, when the number of times saved in the chance mode A has elapsed (the lottery of the special symbol is lost eight times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode A which is disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, in the chance mode A, it is possible to play a game with a strong expectation that a jackpot will be won during the eight times of working hours.

  Next, a mode transition method in the chance mode B will be described with reference to the center right side of FIG. 342. As shown on the left side of the center in FIG. 342, in the chance mode B, there is a possibility that the state may shift to another state when the jackpot is won and when the number of times of saving time is ended, as in the chance mode A. Specifically, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 342, when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the winning rate is determined by a probability of 90% when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot (jackpots A14 to F14, I14, J14). The mode after the end of the big hit is set to the extended play mode most advantageous to the player. Note that, when the number of times of the jackpot has reached the probability change limit is reached, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the pull-back mode. On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery wins a regular jackpot (big jackpot G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10%, the mode after the jackpot is set to the pull-back mode. On the other hand, when the number of times saved in the chance mode B has elapsed (the lottery of the special symbol is lost eight times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode B which is disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, in the chance mode B, similarly to the chance mode A, a game can be played with a strong expectation that a jackpot will be won during eight time savings.

  Next, a mode transition method in the retraction mode will be described with reference to the lower left part of FIG. 342. As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 342, in the pullback mode, as in the chance modes A and B, there is a possibility that the state will shift to another state when a jackpot is won and when the number of times of saving time is completed. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 342, when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the winning rate is determined at a rate of 90% (big hits A14 to F14, I14, J14). The mode after the end of the big hit is set to the extended play mode most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the number of time savings elapses in the pullback mode (the lottery of the special symbol is lost 100 times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode A which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery wins a regular jackpot (jackpot G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won, the mode after the end of the jackpot becomes the pull-back mode again. Set (loop through pullback mode).

  Next, a mode transition method in the extended-villa mode will be described with reference to the lower right side of FIG. 342. As shown on the lower right side of FIG. 342, in the extended-villa mode, there is a possibility that the state will shift to another state only when a jackpot is won. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 342, when a special symbol lottery wins a regular jackpot (big hit G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10%, The mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the retraction mode. On the other hand, if a special design lottery results in a jackpot and a winning is determined at a rate of 90% (a jackpot A14 to F14, I14, J14) determined at a rate of 90%, the mode after the jackpot ends is again set to the player. Is set to the most advantageous extended mode (the extended mode is looped). In addition, if the winning has been achieved in the jackpot and the number of times of the jackpot has reached the limit number, the pullback mode is set after the jackpot ends.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, in order to shift to the extended play mode that is advantageous to the player, basically, the shift to the chance modes A and B in which eight times are set. Therefore, it is necessary to win the jackpot within a relatively small number of time savings of eight times. However, once the mode is switched to the extended mode, a very advantageous state in which the extended mode and the jackpot are repeated at a high rate of 90% is formed. Therefore, when the mode is switched to the extended mode, the player Can give a great sense of satisfaction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 343 (a), details of the RAM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 343 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 222 according to the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 343 (a), the configuration of the RAM 222 in the fourteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 222 in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) (see FIG. 274) in that the winning rate is indicated. An effect lottery table 222qa, an effect type selection table 222qb, a power return operation table 222qc, and an accessory operation setting table 222qd are different in that they are added.

  First, with reference to FIG. 344 (a), details of the winning rate suggestion effect lottery table 222qa in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The winning rate suggestion effect lottery table 222qa is a data table that defines the rate at which the winning rate suggestion effect (see FIG. 333) is determined as a variation pattern effect for each game situation. Here, as described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, the winning rate suggestion effect increases as the disadvantageous situation for the player continues (the number of times the transition to the retreat mode or the retraction mode cannot be increased increases). Is configured to have a high execution probability.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 344 (a), the current game state is the normal state (normal mode A), and the number of consecutive times that the game cannot be shifted to the advantageous state after the jackpot (through) has been reached. For a situation of three times or less, a probability of 1/100 is defined in association with a lottery probability of a winning rate suggestion effect. In addition, the current game state is the normal state (normal mode A), and the number of consecutive times (through) that could not be shifted to the advantageous state after the jackpot is 4 or more and 6 or less. In addition, a probability of 1/90 is defined in association with a lottery probability of a winning rate suggestion effect. Also, in the case where the current game state is the normal state (normal mode A) and the number of continuous times (through) which could not be shifted to the advantageous state after the big hit is 7 or more and 9 or less In addition, a probability of 1/80 is defined in association with a lottery probability of a winning rate suggestion effect. Furthermore, if the current gaming state is the normal state (normal mode A) and the number of consecutive times (shooting) cannot be shifted to the advantageous state after the jackpot is 10 or more, the winning rate is suggested. A 1/50 probability is defined in association with the effect lottery probability.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the latent state (normal mode B), a 1/50 probability is defined in association with the lottery probability of the winning rate suggestion effect regardless of the number of throughs. As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, the execution probability of the winning rate suggestion effect is increased as the situation becomes more disadvantageous for the player (the more unpleasant situations continue). With this configuration, as the disadvantageous situation continues, the possibility that the setting is suggested in the winning rate suggestion effect increases, so that even if the disadvantageous situation continues, the motivation for the game can be maintained. it can. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the probability that the winning rate suggestion effect is executed in the relatively advantageous latent state (normal mode B) is constant regardless of the situation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the latent state, the execution probability of the winning rate suggestion effect may be increased as the disadvantageous situation for the player continues. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player's motivation to play the game when the disadvantageous situation continues.

  Next, details of the effect type selection table 222qb will be described. The effect type selection table 222qb is a data table that is referred to when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect (see FIG. 333) is determined to determine the effect mode. In order to make the description easy to understand, first, referring to FIG. 344 (b), the correspondence between the jackpot probability in the fourteenth embodiment and the winning rate within 100 games is described, and then FIG. The details of the effect type selection table 222qb will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 344 (b) is a diagram showing, for each set value, the correspondence between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the probable change state of the special symbol and the winning rate within 100 games. As shown in FIG. 344 (b), in the low probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 is 1/200, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 39.4% (100 special symbol lotteries). , The probability of a continuous 199/200 deviation is about 60.6%). In addition, the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/180, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 42.7% (the probability that the winning rate of 179/180 will be consecutively out of 179/180 in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 57.3%). %). In addition, the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is 1/160, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 46.6% (the probability that the winning rate of 159/160 is consecutively lost in the lottery of 100 special symbols is about 53.4). %). In addition, the jackpot probability of the setting 4 is 1/140, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 51.2% (the probability that the winning rate of 139/140 is consecutively out of 139/140 in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 48.8%). %). In addition, the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/120, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 56.7% (the probability of being consecutively out of 119/120 in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 43.3%). %). Furthermore, the jackpot probability of the setting 6 is 1/90, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 67.3% (the probability of being 89/90 consecutively out of 89/90 in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 32.7%). %).

  On the other hand, in the probable change state of the special symbol, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 is 1 / 55.6, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 83.7% (54 consecutive times in 100 special symbol lotteries). .6 / 55.6 is about 16.3%). In addition, the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/50, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 86.7% (the probability of consecutive 49/50 out of 49/50 in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 13.3). %). In addition, the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is 1 / 44.4, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 89.7% (out of 43.4 / 44.4 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries). Probability is about 10.3%). In addition, the jackpot probability of the setting 4 is 1 / 38.9, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 92.6% (in the lottery of 100 special symbols, it continuously falls out of 37.9 / 38.9. Probability is about 7.4%). In addition, the jackpot probability of the setting 5 is 1 / 33.3, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 95.2% (in a lottery of 100 special symbols, it continuously falls out of 32.3 / 33.3. Probability is about 4.8%). Furthermore, the jackpot probability of the setting 6 is 1/25, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 98.3% (the probability that the lottery of 100 special symbols is continuously out of 24/25 is about 1.7). %).

  In the winning rate suggestion effect according to the fourteenth embodiment, an effect mode is selected that does not contradict the actual winning rate within 100 games calculated from the jackpot probability (in the effect type selection table 222qb). Data is specified). As a result, the effect contents of the winning rate suggesting effect and the actual behavior (big hit winning rate) can be matched, so that the player can be prevented from having a distrust of the pachinko machine 10 or the hall. .

  Next, details of the effect type selection table 222qb in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 345 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the effect type selection table 222qb. As shown in FIG. 345, the effect type selection table 222qb according to the fourteenth embodiment defines a value range of the effect counter 223f in association with the effect mode, the game state, and the set value. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 1, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of “0 to 84”, and the odd number setting suggestion effect (within 100 games) An effect mode that suggests 13.5% as a winning rate is defined in association with the effect counter, and even if the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of “85 to 94”, an even number setting suggesting effect (winning rate within 100 games) is set. In the case where the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of “95 to 99”, a latent suggestion effect (30% as a winning rate within 100 games) is defined. % Is suggested in association with each other. Therefore, in the case of the setting 1, if the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is determined in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect (13.5% over indicating the setting 1 or 3 or 5 is notified) is executed at a rate of 85%. Then, an even number setting suggestion effect (a mode in which 24.6% over indicating setting 2 or 4 or 6 is notified) is executed at a rate of 10%, and a latent suggestion effect (the possibility of the latent state is high) is performed at a rate of 5%. (A mode in which 30% over indicating the above is notified) is executed. In other words, most are odd number setting suggestion effects. In addition, as described above, the winning rate within 100 games in the normal state of the setting 1 is about 39.4%, which is higher than the winning rate notified by the above three effects, and may be inconsistent with the actual behavior. Absent.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 2, the odd setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of “0 to 9”. For the range of the counter 203f of “10 to 91”, an even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value of the counter 203f. In the range where the value of the effect counter 203f is "97 to 99", the effect with a certainty of or more than the latent probability or 2 (an effect mode in which the winning rate within 100 games is suggested to be 40%) is supported. It is stipulated. Therefore, in the case of the setting 2, if the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is determined in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect (a mode in which 13.5% over which indicates the setting 1 or 3 or 5 is notified) is executed at a rate of 10%. Then, an even number setting suggestion effect (a mode in which 24.6% over implies setting 2 or 4 or 6 is announced) is executed at a rate of 82%, and a latent suggestion effect (the possibility of the latent state is high) is performed at a rate of 5%. (A mode in which a 30% over indicating that this is the case) is executed, and at a rate of 3%, (a mode in which a 40% over that is higher than the jackpot winning rate of 39.4% in the normal state of the setting 1 is notified) Is executed. In other words, most of the effects are suggestions for setting an even number, but a low-probability or more than two or more fixed effects are also performed. Therefore, in a situation in which the player is convinced that the player is in the normal state (for example, in a situation in which a great addiction occurs during a jackpot), if a confirmed effect of or more than or equal to 2 is set, the setting is 2 or more. Since it can be guessed that there is, it is possible to make the player have fun of guessing the setting.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 3, the odd number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of “0 to 80”. For the range of the counter 203f in the range of "81 to 90", the even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the range, and for the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of "91 to 95", the latent probability suggestion effect is provided. Is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of "96 to 98". , And three or more determined effects (an effect mode in which 45.6% over is suggested as a winning rate within 100 games) are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the case of the setting 3, if the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is determined in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect (a mode in which 13.5% over implies the setting 1 or 3 or 5 is executed) is executed at a rate of 81%. Then, an even number setting suggestion effect (a mode in which 24.6% over implies setting 2 or 4 or 6 is reported) is executed at a rate of 10%, and a latent suggestion effect (the possibility of the latent state is high) is performed at a rate of 5%. A mode in which 30% over is notified to indicate that the effect is 3% or more is a certainty or2 or more confirmed effect (40% over higher than 39.4%, which is the jackpot winning rate in the normal state of the setting 1). Then, a setting effect of 3 or more at a rate of 1% (a mode in which 45.6% over indicating that the setting is high is notified) is executed. In other words, most of the effects are odd-numbered setting suggesting effects, but with a low probability, a certainty effect with a latent probability of 2 or more and a setting effect with 3 or more settings are also executed. Therefore, when these effect modes are executed, the setting can be guessed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 4, the odd setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of “0 to 9”. For the range of the counter 203f of “10 to 89”, an even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value. For the value of the effect counter 203f of “90 to 94”, the latent probability suggestion effect is provided. Is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of "95 to 97". The determined effect is set in association with the setting 3 or more, and for the value “99” of the effect counter 203f, the latent effect is determined to be 4 or more and the determined effect (an effect mode in which 50% over is suggested as a winning rate within 100 games). Is compatible Only and are defined. Therefore, in the case of the setting 4, if the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is determined in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10%, the even number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 80%, and 5% Is performed at a rate of 3%, and a confirmed performance (or more than or equal to 2) is performed at a rate of 3%, and a determined performance of 3 or more is performed at a rate of 1%. A fixed effect (a mode in which 50% over, which is higher than 46.6%, which is the jackpot winning rate in the normal state of the setting 3, is notified), that is, the effect is almost even setting suggestion effect, but with a low probability A definite effect of at least or2, a definite effect of at least 3 and a definite effect of at least or4 are also executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 5, the odd number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of “0 to 77”, and the effect For the range of the counter 203f in the range of “78 to 87”, the even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value. For the range of the effect counter 203f in the range of “88 to 92”, the latent suggestion effect is provided. Is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of "93 to 95". For example, a setting effect of 3 or more is determined in association with the effect, and a value of “98” of the effect counter 203f is defined in association with a latent effect of 4 or more, and a value of “99” of the effect counter 203f. On the other hand, Confirm effect constant of 5 or more (100 representation embodiment of 56%-over-a winning rate within the game is suggested) it is defined in association. Therefore, in the case of the setting 5, if the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is determined in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 78%, and the even number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10%, and 5% Is performed at a rate of 3%, a determined effect is executed at a rate of 3% or more, a determined effect is executed at a rate of 2%, and a determined effect is executed at a rate of 3% or more. An effect is executed, and a set effect of 5 or more is set at a rate of 1% (a mode in which 56% over which implies setting 5 or 6 is notified).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 6, the odd setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of “0 to 9”. For the range of the counter 203f of “10 to 84”, an even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the range, and for the value of the effect counter 203f of “85 to 89”, the latent probability suggestion effect is provided. Is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of “90 to 92”, and the determined effect is defined in association with a latent or more than or equal to 2 and the value of the effect counter 203f is “93, 94”. That is, the determined effect is set to 3 or more, and the determined effect is defined in association with the value “95” of the effect counter 203f. Against The determined effect is defined in association with a setting of 5 or more, and for the value “98” of the effect counter 203f, a latent or6 determined effect (an effect mode in which 60% over is suggested as a winning rate within 100 games). For the value “99” of the effect counter 203f, a setting 6 finalized effect (an effect mode that suggests 66.6% over as a winning rate within 100 games) is defined and associated. I have. Therefore, in the case of the setting 6, if the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is determined in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10%, the even number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 75%, and 5% Is performed at a rate of 3%, a determined effect is executed at a rate of 3% or more, a determined effect is executed at a rate of 2%, and a determined effect is executed at a rate of 3% or more. An effect is executed, a set effect of 5 or more is set at a rate of 2%, and a latent or 6 set effect at a rate of 1% (60% higher than the jackpot winning rate of 56.7% in the normal state of the setting 5) Then, a setting 6 finalized effect (a mode in which 66.6% over which implies setting 6 is notified) is executed at a rate of 1%. Therefore, when the setting 6 finalization effect is executed, or when the latent or 6 finalizing effect is executed in a state where the normal state is convinced, the player can have great satisfaction. .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 345, in the latent state, the selection ratio of each effect mode is common regardless of the setting. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 345, the value of the effect counter 203f is defined in association with the range of “0 to 59”, and the value of the effect counter 203f is set to “60 to 83”. Is defined in association with the determined effect of at least or2, and the value of the effect counter 203f is defined in association with the determined effect of at least or4, in the range of "84 to 88". For the value "89" of the effect counter 203f, the latent probability or6 determined effect is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f, and for the value of the effect counter 203f of "90-99", the latent certainty effect (winning rate within 100 games) (A mode in which 80% over, which is higher than 67.3%, which is the winning rate of the setting 6 in the low probability state, is notified). Therefore, in the case of the latent state, a latent suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 60%, a latent effect of at least or2 is confirmed at a rate of 24%, and a latent effect of at least 4 is determined at a rate of 5%. A latent or6 determined effect is executed at a rate of 1%, and a latent determined effect is executed at a rate of 10%.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, the setting value and the game state are inferred from the effect contents by differentiating the effect form of the winning rate suggestion effect according to the game state and the set value. It is possible to realize the gaming ability to be performed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, the details of the power return operation table 222qc will be described with reference to FIG. The power supply return operation table 222qc is a data table that is referred to when executing a power supply return operation for confirming whether or not each accessory can be normally changed when the power is turned on. The power return operation is performed every time the power is turned on (regardless of whether the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed). In the power supply return operation table 222qc, a return operation for each type of accessory is defined in association with the value of the return pointer 223qe. If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation of any of the accessories by the return operation, an error command is set (see S9003 in FIG. 357). This error command includes information indicating the type of abnormality and the location where the abnormality has occurred. The display control device 114 that has received the error command performs a display on the third symbol display device 81 indicating the type of abnormality and the location of the abnormality. As described above, by performing the return operation based on the power-on, it can be quickly grasped whether or not each accessory has an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the clerk of the hall starts the game for the player without noticing that an abnormality has occurred in the accessory of the pachinko machine 10.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to return all the accessories to the origin position (origin return) before executing the power return operation based on the power return operation table 222qc. In other words, when the power supply is cut off during the change of the accessory, the power supply return operation is executed after the home position is returned based on the power-on. As a result, only one type of operation that starts from the origin position needs to be prepared for the power return operation (it is necessary to define a power return operation of a different pattern according to the position of the accessory when the power is turned on). Therefore, the data amount of the power return operation table 222qc can be reduced.

  When the power is cut off and the power is turned on again during the change of the accessory, the reason why the operation of the accessory is not executed from the continuation of the operation is that the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not backed up. That is, once the power is turned off, it becomes impossible to grasp the progress of the effect performed so far. Therefore, regardless of whether the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed or not, when the power is turned on, the home return operation is performed and then the power return operation is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the storage content of the RAM 223 is not backed up. However, a configuration may be employed in which backup power is supplied and the information stored in the RAM 223 can be retained even after the power is cut off. With this, when the power is cut off during the production, the progress of the production at the time of the power supply being turned off after the power is turned on can be determined, and the production can be executed from the continuation. be able to.

  FIG. 346 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the power return operation table 222qc. As shown in FIG. 346 (a), the power supply return operation table 222qc defines the operation contents of the accessory for each value of the return pointer 223qe. Although the details will be described later, the return pointer 223qe is set in the initial operation process (see FIG. 357) every time the main process 14 (see FIG. 355) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed until the return operation ends. Are updated one by one.

  As shown in FIG. 346 (a), the power return operation table 222qc of the present embodiment is configured so that the return operation is executed in the order of the tilting role object 510 → the standing role object 410 in accordance with the update of the return pointer 223qe. ing. Further, in the return operation, each accessory is changed from the origin position to the overhang position, and then is changed back to the origin position. That is, the entire operation range in which the accessory may change during the normal game is exhaustively operated by the return operation. Thus, when an abnormality has occurred in any of the accessories, the abnormality can be reliably detected.

  In addition, the power return operation table 222qc of the present embodiment is configured to stop the operation for a predetermined period (2000 ms) after changing each accessory to the overhang position. This makes it possible to detect whether an error has occurred during the operation from the overhang position and the operation from the overhang position to the origin position, and also to detect whether or not an abnormality has occurred while the operation is stopped. can do. Note that the abnormality during the operation stop may be, for example, a case where the operation is not stopped despite the setting of the operation stop, or a point at which the operation is stopped before the predetermined period (2000 ms) designated as the operation stop period elapses. The return to the position may occur, or the return to the origin position may not be started even after the operation stop period has elapsed.

  Further, the power supply return operation table 222qc of the present embodiment is configured to set an operation stop period for a predetermined period (2000 ms) after the return operation of all the accessories is completed. This suspension period is used as a timing for ending the confirmation and shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 10 when confirming whether or not the sub-side control device such as the sound lamp control device 113 normally starts up by shipping inspection or the like. Is provided. That is, if the accessory is operated immediately after the return operation is completed, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 waits until the operated accessory returns to the original point and then shuts off the power or operates the accessory. It is necessary to shut down the power supply during the operation and manually return the accessory to the origin position after the power supply is cut off, which may deteriorate the inspection efficiency. On the other hand, by providing an operation stop period after the end of the return operation as in the present embodiment, if the power is shut off during the operation stop period, the power is shut off in a state where all the characters are at the origin positions. State. Therefore, there is no need to wait for the return to the origin position or to manually return the accessory to the origin position after the power is turned off, so that inspection efficiency such as shipping inspection can be improved.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and the home return operation) is delayed until the setting change ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in performing the setting change operation due to the obstruction of the operation of each accessory, thereby improving the convenience at the time of the setting change operation. In the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting keys 110b and the setting switches 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but these are opened. In the state, since the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening / closing shaft, an abnormal load occurs when the returning operation of the accessory is executed, and the opening / closing shaft is opened. Etc. may be caused. On the other hand, by employing a configuration in which the return operation of the accessory is delayed in the setting change state, it is possible to suppress the operation of the accessory in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. In addition, breakage of the opening / closing shaft and the like can be prevented. Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting is confirmed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and the home return operation) is avoided. This is because if the setting is in the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is unlikely to change. With this configuration, the accessory can be returned to a normally movable state promptly after the setting confirmation state ends.

  Next, details of the accessory operation setting table 222qd in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 346 (b). The accessory operation setting table 222qd is a data table that defines the type (group) of the accessory to be operated and the operation timing in various effects of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the operation of the accessory is set based on the accessory operation setting table 222qd. FIG. 346 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the accessory operation setting table 222qd. As shown in FIG. 346, in the accessory operation setting table 222qd, the timing of operating the accessory and the group of the accessory operated at the operation timing are defined for each corresponding effect.

  More specifically, in the super reach production in which the production time is out of 30 seconds, a series of operations in which the tilting role object 510 moves to the overhang position and then moves to the origin position at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the production start. It is specified to execute. In addition, in the normal reach production in which the production time is 20 seconds, at the timing when 19 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production, after the standing character 410 moves to the overhang position, a series of operations to move to the origin position are executed. Stipulated. Furthermore, in the super reach production in which the production time is 30 seconds, a series of operations in which the tilting role object 510 moves to the overhang position and then moves to the origin position at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production. Is stipulated. In addition, it is stipulated that, at the timing when 29 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect, a series of operations of moving the upright role 410 to the extension position and then moving to the origin position are executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the operation timing of the accessory and the group of the accessory to be operated are defined in the accessory operation setting table 222qd, each group is determined based on the accessory operation setting table 222qd. On the other hand, various operations of various accessories can be realized only by executing predetermined operations.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the accessory is not performed in all the variable effects, but the operation of the accessory is set only in a part of the variable effects having a relatively long fluctuation time. A fluctuation production with a relatively long fluctuation time has a low probability of being selected as a production for notifying a departure, and is likely to be selected as a production for notifying a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a high expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether the accessory operates or not, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the accessory is operated only in a part of the variation pattern effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that an accessory may operate also in other effects, such as a jackpot opening effect, an ending effect, and a round effect. Further, the type of the variable effect for operating the accessory may be increased, and for example, the accessory may be operated even in a departure normal reach or the like. This makes it possible to further diversify the effect, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, details of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 343 (b). FIG. 343 (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223 according to the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 343 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 (see FIG. 302) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the twelfth embodiment) by the sub-setting values. A storage area 223qa, a through number counter 223qb, an initialization flag 223qc, a closing operation flag 223qd, a return pointer 223qe, an accessory operation flag 223qf, a return delay flag 223qg, and a return standby flag 223qh are added. Is different. Further, an interruption flag 223m, a special figure 2 change start flag 223fa, a special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, a preparation state flag 223fd, a special figure 1 change time counter 223fe, and a special figure 2 change time counter 203ff , RUSH flag 223fg, a ceiling effect flag 223fh, a super RUSH flag 223fi, and a consecutive out-of-sequence effect counter 223na. These deletions are mainly intended to eliminate flags and counters for managing various effects that are not executed in the fourteenth embodiment.

  The slave setting value storage area 223qa is a storage area for storing data indicating the setting value of the pachinko machine 10. In the slave setting value storage area 223qa, when data indicating a setting value set in the setting change state is notified from the main control device 110 as a setting value command, data corresponding to the setting value notified by the command is stored. Is stored (see S14204 in FIG. 358).

  The through number counter 223qb is a counter for counting the number of consecutive times (the number of throughs) in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state has failed. When setting the effect mode of the fluctuation pattern effect, the number of throughs indicated by the value of the number-of-throughs counter 223qb and the specified contents of the winning rate suggestion effect lottery table 222qa are referred to to determine whether or not the winning rate suggestion effect can be executed. Is determined (see S18215 in FIG. 363).

  The initialization flag 223qc is a flag that indicates whether or not it is a period during which the return operation of the accessory performed based on turning on the power is performed. As long as the initialization flag 223qc is on, an initial operation process (see FIG. 357) that is a process for setting the return operation of the accessory is executed. On the other hand, if the initialization flag 223qc is off, it indicates that the return operation of the accessory has already been completed, and thus the initial operation process (see FIG. 357) is skipped (see S8901: No in FIG. 356). This initialization flag 223qc is set to ON in the origin returning process (see S4021) of the start-up process 14 (see FIG. 353) (see S8807 in FIG. 354). On the other hand, in the initial operation processing, when it is determined that the return operation of the accessory has been completed (that is, when the END information is read from the power supply return operation table 222qc), it is set to off (see S9104 in FIG. 357). ).

  The closing operation flag 223qd is a flag indicating whether or not the home position return of the accessory executed before the power return operation is completed. If the throwing operation flag 223qd is on, it indicates that the return to origin of the accessory has been completed, and if it is off, it indicates that the return to origin has not been completed. The closing operation flag 223qd is set to ON when it is determined that the home position return operation has been completed (see S9008 in FIG. 357). Further, as described above, since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the power-on operation flag 223qd is also cleared (ie, turned off) when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  The return pointer 223qe is used to select the operation data of the accessory from the power supply return operation table 222qc (see FIG. 346 (a)) defining the operation content of the return operation of the accessory performed based on the power-on. Can be More specifically, each time the initial operation process (see FIG. 357) executed at 1 ms intervals is performed, the return pointer 223qe is updated (1 is added to the value of the return pointer 223qe), and the updated value is updated. The action of the accessory indicated by the value is set. Since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the return pointer 223qe is cleared to zero (the value becomes 0000H) when the power is turned off. For this reason, every time the power is turned on, the return operation of the accessory can be executed from the beginning of the power return operation table 222qc.

  The accessory operation flag 223qf is a flag indicating whether or not each accessory is being changed. The accessory operation flag 223qf is composed of 2 bytes, and each accessory is associated with each bit. If the value of each bit of the accessory operation flag 223qf is 1, it indicates that the corresponding accessory is being changed, and if it is 0, it indicates that the corresponding accessory is being stopped. The value of the empty bit is fixed to 0. Based on the state of each bit of the accessory operation flag 223qf, the type of the operating accessory can be specified.

  The return delay flag 223qg indicates that, since the setting confirmation state is set at the time of power restoration, the return operation of the accessory (origin return operation, power return operation) is delayed until the setting confirmation state ends. This is a flag for indicating.

  The return standby flag 223qh is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation state set at the time of power return has been completed, and it is possible to start a return operation (origin return operation, power return operation) of the accessory. is there.

<Regarding Main Control Process in Fourteenth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 352. First, with reference to FIG. 347, the details of the special symbol variation process 14 (S181) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This special symbol change process 14 (S181) is a process executed in place of the special symbol change process 13 (FIG. 318, S141) in the thirteenth embodiment.

  In the special symbol variation process 14 (S181), in each of S10201 to S10211, S10213 to S10222, and S10225, the special symbol variation process 13 (FIG. 318, S141) in the thirteenth embodiment is performed. The same processes as those in S10222 and S10225 are executed.

  In the special symbol variation process 14 (S181) according to the fourteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit (S10231). When it is determined that the present is a big hit (S10231: Yes), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10231, if it is determined that the present is not a big hit (S10231: No), the process proceeds to S10201.

  In the special symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 347) in the fourteenth embodiment, each process of S10202 to S10206 relating to the lottery of the first special symbol and each process of S10208 to S10211 relating to the lottery of the second special symbol are performed. The processing order has been changed. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed more preferentially than the lottery of the first special symbol.

  In the special symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 347) in the fourteenth embodiment, after the process of S10206 or S10211, the first symbol display device 37 replaces the special symbol variation start process 13 (see FIG. 319). A special symbol change start process 14 for starting the change display is executed (S10232), and this process ends. The details of the special symbol change start process 14 (S10232) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the special symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 347) according to the fourteenth embodiment, when the process of S10219 is completed, the limit reaching flag 203gb is set to off, and the process proceeds to S10220. In the special symbol variation process 14 (S181) according to the fourteenth embodiment, the process directly proceeds to the process of S10225 after executing the process of S10222. This is because, in the fourteenth embodiment, no deviation is provided as a result of the special symbol lottery.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 319, details of the above-described special symbol change start processing 14 (S10232) will be described. The special symbol change start process 14 (S10232) is a process executed in place of the special symbol change start process 13 (FIG. 319, S10212) in the thirteenth embodiment.

  In the special symbol change start process 14 (S10232), in each of S321, S323-S326 and S330-S334, in the special symbol change start process 13 (FIG. 319, S10212) of the thirteenth embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S323 to S326 and S330 to S334 are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 348, in the special symbol change start process 14 (S10232) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, after executing the process of S321, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203fa is ON, that is, It is determined whether or not the state is in the probable change state (S341). If it is determined that the probable change flag 203fa is set to ON (S341: Yes), the first random number 14 table 202pa for the high probability state (FIG. 335) (See (a)), a random number value corresponding to the current setting value is read out (S342), and the process proceeds to S344. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S341 that the probability change flag 203fa is off (S341: No), the current random number in the first random number 14 table 202pa for low probability time (see FIG. 335 (a)) is used. The random number value corresponding to the set value is read (S343), and the process proceeds to S344.

  In the process of S344, the lottery result is obtained based on the winning random number value read in the process of S342 or S343 and the data of the execution area (S344), and the process proceeds to S323.

  The processing of S3341 to S344 is a change due to the fact that the thirteenth embodiment does not have the certainty changing function, whereas the fourteenth embodiment has the certainty changing function.

  Next, details of the set value control processing 14 (S1731) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The set value control process 14 (S1731) is a process executed in place of the set value control process (FIG. 291, S1722) in the above-described thirteenth embodiment, and executes control in a setting change state and a setting confirmation state. This is the process to perform.

  In each of the set value control processes 14 (S1731), in the processes of S3101 to S3113, the same processes as the respective processes of S3101 to S3113 of the set value control processes (FIGS. 291, S1722) in the thirteenth embodiment are respectively executed. You.

  In the setting value control process 14 (S1731) according to the fourteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S3108 that the setting key is at the OFF position (S3108: Yes), the data of the setting value storage area 203ma is displayed. The setting value command is set (S 3121), and the process ends. By executing the processing in S3121, the setting value can be immediately notified to the sound lamp control device 113 when the setting change state ends.

  Next, the details of the main processing 14 of the main control device 110 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The main process 14 (see FIG. 350) is a process executed instead of the main process 13 (FIG. 321) in the thirteenth embodiment.

  In the main processing 14, in the processing of S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816, the same processing as the processing of S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816 of the main processing 13 (FIG. 321) in the thirteenth embodiment is respectively executed. You.

  Further, in the main process 14 (see FIG. 350) in the fourteenth embodiment, after the process of S1803 is executed, the big hit control process 14 is executed instead of the big hit control process 13 (see FIG. 323) in the thirteenth embodiment. (S1851), and proceeds to the process of S1806. Details of the jackpot control process 14 (S1851) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Among the jackpot control processes 14 (S1851), the processes of S1901 to S1912 and 1918 are the same as the processes of S1901 to S1912 and 1918 of the jackpot control process 13 (FIG. 322, S1841) in the thirteenth embodiment, respectively. Is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 351, in the jackpot control process 14 (S1851) in the fourteenth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1912 that the current time is the jackpot end timing (S1912: Yes), the jackpot end A jackpot ending process 14 for setting a later gaming state is executed (S11911), and this process ends. Details of the big hit end processing 14 (S11911) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 352, in the big hit end processing 14 (S11911), first, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is a probability variable big hit (S3501). In the processing of S3501, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot (that is, a normal jackpot) (S3501: No), the value of the limit counter 203ga is set to 0 (S3502), and the probability variation flag 203fa is set. The processing is set to off (S3503), and the process proceeds to S3508.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3501, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probable variable jackpot (S3501: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the limit counter 203ga (S3504), and then the value of the limit counter 203ga after the addition. It is determined whether or not has become 11 (S3505). In the process of S3505, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter after the addition has reached 11 (S3505: Yes), the limit reaching flag 203gb is set to ON (S3507), and after the processes of S3502 and S3503 are executed, S3508 is executed. Move to the processing of. On the other hand, in the process of S3505, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203ga after the addition is not 11 (S3505: No), the probable change flag 203fa is set to ON (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3508.

  In the processing of S3508, the number of times of saving corresponding to the type of the jackpot being executed, the data of the winning state storage area 203mb, and the state of the limit reaching flag is read from the saving time table 202qf (see FIG. 341) (S3508). Then, the read number of time savings is set as the counter value of the time saving counter 203h (S3509). Next, a time-saving setting state command for notifying the set number of time savings is set (S3510), a state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the big hit is set (S3511), and the big hit type being executed and the winning state are set. A variation pattern scenario corresponding to the data of the storage area 203 mb and the state of the limit reaching flag is specified (S3512). Then, the data indicating the scenario specified in the processing of S3512 is stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area (S3513), the end of the jackpot is set (S3514), and this processing ends. By executing the jackpot end processing 14 (see FIG. 352), the game state after the jackpot end can be accurately set by taking into account the number of times of the probability change.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 353 to 363. First, with reference to FIG. 353, details of the start-up processing 14 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The start-up process 14 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (FIG. 59) in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is executed based on turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10. Processing.

  In the start-up process 14, in the processes of S4001 to S4011, the same processes as the processes of S4001 to S4011 of the start-up process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) are respectively executed. You.

  In the start-up process 14 according to the fourteenth embodiment, when the process of S4001 is completed, the arrangement of each accessory at the time of power-on is determined. An origin return process for returning to the position is performed (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4002. Details of the origin return processing (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 354, in the origin return processing (S4021), first, it is determined whether or not a state command indicating a setting change state has been received (S8801). In the process of S8801, if it is determined that the status command indicating the setting change status has been received (S8801: Yes), the return delay flag 223qg is turned on to delay the start of the home position return operation and the power supply return operation of the accessory. (S8802), and the process ends. This makes it possible to delay the returning operation of the accessory until the setting change state is completed, thereby suppressing the possibility that the accessory will operate in the setting change state and make the setting change operation difficult to perform. Can be. In the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting keys 110b and the setting switches 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but these are opened. In the state, since the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening / closing shaft, an abnormal load occurs when the returning operation of the accessory is executed, and the opening / closing shaft is opened. Etc. may be caused. On the other hand, by employing a configuration in which the return operation of the accessory is delayed in the setting change state, it is possible to suppress the operation of the accessory in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. In addition, breakage of the opening / closing shaft and the like can be prevented.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8801 that the status command indicating the setting change status has not been received (S8801: No), it is next determined whether a status command indicating the setting confirmation status has been received (S8801). S8803). If it is determined that the status command indicating the setting confirmation status has been received (S8803: Yes), the initialization flag 223qc and the closing operation flag 223qd are set to off (S8804), and this processing ends. That is, it is set so as not to perform (avoid) the return operation of the accessory (origin return operation, power supply return operation). This is a state in which the setting confirmation state is often shifted by an operation of an operator (for example, a clerk of a hall or the like) in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is moving without any problem in the game-enabled state. This is because it is extremely unlikely that something is abnormal. The configuration to avoid the return operation of the accessory in the setting confirmation state shortens the time from the end of the setting confirmation state to the transition to the state where the game can be played as usual including the operation of the accessory can do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8803, if it is determined that the status command indicating the setting confirmation status has not been received (S8803: No), it is next determined whether there is any accessory deviated from the origin (S8805). ). In the process of S8805, when it is determined that there is an accessory deviating from the origin (S8805: Yes), an operation in the direction of the origin position is set for the accessory deviating from the origin (S8806), and the operation of S8807 is performed. Move on to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no accessory deviated from the origin (S8805: No), the process of S8806 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8807. In the processing of S8807, the initialization flag 223qc is set to ON (S8807), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 355, details of the main processing 14 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The main process 14 is a process executed in place of the main process (FIG. 60) in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the main processing 14, in the processing of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118, the processing of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 of the main processing (FIG. 60) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is respectively performed. The same processing as the processing is performed.

  In the main process 14 of the fourteenth embodiment, when the process of S4111 is completed, next, the accessory control process for controlling the operation of the various accessory is executed (S4141). The details of the accessory control process (S4141) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 356 and 357. When the processing of S4141 ends, next, the command determination processing 14 is executed (S4142). Details of the command determination processing 14 (S4142) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 358 to 361. After performing the process of S4142, the variable display setting process 14 is performed (S4143), and the process shifts to the process of S4114. Details of the variable display setting processing 14 (S4143) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 362 and 363.

  Next, the contents of the accessory control process (S4141), which is one of the processes in the main process 14 (FIG. 355), will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 356, in the accessory control processing (S4141) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag 223qc is on (S8901). If it is determined in the processing of S8901 that the initialization flag 223qc is ON (S8901: Yes), an initial operation processing for setting a return operation (initial operation) of the accessory is executed (S8902), and this processing is performed. To end. Details of this initial operation processing (S8902) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8901 that the initialization flag 223qc is off (S8901: No), it is next determined whether there is any accessory that stops operation (S8903). If it is determined that there is an accessory that stops the operation (S8903: Yes), the operation of the accessory is set to stop, the corresponding bit of the accessory operation flag 223qf is set to 0 (S8904), and the process of S8905 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8903 that there is no accessory to stop the operation (S8903: No), the process of S8904 is skipped, and the process shifts to the process of S8905.

  In the processing of S8905, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory to start the operation (S8905). In the process of S8905, when it is determined that there is an accessory that starts operation (S8905: Yes), the operation is set, the corresponding bit of the accessory operation flag 223qf is set to 1 (S8906), and the process of S8907 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S8905, when it is determined that there is no accessory to start the operation (S8905: No), the process of S8906 is skipped, and the process shifts to the process of S8907.

  In the process of S8907, it is determined whether or not the return standby flag 223qh is on (S8907). If it is determined that the return standby flag 223qh is on (S8907: Yes), the return operation of the accessory has been delayed, and the delay has been released (the return operation is ready to be executed). This means that the return standby flag 223qh is set to off (8908), and the flow shifts to the processing of S8909. If it is determined that the return standby flag is off (S8907: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S8909, it is determined whether there is any accessory deviated from the origin (S8909). If it is determined that there is an accessory deviating from the origin (S8909: Yes), the operation in the origin position direction is set for the accessory deviating from the origin (S8910), and the initialization flag 223qc is turned on. This is set (S8911), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no accessory deviated from the origin (S8909: No), the processing of S8910 is skipped, the processing of S8911 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 357, details of the initial operation process (S8902), which is one of the accessory control processes (FIG. 356, S4141), will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 357, in the initial operation process (S8902) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation of the accessory is detected (S9001). If it is determined in the processing of S9001 that an abnormal operation has been detected (S9001: Yes), a notification operation corresponding to the character that detected the abnormality is set (S9002), an error command is set (S9003), and S9004 is set. Move to the processing of. On the other hand, in the process of S9001, if it is determined that an abnormal operation has not been detected (S9001: No), the processes of S9002 and S9003 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S9004.

  In the process of S9004, it is determined whether or not the closing operation flag 223qd is on (S9004). If it is determined that the closing operation flag 223qd is off (S9004: No), then it is determined whether there is any accessory that is returning to the origin (S9005). In the process of S9005, when it is determined that there is an accessory that is returning to the origin (S9005: Yes), the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9005, when it is determined that there is no accessory that is returning to the origin (S9005: No), the number of drive steps of all the accessory motors is set to 0 (S9006), and the operation is stopped for one second. The period is set (S9007), the closing operation flag 223qd is set to ON (S9008), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9004 that the closing operation flag 223qd is ON (S9004: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the operation stop period (1 second) has elapsed (S9009). If it is determined that the operation suspension period has not elapsed (S9009: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9009, if it is determined that the operation suspension period has elapsed (S9009: Yes), the return pointer 223qe is updated (S9010), and the process returns from the power return operation table 222qc (see FIG. 346, (a)). The data specified by the pointer 223qe is read (S9011), and it is determined whether the END information has been read (S9012). In the process of S9012, if it is determined that the END information has been read (S9012: Yes), it means that the power return operation has been completed, and thus the initialization flag 223qc and the power-on operation flag 223qd are set to off (S9014). ), End this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S9012, if it is determined that the data read from the power return operation table 222qc is not END information (S9012: No), the operation of the accessory corresponding to the read data is set (S9013). The process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 358, details of the command determination processing 14 (S4142) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This command determination process 14 (S4142) is a process executed in place of the command determination process 11 (FIG. 293, S4131) in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment).

  Of the command determination processing 14 (S4142), in the processing of S4203, S4205, S4207 to S4211, S4214, S4216 to S4218, S4220, S4231, S4233 to S4235, and S4242, respectively, the thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) ), The same processes as S4203, S4205, S4207 to S4211, S4214, S4216 to S4218, S4220, S4231, S4233 to S4235, and S4242 of the command determination process 11 (FIG. 293, S4311) are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 358, in the command determination process 14 (S4142) of the fourteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4231 that a status command has been received (S4231: Yes), the thirteenth embodiment ( In place of the status command receiving process 11 (see FIG. 294) in the eleventh embodiment), a status command receiving process 14 is executed (S14201), and this process ends. Details of the status command reception processing 14 (S14201) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 359 and 360.

  If it is determined in the process of S4218 that a hit-related command has been received (S4218: Yes), a jackpot-related process 14 for executing control according to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S14202). Then, the present process ends. Details of the jackpot-related processing 14 (S14202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4218, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4218: No), it is next determined whether or not the set value command has been received (S14203). If it is determined that the set value command has been received (S14203: Yes), the slave set value storage area 223qa is updated according to the set value indicated by the command (S14204), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S14203 that the set value command has not been received (S14203: No), the process shifts to the process of S4220.

  Next, the contents of the status command receiving process 14 (S14201), which is one of the command determining processes 14 (FIG. 358, S4142), will be described with reference to FIG. The status command receiving process 14 (S14201) is a process executed in place of the status command receiving process 11 (FIG. 294, S4241) in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment).

  Of the status command receiving process 14 (S14201), in the processes of S4509 and S4511 to S4514, the processes of S4509 and S4511 to S4514 of the status command receiving process 11 (FIG. 294, S4241) of the thirteenth embodiment are respectively performed. The same processing is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 359, in the status command receiving process 14 (S14201) in the fourteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4513 that the received command is not a command indicating the setting confirmation status (S4513: No), a normal state setting process for executing control according to the type of the status command received in a state where a normal game is possible is executed (S4521), and the flow shifts to the process of S4509. Details of the normal state setting process (S4521) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the normal state setting process (S4521), first, it is determined whether or not the return delay flag 203qg is on (S9101). If it is determined that the return delay flag 203g is ON (S9102: Yes), it means that a status command indicating a normal gaming state has been notified in the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is terminated and the return operation is performed. Since this means that it has become possible, the return delay flag 203qg is set to off, the return standby flag 203qh is set to on (S9102), and the process moves to S9105. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9101 that the return delay flag 203qg is off (S9101: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating either the normal state or the latent state. It is determined (S9103). In the process of S9103, when it is determined that the received command is a command indicating either the normal state or the latent state (S9103: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the through number counter 223qb and updated (S9104). ), And proceeds to the process of S9105. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9103 that the received command is not a command indicating the normal state or the latent state (S9103: No), the process skips step S9104 and shifts to step S9105.

  In the process of S9105, it is determined whether there is a change in the gaming state (S9105). In the process of S9105, when it is determined that the gaming state has been changed (S9105: Yes), a display command corresponding to the changed gaming state is set (S9106), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9105 that the game state has not been changed (S9105: No), the processing of S9106 is skipped, and the present processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot-related processing 14 (S14202), which is one of the command determination processing 14 (FIG. 358, S4142), will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot-related process 14 (S14202) is a process executed in place of the jackpot-related process (S4802 in FIG. 68) in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the jackpot-related processing 14 (S14202), in each of steps S4901, S4902, and S4913 to S4916, S4901 and S4902 of the jackpot-related processing (FIG. 68, S4802) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. , And S4913 to S4916.

  As shown in FIG. 361, in the jackpot-related process 14 (S14202) in the fourteenth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), the process proceeds to S4913. Move on to processing.

  As shown in FIG. 361, in the big hit related process 14 (see FIG. 361) in the fourteenth embodiment, after executing the process of S4902, it is determined whether or not it is a hit during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S4921). ). If it is determined that it is not a hit during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S4921: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4921, if it is determined that the hit is during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S4921: Yes), the value of the through number counter 223qb is reset to 0 (S4922), and this process ends. By executing the jackpot-related process 14 (refer to FIG. 361), the number of times of through can be reset when the mode is shifted to the extended mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to accurately grasp how long the disadvantageous situation continues for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 362, details of the variable display setting process 14 (S4143) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The variable display setting process 14 (S4143) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 13 (FIG. 325, S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment.

  In the variable display setting process 14 (S4143), in each of the processes S5231, S5281, S5282, and S5284 to S5287, S5231, S5281, and S5282 of the variable display setting process 13 (FIG. 325, S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment are respectively performed. , And S5284 to S5287.

  As shown in FIG. 362, in the variable display setting process 14 (S4143) of the fourteenth embodiment, after performing the process of S5282, the process proceeds to the effect mode setting process 13 (see FIG. 327) of the thirteenth embodiment. Then, the effect form setting processing 14 is executed (S5291), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5284. Details of this effect mode setting process 14 (S5291) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In each of the effect form setting processing 14 (S5291), in the processing of S8207 and S8208, the same processing as the processing of each of S8207 and S8208 of the effect form setting processing 13 (FIG. 326, S5283) in the thirteenth embodiment is executed. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 363, in the effect mode setting process 14 (S5291) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a change pattern for setting suggestion has been notified (S18211). When it is determined that the setting suggestion change pattern has been notified (S18211: Yes), a setting suggestion effect mode corresponding to the type of the change pattern is determined (S18212), and the process shifts to S8208. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the even-numbered super reach is notified, the reach is generated in the third symbol with three numbers “2”, “4”, and “6” (triple reach). When the suggestion effect of the mode is set and the variation pattern of the odd-numbered suggestion super reach is notified, a third symbol with three numbers “1”, “3”, and “5” is attached. When a setting suggestion effect in which a reach occurs (triple reach occurs) is set, and a change pattern of setting 1 negative super reach is notified, two numbers “2” and “6” are added. When a setting suggestion effect of a mode in which a reach occurs (a double reach occurs) is set in each of the third symbols, and a change pattern of the high setting confirmed super reach is notified, "4", "5", " 6 " When the setting suggestion effect of the mode in which the reach is generated in each of the third symbols with numbers (triple reach is generated) is set, and the change pattern of the setting 6 confirmed super reach is notified, the number of "6" A setting suggestion effect of a mode in which a reach occurs in the third symbol marked with is set. In this way, when a reach occurs, the set value suggested by the setting suggestion effect can be easily grasped only by checking the number attached to the symbol of the reach, so that the player can easily understand the effect. Aspects can be realized.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when reach is generated in a pattern other than the setting suggestion variation pattern, a third symbol other than the third symbol with a number of “1” to “6” used for setting suggestion is used. (The third symbol numbered “7” to “9”) is configured to generate reach. This makes it possible to easily understand whether or not the variation pattern is a setting suggestion variation pattern simply by checking the number attached to the symbol in which the reach has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S18211 that the change pattern for setting suggestion has not been notified (S18211: No), then it is determined whether or not the current change is a change pattern corresponding to the deviation (step S18211). S18213). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S18213: Yes), it is next determined whether the current state is the normal state or the latent state (S18214). In the processing of S18214, if it is determined that the current state is the normal state or the latent state (S18214: Yes), the lottery probability corresponding to the value of the through number counter 223qb is used to determine whether or not the state suggestion effect can be executed (S18215). Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery of the execution possibility has been won (S18216). In the process of S18216, when it is determined that the lottery for execution is won (S18216: Yes), the setting value and the value of the effect counter 223f are referred to by referring to the effect type selection table 222qb (see FIG. 345). The effect mode is determined (S18217), and the flow shifts to the process of S8208.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S18213, it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S18213: No), and in the processing of S18214, it is determined that the present is neither the normal state nor the latent state. In the case (S18214: No), if it is determined in the processing of S18216 that the lottery of the execution of the state suggestion effect has been unsuccessful (S18216: No), the process proceeds to S8207.

  By executing the effect mode setting process 14 (see FIG. 363), when the change pattern for setting suggestion is notified from the main control device 110, an effect indicating the set value corresponding to the change type is executed. In addition to the above, even when the change pattern for setting suggestion is not notified, as the adverse situation continues for the player, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect can be increased. Therefore, the variation of the variable display effect that can suggest the setting to the player can be enriched, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is configured to execute the special symbol jackpot lottery and the lottery for determining the variation pattern based on the same random number value. Then, a special outlier variation pattern is selected as an outlier variation pattern corresponding to a random number value that is a hit at some set values and is outlier at some set values. In other words, the configuration is such that the set value can be estimated (narrowed down) when an out-of-place variation pattern that is selected only with some set values is executed. With this configuration, the player can play a game by paying attention to the type of the variation pattern executed at the time of departure, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. In addition, since the setting can be suggested by the variation type randomly selected in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 simply analyzes the variation pattern command output each time a special symbol lottery is executed. Thus, it is only necessary to execute a fluctuation pattern effect according to the analysis result, and the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 only needs to define the correspondence between the variation type and the effect mode of the variation pattern effect, and does not need to know the set value itself (that is, the main control device). 110 does not need to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the set value. Therefore, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and the setting value can be prevented from being illegally acquired ( Suppression).

  Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, the execution ratio of the specific effect (winning rate suggestion effect) capable of suggesting the setting increases as the situation becomes more disadvantageous for the player. In other words, as the number of times that the game cannot be shifted to the advantageous game state after the end of the jackpot (a probable change state that continues until the next jackpot or the number of time savings is 100) continues (the more times the number of throughs increases), the winning rate increases. It is configured so that the execution ratio of the suggestion effect is high. This makes it possible to remind the player to start the game in the pachinko machine 10 in which the disadvantageous situation continues for a long time, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and the origin return operation) is delayed until the setting change is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in performing the setting change operation due to the obstruction of the operation of each accessory, thereby improving the convenience at the time of the setting change operation. In the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting keys 110b and the setting switches 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but these are opened. In the state, since the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening / closing shaft, an abnormal load occurs when the returning operation of the accessory is executed, and the opening / closing shaft is opened. Etc. may be caused. On the other hand, by employing a configuration in which the return operation of the accessory is delayed in the setting change state, it is possible to suppress the operation of the accessory in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. In addition, breakage of the opening / closing shaft and the like can be prevented.

  Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting is confirmed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and the origin return operation) is avoided. This is because if the setting is in the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is unlikely to change. With this configuration, the accessory can be returned to a normally movable state promptly after the setting confirmation state ends.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the winning rate suggestion effect is executed in the normal state as the number of consecutive times (the number of through times) in which the game cannot be shifted to the advantageous extended game mode or the pullback mode after the end of the big hit increases. Although the probability is increased and the possibility that the set value is suggested as a result is increased, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the success probability of the winning rate suggestion effect is increased when the normal winning state is reached and the normal state is reached after the jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation for the game even when the player wins the disadvantageous normal jackpot.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the probability that the winning rate suggestion effect is executed in the normal state increases as the number of consecutive times (the number of through times) in which the transition to the advantageous retreat mode or the pullback mode cannot be shifted to after the jackpot is increased. Although it was configured to be high, it is not limited to this. For example, in combination with the twelfth embodiment described above, the winning rate suggestion effect is more easily executed in the advantageous consecutive play mode B (latency state) as the number of consecutive misses in the first special symbol lottery increases. Is also good. Further, for example, there is a disadvantageous situation in which the advantageous small hit change of the second special symbol is deviated due to the small hit of the first special symbol in which the prize ball can hardly be obtained in the consecutive play mode B, and the forcible stop is performed at the symbol. You may comprise so that it may become easy to produce a winning rate suggestion effect, so that it may generate. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the stress on the player when an adverse situation occurs. Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the type that executes a lottery to determine whether or not to shift (fall) to the special symbol low-probability state each time a special symbol lottery is executed in the probability variation state, the state is set to the probability variation state. The setting value may be configured to be more easily suggested by the winning rate suggestion effect as the number of times of the special symbol lottery from the completion of the selection to the falling lottery is reduced. With such a configuration, even if the player has fallen into an unfavorable special symbol low probability state with a small number of lotteries, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot determination value (random value) is made different depending on the setting, and some of the set values are out of order, and some of the set values are out of order. In such a case, the configuration is such that a special variation pattern is determined in such a case, so that the set value can be suggested by the special variation pattern. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, a configuration is used in which a variation pattern selection table in which different data is simply defined according to settings is provided, and a variation pattern that is easily selected with some set values or a variation pattern that is selected only with some set values is provided. You may. With this configuration, it is not necessary to set the jackpot determination value to a discrete value, so that it is possible to reduce the work of the developer when setting the jackpot determination value.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting key 110b is turned on and the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the returning operation of the accessory is delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the operation of returning the accessory may be executed unconditionally. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the period from the end of the setting change state to the transition to a state in which a normal game including a character can be played.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, only the big hit probability in the special symbol high-probability state and the special symbol low-probability state is changed according to the setting. However, the target that can be changed according to the setting is It is not limited to. It is only necessary that the degree of advantage of the player differs according to the set value. For example, the number of times of the probability change may be increased as the setting is increased. With this configuration, when the mode is shifted to the extended-play mode, the higher the setting, the more easily the extended-play mode loops. Therefore, the pachinko machine having a higher set value is provided to the player. It is possible to strongly desire to play a game at 10. Therefore, the game can be performed by paying more attention to the contents of the setting suggestion effect and the winning rate suggestion effect, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power (that is, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c on the back side of the pachinko machine 10). ), The start of the return operation of the accessory (origin return operation, power return operation) is delayed until the end of the setting change state, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, even if the setting change state ends, the start of the return operation of the accessory may be delayed while at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is open. With this configuration, the accessory operates in a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, and a load different from that during the normal game is applied to the opening / closing axis and the front frame 14 of the inner frame 12. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hinge 18, the hinge 19, and the like from being damaged as a result of generating a larger load than usual.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when the power is turned on and the setting is changed, the start of the return operation of the accessory is delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Some or all of the accessories may be executed based on power-on without delaying the return operation. In this case, as the accessory that starts the return operation immediately after the power is turned on regardless of whether or not the setting is changed, the setting change operation is not hindered, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. In this state, the movement amount of the position of the center of gravity based on the accessory operation may be set to be within a predetermined amount (for example, 5 cm). In a state where the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, since these are supported only by the opening / closing shaft, the role of the center of gravity can be largely displaced (the role of a heavier weight or a higher speed moving agent). Moving a character with a long moving distance) may cause an excessive load on the opening / closing axis. Therefore, by starting only the return operation of the accessory which has almost no influence on the center of gravity of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 due to the movement, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be started. Can be prevented from being damaged.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the third symbol for notifying the jackpot is selected without any limitation. In other words, even if a reach occurs in the third symbol with “6”, if three identical third symbols are notified of the jackpot, the setting 6 fixed super reach, which is a type of deviation variation, Although it was configured to determine that there is no such information, it is not limited to this. For example, when reach occurs in the third symbol numbered “1” to “6” (that is, when reach occurs in the third symbol that can be selected in the setting suggestion variation pattern), Even if the configuration is such that the number is attached to the third symbol where the reach has occurred, the setting is suggested (irrespective of whether the same third symbol is prepared or not). Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the jackpot is notified even though the user thinks that a good setting is suggested, and the player is made to think that he / she is delighted.

<Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the above-described fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described fourteenth embodiment, when a reach occurs in the third symbol display device 81, the type of the variation pattern is indicated to the player by a number attached to the symbol in which the reach has occurred. Was. More specifically, the simultaneous occurrence of reach in the third symbol with three numbers “2”, “4”, and “6” indicates that the possibility of setting an even number is high, The simultaneous occurrence of reach in the third symbol with three numbers of "1", "3", and "5" suggests that the odd number setting is highly possible, and that the number of "2" and "6" is high. Reach occurs in the third symbol with two numbers, indicating that there is no possibility of setting 1, and three numbers of "4", "5", and "6" are added. Reach occurs simultaneously in the third symbol, indicating that the setting is high (any one of settings 4 to 6), and reach occurs in the third symbol numbered “6”. Thus, it is configured to indicate that the setting is 6.

  In addition to this, in the present modified example, various effect examples that suggest that there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect may occur depending on the effect mode before a reach occurs will be described.

  First, FIG. 368 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a reach symbol selection effect for causing the player to select a type of the reach symbol is executed. This reach symbol selection effect can be executed during a predetermined period (for example, when 5 seconds to 10 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation) before the timing when the reach occurs (for example, when 11 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation). It is a production with a possibility. As shown in FIG. 368 (a), when the reach symbol suggestion effect is executed, a display region imitating a balloon is formed for the small region Ds3 in the sub display region Ds, and the display region is formed inside the display region. The text "Please select a reach design with PUSH !!" is displayed. Further, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, a display area in which the character “Choice!” Is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm is formed, and the upper right side of the main display area Dm is displayed. , Three third symbols with numbers "4", "5" and "6" are displayed, and a third symbol with the number "6" is displayed on the lower right side. An area is formed, and a display area in which a third symbol with the number “7” is displayed is formed on the upper left side, and numbers “2”, “4”, and “6” are added on the lower left side. The displayed three third symbols are displayed. During execution of the reach symbol selection effect, one of the four display areas in which different combinations of the third symbols are displayed is set to have a lighted (light emitting) appearance, and the remaining display areas are turned off. Is set. When the player presses the frame button (PUSH button) 22, the third symbol shown in the display area that is set to be lit and is set as the reach symbol in the variable display effect. As a result, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of selecting the reach symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, if the reach in the third symbol with the number “6” is selected and the reach is deviated, it is determined that the super reach is set to 6, so even if a hit is made, the super reach is determined. Even if it becomes, the player can be pleased. In other words, in the case of the reach symbol selection effect, when the choices include a combination of symbols that are determined to be relatively advantageous to the player when deviating, such as a high setting suggested super reach and a setting 6 confirmed super reach. In addition, a player who desires a high setting can be expected to select the combination of the symbols for setting suggestion, and to expect that the variable display will be out of order. Conversely, a player who expects a big hit can be caused to play a game with the expectation that the big hit will be notified. As described above, by executing the reach symbol selection effect, the reach symbol to be selected and the result of the expected fluctuation display are different depending on whether the player desires a high setting or a player who desires a jackpot. Since the game can be performed, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the case of a player who desires a high setting, in particular, when the degree of expectation of a notice (for example, a so-called reservation notice effect or a comment notice effect) for the change is low (a content corresponding to a low possibility of a jackpot) In the case of), at the point in time when the combination option (display area) corresponding to the suggestion of the high setting is displayed in the reach symbol selection effect, the sense of expectation that the high setting is suggested can be increased. In other words, if the reach design selection effect is executed in consideration of other effects, it is determined whether there is a high possibility that the setting is suggested (off) or a large hit is likely to be notified. Since it is possible to realize the gaming ability to play, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 368 (b), the reach symbol prefetch effect in the present modification will be described. FIG. 368 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the reach symbol prefetch effect. As shown in FIG. 368 (b), when the reach symbol look-ahead effect is executed, the character “6 reach is on hold” is displayed in the small area Ds3. That is, in the fluctuation display based on any of the holding balls, the player can easily understand that the reach effect of the effect mode in which the reach occurs in the “6” symbol is executed. So also in this case. A player who desires a high setting can be expected to come off when a reach occurs in the symbol “6”. In addition, in the case where a preview effect in which the display mode of a part of the reserved symbols is changed (a so-called hold preview effect) is generated, the holding ball in which the hold preview effect is generated (that is, the display mode is not changed). It is possible to realize a novel game property that it is possible to more strongly expect that the reach of the symbol of “6” does not occur in the reserved ball having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the reserved ball. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In the reach symbol look-ahead effect, a pattern for notifying another third symbol for setting suggestion is also provided, and another symbol (for example, a symbol having a high jackpot expectation of “7”) is notified. An embodiment is also provided. With this, when the reach symbol look-ahead effect is executed, it is possible to realize a gaming ability of estimating a jackpot expectation degree, an expectation degree at which a setting suggestion is performed, and the like from the notified type of the symbol, so that the player Interest in games can be improved.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 110a in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of or in addition to this, the third symbol display device 81 may be used. May be displayed. In this case, in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the return operation of the accessory is delayed or avoided, so that the set value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is hidden behind the accessory by the movement of the accessory. Since it is possible to suppress the operation, the operation of the accessory in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be more appropriately controlled.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the start of the return operation of the accessory is configured to be suppressed (delayed) during the setting change state. However, the return operation may be started even in the setting change state. In this case, in the setting change state, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, and the operation of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mostly performed by the clerk of the hall. Becomes difficult to confirm. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs in the operation of the accessory during the setting change state, the operation is more conspicuous than when an abnormality occurs in the operation of the accessory in a state other than the setting change state (note the back side of the pachinko machine 10). It may be configured to notify the abnormality in a manner that can easily be noticed even if it is done). With this configuration, when an abnormality occurs in a part or all of the accessory, it is possible to easily make the hall clerk notice the abnormality.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described eleventh to fourteenth embodiments, the main controller 110 continuously updates the value of the first random number counter C1 and obtains the counter value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of the start winning. Is determined to determine whether or not matches a winning random number, thereby executing a lottery (big hit lottery) as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the configuration is such that the jackpot lottery is executed by using a first random number table in which a different random number value is associated with each set value.

  In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment has a configuration in which a random number generation IC 900 capable of generating a random number (first random number counter R1) is provided separately from the main control device 110. The configuration is such that the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter R1) generated by the generation IC 900 is obtained and used for the jackpot lottery. Further, the random number generation IC 900 is configured to be able to specify a random number update range, and by setting a different random number update range according to the set value, a large hit lottery using a common hit determination value. It is configured to be able to change the probability. For example, if the random number update range of the second setting is halved with respect to the random number update range of the first setting, the probability denominator of the jackpot probability in the second setting is half of the first setting. The jackpot probability in the second setting can be reduced to half of the jackpot probability in the first setting. With such a configuration, the main controller 110 simply sets a random number update range according to the set value to the random number generation IC at the time of setting change, and executes a special symbol lottery when executing a special symbol lottery. It is only necessary to compare the common winning random number value with the counter value of the first random number counter R1 obtained from the random number generating IC. In other words, the main control device 110 does not need to store different collision determination values for each set value, and only needs to store one common collision determination value regardless of the setting. The processing load at the time of drawing a special symbol can be reduced by the amount by which the process of selecting the hit determination value can be deleted. Further, the capacity of the random number table per first can be reduced.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is that a random number generation IC 900 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. That is, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, FIG. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 364 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 364, in the fifteenth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, a random number generation IC 900 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. It is different in that it is. The random number generation IC 900 is used to generate a winning random number (first random number counter R1) acquired based on a winning start. That is, instead of the first random number counter C1 stored in the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment, a counter value (random number value) used for the big hit lottery (determination) executed in the main controller 110 is obtained from an external IC. It is configured to be. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. This random number generation IC 900 can randomly generate a numerical value of a maximum of 16 bits (0 to 65535) as the value of the first random number counter R1. The random number generation IC 900 includes, for example, a clock generation circuit capable of generating a clock frequency of 250 kHz inside. Every time a clock signal is generated by the clock generation circuit, the random number generation IC 900 is synchronized with the clock signal. A random number value within the set random number update range (the value of the first random number counter R1) can be randomly generated. That is, since the random number value can be randomly generated every 0.004 milliseconds, the random number value can be generated at an interval shorter than the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39). it can. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the random number value is not updated over a plurality of times of the timer interrupt processing, and it is possible to ensure randomness in the jackpot lottery.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, only the first random number counter R1 is generated by the random number generation IC 900. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, some or all of the various counter values, such as the first hit type counter C2, the change type counter CS1, the second hit random number counter C4, and the general-purpose change type counter CS2, are generated by the random number generation IC 900. It may be replaced with a random value. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Although illustration is omitted, the ROM 202 in the fifteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 268 (a)) in that the first random number 11 table 202ma is used instead of the first random number 11 table 202ma. The only difference is that a 15-number table 202ra is provided, and that a random number range setting table 202rb that defines a random number update range of the random number generation IC 900 for each set value is added.

  First, the details of the first random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 365 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 365 (a), in the first random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment, “0 to 204” is defined as the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the special symbol high “0 to 643” is defined as the jackpot determination value in the probability state (probable change state). That is, only the big hit determination value of setting 1 (see FIG. 269 (a)) in the eleventh embodiment is defined. In the fifteenth embodiment, the range of the random number value generated by the random number generation IC 900 is changed according to the setting, instead of making the random number value (hit determination value) specified in the first random number 15 table 202ra common. By making it variable, the jackpot probability for each setting is configured to be the same as in the eleventh embodiment.

  Next, the details of the random number range setting table 202rb in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The random number range setting table 202rb is a data table that is referred to when setting a random number generation range (random number update range) according to the set value for the random number generation IC 900. At the end of the setting change state, the random number generation range corresponding to the set value is specified with reference to the random number range setting table 220rb, and the specified random number generation range is set in the random number generation IC 900. . By making the random number generation range different, the probability denominator in the jackpot lottery can be made different for each setting, so that the jackpot probability can be made substantially different according to the setting.

  As shown in FIG. 365 (b), in the random number range setting table 202rb in the fifteenth embodiment, “0 to 65535” is defined in association with the random number generation range corresponding to the setting 1, and corresponds to the setting 2. As a random number generation range to be set, “0 to 61499” is associated and defined. As a random number generation range corresponding to setting 3, “0 to 57399” is associated and defined. As a random number generation range corresponding to setting 4, “0-53299” is defined in association with “0-49199” as a random number generation range corresponding to setting 5, and “0-45099” is defined as a random number generation range corresponding to setting 6. It is defined in association.

  Therefore, in the setting 1, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 65536 values of “0 to 65535”, and the large probability of the special symbol in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol in the setting 1 is 1 respectively. / 320 (205/65536) and 1 / 1101.8 (644/65536). Further, in the setting 2, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 61500 values of “0 to 61499”. / 300 (205/61500) and 1 / 95.5 (644/61500). In setting 3, since the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 57400 values of “0 to 57399”, the big hit probability in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special symbol in setting 3 is 1 / 280 (205/57400) and 1 / 89.1 (644/57400). Further, in setting 4, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 53300 values of “0-53299”, so that the large probability of the special symbol in the low probability state and the high probability state in the setting 4 is 1 / 260 (205/53300) and 1 / 82.8 (644/53300). In setting 5, since the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 49200 values of “0 to 49199”, the big hit probability in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol in setting 5 is 1 respectively. / 240 (205/49200) and 1 / 76.4 (644/49200). In setting 6, since the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 45100 values of “0 to 45099”, the jackpot probabilities of the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol in the setting 6 are each 1 / 220 (205/45100) and 1/70 (644/45100).

  As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, only the range of the common hit determination value that does not depend on the set value is defined in the first random number 15 table 202ra, and the random number generation IC 900 generates the random number value. By changing the range in accordance with the set value, the jackpot probability for each setting is varied. With such a configuration, the data amount of the first random number 15 table 202ra can be reduced, and the process of reading the jackpot determination value according to the set value is unnecessary when executing the jackpot lottery. In addition, the processing load at the time of the jackpot lottery can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Control Device in Fifteenth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 366 and 367. First, with reference to FIG. 366, details of the start winning processing 15 (S1751) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. This start winning process 15 (S1751) is a process executed in place of the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 134) in the eleventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), and various random numbers ( (Counter value).

  In the start winning processing 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, in the processing of S1751 to S1755, S1757 to S1762, and S1764, the start winning processing 4 in the eleventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) is performed. The same processes as those of S1751 to S1755, S1757 to S1762, and S1764 (see FIG. 134) are executed.

  In the start winning process 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1755 is completed, the value of the first random number counter R1 is acquired from the random number generation IC 900 (S1771). Further, the respective values of the first hit type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are obtained, and the obtained counter values (random numbers) are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da (S1772), and the processing is performed. Is shifted to S1775.

  In the start winning process 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1762 is completed, the value of the first random number counter R1 is acquired from the random number generation IC 900 (S1773). Further, the respective values of the first hit type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are obtained, and the obtained counter values (random numbers) are stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db (S1774). Is shifted to S1764.

  By executing the start winning process 15 (see FIG. 366), the value of the first random number counter R1 randomly generated by the random number generation IC 900 can be acquired every time a start winning is detected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 367, details of the set value control processing 15 (S1741) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. This set value control processing 15 (S1741) is executed in place of the set value control processing (see FIG. 291) in the eleventh embodiment, and is a processing for performing control in a setting change state and a setting confirmation state.

  Of the set value control processing 15 (see FIG. 367), in each processing of S3101 to S3113, the same processing as the processing of each of S3101 to S3113 of the set value control processing (see FIG. 291) in the eleventh embodiment is executed. Is done.

  In the setting value control process 15 (see FIG. 367) in the fifteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S3108 that the setting key 110b is located at the off position, the random number generation range corresponding to the setting value is changed to the random number range. It is read from the setting table 202rb (see FIG. 365 (b)), the read random number generation range is set in the random number generation IC 900 (S3131), and this processing ends.

  By executing the set value control process 15 (see FIG. 367), a random number generation range can be set according to the set value. Therefore, the probability denominator is changed according to the set value, and as a result, the set value is changed to the set value. The jackpot probability can be varied accordingly.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment is configured to acquire the counter value (random number value) used for the jackpot lottery (determination) executed in the main controller 110 from an external IC. . With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first random number 15 table 202ra in which the determination value determined to be the big hit in the special symbol lottery is defined, only the range of the common hit determination value independent of the set value. Is defined, and the range in which the random number value is generated in the random number generation IC 900 is made different according to the set value, so that the jackpot probability for each setting is varied. With such a configuration, the data amount of the first random number 15 table 202ra can be reduced, and the process of reading the jackpot determination value according to the set value is unnecessary when executing the jackpot lottery. In addition, the processing load at the time of the jackpot lottery can be reduced.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, a combination of probabilities relating to the jackpot lottery (commonly referred to as setting) may be provided in a plurality of stages, and may be implemented as a pachinko machine configured so that the setting can be changed at the game store. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of settings, a combination of the jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low-probability state and the jackpot probability in the probable change state) may be set in any of a plurality of stages (for example, six stages). Can be set as a typical example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of the jackpot probability, for example, implemented as a pachinko machine that can change the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the case of a jackpot according to the setting You may. That is, the rate at which the jackpot of the type advantageous to the player is determined may be changed according to the setting, or the rate at which the jackpot of the type disadvantageous to the player may be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined. By changing the ratio according to the setting, the degree of advantage for each setting may be changed. In addition, for example, the rate at which a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the big hit is determined according to the setting, or a large number of time savings (for example, 0 times) is given. May be changed according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or easily shifts to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) ) May be changed according to the setting at which the jackpot determined to be (or easily shifted) is determined. In addition, a configuration in which a jackpot type in which the ratio determined only by a specific setting is significantly higher (almost not determined by other settings) may be provided. Specifically, for example, the setting can be set in six steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as setting 6. In the setting 6, when the jackpot becomes a jackpot, the jackpot of the six rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, the jackpot of the six rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in six rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 becomes extremely high, so that the player pays attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot and plays the game. be able to. Alternatively, or additionally, for example, in setting 6, a configuration may be such that the ratio of the jackpot type to which 66 time savings are given after the end of the jackpot is higher than other settings. With this configuration, a game can be played while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game, the jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the inside of the jackpot) of the jackpot operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types. The jackpot type may be provided so as to be easily determined by a specific setting (the determination ratio is increased). In addition, in the case of changing the combination of jackpot probabilities according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the positive change state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a big hit probability high. This configuration is particularly of a type in which the number of special symbol lotteries increases, and the number of balls held tends to increase (the number of award balls to be paid out tends to increase more than the number of game balls fired), particularly in the probable change state. It is effective for gaming machines. More specifically, for example, a configuration in which the probable change state is continued until the next big win is won, and in a probable change state, it is applied to a gaming machine of a type that has a small probability with a high probability, thereby achieving an advantage of a high setting. Sex can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of a big hit in the probability change state is low, the number of lotteries until the next big hit is likely to increase, so that the chances of winning a small hit and obtaining a prize ball also increase. Therefore, in the probability change state, it becomes easier for the player to acquire more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Each of the embodiments described above may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (The update timing of the number of time savings is different from the timing of discriminating the end of the time savings)
Determining means for performing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means for a predetermined period; and the dynamic display means A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result; a first game state; And a second gaming state different from the gaming state; and a gaming state setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state. Updating means for updating related first information, and end determining means for determining whether the first information updated by the updating means satisfies an ending condition, wherein the game state setting is performed. means When the end determination unit determines that the end condition is satisfied in a state where the first game state is set, the second game state is set, and the gaming machine includes: A gaming machine A1 wherein an update timing of the first information by the update means is executed differently from an end determination timing for determining whether or not the end condition is satisfied by the end determination means.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of a game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. If so, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player has been executed. Further, a plurality of game states can be set, and when a specific game state is set, an advantageous state in which game balls easily enter the starting port is set until the number of lotteries reaches the specific number. (For example, JP-A-2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, the player can be caused to play a game while expecting the first gaming state to be set, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. Further, in the above-described gaming machine, the lottery result measurement (subtraction) processing during the advantageous state and the advantageous state end processing executed based on the fact that the number of lotteries has reached the specific number are stopped and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the game is executed at the timing when the game is executed, and the set advantageous state is provided to the player for a longer period of time. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the lottery result is stopped and displayed, in which the lottery number is counted (subtracted) in the advantageous state and the advantageous state is terminated based on the fact that the lottery number has reached the specific number. Since it is configured to be executed in response to the execution, there is a problem that the number of processes executed at a predetermined timing (stop display timing of the lottery result) increases. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a processing load by reducing a processing amount executed at the same timing.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game for executing a privilege game is configured to be able to be repeatedly executed (overlapping game is possible), and a lottery in the other game is performed in accordance with a game result of one game. There is a gaming machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of a fluctuation period for indicating a result (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). In such a game, a plurality of games can be executed in an overlapping manner, so that a game aiming to execute a privilege game can be efficiently executed. Furthermore, since the other game can be temporarily interrupted in accordance with the game result of one game, the privilege game is repeatedly executed by a plurality of games executed in an overlapping manner. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress execution of an incomprehensible privilege game.

  However, when the above-described configuration in which the advantageous state can be set is used for the gaming machine capable of executing the overlapping game, the processing of counting (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the number of lotteries reaching the specific number are performed. Since the end process of the advantageous state executed based on the lottery result is executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, for example, the lottery result in the other game based on the bonus game being given by one game In the case where the subtraction of the fluctuation time for indicating the suspension is interrupted and the advantageous state is set by the awarded bonus game, the suspended fluctuation time subtraction is restarted and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. In such a case, there is a problem that a lottery count (subtraction) process is executed. That is, since the lottery count executed in the advantageous state is measured (subtracted) based on the fact that the result of the lottery executed in a state other than the advantageous state is stopped and displayed, the game in the advantageous state is performed for the player. There was a problem that it could not be suitably executed. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by appropriately executing a game in an advantageous state to a player.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the updating of the first information by the updating unit and the determination of the end by the end determining unit can be executed at different timings. Therefore, when the end condition is satisfied by updating the first information, the amount of processing executed at the same timing can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A1, the updating timing is a timing at which the determination is performed by the determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the update timing of the first information related to the determination by the determination unit is the timing at which the determination is performed by the determination unit. There is an effect that information can be updated reliably. Further, since the first information can be updated by the updating unit by performing the determination by the determining unit, the player is interested in both the determination of the determining unit and the set game state. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, when the determination is performed by the determination unit, the first information is updated by the updating unit, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of the update process uselessly and reduce the processing load. There is.

  In the gaming machine A3, the termination determination timing is after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the gaming machine A1 or A2.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the termination condition is determined during a period in which the identification information is not dynamically displayed, so that the player can grasp the determination result of the determination unit. It is possible to prevent the game state from changing while watching the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine A3, the determination unit performs a determination corresponding to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting unit, and the end determination timing is determined after the identification information is stopped and displayed. Next, the gaming machine A4 is a period until the determination by the determination unit is performed.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, although the first information is updated by the updating means to the first information that can satisfy the end condition, the determination by the determining means is performed before the second game state is set. Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the update timing of the first information is different from the end determination timing, the determination performed by the determination unit can be performed properly.

  The gaming machine A5 according to any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, wherein the first information is updated by the updating means based on the number of times of the determination performed by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the first information is updated every time the determination unit performs the determination, so that the first information is updated to the player. Can be easily understood. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the first game state is suddenly shifted to the second game state and the player is confused.

  In the gaming machine A5, the updating unit updates the first information after the determination by the determining unit is performed and before a dynamic display for indicating a determination result of the determination is performed. A gaming machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the first information is not updated during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A6, when the interruption condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the interruption means for interrupting the dynamic display, and the interruption is performed by the interruption means. A resuming unit for resuming the dynamic display when the resuming condition is satisfied, and the first information updated by the updating unit can be changed when the dynamic display is interrupted by the suspending unit. A7. A gaming machine A7 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A1 to A6. That is, when dynamic display is interrupted, the first information may be changed by the information changing unit. Therefore, during the dynamic display of the identification information, in addition to the result of the determination by the determination means, the presence or absence of interruption can be enjoyed for the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

  The gaming machine A8 according to the gaming machine A7, wherein the information changing means changes the first information to variable first information in which the end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first information.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A7. That is, during the dynamic display of the identification information, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting that the dynamic display is interrupted by the interrupting means, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

  In the gaming machine A7 or A8, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game even when a second condition different from a first condition that can be satisfied based on a result of the discrimination executed by the discrimination means is satisfied. A gaming machine A9 that can be executed, and wherein the interruption condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the second condition.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7 or A8, the interruption condition can be satisfied when the second condition that allows the privilege game to be executed without using the determination by the determination unit is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game different from the determination by the determination means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine A9, the game machine has a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the second condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the ball entry means. A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A9, as a game different from the discrimination by the discriminating means, it is possible to perform a game in which a game ball is made to enter the ball entry means. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A10, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the first state, Variable control means capable of performing a variable operation for changing a member to a first state for a predetermined period based on establishment of an execution condition, wherein the variable control means is in a state in which the first game state is set. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the variable operation is easier to execute than when the second gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the period during which the first gaming state is more likely to be satisfied than the second gaming state is continued based on the establishment of the second condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game for satisfying the second condition.

<Characteristic B group> (Depending on the setting conditions, the rate at which the privilege is given by the winning ball is changed)
A variable ball-in means capable of changing between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first state, and the variable ball-in means based on establishment of execution conditions Variable control means for changing means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period; a specific area through which game balls entering the variable ball-in means can pass; and a game ball entering the specific area Setting information discriminating means capable of discriminating setting information when the variable ball-in means is variably controlled by the variable control means in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the According to the setting information determined by the setting information determining means, the first state in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball-in means easily passes through the specific area, and the game ball which is less likely to pass than the first state. A second state, and switching means that can be switched to the second state. Gaming machine B1, characterized in that it is intended to.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of a game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. If so, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player has been executed. Further, as a starting port, there is provided a variable ball entry means provided with a variable member which can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball can be regulated, and the variable ball entry means is provided. There is a gaming machine configured to be able to set an advantageous state that is easy to change to the first state and an unfavorable state that is hard to change to the first state from the first gaming state (for example, JP-A-2001-033569). Gazette). In such a gaming machine, the ease of entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means is varied so that the player is eager to play the game while expecting that the advantageous state is set. Although it was possible to do so, even if the disadvantaged state is set, if the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means, the lottery will be executed, so the variable entry in the disadvantaged state There is a risk that the game may be played at the timing when the means enters the first state, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to set the advantageous state is reduced. In the above-described gaming machine, in the state where the disadvantage state is set, it is difficult to perform the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased. It is intended to provide a gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine B1, since it is possible to switch between the first state and the second state according to the setting information, the player is interested in the setting information at the time when the game ball enters the variable entering means. Can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1, the game machine B1 has an operation control means for controlling the operation of the switching means, and the switching means is configured such that a game ball having entered the variable ball input means has a first flow path and the first flow path A plurality of flow paths including a different second flow path, wherein the plurality of flow paths can be switched so as to flow down any one of the flow paths, and the operation control means is configured by the variable control means The control of the operation to the switching means is started based on the start of the control, and the game ball flowing down the first flow path by the switching means can pass through the specific area. Gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, the switching means is operation-controlled by the operation control means based on the start of the control by the variable control means, and when the game ball entering the variable ball-in means flows down the first flow path by the switching means, passes through the specific area. Can be done. Thereby, the variable control for facilitating the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means and the operation control of the switching means can be linked with each other. There is an effect that it can be appropriately controlled whether or not to pass through.

  In the gaming machine B2, the game ball that has flowed down to the second flow path by the switching means is less likely to pass through the specific area than the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path. Gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the game balls flowing down the second flow path can be made harder to pass through the specific area than the game balls flowing down the first flow path. There is an effect that it is possible to set the passing ratio of the game balls entering the variable ball entry unit to the specific area only by controlling the operation of the switching unit by the control unit.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the game machine B2 has a normal area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the normal area is a specific area of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means. Is formed so that a game ball that has not passed through the special area is passed through, and the privilege is not provided when the game ball passes through the normal area. Gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2 or B3. That is, when the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through the normal area, no benefit is given. Therefore, even if a game ball excessively enters the variable ball entry means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a player from being provided with an excessive privilege. In addition, by providing a normal area in the variable ball entry means, a mechanism for suppressing game balls from entering the variable ball entry means is provided with extra benefits to the player without providing a mechanism outside the variable ball entry means. Can be suppressed from being given, so that there is an effect that the area outside the variable ball entry means can be easily used for other purposes.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, a game ball flowing down the first flow path is provided with a third flow path different from the second flow path, and different from the second flow path and the third flow path. And a fourth flow path, and a distribution means that can be distributed to the fourth flow path, wherein the gaming machine has, as the specific area, a first area into which a game ball distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means can enter. The game device includes at least a specific area and a second specific area different from the first specific area in which game balls distributed to the fourth flow path by the distribution means can enter. Is a game machine in which the content of the award is different between a case where a game ball enters the first specific region and a case where a game ball enters the second specific region. B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B2 to B4. That is, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path by the switching means is distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means, it passes through the first specific area, and when it is distributed to the fourth flow path. It passes through the second specific flow path. Thereby, in the case where a game ball enters the variable ball entry means according to the establishment condition of the setting condition, the ease with which the privilege is given by the privilege granting means is changed, and further, it is given by the distribution means. Benefits can be different. Therefore, whether or not the privilege is granted and the content of the privilege to be granted are determined stepwise, so that the presence or absence of the privilege and the content of the privilege are determined for the player in comparison with the case where the privilege is determined at once. This has the effect that the period during which the game is enjoyed can be lengthened. In the case of using such a configuration, it is preferable to use a function of notifying information for indicating a flowing state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the flowing state of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, so that the fun of the game can be improved. In addition, a function of notifying information for indicating that the setting condition is satisfied may be used. This allows the player to know that it is a situation in which some benefits are likely to be given by allowing the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means at the time before the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means. This allows the player to play the game with expectations.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the game machine has game state setting means capable of at least setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the switching means includes the game state A gaming machine B6 characterized in that it is easier to switch to the first state when the first gaming state is set by the setting means than when the second gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the ease of switching to the first state can be changed according to the set gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the currently set game state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the variable control means changes the variable ball-in means with a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which game balls are harder to enter than the first variable pattern. Wherein the switching means is switchable to at least the first state when the variable control means variably controls the variable pitching means with the first variable pattern. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the second variable pattern is set by the variable control means, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means than when the second variable pattern is set. . Then, the switching means can switch to the first state when variably controlled by the first variable pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a large number of game balls that cannot pass through the specific area are generated, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the privilege granting means executes a specific game based on a game ball having entered the specific area, and the gaming machine executes the special game by the privilege granting means. A gaming machine B8 comprising a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when a result of the specified game performed is a predetermined result.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, if the result of the specific game executed when the game ball passes through the specific area is a predetermined result, the bonus game is executed. Since the game is executed, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play a game for passing the game ball to the specific area.

<Feature C Group> (In a gaming machine capable of performing a plurality of games in an overlapping manner, an effect mode related to the other game is set in accordance with one of the fluctuation times)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means; A dynamic display period determining unit that determines a dynamic display period of the displayed identification information based on the selection information; and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit indicates the specific determination result. A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when stopped and displayed with specific identification information for identifying a specific game that can execute a specific game during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. A game execution means, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect related to the specific game, and an effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means to at least information corresponding to the selection information. Gaming machine C1, characterized in that those having a presentation mode setting means for setting Zui.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game for executing a privilege game is configured to be able to be repeatedly executed (duplicate game is possible), and a game result is shown for each of the games to be executed repeatedly. (For example, JP-A-2011-45518). In such a game, in a case where a plurality of games are performed in an overlapping manner, each of the games can be easily understood by looking at each effect display executed in a redundant manner. Since the effect mode of the effect display to be performed is determined based only on the content of the corresponding game, and it is not possible to execute the effect related to a plurality of games executed in duplicate, the effect display being executed Therefore, there is a problem in that it is difficult to grasp the entire game that is being executed repeatedly, and the effect of the effect is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, by providing an effect that makes it easy to grasp the contents of a plurality of games to be repeatedly executed, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect and to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to play a game with will. The purpose is to:

  According to the gaming machine C1, the effect mode of the specific effect can be determined based on the selection information. Therefore, an effect in which the dynamic display of the identification information that is repeatedly executed and the specific game are associated with each other is executed. This has the effect of increasing the effect of production. In addition, since the presentation mode of the specific presentation can be determined based on the selection information, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game to overlap a plurality of games in order to see various presentation modes. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine C1, the game machine C1 has a remaining period determination unit that can determine a remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, and the effect mode setting unit is determined by the remaining period determination unit. The gaming machine C2, wherein the effect mode is set based on the remaining period.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the effect mode of the specific effect is set based on the remaining period of the identification information, so that the determination timing of the determination unit and the execution timing of the specific game are different. The effect mode of the specific effect can be changed accordingly. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play a game at various timings in order to overlap a plurality of games in order to see various presentation modes.

  In the gaming machine C2, when an interruption condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display is interrupted, and the dynamic display is interrupted by the interruption means. Resuming means for resuming the dynamic display based on the end of the privilege game, wherein the interruption condition is that the game result of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means is a predetermined game result. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being established when:

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means can be interrupted by the interruption means. Therefore, not only the effect to be executed but also the actual game can be related to the discrimination by the discriminating means and the specific game, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine C3 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which a game more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state is executed. Means for setting the first game state when a specific period has elapsed since the second game state was set, and the resuming means for setting the second game state after the end of the privilege game. In this case, the suspended dynamic display is restarted as a dynamic display in the second game state, and the specific period is set to a remaining period of the identification information restarted by the restarting means. The effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the remaining period when the dynamic display is interrupted by the interrupting means. Machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C3. That is, the length of the specific period in which the second game state in which a game advantageous to the player is executed is set varies depending on the remaining period of the dynamic display interrupted by the interrupting means. And it is set based on the length of the remaining period of the dynamic display when the production mode of the specific production is interrupted by the interruption means. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the degree of advantage of a game to be executed later depending on the effect mode of the specific effect, and thus it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the remaining period discriminating means capable of discriminating the remaining time of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the remaining time discriminated by the remaining time discriminating means is An advantageous condition determining means for determining whether or not the advantageous condition is satisfied, wherein the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the determination result of the advantageous condition determining means. Gaming machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effect is achieved. That is, it is determined by the advantageous condition determining means whether the remaining period satisfies the advantageous condition, and the effect mode of the specific effect is set based on the determination result. There is an effect that the player can be notified of the presence of the player in an easily understandable manner.

  In the gaming machine C5, the advantageous condition determining means determines that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the first period.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, when the remaining period of the identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the first period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied, and thus the processing is executed. There is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game to execute the specific game based on the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, a ball-in means for allowing a game ball to enter, an acquisition means for acquiring information when a game ball enters the ball-in means, and the acquisition acquired by the acquisition means Storage means capable of storing information up to a predetermined number, wherein the determination means performs a determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied And a pre-determination unit that can pre-determine the obtained information stored in the storage unit before the determination based on the obtained information is executed by the determination unit. The means is for determining in advance a dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means based on at least the acquired information. Prejudice Gaming machine C6, characterized in that in which it is determined that meets the favorable condition is longer than the dynamic display period is determined by means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4 or C5. That is, the acquired information determined by the determining unit is stored in the storage unit up to a predetermined number, and the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information stored in the storage unit is determined in advance. Then, when it is determined that the remaining period of the active dynamic display is longer than the previously determined dynamic display period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied. Therefore, a game can be performed while predicting the timing of interruption of dynamic display that is advantageous to the player based on the specific effect to be performed, so that there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine C6, the advantageous condition determining means determines a determination result of the preliminary determining means corresponding to the obtained information next determined by the determining means among the obtained information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine C7 for determining whether or not the object satisfies the advantageous condition.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6. In other words, the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information for which the determination is performed next by the determination unit. The player can determine whether to suspend the target display or the next dynamic display to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select a game and the desire to participate in the game can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the game state setting unit may be configured to set the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit in a state where the first game state is set as the specific period. The first game state is set when a predetermined period of time at which the predetermined number of times has been stopped and displayed at least two times or more has elapsed, and a period calculation unit capable of calculating the specific period is provided; The period calculation unit calculates the specific period by adding a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit to the specific number of times as an upper limit. A gaming machine C8 comprising period mode display means capable of displaying a period mode for indicating the specific period calculated by the above.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines C1 to C7. That is, it is possible to grasp the game situation in the second game state based on the effect mode of the specific effect while observing the length of the specific period by looking at the period mode displayed by the period mode display means. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to gaze at various effects to be performed, and to increase the effect of the effect.

<Characteristic D group> (The end condition of the winning game is made different depending on the operation on the operation means)
A variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first state, and the variable state when the first condition is satisfied; A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game in which the ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time, the specific game being executed by the specific game execution means. The first ending condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means, and the period in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state has passed the predetermined period. Of a plurality of end conditions including the second end condition that is satisfied in the case, an end unit that ends when one end condition is satisfied, a first operation, a second operation different from the first operation, Operating means capable of executing Operation is better when is executed, the second than when the operation is executed, the gaming machine wherein the first end condition is one which easily obtained D1.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of a game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. If there is, a bonus game in which a game ball can be inserted into an attacker (specific winning opening) is executed, and a plurality of conditions for terminating the bonus game are set. (For example, JP-A-2011-45518). In such a gaming machine, generally, based on a time ending condition for ending a privilege game based on an elapsed time after execution of a privilege game and a number of game balls entering an attacker during the privilege game. A prize ending condition for ending the privilege game is set, and control for ending the privilege game is executed when any of the ending conditions is satisfied.

  However, since the same game is performed every time during the bonus game, even when a plurality of end conditions are set, basically, only one of the end conditions is easily satisfied. In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured so that a game ball can be easily won by an attacker during a bonus game, the winning end condition is easily established before the time end condition is established. In a gaming machine configured to make it difficult for a game ball to win, the time end condition is more likely to be satisfied before the win end condition is satisfied.

  In this way, even if a plurality of end conditions of the privilege game are set, if the end conditions that can be satisfied are almost specific end conditions, the advantage of setting a plurality of end conditions, that is, which end condition There is a problem that it is difficult to make it difficult for the player to be interested in a game during the privilege game by making it difficult to understand whether or not the privilege game is ended based on the establishment. In the above-described gaming machine, the player actively performs a game during the privilege game by suppressing the satisfied termination condition from being biased toward a specific termination condition among a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the privilege game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing such operations.

  According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to make the ending condition for ending the specific game being executed different depending on the operation content executed by the operation means, so that the player can actively play the game. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine D1 includes a selection effect execution unit capable of executing a selection effect for causing a player to select whether to execute the first operation or the second operation on the operation unit. Gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the end condition can be selected based on the selected effect executed by the selected effect executing means, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine D2, there is provided an effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of the selected effect executed by the selected effect executing means, wherein the effect mode setting means includes a case where the first end condition is satisfied; The gaming machine D3, wherein the effect mode is set differently when the privilege given after the end of the specific game is different from when the second end condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D2. In other words, the effect of the selected effect can be made different depending on the privilege given after the end of the specific game, so that the player pays attention to the selected effect to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine D3, determination means for performing a determination when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, and identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means being dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. Dynamic display means capable of executing the privilege game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result A bonus game execution unit, and a period determination unit that can determine a period until the bonus game execution unit is executed based on a result of the determination by the determination unit. A game machine D4 for setting the effect form of the selected effect based on the timing at which the effect is executed and the result of the discrimination by the period discriminating means.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D3. That is, since the production mode of the selected effect is set based on the execution timing of the specific game and the timing at which the privilege game is executed, any of the specific games being executed is The game can be performed while predicting whether the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the privilege game can be shortened by satisfying the end condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D4, the game machine D4 has a second variable ball entry means that can be varied between a third state in which game balls can enter and a fourth state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the third state, The privilege game executing means is configured to vary the second variable ball-in means to the third state and the fourth state in a predetermined variable pattern for a predetermined period as the privilege game. The types of the privilege games to be executed include a first privilege type, and a second privilege type in which the period during which the second variable ball entry means is in the fourth state during the privilege game is longer than the first privilege type. And a type setting unit for setting one privilege type among a plurality of privilege types including at least the special mode, and the effect mode setting unit executes at the end timing of the specific game based on the start timing of the specific game. The privilege play that can be done The case of the type which is the first award type, in the case of the second award type, game machine is characterized in that varying the representation embodiment D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D4. That is, at the end timing of the specific game, if the bonus game can be executed, the effect mode of the selected effect is set according to the type of the bonus game. The game can be performed while predicting which end condition is satisfied for the specific game to end the specific game in an advantageous situation for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D5, the end timing of the specific game is the first situation in which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display unit, or the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution unit. The present invention has a situation determining means for determining whether the present situation is the second situation, and the effect mode setting means varies the effect mode between the case of the first condition and the case of the second condition. A gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, the effect of the selected effect is determined depending on whether the timing at which the specific game can be ended is during the dynamic display of the identification information or the execution of the privilege game. Since the mode can be made different, based on the selected effect to be executed, it is possible to end the specific game in a situation advantageous to the player, which one of the end conditions is satisfied for the specific game being executed. The game can be performed while predicting whether it is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  The gaming machine D6 further includes a remaining period determining unit that determines a remaining period of the dynamic display at an end timing of the specific game when the situation determining unit determines the first situation. When the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period by the remaining period discriminating unit, the mode setting unit sets an effect mode different from when the remaining period is shorter than the predetermined period. Gaming machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D6, the effect of the selected effect is changed according to the length of the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed at the timing when the specific game can be ended. Therefore, based on the selected effect to be executed, it is better to satisfy any of the termination conditions for the specific game being executed, to shorten the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the privilege game. The game can be played while predicting whether the game can be shortened. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines D4 to D7, a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when an execution condition is satisfied, and the specific game in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. And a resuming means for resuming the dynamic display suspended by the suspending means when the specific game is over. A gaming machine D8 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D4 to D7, the following effect is achieved. In other words, while the specific game is being executed, the dynamic display can be interrupted, so that the duration of the dynamic display interruption period can be varied by changing the end condition for terminating the specific game. . Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

  In the gaming machine D8, the game machine D8 has a specific area through which a game ball entering the variable ball input means can pass, and the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game even when the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine D9 characterized by being possible.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D8, the bonus game can be executed even when the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through the specific area. It is possible to provide a pleasure of selecting whether to play a game for satisfying the second end condition or to play a game for satisfying the first end condition for a specific game, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine D8 or D9, a game state setting means capable of at least setting a first game state and a second game state in which a game more advantageous to the player than the first game state is executed as the game state. The game state setting means is configured to perform the first game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed a specific number of times in a state where the second game state is set. A gaming machine D10 for setting a state.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D8 or D9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state in which a game advantageous to the player is executed ends based on the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display is interrupted during the second game state. Is effective when extending the duration of the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to select whether to perform a game for satisfying the second end condition or a game for satisfying the first end condition for the specific game. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature E Group> (Navi display of the target of the hit game)
Variable ball entry means which can be changed between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first state, and a judgment is executed when a judgment condition is satisfied. Discriminating means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means, and the discrimination result of the discriminating means is identified by the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time when the display is stopped with the specific identification information indicating the result of the determination. And a display control means for displaying a display image indicating the variable ball-in means on a display means when the privilege game is executed in the gaming machine E1. .

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of a game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. In some cases, as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, a game for opening a ball entry means, in which a game ball is normally difficult to enter, has been executed. Further, there is a gaming machine in which the arrangement position of a starting port is different from the arrangement position of a ball entry means opened during a privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such a game, the position at which a game ball is fired to a player is varied between a case where a player is aiming at a starting port and a case where a bonus game is performed. Was able to provide games that did not come.

  However, if the game for aiming at the starting port is continuously executed when the privilege game is executed, the ball cannot be put into the ball entry means during the privilege game, and the player loses money. May occur.

  In recent gaming machines, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a plurality of devices (variable from a state in which a ball is difficult to enter the ball to a state in which it is easy to enter the ball according to the game content) are set in a limited game area. Devices) are densely arranged. In such a gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to understand to which device the game ball should be fired, and there is a problem that the player plays an inappropriate game and loses the player. Was. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a game which is easy for a player to understand.

  According to the gaming machine E1, a display image indicating the variable ball entry means is displayed on the display means by the display control means, so that when the privilege game is executed, it is determined where to aim and fire the game ball. Can be easily informed to the person. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the display control means displays the display image on the display means at least during a period from when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed to when the variable ball input means is changed to the first state. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, the display image is displayed before the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state. In this case, a game ball can be made to enter the variable entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy to understand for the player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, a privilege game type selecting means capable of selecting one privilege game type from a plurality of privilege game types, and the display control means A display mode setting unit configured to set a display mode of the display image to be displayed on the display unit, wherein the display mode setting unit performs different display according to the privilege game type selected by the privilege game type selection unit. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the mode can be set.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the display mode of the display image can be changed based on the jackpot type, so that the privilege game can be executed in an easily understandable manner and the privilege game can be executed. Can be suggested to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E3, the award game execution means can execute the award game having a different value according to the award game type selected by the award game type selection means. .

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E3, a privilege game having a different value is executed according to the privilege game type, so that the player is gazed at the display mode of the display image displayed on the display means. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable ball input means has ball entry detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered, and the display mode setting means controls the display means by the display control means. A game machine E5 characterized by variably setting the display mode of the display image displayed on the basis of the detection of the incoming ball by the incoming ball detection means.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the display mode of the display image can be changed when the game ball enters the variable ball entry unit by the ball entry detection unit. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the progress of the privilege game in an easily understandable manner.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the game device includes an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and an operation determination unit that can determine an operation performed on the operation unit. The gaming machine E6, wherein the display mode is variably set based on a determination result of the operation determining means.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the display mode of the display image can be changed by the player operating the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E6, the display mode setting means can set a display mode in which the display image is enlarged or reduced based on the determination result of the operation determining means. .

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6, the display image can be enlarged or reduced based on the operation on the operation means. With this, a player who does not need to display the display image when the bonus game is executed can display the display image in a small size, so that the display area formed on the display unit is used for another effect display. Becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable display can be executed by the player.

  In the gaming machine E6 or E7, the display mode setting unit can set a rotation display mode in which the display image is rotated from a first position to a second position based on a determination result of the operation determining unit. A gaming machine E8, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6 or E7, the display image can be rotated based on the operation on the operation means, so that the player can visually recognize the detailed configuration of the variable ball entry means. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic F group> (Time saving end timing is switched according to conditions)
Determining means for performing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means for a predetermined period; and the dynamic display means A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result; a first game state; A plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the game state, a game state setting unit capable of setting any game state, an update unit capable of updating predetermined information, and the update unit. End determination means capable of determining whether the updated predetermined information satisfies an end condition, wherein the end determination means determines the end condition by the end determination means in a state where the first game state is set. Fulfillment A game machine capable of setting the second game state when it is determined that the end condition determination means has a switching means capable of switching the execution timing of the end condition determination means based on establishment of a switching condition. A gaming machine F1 characterized by the following.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of a game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. If so, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player has been executed. Further, a plurality of game states can be set, and when a specific game state is set, an advantageous state in which game balls easily enter the starting port is set until the number of lotteries reaches the specific number. (For example, JP-A-2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, the player can be caused to play a game while expecting the first gaming state to be set, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. Further, in the above-described gaming machine, the lottery result measurement (subtraction) processing during the advantageous state and the advantageous state end processing executed based on the fact that the number of lotteries has reached the specific number are stopped and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the game is executed at the timing when the game is executed, and the set advantageous state is provided to the player for a longer period of time. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the lottery result is stopped and displayed, in which the lottery number is counted (subtracted) in the advantageous state and the advantageous state is terminated based on the fact that the lottery number has reached the specific number. Since it is configured to be executed in response to the execution, there is a problem that the number of processes executed at a predetermined timing (stop display timing of the lottery result) increases. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a processing load by reducing a processing amount executed at the same timing.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game for executing a privilege game is configured to be able to be repeatedly executed (overlapping game is possible), and a lottery in the other game is performed in accordance with a game result of one game. There is a gaming machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of a fluctuation period for indicating a result (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). In such a game, a plurality of games can be executed in an overlapping manner, so that a game aiming to execute a privilege game can be efficiently executed. Furthermore, since the other game can be temporarily interrupted in accordance with the game result of one game, the privilege game is repeatedly executed by a plurality of games executed in an overlapping manner. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress execution of an incomprehensible privilege game.

  However, when the above-described configuration in which the advantageous state can be set is used for the gaming machine capable of executing the overlapping game, the processing of counting (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the number of lotteries reaching the specific number are performed. Since the end process of the advantageous state executed based on the lottery result is executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, for example, the lottery result in the other game based on the bonus game being given by one game In the case where the subtraction of the fluctuation time for indicating the suspension is interrupted and the advantageous state is set by the awarded bonus game, the suspended fluctuation time subtraction is restarted and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. In such a case, there is a problem that a lottery count (subtraction) process is executed. That is, since the lottery count executed in the advantageous state is measured (subtracted) based on the fact that the result of the lottery executed in a state other than the advantageous state is stopped and displayed, the game in the advantageous state is performed for the player. There was a problem that it could not be suitably executed. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by appropriately executing a game in an advantageous state to a player.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the execution timing of the end condition determination means can be switched based on the establishment of the switching condition, so that it is difficult for the player to know at which timing the first gaming state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, the updating unit is capable of updating, as the predetermined information, at least first information based on the number of times the determination is performed by the determination unit, and the switching condition is updated by the updating unit. A gaming machine F2, which can be established when the first information obtained satisfies the end condition.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the switching condition can be satisfied when the number of determinations by the determination means satisfies the end condition. The player who has performed the determination by the determination means can be caused to play the game while pounding whether or not the first game state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F2, when the second determination condition is satisfied, a second determination unit that executes a second determination, and second identification information for indicating a result of the second determination by the second determination unit are moved for a predetermined period. Second dynamic display means capable of dynamic display, and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, for indicating the specific second determination result. And a second privilege game executing means capable of executing a second privilege game when the information is stopped and displayed, wherein the switching condition is such that the result of the second determination by the second determination means is the second determination. A gaming machine F3, which can be established when it is a result.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the switching condition can be satisfied based on the second determination performed by the second determination unit different from the determination unit, so that the end is achieved. When the determination by the determination means is performed until the condition is satisfied, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the switching condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the switching unit delays the execution timing of the end condition determination unit for a specific period, and the determination unit performs the first determination as the determination performed during the specific period. A gaming machine F4 for performing a determination corresponding to a gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the determination of the determining means executed during the specific period in which the execution timing of the end condition determining means is delayed by the switching means is determined by the first game. It can be executed as the determination during the state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the game state display means includes a game state display means capable of displaying a display mode for indicating the game state set by the game state setting means on the display means, As a display mode for indicating that the first game state is set, a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode can be displayed. The game machine F5 is displayed when the execution timing of the end condition determination means is switched by the switching means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the execution timing of the end condition determination means is switched by the switching means as a display mode indicating a state in which the first gaming state is set. Since the second display mode displayed in such a case is configured to be displayable, there is an effect that the player can be notified of the current game state in an easily understandable manner.

<Characteristic G group> (The target device navigation display of the hit game is changed according to the progress of the game)
A first state in which game balls can enter the first state and a second state in which game balls cannot enter the second state more easily than the first state; A first privilege game execution means capable of executing a first privilege game in which the first variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time. A second variable ball entry means capable of being changed to a third state in which a ball can be entered, a fourth state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the third state, and the first privilege game execution means. When the game result of the first privilege game is a predetermined game result, a second privilege game capable of executing a second privilege game in which the second variable ball entry means is varied from the fourth state to the third state for a predetermined period of time. A bonus game execution means, and the first variable ball entry means when the first privilege game is executed. A display control means for displaying a first display image on a display means, and displaying a second display image indicating the second variable ball-in means on the display means when the second privilege game is executed; A gaming machine G1 characterized in that:

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of a game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. In some cases, as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, a game for opening a ball entry means, in which a game ball is normally difficult to enter, has been executed. Further, there is a gaming machine in which the arrangement position of a starting port is different from the arrangement position of a ball entry means opened during a privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such a game, the position at which a game ball is fired to a player is varied between a case where a player is aiming at a starting port and a case where a bonus game is performed. Was able to provide games that did not come.

  However, if the game for aiming at the starting port is continuously executed when the privilege game is executed, the ball cannot be put into the ball entry means during the privilege game, and the player loses money. May occur.

  In recent gaming machines, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a plurality of devices (variable from a state in which a ball is difficult to enter the ball to a state in which it is easy to enter the ball according to the game content) are set in a limited game area. Devices) are densely arranged. In such a gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to understand to which device the game ball should be fired, and there is a problem that the player plays an inappropriate game and loses the player. Was. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a game which is easy for a player to understand.

  According to the gaming machine G1, a display image indicating the variable ball entry means corresponding to the privilege game executed by the display control means is displayed on the display means, so that when the privilege game is executed, the game ball is aimed at. Can be notified to the player in a manner that is easy to understand. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine G1, the display control means displays the first display image during the period from when the first execution condition is satisfied to when the first variable ball input means is changed to the first state. A gaming machine G2 that is displayed on display means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the display image is displayed before the first variable ball entry means is changed to the first state. When fired, the game ball can enter the first variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy to understand for the player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine G2, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a portion of the second display image when the first privilege game is executed by the first privilege game execution means. A gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, during the execution of the first privilege game, the second display image showing the second variable ball entry means corresponding to the second privilege game that can be executed next. At least a part is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp in advance the game method after the end of the first privilege game, and to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a part of the first display image when the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means. A gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2 or G3, during the execution of the second privilege game, the first display image showing the first variable ball-in means corresponding to the already executed first privilege game. Is displayed at least in part. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can visually recognize the content of the privilege game executed in the past, and the player can easily understand the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the display control means may execute the first display image and the first display image before the first privilege game is executed based on the first execution condition being satisfied. A gaming machine G5 for displaying a second image in order.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, when the first execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to notify the player of a flow of a plurality of privilege games that can be executed in the future. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know in advance a series of game methods. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Characteristic H group> (executing a game that is likely to be the number of reserves in which the advantageous game can be executed and that is unlikely to be a game)
An information acquisition unit that acquires information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, and a storage unit that can store the information acquired by the information acquisition unit until a determination condition for the information is satisfied, up to a predetermined number as an upper limit, A determining unit for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage unit when the determination condition is satisfied; and a display unit dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determining unit. Dynamic display means, and specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result Wherein the number of pieces of the information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition, as compared with the case where the number of the information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Gaming machine H1, characterized in that those likely to perform a favorable game which is advantageous to the player.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. A gaming machine in which an advantageous privilege game is executed has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). In addition, there has been a configuration in which when a game ball enters the starting port, a lottery right for executing a game lottery can be held and stored up to a predetermined number as an upper limit. By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, a game having the same advantage is executed regardless of the number of lottery rights held and stored, so that the game tends to be monotonous. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the easiness of executing the advantageous game can be varied according to the number of information stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine includes a first game in which the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means easily satisfies the predetermined condition, and a second game in which the predetermined condition is more difficult to satisfy than the first game. , A gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means in the first game can more easily satisfy the predetermined condition than in the second game. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the first game to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine H2, the predetermined condition can be satisfied when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is a specific number smaller than the predetermined number, and the first game is stored in the storage device. The gaming machine H3, wherein when the number of pieces of information stored in the means is larger than the specific number, the number of pieces of information is more easily reduced than in the second game.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2, when the number of information is larger than the specific number, when the first game is executed, the number of information is reduced than when the second game is executed. Since the number of pieces of information can be easily set, the number of pieces of information can be easily set to a specific number. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who is playing a game in a state where the number of pieces of information is larger than the specific number can be played while expecting the first game to be executed.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the first game makes it easier to increase the number of pieces of information than the second game when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is smaller than the specific number. A gaming machine H4.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2 or H3, when the number of information is smaller than the specific number, when the first game is executed, the number of information is reduced rather than when the second game is executed. Since the number of pieces of information can be easily increased, the number of pieces of information can be easily set to a specific number. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who is playing a game in a state where the number of pieces of information is smaller than the specific number can perform the game while expecting the first game to be executed.

  In any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information is set. Having a forced stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information until the time elapses, wherein the first game is capable of forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information by the forced stop means The gaming machine H5, wherein the second game is more difficult to forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information by the forcible stopping means than the first game.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the dynamic display of the identification information being executed can be forcibly stopped by the forcible stopping means. Thereby, the dynamic display of the identification information can be terminated without waiting for the identification information being executed to be dynamically displayed for the predetermined period. Therefore, the next determination by the determination means can be easily performed, and the game efficiency can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H5, when a second determination condition different from the determination condition is satisfied, the gaming machine H5 includes a second determination unit capable of executing a second determination different from the determination, and the first condition includes at least the second determination condition. A gaming machine H6, which can be established when the result of the second determination by the two determination means is a specific second determination result.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H4, the first condition can be easily satisfied when the result of the second determination by the second determining means is a specific second determination result. Therefore, by providing the novel playability of executing the second determination by the second determination means to forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, the interest of the game is improved. There is an effect that can be.

<Feature I>
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means; A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result; a first game state; and a first game state. A game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including a different second game state, and executing the game in a state where the second game state is set. A gaming machine comprising: updating means for updating first information based on a dynamic display of the identification information to be updated; and limiting means for limiting updating of the first information by the updating means. I1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game in which a lottery is easily performed after execution of a privilege game is executed for a predetermined period (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, when the number of lotteries executed during the time-saving game reaches a predetermined number, the time-saving game ends, so that the remaining period of the time-saving game is easily predicted for the player. As a result, there is a problem that the willingness to play is reduced. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine I1, even if the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a state where the second gaming state is set, if the first condition is satisfied, the updating of the first information is restricted by the restricting means. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state when an end condition based on the first information is satisfied in a state where the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine I2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine I1, by limiting the updating of the first information by the restricting means, it is possible to make it difficult to end the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the end condition of the second game state is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine I2, it is preferable that the discriminating means perform the discrimination in the state where the second game state is set, rather than perform the discrimination in the state where the first game state is set. A gaming machine I3 characterized by executing a determination that is advantageous to the game machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I2, the second gaming state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, so during the period in which the second gaming state is set. It is possible to cause the player to play a game while expecting the number of executed dynamic displays to be increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine I3, the updating means can update, as the first information, the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information executed in a state where the second gaming state is set. Gaming machine I4.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I3, the updating unit updates the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information as the first information, so that the game is executed in a state where the second gaming state is set. The second gaming state ends based on the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to provide a case where the first information is not updated in spite of the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in accordance with the conditions that are satisfied, so that it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, when a special condition is satisfied in a state in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information is changed. A forcible stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information until the passage of time, wherein the first condition can be satisfied when the forcible stop means forcibly stops the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine I5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, when the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped by the forcible stopping means, the first condition is satisfied, and the updating is performed by the limiting means. Updating of the first information by the means is restricted. This can prevent the first information from being updated due to the dynamic display of the identification information that could not be normally dynamically displayed, so that the identification information is not displayed when the second game state is set. Has an effect that it is possible to prevent the second game state from ending without being able to normally and dynamically display and causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine I5, the forced stop means forcibly stops with the identification information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is other than the specific determination result, regardless of the determination result of the determination means corresponding to the identification information. A gaming machine I6,

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I5, when the identification information is forcibly stopped, the specific game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second game state from being terminated without the identification information being normally displayed dynamically in the state where the second game state is set, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine I6, when a second determination condition different from the determination condition is satisfied, the gaming machine I6 has a second determination unit capable of executing a second determination different from the determination, and the specific game execution unit includes the second determination unit. The specific game is also executed when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, and the special condition is at least a result of the second determination by the second determination means. Is a predetermined second determination result different from the specific second determination result.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I6, if the second determination result of the second determination means capable of executing the specific game is a predetermined second determination result, the special condition is satisfied, and the forced stop is performed. The dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped and displayed by the means. Thus, when the second determination by the second determination unit is performed to execute the specific game, even if the result of the predetermined second determination is earlier than the result of the specific second determination, the specific identification is performed. There is an effect that the dynamic display of the information is forcibly stopped and the first information is prevented from being updated.

  In the gaming machine I7, as the type of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means, a first specific game type and a second specification capable of executing a specific game more advantageous to the player than the first specific game type Game type determining means for determining one specific game type from a plurality of specific game types including a game type, wherein the game type determining means determines the specific second determination result by the second determining means. The gaming machine I8, characterized in that it is easier to determine the second specific game type than when the determination result is the specific determination result by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I7, the second determination means is more likely to give a determination result advantageous to the player than the determination means, so that the second determination is positively performed on the player. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the limiting effect by the limiting unit can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine I7 or I8, the second determination means is easier to execute the second determination when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine I9.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I7 or I8, the second determination by the second determination means is performed when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. Is easy to execute, the player can actively make the second determination in the state where the second game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the limiting effect by the limiting unit can be further enhanced.

<Characteristic J group> (If the condition for stopping the running variable display in the middle is satisfied, the stop control content is switched based on the content of the running variable display.)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means; A gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result. A dynamic display mode determining unit for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the unit, and a switching condition being satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit. A specific control unit capable of executing specific control for switching the dynamic display mode to a specific dynamic display mode in accordance with a condition satisfied by dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display unit; Having Gaming machine J1, characterized in that the at it.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In some gaming machines having the above-described configuration, when one lottery is won, the result of the other lottery is forcibly discarded. In this case, the other lottery result is forcibly discarded irrespective of the content of the other lottery result, which may be disadvantageous to the player in some cases, and gives a sense of distrust to the player. There was a problem. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest. The above-mentioned conventional problem is a problem in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation machine) that simultaneously (in parallel) performs a lottery (change) of a first special symbol and a lottery (change) of a second special symbol. As described above, the problem to be solved by the technical idea of the present feature group is not limited to the simultaneous variation machine, but a gaming machine other than the simultaneous variation machine (for example, a lottery of the first special symbol according to a winning order). Of course, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that executes (fluctuation) and a lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol.

  According to the gaming machine J1, when the switching condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display mode is specified according to the condition that the dynamic display of the identification information being executed satisfies. Can be switched to a target display mode. Thereby, the dynamic display mode can be switched to the specific dynamic display mode corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information being executed. Therefore, when switching the dynamic display mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine J1, when executing the specific control, the specific control unit may execute a plurality of specific dynamic display modes according to a condition satisfied by dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display unit. A gaming machine J2 characterized by switching to any one of the specific dynamic display modes.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, when the specific control is executed, the specific dynamic display mode can be made different depending on the condition that the dynamic display of the identification information satisfies. . Accordingly, the specific control corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information can be determined, so that when performing the specific control for the dynamic display of the identification information, a game that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when a second discriminating condition different from the discriminating condition is satisfied, a second discriminating means for executing a second discriminating different from the discriminating is provided. A gaming machine J3, which can be established when the result of the second determination by the means is a predetermined second determination result.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a predetermined second determination result, the switching condition is satisfied, and the specific control is performed. Will be different. Therefore, the control content of the specific control is associated with both the result of the determination by the determining means and the result of the second determination by the second determining means, which has an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J3, the specific game execution means may execute the specific game even when a result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result different from the predetermined second determination result. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being executable.

  According to the gaming machine J4, since the specific game can be executed based on the second determination by the second determination unit, both the determination by the determination unit and the second determination by the second determination unit are performed on the player. Can be motivated. Therefore, there is an effect that the frequency at which the specific control is executed can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determining means determines at least a dynamic display period of the identification information, and the switching condition is such that the longer the dynamic display period is, the shorter the dynamic display period is. A gaming machine J5 characterized by being more easily established.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the longer the dynamic display period is, the easier the switching condition can be established, so that the dynamic display means dynamically displays. There is an effect that the player can be interested in the length of the dynamic display period of the identification information, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the game machine further includes a remaining period determining unit that can determine a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic displaying unit, and the switching condition includes the remaining period. A game J6 characterized in that the easiness of establishment is varied according to the length of the residual dynamic display period determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the ease of establishing the switching condition can be changed according to the length of the residual dynamic display period. On the other hand, there is an effect that the length of the residual display period of the identification information can be of interest.

<Feature K group> (increase or decrease the number of specific symbols displayed based on the pre-read result without synchronizing with the number of reservations)
Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, and storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means at least up to a predetermined number until an identification condition for the information is satisfied; A determination unit for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage unit when the determination condition is satisfied, and identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination unit on a display unit; A specific game that can execute a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result Executing means for performing a preliminary determination based on the information before the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is performed in the gaming machine having: And a specific symbol display means for displaying a predetermined number of specific symbols on the display means based on a result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means, and a display number of the specific symbol displayed by the specific symbol display means. And a symbol number variable display means capable of variably displaying regardless of the number of pieces of information.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. Gaming machines in which advantageous privilege games are executed have been proposed. In addition, when a game ball enters the starting port, a lottery right for executing a game success / failure lottery can be held and stored up to a predetermined number, and the held lottery is stored. A proposal has been made in which the number of rights is displayed as a symbol, and the display mode of the symbol is varied based on a preliminary determination result obtained by previously determining a lottery result corresponding to the held lottery right (for example, JP 2013-223613 A). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the result of the preliminary determination can be suggested to the player using the displayed symbol, but when the number of the lottery rights stored on hold is small, the display is performed. There was a problem that the number of symbols to be played was reduced, the effect of the effect was reduced, and the game was likely to be monotonous. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the number of specific symbols to be displayed based on the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit can be changed regardless of the number of information stored in the storage unit. Therefore, even when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is small, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be variably displayed, and the player is interested in an effect that suggests a result of the preliminary determination. There is an effect that it can be provided.

  In the gaming machine K1, the specific symbol display means is capable of displaying the specific symbol with an upper limit of the number of pieces of information that can be stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, the upper limit display number of the specific symbol is set as the upper limit number of information that can be stored in the storage means, so that the specific symbol is stored in the storage means for the player. Can be thought of as indicating the number of pieces of information that

  In any of the gaming machines K1 and K2, when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is one or more, the symbol number variable means sets the number of the specific symbols in a range of one or more as the number of the specific symbols. A gaming machine K3 wherein the number of specific symbols to be displayed is variable.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, while the information is stored in the storage means, the specific symbol can be continuously displayed. Indicates the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means.

  In one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, one gaming state is set among a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Possible game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means can set the first game state at least when an end condition is satisfied in a state where the second game state is set; The gaming machine K4, wherein the specific symbol display means is capable of displaying the specific symbol on the display means while the second game state is set.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, while the specific symbol is displayed on the display means, the second gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player whether or not the second game state ends every time the number of displayed specific symbols changes. Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine K4, the symbol number changing means is capable of changing the number of the specific symbols displayed on the display means by two or more.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K4, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be greatly changed at a time, so that a surprising effect can be provided to the player, and the effect can be improved. There is an effect that it can be increased.

  In the gaming machine K5, the symbol number variable unit includes the information corresponding to the specific determination result in the information stored in the storage unit as a result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit. The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that it is easier to change the number of display of the specific symbols to increase when the information is displayed than when the information corresponding to the specific determination result is not included. .

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5, it is easier to increase the number of display of the specific symbol when it is determined in advance that the information corresponding to the specific determination result is included, There is an effect that the player can be interested in the variable situation of the specific symbol and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K6, the symbol number variable unit includes the information corresponding to the specific determination result in the information stored in the storage unit as a result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit. The gaming machine K7 is characterized in that the number of displayed specific symbols to be increased at one time is more likely to be increased in the case where the specific symbol is displayed than in the case where the information corresponding to the specific determination result is not included. .

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K6, the possibility that information corresponding to a specific discrimination result is included increases as the number of displayed specific symbols that increases at one time increases. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in how the number of displayed specific symbols increases, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine K7, the symbol number variable means can execute a preparation variable display for decreasing the display number of the specific symbol before increasing the display number of the specific symbol to the specific number. Gaming machine K8.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be reduced by the variable preparation display, so that the specific number of variable symbols is increased regardless of the current number of specific symbols to be displayed. Can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the effect of variably displaying the number of specific symbols displayed by the symbol number variable means can be increased.

<Characteristic L group> (Variable ball entry rate to the starting port on the downstream side by varying the winning rate of the electric chute on the upstream side)
A first determination unit that can execute the first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied; and a second determination different from the first determination when a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. Executable second determination means, and when the result of the first determination by the first determination means is a specific first determination result, or when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific first determination result. When the determination result is two, in a gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a corresponding specific game, a first flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a game flowing down the first flow path A first ball entry means capable of satisfying the first determination condition when a game ball enters, and a first state in which a game ball can enter the first ball entry means; And a variable means that can be changed to a second state that is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state; A variable control means capable of variably controlling the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern when standing up, and a variable control means capable of entering a game ball, wherein the second determination condition can be satisfied when the game ball enters. 2 ball entry means, and wherein the second ball entry means, among the game balls flowing down the first flow path, a game ball which could not enter the first ball entry means A gaming machine L1 which is provided at a position where it can be obtained.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game in which a lottery is easily performed after execution of a privilege game is executed for a predetermined period (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, there is a type in which a plurality of starting ports are provided, and one of the starting ports is provided with a variable member for facilitating the entry of a game ball during a time-saving game, thereby facilitating the execution of a lottery during the time-saving game. By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, when a game ball is fired toward a start port provided with a variable member, the game ball that does not enter the start port is wasted, and the game motivation is reduced. was there. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the state in which the first determination is easily performed based on the game ball flowing down the first flow path is determined by the length of the period in which the variable means is changed to the first state by the variable control means, The state in which the second determination is easily performed can be switched. Thus, when a game ball flows down the first flow path, it is possible to provide a player with a pleasure of predicting which discrimination is to be performed, thereby improving the interest of the game. effective.

  In the gaming machine L1, as the variable pattern of the variable unit variably controlled by the variable control unit, a first variable pattern and a period in which the variable unit is in the second state longer than the first variable pattern may be used. A gaming machine L2 having variable pattern determination means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns including at least two variable patterns.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control means in accordance with the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means. It is possible to switch between a state in which the first determination is easily performed and a state in which the second determination is easily performed based on the game balls flowing down the first flow path. Therefore, the player can be interested in the variable state of the variable means, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine L2 has a determination unit that executes a predetermined determination when a determination condition is satisfied, and the variable control unit performs the variable control when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. A gaming machine L3 for variably controlling means.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L2, the variable means is variably controlled based on the determination result of the determining means, so that the player is interested in the content of the determination by the determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L3, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means, and a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means A dynamic display period determining means capable of determining one dynamic display period from a plurality of dynamic display periods of different lengths, wherein the dynamic display period determining means A gaming machine L4 for determining the dynamic display period based on a result of the determination.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L3, the length of the dynamic display period until the determination result of the determining means is stopped and displayed can be varied, so that the variable control by the variable control means can be performed. A period that is not executed can be given to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  A gaming machine L5, characterized in that in any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the second determination means performs a determination which is more advantageous to the player than the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L1 to L4, the second discriminating means performs a discrimination more advantageous to the player than the first discriminating means. There is an effect that the game can be played while the player is interested in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first flow path while expecting the ball to arrive.

  In the gaming machine L5, the game machine L5 has a detecting means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down the first flow path, and an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on a detection result of the detecting means, The means, at least, a first detecting means capable of detecting a game ball flowing into the first flow path, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path, which did not enter the first ball input means. And a second detecting means capable of detecting a game ball, wherein the effect executed by the effect executing means is such that a ball flowing down the first flow path is transmitted to the second ball input means. A gaming machine L6 for indicating a degree of expectation to reach to a player.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L5, the flowing state of the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the effect can be enhanced. There is.

<Characteristic AA group>
A first information acquisition unit capable of acquiring first information based on establishment of a first information acquisition condition, and a first information acquisition unit capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition unit. (1) first determination means, first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means on the display means, and the first dynamic display means A first dynamic display mode determining unit that can determine a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed by the CPU, and obtains second information based on establishment of a second information obtaining condition. Possible second information acquisition means, second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and information based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means A second determining means capable of executing the second determination; Means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the means on the display means, and the second dynamic display means dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. (2) second dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of the identification information, and first identification information or the specific second determination result for indicating the specific first determination result A bonus game execution unit capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information for indicating the second identification information is stopped and displayed on the display unit. And the effect mode selecting means capable of selecting an effect mode executed by the effect mode executing means, and the effect mode selecting means. Stored in the second information storage means. Gaming machine AA1, characterized in that and selects the representation embodiment based on at least the number of the second information that.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode for notifying the lottery result in the lottery based on the lottery result or the like as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. There is one that determines a game and executes the determined effect to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AA1, the effect mode executed during the dynamic display period of the second identification information is changed depending on the number of the stored second information, so that it can be executed thereafter. It is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of times of dynamic display of the second identification information, and even if the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is not displayed, continue the subsequent game. By making the player interested, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine AA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed prior to the dynamic display of the first identification information. A gaming machine AA2 characterized by executing the above-mentioned effect mode when the target display mode is executed.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, by executing the specific second dynamic display mode, it is possible to motivate the storage of the second information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. .

  In the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the effect mode is continuously executed after the period of the executed second dynamic display mode corresponding to the number of pieces of the second information stored is ended. A gaming machine AA3 characterized by being set in a period spanning the next dynamic display of the second identification information.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the effect form is configured to be executable over a dynamic display period of the second identification information that is continuously executed a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that a plurality of second dynamic display modes can be made to look like the one dynamic display mode, and the interest can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball in the second ball entry means. A variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first state, and the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition for the variable member A variable control means for varying from the first state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and prior determination means capable of determining in advance the establishment of the specific condition before the specific condition is satisfied, The gaming machine AA4, wherein the effect mode selecting means is configured to be able to select a specific effect mode based on at least a result of the preliminary determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a specific effect mode is selected based on a result of determining in advance that a specific condition that triggers easy acquisition of the second information is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that expectation can be given to the acquisition of the second information.

<Characteristics AB group> (effects are variable depending on the number of special figure 2 reservations during the execution of the fluctuation pattern)
A first information acquisition unit capable of acquiring first information based on establishment of a first information acquisition condition, and a first information acquisition unit capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition unit. (1) first determination means, first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means on the display means, and the first dynamic display means A first dynamic display mode determining unit that can determine a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed by the CPU, and obtains second information based on establishment of a second information obtaining condition. Possible second information acquisition means, second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and information based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means A second determining means capable of executing the second determination; Means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the means on the display means, and the second dynamic display means dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. (2) second dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of the identification information, and first identification information or the specific second determination result for indicating the specific first determination result A bonus game execution unit capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information for indicating the second identification information is stopped and displayed on the display unit. And the effect mode selecting means capable of selecting an effect mode executed by the effect mode executing means, and the effect mode selecting means. Stored in the second information storage means. Gaming machine AB1, wherein and selects the representation embodiment based on at least the number of the second information that.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a lottery based on a lottery result based on a lottery result as an effect for indicating a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port. There is a technique that determines an effect mode and executes the determined effect mode to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode executed during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display is stored as the second information. Since the determination is made based on the number, not only the result of the first determination but also the information on the possibility that the second determination can be performed can be determined from the presentation mode, and the player can quickly enter the game. There is an effect that a tired trouble can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode selection means selects the effect mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed. A gaming machine AB2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode is selected based on the first dynamic display mode being executed and the number of pieces of the second information stored during the execution, so that various effects can be obtained. There is an effect that various production modes can be executed.

  In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be performed prior to the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the effect mode is performed thereafter. A gaming machine AB3, wherein an effect related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information is executed.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, if the second information is stored, after the executed first identification information ends, the second identification information is changed. Since the dynamic display is started and the effect mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information, the second mode executed preferentially is executed. There is an effect that the player can recognize early that the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

  In any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball in the second ball entry means. A variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first state, and the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition for the variable member A variable control means for varying from the first state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and prior determination means capable of determining in advance the establishment of the specific condition before the specific condition is satisfied, The gaming machine AB4, wherein the effect mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific effect mode based on at least the result of the preliminary determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a specific effect mode is selected based on a result of previously determining whether a specific condition that triggers easy acquisition of the second information is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that expectation can be given to the acquisition of the second information.

<Characteristic AC group> (Using the special figure 1 fluctuation effect as a pseudo effect of the special figure 2 fluctuation)
First determining means for performing a first determination based on establishment of a first determination condition, and second determination performing a second determination based on establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition Means, a first privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the discrimination of the first discriminating means being a predetermined first discrimination result; A second privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the second determining means being a predetermined second determination result; and the first determination is performed. A first effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating a result of the first determination based on the result of the determination, and a result of the second determination based on the execution of the second determination. Executing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating A second effect execution means, wherein the second effect execution means sets at least a specific effect mode that is easily executed in the effect period of the first effect when at least a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine AC1 characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second effect in an effect mode including:

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode for notifying the lottery result in the lottery based on the lottery result or the like as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. There is one that determines a game and executes the determined effect to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, the first effect can be executed as an effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AC1, the second effect execution means is capable of executing the second effect in an effect mode including at least a display mode indicating a result of the first determination, as the effect mode of the first effect. A gaming machine AC2.

  According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AC1, the second effect using the display mode showing the determination result of the first determination can be executed, so that the interest in the gaming can be improved. effective.

  In the gaming machine AC2, the second effect execution means executes a second effect mode for indicating the determination result of the second determination and the effect mode in one effect indicating the determination result of the second determination. A gaming machine AC3.

  According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC2, there is an effect that a more unexpected effect can be executed.

<Characteristic AD group>
A first determination unit capable of performing a first determination, and a first determination result by the first determination unit after dynamically displaying a plurality of first identification symbols on the display unit in a predetermined dynamic display mode. A first dynamic display unit capable of stopping and displaying a combination of the above, a second determination unit capable of executing a second determination, and a plurality of second identification symbols dynamically displayed on the display unit in a predetermined dynamic display mode. A second dynamic display unit that can be stopped and displayed in a combination for indicating a second determination result by the second determination unit after the display, and a first determination result specific to the display unit. When the first identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific combination of the above, or when the second identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific combination for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means, Special benefits that can be And a granting means, wherein the privilege granting means grants a first privilege as the privilege when stopped and displayed in a combination of identification symbols corresponding to a first specific combination among the specific combinations. It is possible to provide a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege when stopped and displayed in a combination of identification symbols corresponding to a second specific combination different from the first specific combination. , The gaming machine has a determining means capable of determining the type of the privilege provided by the privilege providing means, the first dynamic display means, when a specific period is set, one of the In a state where the first identification symbol is dynamically displayed, the remaining identification symbols are stopped at a combination that can be any one of the first specific combination and the second specific combination. Gaming machine AD1, characterized in that after displaying the plurality reach display mode that presents is the first identification symbols which are displayed in the specific combination.

  In the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is notified by a combination of a plurality of symbols, the result is given thereafter according to the type of the displayed symbol. There is a configuration in which amusement of a game is improved by configuring the benefits to be different (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, some symbols constituting a combination in which a privilege lower than the privilege desired by the player is not provided are stopped and displayed, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced before the result is notified. However, there is a problem that the temperature decreases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of a player.

  According to the gaming machine AD1, when the identification symbol is displayed in a specific combination during a specific period, a specific combination is displayed through a plurality of reach display modes, so that the combination corresponding to the first privilege and the second privilege are supported. There is an effect that the expectation that both of the combinations are displayed can be long, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AD2 according to the gaming machine AD1, wherein the determining means determines the first privilege when the specific first determination result is obtained in the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD1, even in the specific period in which the first privilege is determined by the determining means, a specific combination is displayed via a plurality of reach display modes. In addition, there is an effect that it is easy to have a sense of expectation that the second privilege is provided even when the first determination is performed.

  In the gaming machine AD2, the determining means determines the second privilege when the result of the determination is the specific second determination in the specific time period, and the second dynamic display means sets a specific time period. In the case where the first identification symbol is dynamically displayed, the remaining identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be any one of the two or more different second specific combinations in a state where the second identification symbol is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine AD3, wherein the second identification symbol is displayed in the specific combination after a special plural reach display mode to be displayed is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AD2, it is possible to promptly recognize that the second benefit advantageous to the player is always given when the second benefit is a specific second determination result in the specific period. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic AE group> (Puncture ED control when probability changes)
Determination means capable of executing the determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and execution by the bonus game execution means A bonus game type determining unit capable of determining the type of the bonus game from a plurality of types, a specific area through which a game ball can pass when the specific bonus game is executed, and a game ball in the specific area. Setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state as a gaming state to be set after execution of the privileged game until the end condition is satisfied; When the game is ended, the suggestion mode execution means for executing the suggestion mode that can indicate the gaming state set after the execution of the privilege game. The mode and the second suggestion mode are configured in combination, and the second suggestion mode for indicating the normal game state and the second suggestion mode for indicating the advantageous game state are configured in the same period. A gaming machine AE1 configured in the suggested manner.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize hole is a hit, and a different hit game is executed depending on the hit type, and during a specific type of hit game, Is changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a variable state is changed to a state in which the game ball can enter the ball. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, even if a specific type of hit game is executed, a case may occur in which a game ball does not enter the variable entry area, thereby increasing the control load in the notification control in that case. There was a problem.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a control load.

  According to the gaming machine AE1, by setting the second suggestion mode to be the same period, it is possible to set a mode that suggests based on the state of entering a specific area while suppressing a change in the period in which the suggestion mode is displayed. This has the effect of facilitating the notification control of the suggestion mode at the end of the bonus game and reducing the control load.

  In the gaming machine AE1, when the privilege game is executed, a suggestion mode setting unit configured to set the suggestion mode executed by the suggestion mode execution unit in accordance with a type of the bonus game to be executed; Switching the second suggestion mode to the second suggestion mode corresponding to other than the specific privilege game among the suggestion modes set when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the bonus game. A gaming machine AE2 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AE1, the suggesting mode is displayed even when the suggesting mode is set at the start to suppress the control load from being concentrated at the end of the privilege game. Since the suggestion can be switched to the suggestion mode corresponding to the normal game state without changing the period for performing the suggestion, there is an effect that the control load can be suppressed and the correct suggestion can be executed.

<Characteristic AF group> (provide ED periods of different lengths depending on the jackpot type)
Discriminating means capable of executing discrimination, privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a result of the discrimination of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result, and the privilege game executing means. A privilege game type determining means capable of determining a type of the privilege game to be executed from a plurality of types; and terminating the privilege game based on a predetermined end condition being satisfied during execution of the privilege game. A gaming machine AF1 comprising: a period setting unit that sets, as a period for indicating, a period corresponding to a type of the privilege game being executed.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode for notifying the lottery result in the lottery based on the lottery result or the like as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. There is one that determines a game and executes the determined effect to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AF1, different periods can be set in accordance with the type of privilege game, and thus there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AF2, further comprising a specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect using the period set by the period setting unit.

  According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1, the specific effect can be executed in different periods set according to the type of the bonus game, so that the interest of the game can be improved. effective.

  In the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, when the variable condition is satisfied during execution of the privilege game, the gaming machine AF1 or AF2 includes a period switching unit that can switch the length of the period set by the period setting unit to a different length. Gaming machine AF3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the length of the period can be made different even when the variable condition is satisfied during execution of the bonus game, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic AG group> (The ED period is varied depending on the presence or absence of the V prize)
Discriminating means capable of executing discrimination, privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the discrimination of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result, and during execution of the privilege game A game in which an advantageous game state that is advantageous to a player can be set based on a specific area in which a game ball can pass through and a game ball passing through the specific area during execution of the privilege game. State setting means, and a specific period setting means for setting a specific period for indicating the end of the privilege game based on a predetermined end condition being satisfied during execution of the privilege game, The specific period setting means is configured to be able to set the specific period having a different length depending on whether a game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the privilege game or not. Gaming machine AG .

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode for notifying the lottery result in the lottery based on the lottery result or the like as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. There is one that determines a game and executes the determined effect to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AG1, the specific period of a different length can be set depending on whether the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the privilege game or not, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be done.

  The gaming machine AG2, wherein the gaming machine AG1 has a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect during the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AG1, a specific effect can be executed within a specific period, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AG3 in the gaming machine AG2, wherein the specific effect includes at least a notification mode for notifying a passing state of a game ball to the specific area during the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine AG3, since the specific effect includes the notification mode, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

<Characteristic BA group> (different playability depending on settings)
The state of the specific element relating to the degree of advantage of the player includes at least a first state corresponding to a first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage. Specific element setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of states, a first game state based on satisfaction of a predetermined setting condition, and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state And game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least the second game state, wherein the second game state is more than the second state when the specific element is set to the second state. A gaming machine BA1 characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous to a player when it is set to one state.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is a hit, the game machine shifts to a hit state. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine configured so that a gaming state after a hit state ends according to a hit type can be made different. There are also those that aim to improve the interest in.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game may be monotonous because the degree of advantage of each gaming state is fixed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BA1, in the advantageous second gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which it is more advantageous to set the specific element to the first state having a lower degree of advantage. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BA1, discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a predetermined specific discrimination result. A gaming machine BA2, wherein the first state is configured to have a lower probability of being the specific determination result than the second state.

  According to the gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine BA1, in the advantageous second gaming state, it is possible to realize an extremely novel gaming property in which the lower the probability of a specific determination result being, the more advantageous it is. Since it is possible, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine BA2, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position at which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means, and a second position at which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a position, and based on a result of the determination by the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result, the variable means moves the first position from the second position to the first position. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to a position for a predetermined period, and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means, The gaming machine BA3, wherein the second gaming state is configured to be easier to give the predetermined privilege by the privilege granting unit than the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BA2, in the second gaming state, a predetermined privilege is more likely to be given, so that when the second gaming state is set, the player's interest in the game is improved. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine BA2 or BA3, the gaming state setting means is configured to be able to set the first gaming state based on the specific determination result in the second gaming state. Gaming machine BA4.

  According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA2 or BA3, when a specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the first gaming state having a lower degree of advantage than the second gaming state may be set. Therefore, in the second game state, it is possible to make the player want the bonus to be continuously provided as the second determination result rather than the specific determination result. Therefore, a novel game property that expects no specific discrimination result can be realized, and thus, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any of the gaming machines BA2 to BA4, the second gaming state is configured to be maintained until the specific determination result is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BA2 to BA5, the second gaming state is maintained until the specific determination result is obtained, so that the first state having a low probability of the specific determination result is low. Is longer and the second game state is more likely to continue. In other words, the result of the second discrimination is more likely to be obtained, so that the number of times the predetermined privilege is provided tends to be increased. Therefore, in a state other than the second gaming state, it is possible to expect the second state, while in the second gaming state, the disadvantageous first state can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BA2, the gaming state setting means includes one of a plurality of at least one of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and a third gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the second gaming state. The game state setting means is configured to be able to be set to the game state, and the game state setting means performs the predetermined number of discriminations after the second game state is set. A gaming machine BA6 characterized in that the third gaming state can be set based on the determination result.

  According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the first state having a lower probability of being a specific determination result is more likely to have a determination result other than the specific determination result in the second gaming state. , It becomes easy to enter the advantageous third game state. Therefore, in the second game state, the novel game property of strongly expecting that the disadvantageous first state is set can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. effective.

  In any of the gaming machines BA2 to BA6, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first entering means capable of receiving a game ball fired by the launching means, and a game to the first entering means. Paying-out means for paying out at least a prize ball based on the ball having entered, wherein the first game state is a game in a firing direction in which the game ball easily enters the first ball-in means. A gaming machine BA7 characterized in that the number of game balls fired is likely to be larger than the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means when balls are continuously fired. .

  According to the gaming machine BA7, in any one of the gaming machines BA2 to BA6, in the first gaming state, the number of balls held tends to decrease as a game ball is fired. We can strongly expect that it is set. Therefore, a novel gaming property of expecting the second state in the first gaming state while expecting the first state in the second gaming state can be realized, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine BA7, the second gaming state is configured such that the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means is more likely to be closer to the number of gaming balls fired than in the first gaming state. A gaming machine BA8.

  According to the gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BA7, the degree of advantage in the second gaming state can be further increased, so that the game is played with a stronger expectation of shifting to the second gaming state. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic BB group> (The easier the winning is, the lower the advantage is)
Determining means for executing a determination based on the establishment of the determination condition; privilege game executing means for performing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; A first probability state in which the specific determination result is obtained at a first probability in the determination of the determination means based on the establishment of the setting condition of the above, and the specific determination is performed in a second probability different from the first probability. State setting means for setting one state from among a plurality of states including at least a second probability state as a result, wherein the first probability state is at least while a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. , Wherein the gaming machine BB1 is configured to have a higher degree of advantage for the player than the second probability state.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is a hit, the game machine shifts to a hit state. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines described above have a configuration in which the winning lottery probability after a hit state ends according to the hit type can be made different, and the hit state ends. There are some that try to improve the enjoyment after doing this.

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that if the hit probability is low, the player's motivation to play the game is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BB1, since the first probability state can be expected at least while the specific condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. .

  The gaming machine BB2, wherein in the gaming machine BB1, the first probability is configured with a lower probability than the second probability.

  According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB1, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which it is more advantageous that the probability of a specific determination result being lower while the specific conditions are satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the state in which the specific condition is satisfied is configured to be terminated based on at least the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which a game is performed while expecting that a specific determination result is not obtained while a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means, and a game ball entering from the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to hit the ball; A variable game executing means for executing a variable game changing from the second position to the first position; and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means. The state in which the specific condition is satisfied is configured such that the predetermined privilege is more easily provided by the privilege providing means than the state in which the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine BB4, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, while the specific condition is satisfied, the predetermined privilege is easily given, so that the game is expected with the strong expectation that the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that it can be performed.

  In the gaming machine BB4, the discriminating unit performs discrimination based on establishment of a first discriminating condition, and discriminates based on establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. And a second determination unit that performs the second determination. The second determination unit is configured such that a ratio of the second determination result is higher than that of the first determination unit. The state where the specific condition is satisfied is configured such that the second determination condition is more easily satisfied than the state where the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine BB5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BB4, while the specific condition is satisfied, the determination by the second determination means that is likely to be the second determination result is easily performed, so that the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that a game can be played with a strong expectation of that.

  In the gaming machine BB5, the first determination is performed while the specific condition is satisfied, as compared with a case where the determination result of the second determination unit is the specific determination result while the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine BB6 characterized in that, when the determination result of the means is the specific determination result, the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied after the end of the privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB5, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination of the second determination unit that is easily executed in a state where the specific condition is satisfied, the state where the specific condition is satisfied ends. Since the possibility of occurrence is high, it is possible to realize a novel game property that expects that a specific determination result is not obtained while the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine BB5 or BB6, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction by the launching means is easy to enter, and A second ball entry means provided at a position where game balls fired in a second direction different from the first direction can easily enter the ball, and the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means. A second position changer that can be changed to a third position and a third position where a game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entry unit; and the first determination condition is the first condition. It is configured such that it can be established based on a game ball entering the ball entry means, and the second determination condition is that a game ball enters the second ball entry means. It is configured to be able to be established based on the, the state that the specific conditions are satisfied, Serial as compared with the state specific conditions are not satisfied, the gaming machine and the second varying means is characterized in that which is constituted tends to be state of the variable in the third position BB7.

  According to the gaming machine BB7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BB5 or BB6, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of changing the shooting direction of the game ball depending on whether a specific condition is satisfied. is there.

<Characteristic BC group> (varies the occurrence rate of a specific suggestion between the normal state after the setting change and the normal state after the end of the hit)
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect, wherein a first game state setting means for setting a predetermined specific game state based on establishment of a first setting condition; and Second game state setting means for setting the specific game state based on establishment of a second setting condition different from the setting condition, and the effect execution means is provided by the first game state setting means. The case where the specific game state is set and the case where the specific game state is set by the second game state setting means are configured so that the predetermined specific effect is easy to execute. A gaming machine BC1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is a hit, the game machine shifts to a hit state. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine configured so that a gaming state after a hit state ends according to a hit type can be made different. There are also those that aim to improve the interest in.

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that when the same gaming state continues for a long time, the gaming becomes monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BC1, even in the same specific gaming state, the specific effect is executed according to whether the setting is made by the first gaming state setting means or the second gaming state setting means. Since the easiness can be changed, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BC1, discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the fulfillment of discriminating conditions, and a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a predetermined specific discrimination result. Privilege game execution means to be executed, wherein the first game state setting means is configured to be able to set the specific game state as a game state after the end of the privilege game, The second gaming state setting means is configured to be capable of setting the specific gaming state based on the initialization of the gaming machine being initialized. .

  According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BC1, the ease of execution of the specific effect can be varied in the gaming state set when initialized, so that the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, the effect execution means sets a predetermined discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result continuously for a predetermined number of discriminations after the specific game state is set. A gaming machine BC3 configured to be able to execute the specific effect on the basis of the fact that the game machine BC3 has become available.

  According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which a game is played in expectation of the continuation of the disconnection determination result.

  In the gaming machine BC3, the effect execution means can execute the specific effect based on a fact that the number of consecutive times of the disconnection determination result after the specific game state is set is a multiple of the specific number of times. A gaming machine BC4 characterized by being constituted.

  According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BC3, the specific effect is executed each time the consecutive number of the disconnection determination results becomes a multiple of the specific number, so that the game is continued until the specific number of times is reached. You can make me think. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the effect execution means may be set to the specific game state by the second game state setting means, as compared with the case where the specific game state is set by the first game state setting means. Is set so that the specific effect is more easily executed when is set.

  According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, there is an effect that the operating rate in the specific gaming state set by the second gaming state setting means can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the specific element relating to the player's advantage is associated with a first state corresponding to the first advantage and a second advantage higher than the first advantage. A specific element setting unit that can be set to one of a plurality of states including at least a second state, and the first state is executed more than the second state as a type of the specific effect. A type that determines one type from among a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect having a higher ratio and a second specific effect having a higher ratio of the second state being executed than the first state. And a determining means.

  According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the state of the specific element can be suggested by the type of the specific effect, so that the player who wants to predict the state of the specific element is provided to the player. On the other hand, a game can be performed in expectation of a specific effect being performed in a specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC5, at least the main control means for performing main control relating to the game and the effect executing means are provided, and the main control means performs control according to a command output from the main control means. Control means; and display means capable of displaying identification information, wherein the main control means performs a determination based on satisfaction of a determination condition, and a determination result of the determination means is a predetermined identification. A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination, a dynamic display unit that dynamically displays the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination unit, Type determining means for determining a dynamic display type in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, and a type command for indicating the dynamic display type determined by the type determining means Command output means for outputting to the slave control means, and the slave control means comprises a command receiving means capable of receiving at least the type command, and the effect execution means is provided by the command receiving means Based on the reception of the type command, an effect corresponding to the received type command is configured to be executable, and the specific effect is a predetermined specific dynamic display type. A gaming machine BC6 comprising an effect that can be executed by the effect executing means as an effect in accordance with (1).

  According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BC1 to BC5, the sub control means determines the type of the specific effect when a type command corresponding to the specific dynamic display type is received. Since only the processing load is required, the processing load on the slave control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine BC6, the main control means sets the specific game set by the first game state setting means as defined information in which information referred to when determining the dynamic display type is defined in advance. The first specified information referred to when determining the dynamic display type in the state, and the first specified information referred to when determining the dynamic display type in the specific game state set by the second game state setting means. Reference information storage means storing at least a plurality of pieces of definition information including at least second definition information, and a reference 1 for determining the dynamic display type based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. Regulation information specifying means for specifying the prescribed information from the prescribed information storage means, wherein the second prescribed information is easier to determine the specific dynamic display type than the second prescribed information. Gaming machine BC7, characterized in that so as to information is one that is defined.

  According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC6, there is an effect that the ease of determination of a specific dynamic display type can be changed only by changing the reference information to be referred to.

  In the gaming machine BC7, when the predetermined condition is satisfied at the time when the determination condition is satisfied, the second dynamic information determines the specific dynamic display type more than the second specific information. If the specific condition is not satisfied, the information is defined such that the determination ratio of the specific dynamic display type is common to the second specified information. Gaming machine BC8.

  According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BC7, the determination ratio of the specific dynamic display type can be changed according to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BD group> (Specific suggestions are more likely to occur in situations that are disadvantageous to the player)
Based on the establishment of a specific execution condition, a specific effect execution unit that executes a predetermined specific effect, and a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution unit, as a specific element related to the degree of advantage of the player. A specific effect type determining means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect capable of suggesting a state to a player and a second specific effect in which the state of the specific element is not easily suggested; Game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state based on establishment of a setting condition; The gaming machine BD1, wherein the first game state is configured such that the first specific effect is more easily determined by the specific effect type determination means than the second game state.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and a variety of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, JP-A-2003-325886). Gazette).

  In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are capable of executing an effect mode indicating a degree of advantage for a player in a predetermined gaming state.

  However, there was a demand for further improvement in interest.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BD1, it is possible for a player who wants to know the state of the specific element to actively play a game in the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BD1, the gaming machine BD2 is characterized in that the first gaming state is configured as a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BD2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD1, there is an effect that the operating rate in the disadvantageous first gaming state can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BD1 or BD2, the gaming state setting means includes a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a third gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. And at least one of a plurality of game states including at least one of the plurality of game states, wherein the specific effect type determination unit determines that the game state after the end of the privilege game is other than the third game state. The first game state set in the situation of the specific number or more is more than the first game state set in the situation where the number of consecutive times set in the game state is less than the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine BD3 configured to easily determine a first specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD1 or BD2, as the disadvantageous situation in which the advantageous third gaming state is not set continues, the specific effect is more easily executed, so the disadvantageous situation continues. Even in such a case, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to lower the player's motivation for the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a player being notified based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a predetermined specific discrimination result Privilege game execution means for executing an advantageous privilege game, a first probability that is a predetermined probability that the specific determination result is obtained in the first game state as the specific element, and a second probability higher than the first probability. And a specific element setting means for setting at least one of a plurality of probabilities including at least two probabilities, wherein the second game state has a higher probability of being the specific determination result than the first game state. A gaming machine BD4 configured in a state.

  According to the gaming machine BD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, in the specific effect, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that the second probability is suggested. There is an effect that interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BD4, the second game state is configured to be the specific determination result with a probability equal to or higher than a third probability higher than the second probability, and the first specific effect is: A first effect mode that is easier to be executed when the first probability is set than the second probability, and a second effect mode that is easier to be executed when the second probability is set than the first probability And at least one of a plurality of steps including at least one of the plurality of steps, wherein the specific effect is configured in an effect mode that suggests information according to a probability of being a specific determination result. Machine BD5.

  According to the gaming machine BD5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD4, it is possible to expect that the second effect mode is executed when the specific effect is executed, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine BD5, the specific element setting unit sets a probability of the specific determination result to the first probability by setting a predetermined first set value to a predetermined setting destination, By setting a second setting value different from the first setting value to a predetermined setting destination, a probability of the specific determination result is set to the second probability, and the first effect mode Is a numerical value indicating a probability less than or equal to the first probability, and is configured in an effect mode of notifying a numerical value indicating the first set value, the second effect mode is the A gaming machine BD6 characterized in that the gaming machine BD6 is configured to produce a numerical value indicating a probability equal to or less than the first probability and to notify a numerical value indicating the second set value.

  According to the gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD5, since the set value can be indicated by a numerical value in the first specific effect, there is an effect that an effect that can be easily understood by the player can be realized.

  In the gaming machine BD5 or BD6, the second specific effect is configured in an effect mode of reporting a numerical value indicating a probability that the probability of the specific determination result is equal to or more than the second probability and equal to or less than the third probability. A gaming machine BD7, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine BD7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD5 or BD6, the probability suggested by the second specific effect can be made equal to or less than the actual probability, so that the actual behavior of the gaming machine is specified by the second specification. It can be greater than or equal to the probability suggested by the means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the gaming machine from being inconsistent with the content of the specific effect, and thus it is possible to achieve a more suitable effect mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines BD5 to BD7, the specific effect type determination means may include the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the first gaming state set to the second probability, or the second game effect. A gaming machine BD8 characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine one of a plurality of types including at least a third specific effect having a content suggesting one of a gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BD8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BD5 to BD7, when the third specific effect is executed, it is possible to expect the player to be in the first gaming state. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BD8, the third specific effect is configured in an effect mode of notifying a numerical value indicating a probability that the probability of the specific determination result is higher than the first probability and equal to or less than the second probability. A gaming machine BD9 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine BD9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD8, attention can be paid to the numerical value notified by the specific effect, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BE group> (varies the appearance rate of the chance zone according to the setting)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition; and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a first discrimination result obtained by discriminating the discriminating means; In the specific game state, based on the second determination result different from the first determination result, a special state that is advantageous to the player until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied is established. The special state setting means configured to be able to be set and the specific element relating to the player's advantage are set to a first state corresponding to the first advantage and a second advantage higher than the first advantage. A corresponding second state, and state setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of states including at least the specific state, wherein the first state is more specific than the second state. Previous in state Gaming machine BE1, wherein those which are constituted tends to be the second determination result.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is a hit, the game machine shifts to a hit state. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine configured so that a gaming state after a hit state ends according to a hit type can be made different. There are also those that aim to improve the interest in.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game may be monotonous because the degree of advantage of each gaming state is fixed.

  According to the gaming machine BE1, the first state having the lower degree of advantage is more likely to be set to the special state in the specific game state, so that the first state having the lower degree of advantage in the specific game state can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BE1, the state setting means sets, as the specific element, a probability of being the first determination result at least in the specific game state, and the first state is a predetermined first state. The first state is configured to be the first determination result with a probability of 1, and the second state is configured to be the first determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming machine BE2.

  According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BE1, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property that can expect a state in which the probability of being the first determination result is low in a specific gaming state. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, when the special state is set in the specific game state, the specific game state is maintained at least until the special state ends. Gaming machine BE3.

  According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, in a specific gaming state, the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the gaming state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines BE1 to BE3, the determination means performs first determination based on satisfaction of a first determination condition, and performs determination based on satisfaction of a second determination condition. And at least in the specific game state, the discrimination of the second discriminating means tends to be more advantageous to the player than the discrimination of the first discriminating means. The gaming machine BE4, wherein the special state is a state in which the determination by the second determination means is more easily performed than a state in which the special state is not set.

  According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines BE1 to BE3, in a special state, it is easy to perform an advantageous determination by the second determination means. Play games in Chia. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BE4, the special state setting means is configured to be able to set the special state based on a result of the second determination by the first determination means. Machine BE5.

  According to the gaming machine BE5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine BE4, a novel special state is set in which an advantageous special state is set when the second determination result is obtained by the first determination means having a low degree of advantage. There is an effect that can be realized.

  In the gaming machine BE4 or BE5, first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, and second dynamic display means for indicating the determination result of the second determination means. Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information, wherein the dynamic display of the first identification information and the dynamic display of the second identification information are configured to be able to be executed in an overlapping manner. A gaming machine BE6 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE4 or BE5, there is an effect that the determination means can be efficiently determined.

  In the gaming machine BE6, the special state is at least constituted by a state during which the first identification information for indicating the second determination result is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine BE7, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine BE7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE6, during the special state, only the advantageous determination of the second determination means can be executed, so that the special state can be more strongly expected. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine BE6 or BE7, the ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the game ball cannot enter the ball entry means. And a variable means that can be changed to a second position based on the fact that the first determination result and the second determination result differ from the first determination result and the second determination result by the second determination means. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period; and a predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means. A gaming machine BE8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine BE8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE6 or BE7, there is an effect that a game can be played in expectation of the execution of the variable game.

  In any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE8, the special state setting means continuously obtains the second determination result over a predetermined number of times of determination by the determination means in the specific game state. In this case, the gaming machine BE9 is configured to be able to set the special state at a higher rate than when the number of consecutive times of the second determination result is less than the specific number of times.

  According to the gaming machine BE9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BE1 to BE8, there is an effect that a novel gaming property that expects the second determination result to be continued for a specific number of times or more can be realized.

  In the gaming machine BE9, the special state setting means sets the special state at a predetermined first rate when the number of consecutive times of the second determination result is equal to or greater than the specific number, and When the number of consecutive times of the discrimination result is equal to or more than a second number that is greater than the specific number, the special state can be set at a second rate higher than the first rate. A gaming machine BE10 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine BE10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE9, the special state is more likely to be set as the second determination result continues, so that the player's interest increases as the second determination result continues. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic BF group> (Based on the fact that the lottery result is purely off, a chance zone is formed without changing the gaming state)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition; privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result; A game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the player's advantage becomes the first advantage based on the establishment of the first condition; In the state, the first game state is maintained until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the determination unit being a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine BF1 comprising: a degree-of-advantage setting means capable of setting the degree of advantage to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is a hit, the game machine shifts to a hit state. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine configured so that a gaming state after a hit state ends according to a hit type can be made different. There are also those that aim to improve the interest in.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game state does not change unless the lottery result is a hit, and there is a problem that the player is discouraged every time the lottery result is out of order.

  According to the gaming machine BF1, a novel gaming property in which the degree of advantage is increased in the case of a departure determination result can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine BF1 includes dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, and the advantage degree setting means includes means for displaying the departure determination result by the dynamic display means. The gaming machine BF2, wherein the advantage degree during the dynamic display of the identification information is set to the second advantage degree.

  According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BF1, it is possible to realize an extremely novel gaming property that is advantageous while the identification information for indicating the separation determination result is dynamically displayed. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the discriminating means performs a discrimination based on a first discrimination condition being satisfied, and a second discriminating condition which is different from the first discriminating condition. And a second discriminating means for executing the discriminating by the discriminating means. The discriminating of the second discriminating means is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the discriminating of the first discriminating means. A gaming machine BF3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the determination by the second determination means will be executed.

  In the gaming machine BF3, the advantage degree setting means sets the second degree of advantage based on the result of the departure determination by the first determination means. Machine BF4.

  According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine BF3, an extremely novel gaming property is realized in which the advantage is increased when the first discriminating means having a low advantage has a disadvantageous determination result. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine BF4, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is provided. The length of the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of information is configured to be variable, and the advantage degree setting unit determines the first game state by the first determination unit in the first game state. A dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination unit is set to a length equal to or less than a predetermined first period until the determination result of the first determination unit is reached. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination unit is set to be longer than the first period based on the result of the determination by the first determination unit. Long second period The dynamic display means, at least in the first game state, as a dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, A gaming machine BF5 configured to dynamically display the identification information in a dynamic display period having a length equal to or shorter than the first period.

  According to the gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BF3, the dynamic display period of the second period can be set when the first determination unit determines that the game device is out of range. Only the determination by the second determination means can be executed during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF5, the advantage degree setting means continuously obtains the departure determination result in the first game state over a first predetermined number of times determined by the determination means. The gaming machine BF6, wherein the second advantage degree can be set at a higher ratio than the case where the number of consecutive times of the departure determination result is less than the first number.

  According to the gaming machine BF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BF1 to BF5, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property that expects a continuous determination result over the first number of determinations. There is.

  In the gaming machine BF6, the advantage degree setting means sets the second advantage degree at a first rate when the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result is equal to or greater than the first number, and sets the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result. Is configured to be able to set the second degree of advantage at a second rate higher than the first rate when the number is equal to or greater than a second number greater than the first number. Gaming machine BF7.

  According to the gaming machine BF7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BF6, there is an effect that a novel gaming property can be realized in which the degree of expectation to be set to the second advantageous degree is improved as the result of the separation determination is continued.

<Characteristic BG group> (Lower setting with 1 type and 2 types makes it easier to hit with an accessory)
A ball entry means into which game balls can enter, a first area provided at a position where game balls entering the ball entry means can flow, and a second area different from the first area; A distributing means for distributing a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to the first area or the second area, and based on a game ball having entered the first area. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, and a first state corresponding to the first advantage degree, based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a specific element relating to the player's advantage degree, And a second state corresponding to a second advantage degree different from the first advantage degree, and a state setting means for setting the state to any one of a plurality of states including at least the first state. , The game ball entering the ball entry means is more than the second state. Gaming machine BG1, characterized in that is configured to be easily distributed to the region.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance that can enter a ball when the electric accessory is opened (or movable), and the game ball enters the ball entrance. A game ball that enters the inside of a V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small hitting game or the like) executed based on a specific area (a winning switch or the like) provided in the V winning device. There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a bonus game (winning game or the like) that is advantageous to a player by passing through the pachinko machine, and the fun of the player has been improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-2011). -010741).

  In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines may perform an effect indicating a degree of expectation as to whether or not a privilege game given when passing through a specific area during a specific game is an advantageous type. Some are configured to be possible. In such a conventional gaming machine, when it is suggested that the degree of expectation as a privilege game of an advantageous type is high, a game can be performed with a stronger expectation of passing through a specific area.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the specific game is executed, since the ratio itself of the game balls passing through the specific area is common, it is suggested that the degree of expectation, which is an advantageous type, is high. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BG1, the ease of distribution to the first area can be made different depending on whether the game machine is in the first state or the second state. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BG1, the gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that the first degree of advantage is lower than the second degree of advantage.

  According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BG1, there is an effect that a novel gaming property can be realized in which a lower degree of advantage is more easily distributed to the first area by the distribution means.

  In the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, a variable position can be changed between a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. Means, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined discrimination information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and discrimination means. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a result of the determination being a specific determination result; Game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state advantageous to a player as a game state after the game is completed, wherein the first state is the first state From two states In the period from when the first game state is set to when the determination using all the determination information acquired during the first game state is completed, the game ball that has entered the ball entry means is A gaming machine BG3 configured to be easily distributed to the first area.

  According to the gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machines BG1 or BG2, the setting of the first state makes it easier for the gaming balls to be distributed to the first region in the advantageous first gaming state. There is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  The gaming machine BG3 further includes a second privilege game execution unit that executes the privilege game based on a result of the determination by the determination unit being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. The game state is based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a different discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result and the second discrimination result, and the A gaming machine BG4 configured to be easily sorted into one area.

  According to the gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BG3, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property that the game machine BG3 can be easily assigned to the first area when the result of the separation is determined in the first gaming state. effective.

  In the gaming machine BG4, the first state is configured to have a lower probability of the second determination result and a higher probability of the third determination result than the second state. A gaming machine BG5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BG4, the novel first gaming state is more advantageous when the first state having a low probability of being the second determination result is set. Since it is possible to realize a great amusement, there is an effect that a player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BG4 or BG5, storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined specific number of information as an upper limit until used for discrimination by the discrimination means, Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination, and dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. Wherein the distributing means is configured to facilitate distributing the game ball to the first area when the game ball arrives at a predetermined first period cycle, The display period setting means dynamically displays the identification information for indicating the specific determination result in a state where the one or more pieces of the determination information are stored in the storage means in the first game state. When setting a dynamic display period in the variable game, it is configured to be able to set a dynamic display period in which the variable game is easily executed in the first period cycle, and the dynamic display period setting means, In the first game state, when setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the departure determination result, a length capable of acquiring the specific information number of the determination information. Gaming machine BG6, characterized in that a dynamic display period can be set.

  According to the gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG4 or BG5, it is possible to acquire the discrimination information of a specific number of information during the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the discrimination result. There is an effect that a game can be played in expectation of a determination result.

  In the gaming machine BG6, the dynamic display period setting means sets the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result in the first gaming state. A dynamic display of a length that makes it difficult to obtain the discrimination information between the start of the dynamic display of the information and the end of the variable game executed after the end of the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine BG7 characterized in that a period can be set.

  According to the gaming machine BG7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BG6, it is difficult to obtain the discrimination information only during the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the departure discrimination result. It is possible to play games with strong expectation of becoming. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BH group> (Avoid the initial movement of the accessory when confirming the setting)
A variable member that can be changed, a variable unit that changes the variable member, and based on that power has been supplied to the gaming machine, the variable member performs an input operation that is a predetermined operation. A turning-on control means capable of controlling the variable means, and the turning-on operation being executed when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied at the time when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. A gaming machine BH1 comprising: a suppression unit that suppresses a situation.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of performing various effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  Some conventional gaming machines determine whether or not the variable member can operate normally by causing the variable member to perform a predetermined insertion operation when power is supplied to the gaming machine. Some are configured to be able to do so.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the insertion operation may be performed even in a situation where the insertion operation should not be performed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BH1, there is an effect that the variable member can be suitably operated when the power is turned on.

  In the gaming machine BH1, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time when the power is supplied to the gaming machine, the suppression unit may perform at least until the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine BH2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to suppress execution of a loading operation.

  According to the gaming machine BH2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BH1, there is an effect that the start timing of the insertion operation can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, when the specific condition and a second specific condition different from the specific condition are satisfied at the time when the power is supplied to the gaming machine, the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine BH3, comprising: a second control unit that controls the variable unit so as to perform the insertion operation on condition that the game machine is not in a state of being turned off.

  According to the gaming machine BH3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, the insertion operation can be performed in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied, so that the insertion operation can be performed more suitably. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine BH3, the suppression means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the specific condition is satisfied at the time when power is supplied to the gaming machine and the second specific condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine BH4 is characterized in that the insertion operation is prevented from being executed even after the game machine has not been set.

  According to the gaming machine BH3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH4, the execution of the insertion operation when the second specific condition is satisfied can be suppressed, so that the variable member can be suitably operated. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines BH1 to BH4, an operation means that can be operated by the operator, and power is supplied to the gaming machine in a state where the first operation content is operated on the operation means. , The state of the specific element relating to the player's advantage is defined as a first state corresponding to the first advantage, and a second state corresponding to the second advantage higher than the first advantage. And a special state setting means for setting a special state capable of being set to one of a plurality of states including at least, wherein the suppressing operation is performed while the special state is set. A gaming machine BH5 characterized in that execution is suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine BH5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BH1 to BH4, the insertion operation is performed while the special state is set, and it becomes difficult to change the state of the specific element. This has the effect of suppressing

  In the gaming machine BH5, a display means capable of displaying information indicating a state of the specific element, and a state in which an operation of a second operation content different from the operation of the second operation content is performed on the operation means A second special state setting means for setting a second special state in which the state of the specific element is displayed on the display means based on the power being supplied to the gaming machine, and the suppression means comprises: If the second special state is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, it is configured to be able to suppress the execution of the turning-on operation even after the second special state is ended. A gaming machine BH6.

  According to the gaming machine BH6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH5, the power of the gaming machine is turned on again simply to confirm the state of the specific element, and the power is turned on even though there is a high possibility that the turning-on operation is unnecessary. Since the execution of the operation can be suppressed, there is an effect that the operation of the variable member when the power is turned on can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine BH6, the operation means includes at least a first operation means and a second operation means different from the first operation means, and the operation of the first operation content is The first operation means and the second operation means are both configured to operate, and the second operation content is configured to include only the first operation means. Gaming machine BH7 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine BH7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH6, the operator can easily use the operation of the first operation content and the operation of the second operation content, so that the convenience of the operator is improved. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BH7, a game possible state setting means for setting a normal game possible state based on the fact that the first operation means is in a non-operation state in the special state and the second special state. A gaming machine BH8, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine BH8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BH7, the gaming possible state can be easily set, so that there is an effect that the convenience for the operator can be improved.

<Characteristic BI group> (provided with a variation pattern that is likely to be determined when a lottery is executed based on a winning random number that is a hit in some settings and a hit in other settings)
Discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition; discrimination means for performing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result; and a determination using a predetermined specific determination information as the determination information is performed. A plurality of conditions including at least a first determination state that is a specific determination result and a second determination state that is a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result when the determination using the specific determination information is performed. A determination state setting means for setting one determination state from among the following; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means; and a dynamic display means for indicating the departure determination result. As a dynamic display type in dynamic display of different information, a first dynamic display type that is easily executed when the specific discrimination information is used for discrimination and results in the departure discrimination, and the specific discrimination information A dynamic display type determination for determining one of a plurality of dynamic display types including at least a second dynamic display type which is easily executed when different determination information is used for the determination and the deviation determination result is obtained. A game machine BI1 comprising:

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, display a symbol on a display means in a fluctuating manner to notify a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning port. In such a gaming machine, when the game is stopped and displayed in a predetermined specific symbol, the game machine shifts to a so-called hit state which is advantageous to the player. In this symbol variation, a plurality of patterns having different variation times are provided to improve the interest of the player in the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714).

  However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BI1, it is possible to predict whether the state is the first determination state or the second determination state in accordance with the dynamic display type, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine BI1, a specific effect execution unit that executes a specific effect while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, and the second dynamic display type A first effect mode that is more easily executed in the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type than the dynamic display of the identification information, and a dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type. And a second effect mode that is easy to be executed in the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type. Gaming machine BI2.

  According to the gaming machine BI2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BI1, whether the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type is executed depending on the effect mode or the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type is performed. Since it is easier to understand whether the display has been executed, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BI2, the first specific effect is configured in an effect mode that indicates the first determination state.

  According to the gaming machine BI3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BI2, there is an effect that when the first specific effect is executed, the player can be convinced that the game is in the first determination state.

  In any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI3, the first determination state is configured to be the specific determination result at a predetermined first probability, and the second determination state includes: The gaming machine BI4, wherein the specific determination result is obtained at a second probability lower than the first probability.

  According to the gaming machine BI4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BI1 to BI3, when the first dynamic display type that is easily executed in the first determination state is determined, the probability of a specific determination result being high. Since the possibility of being in the discrimination state increases, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with a strong expectation that the first dynamic display type is determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BI4, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the probability of the specific determination result being higher than the first game state are higher. Game state setting means for setting one of the game states, wherein the first determination state is a state in which the probability of the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the first probability. The gaming machine BI5, wherein the second determination state includes a state in which the probability of the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the second probability.

  According to the gaming machine BI5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BI4, when the first determination state is set, it is specified in the first gaming state having a lower degree of advantage than when the second determination state is set. Is more likely to result, so that the player can play the game strongly expecting that the first determination state is set.

  In the gaming machine BI5, the first determination state is a state in which the probability of the specific determination result in the second game state is set to a third probability higher than the first probability, and The second determination state is a state in which the probability of the specific determination result in the second game state is set to a fourth probability higher than the second probability and lower than the third probability. A gaming machine BI6 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine BI6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BI5, in the first determination state, the probability of obtaining a specific determination result in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state increases, so the first determination is performed. The superiority in the state can be further improved. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played with a stronger expectation of being set to the first determination state.

  In any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI6, the discriminating state set by the discriminating state setting means can be maintained until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

  According to the gaming machine BI7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BI1 to BI6, since the discrimination state is not changed during the opening hours of the hall, it is strongly expected that an advantageous discrimination state is set, and the game is played. There is an effect that it can be performed.

  Any one of the gaming machines BI1 to BI7, comprising: an operation means operable by an operator; and an operation validity period setting means for setting an operation validity period for treating an operation on the operation means as valid. Sets the first determination state based on the operation of the first operation content performed on the operation means during the operation valid period, and performs the operation of the second operation content. The gaming machine BI8 is configured to be able to set the second determination state based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine BI8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BI1 to BI7, the discriminating state can be set by operating the operation means, so that the desired discriminating state can be easily set. . Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience for the operator can be improved.

<Characteristic BJ group> (Change the appearance rate of chance zones according to conditions)
A special state setting means configured to be able to set a special state that is likely to be advantageous to the player based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and a specific element relating to the player's advantage, State setting that can be set to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to the first state and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage different from the first degree of advantage. Means, and wherein the first state is configured such that the specific condition is more easily satisfied than the second state.

  According to the gaming machine BJ1, since the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied varies depending on the state, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BJ1, the special state setting means sets the special state based on the satisfaction of the specific condition in a predetermined specific gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BJ2, there is an effect that a game can be played in the expectation that a specific condition will be satisfied in a specific game state.

  In the gaming machine BJ1 or BJ2, the gaming state at the time when the specific condition is satisfied is maintained from when the special state is set to when the special state ends, in the gaming machine BJ3. .

  According to the gaming machine BJ3, since the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the gaming state, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine BJ4, wherein the gaming state at the time when the specific condition is satisfied is maintained even after the special state is completed in the gaming machine BJ3.

  According to the gaming machine BJ4, since the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the gaming state before and after the special state, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines BJ1 to BJ4, a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a discrimination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result The special state setting means, based on that the determination result of the determination means is a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result, as the specific condition, A gaming machine BJ5 configured to be able to set the special state.

  According to the gaming machine BJ5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BJ1 to BJ4, a novel gaming property in which an advantageous special state is set based on a generally unfavorable departure determination result is provided. There is an effect that it can be realized.

<Characteristic BK group> (variable the degree of advantage in the case of deviation)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition; privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being the first discrimination result; Game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which a player's advantage becomes a first advantage based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition; An advantage that can be set to a second advantage degree higher than the first advantage degree based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means becomes the second determination result from the first determination result in a game state. A gaming machine BK1 comprising: degree setting means.

  According to the gaming machine BK1, a novel gaming property in which the degree of advantage is increased without execution of the privilege game can be realized, and thus there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine BK2 in the gaming machine BK1, wherein the advantage degree setting means is configured to be able to set the second advantageous degree while maintaining a gaming state in the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BK1, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the gaming state. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state and a second gaming state in which a player has a third degree of advantage lower than the first degree of advantage. A gaming machine BK3 characterized in that one gaming state can be set from among at least a plurality of gaming states.

  According to the gaming machine BK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the second discrimination result is obtained in the relatively advantageous first gaming state, so that the degree of advantage is further improved. There is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved in the case of the determination result of 2.

  In any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, it is more advantageous than the privilege game based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a third discrimination result different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result. A gaming machine BK4 comprising a specific game execution means for executing a specific game with a low degree.

  According to the gaming machine BK4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, the novel gaming ability in which the degree of advantage is increased based on the second determination result having the lowest advantage among the determination results. Can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK4, the determining means performs first determination based on satisfaction of a first determination condition, and performs determination based on satisfaction of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. And a second discriminating means for performing discrimination by the second discriminating means. The second discriminating means is more advantageous to the player than the first discriminating means when the specific discrimination result is obtained. The advantage game of a type with a high degree is configured to be easily executed, and the advantage level setting means determines the second determination result in the first game state by the first determination means. The gaming machine BK5, characterized in that it can be set to the second advantage based on the fact that

  According to the gaming machine BK5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BK1 to BK4, when the second determination result having the low advantage is low in the determination of the first determination means having the low degree of advantage, the degree of advantage is increased. Since novel game characteristics can be realized, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1 is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a slot machine, wherein the gaming machine Z2 is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the above-described gaming machines, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
S392 Dynamic display means S458 Part of determination means, part of first determination means S485 Part of determination means, part of first determination means S556 Advantage degree setting means S982 Dynamic display means S1058 Part of determination means Part of second determination means S1331 Part of determination means, part of second determination means S1593 Privilege game execution means S1992 Part of game state setting means S2902 Part of game state setting means S10853 Privilege game execution means

Claims (5)

Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a determination condition;
Privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the determining means being a specific result;
Game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the player's advantage becomes the first advantage based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition;
In the first game state, the first game state is maintained until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the result of the determination by the determination means being different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine comprising: an advantage level setting unit capable of setting an advantage level to a second advantage level higher than the first advantage level while maintaining the above. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means,
The advantage degree setting means sets the advantage degree to the second advantage degree while the identification information for indicating the deviation determination result is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: The discriminating means is a first discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a first discriminating condition, and a second discriminating means for executing discriminating based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. Determining means, and
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the determination by the second determination unit is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the determination by the first determination unit. 4.   4. The game according to claim 3, wherein the advantage degree setting means sets the second degree of advantage based on the result of the discrimination determined by the first determination means. Machine. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means,
The advantage degree setting means is configured to be capable of changing a length of a dynamic display period in dynamic display of the identification information for indicating a determination result of the first determination means,
The advantage degree setting unit dynamically displays the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination unit in the first game state until the disconnection determination result is obtained by the determination of the first determination unit. Is set to a length equal to or shorter than a predetermined first period, and based on the determination result of the departure by the first determination unit, the determination result of the first determination unit is determined. A dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating is set to a second period longer than the first period,
The dynamic display means includes a dynamic display period having a length equal to or less than the first period as a dynamic display of the identification information for indicating a determination result of the second determination unit at least in the first game state. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the gaming machine is configured to dynamically display the identification information.

Images